tender document index - Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

TENDER DOCUMENT INDEX 

Client: M/s. Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited Project Name: LOBS Quality Upgradation 

Tender No.: 18–3188–00–E.55–0003–A4/A Project No.: 18–3188 

Tender Title: Enquiry for Civil & Structural work Page 1 of 4 

Section 

No. 

Document Description Document No. Issue 

No. 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Index\18 3188 Tender Document Index Civil & Structural work.doc 

No. Of 

Pages 

Remarks 

1 Techno Commercial Vol. I of II 

1.0 Invitation of Bids 18-3188-99-01-R-01-0028-A4 -- 6 

1.1 Instructions to Bidders -- -- 9 

1.2 Proposal Forms (Form A to C) -- -- 5 

1.3 General Terms & Conditions of Contract -- -- 33 

1.4 Bank Guarantee Formats for Civil & Structural 

Work 

-- -- 12 

1.5 Integrity Pact -- -- 7 

2 Supplementary Documents Nil 

3 Form of Tender Vol. I of II 

3.1 Milestone Dates and Indicative Schedule -- -- 1 

3.2 Technical Compliance - Confirmation by 

Bidder 

-- -- 3 

4 Pricing Schedule Vol. I of II 

4.1 Preamble to Schedule of Rates & Quantities -- -- 1 

4.2 Schedule of Items & Rates for Civil & 

Structural work Substation, SRR & 

Compressor shed 

4.3 Schedule of Quantity for Electrical Items 

(SRR/OPFR Building) – Annexure I 

4.4 Schedule of Quantity for Electrical Items 

(LOBS Substation Building) – Annexure II 

18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 B 45 

-- -- 3 

-- -- 1 

4.5 Basic Price of Materials Direct Material Cost -- -- 2 

4.6 Basic Price Labour -- -- 1 

4.7 Percentage to cover Indirect charges -- -- 1 

5 Terms, Conditions and Procedures Vol. I of II 

5.1 Special Conditions of Contract 18-3188-00/Z-00-0004-A4 B 24 

5.2.1 Submission Form A Health, Safety, and 

Environment Requirements for Contractors 

Standard -- 24 

5.2.2 Submission Form B Proposal Exhibits Standard -- 14 + 10 

5.3 Standard Specification for Quality 

Requirements 

ZSS001 1 4





Section 

No. 


No. 

5.4 Standard Specification for using QC Check 

sheets 


No. Of 

Pages 

ZSS002 1 5 

5.5 Applicable QC Check sheets Standard -- 2 + 45 

5.6 Specification for Field HSE Activities 18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007 B 58 

Remarks 

6 Technical Documentation -- -- -- Vol. I of II 

6.1 Specification for earth work 18-3188-99-00-C-02-0013 0 7 

6.2 Specification for plain and reinforcement 

concrete 

18-3188-99-00-S-02-0014 

1 18 

6.3 Specification for ready mix concrete 18-3188-99-00-S-02-0015 0 7 

6.4 Specification for masonry and plastering 18-3188-99-00-A-02-0017 0 9 

6.5 Specification for construction of drainage and 

sewers 

18-3188-99-00-C-02-0018 

0 8 

6.6 Specification for Anti-Termite Treatment 18-3188-99-00-A-02-0019 0 4 

6.7 Specification for water proofing 18-3188-99-00-A-02-0020 0 3 

6.8 Specification for site grading 18-3188-99-00-C-02-0021 0 4 

6.9 Standard Specification for miscellaneous 

fabrication work 

6.10 Specification for doors, windows and 

ventilators 

18-3188-99-00-S-02-0022 

18-3188-99-00-A-02-0023 

0 5 

0 9 

6.11 Specification for concrete paving 18-3188-99-00-C-02-0025 0 7 

6.12 Specification for metal sheet roofing and 

cladding 

18-3188-99-00-S-02-0026 

0 6 

6.13 Specification for Chain link fencing 18-3188-99-02-C-01-0028 0 5 

6.14 Specification for floor finishes and wall tiling 18-3188-99-00-A-02-0030 0 9 

6.15 Specification for Structural steel work 18-3188-99-00-S-02-0032 0 17 

6.16 Specification for Painting 18-3188-99-00-V-02-0005 0 15 

6.17 Specifications for False Ceiling 18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 0 7 

6.18 Specifications for False Flooring 18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050 0 5 

6.19 Specifications for Plumbing, Sanitary Works 

and Drainage 

18-3188-99-02-C-02-0051 0 10 

6.17 Job Specification Electrical 18-3188-99-00-E-02-0103-A4 1 10 

6.18 Standard specification for Electrical 

Installation. 

3188-E SS-26 0 33





Section 

No. 


No. 


No. Of 

Pages 

Remarks 

7 Drawing Vol. II of II 

7.1 Civil Drawings 

7.1.1 SRR Sub Building Architecture Ground Floor 

Plan 

7.1.2 SRR Building Roof plan Section and 

Elevations 

7.1.3 Substation Building Architecture Plan & 

Section 

7.1.4 Finished Schedule – SRR and Sub station 

building 

7.1.5 Foundation layout and details of columns for 

Sub station 

18-3188-99-02-A-01-1005-A1 

18-3188-99-02-A-01-1006-A1 

18-3188-99-02-A-01-1009-A1 

18-3188-99-02-A-01-1015-A3 

18-3188-99-02-C-01-0185-A0 

E 1 

B 1 

B 1 

B 1 

B 1 

7.1.6 Sub Station Building Details of beam and slab 18-3188-99-02-C-01-0186-A0 B 1 

7.1.7 Sub Station Building Details of beam and slab 18-3188-99-02-C-01-0187-A0 B 1 

7.1.8 SRR and Operator Building Foundation layout 18-3188-99-02-C-01-0191-A0 B 1 

7.1.9 SRR and Operator Building Plinth Beam 

Layout 

18-3188-99-02-C-01-0192-A0 

B 1 

7.1.10 SRR and Operator Building Roof Beam Layout 18-3188-99-02-C-01-0193-A0 B 1 

7.1.11 Layout, Elevation and Sectional details for Air 

Compressor, Air Receiver and Air Dryer Unit 

Shed. 

7.2 Electrical Drawings 

18-3188-99-02-C-01-0156-A0 

A 1 

7.2.1 Miscellaneous Details Power 18-3188-99-00-E-01-0052-A3 0 60 

7.2.2 Miscellaneous Details Earthing 18-3188-99-00-E-01-0053-A3 0 40 

7.2.3 Miscellaneous Details Lighting. 18-3188-99-00-E-01-0054-A3 0 50 

7.2.4 Typical Single Line Diagrams – Lighting 

Distribution Board and Power Distribution 

Board – Index 

7.2.5 Single Line Diagram – Lighting Distribution 

Board Incomer Feeder 


Board Outgoing Feeder 


Board Lighting & Power Panel 


Board Power Distribution Board 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A4 A 1 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A3 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A4 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A4 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A4 

A 

A 

A 

A 

1 Sheet 2 of 7 



1 Sheet 5 of 7





Section 

No. 


No. 


Board Critical Lighting Panel 

18-3188-99-00-E-01-0113-A4 


A 

No. Of 

Pages 

Remarks 

1 Sheet 6 of 7

INVITATION OF BIDS 

FOR 

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS OF SATELLITE RACK ROOM, 

SUBSTATION & COMPRESSOR SHEDS 

AT 

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD 

MUMBAI REFINERY 

LOBS QUALITY UPGRADATION PROJECT 

National bidding 

DOCUMENT NO : 18-3188-99-01-R-01-0028-A4 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\Invitation of Bids_Civil Structural Works_1.doc

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPN LTD. 

(A Government of India Undertaking) 

(Refineries Division) 

JACOBS ENGINEERING INDIA PVT. LTD., 

MUMBAI 

INVITATION FOR CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORK OF SATELLITE RACK ROOM, SUBSTATION 

& COMPRESSOR SHED FOR LUBE OIL BASE STOCK (LOBS) QUALITY UPGRADATION 

PROJECT AT MUMBAI REFINERY, MAHARASHTRA (INDIA) 

(National Competitive bidding) 

1. M/s. Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) are implementing Lube Oil Base 

Stock (LOBS) Quality Upgradation Facilities consisting of Process Units, Offsites, and 

Utilities at their existing Refinery at Mumbai, in the State of Maharashtra (India) located 

within the City of Mumbai. 

2. For execution of this project M/s.Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited (JACOBS), 

Mumbai, have been retained as the Project Management Consultant (PMC). JACOBS, on 

behalf of HPCL, hereby invite bids for Civil & Structural Work for Satellite Rack Room, 

Substation & Compressor Sheds, including Electrical Lighting works for Satellite Rack 

Room and Lighting Protection of Substation, meeting qualification criteria of bidders as 

specified in clause 3.0. 

3. Brief scope of work 

It is proposed to construct the following buildings/structures: 

Sl. no. Description 

1 Satellite Rack Room (SRR) and Operator Building 

2 Electrical Substation 

3 Air Compressor Sheds 

The brief scope of work of the contractor covers supply of all tools, tackles, manpower, 

supervision, materials (consumable/non-consumable), transportation, loading/unloading, 

to execute the job including earthworks in excavation and backfilling in all types of soil & 

rocks, filling, disposal of surplus earth/debris to out of refinery premises, PCC/RCC in all 

types of foundations & super structure, blast proofing RCC walls, Brick masonry in 

foundations & superstructures, flooring, waterproofing, painting, plumbing, drainage works 

etc. including supply, fabrication and erection of structural steel works and Electrical works 

in SRR building, and all other jobs, complete as per the tender document for all the above 

mentioned buildings/ structures. Detailed scope of work is elaborated in tender document. 

The scaffolding and shuttering works shall be done using metallic scaffolding and metallic 

shuttering plates only during the execution of entire job. 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\Invitation of Bids_Civil Structural Works_1.doc Page 2 of 6





MUMBAI 





All RCC works shall be done using approved mix of Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) brought 

from out of refinery premises from approved vendors. 

Contractor to start the work at all the fronts simultaneously, as the completion period for 

each building/structure is from the date of LOI/PO or handing over of site to contractor, 

which ever is later. 

Contractor shall make his own arrangement for construction power, transportation of all 

required material from his stores, fabrication shop out side the Refinery to construction 

site. 

Contractor shall not be provided with any space for his storage/ ware house and 

fabrication inside HPCL area. He shall carry out prefabrication of all the parts outside 

HPCL. Concrete mixing shall not be allowed in side the refinery premise. 

HSE Requirement 

Contractor to strictly comply with all the prevailing safety and security rules of refinery 

during the execution of job and be fully aware of the safety requirement, compliances as 

indicated in the tender. Contractor shall have exclusive set up for HSE. 

4. QUALIFICATION CRITERIA 

Technical Qualification Criteria/ Experience: 

• The bidders shall have experience of having successfully completed similar 

building/shed work(s) during last seven years, ending last day of month previous to the 

one in which bids are invited, should be either of the following : 

a. Three similar works costing not less than Rs. 2.60 Crores each. (Rupees Two 

Crores Sixty Lakhs) 

b. Two similar works costing not less than Rs. 3.25 Crores each. (Rupees Three 

Crores Twenty Five Lakhs) 

c. One similar work costing not less than Rs. 5.20 Crores. (Rupees Five Crores 

Twenty Lakhs) 






MUMBAI 





• The bidder also must have done minimum 1000 m 3 of concrete work in any of the 

building/shed similar works during last 7 years. 

Financial Criteria : 

• Annual Turnover: Annual turnover of the bidder shall not be less than Rs. 7 Crores, 

as per the audited annual financial results in any one of the last three preceding 

audited financial years. 

• Net Worth: Net worth of the bidder as per the latest audited annual financial results 

shall be positive. However, Central Public Sector Enterprises are exempted from this 

requirement. 

Note : Both the above criteria (Technical & Financial) to be met for qualifications of bidders. 

5. Earnest Money Deposit (EMD)/ Bid Security: 

Bids must be accompanied with Earnest Money Deposit/Bid security of Rs. 12 Lakhs. Bids 

not accompanied with requisite EMD shall be rejected. EMD shall be in favour of 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, payable at Mumbai in form of crossed demand 

draft or Bank Guarantee on non-judicial stamp paper of value not less than Rs. 100 from 

nationalized Indian bank ( not cooperative bank) , in prescribed Performa, valid for four 

months plus two months claim period from due date of submission. 

Central Public Sector Enterprises are exempted from furnishing EMD, subject to 

declaration to that effect. 

6. Time for Completion: 

Time schedule for the contract shall be 11 months from date of Letter of Intent. The 

liquidated damages shall be applicable after 11 months, for reasons attributable to 

contractor. However, the successful bidder shall confirm to deploy adequate resources 

and plan to complete the Substation building in 10 months and compressor sheds in 6 

months. 






MUMBAI 





7. Salient features of bidding document are as follows: 

Tender No 

: 

18-3188-00-E550003-A 

Name of Work : Civil & Structural Work for SRR, Substation & Compressor 

Shed for LOBS Quality Upgradation project at HPCL Mumbai 

Refinery 

Cost of Tender 

Document 

: 

Rs. 5,000 (by way of Demand draft in favour of “Hindustan 

Petroleum Corporation Ltd.” Payable at Mumbai on 

Nationalized Bank only and not cooperative bank.) 

Sale Period : Starting from 11.10.2007 to 20.11.2007 

Contact Person : Mr. S. B. Nayan, E.D.-Procurement; Jacobs, 

Tel No. : 91.22.67562000, 

Fax No.: 91.22.27573049 

Date of Submission of 

Tender Document 

: 21.11.2007 (upto 14.00 hours) 

8. Complete set of bidding document (non-transferable) can be purchased on any working 

day (Monday to Friday) from Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited, H&G House, 

Sector 11, Plot No. 12, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai – 400 614 (India), upon payment of 

cost of bidding document in form of crossed demand draft from any Indian nationalized 

bank, in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, payable at Mumbai. 

9. Consortium / Joint venture bids are not acceptable. 

10. Bidder should not be under liquidation, court receivership or similar proceedings 






MUMBAI 





11. HPCL/Jacobs shall not be responsible for any expenses incurred by bidders in connection 

with the preparation & delivery of their bids, site visits and other expense incurred during 

bidding process. 

12. HPCL/Jacobs shall allow purchase preference to Indian Central Govt. Public Sector 

undertaking/Enterprises under existing policies of Govt. of India. 

13. Fax/Email bids shall not be accepted. 

14. Bidders shall have to submit a duly signed and stamped copy of “Integrity pact” on plain 

paper along with their bid on the format enclosed with bidding document. Bids submitted 

by bidders without a signed & stamped Integrity pact will be rejected. 

15. SITE VISIT 

Contractors intending to visit site may please intimate the names of the persons 

(maximum 2) to Jacobs (PMC) on or before 22.10.2007, so that visit can be arranged on a 

suitable date. 

16. Prospective bidder shall submit their sealed bids to the Executive Director - 

Procurement, Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited, H&G House, Sector 11, Plot 

No. 12, CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai – 400 614 (India) latest by 1400 hours (IST) on 

21.11.2007. 

17. Bids received after due date and time shall be rejected and representative of such bidders 

shall not be allowed to attend the bid opening. 

18. HPCL / JACOBS reserve the right to reject any or all bids at their sole discretion without 

assigning any reason whatsoever. 

S.B. NAYAN 

Executive Director – Procurement 

Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited 

NAVI MUMBAI. 


HPCL – Mumbai Refinery INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 

WORK 

18-3188 Page 2 of 9 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1_itb_Civil Structural Work.doc 

INDEX 

1. INTRODUCTION 

2. OWNER’S CONSULTANT 

3. COST OF BIDDING 

4. SITE LOCATION 

5. TENDER DOCUMENTS 

6. CLARIFICATION OF TENDER DOCUMENT 

7. AMENDMENT OF TENDER DOCUMENTS 

8. PREPARATION/ SUBMISSION OF THE TENDER 

9. SCHEDULE OF ITEMS & RATES 

10. PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS 

11. FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID 

12. SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS 

13. DATE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS 

14. ALL PAGES TO BE INITIALLED 

15. PRICES TO BE IN FIGURES AND WORDS 

16. CORRECTIONS AND ERASURES 

17. LATE BIDS 

18. OPENING OF BIDS BY OWNER/CONSULTANT 

19. CLARIFICATION OF BIDS 

20. TECHNO-COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION OF BIDS 

21. WAIVER OF DEVIATION AND CONDITIONS 

22. COMPLETE SCOPE OF SUPPLIES / WORK 

23. OPENING OF PRICE BIDS 

24. EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS 

25. CONTACTING OWNER / CONSULTANT 

26. OWNER’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT/REJECT BIDS 

27. NOTIFICATION OF AWARD 

28. PURCHASE ORDER

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 

WORK 

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS HPCL – Mumbai Refinery 

Page 3 of 9 18 - 3188 

1.0 INTRODUCTION 

1.1 Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) (hereafter referred as (‘OWNER’) intends to 

set up a Lube Oil Base Stock (LOBS) Quality Upgradation Project of 200,000 MTPA consisting 

of process units, offsites and utilities at the Mumbai Refinery. 

1.2 

For implementation of the above project, the Owner is inviting sealed Bids, under single stage 

two Bid System, for the entire supplies and work covered under the Tender Documents 

(hereinafter for the purpose of these instructions collectively referred to as the ‘SUPPLY) from 

Bidders. 

1.3 The Completion schedule shall be strictly as per section titled “Time for Completion” as per 

clause No. 6.0 of Invitation of Bids. All Bids shall be completed and returned in accordance with 

and within the time provided in these Instructions to Bidders. 

2.0 OWNER’S CONSULTANT 

2.1 

For this Project, the Owner has appointed M/s. Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited 

(JACOBS) as the Engineering, Procurement and Construction Management (EPCM) 

(hereinafter referred to as the ‘Consultant’ of the Owner) involved in the Bidding process and 

they will be performing various actions in relation to the Bidding process and in the evaluation of 

Bids for and on behalf of the Owner. “Consultant” as referred to in these Instructions to Bidders 

or other parts of Tender Document is only intended to clarify to the Bidder the Owner’s intention 

that operations involved in the bidding process, including the evaluation of Bids, shall be 

conducted by the Owner through Consultant. 

3.0 COST OF BIDDING 

3.1 

The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with preparation and delivery of its Bids including 

costs and expenses related to visit to site(s), and the OWNER / CONSULTANT shall in no case 

be responsible or liable for those costs regardless of the outcome of the Bidding process. 

4.0 SITE LOCATION 

4.1 Site Location 

The site is located within Mumbai Refinery, which is situated within the City of Mumbai in 

Maharashtra State, India. 

5.0 TENDER DOCUMENTS 

5.1 

The Bidder is expected to examine the Tender Documents, including all instructions, forms, 

terms, specifications, drawings and other documents and requirements of the Tender 

Document. Failure to furnish all information required by the Tender Document or submission of 

a Bid not substantially responsive to the Tender Document in every respect shall result in the 

rejection of the Bid. 

5.2 Any amendment issued in accordance with clause 7.0 below shall also form part of the Bid 

Document. 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1_itb_Civil Structural Work.doc


WORK 

18-3188 Page 4 of 9 

6.0 CLARIFICATION OF TENDER DOCUMENT 

6.1 Bidder shall examine the Tender Documents thoroughly. Bidder requiring any clarifications on 

the Tender Document may notify the Owner and Consultant in writing not later than 7 working 

days before due date (not on Saturday/ Sunday) as per proposal form, FORM-C enclosed in the 

Tender Documents along with the Tender. Consultant shall issue appropriate clarification or 

amendment, if required. Failure of Bidder to comply with the aforesaid shall not excuse the 

Bidders from performing the services in accordance with the Agreement and, if subsequently 

awarded, the Purchase Order. 

7.0 AMENDMENT OF TENDER DOCUMENTS 

7.1 

At any time prior to the date for submission of Bids as well as upto priced Bid opening, the 

OWNER/CONSULTANT may, for any reason whether at its own initiative or in response to a 

clarification requested by prospective Bidders, modify the Tender Document by amendment. 

7.2 In order to provide time to prospective Bidders to take into account such amendment in 

preparing their Bids, OWNER/CONSULTANT may, at its discretion, extend the date for the 

submission of Bids. 

8.0 PREPARATION / SUBMISSION OF TENDER 

8.1 Bidder is required to make a proposal in a format as outlined below in order to achieve the 

objective of maintaining uniform proposal structure from all the Bidders. 

8.2 The Bid shall be submitted in Two parts viz. PART-A & PART-B in two separate sealed 

envelopes with due marking on the envelopes. The sealed envelopes of un-priced and 

priced part shall be put in another envelope and sealed before submission 

8.2.1 Priced and unpriced forms should be identical in all respects except that the price columns 

shall be kept blank in the unpriced Bids. 

8.2.2 All the envelopes shall be superscribed as follows: 

PART – A Techno-commercial / Unpriced Bid 

PART – B Priced Bid 

8.2.3 Techno-commercial / Unpirced Bid (PART-A) shall be submitted in 1 original and 4 copies (5 

sets in all) and shall contain the following documents : 

i. Letter of submission. 

ii Declaration as per proposal FORM-A duly signed & stamped by the Bidder in token of 

having received and read all volumes of the technical documents and having accepted 

and considered the same in preparing and submitting the Bid. 

iii List of Deviations (if any) to the commercial and technical Bid documents as per 

proposal FORM –B, technical deviations must be given separately for each discipline. 

iv Literature / Pamphlets (if applicable). 



WORK 


Page 5 of 9 18 - 3188 

v Section 3.1 – Time Schedule 

Section 3.2 – Technical Confirmation Requirements 

(As per Tender/ Contract Document Index) 

vi Section 5.2.1 – Submission Form A Health Safety and Environment Requirements for 

Contractors (As per Tender/ Contract Document Index) 

Section 5.2.2 - Submission Form B Proposal Exhibits 

(As per Tender/ Contract Document Index) 

8.2.4 Part B (Priced Bid) shall be submitted in 1 original and 1 copy (2 sets in all) and shall consist 

of : 

a) Copy of cover letter 

b) Price schedule as per Forms given in the Bid documents duly completed in all respects. 

8.3 Waiver of deviations and conditions (if any) as per proposal FORM-C, to be submitted before the 

opening of the priced Bid. 

8.4 Part B shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope duly signed and stamped on each page 

superscribing on the sealed envelope “Price- Do not Open”. This part shall not contain any condition 

whatsoever failing which the Bids shall be liable for rejection. In case of any correction, the Bidder 

shall put his signature and his stamp. Eraser fluid will not be allowed for making any correction. 

8.5 The Bid requirements are explicitly stated in the Tender Document. Bidder is required to study 

these requirements in detail and make a proposal in an outline as defined above completely 

meeting these requirements. The offer must be complete in all respects, leaving no scope for 

ambiguity. It is in the interest of Bidder to submit complete & comprehensive proposal leaving no 

scope for OWNER/CONSULTANT to raise or ask for any further questions or clarifications, with a 

view that the proposal may be evaluated only on the basis of what has been submitted by the 

Bidder in the first instance in order to adhere to a very strict project schedule. 

8.6 The Bids shall be compiled in the form of specific section-wise responses to each section of the 

Tender Document, in order to establish that the Bids are adequately responsive. 

8.7 For the purpose of these documents the terms “Bid” and “tender”, “Bidding” and “tendering” and 

other similar expressions are synonymous. 

9.0 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS & RATES 

9.1 This is an item rate tender and quantities are tentative. Bidders to fill in ‘Schedule of Items & 

Rates’ given in the tender. 

10.0 PERIOD OF VALIDITY OF BIDS 

10.1 Bids shall remain valid for 120 (One Hundred Twenty) days after the deadline for Bid submission. 

A Bid valid for a shorter period may be rejected by the OWNER/ CONSULTANT as nonresponsive. 

10.2 Notwithstanding the above, the OWNER/ CONSULTANT may solicit the Bidder’s consent to an 

extension of the period of Bid validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in 

writing (by fax). 



WORK 

18-3188 Page 6 of 9 

10.3 A Bidder accepting the request for extension shall not be permitted to modify its Bid because of 

the extension, unless specifically invited to do so. 

11.0 FORMAT AND SIGNING OF BID 

11.1 The original Bid Form together with the Appendix and accompanying documents, clearly marked 

“Original”, plus 4 (Four) copies (5 copies in all), must be received by the Consultant by the date, 

time and place specified. In the event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the 

original shall govern. 

11.2 The original and all copies of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed 

by the Bidder or a person or persons duly authorised to sign on behalf of the Bidder. Such 

authorization shall be indicated by written Power of Attorney accompanying the Bid. All pages of 

the Bid, except for unamended printed literature, shall be initialled by the person signing the Bid. 

The name and position held by each person signing must be typed or printed below the 

Signature. 

11.3 The Bid shall contain no interlineations, erasures or overwriting except as necessary to correct 

errors made by the Bidder, in which case such corrections shall be initialled by the person or 

persons signing the Bid 

12.0 SEALING AND MARKING OF BIDS 

12.1 The Bidder shall seal the original and copies of “PART-A - Techno-commercial Unpriced” & 

“PART-B – Priced” of the Bid in separate inner envelopes duly marking the envelopes ‘Original” 

or ‘Copy’, as applicable. The sealed envelopes of PART- A & PART- B’’ shall also be put in 

another envelope and sealed and marked to : 

The Executive Director - Procurement 

Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited 

H&G House, Plot No. 12, Sector 11, 

CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai – 400 614. 

INDIA. 

Telephone No. : 91.22.6756 2000 

Fax No. : 91.22.2757 3049 

12.2 All the two parts will bear the name of works ‘(the Project name)’, the Tender Document No., 

Bidder’s name and address and the words ‘DO NOT OPEN BEFORE’ (date and time of opening 

of Bid as indicated in Invitation of Bids). The date and time of submission for all the two parts 

shall be same as mentioned in the Invitation of Bids. 

12.3 The outer envelope for all the two parts shall indicate the name and address of the Bidder to 

enable the Bid to be returned unopened in case it is declared to have been received ‘Late’. 

13.0 DATE FOR SUBMISSION OF BIDS 

13.1 The Original Bid, together with required copies must be received by the Consultant on or before 

the date, time and venue as specified in Invitation of Bids. 



WORK 


Page 7 of 9 18 - 3188 

13.2 The OWNER/ CONSULTANT may, at its discretion, extend the date for the submission of Bids by 

amending the Tender Documents, in which case all rights and obligations of the OWNER/ 

CONSULTANT and Bidders previously subject to the date of submission of Bids, will thereafter be 

subject to the date, as extended. 

14.0 ALL PAGES TO BE INITIALLED 

14.1 All signatures in Bids shall be dated and shall bear a seal of the Bidders. In addition all pages of 

Bids shall be initialled at lower right hand corner by the Bidder or by a person holding power of 

attorney authorising him to sign on behalf of the Bidder before the submission of Bids. 

14.2 The Bidder shall sign and affix its seal on all pages of the priced Bid. 

15.0 PRICES TO BE IN FIGURES AND WORDS 

15.1 The Bidder shall fill the Schedule of Lumpsum Prices both in figures as well as in words in the 

Price Schedule forming part of the Tender Documents, in such a way that interpolation is not 

possible. The tendered amount for the work shall be entered in the price schedule and duly 

signed by the Bidder. 

15.2 When there is a difference between the prices in figures and words, the amount which is lower of 

the two shall prevail. 

16.0 CORRECTIONS AND ERASURES 

16.1 All corrections and alterations in the Tender shall be signed in full by the Bidder with date. No 

erasures or overwriting and application of white fluid are permissible. 

17.0 LATE BIDS 

17.1 Any Tender received by CONSULTANT after the date and time for submission of Bids (including 

any extension(s) hereof) will be declared “Late” and rejected and returned unopened to the 

Bidder. 

18.0 OPENING OF BIDS BY OWNER/CONSULTANT 

18.1 Bids will be opened in the presence of the attending Bidders. 

18.2 The envelope containing Unpriced Technical Bid Part –A shall be opened in the presence of the 

Bidders on last day of submission of bids. Bidders may send their authorised person only to attend 

the Bid opening with an authority letter. 

19.0 CLARIFICATION OF BIDS 

19.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation and comparison of Bids, the OWNER/CONSULTANT may, 

at its discretion, ask the Bidder for a clarification of its Bid. All responses to request for clarification 

shall be in writing, and no change in the price or substance of the Bid shall be permitted unless 

specifically sought by Owner / Consultant. 



WORK 

18-3188 Page 8 of 9 

20.0 TECHNO-COMMERCIAL EXAMINATION OF BIDS 

20.1 The CONSULTANT will examine the Bids to determine whether they are complete, whether 

required securities have been furnished, whether the documents have been properly signed, and 

whether the Bids are generally in order. 

20.2 The Owner/Consultant shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Bidder has submitted 

responsive Bid and is qualified to perform satisfactorily the work and such determination shall not 

be open to question. 

20.3 The determination shall also take into account the Bidder’s financial and technical capabilities, as 

well as such other qualifications as the Owner/Consultant deem necessary and appropriate. 

21.0 WAIVER OF DEVIATIONS AND CONDITIONS 

21.1 Waiver of deviations and conditions (if any) as per Proposal FORM – C, should be submitted by 

the Bidders before the opening of the Priced Bid failing which the Priced Bid of concerned Bidder 

is liable for rejection. 

22.0 COMPLETE SCOPE OF SUPPLIES 

22.1 The complete scope of supplies / services has been defined in the Tender Document. Only 

those Bidders who take complete responsibility for the work and who quoted for the complete 

scope of supplies / services as contained in the Tender document shall be considered for further 

evaluation. 

23.0 OPENING OF PRICE BIDS 

23.1 Substantially responsive Bidders will be shortlisted by the OWNER/CONSULTANT for opening of 

price part of their Bid. Date, time and opening of their price Bid shall be informed to the shortlisted 

Bidders subsequently. 

23.2 The price Bids of the technically and commercially acceptable Bidders shall be opened in the 

presence of Bidder’s representative, who choose to attend, on the date and time to be intimated. 

The Bidder’s name, Bid price, discount if any, and such other details as the OWNER / 

CONSULTANT at its discretion may consider appropriate, shall be announced at the opening of 

price Bids. 

24.0 EVALUATION AND COMPARISON OF BIDS 

24.1 In evaluating the Tender, the OWNER / CONSULTANT will determine for each bid the evaluated 

price by adding the prices for following : 

a) Rates as quoted as per ‘Schedule of Rates & Quantities’’ and the required quantities 

24.2 Purchase Preference shall be applicable as per Government of India guidelines. 

24.3 Financial Loading, if any, shall be done considering rate of interest as 15% per annum. 



WORK 


Page 9 of 9 18 - 3188 

25.0 CONTACTING OWNER/CONSULTANT 

25.1 No Bidder shall contact the OWNER/CONSULTANT on any matter relating to its Bid from the 

time of Bid opening to the time, the Purchase Order is awarded, unless requested to in writing. 

Any effort by a Bidder to influence the OWNER/CONSULTANT in the Owner’s decisions in 

respect of Bid evaluation or Purchase Order award will result in the rejection of that Bidder’s bid. 

26.0 OWNER’S RIGHT TO ACCEPT/REJECT BIDS 

26.1 The OWNER reserves the right to accept or reject any Tender and to annul the Bidding process in 

toto and reject all Bids at any time prior to award of Contract without thereby incurring any liability to 

the affected Bidder(s) or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder(s) of the grounds of OWNER’S 

action. 

26.2 It is observed that many Bidders indulge in trading in contracts by entering into undisclosed backto-back 

arrangements for the whole or a substantial portion of a contractor’s obligations under 

the contract. Consequently, if a Bidder proposes to enter into any such arrangements upon a 

successful award of work or has in place any such arrangements which will become operative 

upon the award of work, the Bidder must make complete disclosure of such arrangement or 

proposed arrangement in its proposal, and all provisions applicable to sub-contractor (s) in terms 

of Tender Documents shall apply to such arrangements. Acceptance or otherwise of such 

arrangement will be under the discretion of the owner. 

26.3 If the existence of such an undisclosed arrangement is reasonably apprehended by the 

OWNER/CONSULTANT in the case of a Bidder, the OWNER may reject such Bidder’s bid as not 

responsive. 

26.4 If such an undisclosed arrangement is discovered after the award of work, such arrangement(s) 

shall be deemed to constitute an assignment of contract and a ground of termination pursuant to 

the provisions of termination under the General Purchase Conditions. 

27.0 NOTIFICATION OF AWARD 

27.1 The Owner will notify the successful Bidder in writing by letter and/or by fax of acceptance that their 

Bid has been accepted. The notification of award will constitute the formation of a Contract. 

28.0 PURCHASE ORDER 

28.1 Purchase Order shall be prepared after the notification of acceptance of Bid. The Tender 

Documents and addendum(s) and any modifications thereto and/or therefrom agreed by the 

OWNER shall be considered as order. 

28.2 A statement of agreed variations shall be prepared based on the finally agreed deviations if any, to 

the Tender Documents and all other correspondences forming part of the offer, prior to issue of 

notification of acceptance of Bid, shall be treated as null & void. 


01_2_proposal_form_Civil Stru work 

INDEX OF PROPOSAL FORMS 

S. NO. FORMAT NO. DESCRIPTION 

1. FORM A DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER 

2. FORM B EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS 

3. FORM C FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER OF CONDITIONS / DEVIATIONS

BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK : 

TENDER NO : 


DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER 

FORM – A 

We _______________________ (Name of the Bidder) hereby represent that we have gone through and 

understood the Tender Documents and our Bid has been prepared accordingly in compliance with the 

requirements stipulated in the said documents. 

We are submitting complete Tender Documents marked “Original” duly signed and stamped on each 

page in token of our acceptance as part of our Bid along with one copy of the CDs duly signed and the 

Master Index duly signed and stamped on each page. We undertake that said Tender documents shall 

be deemed to form part our Bid and in the event of award of work to us, all the parts shall be considered 

for constitution of Purchase Order. 

PLACE: ____________________ 

DATE: ____________________ 

SIGNED FOR AND ON BEHALF OF 

_______________________________ 

(NAME OF BIDDER) 

NOTE: This declaration should be signed by the Bidder’s representative who is signing the Bid.


TENDER NO : 

S. TENDER DOCUMENT REFERENCE 

NO. PART NO. PAGE NO. CLAUSE 

NO. 


EXCEPTIONS AND DEVIATIONS 

SUBJECT DEVIATION 

FORM – B 

NOTE: 1. If unavoidable, Bidder may stipulate deviations to the requirements of the Bid 

document only in this format 

2. Bidder shall furnish Technical and commercial deviations, if any, separately. 

3. Any deviations stated elsewhere in the bid shall not be taken into account and 

may render the bid non-responsive and liable to be rejected. 

STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER : ___________________________ 

NAME OF BIDDER : ___________________________ 

DATE :

FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER OF CONDITIONS / DEVIATIONS 

ON COMPANY LETTER HEAD 


TENDER NO : 


FORM – C 

We _________________(Name of the Bidder) hereby agree to fully comply with, abide and accept 

without variation, deviation or reservation all technical, commercial and other conditions whatsoever of 

the Bidding documents and all Addenda/ Corrigenda/ Amendments/ Clarifications issued by the 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited. 

We further hereby waive, withdraw and abandon any and all deviations, variations, objections or 

reservations whatsoever hereto set out, given or indicated in our offer, clarifications, correspondence, 

communications or otherwise with a view that the final price bid submitted may be treated to conform in 

all respects, with the terms and conditions of the said Tender documents including all Addenda/ 

Corrigenda/ Amendments. 

We further hereby confirm that the currencies of price quoted in the price bid are as per the provisions 

of the Bidding documents and there is no deviation to the provisions in the final price bid. 

** The letter of Waiver must be signed by the person(s) authorized to sign. 

** For and on behalf of 

Authorised signatory

HPCL - Mumbai GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT CIVIL & 

STRUCTURAL WORK 

18-3188 Page 2 of 33 

1 PRELIMINARY 

1.1 This is a Contract for execution of ___________________________________ work at 

______________________. (please fill up the blanks) 

1.2 The tenderer for the above mentioned item of work is__________________________. 

(please give the name and address of the Tenderer) 

1.3 The terms and conditions mentioned hereunder are the terms and conditions of the 

Contract for the execution of the work mentioned under item 1.1 above. 

1.4 It is the clear understanding between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited and the 

tenderer _______________________________________________________ that 

(name and address of the tenderer) in case the tender of 

___________________________________________________________________ is 

(name and address of the tenderer) accepted by Hindustan Petroleum 

Corporation Limited and an intimation to that effect is so issued and also a Purchase 

Order is placed with 

_____________________________________________________________ 

(name and address of the tenderer) this document will be termed as a Contract 

between the parties and terms and conditions hereunder would govern the parties 

Interest. 

1.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents: All documents forming part of the Contract are to 

be taken mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or 

omission in the contract, the decision of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge 

shall be the final and the contractor shall abide by the decision. The decision shall not be 

arbitrable. Works shown upon the drawings but not mentioned in the specification or 

described in the specifications without being shown on the drawings shall nevertheless 

be deemed to be included in the same manner as if they are shown in the drawings and 

described in the specifications. 

1.6 Special conditions of Contract : The special conditions of contract, if any provided and 

whenever and wherever referred to shall be read in conjunction with General Terms and 

Conditions of contract, specifications, drawings, and any other documents forming part 

of this contract wherever the context so requires. Notwithstanding the subdivision of the 

documents into separate sections, parts volumes, every section, part or volume shall be 

deemed to be supplementary or complementary to each other and shall be read in whole. 

In case of any misunderstanding arising the same shall be referred to decision of the 

Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and their decision shall be final and binding 

and the decision shall not be arbitrable. 

It is the clear understanding that wherever it is mentioned that the Contractor shall 

do/perform a work and/or provide facilities for the performance of the work, the doing or 

the performance or the providing of the facilities is at the cost and expenses of the work 

not liable to be paid or reimbursed by the Owner. 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1_gen_tc.doc


WORK 

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT HPCL - Mumbai 

Page 3 of 33 18 - 3188 

2. DEFINITIONS 

In this contract unless otherwise specifically provided or defined and unless a contrary 

intention appears from the contract the following words and expressions are used in the 

following meanings; 

2.1 The term "Agreement" wherever appearing in this document shall be read as "Contract". 

2.2 The "Authority" for the purpose of this Contract shall be the Chairman and Managing 

Director or any other person so appointed or authorised. 

2.3 The "Chairman and Managing Director" shall mean the Chairman and Managing 

Director of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED or any person so 

appointed, nominated or designated and holding the office of Chairman & Managing 

Director. 

2.4 The "Change Order" means an order given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or by 

Owner to effect additions to or deletion from or alterations into the Work. 

2.5 The "Construction Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever 

nature for the use in or for the execution, completion, operation or maintenance of the 

work except those intended to form part of the Permanent Work. 

2.6 The "Contract" between the Owner and the Contractor shall mean and include all 

documents like enquiry, tender submitted by the contractor and the purchase order issued 

by the owner and other documents connected with the issue of the purchase order and 

orders, instruction, drawings, change orders, directions issued by the Owner/Engineer-in- 

Charge/Site-in-Charge for the execution, completion and commissioning of the works 

and the period of contract mentioned in the Contract including such periods of time 

extensions as may be granted by the owner at the request of the contractor and such 

period of time for which the work is continued by the contractor for purposes of 

completion of the work. 

2.7 "The Contractor" means the person or the persons, firm or Company whose tender has 

been accepted by the Owner and includes the Contractor's legal heirs, representative, 

successor(s) and permitted assignees. 

2.8 The "Drawings" shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any 

modifications approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other drawings as 

may, from time to time, be furnished or approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

2.9 The "Engineer-in-Charge or Site-in-Charge" shall mean the person appointed or 

designated as such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly authorised by 

the owner to act for and on its behalf. 




18-3188 Page 4 of 33 

2.10 "The Owner" means the HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED 

incorporated in India having its Registered office at PETROLEUM HOUSE, 17, 

JAMSHEDJI TATA ROAD, BOMBAY - 400020 and Marketing office at 

____________________________________________ or their successors or assignees. 

2.11 The "Permanent Work" means and includes works which form a part of the work to be 

handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of the contract. 

2.12 The "Project Manager" shall mean the Project Manager of HINDUSTAN 

PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED, or any person so appointed, nominated 

or designated. 

2.13 The "Site" means the land on which the work is to be executed or carried out and such 

other place(s) for purpose of performing the Contract. 

2.14 The "Specifications " shall mean the various technical and other specifications attached 

and referred to in the tender documents. It shall also include the latest editions, including 

all addenda/corrigenda or relevant Indian Standard Specifications and Bureau Of Indian 

Standards. 

2.15 The "Sub-Contractor" means any person or firm or Company (other than the Contractor) 

to whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor with the prior written 

consent of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge and their legal heirs, 

representatives, successors and permitted assignees of such person, firm or Company. 

2.16 The "Temporary Work" means and includes all such works which are a part of the 

contract for execution of the permanent work but does not form part of the permanent 

work confirming to practices, procedures applicable rules and regulations relevant in that 

behalf. 

2.17 The "Tender" means the document submitted by a person or authority for carrying out 

the work and the Tenderer means a person or authority who submits the tender offering 

to carry out the work as per the terms and conditions. 

2.18 The "Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract or part 

thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substituted 

works as maybe required for the purposes of completion of the work contemplated under 

the Contract. 

3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER 

3.1 Before submitting the Tender, the Tenderer shall at their own cost and expenses visit the 

site, examine and satisfy as to the nature of the existing roads, means of 

communications, the character of the soil, state of land and of the excavations, the 

correct dimensions of the work facilities for procuring various construction and other 

material and their availability, and shall obtain information on all matters and conditions 

as they may feel necessary for the execution of the works as intended by the Owners and 



WORK 


Page 5 of 33 18 - 3188 

shall also satisfy of the availability of suitable water for construction of civil works and 

for drinking purpose and power required for fabrication work etc. Tenderer, whose 

tender may be accepted and with whom the Contract is entered into shall not be eligible 

and be able to make any claim on any of the said counts in what so ever manner for what 

so ever reasons at any point of time and such a claim shall not be raised as a dispute and 

shall not be arbitrable. 

3.2 The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied fully before tendering as to the 

correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices quoted 

in the schedule of quantities which rates and prices shall except as otherwise provided 

cover all his obligations under the contract. 

3.3 It must be clearly understood that the whole of the conditions and specifications are 

intended to be strictly enforced and that no work will be considered as extra work and 

allowed and paid for unless they are clearly outside the scope, spirit, meaning of the 

Contract and intent of the Owner and have been so ordered in writing by Owner and/or 

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge, whose decision shall be final and binding. 

3.4 Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check and satisfy all drawings and materials 

to be procured and the schedule of quantities by obtaining clarification from the Owner 

on all the items as may be desired by the Tenderer. No claim for any alleged loss or 

compensation will be entertained on this account, after submission of Tender by the 

Tenderer/ Contractor and such a claim shall not be arbitrable. 

3.5 No escalation in the Tender rates will be permitted throughout the period of contract or 

the period of completion of the job whichever is later on account of any variation in 

prices of materials or cost of labour or due to any other reasons. Claims on account of 

escalation shall not be arbitrable. 

3.6 The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of rates 

of the contract will be applicable for variations upto plus or minus 25% of the contract 

value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the 

contract value, including variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, 

alterations, additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned above. Quantities 

etc. mentioned and accepted in the joint measurement sheets shall alone be final and 

binding on the parties. 

3.7 Owner reserve their right to award the contract to any tenderer and their decision in this 

regard shall be final. They also reserve their right to reject any or all tenders received. No 

disputes could be raised by any tenderer(s) whose tender has been rejected. 

3.8 The Rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include Costs and expenses on all counts viz. 

cost of materials, transportation of machine(s), tools, equipment, labour, power, 

Administration charges, price escalation, profits, etc. except to the extent of the cost of 

material(s), if any, agreed to be supplied by Owner and mentioned specifically in that 

regard in condition of Contract, in which case, the cost of such material if taken for 

preparation of the Contractor's Bill(s) shall be deducted before making payment of the 




18-3188 Page 6 of 33 

Bill(s) of the Contractor. The description given in the schedule of quantities shall unless 

otherwise stated be held to include wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying 

in and return of empties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other 

expenses necessary in and for the full and complete execution and completion of works 

and in accordance with good practice and recognised principles in that regard. 

3.9 Employees of the State and Central Govt. and employees of the Public Sector 

Undertakings, including retired employees are covered under their respective service 

conditions/rules in regard to their submitting the tender. All such persons should ensure 

compliance to the respective/ applicable conditions, rules etc. Any person not complying 

with those rules etc. but submitting the tender in violation of such rules, after being so 

noticed shall be liable for the forfeiture of the Earnest Money Deposit made with the 

tender, termination of Contract and sufferance on account of forfeiture of Security 

Deposit and sufferance of damages arising as a result of termination of Contract. 

3.10 Tender submitted by Tenderer shall remain valid for a period of 6 months from the date 

of opening of the tender. The Tenderer shall not be entitled during the said period of 6 

months, to revoke or cancel the tender without the consent in writing from the Owner. 

In case the tenderer revokes or cancels the tender or varies any of terms of the tender 

without the Consent of the Owner, in writing, the Tenderer forfeits the right to the refund 

of the Earnest Money paid along with the tender. 

3.11 The prices quoted by the tenderer shall be firm during the validity period of 6 months 

and also during the period of Contract including period(s) of extensions of time, if any, 

as stated earlier. Escalation in prices will not be permitted during the said period. The 

tenderer shall particularly take note of this factor before submitting their tender(s). 

3.12 The works shall be carried out strictly as per approved specifications. Deviations, if any, 

shall have to be authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing prior to 

implementing deviations. The price benefit, if any, arising out of the accepted deviation 

shall be passed on to the Owner. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge shall be final in 

this Matter. 

3.13 The contractor shall make all arrangements at his own cost to transport the required 

materials outside and inside the working places and leaving the premises in a neat and 

tidy condition after completion of the job to the satisfaction of Owner. All materials 

except those agreed to be supplied by the Owner shall be supplied by the contractor at 

his own cost and the rates quoted by the Contractor should be inclusive of all royalties, 

rents, taxes, duties, octroi, statutory levies, if any, etc. 

3.14 The Contractor shall not carry on any work other than the work under this Contract 

within the Owners premises without prior permission in writing from the Engineer-in- 

Charge/Site-in-charge. 

3.15 The Contractor shall be bound to follow and ensure compliance to all the safety and 

security regulations and other statutory rules applicable to the area. In the event of any 

damage or loss or sufferance caused due to non-observance of such rules and 



WORK 


Page 7 of 33 18 - 3188 

regulations, the contractor shall be solely responsible for the same and shall keep the 

Owner indemnified against all such losses and claims arising from the same. 

3.16 At any time after acceptance of tender, the Owner reserves the right to add, amend or 

delete any work item, the bill of quantities at a later date or reduce the scope of work in 

the overall interest of the work by prior discussion and intimation to the Contractor. The 

decision of Owner, with reasons recorded therefor, shall be final and binding on both the 

Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall not have right to claim compensation or 

damage etc. in that regard. The Owner reserves the right to split the work under this 

contract between two or more contractors without assigning any reasons. 

3.17 Contractor shall not be entitled to sublet, sub contract or assign, the work under this 

Contract without the prior consent of the Owner obtained in writing. 

3.18 All signatures in tender document shall be dated as well as all the pages of all sections of 

the tender documents shall be initialed at the lower position and signed, wherever 

required in the tender papers by the Tenderer or by a person holding Power of Attorney 

authorising him to sign on behalf of the tenderer before submission of tender. 

3.19 The tender should be quoted in English, both in figures as well as in words. The rates 

and amounts tendered by the Tenderer in the Schedule of rates for each item and in such 

a way that insertion is not possible. The total tendered amount should also be indicated 

both in figures and words with the signature of tenderer. 

3.20 All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender paper will be signed in full by the 

tenderer with date. No erasures or over writings are permissible. 

3.21 Transfer of tender document by one intending tenderer to the another one is not 

permissible. The tenderer on whose name the tender has been sent only can quote. 

3.22 The Tender submitted by a tenderer if found to be incomplete in any or all manner is 

liable to be rejected. The decision of the Owner in this regard is final and binding. In 

case of any error/discrepancy in the amount written in words and figures, the lower 

amount between the two shall prevail. 

4. DEPOSITS 

A) EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) 

The tenderer will be required to pay a sum as specified in the covering letter, as earnest 

money deposit alongwith the tender either thru a crossed demand draft or a non- 

revocable Bank Guarantee in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, from 

any Scheduled Bank (other than a Co-Operative Bank) payable at Mumbai in favour of 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, Mumbai in the proforma enclosed. The 

earnest money deposit will be refunded after finalisation of the contract. 




18-3188 Page 8 of 33 

Note:Public sector enterprises and small scale units registered with National Small Scale 

Industries are exempted from payment of Earnest Money Deposit. Small scale units 

registered with National Small Scale Industries should enclose a photocopy of their 

registration certificate with their quotation to make their quotation eligible for 

consideration. The Registration Certificate should remain valid during the period of the 

contract that may be entered into with such successful bidder. Such tenderers should 

ensure validity of the Registration Certificate for the purpose. 

B) SECURITY DEPOSIT 

The tenderer, with whom the contract is decided to be entered into and intimation is so 

given will have to make a security deposit of one percent (1%) of the total contract 

value in the form of account payee crossed demand draft drawn in favour of the Owner 

payable at Bombay, within 15 days from the date of intimation of acceptance of their 

tender, failing which the Owner reserves the right to cancel the Contract and forfeit the 

EMD. 

5. EXECUTION OF WORK 

All the works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the contract 

documents and with such explanatory details, drawings, specifications and instructions 

as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Sitein-Charge, 

whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor shall be 

responsible for ensuring that works throughout are executed in the most proper and 

workmanlike manner with the quality of material and workmanship in strict accordance 

with the specifications and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in- 

Charge. 

The completion of work may entail working in monsoon also. The contractor must 

maintain the necessary work force as may be required during monsoon and plan to 

execute the job in such a way the entire project is completed within the contracted time 

schedule. No extra charges shall be payable for such work during monsoon. It shall be 

the responsibility of the contractor to keep the construction work site free from water 

during and off the monsoon period at his own cost and expenses. 

For working on Sundays/Holidays, the contractor shall obtain the necessary permission 

from Engineer Incharge/ Site Incharge in advance. The contractor shall be permitted to 

work beyond the normal hours with prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge/Site-In-Charge 

and the contractors quoted rate is inclusive of all such extended hours of working and no 

extra amount shall be payable by the owner on this account. 

5.a. SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND SITE INSTRUCTIONS 

5.a.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the four 

corners of the work site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the 

works and shall provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely responsible 

for the accuracy of such setting out. 



WORK 


Page 9 of 33 18 - 3188 

5.a.2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all necessary 

stakes, templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all 

necessary precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible 

for consequences of such removal or disturbance should the same take place and for their 

efficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the 

maintenance of all existing survey marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the 

Contractor. The work shall be set out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/Sitein-Charge. 

The approval thereof or joining in setting out the work shall not relieve the 

Contractor of his responsibility. 

5.a.3. Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all necessary 

reference and level posts, pegs, bamboo, flags ranging rods, strings and other materials 

for proper layout of the work in accordance with the scheme, for bearing marks 

acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The Centre longitudinal or face 

lines and cross lines shall be marked by means of small masonry pillars. Each pillar shall 

have distinct marks at the centre to enable theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be 

started until all these points are checked and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/Sitein-Charge 

in writing. But such approval shall not relieve the contractor of any of his 

responsibilities. The Contractor shall also provide all labour, materials and other 

facilities, as necessary, for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points 

during construction. 

5.a.4. Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under construction 

should be protected and fenced by the Contractor. 

5.a.5. On completion of works, the contractor shall submit the geodetic documents according 

to which the work was carried out. 

5.a.6. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his instructions to 

the contractor in respect of the executions of work in a "work site order book" 

maintained in the office having duplicate sheet and the authorised representative of the 

contractor shall confirm receipt of such instructions by signing the relevant entries in the 

book. 

5.a.7. All instructions issued by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be in writing. The 

Contractor shall be liable to carry out the instructions without fail. 

5.a.8. If the Contractor after receipt of written instruction from the Engineer-in-Charge/ Sitein-Charge 

requiring compliance within seven days fails to comply with such drawings or 

'instructions' or both as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may issue, owner may 

employ and pay other persons to execute any such work whatsoever that may be 

necessary to give effect to such drawings or `instructions' and all cost and expenses 

incurred in connection therewith as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge 

shall be borne by the contractor or may be deducted from amounts due or that may 

become due to the contractor under the contract or may be recovered as a debt. 




18-3188 Page 10 of 33 

5.a.9. The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and 

vertical alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the work and shall rectify 

effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectification shall be carried out by 

the Contractor, at his own cost. 

5.a.10. In case any doubts arise in the mind of the Contractor in regard to any expressions, 

interpretations, statements, calculations of quantities, supply of material rates, etc. the 

contractor shall refer the same to the Site-in-Charge/ Engineer-in-Charge for his 

clarification, instructions, guidance or clearing of doubts. The decision of the Engineerin-Charge/Site-in-Charge 

shall be final and the contractor shall be bound by such a 

decision. 

5.a.11. "The Contractor shall take adequate precautions, to ensure that his operations do not 

create nuisance or misuse of the work space that shall cause unnecessary disturbance or 

inconvenience to others at the work site". 

5.a.12. "All fossils, coins articles of value of antiquity and structure or other remains of 

geological or archaeological discovered on the site of works shall be declared to be the 

property of the Owner and Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to prevent his 

workmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such articles or thing and 

shall immediately inform the Owner/ Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge." 

5.a.13. "Contractor will be entirely and exclusively responsible to provide and maintain at his 

expenses all lights, guards, fencing, etc. when and where even necessary or/as required 

by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the protection of works or safety and 

convenience to all the members employed at the site or general public." 

5.b. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK 

The contractor shall after paying the requisite security deposit, commence work within 

15 days from the date of receipt of the intimation of intent from the Owner informing 

that the contract is being awarded. The date of intimation shall be the date/day for 

counting the starting day/date and the ending day/date will be accordingly calculated. 

Penalty, if any, for the delay in execution shall be calculated accordingly. 

Contractor should prepare detailed fortnightly construction program for approval by the 

Engineer-in-Charge within one month of receipt of Letter Of Intent. The work shall be 

executed strictly as per such time schedule. The period of Contract includes the time 

required for testing, rectification, if any, re-testing and completion of work in all respects 

to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 

# A Letter of Intent is an acceptance of offer by the Owner and it need not be accepted by 

the contractor. But the contractor should acknowledge a receipt of the purchase order 

within 15 days of mailing of Purchase Order and any delay in acknowledging the receipt 

will be a breach of contract and compensation for the loss caused by such breach will be 

recovered by the Owner by forfeiting earnest money deposit/bid bond. 



WORK 


Page 11 of 33 18 - 3188 

5.c. SUBLETTING OF WORK 

5.c.1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest thereof shall in any manner or degree be 

transferred, assigned or sublet, by the Contractor, directly or indirectly to any firm or 

corporation whatsoever, without the prior consent in writing of the Owner. 

5.c.2. At the commencement of every month the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-incharge/Site-in-Charge 

list of all subcontractors or other persons or firms engaged by the 

Contractor. 

# 5.c.3 The contract agreement will specify major items of supply or services for which the 

Contractor proposes to engage sub-Contractor/sub-Vendor. The contractor may from 

time to time propose any addition or deletion from any such list and will submit the 

proposals in this regard to the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge for 

approval well in advance so as not to impede the progress of work. Such approval of the 

Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge will not relieve the contractor from 

any of his obligations, duties and responsibilities under the contract. 

5.c.4. Notwithstanding any subletting with such approval as resaid and notwithstanding that 

the Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any subcontract, the Contractor 

shall be and shall remain solely to be responsible for the quality and proper and 

expeditious execution of the works and the performance of all the conditions of the 

contract in all respects as if such subletting or subcontracting had not taken place and as 

if such work had been done directly by the Contractor. 

#5.c.5 Prior approval in writing of the Owner shall be obtained before any change is made in 

the constitution of the contractor/Contracting agency otherwise contract shall be 

deemed to have been allotted in contravention of clause entitled “subletting of works” 

and the same action may be taken and the same consequence shall ensue as provided in 

the clause of “subletting of works”. 

5.d EXTENSION OF TIME 

If the contractor does not complete the work within the contractual period he may apply 

in writing to the owner before two months of the period of expiry of the contract stating 

therein in detail, the reasons on which he desires to have extension and the period of 

extension, the contractor so desires. The owner on his part shall consider the request of 

the contractor for such extension of time and shall take a decision after discussion with 

the contractor and communicate the same to the contractor before 30 days of expiry of 

the contract. The decision of the owner in this regard shall be final and binding. 

If the owner extends the time for completion of work as mentioned above, it shall be the 

understanding between the owner and the contractor that the contractor shall be liable to 

pay damages, costs and expenses to the owner at the rate of 1% per month of the value of 

the remaining portion of work to be determined on the last date of the original period of 

contract, such value being determined by the owner and accepted by the contractor. In 

case of any dispute arising in the determination of the amount; the owner shall be at 




18-3188 Page 12 of 33 

liberty to terminate the contract, upon which event, consequences would follow 

according to the term and condition provided under the Clause for termination of the 

contract. 

5.e. SUSPENSION OF WORKS 

5.e.1. Subject to the provisions of this contract, the contractor shall if ordered in writing by the 

Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for reasons recorded suspend the works or any part 

thereof for such period and such time so ordered and shall not, after receiving such, 

proceed with the work therein ordered to suspended until he shall have received a written 

order to restart. The Contractor shall be entitled to claim extension of time for that 

period of time the work was ordered to be suspended. Neither the Owner nor the 

Contractor shall be entitled to claim compensation or damages on account of such an 

extension of time. 

5.e.2. In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- 

Charge, for a period of 30 days, the Owner shall have the option to terminate the 

Contract as provided under the clause for termination. The Contractor shall not be at 

liberty to remove from the site of the works any plant or materials belonging to him and 

the Employer shall have lien upon all such plant and materials. 

5.e.3. The contract shall, in case of suspension have the right to raise a dispute and have the 

same arbitrated but however, shall not have the right to have the work stopped from 

further progress and completion either by the owner or through other contractor 

appointed by the owner. 

5.f. OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK 

Not withstanding anything contained elsewhere in this contract, the owner upon failure 

of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with the 

provisions of this contract, may instead of Contract and undertaking charge of entire 

work, place additional labour force, tools, equipment and materials on such parts of the 

work, as the Owner may decide or engage another Contractor to carryout the balance of 

work. In such cases, the Owner shall have the right to deduct from the amounts payable 

to the Contractor the difference in cost of such work and materials with ten percent 

overhead added to cover all departmental charges. Should the total amount thereof 

exceed the amount due to the contractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the 

Owner within 15 days of making demand for payment failing which the Contractor shall 

be liable to pay interest at 24% p.a. on such amounts till the date of payment. 

5.g. INSPECTION OF WORKS 

5.g.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and Officers from Central or State Government 

will have full power and authority to inspect the works at any time wherever in progress, 

either on the site or at the Contractor's premises/workshops of any person, firm or 

corporation where work in connection with the contract may be in hand or where the 

materials are being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or procure for 

the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge every facility and assistance to carryout such 



WORK 


Page 13 of 33 18 - 3188 

inspection. The Contractor shall, at all times during the usual working hours and at all 

other times at which reasonable notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge/Sitein-Charge 

or his representative to visit the works shall have been given to the Contractor, 

either himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a responsible agent, 

duly accredited in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent 

shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor 

himself. The Contractor shall give not less than seven days notice in writing to the 

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise placing beyond 

reach of inspection and measurement any work in order that the same may be inspected 

and measured. In the event of breach of above, the same shall be uncovered at 

Contractor's expense for carrying out such measurement and/or inspection. 

5.g.2. No material shall be removed and despatched by the Contractor from the site without the 

prior approval in writing of the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor is to provide at all 

times during the progress of the work and the maintenance period proper means of 

access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the necessary attendance to move and adapt as 

directed for inspection or measurements of the works by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- 

Charge. 

5.h. SAMPLES 

5.h.1. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge for approval when 

requested or required adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be used in the 

work. 

5.h.2. Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor sufficiently in advance and before 

commencement of the work so as the Owner can carry out tests and examinations thereof 

and approve or reject the samples for use in the works. All material samples furnished 

and finally used/applied in actual work shall fully be of the same quality of the approved 

samples. 

5.i. TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK 

5.i.1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the contract documents 

and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge / Site-in- Charge and 

shall be subjected from time to time to such tests at Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in- 

Charge/Site-in-Charge may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the 

site or at all or any such places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, 

labour and materials as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any 

workmanship as may be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. 

5.i.2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the work as 

decided by the Engineer-in- charge/Site-in-Charge shall be carried out at the contractors 

cost and expenses. 

5.i.3. If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials or 

workmanship to be supplied by the owner, such tests shall be carried out by the 




18-3188 Page 14 of 33 

Contractor as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and expenses for 

such tests, if any, incurred by the contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner. The 

contractor should file his claim with the owner within 15 (fifteen) days of inspection/test 

and any claim made beyond that period shall lapse and be not payable. 

5.j. ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS, DESIGNS AND 

WORKS 

5.j.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall have powers to make any alterations, 

additions and/or substitutions to the schedule of quantities, the original specifications, 

drawings, designs and instructions that may become necessary or advisable or during the 

progress of the work and the Contractor shall be bound to carryout such 

altered/extra/new items of work in accordance with instructions which may be given to 

him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site- in-Charge. Such alterations, 

omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the contract. The altered, 

additional or substituted work which the Contractor may be directed to carryon in the 

manner as part of the work shall be carried out by the Contractor on the same conditions 

in all respects on which he has agreed to do the work. The time for completion of such 

altered added and/or substituted work may be extended for that part of the particular job. 

The rates for such additional altered or substituted work under this Clause shall, be 

worked out in accordance with the following provisions: 

5.j.2. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the contract for 

similar class of work, the Contractor is bound to carryout the additional, altered or 

substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the contract. 

5.j.3. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically provided in 

the contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar class of 

work as are specified in the contract for the work. In the opinion of the Engineer-in- 

Charge/ Site-in-Charge as to whether or not the rates can be reasonably so derived from 

the items in this contract, will be final and binding on the Contractor. 

5.j.4. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be determined in the 

manner specified above, then the Contractor shall, within seven days of the date of 

receipt of order to carry out the work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of 

the rate at which he intends to charge for such class of work, supported by analysis of the 

rate or rates claimed and the Engineer-In-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall determine the 

rates on the basis of the prevailing market rates for both material and labour plus 10% to 

cover overhead and profit of labour rates and pay the Contractor accordingly. The 

opinion of the Engineer-in- Charge/Site-in-Charge as to current market rates of materials 

and the quantum of labour involved per unit of measurement will be final and binding on 

the contractor. 

5.j.5. The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of rates 

of the contract will be applicable for variations of up to +25% of the estimated contract 

value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such variations in the 

contract value, even for variations of individual quantities, addition of new items, 

alterations, additions/ deletions or substitutions of items, as mentioned above. 



WORK 


Page 15 of 33 18 - 3188 

5.j.6. In case of any item of work for which there is no specification supplied by the Owner 

and is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance 

with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not 

cover the same, the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering Practice 

subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge. 

5.k. PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE 

Acceptance of sections of the works for purposes of equipment erection, piping, 

electrical work and similar usage by the Owner and payment for such work or parts of 

work shall not constitute a waiver of any portion of this contract and shall not be 

construed so as to prevent the Engineer from requiring replacement of defective work 

that may become apparent after the said acceptance and also shall not absolve the 

Contractor of the obligations under this contract. It is made clear that such an acceptance 

does not indicate or denote or establish to the fact of execution of that work or the 

Contract until the work is completed in full in accordance with the provisions of this 

Contract. 

5.l. COMPLETION OF WORK AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE 

As soon as the work is completed in all respects, the contractor shall give notice of such 

completion to the site in charge or the Owner and within thirty days of receipt of such 

notice the site in charge shall inspect the work and shall furnish the contractor with a 

certificate of completion indicating: 

a) defects, if any, to be rectified by the contractor 

b) items, if any, for which payment shall be made in reduced rates 

c) the date of completion. 

5.m. USE OF MATERIALS AND RETURN OF SURPLUS MATERIALS 

5.m.1. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all of the clauses of this 

contract, where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured with the 

assistance of Government either by issue from Government stocks or purchase made 

under orders or permits or licenses issued by Government, the contractor shall use the 

said materials economically and solely for the purpose of the contract and shall not 

dispose them of without the permission of the Owner. 

5.m.2. All surplus (serviceable) or unserviceable materials that may be left over after the 

completion of the contract or at its termination for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor 

shall deliver the said product to the Owner without any demur. The price to be paid to 

the Contractor, if not already paid either in full or in part, however, shall not exceed the 

amount mentioned in the Schedule of Rates for such material and in cases where such 

rates are not so mentioned, shall not exceed the CPWD scheduled rates. In the event of 

breach of the aforesaid condition the contractor shall become liable for contravention of 

the terms of the Contract. 




18-3188 Page 16 of 33 

5.m.3. The surplus (serviceable) and unserviceable products shall be determined by joint 

measurement. In case where joint measurement has failed to take place, the Owner may 

measure the same and determine the quantity. 

5.m.4. It is made clear that the Owner shall not be liable to take stock and keep possession and 

pay for the surplus and unserviceable stocks and the Owner may direct the Contractor to 

take back such material brought by the Contractor and becoming surplus and which the 

Owner may decide to keep and not to pay for the same. 

5.n. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD 

The contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the 

date of completion of the job. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at 

the time of completion of the job shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his 

own cost. The decision of the Engineer In-charge/ Site-Incharge/ Owner shall be the final 

in deciding whether the defect has to be rectified or replaced. 

# Equipment or spare parts replaced under warranty/guarantees shall have further 

warranty for a mutually agreed period from the date of acceptance. 

The owner shall intimate the defects noticed in writing by a Registered A.D. letter or 

otherwise and the contractor within 15 days of receipt of the intimation shall start the 

rectification work and complete within the time specified by the owner failing which the 

owner will get the defects rectified by themselves or by any other contractor and the 

expenses incurred in getting the same done shall be paid by the Contractor under the 

provision of the Contract. 

Thus, defect liability is applicable only in case of job/works contract (civil, mechanical, 

electrical, maintenance etc. ) where any damage of defect may arise in future (i.e. Within 

12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie undiscovered at the time of 

completion of job. 

In other words, in case of service contracts (like car hire etc.) where there is no question 

of damage or defect arising in future, the defect liability clause is not applicable. 

5.o. DAMAGE TO PROPERTY 

5.o.1. Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss 

of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or being 

executed or procured by the Owner or of other agencies within the premises of the work 

of the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or the negligence or willful acts 

or omission of the Contractor, his employees, agents, representatives or subcontractors. 

5.o.2. The Contractors shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for damage 

to Owner's property arising under or by reason of this contract. 



WORK 


Page 17 of 33 18 - 3188 

6. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR 

6.a. EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY TOWARDS WORKERS EMPLOYED BY THE 

CONTRACTOR 

6.a.1 The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or employing 

persons for the execution of work. All persons engaged by the contractor shall be on 

Contractor's payroll and paid by Contractor. All disputes or differences between the 

Contractor and his/their employees shall be settled by Contractor. 

6.a.2. Owner has absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the 

Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner against any loss or damage or 

liability arising out of or in the course of his/their employing persons or relation with 

his/their employees. The Contractor shall make regular and full payment of wages and 

on any complaint by any employee of the Contractor or his sub contractor regarding 

nonpayment of wages, salaries or other dues, Owner reserves the right to make payments 

directly to such employees or subcontractor of the Contractor and recover the amount 

in full from the bills of the Contractor and the contractor shall not claim any 

compensation or reimbursement thereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum 

Wages Act applicable to the area of work site with regard to payment of wages to his 

employees and also to employees of his sub contractor. 

6.a.3. The Contractor shall advise in writing or in such appropriate way to all of his employees 

and employees of subcontractors and any other person engaged by him that their 

appointment/ employment is not by the Owner but by the Contractor and that their 

present appointment is only in connection with the construction contract with Owner and 

that therefore, such an employment/ appointment would not enable or make them 

eligible for any employment/ appointment with the Owner either temporarily or/and 

permanent basis. 

6.b. NOTICE TO LOCAL BODIES 

The contractor shall comply with and give all notices required under any Government 

authority, instruction, rule or order made under any act of parliament, state laws or any 

regulations or by-laws of any local authority relating to the works. 

6.c. FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES 

6.c.1 Contractor shall maintain first aid facility for his employees and those of his 

subcontractors. 

6.c.2. Contractor shall make arrangements for ambulance service and for the treatment of all 

types of injuries. Names and telephone numbers of those providing such services shall be 

furnished to Owner prior to start of construction and their name board shall be 

prominently displayed in Contractor's field office. 




18-3188 Page 18 of 33 

6.c.3. All industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner and a copy of contractor's 

report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of a physician shall be 

furnished to the Owner. 

6.d. SAFETY CODE 

6.d.1. The Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange for the Safety provisions as may be 

necessary for the execution of the work or as required by the Engineer-in-Charge in 

respect of all labours directly or indirectly employed for performance of the works and 

shall provide all facilities in connections therewith. In case the contractor fails to make 

arrangements and provide necessary facilities as aforesaid, the Owner shall be entitled to 

do so and recover the cost thereof from the Contractor. 

6.d.2. From the commencement to the completion of the works, the contractor shall take full 

responsibility for the care thereof and of all the temporary works (defined as meaning all 

temporary works of every kind required in or for the execution, completion or 

maintenance of the works). In case damage, loss or injury shall happen to the works or to 

any part thereof or to temporary works or to any cause whatsoever repair at his 

(Contractor's) own cost and make good the same so that at the time of completion, the 

works shall be in good order and condition and in conformity in every respect with the 

requirement of the contract and Engineer-in-Charge's instructions. 

6.d.3. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance 

of the Contractor's part of this agreement, the contractor shall at his own expense arrange 

for all the safety provisions as per relevant Safety Codes of C.P.W.D Bureau of Indian 

Standards, the Electricity Act/I.E. Rules. The Mines Act and such other Acts as 

applicable. 

6.d.4. The Contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the Owner. 

Before starting construction work, the Contractor shall consult with Owner's Safety 

Engineer or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and must make good to the satisfaction 

of the Owner any loss or damage due to fire to any portion of the work done or to be 

done under this agreement or to any of the Owner's existing property. 

6.d.5. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions of the 

Contract Labour Act and shall pay rates of Wages and observe hours of work/ conditions 

of employment according to the rules in force from time to time. 

6.d.6. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provision including 

documentation and submission of reports on the above to the concerned authorities and 

shall indemnify the Corporation from any such lapse for which the Government will be 

taking action against them. 

6.d.7. Owner shall on a report having been made by an inspecting Office as defined in the 

Contract Labour Regulations have the power to deduct from the money due to the 

Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss 

suffered by a worker(s) by reasons of non-fulfillment of conditions of contract for the 

benefit of workers no-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or their wages 

which are not justified by the terms of contract or non observance of the said contractor's 



WORK 


Page 19 of 33 18 - 3188 

labour Regulation. 

6.e. INSURANCE AND LABOUR 

Contractor shall at his own expense obtain and maintain an insurance policy with a 

Nationalised Insurance Company to the satisfaction of the Owner as provided hereunder. 

6.e.1. EMPLOYEES STATE INSURANCE ACT 

i. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the 

compliance with all obligations imposed by Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, 

and the Contractor further agrees to defend indemnify and hold Owner harmless from 

any liability or penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or local authority 

by reason of any asserted violation by Contractor, or subcontractor of the Employees' 

State Insurance Act, 1948 and also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be 

brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of or by reason of the work 

provided for by this contract whether brought by employees of the Contractor, by 

third parties or by Central or State Government authority or any political subdivision 

thereof. 

ii. The Contractor agrees to file with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, the 

Declaration forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the Contractor's 

or subcontractor's employee whose aggregate remuneration is within the specified 

limit and who are employed in the work provided or those covered by ESI Act under 

any amendment to the Act from time to time. 

The Contractor shall deduct and secure the agreement of the subcontractor to deduct 

the employee's contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee's State 

Insurance Act from wages and affix the employee's contribution cards at wages 

payment intervals. The Contractor shall remit and secure the agreement of the sub 

contractor to remit to the State Bank of India, Employee's State Insurance 

Corporation Account, the Employee's contribution as required by the Act. 

iii. The Contractor agrees to maintain all records as required under the Act in respect 

of employees and payments and the Contractor shall secure the agreement of the sub 

contractor to maintain such records. Any expenses incurred for the contributions, 

making contribution or maintaining records shall be to the Contractor's or 

subcontractor's account. 

iv. The Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract 

value until the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions as 

required by the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, have been paid. 




18-3188 Page 20 of 33 

v. WORKMAN'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYEE'S LIABILITY 

INSURANCE 

Provide Insurance for all the Contractor's employees engaged in the 

performance of this contract. If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall 

ensure that the sub contractor provides workmen's compensation and Employer's 

Liability Insurance for the latter's employees who are not covered under the 

Contractor's insurance. 

vi. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 

Contractor shall take out an Insurance to cover all risks to Owner for each of his 

vehicles plying on works of this contract and these insurances shall be valid for the 

total contract period. No extra payment will be made for this insurance. Owner shall 

not be liable for any damage or loss not made good by the Insurance Company, 

should such damage or loss result from unauthorised use of the vehicle. The 

provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act would apply. 

vii. FIRE INSURANCE 

The Contractor shall take out an insurance to cover all risks of damage to the 

contractor’s own property arising out of fire, electric short circuit, earthquake, flood, 

lightening, strike, riot and construction work. 

viii. The contractor shall take out insurance to cover all risks of accident to third 

parties through acts of contractor’s own employees, representatives, sub contractors, 

agents and construction work and the risk of damage to the property of third parties 

arising out acts of contractors, employees, representatives and agents. 

6.e.2. ANY OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED UNDER LAW OR REGULATION 

OR BY OWNER 

i. Contractor shall also provide and maintain any and all other insurance which may 

be required under any law or regulations from time to time. He shall also carry and 

maintain any other insurance which may be required by the Owner. 

ii. The aforesaid insurance policy/policies shall provide that they shall not be 

cancelled till the Engineer-in-Charge has agreed to their cancellation. 

iii. The Contractor shall satisfy to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge from time 

to time that he has taken out all insurance policies referred to above and has paid the 

necessary premium for keeping the policies alive till the expiry of the defects liability 

period. 



WORK 


Page 21 of 33 18 - 3188 

iv. The contractor shall ensure that similar insurance policies are taken out by his 

subcontractor (if any) and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the Owner 

resulting from their failure to obtain adequate insurance protections in connection 

thereof. The contractor shall produce or cause to be proceed by his subcontractor (if 

any) as the case may be, the relevant policy or policies and premium receipts as and 

when required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. 

6.e.3. LABOUR AND LABOUR LAWS 

i. The contractor shall at his own cost employ persons during the period of contract and the 

persons so appointed shall not be construed under any circumstances to be in the 

employment of the Owner. 

ii. All payments shall be made by the contractor to the labour employed by him in 

accordance with the various rules and regulations stated above. The contractor shall keep 

the Owner indemnified from any claims whatsoever inclusive of damages/costs or 

otherwise arising from injuries or alleged injuries to or death of a person employed by 

the contractor or damages or alleged damages to the property. 

iii. No labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. The 

Contractor shall not pay less than what is provided under the provisions of the contract 

labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970 and the rules made thereunder and as may 

be amended from time to time. He shall pay the required deposit under the Act 

appropriate to the number of workman to be employed by him or through sub contractor 

and get himself registered under the Act. He shall produce the required Certificates to 

the Owner before commencement of the work. The Owner recognises only the 

Contractor and not his sub contractor under the provisions of the Act. The Contractor 

will have to submit daily a list of his workforce. He will also keep the wage register at 

the work site or/and produce the same to the Owner, whenever desired. A deposit may be 

taken by the Owner from the Contractor to be refunded only after the Owner is satisfied 

that all workmen employed by the Contractor have been fully paid for the period of work 

in Owner's premises at rates equal to or better than wages provided for under the 

Minimum Wages Act. The contractor shall be responsible and liable for any complaints 

that may arise in this regard and the consequences thereto. 

iv. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the Employee's Provident Fund Act 

and the Family Pension Act as may be applicable and as amended from time to time. 

v. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the payment of Gratuity Act, 1972, as 

may be applicable and as amended from time to time. 

vi. IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT, 1961 

The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the 

Rules and Orders issued thereunder from time to time. If he fails to do so, his failure will 

be a breach of the contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, cancel the 

contract. The Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account 




18-3188 Page 22 of 33 

of any violation by him of the provision of the Act. 

vii. MODEL RULES FOR LABOUR WELFARE 

The Contractor shall at his own expenses comply with or cause be complied with Model 

rules for Labour Welfare as appended to those conditions or rules framed by the 

Government from time to time for the protection of health and for making sanitary 

arrangements for worker employed directly or indirectly on the works. In case the 

contractor fails to make arrangements as aforesaid the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- 

Charge shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the contractor. 

6.f. DOCUMENTS CONCERNING WORKS 

6.f.1. All documents including drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducible models, plans, 

specifications and copies, thereof furnished by the Owner as well as all drawings, 

tracings, reproducible, plans, specifications design calculations etc. prepared by the 

contractor for the purpose of execution of works covered in or connected with this 

contract shall be the property of the Owner and shall not be used by the contractor for 

any other work but are to be delivered to the Owner at the completion or otherwise of the 

contract. 

6.f.2. The Contractor shall keep and maintain secrecy of the documents, drawings etc. issued 

to him for the execution of this contract and restrict access to such documents, drawings 

etc. and further the Contractor shall execute a SECRECY agreement from each or any 

person employed by the Contractor having access to such documents, drawings etc. The 

Contractor shall not issue drawings and documents to any other agency or individual 

without the written approval by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge. 

6.f.3. Contractor will not give any information or document etc. concerning details of the work 

to the press or a news disseminating agency without prior written approval from 

Engineer-in- charge/ Site-in-Charge. Contractor shall not take any pictures on site 

without written approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. 

7. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S BILLS 

7.1. Payments will be made against Running Accounts bills certified by the Owner's 

Engineer-in- Charge/ Site-in-Charge within 15 days from the date of receipt of the 

certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the Owner. 

7.2. Running Account Bills and the final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor together 

with the duly signed measurements sheet(s) to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of 

the Owner in quadruplicate for certification. 

The Bills shall also be accompanied by quantity calculations in support of the quantities 

contained in the bill along with cement consumption statement, actual/theoretical, 

wherever applicable duly certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the 

Owner. 



WORK 


Page 23 of 33 18 - 3188 

7.3. All running account payments shall be regarded as on account payment(s) to be finally 

adjusted against the final bill payment. Payment of Running Account Bill(s) shall not 

determine or affect in any way the rights of the Owner under this Contract to make the 

final adjustments of the quantities of material, measurements of work and adjustments of 

amounts etc.etc. in the final bill. 

7.4. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date of 

completion of the work fully and completely in all respects. If the Contractor fails to 

submit the final bill accordingly Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may make the 

measurement and determine the total amount payable for the work carried out by the 

Contractor and such a certification shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The 

Owner/Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may take the assistance of an outside party 

for taking the measurement, the expenses of which shall be payable by the Contractor. 

7.5. Payment of final bill shall be made within 45 days from the date of receipt of the 

certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the owner. 

7.a. MEASUREMENT OF WORKS 

7.a.1. All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works will be jointly measured by 

the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and the Contractor or their 

authorised agent progressively. Such measurement will be recorded in the Measurement 

Book/ Measurement Sheet by the Contractor or his authorised representative and signed 

in token of acceptance by the Owner or their authorised representative. 

7.a.2. For the purpose of taking joint measurement, the Contractor/representative shall be 

bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. If, 

however, they are absent for any reasons whatsoever, the measurement will be taken by 

the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his representative and the same would be 

deemed to be correct and binding on the Contractor. 

7.a.3. In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement for any item of work, the latest 

Indian Standard Specifications shall be followed. In case of any further dispute on the 

same the same shall be as per the certification of an outside qualified Engineer/ 

Consultant. Such a measurement shall be final and binding on the Owner and the 

Contractor. 

7.b. BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED 

The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the Engineerin- 

Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed measurement for the 

various items executed during a month, before the expiry of the first week of the 

succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall take or cause to be 

taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of having the bill verified and/or 

checked before forwarding the same to the disbursement office of the Owner for further 

action in terms of the Contract and payment thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in- 

Charge shall verify the bills within 7 days of submission of the Bill by the Contractor. 




18-3188 Page 24 of 33 

7.c. RETENTION MONEY 

10% of the total value of the Running Account and Final Bill will be deducted and 

retained by the Owner as retention money on account of any damage/defect liability that 

may arise for the period covered under the defect liability period clause of the Contract 

free of interest. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie undiscovered at the time of 

issue of completion certificate connected in any way with the equipment or materials 

supplied by contractor or in workmanship shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor 

at his own expense failing which the Owner shall be entitled to rectify the said 

damage/defect from the retention money. Any excess of expenditure incurred by the 

Owner on account of damage or defect shall be payable by the Contractor. The decision 

of the Owner in this behalf shall not be liable to be questioned but shall be final and 

binding on the Contractor. 

Thus, deduction towards retention money is applicable only in case of job/works 

contracts (civil, mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc. ) where any damage or defect 

may arise in future (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie 

undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate. 

Alternatively, the contractor , before submission of the Ist RA invoice shall submit a 

interest free bank guarantee (BG) in lieu of Retention money , equivalent to 10% of the 

contract value in a non judicial stamp paper of appropriate value from any scheduled 

bank in a format acceptable to owner. The BG shall remain valid till the completion of 

the defect liability period. 

The value of this BG shall be modified by the contractor according to the final of the 

work taking into acount the variation in quantities/ extra items. 

7.d. TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC. 

7.d.1 The Contractor accepts full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all taxes, 

duties, octroi, rates, cess, levies, and statutory payments payable under all or any of the 

statutes etc. now or hereafter imposed, increased from time to time in respect of works 

and materials and all contributions and taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance 

and old age pensions or annuities now or hereafter imposed by Central or State 

Governmental authorities which are imposed with respect to or covered by the wages, 

salaries or other compensations paid to the persons employed by the Contractor and the 

Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance with all obligations and restrictions 

imposed by the Labour Law or any other law affecting employer-employee relationship 

and the Contractor further agrees to comply and to secure the compliance of all 

subcontractors with all applicable Central, State, Municipal and local laws, and 

regulations and requirements of any Central, State or Local Government agency or 

authority. 



WORK 


Page 25 of 33 18 - 3188 

Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless from any liability or 

penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or Local authorities by reason of any 

violation by Contractor or subcontractor of such laws, regulations or requirements and 

also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising 

under, growing out of, or by reasons of the work provided for by this contract by third 

parties, or by Central or State Government authority or any administrative subdivision 

thereof. The Contractor further agrees that in case any such demand is raised against the 

Owner, and Owner has no way but to pay and pays/makes payment of the same, the 

Owner shall have the right to deduct the same from the amounts due and payable to the 

Contractor. The Contractor shall not raise any demand or dispute in respect of the same 

but may have recourse to recover/receive from the concerned authorities on the basis of 

the Certificate of the Owner issued in that behalf. 

7.d.2. The rates quoted should be inclusive of all rates, cess, taxes and sales tax on works 

contracts wherever applicable. However, wherever the sales tax on works contract is 

applicable and is to be deducted at source, the same will be deducted from the bills of 

the Contractor and paid to the concerned authorities. The proof of such payments of 

sales tax on works contract will be furnished to the contractor. 

7.d.3. Income tax will be deducted at source as per rules at prevailing rates, unless certificate, if 

any, for deduction at lesser rate or nil deduction is submitted by the Contractor from 

appropriate authority. 

7.e. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR 

7.e.1. The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for 

construction including tools, tackles, construction plant and equipment for the 

completion and maintenance of the works except the materials viz. steel and cement 

which may be agreed to be supplied as provided elsewhere in the contract. The 

contractor shall make arrangement for procuring such materials and for the transport 

thereof at their own cost and expenses. 

7.e.2. The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so desired 

by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature. The Contractor shall 

procure materials of ISI stamp/certification and supplied by reputed suppliers borne on 

DGS&D list. 

7.e.3. All materials procured should meet the specifications given in the tender document. The 

Engineer-in-charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for any 

batch of any materials procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the 

approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for any materials to be used for the 

works. 

7.e.4. Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the Contractor. 

If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge any tests are 

required to be conducted on the material supplied by the Contractor, these will be 

arranged by the Contractor promptly at his own cost. 




18-3188 Page 26 of 33 

7.f. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER 

7.f.1. Steel and Cement maybe supplied by the Owner to the contractor against payment by 

Contractor from either godown or from the site or within work premises itself and the 

contractor shall arrange for all transport to actual work site at no extra cost. 

7.f.2. The contractor shall bear all the costs including loading and unloading, carting from 

issue points to work spot storage, unloading, custody and handling and stacking the same 

and return the surplus steel and cement to the Owner's storage point after completion of 

job. 

7.f.3. The contractor will be fully accountable for the steel and cement received from the 

Owner and contractor will give acknowledgement/receipt for quantity of steel and 

cement received by him each time he uplifts cement from Owner's custody. 

7.f.4. For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be considered as 

per CPWD standards. 

7.f.5. Steel and Cement as received from the manufacturer/stockists will be issued to the 

contractor. Theoretical weight of cement in a bag will be considered as 50 Kg. Bags 

weighing upto 4% less shall be accepted by the contractor and considered as 50 Kg. per 

bag. Any shortage in the weight of any cement bag by more than 4% will be to the 

Owner's account only when pointed out by the Contractor and verified by Engineer-in- 

Charge/Site in Charge at the time of Contract or taking delivery. 

7.f.6. The contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance and 

consumption of steel and cement at site. Cement will be stored in a warehouse at site. 

Requirement of cement on any day will be taken out of the warehouse. Cement issued 

shall be regulated on the basis of FIRST RECEIPT to go as FIRST ISSUE. 

7.f.7. Empty cement bag shall be the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall be penalised 

for any excess/under consumption of cement. The penal rate will be twice the rate of 

issue of cement for this work. 

7.f.8. All the running bills as well as the final bills will be accompanied by cement 

consumption statements giving the detailed working of the cement used, cement received 

and stock-on-hand. 

7.f.9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement once it is received by 

him and during transport. Owner will not entertain any claims of the contractor for theft, 

loss or damage to cement while in their custody. 

7.f.10. The contractor shall not remove from the site any cement bags at any time. 

7.f.11. The Contractor shall advise Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-charge in writing at least 21 days 

before exhausting the Cement stocks already held by Contractor to ensure that such 

delays do not lead to interruptions in the progress of work. 



WORK 


Page 27 of 33 18 - 3188 

7.f.12. Cement shall not be supplied by the Owner for manufacturing of mosaic tiles, precast 

cement jali and any other bought out items which consume cement and for temporary 

works. 

7.f.13. Cement in bags and in good usable condition left over after the completion of work shall 

be returned by the contractor to the Owner. The Owner shall make payment to the 

Contractor at the supply rate for such stocks of cement they accept and receive. Any 

refused stock of cement shall be removed by the Contractor from the site at his cost and 

expenses within 15 days of completion of the work. 

8. PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DAMAGES 

8.1. Should the Owner have to pay money in respect of claims or demands as aforesaid the 

amount so paid and the costs incurred by the Owner shall be charged to and paid by the 

Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to dispute or question the right of the 

Owner to make such payments notwithstanding the same may have been without his 

consent or authority or in law or otherwise to the contrary. 

8.2. In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of Workmen's Compensation Act, 

1923, or other Acts, the Owner is obliged to pay Compensation to a Workman employed 

by the Contractor in execution of the works, the Owner will recover from the Contractor 

the amount of compensation so paid and without prejudice to the rights of Owner under 

the said Act. Owner shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by 

deducting it from the security deposit or from any sum due to the Contractor whether 

under this contract or otherwise. The Owner shall not be bound to contest any claim 

made under Section 12 sub section (1) of the said Act, except on the written request of 

the Contractor and upon his giving to the Owner full security for all costs for which the 

owner might become liable in consequence of contesting such claim. 

8.a. ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK 

If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge that any work has been 

executed with bad, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials, or that any 

materials or articles provided by the Contractor for execution of the work are not of 

standards specified/inferior quality to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance 

with the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall on demand in writing from the Engineer-in- 

Charge/ Site-in-Charge or his authorised representative specifying the work, materials or 

articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently 

passed, certified and paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct the work so 

specified and at his own charge and cost and expenses and in the event of failure to do so 

within a period of 15 days of such intimation/ information/knowledge, the Contractor 

shall be liable to pay compensation equivalent to the cost of reconstruction by the 

Owner. On expiry of 15 days period mentioned above, the Owner may by themselves or 

otherwise rectify or remove and re-execute the work or remove and replace with others, 

the materials or articles complained of as the case may be at the risk and expenses in all 

respects of the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge as to 

any question arising under this clause shall be final and conclusive and shall not be 




18-3188 Page 28 of 33 

raised as a dispute or shall be arbitrable. 

8.b. INSPECTION AND AUDIT OF CONTRACT AND WORKS 

This project is subject to inspection by various Government agencies of Government of 

India. The contractor shall extend full cooperation to all the Government and other 

agencies in the inspection of the works, audit of the Contract and the documents of 

Contract Bills, measurements sheets etc. and examination of the records of works and 

make enquiries interrogation as they may deem fit, proper and necessary. Upon 

inspection etc. by such agencies if it is pointed out that the contract work has not been 

carried out according to the prescribed terms and conditions as laid down in the tender 

documents and if any recoveries are recommended, the same shall be recovered from the 

contractors running bills/final bill/from ordered/suggested Security Deposit/retention 

money. The Contractor shall not rise any dispute on any such account and the same shall 

not be arbitrable. 

9. CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER 

The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employee of 

the Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and his staff against all the 

actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses, whatsoever arising out of or in 

connection with the works and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, 

expenses which may be made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any 

failure by the Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the contract. The 

Contractor shall be liable for or in respect of or in consequence of any accident or injury 

to any workmen or other person in the employment of the Contractor or his sub 

contractor and Contractor shall indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner against all 

such damages, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or 

in relation thereto. 

10. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 

In case of delay in completing the work beyond the period of contract the contractor shall 

be liable to pay liquidated damages at the rate of 0.5% of the total contract value for 

every week or part thereof of the delay subject to a maximum of 5% of the total contract 

value. The liquidated damages shall be recovered by the Owner out of the amounts, 

payable to the Contractor or from the Guarantees or Deposits furnished by the Contractor 

or the Retention Money retained from the Bills of the Contractor. Should the amount of 

liquidated damages is not recoverable or recovered in any manner in part or in full, the 

same shall be payable by the Contractor on demand by the Owner with 24% p.a. interest 

till the date of payment. 

11. DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER OR TERMINATION OF WORK 

CONTRACT BY OWNER 

The Contractor shall remain responsible and liable to make good all losses or damages 

that may occur/appear to the work carried out under this Contract within a period of 12 

months from date of issue of the Completion Certificate and/or the date of Owner taking 



WORK 


Page 29 of 33 18 - 3188 

over the work, which ever is earlier. The Contractor shall issue a Bank Guarantee to the 

Owner in the sum of 10% of the work entrusted in the Contract, from any nationalised 

Bank acceptable to the Owner and if however, the Contractor fails to furnish such a 

Bank Guarantee the Owner shall have right to retain the Security Deposit and Retention 

Money to cover the 10% of the Guarantee amount under this clause and to return/refund 

the same after the expiry of the period of 12 months without any interest thereon. 

12. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT 

12.1 The owner may terminate the contract at any stage of the construction for reasons to be 

recorded in the letter of termination. 

12.2 The Owner inter alia may terminate the Contract for any or all of the following reasons 

that the contractor 

a) has abandoned the work/Contract. 

b) has failed to commence the works, or has without any lawful excuse under these 

conditions suspended the work for 15 consecutive days. 

c) has failed to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace the work 

within 15 days after receiving from the Engineer written notice that the said materials or 

work were condemned and/or rejected by the Engineer under specified conditions. 

d) has neglected or failed to observe and perform all or any of the terms acts, matters or 

things under this Contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor. 

e) has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the Engineer's 

instructions to the contrary sublet any part of the Contract. 

f) has acted in any manner to the detrimental interest, reputation, dignity, name or 

prestige of the Owner. 

g) has stopped attending to work without any prior notice and prior permission for a 

period of 15 days. 

h) has become untraceable. 

i) has without authority acted in violation of the terms and conditions of this contract 

and has committed breach of terms of the contract in best judgement of the owner. 

j) has been declared insolvent/bankrupt. 

k) in the event of sudden death of the Contractor. 

12.3 The owner on termination of such contract shall have the right to appropriate the 

Security Deposit, Retention Money and invoke the Bank Guarantee furnished by the 




18-3188 Page 30 of 33 

contractor and to appropriate the same towards the amounts due and payable by the 

contractor as per the conditions of Contract and return to the contractor excess money, if 

any, left over. 

12.4 The owner shall have the right to carry out the unexecuted portion of work either by 

themselves or by contractor through other agencies at the cost of the Contractor. 

12.5 The contractor within or at the time fixed by the Owner shall depute his authorised 

representative for taking joint final measurements of the works executed thus far and 

submit the final bill for the work as per joint final measurement within 15 days of the 

date of joint final measurement. If the contractor fails to depute their representative for 

joint measurement, the owner shall take the measurement with their Engineer-in-Charge/ 

Site-in-Charge or any other outside representatives. Such a measurement shall not be 

questioned by the Contractor and no dispute can be raised by the Contractor for purpose 

of Arbitration. 

12.6 The Owner may enter upon and take possession of the works and all plant, tools, 

scaffoldings, sheds, machinery, power operated tools and steel, cement and other 

materials of the Contract at the site or around the site and use or employ the same for 

completion of the work or employ any other contractor or other person or persons to 

complete the works. The Contractor shall not in any way object or interrupt or do any 

act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such actions, other Contractor or other persons 

employed for completing and finishing or using the materials and plant for the works. 

When the works shall be completed or as soon thereafter the Engineer shall give a notice 

in writing to the Contractor to remove surplus materials and plant, if any, and belonging 

to the Contractor except as provided elsewhere in the Contract and should the Contractor 

fail to do so within a period of 15 days after receipt thereof the Owner may sell the same 

by public auction and shall give credit to the contractor for the amount realised. The 

Owner shall thereafter ascertain and certify in writing under his hand what (if anything) 

shall be due or payable to or by the Owner for the value of the plant and materials so 

taken possession and the expense or loss which the Owner shall have been put to in 

procuring the works, to be so completed, and the amount if any, owing to the Contractor 

and the amount which shall be so certified shall thereupon be paid by the Owner to the 

Contractor or by the Contractor to the Owner, as the case may, and the Certificate of the 

Owner shall be final and conclusive between the parties. 

12.7 When the contract is terminated by the Owner for all or any of the reasons mentioned 

above the Contractor shall not have any right to claim compensation on account of such 

termination. 

13. FORCE MAJEURE 

13.1. Any delay in or failure of the performance of either part hereto shall not constitute 

default hereunder or give rise to any claims for damage, if any, to the extent such delays 

or failure of performance is caused by occurrences such as Acts of God or an enemy, 

expropriation or confiscation of facilities by Government authorities, acts of war, 

rebellion, sabotage or fires, floods, explosions, riots, or strikes. The Contractor shall 

keep records of the circumstances referred to above and bring these to the notice of the 



WORK 


Page 31 of 33 18 - 3188 

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing immediately on such occurrences. The 

amount of time, if any, lost on any of these counts shall not be counted for the Contract 

period. One decision of the Owner arrived at after consultation with the Contractor, shall 

be final and binding. Such a determined period of time be extended by the Owner to 

enable the Contractor to complete the job within such extended period of time. 

13.2. If Contractor is prevented or delayed from the performing any of its obligations under 

this Agreement by Force Majeure, then Contractor shall notify Owner he circumstances 

constituting the Force Majeure and the obligations performance of which is thereby 

delayed or prevented, within seven days of the occurrence of the events. 

14. ARBITRATION 

14.1 All disputes and differences of whatsoever nature, whether existing or which shall at any 

time arise between the parties hereto touching or concerning the agreement, meaning, 

operation or effect thereof or to the rights and liabilities of the parties or arising out of 

or in relation thereto whether during or after completion of the contract or whether 

before after determination, foreclosure, termination or breach of the agreement (other 

than those in respect of which the decision of any person is, by the contract, expressed to 

be final and binding) shall, after written notice by either party to the agreement to the 

other of them and to the Appointing Authority hereinafter mentioned, be referred for 

adjudication to the Sole Arbitrator to be appointed as hereinafter provided. 

14.2 The appointing authority shall either himself act as Sole Arbitrator or nominate some 

officer of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (referred to as owner or HPCL) to 

act as Sole Arbitrator to adjudicate the disputes and differences between the parties. The 

contractor/vendor shall not be entitled to raise any objection to the appointment of such 

officer of the owner as the Sole Arbitrator on the ground that the said officer is an 

officer and/or shareholder of the owner or that he/she has to deal or dealt with the 

matter to which the contract relates or that in the course of his/her duties as an officer of 

the owner, he/she has/had expressed views on all or any of the matters in dispute or 

difference. 

14.3 In the event of the Arbitrator to whom the matter is referred to, does not accept the 

appointment, or is unable or unwilling to act or resigns or vacates his office for any 

reasons whatsoever, the Appointing Authority aforesaid, shall nominate another Officer 

of the Owner to act as Arbitrator. 

14.4 Such Officer nominated as Sole Arbitrator shall be entitled to proceed with the 

arbitration from the stage at which it was left by his predecessor. It is expressly agreed 

between the parties that no person other than the Appointing Authority or an Officer of 

the Owner nominated by the Appointing Authority, shall act as an Arbitrator. 

14.5 The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to the 

Agreement. 




18-3188 Page 32 of 33 

14.6 The work under the Contract shall, however, continue during the Arbitration 

proceedings and no payment due or payable to the concerned party shall be withheld 

(except to the extent disputed) on account of initiation, commencement or pendency of 

such proceedings. 

14.7 The Arbitrator may give a composite or separate Award(s) in respect of each dispute or 

difference referred to him and may also make interim award(s) if necessary. 

14.8 The fees of the Arbitrator and expenses of arbitration, if any, shall be borne equally by 

the parties unless the Sole Arbitrator otherwise directs in his award with reasons. The 

Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties. 

14.9 Subject to the aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996 or 

any statutory modification or reenactment thereof and the rules made thereunder, shall 

apply to the Arbitration proceedings under this Clause. 

14.10 The Contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in force in 

India. The parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts situated at 

Mumbai for all purposes. The Arbitration shall be held at Mumbai and conducted in 

English language. 

14.11 The Appointing Authority is the Functional Director of Hindustan Petroleum 

Corporation Limited 

15. GENERAL 

15.1. Materials required for the works whether brought by the or supplied by the Owner shall 

be stored by the contractor only at places approved by Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- 

Charge. Storage and safe custody of the material shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor. 

15.2. Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge connected with the contract, shall be 

entitled at any time to inspect and examine any materials intended to be used in or on the 

works, either on the site or at factory or workshop or at other place(s) manufactured or at 

any places where these are laying or from which these are being obtained and the 

contractor shall give facilities as may be required for such inspection and examination. 

15.3. In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied by the 

owner as is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in 

accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications 

do not cover the same the work should be carried out as per standard Engineering 

practice subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge. 

15.4. Should the work be suspended by reason of rain, strike, lockouts or other cause the 

contractor shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of the work and at his 

own expense shall make good any damages arising from any of these causes. 

15.5 The contractor shall cover up and protect from injury from any cause all new work also 



WORK 


Page 33 of 33 18 - 3188 

for supplying all temporary doors, protection to windows and any other requisite 

protection for the whole of the works executed whether by himself or special tradesmen 

or subcontractors and any damage caused must be made good by the contractors at his 

own expense. 

15.6 If the contractor has quoted the items under the deemed exports, then it will be the 

responsibility of the contractor to get all the benefits under deemed exports from the 

Government. The Owner’s responsibility shall only be limited to the issuance of required 

certificates. The quotation will be unconditional and phrases like “subject to availability 

of deemed exports benefit” etc. will not find place in it 


(SPECIMEN) 

BANK GUARANTEE FOR MOBILISATION ADVANCE 

(On Non-Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value) 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., 

(Address as applicable) 

1. In consideration of M/s Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., Government of India 

Company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 having its Registered Office at 

17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay - 400 020 (hereinafter called the "Corporation" 

which expression shall include its successors in business and assigns having placed 

an order on M/s ___________________________________ a partnership firm/sole 

proprietor/a Company registered under the Companies Act 1956, having its office at 

________(complete address) ______________ (hereinafter called "the 

supplier/contractor" (which expression shall include its successors in business and 

assigns) vide Purchase Order No. _________________ dated 

__________________ for (specify nature of job) ________________ (hereinafter 

called "the Order" which expression shall include any amendments / alterations 

thereto as issued by "the Corporation") for the supply of goods to/the execution of 

service for "the Corporation" and having agreed to pay the suppliers as and by way 

of advance upto a sum of Rupees __________________ being _________ % of the 

value of "the Order" in terms of "the order" on production of an acceptable Bank 

Guarantee for an amount of Rs._________________. 

2. We, __________________ Bank (hereinafter referred to as "the Bank") , do at the 

request and on behalf of "The Suppliers / Contractor" hereby agree to pay to "the 

Corporation" without any demur on first demand an amount not exceeding Rs. 

________ (in words) against any loss or damage, costs, to or suffered by "the 

Corporation" by reason of any breach on the part of "the Supplier/Contractor" of any 

of the terms and conditions of the said "Order". 

3. We, ________________ Bank, further agree that "the Corporation" shall be the sole 

judge whether the said "Supplier/Contractor" has committed breach of any of the 

terms and conditions of "the Order" and the extent of loss, damage, cost, charges 

and expenses suffered or incurred or would be suffered or incurred by "the 

Corporation" on account thereof and we waive in favour of "the Corporation" all the 

rights and defense to which we as guarantors and/or the supplier may be entitled to. 

4. We, __________________ Bank, further agree that the amount demanded by "the 

Corporation" as such shall be final and binding on "the Bank" as to "the Bank's" 

liability to pay the amount demanded and "the Bank" undertake to pay "the 

Corporation" the amount so demanded on first demand without any demur 

notwithstanding any dispute raised by "the Supplier/Contractor" or any suit or other 

legal proceedings including arbitration pending before any court, tribunal or arbitrator 

relating thereto, our liability under this guarantee being absolute and unconditional. 

5. We, _____________ Bank, further agree that the guarantee herein contained shall 

remain in full force and continue to have full effect so long as the said amount 

remains unadjusted. 

6. We, _______________ Bank, further agree with "the Corporation" that "the 

Corporation" shall have the fullest liberty without any consent and without affecting in 

any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and condition of the 

said "Order" or to extended time of performance by "the Supplier/Contractor" from 

time to time or to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers

exercisable by "the Corporation" against "the Supplier / Contractor" and to forbear to 

enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to "the Order" and we shall not be 

relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation or extension being granted 

to "the Corporation" or for any forbearance, act or omission of "the 

Supplier/Contractor" or any such matter of things, whatsoever which under the law 

relating to sureties would, but for these provisions, have the effect of relieving us. 

7. We, __________________ Bank, hereby lastly undertake not to revoke this 

guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of "the Corporation" 

in writing. 

8. Not withstanding anything contained herein above : 

i) Our liability under this guarantee shall not exceed Rs.......... 

ii) This Bank Guarantee shall be valid upto and including .......; and 

iii) We are liable to pay the guarantee amount or any part thereof under this Bank 

Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or # 

before the expiry of 30 days from the date of expiry of this guarantee. 

9. This guarantee shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up, 

dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of "the Supplier/Contractor", but 

shall in all respects and/for all purposes be binding and operative on "the Bank" until 

payment of all moneys payable by "the Supplier/Contractor" in terms thereof. 

10. "The Bank" has power to issue this guarantor in favour of "the Corporation" in terms 

of the documents and/or the agreement/contract or MOU entered into between "the 

Supplier/Contractor" and "the Bank" in this regard. 

IN WITNESS whereof, Bank of _________________, has executed this document at 

____________________ on _________________ 200 . 

____________________________ 

(FOR _________ BANK) 

(by its constituted attorney) 

(signature of a person authorized 

to sign on behalf of "the Bank")

(SPECIMEN) 

BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCES 

(on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value) 

To, 



In CONSIDERATION OF MESSRS. HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION 

LIMITED, a Government of India Company registered under the Companies Act 1956, 

having its registered office at 17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay - 400 020 (hereinafter 

called "the Corporation" which expression shall include its successors in business and 

assigns) having placed an order on Messrs ___________________ a partnership 

firm/sole proprietor business/ a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 

having its office at _______________________ (hereinafter called "the Supplier" which 

expression shall include its successors and assigns) vide Order No. ____________ 

dated _________ 

(hereinafter called "the Order" which expression shall include any 

amendments/alterations thereto as issued by "the Corporation") for the supply of 

goods/to the execution of Service for "the Corporation" and having agreed to pay the 

supplier as and by way of advance upto a sum of Rs. _________ (Rupees 

____________________________________ only ) being _____ % of the value of the 

order in terms of "the Order" on production of an acceptable Bank Guarantee for an 

amount of Rs. ____________ (Rupees __________________________________ only) 

1. We, ____________________ Bank having office at _________________ (hereafter 

referred to as "the Bank") do at the request and on behalf of "the Supplier's" hereby 

agree to pay "the Corporation" without any demur on first demand an amount not 

exceeding Rs. _________ (Rs. ______________________ only) against any loss or 

damage, costs, charges and expenses caused to or suffered or would be caused to 

or suffered by "the Corporation" by reason of any breach on the part of "the Supplier" 

of any of the terms and conditions of the said order. 

2. We, _______________ Bank further agree that "the Corporation" shall be sole judge 

whether the said "Supplier" has committed breach of any of the terms and conditions 

of "the Order" and the extent of loss, damage, cost charges and expenses suffered 

or incurred or would be suffered or incurred by "the Corporation" on account thereof 

and we waive in favour of "the Corporation" all the rights and defences to which we 

as guarantors and/or "the Supplier" may be entitled to. 

3. We, ___________________ Bank further agree that the amount demanded by "the 

Corporation" as such shall be final and binding on "the Bank" as to "the Bank's" 

liability to pay and amount demanded and "the Bank" undertake to pay "the 

Corporation" the amount so demanded on first demand and without any demur 

notwithstanding any dispute raised by "the Supplier" or any suit or other legal 

proceedings including arbitration pending before any court tribunal or arbitrator 

relating thereto, our liability under this guarantee being absolute and unconditional. 

(We __________________ Bank further agree that the guarantee herein contained 

shall remain in full force and continue to have full effect so long as the said amount 

remains unadjusted, provided, however, the value of the guarantee shall 

progressively reduce upon any adjustments being made by "the Corporation" against 

the said advance and "the Corporation" rights shall extend only to the value of the 

unadjusted amount. 

4. We, __________________ Bank further agree with "the Corporation" that "the 

Corporation" shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in 

any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the

said "order"/or to extend time of performance by "the Supplier" from time to time or to 

postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers exercisable by "the 

Corporation" against "the Supplier" and to forbear to enforce any of the terms and 

conditions relating to "the Order" and we shall not be relieved from our liability by 

reason of any such variation or extension being granted to "the Supplier" or for any 

forbearance, act or omission on "the Supplier" or by any such matter or things 

whatsoever which under the law relating to suretics would be for this provisions have 

the effect of relieving us. 






before the expiry of 30 days from the date of expiry of this guarantee 

6. We, ________________ Bank further undertake not to revoke this guarantee during 

its currency except with the previous consent of "the Corporation" in writing. 

7. We, ____________________ Bank lastly agree that "the Bank" liability under this 

guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of "the Supplier". 

8. We, _________________ Bank has power to issue this guarantee in favour of "the 

Corporation" in terms of the documents and/or the agreement/contract or MOU 

entered into between"the supplier" and "the Bank" in this regard. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bank has executed this document on this 

________________ 

day of ________________________ 

_______________________ 

(FOR _________ BANK) 




(SPECIMEN) 

BANK GUARANTEE FOR PERFORMANCE OF THE OBLIGATIONS OF SUPPLIER / 

CONTRACTOR 

(on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value) 

To, 



IN CONSIDERATION OF THE HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. a 

Government of India Company registered under the Companies Act, 1956, having its 

registered office at 17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay - 400 020 (hereinafter called "the 

Corporation" which expression shall include its successors and assigns) having awarded 

to M/s. ____________ 

______________________________________________ a partnership firm/sole 

proprietor business/a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 having its 

office at ______________________________ (hereinafter referred to as "the Supplier" 

which expression shall wherever the subject or context so permits includes its 

successors and assigns) a supply contract in terms inter alia, of "the Corporation's" 

Order No. ____________ dated __________________ and the General purchase 

conditions of "the Corporation" and upon the condition of "supplier's" furnishing security 

for the performance of "the Supplier's" obligations and/or discharge of "the supplier's" 

liability under and/or in connection with the said supply contract upto a sum of Rs. 

_______________ (Rupees_____________________) amounting to 10% (ten percent) 

of the total contract value. 

We, ______________________ (hereinafter called "the Bank" which expression shall 

include its successors and assigns) hereby jointly and severally undertake and 

guarantee to pay to "the Corporation" in rupees forthwith on demand in writing and 

without protest or demur of any and all moneys anywise payable by "the Supplier" to "the 

Corporation" under, in respect of or in connection with the said supply contract inclusive 

of all the Corporation's losses and damage and costs, (inclusive between attorney and 

client) charges, and expenses and other moneys anywise payable in respect of the 

above as specified in any notice of demand made by "the Corporation" to the Bank with 

reference to this Guarantee upto and aggregate limit of Rs.___________ (Rupees 

__________________________ ) and "the Bank" hereby agrees with "the Corporation" 

that: 

1. This Guarantee/Undertaking shall be a continuing Guarantee / Undertaking and shall 

remain valid and irrecoverable for all claims of "the Corporation" and liabilities of "the 

Supplier" arising upto and until midnight of _______________ 

2. This Guarantee/Undertaking shall be in addition to any other guarantee or security 

whatsoever that "the Corporation" may now or any time anywise have in relation to 

"the Supplier's obligation/liabilities under and/or connection with the said supply 

contract, and "the Corporation" shall have full authority to take recourse to or enforce 

this security in preference to the other security(ies) at its sole discretion and no 

failure on the part of "the Corporation" to enforcing or requiring enforcement to any 

other security shall have the effect of releasing "the Bank" from its full liability 

hereunder. 

3. "The Corporation" shall be at liberty without reference to "the Bank" and without 

affecting the full liability of "the Bank" hereunder to take any other security in respect 

of "the Supplier's" obligation and/or liabilities under or in connection with the said

supply contract and to vary the term vis-a-vis "the supplier" of the said supply 

contract or to grant time and/or indulgence to "the Supplier" or to reduce or to 

increase or otherwise vary the prices of the total contract value or to release or to 

forebear from enforcement of all or any of the obligations of "the supplier" under the 

said supply contract and/or the remedies of "the Corporation" under any other 

security(ies) now or hereafter held by "the Corporation" and no such dealing(s), 

variation(s) or other indulgence(s) or agreement(s) with "the supplier" or release of 

forbearance whatsoever shall have the effect of releasing "the Bank" from its full 

liability to "the Corporation" hereunder or of prejudicing rights of "the Corporation" 

against "the Bank". 

4. This Guarantee/Undertaking shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or 

winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of "the supplier" but 

shall in all respects and for all purposes be binding and operative until payment of all 

moneys payable to "the Corporation" in terms hereof. 

5. "The Bank" hereby waives all rights at any time inconsistent with the terms of this 

Guarantee/Undertaking and the obligations of "the Bank" in terms hereof shall not be 

anywise affected or suspended by reason of any dispute having been raised by "the 

suppliers" (whether or not pending before any arbitrator, officer, tribunal or court) or 

any denial of liability by "the supplier" or any other order of communication 

whatsoever by "the supplier" stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or prevent 

any payment by "the Bank" to "the Corporation" in terms hereof. 

6. The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by "the Corporation" to "the 

Bank" as liable to be paid to "the Corporation" by "the supplier" or as suffered or 

incurred by "the Corporation" on account of any losses or damages or costs, 

charges/and/or expenses shall be as between "the Bank" and "the Corporation" be 

conclusive of the amount so liable to be paid to "the Corporation" or suffered or 

incurred by "the Corporation", as the case may be, and payable by "the Bank" to "the 

Corporation", in terms hereof. 






before the expiry of 30 days from the date of expiry of this guarantee. 

8. "The Bank" has power to issue this guarantee in favour of "the Corporation" in terms 

of the documents and/or the agreement/contract or MOU entered into between "the 

supplier" and "the Bank" in this regard. 

IN WITNESS Where of __________________ Bank, has executed this document at 

________________ on _______________ 200 . 

_______________________Bank 




(SPECIMEN) 

COMPOSITE BANK GUARANTEE FOR MOBILISATION ADVANCE, SECURITY 

DEPOSIT/RETENTION MONEY/PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE 

(On Non-Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value) 

TO : Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited 


IN CONSIDERATION OF MESSRS. HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION 

LIMITED, a Government of India Company registered under the Companies Act, 1956, 

having its registered office at 17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay-20 (hereinafter called 

"The Corporation" (which expression shall include its successor in business and 

assigns) having placed an order on Messers ............................ a partnership firm/sole 

proprietor business/a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 having its 

office at .............. (hereinafter called "the supplier" (which expression shall include 

executors, administrators and assigns) vide order No....................... dated.............. 

(hereinafter called "the order" which expression shall include any 

amendments/alterations to "the order" issued by "the Corporation") for the supply of 

goods to/execution of services for "the Corporation" and "the Corporation" having agreed 

: 

a) not to insist upon immediate payment of Security deposit for the fulfilment and 

performance of the said order 

b) to pay "the supplier" as and by way of advance upto a sum of Rupees__________ 

(Rupees _____________________________ only) being ____% of the value of "the 

order"; 

c) that "the supplier" shall furnish a security for the performance of "the supplier's" 

obligations and/or discharge of "the supplier's" liability in connection with the said 

"order"; and "the Corporation" having agreed with "the supplier" to accept a 

composite Bank Guarantee for the mobilisation advance, security deposit, retention 

money and performance guarantee. 

We, .................................................... Bank having office at ............................................ 

(hereinafter referred to as "the Bank" which expression shall includes its successors and 

assigns) at the request and on behalf of "the supplier" hereby agree to pay to "the 

Corporation"without any demur on first demand an amount not exceeding Rs........... 

(Rupees.............................only) against any loss or damage, costs, charges and 

expenses caused to or suffered by "the Corporation" by reason of non performance and 

fulfilment or for any breach on the part of "the supplier" of any of the terms and 

conditions of the said "order". 

2. We, ............................. Bank further agree that "the Corporation" shall be sole judge 

whether the said "Supplier" has failed to perform or fulfill the said "order" in terms thereof 

or committed breach of any terms and conditions of "the order" and the extent of loss, 

damage, cost, charges and expenses suffered or incurred or would be suffered or 

incurred by "the Corporation" on account thereof and we waive in the favour of "the 

Corporation" all the rights and defences to which we as guarantors and/or "the Supplier" 

may be entitled to. 

3. We, ................................. Bank further agree that the amount demanded by "the 

Corporation" as such shall be final and binding on "the Bank" as to "the Bank" 's liability 

to pay and the amount demanded and "the Bank" undertake to pay "the Corporation" the 

amount so demanded on first demand and without any demur notwithstanding any 

dispute raised by "the Supplier" or any suit or other legal proceedings including 

arbitration pending before any court, tribunal or arbitrator relating thereto, our liability 

under this guarantee being absolute and unconditional.

4. We, .................................. Bank further agree with "the Corporation" that "the 

Corporation" shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in any 

manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said 

"order"/or to extend time of performance by "the Supplier" from time to time or to 

postpone for any time to time any of the powers exercisable by "the Corporation" against 

"the Supplier" and to forbear to enforce any of the terms and conditions relating to "the 

order" and we shall not be relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation or 

extension being granted to "the Supplier" or for any forbearance, act or ommission on 

the part of "the Corporation" or any indulgence by "the Corporation" to "the Supplier" or 

by any such matter or things whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would 

but for this provision have the effect of relieving us. 

5. However, it has been agreed between "the Supplier" and "the Corporation" that there 

shall be only one Composite Bank Guarantee for both the advance and security deposit 

performance guarantee/Retention Money @ of ____% valid till the end of the defects 

liability period as per the terms of the P.O. No. _______________ dated 

______________ and that in proportion with the recovery of advance @ ______% per 

bill the same amount/value automatically stands credited to the defects liability 

account/security deposit or retention money as the case may be and will continue to be 

credited/treated till the entire advance of Rs._______________________ is fully 

recovered from the running bills and from the date of full recovery of the advance of 

Rs.__________________ this guarantee automatically, shall stand valid towards the 

____% retention money/defects liability, fully valid in all respects unto a further period of 

six months, as per the Purchase Order of "the Corporation". 





Guarantee only and only if you serve upon us a written claim or demand on or # before 

the expiry of 30 days from the date of expiry of this guarantee. 

7. We, ........................................ Bank further undertake not to revoke this guarantee 

during its currency except with the previous consent of "the Corporation" in writing. 

8. We, ......................................... Bank lastly agree that "the Bank"'s liability under this 

guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of "the Supplier". 

9. "The Bank" has power to issue this guarantee in favour of "the Corporation" in terms 

of the documents and/or the Agreement/Contract or MOU entered into between "the 

Supplier" and "the Bank" in this regard. 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bank has executed this document on this 

............................. day of ........................... 

For ........................ Bank 


(Signature of a person authorised 

to sign on behalf of "the Bank")*

(SPECIMEN) 

(INDEMNITY BOND) 

(TO BE NOTORISED AND ON STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE) 

TO, 

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPN. LTD. 


Dear Sirs, 

WHEREAS Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, a Government of India Company, 

registered under the Companies Act, 1956, having its Registered Office at 17, Jamshedji 

Tata Road, Bombay – 400020 (hereinafter called "the Indemnified" which expression 

shall include its successors and assigns) has awarded to M/s. .......................................... 

a Partnership Firm/Sole Proprietor Business/a company having its Registered Office at 

....................................................... (hereinafter called "the Indemnifier", which 

expression shall include its successors and assigns) a contract for conditions set out, 

inter-alia, in "the Indemnified" 's Purchase Order No. ............................. dated 

.................. (hereinafter referred to as "The Said Contract") to "the Indemnifier". 

AND WHEREAS "the Indemnified" has agreed to supply to "the Indemnifier" raw 

material/components to the value of Rs......... (Rupees .............................................. 

only) for incorporation in fabrication by "the Indemnifier" in terms of "the said contract", 

the components/raw material to be supplied by "the Indemnified" to "the Indemnifier" for 

the said fabrication, (hereinafter, for the sake of brevity, referred to as "the said 

material") and pending fabrication and delivery at job-site of the completed fabricated 

work(s) incorporating "the said material" and accounting for "the said material" shall be 

under the sole custody and charge of "the Indemnifier" and shall be kept, stored, altered, 

worked upon and/or fabricated at the sole risk and expenses of "the Indemnifier" ; 

As a Pre-condition to the supply of "the said material" by "the Indemnified" to "the 

Indemnifier", the Indemnified" has required "the Indemnifier" to furnish to "the 

Indemnified" security in the manner and upon terms and conditions hereinafter indicated 

: 

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises aforesaid "the Indemnifier" Shri 

..................................., Shri ............................ all directors/partners/sole proprietor of "the 

Indemnifier" in consideration of aforesaid "contract" hereby irrevocably and 

unconditionally and jointly and severally undertake to idemnify and always keep "the 

Indemnified" from and against all loss, damage and destruction (inclusive but not limited 

to any or all loss or damage or destruction to or of "the said material" or any item or part 

thereof) by theft, fire, flood, storm, tempest, lightning, explosion, storage, chemical or 

physical action or reaction, bending, wrapping, exposure, rusting, faulty workmanship, 

faulty fabrication or faulty method of technique of fabrication, riot, civil commotion or 

other act of omission or commission whatsoever within or beyond the control of "the 

Indemnifier", misuse and misappropriation by "the Indemnifier's" servants and/or agents 

whatsoever to, of or in "the said material" or any part or item thereof between the date 

that the same or relative part or item thereof was supplied to "the Indemnifier" upto and 

until the return to "the Indemnified" on due dates of "the said material" or relative part or 

item thereof or completed fabricated work(s) incorporating the said material AND jointly 

and severally undertake to pay to "the Indemnified" forthwith on first demand in writing 

without protest or demur the value of "the said material" or item part thereof lost, 

damaged, destroyed, misused and/or misappropriated, as the case may be, inclusive of 

"the Indemnified" 's cost and expenses (inclusive but not limited to handling, 

transportation, cartage, insurance, freight, packing and inspection costs and/or 

expenses) as specified in the said demand. 

AND "the Indemnifier" hereby agree with "the Indemnified" that :

1. This Indemnity shall remain valid and irrevocable until the settlement of all claims of 

"the Indemnified" arising hereunder : 

2. This Indemnity shall be in addition to any other Indemnity, Guarantee or Security 

whatsoever that "the Indemnified" may now or any time anywise have in relation to 

"the Indemnifier" 's obligations/liabilities under and/or in connection with the said 

contract inclusive of "the said material" and "the Indemnified" shall have full authority 

to take recourse to or enforce this security in preference to the other security (ies) at 

its sole discretion, and no failure on the part of "the Indemnified" in enforcing or 

requiring enforcement of any other security shall have the effect of releasing "the 

Indemnifier" from its full liability hereunder : 

3. "The Indemnified" shall be at liberty without reference to "the Indemnifier" and without 

affecting the full liability of "the Indemnifier" hereunder to take any other such 

security in respect of "the Indemnifier" 's obligations and/or liabilities under or in 

connection with the "said contract" inclusive of "the said material" and to vary the 

terms vis-a-vis "the Indemnifier" of "the said contract" or to grant time and/or 

indulgence to "the Indemnifier" or to reduce or to increase or otherwise vary the 

prices or the total contract value or the quantity, quality, description or value of the 

said material or to release or to forbear from endorsement of all or any of the 

obligations of "the Indemnifier" under the said contract (inclusive of anything in 

respect of "the said material") and/or the remedies of "the Indemnified" under any 

other security(ies) now or hereinafter held by "the Indemnified" and no such 

dealing(s), variations(s), reduction(s), increase(s) or other indulgence(s) or 

arrangement(s) with "the Indemnifier" or release or forbearance whatsoever shall 

have the effect of releasing "the Indemnifier" from their full liability to "the 

Indemnified" hereunder or of anywise prejudicing rights of "the Indemnified" against 

"the Indemnifier" and "the Indemnifier" hereby waive all rights, if any, at any time, 

inconsistent with the terms of this Indemnity. 

4. This Indemnity shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up, 

dissolution, or change of constitution or insolvency of "the Indemnifier" and the 

obligations of "the Indemnifier" in terms hereof shall not be anywise affected or 

suspended by reason of any dispute or disputes having been raised by "the 

Indemnifier" (whether now pending before any Arbitrator, Officer, Tribunal or Court) 

or any denial of liability by "the Indemnifier" or any other order or communication 

whatsoever by "the Indemnifier" stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or 

prevent any payment by "the Indemnifier" to "the Indemnified" in terms hereof : 

5. The mere statement made by or on behalf of "the Indemnified" in any notice or 

demand or other writing addressed to "the Indemnifier" as to any of "the said 

material" or item or part thereof supplied to "the Indemnifier" having been lost, 

damaged, destroyed, misused or misappropriated while in the custody of "the 

Indemnifier" before or after completion of the completed fabricated work(s) 

incorporating "the said material" and delivery at job site thereof shall as between "the 

Indemnifier" and "the Indemnified" be conclusive of the factum of "the said material" 

or item or part thereof having been supplied to "the Indemnifier" and/or the loss, 

damage, destruction, misuse or misappropriation thereof, as the case may be, while 

in the custody of "the Indemnifier" and/or prior to the completion of the completed 

fabricated work(s) and delivery to job site thereof without necessity on the part of 

"the Indemnified" to produce any documentary proof or other evidence whatsoever in 

support of this; 

6. The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by "the Indemnified" to "the 

Indemnifier" as the value of any of "the said material", lost, damaged, destroyed or 

misused or misappropriated, inclusive relative to the cost and expenses incurred by

"the Indemnified" in connection therewith shall as between "the Indemnifier" and "the 

Indemnified" be conclusive of the value of such "said material" and the said costs 

and expenses as also of the amount liable to be paid by "the Indemnifer" to "the 

Indemnified" in terms and for the purpose of, without necessity for "the Indemnfied" 

to produce any voucher, bill or other documentation or evidence whatsoever in 

support thereof. 

In witness whereof "the Indemnifier" have hereunto set and subscribed his hand this day 

and year first hereinabove written in the presence of witnesses. 

Yours faithfully, 

1) 

2) 

3) 

WITNESSES 

1. 

2.

HPCL – Mumbai Refinery INTEGRITY PACT CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORK 

18-3188 Page 2 of 7 

ATTACHMENT I 

AGREEMENT 

No. Dated 

To, 

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED 

Sub : Purchase of Bidding Documents 

Ref. Tender no. 

HPCL and the Bidder agree that the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an offer made on the condition that 

the bidder will sign the Integrity Pact and the Bid would be kept open in its original form without 

variation or modification for a period of (state the number of days from the last date for the receipt of 

tenders stated in the NIT) days AND THE MAKING OF THE BID SHALL BE REGARDED AS AN 

UNCONDITIONAL AND ABSOLUTE ACCEPTANCE of this condition of the NIT. 

They confirm acceptance and compliance with the Integrity Pact in letter and spirit. They further agree 

that the contract consisting of the above conditions of NIT as the offer and the submission of Bid as 

the Acceptance shall be separate and distinct from the contract which will come into existence when 

bid is finally accepted by HPCL. 

The consideration for this separate initial contract preceding the main contract is that HPCL is not 

agreeable to sell the NIT to the Bidder and to consider the bid to be made except on the condition that 

the bid shall be kept open for (so many ) days after the last date fixed for the receipt of the bids and 

the Bidder desires to make a bid on this condition and after entering into this separate initial contract 

with HPCL. 

HPCL promises to consider the bid on this condition and the Bidder agrees to keep the bid open for 

the required period. These reciprocal promises form the consideration for this separate initial contract 

between the parties. 

If Bidder fails to honour the above terms and conditions , HPCLshall have unqualified , absolute and 

unfettered right to encash / forfeit the bid security submitted in this behalf. 

Yours faithfully, Yours faithfully 

(BIDDER) (PURCHASER) 

(One copy of this agreement duly signed must be returned alongwith offer). 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1.5_Integrity Pact_Civil Stru work.doc

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORK INTEGRITY PACT HPCL – Mumbai Refinery 

Page 3 of 7 18 - 3188 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1.5_Integrity Pact_Civil Stru work.doc 

ATTACHMENT II 

To be executed on plain paper and applicable for all tenders of value above Rs.1 crore) 

INTEGRITY PACT 

Between 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) hereinafter referred to as “The Principal”, 

and 

………………………………………………………. hereinafter referred to as “The Bidder/Contractor” 

Preamble 

The Principal intends to award, under laid down organization procedures, contract/s for 

………………………………………… The Principle values full compliance with all relevant laws and 

regulations, and the principles of economic use of resources, and of fairness and transparency in its 

relations with its Bidders/s and Contractor/s. 

In order to achieve these goals, the Principal cooperates with the renowned international Non- 

Governmental Organisation “Transparency International” (TI). Following TI’s national and international 

experience, the Principal will appoint an external independent Monitor who will monitor the tender process 

and the execution of the contract for compliance with the principles mentioned above. 

Section 1 – Commitments of the Principal 

(1) The Principal commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption and to observe 

the following principles: 

1. No employee of the Principal, personally or through family members, will in connection 

with the tender for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a promise for or accept, 

for him/herself or third person, any material or immaterial benefit which he/she is not 

legally entitled to. 

2. The principal will, during the tender process treat all Bidders with equity and reason. The 

Principal will in particular, before and during the tender process, provide to all Bidders the 

same information and will not provide to any Bidder confidential / additional information 

through which the Bidder could obtain an advantage in relation to the tender process or 

the contract execution. 

3. The principal will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons. 

(2) If the Principal obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which is a criminal 

offence under the relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, or if there be a substantive suspicion in 

this regard, the Principal will inform its Vigilance Office and in addition can initiate disciplinary 

actions.


18-3188 Page 4 of 7 


Section 2 – Commitments of the Bidder / Contractor 

(1) The Bidder / Contractor commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption. He 

commits himself to observe the following principles during his participation in the tender process 

and during the contract execution. 

1. The Bidder / Contractor will not, directly or through any other person or firm, offer, 

promise or give to any of the Principal’s employees involved in the tender process or the 

execution of the contract or to any third person any material or immaterial benefit which 

he/she is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in exchange any advantage of any kind 

whatsoever during the tender process or during the execution of the contract. 

2. The Bidder / Contractor will not enter with other Bidders into any undisclosed agreement 

or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular to prices, 

specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-submission of bids 

or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to introduce cartelisation in the bidding 

process. 

3. The Bidder / Contractor will not commit any offence under the relevant Anti-corruption 

Laws of India; further the Bidder / Contractor will not use improperly, for purposes of 

competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information or document provided 

by the Principal as part of the business relationship, regarding plans, technical proposals 

and business details, including information contained or transmitted electronically. 

4. The Bidder / Contractor will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all payment he has 

made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any other intermediaries 

in connection with the award of the contract. 

(2) The Bidder / Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences outlined above or be an 

accessory to such offences. 

Section 3-Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts 

If the Bidder, before contract award has committed a transgression through a violation of Section 2 or in 

any other form such as to put his reliability or credibility as Bidder into question, the Principal is entitled to 

disqualify the Bidder from the tender process or to terminate the contract, if already signed, for such 

reason. 

(1) If the Bidder/Contractor has committed a transgression through a violation of Section 2 such as 

to put his reliability or credibility into question, the Principal is entitled also to exclude the Bidder / 

Contractor from future contract award processes. The imposition and duration of the exclusion will be 

determined by the severity of the transgression. The severity will be determined by the circumstances of 

the case, in particular the number of transgressions, the position of the transgressors within the company 

hierarchy of the Bidder and the amount of the damage. The exclusion will be imposed for a minimum of 6 

months and maximum of 3 years. 

(2) A transgression is considered to have occurred if the Principal after due consideration of the 

available evidence, concludes that no reasonables doubt is possible. 

(3) The Bidder accepts and undertakes to respect and uphold the Principal’s absolute right to resort 

to and impose such exclusion and further accepts and undertakes not to challenge or question such


Page 5 of 7 18 - 3188 

exclusion on any ground, including the lack of any hearing before the decision to resort to such exclusion 

is taken. This undertaking is given freely and after obtaining independent legal advice. 

(4) If the Bidder / Contractor can prove that he has restored / recouped the damage caused by him and 

has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the Principal may revoke the exclusion prematurely. 


Section 4 – Compensation for Damages 

(1) If the Principal has disqualified the Bidder from the tender process prior to the award according 

to Section 3, the Principal is entitled to demand and recover from the Bidder liquidated damages 

equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security. 

(2) If the Principal has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the Principle is entitled to 

terminate the contract according to Section 3, the Principal shall be entitled to demand and recover from 

the Contractor liquidated damages equivalent to Security Deposit / Performance Bank Guarantee. 

(3) The bidder agrees and undertakes to pay the said amounts without protest or demur subject 

only to condition that if the Bidder / Contractor can prove and establish that the exclusion of the Bidder 

from the tender process or the termination of the contract after the contract award has caused no damage 

or less damage than the amount of the liquidated damages, the Bidder / Contractor shall compensate the 

Principal only to the extent of the damage in the amount proved. 

Section 5 – Previous Transgression 

(1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last 3 years with any other 

Company in any country conforming to the TI approach or with any other Public Sector Enterprise in India 

that could justify his exclusion from the tender process. 

(2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from the tender 

process or the contract, if already awarded, can be terminated for such reason. 

Section 6 – Equal treatment of all Bidders / Contractors / Subcontractors 

(1) The Bidder / Contractor undertakes to demand from all subcontractors a commitment in 

conformity with this Integrity Pact, and to submit it to the Principal before contract signing. 

(2) The Principal will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with all Bidders, 

Contractors and Subcontractors. 

(3) The Principal will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign this Pact or 

violate its provisions. 

Section 7 – Criminal charges against violating Bidders/Contractors/Subcontractors 

If the Principal obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or Subcontractor, or of an employee 

or a representative or an associate of a Bidder, Contractor or Subcontractor which constitutes corruption, 

or if the Principal has substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal will inform the Vigilance Office.


18-3188 Page 6 of 7 

Section 8 – External Independent Monitor / Monitors 

(three in number depending on the size of the contract) 

(to be decided by the Chairperson of the Principal) 

(1) The Principal appoints competent and credible external independent Monitor for this Pact. The 

task of the Monitor is to review independently and objectively, whether and to what extent the 

parties comply with the obligations under this agreement. 

(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and performs his 

functions neutrally and independently. He reports to the Chairperson of the Board of the Principal. 

(3) The Contractors accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction to all Project 

documentation of the Principal including that provided by the Contractor. The Contractor will also 

grant the Monitor, upon his request and demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and 

unconditional access to this project documentation. The same is applicable to Subcontractors. 

The Monitor is under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the Bidder / 

Contractor / Subcontractor with confidentiality. 

(4) The Principal will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings among the 

parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an impact on the contractual 

relations between the Principal and the Contractor. The parties offer to the Monitor the option to 

participate in such meetings. 

(5) As soon as the Monitor notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement, he will so 

inform the Management of the Principal and request the Management to discontinue or heal the 

violation, or to take other relevant action. The Monitor can in this regard submit non-binding 

recommendation. Beyond this, the Monitor has no right to demand from the parties that they act in 

a specific manner, refrain from action or tolerate action. However, the Independent External 

Monitor shall give an opportunity to the bidder / contractor to present its case before making its 

recommendations to the Principal. 

(6) The Monitor will submit a written report to the Chairperson of the Board of the Principal within 8 to 

10 weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by the ‘Principal’ and, should the 

occasion arise, submit proposals for correcting problematic situations. 

(7) Monitor shall be entitled to compensation on the same terms as being extended to / provided to 

Outside Expert Committee members / Chairman as prevailing with Principal. 

(8) If the Monitor has reported to the Chairperson of the Board a substantiated suspicion of an 

offence under relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, and the Chairperson has not, within 

reasonable time, taken visible action to proceed against such offence or reported it to the 

Vigilance Office, the Monitor may also transmit this information directly to the Central Vigilance 

Commissioner, Government of India. 

(9) The word ‘Monitor’ would include both singular and plural. 

Section 9 – Pact Duration 

This Pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the Contractor 12 months after the 

last payment under the respective contract, and for all other Bidders 6 months after the contract has been 

awarded. 

If any claim is made / lodged during this time, the same shall be binding and continue to be valid despite 

the lapse of this pact as specified above, unless it is discharged / determined by Chairperson of the 

Principal. 

H:\commercial_tender\Civil Structural Work\final\01_1.5_Integrity Pact_Civil Stru work.doc


Page 7 of 7 18 - 3188 


Section 10 – Other provisions 

(1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is the Registered 

Office of the Principal, i.e. Mumbai. The Arbitration clause provided in the main tender document / 

contract shall not be applicable for any issue / dispute arising under Integrity Pact. 

(2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in writing. Side 

agreements have not been made. 

(3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be signed by all partners 

or consortium members. 

(4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, the remainder of this 

agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to come to an agreement to their 

original intentions. 

----------------------------- ----------------------------- 

For the Principal For the Bidder/Contractor 

Place……………………………. Witness 1:…………………… 

Date……………………………… Witness 2:…………………..

MILESTONE DATES AND INDICATIVE SCHEDULE 

TENDER FOR CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS 

(SUB STATION, SATELLITE RACK ROOM & COMPRESSOR SHED) 

18 – 3188 LOBS QUALITY UPGRADATION PROJECT – HPCL MUMBAI 

Page 1 of 1 

3.1 Milestone dates & Indicative schedule. 

MILESTONE DATES AND INDICATIVE SCHEDULE 

The entire work covered in this document shall be completed in all respects within a 

period of 11 (Eleven) Months starting from award of contract (Issue of LOI). 

The following milestones to be achieved to complete the total work in stipulated 

period. 

Sl. 

No 

Milestones 

Completion Period 

(From LOI date) 

1 Mobilisation at Site Within 15 (Fifteen) days 

2 

3 

4 

Completion of all works related to the Sub Station 

Building 

Completion of all works related to the Air 

Compressor House 

Completion of all works related to the Satellite 

Rack Room 

Within 10 (Ten) months 

Within 6 (Six) months 

Within 11 (Eleven) months 

The bidder shall enclose his preliminary schedule bar chart in support of this. 

I accept to adhere to the Time Schedule as above. 

Seal of Bidder Signature of Bidder

SR. 

NO. 

1 POWER 

Contractor shall make arrangemnt of low noise 

power generating machines for Construction 

1.1 

power at his own cost both at fabrication shop and 

at site. 

Contractor shall take the necessory approvals of 

the power generating sets form the concerned 

1.2 

authotrity prior to start the work and submit the 

approval to owner / Consultants. 

2 WATER 

Water shall be provided by owner free of cost at 

2.1 one point . Further distribution at site as required 

shall be the contractors responsibility. 

3 READY MIX CONCRETE 

Contractor shall use only Ready mix concrete from 

3.1 Approved vendors recommended by 

Owner/consultant. 

Contractor shall provide the sufficient Transit 

3.2 mixer , Concrete pumps and acessories in timely 

manner. 

4 SAFETY 

Contractor shall provide all the PPEs to all the 

4.1 

workers and staff as indicted in the PPE Matrix 

Contractor shall provide first aid center at site as 

4.2 

well as at fabrication shop 

4.3 




HPCL MUMBAI REFINERY 

TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE - CONFIRMATION BY BIDDER. 

DESCRIPTION OF ACTIVITY 

Contractor shall provide Ambulance round the 

clock at site & at fabrication shop for emergency. 

4.4 Contractor shall use only steel tubular scaffolding. 

Page 1 of 3 

BIDDER'S 

CONFIRMATION 

REMARKS

SR. 

NO. 

4.5 







All lifting tools and tackles shall be certified by the 

compitant authority. Contractor shall submit the 

test certificates of the same to the owner / 

Consultants prior to use well in advance. 

Contractor shall arrange the safety training room 

out side the refinery and shall provide the safety 

4.6 

induction/Training to all the staff as well as 

workers prior to their entry to Refinery. 

4.7 No heavy lifts will be permited after sunset. 

Contractor shall arrange and provide GI sheet 

4.8 hard barricad for the work as instructed by Owner 

/Consultant. 

5 STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS 

5.1 

Contractor shall Submit labour license to owner 

/consultant prior to the commencement of work 

5.2 Contractor shall arrange PF, ESIC for the workers 

5.3 Comply with the labour act 

5.4 

5.5 

5.6 

5.7 

Contractor shall pay to the workers as per the 

minimum wage act as applicable in the refinery. 

Contractor shall take workmencompensation 

policy 

Contractor shall submit the challons/Reciepts of 

PF, ESI etc. to the owner 

Contractor shall allow the owner or his nominee to 

witness the wage distribution. 

5.8 Insurance to for all the workers, staff and vehicles. 

Contractor shall take necessory Insurance for all 

the contractors material , tools tackles and 

5.9 

belongings and the poclicy should remain in force 

till the completion of work/ contrat.. 

5.10 Any other statutory /regulatory requirements 

Contractor shall take the necessory permit form 

5.11 BMC and shall pay the Royalty for Excavation, 

Removal and disposal 

Page 2 of 3 

BIDDER'S 

CONFIRMATION 

REMARKS

SR. 

NO. 

6 SITE REQUIREMENTS 

6.1 Gate passes. 

A 

B 







Contractor shall obtain the gate passes ( Smart 

Card) from the owner at a fees of Rs. 500/pass. 

This fees would be refunded back by owner while 

returning the gate passes to the owner. 

Contractor shall arrange the police varrifiction prior 

to applying for the gate passes. 

Contractor shall lodge the FIR in case of lost of 

C passes and submit the details to the 

owner/consultants. 

D Temporary passes will not be issued 

6.2 Site Facilities 

Contractor shall provide Dress code for all the 

A 

workers. 

6.3 Communication. 

Mobile phones are not permitted inside the 

6.3.1 

refinery. 

6.4 Site Enabling 

Removal and rerouting of any existing U/G 

6.4.1 services, if found, during execution of workworks 

to be executed by the contractor. 

6.5 Shop Fabrication Drawing 

Contractor shall be responsible for the preperation 

6.5.1 of shop fabrication drawing based on the GA and 

Detail drawings. 

Page 3 of 3 

BIDDER'S 

CONFIRMATION 

REMARKS

Jacobs 

Preamble to Schedule of Rates & Quantities Page 1 of 1 

18–3188, HPCL, Mumbai Refinery 

LOBS Quality Up gradation 

Civil & Structural works 

4.1 Preamble to Schedule of Rates & Quantities 

PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES & QUANTITIES 

1. The Schedule of Rate is to be read with all the other sections of this tender document. 

General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Specifications, etc. The 

Contractor is deemed to have studied all the documents, drawings and acquainted himself 

with the details of work to be done and the manner in which it is to be carried out within quoted 

rates and the “Time Schedule” for completion. 

2. This is an item rate tender & the quantities are tentative and may vary to any extent. The 

quantities set down against quantities of work are only approximate and subject to variations 

either item wise or in total and any increase or decrease in the quantities shall not form the 

basis for alteration of the rates quoted and accepted. 

3. The Owner reserves the right to interpolate the rates for such items or work falling between 

similar items of lower and higher magnitudes. 

a. The Contractor to quote for all items and for all the quantities. 

b. The Contractor to quote unit rates for the items against which quantity is not 

mentioned. 

4. It is the intent of the contract that all works item wise shall be measured upon completion and 

paid for at the rates quoted and accepted for completed work. 

5. All items of work in the Schedule of Rates shall be carried out as per the specification, drawing 

and instructions of the Owner/Consultant. The rates shall provide for supply of required 

materials, consumable, skilled and unskilled labour, supervision, all tools, tackles cost of all 

safety gadgets/ personal protection equipment etc. and taxes etc., as called for in the detailed 

Specifications and Conditions of Contract. Any work incidental to the items of work described 

and necessary for the sequential completion of the item shall be carried out by the Contractor 

without demur or extra claim of whatsoever nature no matter whether such work has been 

implied in the Schedule or everywhere else. 

6. The Owner reserves the right to cancel the order for any item or group of work, or split the 

work between two or more contractors, if necessary. Such a step shall not constitute a breach 

to the contract. 

7. Rates quoted in Schedule of Rates to all items of work required to be performed as per the 

specifications given in the Tender.

Jacobs 

HPCL, MUMBAI SCHEDULE RATE OF QUANTITIES 

18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 1 OF 45 

SOR TITLE: SRR & OPERATOR BUILDING ; SUB STATION & AIR COMPRESSOR SHED DEPT: CIVIL / STRUCTURAL 

SR 

NO 

DESCRIPTION No. 

of 

Item 

1.0 EARTHWORK 

1.1 Excavation / Backfilling / Carting away 

1.1.a Excavation in all sorts of soil, including hard murrum and soft 

rock , but excluding hard rock, using excavators if necessary and 

including back filling, shoring, strutting, bailing, removal of vegetation, 

shrubs, small trees not exceeding 30 cm in girth, if any while excavating, 

pumping out of water, Including disposal of surplus earth to designated / 

approved place outside refinery premises . All BMC's approval, charges 

and duties etc. shall be in scope of contractor. etc., complete as per 

drawings, specifications & as directed by Owner/consultant . 

(i) From 0.0m depth to 1.5m depth 

Contractor’s Seal & Signature Client’s Seal & Signature 

Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Cu. m 3550 

(ii) Above 1.5m depth to 3.0m depth Cu. m 1490 

(iii) Above 3.0m depth to 7.0m depth Cu. m 10 

1.1.b Excavation in hard rock / R.C.C etc with the help of mechanical 

drilling machine pneumatic/hydraulic etc., including shoring, strutting, 

bailing, removal of vegetation, shrubs, pumping of water Including 

backfilling & disposal of surplus debris / broken rock to designated / 

approved place outside refinery premises . All BMC's approval, charges 

and duties etc. shall be in scope of contractor. etc., complete as per 

drawings, specifications and as directed by Owner/consultant. 

(i) From 0.0m depth to 1.5m depth Cu. m 2230 



Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 

Project Name: HPCL LOBS QUALITY UPGRADATION PROJECT 

Requisition No: 18-3188 

Contract Title: SRR & OPERATOR BUILDING & SUB STATION 

Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 2 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

1.1c "Rock breaking using demolition compound “Acconex” of ACE make 

or approved equivalent including supply, preparation & pouring the 

compound, drilling required holes in rock Including backfilling & disposal of 

surplus debris / broken rock to designated / approved place outside 

refinery premises. All BMC's approval, charges and duties etc. shall be in 

scope of contractor. etc. 

(i) From 0.0m depth to 1.5m depth Cu. m 10 



1.2 Filling & Rubble soiling 

1.2.a Providing & filling, for all depth and height, in plinth & other areas with 

approved quality of soil / murrum brought from outside and laid in layers 

not exceeding 150mm thickness (compacted) including spreading, 

leveling, watering, rolling, ramming, consolidation at the optimum moisture 

content with mechanical rollers/rammers to obtain 90% laboratory max. 

Dry density, and testing etc complete as per drawings, specifications & as 

Cu. m 45 

directed by Owner/Consultant. 

1.2.b Same as item 1.2 a. but approved quality of sand for pavement, plinth 

filling, etc. Quality of sand shall be of zone II / III as per IS: 383 

Cu. m 95 

1.2 c Providing & laying rounded good quality gravel of about 40 mm size 

over compacted sub-base including preparation of sub-base using 

selected earth wherever required and rolled to proper grading etc., 

complete as per specifications, drawings & as directed by 

Owner/Consultant. 

Gravel paving 150 mm thick Sq. m 200 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 3 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

1.2 d Providing & laying dry rubble soling 230mm thick (compacted) with 

230mm and down graded metal, under pavement, trenches, pits, 

foundations, ramps, etc., including filling recesses by grit, stone chips & 

approved murrum, watering, dressing, compacting by rolling/ramming etc., 

complete as per drawings, specifications and as directed by 

Owner/Consultant 

2.0 CONCRETE - P.C.C, R.C.C & SHUTTERING 

2.1 Providing, mixing and laying blinding layer of PCC 1:2:4 nominal mix using 

20mm and downgraded coarse aggregate for any thickness below 

footings, retaining wall, pavement, foundations, trenches, pits, drains & 

sumps etc.using 43 / 53 grade ordinary Portland cement of Ultratech or 

approved equivalent make , including curing etc., complete, as per 

drawings, specifications and as directed by Owner/consultant. 

2.2 Providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C.conforming to Grade 

M20 of IS 456 : 2000 using 43 / 53 grade ordinary Portland Cement of 

Ultratech or approved equivalent make with 20mm and down graded 

coarse aggregates in Plinth protection etc.including vibrating, curing ,etc. 


Owner/Consultant. (Reinforcement to be paid separately for this item of 

work). 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq m 2150 

cu. m 275 

cu. m 30 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 4 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

2.3 Providing, mixing and placing in position R.C.C. (Ready mix concrete) 

conforming to Grade M-35 of IS 456 : 2000 using 53 grade ordinary 

Portland Cement of Ultratech or other approved equivalent make with 

20mm and down graded coarse aggregates in foundations, ,columns, 

floors, pardis, retaining walls and other cast-in-situ works including 

,transportation, vibrating, curing, additive compound ( if any ) etc., 


Owner/Consultant. (Reinforcement to be paid separately for this item of 

work ). 

i) For depth up to 7m below finished ground level. cu. m 1550 

ii) For height not exceeding 10m above ground cu. m 1900 

iii) For height exceeding 10m but not exceeding 20m above ground cu. m 120 

2.4 Providing plum concrete 1:4:8 using 75 mm down aggregate & 43 

grade Ordinary Portland cement of Ultratech or other approved equivalent 

make for filling below floors, foundation etc., complete as per drawings, 

Cu. m 10 

specification & as directed by Engineer-in-charge. 

2.5 "Providing and fixing Plywood Shuttering/ Steel Plate Shuttering for 

PCC/RCC work, i.e foundations, equipment foundations, plinth beams, 

slabs, lintels, walls (vertical/horizontal in plan) etc., wherever necessary, 

including strutting, scaffolding, bracing, application of mould releasing 

agents of SIKA make or approved equivalent, etc., keeping the same in 

position during concreting and removing afterwards as per specifications & 

as directed by Owner/Consultant." 

i) For depth up to 7m below finished ground level. Sq. m 4000 

ii) For height not exceeding 10m above ground Sq. m 10000 

iii) For height exceeding 10m but not exceeding 20m above ground Sq . m 700 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 5 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

3.0 REINFORCEMENT 

3.1 Supplying reinforcement straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending, 

placing & tying in position Reinforcement as per drawing and 

specification. Bar bending schedule should be done by contractor. (The 

rates shall be applicable to any height and depth & inclusive of PVC 

coated G.I. binding wires) 

Fusion bonded Epoxy coated High yield strength deformed bars Fe415 

conforming to IS: 1786 of Tisco/S.A.I.L./R.I.N.L.(V.S.P.) make . Fusion 

bonded epoxy coated as per IS 13620 & PSL limited manufacturer’s 

specification. 

5.0 PLASTERING & POINTING 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

M.T. 430 

4.0 MASONRY 

4.1 Providing and constructing first class brick masonry in C.M.(1:4) in 

super structure, including scaffolding, curing etc., (excluding plaster) 


owner/consultant. Bricks to be used of minimum crushing strength 35 

kg/cm2. Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of 

Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent make. 

i) 115mm thick Sq. m 325 

ii) 230mm thick Cu. m 490 

iii) Above 230mm thick Cu. m 20 

4.2 Same as item 4.1, but below ground 


ii) 230mm thick Cu. m 25 

iii) Above 230mm thick Cu. m 7 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 6 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

5.1 Providing and laying 20mm thick external sand faced cement plaster 

in C.M. 1: 4 ; in two layers on R.C.C. or masonry to all heights, including 

scaffolding, raking out of joints, mouldings and providing grooves in 

plaster 12mm wide and 12mm deep where 2 different materials are in line 

(e.g.R.C.C.& brickwork, etc.)including curing etc., complete as per the 

specifications , drawings & as directed by owner/consultant. Cement shall 

be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or 

approved equivalent make. 

a) Plaster upto 6 m height Sq. m 1150 

b) Plaster above 6 m height Sq. m 500 

5.2 Providing and laying 20mm thick smooth cement plaster in C.M.1:4 to 

all heights, including scaffolding, raking out of joints with Neeru finish on 

all R.C.C. or masonry works, including mouldings and providing grooves 

in plaster 12mm wide and 12mm deep where 2 different materials are in 

line (e.g. R.C.C. and brickwork etc.,) including curing etc., complete as 

per specifications, drawings & as directed by owner/consultant. Cement 

shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or 

approved equivalent make. 

Sq. m 3360 

5.3 Same as item 5.2, but 12 mm thick rough plaster in area to be tiled Sq. m 1250 

5.4 Same as item 5.2, but cement plaster 6mm thick with Neeru finish for 

Sq. m 1630 

slab ceiling, soffit of stair slab etc. 

5.5 Same as item 5.2 but with POP Punning finish Sq. m 1660 

5.6 Same as item 5.2, but without Neeru and finished with cream of 

cement with waterproofing agent “Impermo” of Snowcem make or 

approved equivalent in trenches, tanks, lift pit, basements, etc., complete 

as per drawings and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Sq. m 145 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 7 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

5.7 Providing Grooves in external cement plaster of 20mm width and 

10mm deep to a good finish, curing, etc., complete as per specifications, 

drawings and as directed by Owner/Consultant 

5.8 Providing and fixing in position approved galvanised chicken wire mesh 

12mmx12mmx24 guage at junction of masonry and concrete 

surfaces as directed for use in interior and exterior plastering including 

cutting, wastage and overlaps, complete as per specifications and as 

directed by Owner/Consultant 

6.0 PAINTING 

6.1 Providing and applying Apcolite apex of Asian make exterior surface 

paint on R.CC super structure / plastered surface etc., two coats of antifungal, 

water proof, anti flaking etc .as per the specifications including 

necessary scaffolding and surface preparation etc., of approved colour 

complete as per specification and as directed by Owner/Consultant 

6.2 Providing and applying Interior paint ;one coat of thin white primer 

and filling crevices, if any with putty and applying 2 coats of Plastic 

emulsion paint of Asian or approved equivalent make, as per the 

manufacturer’s specifications including necessary scaffolding, brushing, 

cleaning and surface preparation etc., colour as per Owner’s choice 

,complete as per specifications, drawings and as directed by 



Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Rm 145 

Sq. m 200 

Sq. m 1600 

Sq. m 2250 

6.3 Same as item 6.2, but Interior paint of oil bound distemper Sq. m 1175 

6.4 Providing and applying one coat of primer & two coats of Synthetic 

Enamel paint of Asian or approved equivalent make to steel surface 

including surface preparation, scaffolding if required etc. complete as 

directed by Owner / Consultant. 

Sq. m 10 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 8 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

6.5 "Providing and applying Interior paint ;three coats of approved white wash 

( comprising of Fat lime, water, gum with hot water and sodium chloride 

with hot water) as per the specifications including necessary scaffolding 

and surface preparation etc., complete as per specification and as directed 

by Owner/Consultant" 

7.0 WATER-PROOFING & DAMP-PROOFING 

NOTE:- Guarantee of minimum 10 years on waterproofing shall 

be provided by contractor 

7.1 Providing & laying brick bat coba of any thickness in sunken portion 

of slabs-toilets, wash area etc. consisting of laying cement slurry on 

cleaned wetted surface followed by well rammed brick bats laid to 

required slope in cement mortar 1:4 proportion and mixed with 

approved waterproofing compounds and including cement mortar 1:4 

rough finish and curing, etc., complete as per drawings, specifications 

and as directed by Owner/Consultant. Cement shall be either 43 grade 

OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent 

make. 

7.2 Providing and laying 40mm thick damp-proof course to all masonry 

works as per specifications in 1:1.5:3 with 10mm and downsized 

aggregates. The DPC shall be laid in two layers of 20mm thick each 

and applying bitumen coating between each layer etc., complete as 

per specifications, drawings and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech 

/ACC or approved equivalent make. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 1050 

Cu. m 38 

Sq. m 100 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 9 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

7.3 Providing & applying 2 coats of cold applied heavy duty bituminous 

protective coating Tiki Bond (special) , including 1 coat of primer Tiki 

Primer of TikiTar or approved equivalent make, to external faces of 

underground concrete structures after thorough cleaning of concrete 

surface laid as per manufacturer’s specification & as directed by site 

engineer. 

7.4 Providing & laying waterproofing membrane to roof of approved quality 

including concrete screeding to achieve proper slope (minimum 25 mm 

thick) with G.I. mesh & necessary fixing arrangements as per 

manufacturer’s specification, drawing & as directed by owner/consultant 

APP Modified waterpoofing membrane with non-woven polyester 

reinforcement 4mm thick of Texsa India / STP make or approved 

equivalent 

7.5 Providing and laying Polysulfide sealing compound to joints of Pidilite 

or approved equivalent make as shown in drawings and as directed by 

Owner/Consultant as per manufacturer’s specifications. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 4470 

Sq.m. 1850 

Kg. 15 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 10 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

7.6 Providing & laying 1 coat of Tapecrete -Acrylic Polymer modified 

cementitious waterproofing coating over the exterior rendered surface & 1 

coat Tapercrete brush topping as per Cico manufacture specification, 

including rendering with cement mortar (1:3) & including 15 NB specially 

threaded nozzles with puddle flanges in position as directed along 

construction joints with injection of Cico Excem E1 polymeric non-shrink 

high strength grout throgh the nozzles under pressure by pump complete 

as per manufacturer's specification, drawing & as directed by 

owner/consultant. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 50 

8.0 FALSE CEILING 

8.1 Providing and fixing false ceiling including G.I.suspension grid, all 

fastening (joints to be paper taped and finished with two coats to 

get a uniform colour, wherever required) and suspending 

arrangement inlet, outlet and any other cutouts for lighting & airconditioning 

ducts, etc, complete as per the manufacturer’s specifications, 

drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant, using 600x600mm panels of 

any of the following materials :- 

Precoated Pressed Aluminium panels Sq. m 945 

8.2 Providing and fixing POP cornice 75 x 75 mm etc, complete as per the 

drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. Note:- Contractor to get the 

cornice design approved prior to installation. 

9.0 FLOORING, JOINTS IN FLOORS & FALSE FLOORING 

RM 25 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 11 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

9.1 Providing & laying 40mm average thick hand cut, machine polished, 

in max. size 600 x 600 (double polished) Kota stone flooring in 

sand/cement bedding C.M. 1:3 laid to level as required etc., complete 

as per specifications, drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 



9.2 Same as item 9.1, but kota in cement bedding for 150mm high 

skirting flush with plastered surface of wall & hand polished etc., 

complete 

9.3 Same as item 9.1, but kota for stairtreads, risers, jambs, sills ( To be 

supplied with machine cut on all sides) 

9.4 Providing and laying 6mm thick coloured Ceramic Dado tiles (Grade I 

quality) using pigment matching colour of tiles in white cement used for 

filling joints, white tile of Johnson or approved equivalent including 

cement bedding, finishing exposed joints with white cement, etc., 

complete as per the drawings, specifications and as directed by 

Owner/Consultant. (Contractor shall state the basic rate & make of tiles 

assumed at time of quoting) Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC 

fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent make. 

9.5 Providing 7 to 8 mm thick coloured ceramic tile on floor (non-skid matt 

finish) (Grade I quality) tiles of Johnson / kajaria or approved equivalent 

make including sand /cement bedding C.M. 1:3 & finishing joints with white 

cement with pigment to matching colour of tiles etc. complete as per 

manufacturers specification, drawing & as directed by owner/consultant. 

(Contractor shall state the basic rate & make of tiles assumed at time of 

quoting) Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of 

Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent make. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 75 

Rm 35 

Sq. m 190 

Sq. m 210 

Sq. m 35 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 12 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

9.6 "Providing & laying I.P.S. Flooring 40 mm thick with M15 Grade 

concrete using 6mm to 20mm metal over bedding laid in proper grade & 

slope, in alternative bays including compaction, filling joints with bitumen & 

sand including finishing with cement mortar including curing etc. 

complete as per specification, drawing & as directed by owner/consultant." 



9.7 Providing & forming a 40mm thick average hard wearing surface with 

Granolithic concrete (1:1:2) floor finish laid in 2.5 m x 2.5 m 

panels by means of necessary formwork over concrete floor as per 

specification.The granolithic finish to be deferred construction including 

sodium silicate to give a hard smooth finish, as per specifications, 

drawings & as directed by Owner/consultant. Cement shall be either 43 

grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or approved 

equivalent make. 

9.8 Providing aluminium strip of 40 x 2 mm thick on granolithic 

floor / IPS floor between joints as per drawings & as directed by 



Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 120 

Sq. m 170 

Rm 20 

9.9 Providing & laying Telephone black Granite stone of min. 20 mm 

thickness at following locations as per drawing, specification & as directed 

by owner/consultant. 

i) To door/ window frame in CM 1:3 Sq. m. 100 

ii) To kitchen platform etc. Sq. m. 15 

9.10 Providing min. 3mm wide x 50mm deep saw cut joints for shrinkage 

joints as per drawings, specifications and directions of Owner/Consultant. 

Rm 50 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 13 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

9.11 Providing and laying Antiskid Granite average 20 mm thick of approved 

quality laid in selected pattern and to the required slope where necessary 

in sand/cement bedding C.M. 1:3 on flooring etc. including filling joints 

with white cement & pigment to the granite matching colour etc., complete 

as per specifications, drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

(Contractor shall state the basic rate and type of granite assumed at the 

time of quoting) Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash 

based of Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent make. 

9.12 Same as item 9.11, but Granite with marble inlay laid to line & level as 

per drawings, specifications & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

9.13 Same as item 9.11, but Granite minimum 12 mm thk. for dado laid to 

line & level as per drawings, specifications & as directed by 



Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 235 

Sq. m 16 

Sq. m 370 

9.14 False flooring :- 

Providing,fabricating and installing False floor comprising of of steel tray 

panels with concrete infill (load capacity=1 T/sq.m.) & covered with 

2mm thick antistatic high pressure laminate PVC tile flooring fixed to 

floor panels by means of synthetic resin adhesive of ABC make / Donn 

systems –by United Insulation / or approved equivalent make complete as 

per manufacture's specification on M.S.tees/channels and M.S. Jack 

supports of following heights provided at 600 mm c/c bothways 

including trip panels & panels with outlets for cables (i.e with standard 

Grommet ), & all other accessories etc., complete and as directed by 

Owner/Consultant (to carry 1 T/m2) (openable panels) 

Upto 1000 mm Height Sq. m 385 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 14 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

9.15 Providing & laying to required slope cement concrete screed of mix 

1:1.5:3 in floors,Grade slab etc. & inclusive of curing etc.complete as per 

drawing, specification & as directed by owner/consultant. Cement shall be 

either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or approved 

equivalent make. 

9.16 Providing & laying average 20 mm thk. Granite with anti-skid Grooves 

for treads in stairs & floor etc. laid in C.M. 1:3 & joints filled in pigmented 

white cement complete as per specification,drawing & as directed by 

owner/consultant. Cement shall be either 43 grade OPC or PPC fly ash 

based of Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent make. 

9.17 Providing, cutting and laying 600 mm wide by average 850 mm high 

kitchen platform made up of mirror polished 20 mm thick black 

granite as top and 25mm rough Kadappa one side polish bottom, 

sandwiching the two in C.M. 1:4 mortar with both sides polished kadappa 

for verticals support & horizontal shelf & cutting required for kitchen 

platform including C.P.pillar cock , waste coupling & PVC drain pipe 

connection to Nahani / floor Trap complete as per drawing, specification & 

as directed by owner /consultant 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Cu. m 2 

Sq.m. 15 

RM 10 

9.18 Providing Vitrified tile on floor (Grade I quality) tiles 10 mm min. 

thickness of Johnson / RAK Ceramics including sand /cement bedding 

C.M. 1:3 & finishing joints white cement with pigment to matching colour 

of tiles etc. complete as per manufacturers specification,drawing & as 

directed by owner/consultant. (Contractor shall state the basic rate & 

make of tiles assumed at time of quoting) Cement shall be either 43 grade 

OPC or PPC fly ash based of Ultratech /ACC or approved equivalent 

make. 

Sq. m 405 

9.19 Same item 9.18 but for skirting 150 mm high RM 260 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 15 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

9.20 Providing sand stone external wall cladding , the sand stone of 

average 10 mm thickness should be of Raj Rock or approved supplier 

from Rajasthan fixed in ordinary Portland cement mortar bedding C:M 1:3 , 

the joints should be in white cement mixed with pigment to suit the colour 

of stone , necessary stone carving to get the required shape drawing & 

as directed by owner/consultant. (Contractor shall state the basic rate & 

type & source of sand stone assumed at time of quoting) Note:- The sand 

stone should of colour & type as per owner’s / consultant & shall be got 

approved prior to usage. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 2370 

10.0 DOORS, ROLLING SHUTTERS & PARTITIONS 

10.1 Providing and fixing door closer , Godrej / Everite make Each 10 

10.2 Providing and fixing Floor spring ,Godrej /Everite make Each 10 

10.3 Providing & fixing wooden architrave 25mm x 12mm at door frame / 

wall joint 

Rm 50 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 16 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

10.4 Providing and fixing in position, fire resistant (2 hours fire rated ) 

galvanised steel hollow metal pressed section doors 46mm 

thick,"GUARDIAN" or approved equivalent make door leaves fully flush 

double skin with special resin bonded honeycomb core (fire rated type) 

and hollow metal frame of 1.6mm thick M.S.sheet and framing including 

all fixtures, fasteners, making recesses in brickwork/ concrete surfaces 

and making them good after fixing the frames by means of M.S.‘T’ 

holdfast, insitu PCC 1:2:4 and door leaves finished with polyurethane 

paint on zinc phosphate stoving primer as per the drawings, complete 

as per the manufacturer’s specifications & as directed by 

Owner/Consultant. (Tenderer will submit 6 copies of the Manufacture's 

drgs. for approval). 

i) Single leaf with vision panel 300x300 & 6mm thk. fire rated glass Sq. m 2 

ii) Double leaf with vision panel 300 x 300 & 6mm thk. fire rated glass Sq. m 12 

10.5 Providing and fixing hollow metal pressed steel door with 14g 

pressed steel frames with welded joints fixed to masonry or concrete with 

M.S.holdfast 40x3x300 long; having 16 g H.M.P.S flush shutter 

including concealed stiffeners and thermocole packing inside, 

complete with accessories butt/pivot hinges, pull handles on both sides, 

aldrop/slide bolts, oil paint finish and as per specifications, drawings & as 


i) Single shutter with vision panel 250 x 200 Sq. m 12 

ii) Double shutter with vision panel 250 x 200 Sq. m 7 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 17 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

10.6 Providing and fixing in position powder coated aluminium door 

comprising of glass panel minimum 6 mm thick and 12 mm thick 

prelaminated particle board panels with stiles & rails & powder 

coated aluminium frame having G.I.holdfast 40 x 3 x 300 long with 

accessories butt hinges, pull handles on both sides, Aldrop/slide bolts 



Note- Minimum weight for sides & top members 1.975 kg/m lock rail-1.594 

kg/m;btm. Rail -3.495 kg/m;shutter frame -1.202 kg/m;glazing clips-0.182 

kg/m 

i) Single Shutter Sq. m 18 

ii) Double Shutter Sq. m 4 

10.7 Providing and fixing in position powder coated aluminium door 

comprising of 12 mm thick prelaminated particle board panel 

aluminium sections with G.I. holdfast 40 x 3 x 300 long and accessories 

butt/pivot hinges, pull handles on both sides, tower bolts, aldrop/slide 

bolts, mortice lock, floor stopper, complete as per specifications, drawings 

& as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

NOTE:-Minimum weight for Sides & top members-1.975 kg/m 

lock rail-1.594 kg/m;btm. Rail -3.495 kg/m;shutter frame -1.202 

kg/m;glazing clips-0.182 kg/m 

i) Single leaf with vision panel 250 x 200 Sq. m 31 

ii) Double leaf with vision panel 250 x 200 Sq. m 35 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 18 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

10.8 Providing and fixing in position single shutter powder coated 

aluminium door comprising of 12 mm thick prelaminated particle 

board panels and pin headed glass panel of powder coated 

aluminium sections having G.I.holdfast 40 x 3 x 300 long and other 

accessories butt/pivot hinges, pull handles on both sides, tower bolts, 

aldrop/slide bolts, mortice lock, floor stopper complete as per drawings, 

specifications & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

NOTE:-Minimum weight for Sides & top members-1.975 kg/m 

lock rail-1.594 kg/m;btm. Rail -3.495 kg/m;shutter frame -1.202 

kg/m;glazing clips-0.182 kg/m 

10.9 Providing and fixing Gear operated Rolling shutters of 1mm to 1.25mm 

thick approved quality and make including all standard rolled steel laths or 

slats @ 75mm c/c accessories and fixtures, frames, fastenings, holdfasts, 

locking arrangement handles, making good of the joints and with one 

coat of primer & two coats of approved enamel paint, as per the 

specifications and drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. All the 

shutters shall be of the type which shall give minimum air leakage. 

10.10 Providing & fixing Glazed Aluminium frame partition partly glazed partly 

panelled with necessary powdercoated aluminium framework of Jindal/ 

Hindal co or approved equivalent make with 12 mm thick Prelaminated 

Particle board for 900 mm height at bottom & top balance part upto door 

level with 5 mm thick plain glass panels & accesories complete as per 

drawing, specification & as directed by owner/consultant. ( for max. 

ht=2.5m) 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 5 

Sq. m 22 

Sq. m 30 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 19 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

10.11 Supplying, assembling, fitting & fixing in position Precoated Pressed 

steel frame with block board flush shutter with laminate on both 

sides including hinges, towerbolt, handles etc. complete with all 

accessories & hardware as per drawings & specification & as directed by 


10.12 Providing and fixing in position minimum 28 mm thick PVC Door 

comprising of PVC multicavity hollow chamber sections of Sintex make or 

approved equivalent & aluminium frame with G.I.holdfast 40 x 3 x 300 

long and accessories butt/pivot hinges, pull handles on both 

sides,aldrop/slide bolts, complete as per specifications, drawings & as 

directed by Owner/Consultant." 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 5 

Sq. m 17 

11.0 WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & JALI 

11.1 Providing and fixing in position glazed powder coated Aluminium 

windows of standard powder coated Aluminium sections of approved 

quality and make, including all Aluminium fixtures, fastenings, etc., 

including making recesses in brick/concrete surfaces and making good the 

same after fixing windows, all as per Manufacturer’s specifications, etc., 

complete 

Note:-Minimum weight for fixed frame-0.639 kg/m;shutter frame-0.636 

kg/m; glazing clips-0.165 kg/m;copling bars-0.933 kg/m; member for fixing 

frame-0.463 kg/m 

a Openable with plain 4mm thick glass 

i) Side Hung Sq. m 18 

ii) Top Hung Sq. m 4 

iii) Centre Hung Sq. m 4 

b Full fixed with 4mm thick glass Sq. m 45 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 20 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

11.2 Providing and fixing openable sliding shutter powder coated 

aluminium glazed window comprising of aluminium frame with 

M.S.holdfast and shutters glazed (minimum 5 mm thick float glass) 

aluminium shutters, accessories like handles, tower bolts, rubber lining, 

complete as per specifications, drawings and as directed by 


Double Shutters Sq. m 4 

11.3 Providing and fixing in position powder coated aluminium ventilator of 

standard aluminium sections of approved quality and make including 

aluminium fixtures, fastenings, etc., including making recesses in 

brick/concrete surfaces and making good the same after fixing all as per 

manufacturer’s specification, etc., complete pressed aluminiun louvers 

shall be used @ about 50 mm c/c 

11.4 Providing and fixing sun control Reflective film of Garware or approved 

equivalent make on glazed door or window panels as per manufacturer’s 

specifications, & as directed by owner/Consultant. 

11.5 Providing and fixing in position 80mm thick precast jali in cement 

mortar 1:4 (one part of cement + 4 parts of sand) with 6mm diameter 

M.S.Round bar used as reinforcement as per drawings & as directed by 


12.0 INSERT PLATES & CURB ROLLED SECTIONS/ ANGLES, 

BOLTS, SLEEVES, POCKETS & GROUTING 

Sq. m 3 

Sq. m 25 

Sq. m 40 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 21 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

12.1 Providing and fixing M.S.Steel insert plates 6mm to 16mm thick with 

holdfasts as shown in drawing including fabrication, one coat of 

primer 30 microns DFT and 2 coats of approved anti-corrosive paint 20 

microns DFT each coat on the exposed surface only, complete 

12.2 Providing and fixing of Anchor bolts in in position including supply and 

fixing of template etc. complete , as per drawing and specification and 

direction of owner / consultant. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Kg 4000 

MT 1.03 

12.3 Providing pockets for foundation bolts as per drawings including 

providing and removing of necessary formwork, etc., complete as per 

specifications and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

i) Size upto 100x100mm depth upto 300mm Each 24 

ii) Size 200x200mm depth upto 300mm Each 2 

iii) Size between 100x100mm to 200x200mm depth upto 300mm Each 2 

iv) Size between 100x100mm to 200x200mm depth upto 600mm Each 2 

12.4 Providing, centering, aligning and fixing M.S. Pipe sleeves with puddle 

flange in RCC slabs, beams, columns, brickwalls; including painting with 

one coat of anticorrosive primer complete as per drawings, specifications 

& as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

75mm dia. to 300 mm dia. M.S.Sleeve (Internal dia.) Kg. 15 

12.5 Providing, centering, aligning and fixing PVC Pipe sleeves of 

Finolex/Prince or approved equivalent make in brickwalls, concrete 

Kerb wall etc.; complete as per drawings, specifications & as directed by 


75mm to 200 mm dia PVC Sleeve Rm 5 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 22 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

12.6 Supplying and fixing M.S. Nozzles with puddle flanges in position as 

directed with necessary breaking of concrete/ brickwork in slabs, beams, 

walls grouting with non-shrinking grout of ACC make (if required) and 

making the surface good, curing, painting with one coat of anti corrosive 

primer etc., complete (Grouting to be paid separately). 

Upto 200mm diameter Kg 10 

12.7 Providing and laying Non-shrinking Cementitious grout of ACE make 

'SHRINKOMP 20' or approved equivalent under base plates of steel 

columns, etc., for grouts of thickness shown in drawings and filling of 

pockets of foundations & curing, cleaning out pockets, etc., complete 

and as per the specifications and drawings. The non- shrinking grout shall 

be laid as per manufacturer's specifications. 

Cu. m 0.14 

12.8 Cut a hole by chipping, square or circular through reinforced concrete 

floor or wall, not exceeding 150mm thick and make good. (Note : For 

cutouts, below 65 sq.cm surface area, no extra payment will be made). 

i) Between 65 upto 250 cm2 Each 5 

ii) Between 260 upto 500 cm2 Each 2 

iii) Between 510 upto 900 cm2 Each 3 

12.9 Cut or form hole,square or circular through reinforced concrete floor or 

wall exceeding 150mm but not exceeding 300mm thick, and make good 

complete as directed by owner/consultant. (For cutouts, below 65 sq.cm 

surface area no extra payment will be made). 

i) Between 65 upto 250 cm2 Each 2 

ii) Between 260 upto 500 cm2 Each 2 

iii) Between 510 upto 900 cm2 Each 1 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 23 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

12.10 "Providing, straightening, fabricating corner curb angle/rolled sections 

as per drawing including Tor steel holdfasts welded to angles/rolled 

sections and fixing, painting with one coat of anticorrosive primer complete 

as per drawings and specifications. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Kg 145 

13.0 EXPANSION JOINTS 

13.1 Providing & fixing in position Bitumen impregnated board of STP / 

Tikitar or approved equivalent make Premoulded Bituminous Expansion 

joint filler boards (Shalitex of STP) conforming to IS:1838-P1/1983 in joints 

including application of primer as per manufacturers specification ,drawing 

& as directed by owner/consultant. 

20 to 25 mm thick Sq. m 30 

13.2 Providing, cutting and fixing of expansion joint filler Capcell HD-100 

(laminated closed cell polyethylene foam joint filler) of Supreme or 

approved equivalent for grade slabs including fixing with neoprene 

synthetic rubber adhesive complete as per manufacturer's 

specification,drawing & as directed by Owner/consultant 

20 to 25 mm thick Sq. m 42 

13.3 Providing & filling in joints Bitumastic Sealing compound Flexible joint 

sealing compound of STP / Tikitar or approved equivalent make 

conforming to IS:1834-1984 Grade A including one coat of primer as per 

manufacturer’s specifications,drawings & as directed by 


20 to 30 mm width x 20 to 25 mm depth Rm 105 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 24 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

13.4 Providing & fixing in position in gaps closed cell polyethylene foam rod 

as backup material to sealant including removalble self adhesive 

polyethylene masking tape to edged of joints filled by sealant as per 

drawing, manufacturer specification & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Note:- Payment for sealant paid separately 

14.0 INSULATION 

14.1 Providing & fixing 50 mm thk. Rockwool Insulation conforming to 

IS:8183 of Lloyd Insulation or approved equivalent make with fixing 

arrangements by 0.05 mm thk. aluminium foil & weld mesh 75x75x1.6 mm 

thk. in soffit of slab etc. complete as per drawing & as per manufacturer 

specification & as directed by owner/consultant. 

14.2 Providing & filling Instant Expanding Polyurethane Foam Sealant of 

Sika or approved equivalent in joints, gaps in masonry plaster, glass, etc. 

surface to be made damp prior to using sealant.; extra thickness of foam 

should be cut as per drawing, manufacturer specification & as directed by 


15.0 FENCING 

15.1 Providing & fixing fabricated 2.5 m high G.I.chain link fencing of 50mm 

x 50mm mesh of 8 guage thick and of approved manufacturer & fixing to 

Angle post 65x65x6 approx. @ 3m c/c & angle post supports at every 

16m c/c & corners including excavation of any width and depth for post 

foundations PCC 1:2:4 for foundations and painting 3 coats of anticorrosive 

paint of approved shade and quality, etc., complete and as 

directed. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Cu.m 1 

Sq.m. 710 

Kg. 10 

Rm 70 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 25 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

15.2 Supply, fabricating & fixing Double leaf 3m x 2m Gate each leaf of 1.5m 

x 2m of 40mm dia. M.S.pipe gate, with approved G.I.chain link of 50mm 

x 50mm x 8 guage, fixing on M.S.post brackets with all standard fixtures, 

such as rollers, aldrops, etc., including excavation , PCC 1:2:4 for 

foundations & pillars, runways, strips, back-filling, painting with 2 coats 

of anti-corrosive paint as per the drawing. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Each 8 

16.0 SANITARY 

16.1 Providing and fixing in position HDPE Cylindrical vertical water 

storage tanks with closed top of “Sintex” make or approved 

equivalent make of following capacities with all necessary fittings for 

connection to the water line pipe, connection pipes, bib cock etc., 

complete as per manufacturer’s specification. 

i) 1000 litres capacity Each 1 

ii) 2000 litres capacity Each 2 

16.2 Providing and constructing brick masonry Inspection Chamber with 

900mm x 600mm internal dimensions depth not exceeding 1.2m 

including excavation, re-filling and the following :- 1:3:6 P.C.C. 150 thick 

and 75mm offset in foundation. 230mm thick masonry in cement mortar 

1:6 M15 P.C.C. benching and channeling including formation of channels, 

slopes and finishing with 20 thick cement plaster in 1:4 cement mortar 

finished smooth with rendering coat of neat cement, water-proofing 

compound on inside. 75mm thick, 1000mm x 700mm RCC precast cover 

slab (M30) including reinforcement 2 Nos. lifting holes/hooks all joints well 

sealed etc. complete as per specifications, drawings and as directed by 


Each 7 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 26 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.3 Constructing brick masonry Manholes 1200mm x 900mm internal 

dimensions including excavation, 150mm thick 1:3:6 PCC in 

formation with 150mm offsets, 230mm thick brick masonry upto 

1.2m depth from top & brick masonry 350mm thick for masonry below 

1.2 m depth below with cement plaster finished smooth with neat 

cement 1:2:4 PCC in benching and channeling of surface finished 

smooth and channels formed to size and levels, including providing and 

fixing M.S.rung patterns one as per reinforcement 2 Nos. lifting 

holes/hooks all joints well sealed and curb angle at manhole cover 

opening to IS 5455 & covered with precast cover slab of 75 thick x 

1000 x 1300mm long having 2 lifting hooks 

i) For depth upto 1.2m Each 1 

ii) For depth upto 2.0m Each 1 

iii) For depth upto 2.5m Each 1 

16.4 Providing and placing C.I. manhole cover with frame of 'NECO' or 

approved manufacturer and painting with 3 coats of black bitumastic anticorrosive 

complete as per the specifications and drawings. 

i)600X900 mm Size - 250 kg(Heavy duty) Each 1 

ii) 600x900 mm Size-125 Kg( Medium duty) Each 1 

iii) 450x900 mm Size-75 Kg( Light duty) Each 1 

iv) 450x450 mm Size- 30 Kg( Light duty) Each 1 

16.5 Providing and placing C.I. manhole circular cover with square frame 

of 'NECO' or approved manufacturer and painting with 3 coats of black 

bitumastic anti-corrosive complete as per the specifications and drawings. 

i) 500 mm Diameter Size- 116 Kg( Medium duty) Each 1 

ii) 560 mm Diameter Size- 128 Kg( Medium duty) Each 1 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 27 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.6 Providing and fixing Precast M35 grade Concrete Cover including 

concreting, curing, fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforcement with 

necessary provision for lifting formwork, transporting, etc., complete as 

per specifications, drawings and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

(Reinforcement to be paid separately) 


ii) 100mm thick Sq. m 3 

iii) any thickness cu.m. 4 

16.7 Providing and fixing in position white colour glazed 580 x 440 mm 

back inlet ORISSA Pan type Water Closet of "Hindustan" make or 

approved equivalent with P or S traps having anti-syphonage opening 

32mm dia. and with 10 litres PVC high level flushing cistern with ball 

cock, mosquito proof cover and 12mm stop cock supported on 

C.I.brackets fixed on wall including G.I.flush pipe, brass unions, fittings, 

solder joints and tested stop cock G.I.overflow pipe with mosquito-proof 

grating at the end, all pipes shall be encased in walls in chasses finished 

smooth and put into proper order as per specifications and drawings. Rate 

shall include for adequate water-proofing, complete as per drawings, 


16.8 Providing and fixing in position white colour vitreous Urinals of 

"HINDUSTAN" make or of approved equivalent & bend with C.P. bottle 

trap and necessary fittings & PVC waste water pipe complete and put in 

proper working order as per specifications and as directed. Rate shall 

include all chasing of brickwork or floor and making good the same. 

i) 3 number of urinal with one 10 litres capacity vitreous automatic flushing 

cistern of Hindustan make or approved equivalent. 

Each 2 

Set 1 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 28 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

ii) 2 number of urinal with one 10 litres capacity vitreous automatic flushing 

cistern of Hindustan make or approved equivalent. 

16.9 Providing and fixing width min. 600 x 20mm thick Granite Partition 

(Granite shall be Telephone black in colour )with full round moulding ; 

placed between urinals , wash area etc. The rate shall include chasing 

in brick or concrete surfaces anchoring of the partition, making good the 

surfaces etc.,complete as per specification, drawings & as directed by 

Owner/Consultant 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Set 1 

Sq.m 9 

16.10 Providing and fixing in position Oval shaped white colour Glazed 

Vitreous China Wash Basin of Hindustan make or approved equivalent 

make & wash basin fitted on Granite platform (with exposed edges 

moulded smooth) Granite shall be Telephone black in colour including 

C.I.brackets fixed on walls and also including chromium plated couplings 

rubber plug with chromium plated chain and chromium plated tap with 

brass unions and with C.P.Bottle trap & pipe connected to underfloor 

waste water pipe complete and put into proper working order as per the 

specifications, drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

i) one number of oval shaped wash basin fitted in granite platform Set 2 

ii) Two number of oval shaped wash basins fitted in granite platform Set 1 

16.11 Providing and fixing in position Mirrors at required level and elevation of 

approved make plate glass bevelled edge with one piece masonite board 

at back with chromium plated round screws finished complete as per 

drawings, specifications and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Sq.m 10 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 29 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.12 Providing and fixing in position chromium plated brass Towel Rail 

including all accessories such as brackets, fixing, anchoring etc., 

complete as per the drawings, specifications and as directed by 

Owner/consultant 

20 mm dia. x 750 mm long Each 5 

16.13 Same as item 16.12 above, but chromium plated Towel ring Each 5 

16.14 Providing and fixing in position chromium plated brass liquid Soap 

Dispensers of approved quality and design fixed with chromium 

plated brass screws finished complete as per the drawings, 

specifications and as directed by Owner/consultant 

Each 10 

16.15 Providing and fixing Floor mounted white colour European type WC, of 

'Hindustan' make or approved equivalent with seat cover, P or S traps 

and low level PVC cistern of 10 litres capacity of Commander make 

with chromium plated handle and ballcock fittings etc., complete as 

per drawings, specifications and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Each 2 

16.16 Same as item 16.15 but wall mounted coloured European type WC Each 1 

16.17 Providing and constructing Soak Pit of size as shown on the drawing 

including excavation and filling the pit with gravel & brick-bats of 

maximum size 80mm. The brick masonry wall shall be as per the details 

given on the drawings, complete in all respects and as directed by 


3m dia. & 2m deep Each 1 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 30 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.18 Providing and fixing Ready made Septic Tank of "Pranali Hume Pipe ” or 

approved equivalent manufacturer. The rates shall include 

excavation, placing in position all necessary connections and 

accessories, testing the joints, back-filling, etc., complete as per 

manufacturer’s specifications , placed at location shown in drawing & as 


100 persons Each 1 

16.19 Providing, erecting, laying and jointing spigot and socket Centrifugally 

cast C.I. downtake pipe conforming to IS: 3989 for Rain water / waste 

water Pipe of "Neco" or approved equivalent make of following sizes, 

including all special like bends, tees, double "Y" with door clips, etc., 

including ,passing through waterproofing course , breaking through 

brickwall jointing of pipe etc. jointing by cement mortar 1:2 etc., as per 

manufacturer's specifications,drawing & as directed by Owner/Consultant 

i) 100mm diameter Rm 67 

ii) 150mm diameter Rm 125 

16.20 Providing and fixing C.I.vent pipe of "Neco" or approved equivalent 

make including M.S.clamps& necessary fittings and cement jointing, 

etc., complete as per drawings, specifications and as directed by 


75mm dia. vent pipe Rm 15 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 31 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.21 Providing and fixing C.I.Cowl for vent pipe of "Neco" or approved 

equivalent make including M.S.clamps& necessary fittings and cement 

jointing, etc., complete as per drawings, specifications and as directed 

by Owner/Consultant. 

For 75mm dia. vent pipe Each 3 

16.22 Providing, laying and jointing 'C' Class G.I. pipe of Tata / Zenith 

make or approved equivalent for concealed water supply including 

all fittings, such as bends, couplings, tees, reducers, stop ends, etc., 

including necessary M.S. clamps, combined with a rubber coupling, 

complete as per the specifications and drawings. Rate to include 

chasing in brick or concrete surface and application of approved anticorrosive 

cold applied black paint ,making them i.e joints good, leak test 

etc., complete and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

i) 15mm dia. Rm 50 

ii) 25mm dia. Rm 40 

iii) 32 mm dia Rm 5 

iv) 50mm dia. Rm 5 

16.23 Providing, laying and jointing 'C' Class G.I.pipe of Tata/Zenith 

make or approved equivalent for open type water supply including 

all fittings, such as bends, couplings, tees, reducers, stop ends, etc., 

including necessary M.S.clamps, combined with a rubber coupling, 

complete as per the specifications and drawings. Rate to include of 

carrying out leak test etc., complete and as directed by 



Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 32 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 


iii) 32 mm dia Rm 40 

iv) 50mm dia. Rm 60 

16.24 Same as item 16.22 ;but High grade Polymer & aluminum core 

composite pipe i.e. Rifeng of Kisan or approved equivalent make; pipes 

conforming to ASTM F-1282. 



iii) 25mm dia. Rm 5 

16.25 Providing and fixing C.I. Nahani / Floor Traps with chromium plated 

brass Jalli etc., complete for 100mm dia. connection, including 100mm 

C.I.bend, bitumen painted, breaking & making the floor wherever required 

as per the specifications,drawings & as directed by owner/consultant. 

16.26 Providing and fixing PVC Nahani / Floor Traps with PVC Jalli of Prince 

or make approved by owner/consultant etc., complete for 100mm dia. 

connection, including 100mm PVC bend, breaking & making the floor 

wherever required as per the specifications,drawings & as directed by 


16.27 Providing and fixing stainless steel Nahani / Floor Traps with stainless 

steel Jalli of of approved make, complete for 100mm dia. connection, 

breaking & making the floor wherever required as per the 

specifications,drawings & as directed by owner/consultant. 

Each 5 

Each 5 

Each 2 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 33 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

16.28 Providing and laying in position glazed S.W. Gully Traps of approved 

manufacturer as directed including 230mm thick brick masonary 

chamber of size 300 x 225mm built in 1:6 C.M and plastered inside & 

outside with 20mm thick C.M. 1:6. Rate shall include providing and 

fixing of mosquito-proof 300mm x 225mm C.I.standard hinged frame and 

cover of approved make and quality including excavation, PCC foundation, 

etc., complete as per specifications,drawing & as directed by 


16.29 Providing and laying in position glazed PVC Gully Traps of Supreme 

make or approved equivalent manufacturer; including 230mm thick brick 

masonary chamber of size 300 x 225mm built in 1:6 C.M and plastered 

inside & outside with 20mm thick C.M. 1:6. Rate shall include 

providing and fixing of mosquito-proof 300mm x 225mm C.I.standard 

hinged frame and cover of approved make and quality including 

excavation, PCC foundation, etc., complete as per specifications,drawing 

& as directed by owner/consultant. 

16.30 Providing and fixing 25mm dia. Water Meter of Capstain or approved 

equivalent make, with non-return valve including strainer, sockets, union 

nut and construction of brick masonary chamber of adequate size with 

cast iron frame and mild steel hinged cover with locking arrangement and 

lock etc complete as per drawing & as directed by owner/consultant. 

16.31 Providing and fixing 38mm Hot and Cold Bath Mixer of approved quality 

and make with crutch including one metre long telephone shower, etc. 

complete as per drawing,manufacturer’s specification & as directed by 



Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Each 2 

Each 3 

Each 2 

Each 2 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 34 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

16.32 Providing & fixing Stainless steel kitchen sink of following sizes of Nirali 

make or approved equivalent complete with adjustable pipe outlet fitting, 

choke stop strainer & cockroach floor trap as per drawing, specification & 

as directed by owner/consultant 

i) 355 x 355 x 150 mm Corner sink Each 1 

ii) 610 x 460 x 200 mm Single Bowl Each 1 

iii) 1270 x 510 x 200 mm Double Bowl 

16.33 Providing & fixing Chromium plated 125 mm dia. Overhead adjustable 

Each 1 

shower rose arm of Parko/ Jaquar or approved equivalent make as per 

Each 4 

specification, drawing & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

16.34 Providing & fixing Chromium plated wall mixer Telephonic with shower 

rest & 1500 mm long Flexible tube of Jaquar or approved equivalent make 

as per specification, drawing & as directed by owner/consultant. 

16.35 Providing & fixing Chromiumplated Plumbing items of following types of 

Parko/ Jaquar / Marc make as per specification ,drawing & as directed by 


Set 1 

i) Wall mixer Non-Telephonic type Each 3 

ii) Sink Mixer with Swivel spout Set 1 

iii) Pillar cock Each 4 

iv) Concealed stop cock Each 5 

v) Bib-cock Each 1 

vi) Two way Bib-cock with jet spray Each 5 

vii) wall mounted adjustable sink cock Each 1 

viii) Table mounted adjustable sink cock Each 1 

ix) 32 mm dia flush valve for WC Each 1 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 35 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

x) health faucet Each 1 

xi) sensor for urinals Each 1 

16.36 Providing and fixing in position Gun metal stop cock of Zoloto/ Leader 

or approved equivalent make including all fixing accessories laid as per 

the specifications, drawings & as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

Each 3 

17.0 UNDERGROUND PIPING 

17.1 Providing, laying, jointing & testing Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes 

conforming to IS 651; including excavation of required widths & depths, 

laying pipes to slope on firm bed, including all specials & fittings, jointing, 

curing, testing, back-filling the trench,carting away etc., complete as per 


i) 100mm dia. for sewers Rm 1 

ii) 150mm dia. for sewers Rm 22 

iii) 300mm dia. for sewers Rm 12 

17.2 Providing and laying for underground work, heavy duty spigot and 

socket C.I.pipes of Kesoram/Electrosteel/Neco or approved equivalent 

make conforming to IS:1536 of following sizes, including all specials, 

cement mortar (1:2) caulking in joints, excavation, back-filling, carting 

away, cutting holes in masonry, making good, etc., complete as per 

drawings and specifications. (Depth not exceeding 1.5m) 

i) 80mm diameter Rm 13 

ii) 100mm diameter Rm 20 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 36 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

17.3 Providing, laying, jointing & testing R.C.C.hume pipe of NP2 Class for 

sanitary works; including cutting, cellars, jointing-in 1:2 cement mortar 

including excavation for pipes to required depth, 100 thick 1:3:6 concrete 

on 150 thick sand cushion, back-filling the trench with sand or selected 

earth, carting away complete as specified and as directed by 


i) 150mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

ii) 250mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

iii) 300mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 10 

iv) 350mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 10 

v) 400mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

vi) 450mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

vii) 500mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

17.4 Providing, laying, jointing & testing R.C.C.hume pipe of NP3 Class for 

road crossing etc works; including cutting, cellars, jointing-in 1:2 cement 

mortar including excavation for pipes to required depth, 100 thick 1:3:6 

concrete on 150 thick sand cushion, back-filling the trench with sand or 

selected earth ,carting away complete as specified and as directed by 


i) 300mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 10 

ii) 500mm dia. Hume Pipe Rm 5 

17.5 Providing, laying, jointing & testing PVC pipes for electrical road crossing 

etc works; including cutting, cellars, jointing including excavation for pipes 

to required depth, back-filling the trench with sand or selected earth 

,carting away complete as specified and as directed by 


i) 100mm dia.PVC Pipe Rm 5 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 37 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

ii) 150mm dia.PVC Pipe Rm 5 

iii) 200mm dia. PVC Pipe Rm 10 

iv) 300mm dia. PVC Pipe Rm 5 

17.6 Providing, concrete M20 encasing to underground pipes on all sides 

square/circular including shuttering etc. complete, as per 

drawing,specification & as directed by owner/consultant. 

Cu.m. 1 

17.7 Providing reinforcement in encasing of pipes. M.T. 1 

18.0 MODIFICATION WORKS 

18.1 Providing and fixing Electroplated Steel (heavy duty) Mechanical 

Anchor Fastners of Hilti or approved equivalent and installed as per 

manufacturer’s specification, drawing & as directed by Owner / Consultant. 

i) HSL M16/25 Each 4 

ii) HSL M20/30 Each 4 

iii) HSL M 24/30 Each 6 

iv) HST M16/25 Each 6 

v) HST M20/30 Each 6 

vi) HST M24/30 Each 6 

18.2 Providing and fixing Electroplated Steel (heavy duty) Resin Bonded 

Anchor Fastners of Hilti make or approved equivalent and installed as 

per manufacturer’s specification, drawing & as directed by Owner / 

Consultant. 

i) HVU M16 X 125 Chemical Anchor Each 6 

ii) HAS-E M16 X 125/38 Anchor Rod Each 6 

iii) HVU M20 X 170 Chemical Anchor Each 6 

iv) HAS-E M20 X 170/48 Anchor Rod Each 6 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 38 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

v) HVU M24 X 210 Chemical Anchor Each 6 

vi) HAS-E M24 X 210/54 Anchor Rod Each 6 

18.3 Same as item 18.1, but stainless steel Anchor fastner 

i) HSL M16/25 Each 4 

ii) HSL M20/30 Each 4 

iii) HSL M 24/30 Each 4 

iv) HST M16/25 Each 4 

v) HST M20/30 Each 4 

vi) HST M24/30 Each 4 

18.4 Same as item 18.2, but stainless steel Anchor fastner 

i) HVU M16 X 125 Chemical Anchor Each 4 

ii) HAS-E M16 X 125/38 Anchor Rod Each 4 

iii) HVU M20 X 170 Chemical Anchor Each 4 

iv) HAS-E M20 X 170/48 Anchor Rod Each 4 

v) HVU M24 X 210 Chemical Anchor Each 4 

vi) HAS-E M24 X 210/54 Anchor Rod Each 4 

18.5 "Providing & Installating of Rebar Anchors by HILTI HIT- HY 150 , work 

done as per manufacturer's specification & complete as per drawing" 

i) 12 mm dia Each 4 

ii) 16 mm dia Each 4 

18.6 "Providing & Installating of Rebar Anchors by HILTI HIT- RE 500 , work 

done as per manufacturer's specification & complete as per drawing" 

i) 12 mm dia Each 4 

ii) 16 mm dia Each 4 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 39 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

18.7 Reinforcement bar cutting as directed by Owner / Consultant 

i) Upto 16mm dia. Each 2 

ii) Above 16mm dia. Each 5 

18.8 Making welded joints in reinforcement bar of any dia. to satisfaction of 

Each 

Site engineer. 

18.9 Cutting concrete with a Hydraulic power operated wall saw Diamond 

Cutting tool of Hilti or approved equivalent make as per manufacturer’s 

specification, drawing & as directed by owner/consultant. (Note :- 

Measurement for payment shall be perimeter of cut x depth of cut). 

18.10 Supplying & application of one coat of bonding agent Nitobond EP of 

Fosroc make as per manufacturer's specification including cleaning of 

concrete surface, etc., complete 

19.0 ACID RESISTANT TILE FLOORING / DADO WORKS 

19.1 Providing & laying 12 mm thick Acid Resistant Tiles to floors of H.R. 

Johnson (Endura series) or approved equivalent make . application of 

bitumen primer,12 mm thick mastic membrane , 5 mm thick Potassium 

silicate based mortar bedding & 3 mm thick pointing with Furane based 

cement. of Prodolite anticorrosive or approved equivalent . All work 

complete as per manufacturer’s specifications, drawing & as directed by 


Sq.m. 5 

Sq.m 10 

Sq. m 115 

19.2 Same as item 19.1 above but for Dado wall tiles of 10 mm thick Sq. m 145 

20.0 MISCELLANEOUS 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 40 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

20.1 Providing and carrying out Anti-Termite Treatment for the building at 

plinth level including treatment of top surfaces of plinth fittings, junction of 

walls and floors, treatment of soil along external perimeter and 

surrounding pipe wastes and conduit etc., complete as per the 

specification. (Rate based on plinth area of the building) 

20.2 Providing and laying Water proof paper of 40 GSM including overlaps (to 

be not less than 100mm) etc., complete as specified and as per drawing, 

specifications and as directed by Owner/Consultant 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 895 

Sq. m 5 

20.3 Providing & fixing PP-FRP Nozzle in concrete walls, etc as per 

drawing,specification & as directed by owner/consultant. 



iii) 600mm dia. Rm 1 

20.4 Moulding to Granite frame including finish if required as directed by 


i) Half Round Ru.m 2 

ii) Full Round Ru.m 16 

20.5 Guniting to Protect rock fall by dry mix process as per IS: 9012-1978 

to existing cleaned portion of rock etc. cement motor 1:3.5 (sand 10 mm 

downgrade) & waterproof compound under pressure of 2.1 to 2.8 kg per 

sq. cm. by guniting machine including cleaning, roughening & scaffolding, 

floating, curing (Including provision of weep hole’s at intervals in the rock 

surface as per requirement) etc. complete as per drawing, specification & 

as directed as by owner/consultant.Thickness of guniting shall be 

minimum 50 mm . This job to be done by specialized agency. 

Sq. m 330 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 41 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

20.6 Providing & fixing Rock fall protection netting of zinc coated double twist 

wire mesh PVC coated 3 to 4 mm thick wires of Maccaferri 

Environmental solutions or approved equivalent make etc laid including 

anchoring by minimum 12 mm to 22 mm dia mild steel anchor bars at 

intervals & lacing the netting at joints , Erection of netting by cranes etc 

complete as per drawing, manufacturer’s specification & as directed by 

owner/consultant. This job to be done by specialized agency. This job to 

be done by approved manufacturer applicators. 

21.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL , GRATING & HANDRAILING, ROOFING & 

STRUCTURAL STEEL PAINTING 

STRUCTURAL STEEL 

21.1 Supplying steel conforming to IS:2062 ( Grade A) of SAIL / R.I.N.L / TATA 

/ Essar or approved equivalent as approved by Owner / Consultant, 

transporting, straightening, cleaning , fabricating and erecting various 

structures like truss in position, platforms, ladders, cage ladders, 

bracings, structural frames, columns, beams, ladder, rungs, walkways, 

staircases, to line and level, welded/bolted structural steel including 

supply of bolts of GKW Class I or approved equivalent make, and weld 

fillers, shim plates, including making templates, welding, bolting, erection 

bolts, erection cleats, splicings, strengthening of members, 

etc.,Preparation of fabrication drawings shall be in scope of contractor. 

21.2 GRATINGS 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq. m 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




330 

MT 15 

Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 42 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

Supplying, transporting and fabricating as per the specifications, 

G.I.grating & treads of the approved design and pattern and erecting & 

fixing of fabricated steel work on operating floors, platforms, stair landings 

& treads, etc., including supply of all fixtures like edge plates for treads, 

clips, studs, bolts, etc, including nosing for the treads and etc., 

complete, as per drawings, specifications & as directed by 

Owner/Consultant. All gratings,nut and bolts shall be galvanized as per 

specification . 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

MT 0.5 

21.3 Supplying, fabricating, erecting M.S. hand railing with top rail of teak 

wooden section ( surface with hand polished & then finally spray painted 

with PU paint) fixed on top plate 6 mm thick with vertical supports for the 

above, square vertical sections 10x10 mm spaced at 150 mm c/c fixed on 

base plate 6 mm thick . The base plate shall be fixed on concrete slab by 

anchor fastners . etc., as per specifications, drawing & as directed by 


i) Height of railing 925 mm Rm 70 

ii) Height of railing 1050 mm Rm 12 

iii) Toe Guard 100x 6 thk Rm 12 

21.4 SURFACE PREPARATION & STRUCTURAL STEEL PAINTING 

Shot blasting to Sa 2 1/2 Swedish standard SIS-05-5900 & Painting as 

per specifications and drawing and as directed by the Owner/Consultant 

including cleaning the surface of dust and loose particles, touching up of 

damaged primer coat, all labour, scaffolding, tools, consumables, etc. 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 43 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

i) To surface of structural steel fabricated beams, angles, channels, 

builtup sections, etc., 

MT 15 

ii) To Handrailing RM 82 

21.5 Supplying, cleaning, straightening, bending if required and fixing 

"Profiled Precoated Galvalume sheets" of Blue scope or approved 

equivalent make with alloy of zinc and aluminium” AZ 150 

conforming to AS 1397 or ASTM 792 & yield strength 550 Mpa ( thickness 

of alloy = 150 gm/m2 ) and coated with Silicon modified polyester paint 

20 microns of selected colour over 5 micron primer coat on Both sides 

same paint coating .& Self drilling self tapping screws (having coating of 

45 micron thickness of Zinc tin alloy & screws electroplated by cold 

mechanical plating method , mesh belt furnace heat treated) of ITW 

Buildtex make or approved equivalent having caps matching to suit sheet 

colour and EPDM seals, complete with flashings and silicon sealants 

as required, as per drawings, specifications and as directed by 


(Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and samples for approval) 

(Measurement - Sloped roofs shall be measured along the slope for the 

covered area and no extra payments will be made for laps) 

i) For roof (0.55mm Base metal thickness) Sq.m 200 

ii) For wall claddings,side cladding(0.55 Base metal thickness) Sq.m 

353 

iii)For "S" type Louvers Sq.m 44 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 44 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 

21.6 Supplying, cleaning, straightening, bending if required and fixing 

flashings "Profiled Ridge / Single Ridge capping / Barge capping" to 

suit the roof sheets with necessary polyester coated G.I. self drilling 

screws and self drilling stitching screws having caps matching to suit sheet 

colour and EPDM seals, nylon washers complete with flashings and silicon 

sealants as required, as per drawings, specifications and as directed by 


21.7 Supplying and fixing 2mm thick Polycarbonate translucent sheets of 

G.E. platics or approved equivalent of appropriate shape and corrugation 

to suit roof profile of sheets including self drilling screws, nuts, washers, 

etc., complete as specified and directed by Owner/Consultant. 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

Sq.m 114 

Sq.m 50 

21.8 Supplying, cleaning, straightening, bending if required, and fixing 

"Eaves Gutters" of following material and to required slope as per 

drawings including accessories like polyester coated G.I. self drilling self 

tapping screws and all gutter fittings such as drop ends, stop ends, 

spacers, laps, etc. complete with silicon sealants as per specifications 

and as directed by Owner/Consultant. 

(Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and samples for approval) 

i) Galvalume steel sheets – 1 mm thick Sq.m 5 

ii) Galvanised Steel sheets – 1 mm thick Sq.m 57 

21.9 Supplying and fixing G.I.Gutter straps 40 wide x 5 mm thick with 

polyester coated G.I.fasteners, EPDM seals etc., complete as per drawing, 


KG 347 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

Jacobs 


18-3188 Doc.no.18-3188-99-02-C-06-0048-A4 

Rev: B 

PAGE 45 OF 45 


SR 

NO 


of 

Item 


Units of 

Measure 

ments 

21.10 Supplying and fixing "spouts" to suit C.I.downtake pipes including 

making holes in gutters at downtake pipe locations as per drawings 

including polyester coated G.I.bolts, nuts, EPDM seals, nylon washers and 

silicon sealants, etc., complete as per drawings, specifications and as 


i) For 100 mm dia. Downtake pipe RM 8 

ii) For 150 mm dia. Downtake pipe RM 12 

Quantity Rate 

(INR) 

Rate 

(INR) in 

words 




Amo 

unt 

(INR)

QTY 

PAGE 1 OF 3 

S.No DESCRIPTION UNIT 

SUPPLY INSTALLATION 

REMARKS 

RATE AMOUNT RATE AMOUNT 

A Supply & Installation for Electrical Items 

1 Lighting Fittings with Lamp: - 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following light fittings 

along with the luminaire 

1.1 Industrial Tube Light Lighting Fittings with Powder reflector type Nos. 34 

Suitable for 1 x 40 W Fluorescent lamp 

Similar To CGL Cat No IGP1314HSB 

1.2 Lighting Fittings suitable for Zone-1 Nos. 14 


Similar To Stahl Cat No EXLUX 6000 

1.3 Industrial Corrosion proof Tube Light Lighting Fittings with Powder Nos. 14 

reflector type Suitable for 1 x 40 W Fluorescent lamp 

Similar To CGL Cat No IPFC14HSB 

1.4 Industrial Decorative Tube Light Lighting Fittings with Mirror Optics Nos. 100 


Similar To CGL Cat No CRFG24HSB 



Similar To CGL Cat No CRFA14HSB 




1.7 DC lighting fixture with incandescent lamp suitable for 110V DC 

a) Recessed Mounting Nos. 7 

b) Surface mounting, Flame proof type Nos. 1 

1.8 Street Lighting fixture suitable for bracket mounting for building 

periphery lighting suitable for 1x 40W Fluorscent Lamp Nos. 8 

2 Power Panel (PP) 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following power 

panels 

2.1 100A TPN SFU incoming and 2 Nos. 63A TPN SFU Nos. 1 

+ 2 Nos 32A TPN SFU outgoings. 

2.2 32A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 4P 100 mA ELCB and Nos. 1 

3 x 4 nos 16A SPN MCB outgoings 

3 Lighting Panel (LP) 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following Lighting 

panels 

3.1 Normal Lighting Panel Nos. 1 

63 A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 100mA ELCB + 3 x 8 nos 10A SPN 

MCB outgoings inclusive of two circuits controlled through timer 

3.2 Emergency Lighting Panel 

32 A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 100mA ELCB Nos. 1 

+ 3 x 3nos 10A SPN MCB outgoings. 

3.3 DC Critical Lighting Panel 

32 A DP incoming and 6 Nos. 10A DP outgoings. Nos. 1 

4 Cables 

4.1 Supply, laying, testing and commissioning 650/1100V, PVC insulated, 

copper conductor armoured cables of the following sizes- 

ANNEXURE-I 

SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS ( SRR / OPFR BUILDING) 

PROJECT: LOBS PLANT 

4.1.1 4C X 2.5 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 180 

4.1.2 4C X 10 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 20 

4.1.3 4C X 16 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 20 

PRICE

ANNEXURE-I 



QTY 

PAGE 2 OF 3 



REMARKS 


5 Cable Termination 

Supply, installation, connections & termination of following cables using 

industrial (Double compression) , nickel plated brass glands with PVC 

hoods and heavy duty tinned copper lugs (crimping type ) as 

given below 

650/1100V, PVC insulated, copper / aluminium conductor armoured 

cables of the following sizes- 

5.1.1 4C X 2.5 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 20 

5.1.2 4C X 10 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 2 

5.1.3 4C X 16 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 2 

5.1.4 4C X 25 mm 2 , YWY / AYWY Nos. 2 



6 Switches And Switch Socket Outlets 

6.1 Industrial Metal clad 415 V, 63 A, TPN & E (3P+N+E),interlocked switch Nos. 1 

welding socket outlet. 

6.2 Industrial type recessed mounting 240V, 20 A, SPN MCB switch Nos. 1 

socket outlet having scraping earth facility. 

6.3 6/16A, 240 V Commercial type switch socket outlet switch box Nos. 35 

suitable for recess mounting. 

6.4 Commercial decorative switch boxes comprising 6/16 A, 240 V single 

phase toggle switches suitable for recess mounting. 

6.4.1 Switch box comprising 2 Nos. 6/16 A switches. Nos. 10 



7 Supply of Point Wiring 

Supply of point wiring using concealed/surface mounted PVC conduits 

for Lighting and receptacles 

7.1 Full Point for normal lighting nos 16 

7.2 Full Point for AC emergency lighting nos 5 

7.3 Full Point for DC emergency lighting nos 3 

7.4 Full Point for 6/16A socket outlet nos 5 

7.5 Full Point for 20A socket outlet nos 1 

7.6 Half Point for normal lighting nos 120 

7.7 Half Point for AC emergency lighting nos 30 

7.8 Half Point for DC emergency lighting nos 6 

7.9 Half Point for 6/16A socket outlet nos 30 

7.10 Half Point for 20A socket outlet nos 1 

8 Stuctural Steel 

Supply, fabrication & erection of items fabricated from structural kgs 30 

steel, for various items like supports for panels, 

distribution- board & other minor structures including epoxy 

painting for fabricated work. Paint shall be two coats of red 

epoxy oxide and two coats of final epoxy paint. 

9 Lightining Protection 

Supply of lightning protection finials & down conductors 

with the necessary hardware including GI pipe supports, clamps etc. 

9.1 25 mm Dia, 1.0 Mtr. Long, MS rod type Lightning finial. Nos. 2 

9.2 32 X 6 mm GI conductor for lightning down conductors and Mtrs. 350 

roof conductors 

PRICE

ANNEXURE-I 



QTY 

PAGE 3 OF 3 



REMARKS 


10 Earth Electrodes 

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of GI Pipe Earthing pit with pipe electrode with 

type earth electrode of following size having with 2 nos. G.I. necessary accessories and hardwire 

main earth conductor test link , in Brick chamber as per IS as per Drg . 18-3188-99-00-E.01-0053-A3 

3043.The installation shall include excavation of earth to the 

required depth, putting up pipe/Plate electrode ,filling up of 

charcoal & salt in alternate layer as per std. installation drg, 

making of brick chamber including brickwork, connections with 

GI strip from earth pit to the main earth grid and providing 

RCC covers. 

10.1 100 mm dia, 3.0 Mtr long G.I. Perforated Pipe Electrode. Nos. 10 

11 Earth Strips 

Supply & installation of GI earthing strip along the cable trenches / trays 

or fixing to walls or structures or buried individually in paved 

/ unpaved areas including minor civil work like chipping of paved 

surface, finishing after laying grounding loop etc, brazing at joints, 

providing anticorrosive paint for brazed portion, clamping & 

necessary hardware for connection , excavation & refilling etc. 

including provision for risers at places as per approved drgs. & 

directions of the site in charge. 

11.1 75 X 10 mm GI strip Mtrs. 150 For Main Earth Loop 

11.2 50 X 8 mm GI strip Mtrs. 30 



11.5 25 X 6 mm GI strip Mtrs. 100 For Inside The Building 

12 Earth Bus 

Supply & installation of GI earth bus complete with hardware the 

following sizes. 

12.1 300 x 75 x 8 mm Thk. Nos. 3 

13 Exhaust Fans 

13.1 Industrial heavy duty type 240 V, 1400 rpm, 300 mm sweep 

exhaust fan following with frame Nos. 6 

13.2 Explosion proof heavy duty type 240 V, 1400 rpm, 300 mm sweep 

exhaust fan with frame Nos. 1 

14 Excavation And Backfilling 

Excavation, backfilling and compaction for earth strip buried M 3 

directly in the ground. 

15 Inserts in concrete slabs/beams/coloumn 

15.1 Supply & installation of 100/75 mm dia PVC sleeve inserts in concrete Mts 20 

in lengths of 250mm (approx) 

15.2 Supply & installation of 100/75 mm dia GI sleeve inserts in concrete Mts 10 


16 Unit Rates per day for supply of services of contractor's skilled, 

unskilled personnel based on eight hours a day. 

16.1 Engineer Rs. 

16.2 Supervisor Rs. 

16.3 Foreman Rs. 

16.4 Electrician Rs. 

16.5 Wireman Rs. 

16.6 Fitter Rs. 

16.7 Helper Rs. 

27 

PRICE


SUPPLY 

INSTALLATION 

REMARKS 



1 Lightning Protection 

Supply of lightning protection finials & 

down conductors with the necessary hardware 

including GI pipe supports, clamps etc. 


1.2 32 X 6 mm GI conductor for lightning down conductors Mtrs. 550 


QTY 

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of GI Pipe Earthing pit with pipe electrode with necessary 

type earth electrode of following size having with 2 nos. G.I. accessories and hardwire as per Drg . 

main earth conductor test link , in Brick chamber as per IS 18-3188-99-00-E.01-0053-A3 






RCC covers. 

2.1 100 mm dia, 3.0 Mtr long G.I. Perforated Pipe Electrode. Nos 6 

RCC covers. 


ANNEXURE-II 

SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS ( LOBS SUBSTATION BUILDING) 






PRICE 

PAGE 1 OF 1

18 – 3188 LOBS QUALITY UP GRADATION PROJECT – HPCL MUMBAI 

CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS 

SUB STATION, SRR & COMPRESSOR SHED Page 1 of 2 

4.4 Basic Price of Materials Direct Material cost 

BASIC PRICE OF MATERIALS 

DIRECT MATERIAL COST 

The Bidder shall quote the basic rates for the following materials on which the extra items shall be 

based: 

S.No. Description Unit 

1. Cement MT. 

2. Sand 

2.1 Coarse CUM 

2.2 Fine CUM 

3. Stone Chips 

3.1 20 mm down CUM 

3.2 40 mm down CUM 

4. Reinforcements 

4.1 MS Round (IS 432 – Gr. I) 

4.1.1 6 mm to 12 mm MT 

4.1.2 14mm upwards MT 

4.2 Ribbed Tor Steel (IS 1786) 

4.2.1 6 mm to 12 mm MT 

4.2.2 14mm upwards MT 

5. Bricks 

5.1 First Class Bricks CUM 

6. Rubble CUM 

Rate 

(Rs.) 

Remarks




S.No. Description Unit 

7. 

R.C.C.Hume pipe (NP2 class 

including collar one per standard 

length) 

7.1 150 NB RM 

7.2 200 NB RM 

7.3. 300 NB RM 

7.4. 450 NB RM 

7.5 600 NB RM 

7.6. 900 NB RM 

8. 

9. 

Structural Steel (un fabricated) 

conforming to IS – 2062 

Gratings (Basis 30 Kg/Sqm. by 

weight) 

4.4 Basic Price of Materials Direct Material cost 

MT 

SQM 

10. Chequered Plate MT 

11. Paint SQM 

NOTES: 

1. 

2. 

Rate 

(Rs.) 

Remarks 

The rates above shall be inclusive of sales tax, general tax and all other taxes in force 

at the time of purchase, and transport charges for delivering above material at site. 

Cost of any of the above materials if supplied by the Owner to the contractor at site 

shall be recovered at the rates quoted above by the Contractor from any of their bill. 

Signature of Bidder 

Date: ______________________




4.5 Basic Price Tables 

BASIC PRICE LABOUR 

DIRECT LABOUR COST 

S.No. Description Daily wage rate per 8 hours normal 

working day 

(Rs.) 

1. Mason 

2. Carpenter 

3. Khalashi 

4. Painter 

5. Plumber 

6. Welder 

7. Gas Cutter 

8. Fitter – Bar Bending / Binder 

9. Watchman 

10. Unskilled labour (Male) 

11. Unskilled labour (Female) 

The Bidder must ensure that the above rates take into consideration the prevailing statutory 

benefits and all other statutory benefits directly payable to the labour. 

Signature of the Bidder 

Date: ____________________________




4.6 Percentage to cover Indirect charges 

PERCENTAGE TO COVER INDIRECT CHARGES 

Percentage to cover indirect charges which will be added to indirect labour and material cost in 

Appendices ‘A’ and ‘B’, for finalizing rates of extra items of work not included in the Schedule of 

Items and which cannot be worked out pro-rata from any of the items of the said Schedule. 

In order to finalize rates for extra items of work, as stipulated above, the Bidder shall quote a 

percentage to cover all indirect charges, viz. overheads profits, insurance, tools and plant hire 

charges etc, which will be added to the direct material and labour rates (Basic Rates) required for 

any items of work not included in the Schedule of Items. 

Percentage to cover Indirect charges = ___________________. 

Signature of Bidder 

Date: ______________________

SPECIFICATION NO : 18 – 3188 - 00/Z – 00 – 0004 - A4 

TITLE 

PROJECT REFERENCE 

- PROJECT NO : 18 –3188 

- PROJECT LOCATION : MUMBAI, MAHARASTRA 

5.1 Special Conditions of Contract 

: SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT - CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 

WORKS (SUB STATION, SATELLITE RACK ROOM & COMPRESSOR 

SHED) 

- PROJECT TITLE : LOBS QUALITY UPGRADATION 

- CLIENT : HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. 

- Project Manager Authorisation : Mr. A R BAPAT Date : 09.10.2007 

- Client Authorisation : Date : 

Rev. 

No. 

Issue 

Date 

Pages Revision Description Prepared 

By 

Checked 

By 

Approved 

By 

A 12.09.07 26 Issued for Comments & Approval DM RNK AGG 

B 09.10.07 24 Client Comments Incorporated 

and Issued for Enquiry 

Entire Specification SPECIFICATION ISSUED FOR 

DM RNK AGG 

Issued this Revision In-house Review Purchase 

Revised Pages Only Client Approval Construction 

Issued this Revision Enquiry

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. DOC NO : 18 – 3188 - 00/Z – 00 – 0004 - A4 

LOBS, QUALITY UPGRADATION 

: SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT – CIVIL 

REV NO : B 

TITLE & STRUCTURAL WORKS (SS, SSR & COMP. 

SHED) 

ISSUE DATE : 09.10.2007 Page 2 of 24 

1. GENERAL 

2. CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF WORK 

3. CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY 

4. TIME SCHEDULE 

5. EXTENSION OF TIME 

6. SITE CLEANING 

7. MEASUREMENT OF WORKS 

8. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 

9. UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURES. 

10. EMPLOYMENT OF LOCAL LABOUR 

11. CONTRACTORS LABOUR TO LEAVE SITE ON COMPLETION OF WORK. 

12. PROVIDENT FUND 

13. FIRM PRICE 

14. WARRANTY & DEFICIENCY 

15. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION 

16. SUBCONTRACTING 

17. COMPLIANCE WITH LAW 

18. RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR 

19. QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM 

20. SITE ORGANISATION 

21. MECHANISATION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES, MOBILISATION OF CONSTRUCTION 

EQUIPMENT, SHUTTERING MATERIALS AND SCAFFOLDING 

22. TESTS AND INSPECTION OF WORKS 

23. FINAL INSPECTION 

24. LEADS 

25. COMPLETION DOCUMENTS 

26. ADDITIONAL WORKS/EXTRA WORKS 

27. COMPUTERISED CONTRACTORS BILLING SYSTEM 

28. HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT 

29. COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY REGULATIONS / WORKS RULES 

30. COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES 

31. QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE OF KEY PERSONNEL 

32. SITE ESTABLISHMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE 

33. ELECTRICITY AND WATER




REV NO : B 


SHED) 


34. SPECIAL REQUIRMENTS FOR GATE PASSES, MATERIAL ENTRY PASSES, WORK 

PERMIT AND SAFETY REGULATION. 

35. STATUTORY APPROVAL 

36. VENDOR LIST FOR STEEL, PIPES & FITTINGS, PAINTS AND WELDING 

ELECTRODES/FILLER WIRES. 

ANNEXURES TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

ANNEXURE I : TIME SCHEDULE. 

ANNEXURE II : MEASUREMENT OF WORK AND INVOICING PROCEDURE. 

5.1 Special Conditions of Contract




REV NO : B 


SHED) 


1.0 GENERAL 

. 

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited is setting up Lube oil base stock quality up gradation 

project, in their existing refinery located at Mumbai, Maharashtra. This contract document is for 

carrying out Civil, Structural and Electrical works of Sub station, Satellite Rack Room and 

Compressor shed in the existing refinery. 

Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall be read in conjunction with the General Conditions 

of Contract (GCC). Schedule of Items/BOQ, specifications of work, drawings and any other 

document forming part of this Contract, wherever the context so requires. In the event any of 

the Conditions of this document contravenes or is in conflict, the preference of the documents 

in the following order shall prevail. 

• Special Conditions of Contract 

• Schedule of Items / BOQ 

• Drawings 

1.1 DEFINITIONS & INTERPREATIONS 

The following Definitions and Interpretations shall be used in context with this document 

1.1.1 A. “OWNER” shall mean : Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited. 

B. “CONSULTANT shall mean : Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited. 

H&G House 

Sector 11, Plot No. 12 

CBD Belapur, Navi Mumbai - 400 614. 

C. “ENGINEER IN CHARGE” shall mean: Jacobs Resident Construction Manager. 

D. “CONTRACTOR” shall mean : The successful bidder. 

1.1.2 "WORKS" shall mean the Produce(s) of the work. 

1.1.3 "CONSTRUCTION PLANT" means all appliances or things of whatsoever nature required in 

connection with the execution, completion or maintenance of the works or temporary works but 

do not include materials or other things intended to form or forming part of the permanent 

work. 

1.1.4 "SPECIFICATIONS" shall mean the technical specifications forming a part of the contract and 

such other schedules and drawings as may be mutually agreed upon. 

1.1.5 "LETTER OF INTENT" shall mean the official notice issued by the Owner notifying the 

CONTRACTOR that his proposal has been accepted and that the CONTRACTOR is required 

to sign the Contract agreement as required by the Owner. CONTRACTOR shall also start 

mobilizing his resources after receiving the 'Letter of Intent' and execute the work. 

1.1.6 "DATE OF CONTRACT" shall mean the date on which Owner and CONTRACTOR have 

signed the Contract agreement. 

1.1.7 "CONTRACT DOCUMENT" means collectively the Tender documents, Drawings, 

Specifications, agreed variations - if any, Contract and such other documents constituting the 

tender and acceptance thereof. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


1.1.8 "WARRANTY PERIOD/ MAINTENANCE PERIOD" shall mean the period during which the 

CONTRACTOR shall remain liable for repair or replacement of any defective part of the works 

performed under the Contract. 

1.1.9 "IFC" shall mean drawings "Issued For Construction". 

1.2 Notwithstanding the sub-division of the document into these separate sections and volumes, 

every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary of every other part and shall be read 

with and into the Contract so far as it may be practicable to do so. 

1.3 Where any portion of the GCC is repugnant to or at variance with any provisions of the Special 

Conditions of Contract, then unless a different intention appears, the provision(s) of the Special 

Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to override the provision(s) of GCC only to the extent 

that repugnancies of variations in the Special Conditions of Contract are not possible of being 

reconciled with the provisions of GCC. 

1.4 Wherever it is stated in this Bidding Document that such and such a supply is to be effected or 

such and such a work is to be carried out, it shall be understood that the same shall be 

effected/carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost unless a different intention is 

specifically and expressly stated herein or otherwise explicit from the context. Contract value 

(also referred to as Contract Price) shall be, deemed to have included such cost. 

1.5 The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable relevant Indian Standards, 

the job specifications contained herein & codes referred to Where the job specifications 

stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the standard codes and specifications, 

these additional requirements shall also be satisfied. In the absence of any Standard 

Specifications/Codes of practice for detailed specifications covering any part the work covered 

in this Bidding Document, the instructions/directions of Engineer-in-Charge will be binding on 

the CONTRACTOR. 

1.6 In the absence of any Specifications covering any material, design or work(s) the same shall 

be performed/ supplied/ executed in accordance with standard Engineering practice as per the 

instructions/directions of the Engineer-in-Charge, which will be binding on the CONTRACTOR. 

2.0 CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF WORK 

2.1 The scope of work in general includes scope of work specified in various Technical 

Specifications and Schedule of Rates enclosed in the Bidding Document. Further, it includes 

any other work not specifically mentioned but required to complete the work as per 

specifications, drawings and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. 

2.2 Scope of work shall be read in conjunction with item description of Schedule of Rates and 

CONTRACTOR’s scope shall include all activities of work specified in the item description of 

Schedule of Rates/ Technical specification. 

2.3 The CONTRACTOR shall refer the Job Specification – Electrical (18 – 3188 – 99 – 00 – E 02 – 

0103 – A4, Rev. 1) for detailed scope of Electrical Works. 

2.4 Rates shall include all cost for the performance of the item considering the parts of the Bidding 

Document. In case any activity though specifically not covered in description of item under 

‘Schedule of Rates/ Technical specification’ but is required to complete the work which could 

be reasonably implied/ inferred from the content of Bidding Document, the cost for carrying out 

such activity of work shall be deemed to be included in the item rate. 

3.0 CONTRACTOR’S SCOPE OF SUPPLY 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


3.1 All materials, equipments, Ready mix concrete, Tools & tackles, Labour & consumables 

required for successful completion of work as per the description of item in Technical 

specification shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR and the cost of such supply shall be 

deemed to be included in the quoted rates without any additional liability on the part of the 

Owner. Owner shall not supply any material for the work. 

4.0 TIME SCHEDULE 

4.1 The Work shall be executed strictly as per time schedule given in Annexure – I to SCC. The 

period of completion given includes the time required for mobilisation as well as testing, 

rectifications, if any, retesting, demobilisation and completion in all respects to the satisfaction 

of the Engineer-in-Charge. 

4.2 A joint programme of execution of work will be prepared by the Engineer-in-Charge and 

CONTRACTOR. This programme will take into account the time of completion mentioned in 

clause 4.1 above. 

4.3 Monthly/weekly execution programme will be drawn up by the Engineer-in-Charge jointly with 

the CONTRACTOR based on availability of materials, work fronts and the joint programme of 

execution as referred to above. The CONTRACTOR shall scrupulously adhere to the 

Targets/Programmes by deploying adequate personnel, Construction Equipment, Tools and 

Tackles and also by timely supply of required materials coming within his scope of supply as 

per Contract. In all matters concerning the extent of target set out in the' weekly/monthly 

programme and the degree of achievement, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge will be final 

and binding on the CONTRACTOR. 

4.4 CONTRACTOR shall give every day category-wise labour and equipment deployment report 

along with the progress of work done on previous day in the format prescribed by the Engineerin-Charge. 

5.0 EXTENSION OF TIME 

5.1 If Contractor requires an extension of time for completion of the work on the grounds of 

unavoidable hindrance in the execution or any other ground, the Contractor shall apply in 

writing to the Owner / Consultant within ten days of the date of hindrance on account of which 

the Contractor desires such extension as aforesaid and the Owner/Consultant shall if in their 

opinion (which shall be final) reasonable grounds have been shown thereof, authorize such 

extension of time. 

6.0 SITE CLEANING 

6.1 The CONTRACTOR shall clean and keep clean the work site from time to time to the 

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge for easy access to work site and to ensure safe 

passage, movement and working. 

6.2 If the work involves dismantling of any existing structure in whole or part, care shall be taken to 

limit the dismantling up to the exact point and/or lines as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge 

and any damage caused to the existing structure beyond the said line or point shall be repaired 

and restored to the original condition at the cost and risk of CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction 

of the Engineer-in-Charge, whose decision shall be final and binding upon the CONTRACTOR. 

6.3 The CONTRACTOR shall be the custodian of the dismantled materials till the Engineer-In- 

Charge takes charge thereof. 

6.4 The CONTRACTOR shall dispose off the unserviceable materials, debris etc. to any area 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


within Refinery premises/ other area as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

6.5 The CONTRACTOR shall sort out, clear and stack the serviceable materials obtained from the 

dismantling/ renewal at places as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 

6.6 No extra payment shall be paid on this account. The rates quoted in Schedule of Rates are 

deemed to be Inclusive of all the costs towards all the above activities as well. 

7.0 MEASUREMENT OF WORKS 

The measurement of the works covered under this contract shall be as described in the 

Annexure – II to SCC. 

8.0 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

8.1 Construction shall be as per the latest issue of drawings and specifications etc. Issued to the 

CONTRACTOR by Engineer-In-Charge duly marked “Issued for Construction”. 

8.2 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all superseded issue of drawing and specifications etc., are 

withdrawn from circulation and returned to Engineer-In-Charge promptly. 

8.3 In case of discrepancy, generally the detailed drawing and specification shall be considered to 

be correct and such discrepancies shall be notified immediately to the Engineer-In-Charge. 

8.4 CONTRACTOR shall mark up all the changes made during the construction in two copies of all 

the drawings and submit the same as “As built” drawing. 

9.0 UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURES 

Engineers-In-Charge/ OWNER shall provide, to the best possible extent, details in respect of 

existing structures, overhead lines, existing pipelines and utilities existing at job site to the 

CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall execute the work in such a manner that the said 

structures, utilities, pipelines etc. are not disturbed or damaged, and shall indemnify and keep 

indemnified the OWNER from and against any destruction thereof or damages thereto. 

Moreover, CONTRACTOR shall prepare drawing showing all the above stated details 

accurately and submit to Engineer-In-Charge. No extra payment shall be made on this 

account. The rates quoted in SOR are deemed to be inclusive of the costs towards this activity. 

10.0 EMPLOYMENT OF LOCAL LABOUR 

10.1 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that local labour; skilled and/or unskilled, to the extent 

available shall be employed in this work. In case of non-availability of suitable labour in any 

category out of the above persons, labour from outside may be employed. 

10.2 The CONTRACTOR shall not recruit personnel of any category from among those who are 

already employed by the other agencies working at site but shall make maximum use of local 

labour available. 

11.0 CONTRACTOR'S LABOURERS TO LEAVE SITE ON COMPLETION OF THE WORK 

The labourers of CONTRACTOR must leave the location of the project site after the work is 

tapered off/ completed. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


12.0 PROVIDENT FUND 

12.1 The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the provisions of Employees Provident Fund Act 

and register the establishment with the concerned Regional Provident Fund Commissioner 

before commencing the work. The CONTRACTOR shall deposit "Employees" and "Employers" 

contributions in the designated account with the designated Authority every month. The 

CONTRACTOR shall furnish along with each running bill, the challan/ receipt for the payment 

of provident fund made to the RPFC for the preceding month(s). 

12.2 In case the Provident Fund Authority's receipted challan referred to above is not furnished, the 

OWNER shall deduct 5% (five percent) of the payable amount from the CONTRACTOR'S 

running bill and retain the same as a security for the payment of the Provident Fund. Such 

retained amounts shall be refunded to the CONTRACTOR only on production of challan/ 

receipt of the Provident Fund Authority for the period covered by the related deduction. 

13.0 FIRM PRICE 

The quoted price shall remain firm and fixed and valid until completion of the contract and shall 

not subject to escalation for any reason whatsoever. 

14.0 WARRANTY & DEFICIENCY 

CONTRACTOR shall warrant that CONTRACTOR has the experience, capability and all 

necessary registrations and licenses to perform the Services under this Agreement. Should 

any deficiencies arise in connection with Services, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly provide, 

at no extra cost, the additional Services necessary to correct the said deficiency to owner’s 

satisfaction. 

15.0 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION 

The CONTRACTOR shall keep and ensure that CONTRACTOR’s employees keep 

confidential any technical information, data, and information concerning the business, 

technology and research plans or activities of Company, its affiliates, or third parties which is 

made available to CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s employees by Owner or Owner’s 

affiliates or which results from CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s employees work for 

Owner or Owners affiliates hereunder, and CONTRACTOR agree not to use the said 

information and data except for the purpose of performing the Services under this Agreement. 

16.0 SUBCONTRACTING 

CONTRACTOR shall not subcontract all or any part of CONTRACTOR’s obligations under this 

Agreement without Owners prior written approval. In the event of Owner authorizing 

CONTRACTOR to subcontract, CONTRACTOR shall bind every SUBCONTRACTOR to the 

terms of this Agreement. 

17.0 COMPLIANCE WITH LAW 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


Notwithstanding anything in this Terms and Conditions to the contrary, CONTRACTOR shall 

comply with all applicable laws and governmental regulations. The CONTRACTOR is not 

authorized or otherwise expected to take any action in the name of or otherwise on behalf of 

Owner which would violate applicable laws and governmental regulations. 

18.0 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR 

18.1 It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain the approval for any revision 

and/or modifications decided by the CONTRACTOR from the OWNER/Engineer-in-Charge 

before implementation. Also such revisions and/or modifications if accepted/ approved by the 

OWNER/Engineer-in-Charge shall be carried out at no extra cost and implication of time to the 

OWNER. 

18.2 All expenses towards mobilisation at site and demobilisation including bringing in equipment, 

work force, materials, dismantling the equipment, clearing the site etc. shall be deemed to be 

included in the prices quoted and no separate payments on account of such expenses shall be 

entertained. 

18.3 It shall be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to provide, operate and maintain all necessary 

construction equipment, steel scaffoldings and safety gadgets, PPE, cranes/ derrick and other 

lifting tackles, tools and appliances to perform the work in a workman like and efficient manner 

and complete all the jobs as per time schedules without any extra cost to the OWNER. 

18.4 Preparing approaches and working area for the movement and operation of the cranes/derrick, 

leveling the areas for assembly and erection shall also be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 

The CONTRACTOR shall acquaint himself with access availability facilities, such as railway 

siding, local labour etc., to provide suitable allowances in his quotation. The CONTRACTOR 

may have to build temporary access roads to aid his own work, which shall also be taken care 

of while quoting for the work. 

18.5 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for procurement and supply in sequence and at the 

appropriate time of all equipments/ materials and consumables and his rates for execution of 

work will include supply of all these items. 

18.6 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to obtain the permit from BMC for Excavation, 

removal and disposal of the earth and shall bear the necessary cost of Royalty. 

18.7 It shall be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to provide the necessary Hard barricade of GI 

sheet in the working area so as not to affect the existing structure and shall remove the same 

after completion and handing over of the works as per the instruction of the OWNER/Engineerin-charge. 

19.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM 

19.1 The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the quality assurance system as per Jacobs Specification. 

After the award of the contract, detailed quality assurance programme to be followed for the 

execution of contract shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR. 

19.2 The CONTRACTOR shall establish document and maintain an effective quality assurance 

system as outlined in recognised codes. 

19.3 Quality Assurance System plans/ procedures of the CONTRACTOR shall be furnished in the 

form of a QA manual. This document should cover details of the personnel responsible for the 

quality assurance, plans or procedures to be followed for quality control in respect of Design, 

Engineering, Procurement, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning, The quality 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


assurance system should indicate organisational approach for quality control and quality 

assurance of the construction activities, at all stages of work at site as well as at 

manufacturer's works and dispatch of materials. 

19.4 The Quality Assurance plan for various activities and materials shall be furnished to the 

OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge prior to commencement of the activities. The OWNER/ 

Engineer-in-Charge shall review the same within 3 (three) weeks of its submission. 

19.5 The OWNER/Engineer-in-Charge or their representative shall reserve the right to 

inspect/witness; review any or all stages of work at shop/ site as deemed necessary for quality 

assurance. 

19.6 The CONTRACTOR has to ensure the deployment of Quality Assurance and Quality Control 

Engineer(s) depending upon the quantum of work. This QA/QC group shall be fully responsible 

to carryout the work as par standards and all code requirements. In case Engineer-in-charge 

feels that OA/QC Engineer(s) of CONTRACTOR are incompetent or insufficient, 

CONTRACTOR has to deploy other experienced Engineer(s) as per site requirement and to 

the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

19.7 In case CONTRACTOR fails to follow the instructions of Engineer-in-charge with respect to 

above clauses, next payment due to him shall not be released unless and until he complies 

with the instructions to the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge. 

20.0 SITE ORGANISATION 

20.1 The CONTRACTOR shall without prejudice to his overall responsibility to execute and 

complete the works as per specifications and time schedule, progressively deploy adequate 

qualified and experienced personnel together with skilled/ unskilled manpower and augment 

the same as decided by Engineer-in-Charge depending on the exigencies of work to suit the 

construction schedule without any additional cost to OWNER. 

20.2 CONTRACTORS site organization shall include Planning engineer, Safety Engineer and 

Quality engineer. These engineers are exclusively dedicated for their functions. 

21.0 MECHANISATION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AND MOBILISATION OF 

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT 

21.1 Mechanisation of Construction Activities 

21.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall mechanise the construction activities to the maximum extent by 

deploying all necessary construction equipment/machinery in adequate numbers and 

capacities. 

21.1.2 For speedy execution of work, CONTRACTOR shall also ensure use of computer, software for 

at least the following: 

a) Billing 

b) Planning & Scheduling 

c) Progress Reporting 

d) Material Control & Warehousing 

e) Safety Records 

f) Resource Deployment 

g) Communication 

21.1.3 CONTRACTOR further agrees that Contract price is inclusive of all the associated costs, which 

he may incur for actual mobilization, required in respect of use of mechanized construction 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


techniques and that the OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge in this regard shall entertain no claim 

whatsoever. 

21.2 Mobilisation of Construction Equipments, Materials and Scaffolding. 

21.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall without prejudice to his responsibilities to execute and complete the 

work as per the specifications and time schedule, progressively deploy construction equipment, 

Steel tubular scaffolding, materials for barricade, Shuttering, Weigh batchers, Transit mixers, 

Concrete pumps, Dewatering pumps, Site laboratory, Cube testing machine etc. tools and 

tackles and lifting devices ( Like crane, Hydra, tailors etc) and further augment the same 

depending on the exigencies of work and as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge so as to suit 

the construction schedule within scheduled completion date without any additional cost to 

OWNER. 

21.2.2 Contractor shall provide hard barricade made form tubular structures with GI sheet to 

barricade the working area as per the instruction of Engineer-in-Charge. 

22.0 TESTS AND INSPECTION OF WORKS 

22.1 The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the various tests as enumerated in the bidding document 

and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge either on field or outside/laboratories concerning the 

execution of work and supply of the material by CONTRACTOR. All the expenses shall be 

borne by the CONTRACTOR and shall be considered as included in the quoted price. The 

inspection shall be done by followings: 

a) Representative deputed by Engineer-in-charge. 

b) Representative deputed by Statutory Authority. 

CONTRACTOR shall give prior notice sufficiently ahead of time to the Engineer-in-charge and 

also to the authorities to conduct inspection/ to witness such tests. 

22.2 All the tests either on the field or at outside laboratory concerning the execution of the work 

and supply of materials by the CONTRACTOR shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at 

his own cost. 

22.3 The work is subject to inspection at all times by the Engineer-in-charge. The CONTRACTOR 

shall carry out all instructions given during inspection and shall ensure that the work is being 

carried out according to the technical specifications of this bidding document, the technical 

documents that will be furnished to him during performance of work and the relevant codes of 

practice furnished to him during the performance of the work. 

22.4 The CONTRACTOR shall provide for purposes of inspection, access ladders, lighting and 

necessary instruments at his own cost including Low Voltage (24 V) lighting equipment for 

inspection of work. Compressed air for carrying out works shall be arranged by the 

CONTRACTOR at his own cost. 

22.5 Any work not confirming to the execution drawings, specifications or codes shall be rejected 

forthwith and the CONTRACTOR shall carry out the rectifications at his own cost. 

22.6 All results of inspection and test will be recorded in the inspection reports, proforma of which 

will be approved by the Engineer-in-charge; these reports shall form part of the Completion 

Documents. 

22.7 For materials supplied by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall carryout the tests, if required by the 

Engineer-in-charge, and the cost of such tests shall be reimbursed by the OWNER at actual to 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


the CONTRACTOR on production of documentary evidence. 

22.8 Inspection and acceptance of the work shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from any of his 

responsibilities under this contract. 

22.9 Cost towards repeat tests and inspection due to failures, repairs etc, for reasons attributable to 

the CONTRACTOR shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 

22.10 Various tests as specified in specifications shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of 

OWNER/ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE. 

23.0 FINAL INSPECTION 

23.1 After completion of all tests as per specification the whole work will be subject to a final 

inspection to ensure that job has been completed as per requirement. If any defects noticed: in 

the work attributable to CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR at his own cost shall attend 

these, as and when they are brought to his notice by the OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge. 

OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to have these defects rectified at the risk and 

cost of the CONTRACTOR if he fails to attend to these defects immediately. 

24.0 LEADS 

24.1 For the various works, in case of contradiction, leads mentioned in the Schedule of Rates shall 

prevail over those indicated in the Technical Specification. 

25.0 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS 

25.1 The CONTRACTOR shall carryout various tests as called for in bidding document either on 

field or at outside approved laboratories at his own cost. All test results and related documents 

shall be submitted in 6 (Six) copies as part of completion documents. 

25.2 The following documents shall be submitted hard binded by the CONTRACTOR in 6 (Six) sets; 

as a part of the completion documents 

a) Material Test Certificates/Approval record for the material supplied by the 

CONTRACTOR. 

b) Welding procedure specification. 

c) Welding procedure qualification report before commencing welding. 

d) Welder qualification report. 

e) Calibration / test certificates for all tools, tackles, instruments, 

f) Test certificates of lifting devices used. 

g) NDT procedures, NDT report, Hydro test reports, Pneumatic test reports. 

h) All Q.C. Check sheets / ED Forms for the various work carried out by the 

CONTRACTOR. 

i) Cube test reports 

26.0 ADDITIONAL WORKS/ EXTRA WORKS 

26.1 OWNER reserves their right to execute any additional works/ extra works, during the execution 

of work, either by themselves or by appointing any other agency, even though such works are 

incidental to and necessary for the completion of works awarded to the CONTRACTOR. In the 

event of such decisions taken by OWNER, CONTRACTOR is required to extend necessary 

cooperation, and act as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. This is without prejudice to 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


the rights of the OWNER to get the additional works/ extra works executed by the 

CONTRACTOR. 

27.0 COMPUTERISED CONTRACTOR'S BILLING SYSTEM 

27.1 Without prejudice to stipulation in General Conditions of Contract, CONTRACTOR should 

follow following billing system 

27.2 The bills/measurement sheets will be prepared by the CONTRACTOR on their PCs as per the 

standard formats proposed by OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge. The CONTRACTOR will submit 

the bill/measurement sheets to OWNER/ Engineer-in-Charge in an electronic media along with 

the hard copy of the bill, necessary enclosures and documents. The CONTRACTOR will also 

ensure the correctness and consistency of data so entered with the hard copy of the bill 

submitted for payment. 

27.3 OWNER/ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE will utilise these data for processing and verification of bill of 

the CONTRACTOR. 

28.0 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT 

28.1 The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE), management 

system as per Jacobs Specification No. 18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007-A4, Rev. B. 

28.2 First aid medical facilities, arrangements of Ambulance for necessary transportation in 

emergencies shall be made by CONTRACTOR at his own cost. At least one emergency 

vehicle at all time shall be available at site during construction work. 

28.3 The CONTRACTOR shall establish document and maintain an effective Health, Safety and 

Environment (HSE) management system. 

28.4 In case the CONTRACTOR fails to follow the instructions of Engineer-in-charge with respect to 

above clauses, penalty for non-compliance may be imposed as per Clause 62.0 and 63.2 of 

Specification for Field HSE Activities (18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007-A4, Rev. B) and the next 

payment due to him shall not be released till CONTRACTOR complies with the instruction to 

the full satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge. 

28.5 CONTRACTOR shall arrange the separate room out side the refinery and provide the safety 

training to staff and all the workers prior to enter the refinery premises and shall maintain the 

record of the same. 

28.6 CONTRACTOR shall provide and furnish the test certificates of all lifting tools and tackles and 

devices along with the equipment while entering the premises. No equipments will be allowed 

to take inside without the relevant test certificates. 

28.7 CONTRACTOR shall provide and use only steel tubular scaffolds. All the scaffolds at site shall 

be provided with aluminum access ladder, hard hand rails, mid rails and toe guards. 

28.8 No heavy lifts/erection shall be permitted after sunset. 

29.0 COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY REGULATIONS / WORKS RULES 

29.1 The CONTRACTOR shall comply with statutory requirements as well as works rules enforced 

at the site of work and rates quoted shall include all expenses required for complying rules/ 

regulations. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


29.2 CONTRACTOR shall maintain the employment records of it’s work force and comply with all 

statutory requirements as laid down under the contract labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 

1970, Factories Act 1948, Employees Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provision’s Act 

1952, Minimum Wages act 1948, Payment of Wages Act 1936, ESI Act 1948, Workmen’s 

Compensation Act 1923,Payment of Bonus act 1965 and any other applicable labour and other 

Laws, as existing and amended from time to time by the government during the prevalence of 

this agreement. The Owner shall not in any way be held liable to the consequences arising out 

of any breach/ omission in compliance of said provision’s by the CONTRACTOR to this 

Agreement. 

29.3 The CONTRACTOR shall ensure proper conduct and discipline of their workmen inside the 

site premises. In case of any complaint in this regard, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately 

withdraw such employee(s), if asked to do so at its own expenses. The Engineer – In – Charge 

shall neither give any explanation nor accept any claim in this regard from the CONTRACTOR. 

29.4 The CONTRACTOR shall issue necessary identity cards to its workmen/ employees. The entry 

of all such workmen/ employees of the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed with display of identity 

cards only. 

29.5 Particular attention is drawn to the following: 

(a) In case of accident, the Engineer-In-Charge shall be informed in writing forthwith. The 

CONTRACTOR shall strictly follow regulations laid down by Factory Inspector, 

government and Local Authorities in this regard. The CONTRACTOR shall report 

immediately in triplicate to the Engineer-In-Charge of any accident at site involving loss 

of life. Each such report shall include the information as required by the regulations. 

(b) Compliance with statutory requirements for inspection and testing of all lifting appliance 

such as cranes, gantries, etc. and auxiliary lifting gear. 

29.6 No excavation shall be started without the permission of the Engineer-In-Charge, who will 

inform the CONTRACTOR of the position of any pipes or cables known to be buried in the 

area. All excavations must be effectively railed off at all times, or completely boarded over & 

properly marked during the hours of darkness by redrawing lamps or flameproof warning 

lamps in hazardous area. During the hours of darkness, heaps of debris or material, which 

cannot be immediately removed, must be heaped in such a way as to leave passageway. 

29.7 The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Engineer-In-Charge of his intention to bring on to site any 

equipment such as heating or welding apparatus, or any container holding liquid or gaseous 

fuel or other substance, which might create a hazard. The Engineer-In-Charge shall have the 

right to prohibit the use of such equipment or to prescribe the conditions under such equipment 

may be used. 

29.8 The Engineer-In-Charge shall have the right to inspect any construction equipment and to 

forbid its use if in his opinion it is unsuitable or unsafe. No claim arising there from shall be 

made by the CONTRACTOR. 

29.9 The CONTRACTOR shall meet all requirements and act on the instructions of the Engineer-In- 

Charge where it is necessary to operate a "Permit-to-work" system. 

29.10 Where it is necessary to provide and / or store petroleum products or petroleum mixtures and 

explosives, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for carrying out such provisions and / or 

storage in accordance with the relevant local statutory regulations. All such storage shall have 

prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. In case any approvals are necessary from the Chief 

Inspector of Explosives or any statutory authorities, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible 

for obtaining the same. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


29.11 The CONTRACTOR shall have his own Fire Fighting extinguishers, fire hoses, fire nozzles and 

equipment and ensure that all adequate precautions are taken against fire. Engineer-in-Charge 

shall be contacted to ascertain these types and numbers. (The CONTRACTOR shall refer to 

specification Field HSE Activities 18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007-A4 for more details) 

29.12 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the provision of all safety notices and safety 

equipment required by both the relevant legislation and such as the Engineer-in-Charge may 

deem necessary. 

29.13 Electrical Safety Regulations: 

29.13.1 In no circumstances will the CONTRACTOR connect any electrical appliances to any plug or 

socket belonging to the Owner. 

29.13.2 No electrical cable, in use by the Owner shall be distributed without prior permission of the 

Engineer-In-Charge. No weight of any description shall be imposed on any such cable and no 

staging, ladder or similar equipment will rest against or be attached to it. 

29.13.3 No work shall be carried out on any in line equipment. The equipment must be safe and a 

"Permit-to-work" issued by the Engineer-In-Charge before any work is carried out. 

29.13.4 No cable shall be laid on ground surface in an unsafe condition. They shall be at above ground 

in such a way that they do not obstruct the movement of vehicles, cranes, etc. and the work of 

other CONTRACTOR’S in the area. 

30.0 COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES 

Work shall be carried out in such a manner that the work of other agencies operating at the 

site is not hampered due to any action of the CONTRACTOR. Proper coordination with other 

agencies will be responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. In case of any dispute, the decision of 

Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR. 

31.0 QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE OF KEY SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the Qualification and Experience of Key Supervisory 

Personnel to be deployed for this work shall be as per the requirement. CONTRACTOR shall 

submit bio-data of Key Supervisory Personnel which will be reviewed and approved by 

Engineer-in-Charge. 

32.0 SITE ESTABLISHMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE 

Owner will give only land for construction of site office, CONTRACTOR shall construct the site 

office structure at his own cost and same to be dismantled and removed and clear site to be 

handed over to Owner on completion of job as directed. CONTRACTOR shall inform the 

requirement of areas for construction of site office. CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary 

stores, covered shed, Fabrication shop, painting shed, Safety training room etc. out side the 

refinery. Contractor shall make necessary arrangement of transportation form fabrication shop 

to the work site at his own cost. However owner will provide a very limited storage space for 

storage of daily need of material. 

33.0 ELECTRICITY AND WATER 

33.1 POWER 

33.1.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide electrical power and necessary distribution arrangement 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


required for construction activities, area lighting and CONTRACTOR’S site office and other 

infrastructure facilities. CONTRACTOR shall also arrange for necessary statutory approvals 

whatsoever may be required for operating the electrical power generation and distribution 

system. Preferably the electrical generating set should be noise free. Approval of the 

Engineer-In-Charge will also be required for energizing the power generation and distribution 

system. 

33.2 WATER 

33.2.1 Water will be provided by owner free of cost to the contractor for construction, Hydro test and 

drinking purpose at one point. CONTRACTOR shall make further distribution at site as 

required at his own cost. 

34.0 SPECIAL REQUIRMENTS FOR GATE PASSES, MATERIAL ENTRY PASSES, WORK 

PERMITS & SAFETY REGULATION. 

34.1 ENTRY GATE PASSES. 

34.1.1 The works under this contract are to be carried out in areas within the plant limits adjacent or 

adjoining to an existing operating Refinery. As such, the CONTRACTOR and its SUB- 

CONTRACTOR and their employees and agents are required to abide by safety and security 

regulations of the OWNER in force from time to time 

34.1.2 The CONTRACTOR shall apply for photo Entry Passes for its workers and staff and the 

workers and staff of its SUB-CONTRACTOR in a prescribed proforma provided by the 

OWNER. The Application shall be accompanied by a Statement and Declaration in the form 

prescribed by the OWNER signed by the employees for whom the Entry Passes are sought 

and confirmed by the employer. The OWNER shall issue the Photo Entry Passes for a 

maximum period of 3 (three) months, which will be extendable upon application of the 

CONTRACTOR. As a special case Temporary Passes may be issued for a maximum period of 

7 (seven) days. 

34.1.3 Owner will issue the gate passes in SMART CARD, for which CONTRACTOR shall pay fees of 

RS. 500/- (Rupees five hundred) per gate pass, which can be refunded by owner on returns of 

the gate pass. 

34.1.4 CONTRACTOR shall submit POLICE verification reports for issue of gate pass. 

34.1.5 CONTRACTOR shall submit passport size of photos (3 for police verification and 3 for Gate 

pass.) 

34.1.6 In case of the loss of an Entry Pass/Identity Card the CONTRACTOR shall immediately lodge 

an FIR with the local police station and inform the Engineer-in-Charge of the loss. The 

CONTRACTOR is required to keep an account and track of all Entry Passes issued and 

surrendered 

34.1.7 CONTRACTOR shall provide the safety training and induction to all the staff and workers prior 

to enter to the refinery. 

34.1.8 CONTRACTOR shall nominate sufficient representative for laisioning 

34.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall provide the dress code/ Minimum as Jacket to all the staff and workers. 

34.1.10 All the material supplied by the contractor, once entered in the refinery premises cannot be 

taken back including the scrape. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


35.0 MATERIAL ENTRY PASSES. 

35.1 To bring materials, equipment, tools and tackle and other things inside the Refinery for 

construction work, the CONTRACTOR has to produce proper documents of title or authority 

relative thereto for inspection by personnel of the OWNER at gate. These shall be checked 

thoroughly by personnel of the OWNER at the Gate and recorded in their Register before 

permitting the same to be brought inside the Refinery limits. It is the responsibility of 

CONTRACTOR to see that the entry is duly recorded in the Register with proper Entry 

Number, date and signature of authorised representative of OWNER and that the supporting 

challans/ documents are stamped and signed by personnel of OWNER at the gate at the time 

of entry. 

35.2 All the material supplied by the contractor, once entered in the refinery premises cannot be 

taken back including the scrape. 

35.3 WORK PERMIT 

In order to keep the OWNER informed of the various jobs being undertaken within the Refinery 

and to enable the OWNER to regulate the same to ensure the observance of safety regulations 

relative thereto. When work is to be carried out In hazardous areas, a Hot Work Permit is to be 

obtained by the CONTRACTOR from the OWNER before start of work on jobs which are 

capable of generating a flame, spark or heat e.g. gas cutting, grinding, welding, use of any 

electrical, diesel, petrol or battery operated prime mover, machine, tool or equipment or 

generator set, mixer machine, drilling machine, pump, crane, fort lift or hand truck or trailer or 

chipping or breaking of rocks or concrete or hacksaw cutting and drilling. Similarly the 

CONTRACTOR is to be obtain a Cold Work Permit from the OWNER for jobs which do not 

come under the category of hot work and in respect of which there is no risk of fire e.g. 

transportation, backfilling of ordinary soil by manual process, pile testing, hydro-testing, 

shuttering, fixing of reinforcement, hand mixed concreting, plastering and brick work. 

35.4 Depending on the nature of the work and the equipments and tools involved, the 

CONTRACTOR shall apply for Cold/Hot Permit in a prescribed format at least 7 (seven) days 

before the work is planned to start No Work Permit shall be issued by OWNER unless proper 

arrangement is made by the CONTRACTOR to ensure safe performance of the work inside 

the Refinery limit. Job-wise and area-wise permits shall be issued to the CONTRACTOR and 

for work against each permit the CONTRACTOR shall post at site at least one Construction 

Supervisor and one Safety Supervisor of required level to ensure the due observance of all 

safety requirements. 

35.5 VEHICLE PERMIT 

35.5.1 Permits are to be obtained separately for entry/use of vehicles/trailers and other mobile 

equipments inside the Refinery limits. All the vehicles of CONTRACTOR should have a valid 

PUC certificates. The following requirements are to be met to obtain vehicle permit: 

a) Vehicle/Equipment shall be in good condition and fitted with spark arrestor? 

b) Vehicles should carry, wherever applicable, Valid Road tax certificate and fitness 

certificate from the Competent authority and insurance policy. 

c) Valid operating/driving license of driver/operator. 

35.5.2 Validity of the Permit 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


a) Any Hot or Cold Work Permit issued is valid only for 24 hours. 

b) Thereafter the validity of the Permit must be renewed for each shift (Morning & 

Evening) by the shift in-charge/shift representative of the, OWNER. 

c) The permit may be renewed for a maximum period of one month from the date of 

issue and if extension is required, the CONTRACTOR has to apply for a fresh permit. 

d) A permit is not valid for work on holidays unless special permission of the OWNER is 

obtained for the purpose. 

35.6 SAFETY REGULATION 

35.6.1 Regarding Work Permit 

a) The work shall be carried out inside the Refinery limits to conform to the OWNER'S 

safety section and in accordance with any instructions of Engineer-in-Charge issued 

from time to time. Sometimes working hours may be drastically reduced or increased 

to satisfy safety requirements and the CONTRACTOR shall meet these requirements 

without any time and cost implications. No claim for idling of machinery, plant, 

manpower or equipment shall be entertained for reason of delay in the issue of a Work 

Permit and it shall be the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to apply for, 

pursue and obtain the requisite Work Permit(s) well in advance of the relative 

requirement(s). 

b) The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all safety regulations of the plant and ensure that 

safely equipment for specific jobs as stipulated in the Factories Act Safety Handbook is 

issued to all employees during the execution of work, failing which all the works at site 

shall be suspended. 

35.5.2 Regarding Hot Work 

a) When doing hot work inside the plant the CONTRACTOR must ensure that the fire 

hose is hooked up with a fire water system and extended to the work spot. In addition, 

at least one fire extinguisher must be kept near the working spot. The area around and 

below the place of hot work must be adequately protected from sparks and hot metals 

by a booth made of asbestos free material, cloth/sheet and by wetting with water. In 

addition, depending on the location and hazard of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall 

at its own cost arrange sufficient number of additional fire hoses and such fire fighting 

equipment of approved quality as may be required at his own cost to carry out hot job 

inside the plant. 

b) Welding & electrical cables should be of approved quality and no jointing or loose 

connection shall be permitted. 

c) At the end of the working day the CONTRACTOR must inform the electrical section to 

switch off power at sub-station end. 

d) The CONTRACTOR must provide cotton clothes, safety shoe, safety helmet, safety 

belt, and hand gloves of approved quality to his workers to meet the safety 

requirement of various jobs to be carried out inside the Plant. 

35.5.3 Regarding use of Vehicle 

a) Vehicle must not ply on any road within the Refinery limit at a speed exceeding 20 

KM/hr. 

b) Mobile cranes, loaded, trucks and trailers must not exceed speed limit of 15 KM/hr 

inside the plant. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


c) No crane is allowed to move inside the plant with load. 

d) No vehicle is allowed to be parked inside the plant. 

35.7 NORMAL WORKING HOURS. 

35.7.1 Normal working hours at site will be form 08.00 hrs to 16.30 hrs. Any deviation from above 

shall be with permission from Engineer-In-Charge/HPCL representative. 

36.0 STATUTORY APPROVALS 

36.1 The approval from any authority required as per statutory rules and regulations of Central/State 

Government shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR unless otherwise specified in the 

Bidding Document. The application on behalf of OWNER for submission to relevant authorities 

and along with copies of required certificate complete in all respect shall be prepared and 

submitted by the CONTRACTOR well ahead of time so that the actual 

construction/commissioning of work is not delayed for the want of approval/inspection by 

concerned authorities. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for arrangement of 

inspections, liasioning with the concerned authorities. Reimbursement of Statutory fees paid by 

CONTRACTOR (as per advance approval of OWNER) may be provided for, subject to 

submission of documentary evidence. 

36.2 Any change/addition required to be made to meet the requirements of the statutory authorities 

shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR within the quoted price. The inspection and 

acceptance of the work by the statutory authorities shall however, not absolve the 

CONTRACTOR from any of his responsibilities under this contract. 

37.0 VENDOR LIST FOR STEEL, CEMENT, PIPES, FITTINGS, PAINTS AND ELECTRICAL 

ITEMS. 

37.1 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the structural steel; rebars and plates form the following 

manufacturers or their stockist. 

a) SAIL 

b) TISCO 

c) VAIZAG STEEL 

37.2 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Cement form the following manufacturers or their 

stockist. 

a) ACC 

b) L & T 

c) Aditya 

d) J. K Cement (Laxmi cement) 

e) Gujarat Ambuja 

f) Shri Cement 

37.3 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Ready Mix Concrete form the following manufacturers. 

a) L & T 

b) Godrej 

c) ACC 

37.4 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Industrial paints from the following manufacturers or 

their stockist. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 


a) ASIAN PAINTS 

b) BERGER 

c) ICI 

37.5 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Welding electrodes and filler wires from the following 

manufacturers or their stockist. 

a) ADOR 

b) ESAB 

c) D & H 

37.6 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase the Electrical Items from the following manufacturers or 

their stockist 

Industrial / Commercial lighting Fittings : Crompton Greaves / Bajaj / Philips / Wipro / Stahl 

Metal Clad Switch Fuse Unit : Siemens / L&T 

Industrial Switched socket outlet : Legrand / Havels 

Commercial switched socket outlet : Legrand / Indokopp / Hazels 

Commercial switches. : Legrand / MK / Crabtree 

Flexible wires : Finolex / Nicco / RPG 

Welding socket outlets : CGL/ BCH / Best & Crompton 

GI Conduits : BEC / Precision 

Cables : RPG /Fort Gloster / Nicco 

Terminals : Connectwell/ Elmex / Phoenix / Wago 

Lighting Panels/Power Panels : Legrand / Havels 

Exhaust Fans : GEC / Almonard / Crompton Greaves / ABB 

The CONTRACTOR shall refer the Job Specification – Electrical (18 – 3188 – 99 – 00 – E 02 – 

0103 – A4, Rev. 1) for further details on approved make of electrical items/materials. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 



ANNEXURES TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

ANNEXURE – I TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

TIME SCHEDULE 

NAME OF WORK TIME OF COMPLETION 

Proving and Supplying all materials for Civil, Structural, 

interior works and electrical works, as applicable for the 

buildings/structures mentioned below complete in all 

respects as per Technical Specifications, Drawings and 

Schedule of Rates of the Bidding Document




REV NO : B 


SHED) 


Note: 


A. Sub Station Building 

B. Compressor Shed 

C. Satellite Rack Room 

10 (Ten) Months 

6 (Six) Months 

11 (Eleven) Months 

1.0 The Time of Completion shall be reckoned from the date of award of contract, which shall be 

the date of issue of Letter of Intent. 

2.0 The time indicated is for completing all the works in all respects as per specifications, codes, 

drawings and instructions of Engineer-In-Charge. 

3.0 Time of completion shall include the time required for mobilization, demobilization, carrying out 

the works and submission of reports as per the requirement of the contract document and 

direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 

ANNEXURE – II TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 

MEASUREMENT OF WORK & INVOICING PROCEDURE 

1.0 GENERAL 

1.1 The mode of measurement shall be as per the details mentioned in this Annexure. 

1.2 In case of discrepancy between measurements of work specified in this Annexure Standard 

Specification/ Job Specification, Schedule of Rates etc., precedence shall be given in following 

order: 

a) Measurement of works as per this Annexure of SCC. 

b) Measurement of works as mentioned in Standard Specification/ Job Specification. 

c) Measurement of works in accordance with item description of relevant item mentioned




REV NO : B 


SHED) 


in Schedule of Rates. 

d) In case the clarity is not in the above documents, then it shall be as per BIS and it is 

does not exist in BIS also, then Measurement of works shall be as decided by 

Engineer-in-Charge. 

1.3 Payment will be made on the basis of joint measurements taken by CONTRACTOR and 

certified by Engineer-in-Charge. Measurement shall be based on “Approved for Construction” 

drawings, to the extent that the work conforms to the drawings and details are adequate. 

1.4 Wherever work is executed based on instructions of Engineer-in-Charge or details are not 

adequate in the drawings, CONTRACTOR shall take physical measurements in the presence 

of Engineer-in-Charge. 

1.5 Measurements will be made on the basis of following units indicated in unit column of schedule 

of rates. 

a) Weights MT or kg 

b) Length M (Meter) CM (Centimeter) MM (Millimeter) 

c) Number No. 

d) Volume Cu.M 

e) Area Sq.M 

1.6 Welds, bolts, nuts, washers etc. shall not be measured. No payment for temporary works 

connected with this Contract or for items such as weld, shims, packing plates, etc. shall be 

made by Owner. Cost of above items shall be included in the unit rates quoted. 

1.7 Wherever the unit of items has been indicated as Lumpsum, the payment shall be made on 

Lumpsum basis on completion and no mode of measurement shall be applicable. 

1.8 The CONTRACTOR shall submit his monthly detailed measurements in 2 (two) copies to 

Engineer-In-Charge. 

1.9 The Engineer-In-Charge shall verify the measurement; make necessary corrections on the 

measurement sheets and the abstract of quantities based on which the CONTRACTOR will 

submit their progress invoice to the Engineer-In-Charge. 

1.10 The relevant Q.C. sheets (copies) and the material approval records shall be attached along 

with the Invoice as part of the quality certification of the bill. 

1.11 The proof of payment of wages to the workers employed directly by the CONTRACTOR or by 

his sub contractors shall also be attached along with the Invoice. 

1.12 The final measurements of various works shall be taken after virtual completion of the job. The 

virtual completion of the work shall be considered after the Engineer-In-Charge has certified in 

writing that the structures have been completed and handed over by the CONTRACTOR. 

1.13 Whenever the items billed have not been as per drawings / specifications the same should be 

clearly highlighted in the bill. 





REV NO : B 


SHED) 



SUBMISSION FORM A 

HEALTH, SAFETY, AND ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS 

FOR CONTRACTORS 

DOCUMENT NO.: NIL 

PREVIOUS DOCUMENT NO. : NIL 

Rev. No. Issue Date Pages Rev. Description Prepared 

By 

0 

6 September 2005 24 

Issue for Use 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 24 

Approved 

By 

SGR AGG TBP 

5.2.1 submission form a- hse requirment for contractor, 10/6/2007 10:27

JACOBS ENGINEERING INDIA PRIVATE LTD 

DATE : 6th September 2005 

HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS PAGE : 2 OF 24 

REVISION NO.: 0 

Table of Contents 

1.0 CONTRACTORS Health, Safety and Environment Requirements ..................................................3 

2.0 Definitions .........................................................................................................................................3 

3.0 Documentation and Reporting Requirements ..................................................................................3 

4.0 HSE Training/Communication Requirements...................................................................................4 

5.0 Basic HSE Requirements .................................................................................................................4 

6.0 Certification, Inspections, and Regulatory Agency Permits..............................................................6 

7.0 Hazardous Chemicals.......................................................................................................................6 

8.0 Respiratory Protection ......................................................................................................................7 

9.0 HSE Surveys ....................................................................................................................................7 

10.0 Planning and Observation Procedures.............................................................................................7 

11.0 Accident/Incident Investigation .........................................................................................................8 

12.0 Drugs, Alcohol, and Contraband ......................................................................................................8 

13.0 Medical And Exposure Monitoring....................................................................................................9 

14.0 Imminent Danger Situations .............................................................................................................9 

15.0 HSE Adherence Policy .....................................................................................................................9 

16.0 Exhibits ...........................................................................................................................................10 

Exhibit 1 — Contractor HSE Data Form............................................................................................11 

Exhibit 2— Monthly Contractor HSE Statistics Report....................................................................14 

Exhibit 3 — Notice of HSE Non-Compliance....................................................................................15 

Exhibit 4 — Warning Letter for HSE Non-Compliance....................................................................16 

Exhibit 5 — Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension ............................................................17 

Exhibit 6 — Safe Plan of Action..........................................................................................................18 

Exhibit 8 — Accident/Incident Investigation Report.........................................................................21 

Exhibit 10 — First Aid Register...........................................................................................................24 






1.0 CONTRACTORS HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS 

It is the policy of Jacobs, to select, contract with, and oversee contractors with the same priority and 

emphasis on Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) protection as we practice for our own employees. 

It is a contractual requirement that contractors comply with all applicable OWNER, State, and 

Government health, safety, and environmental regulations. 

This Attachment specifies Jacobs HSE requirements that may exceed prevailing Government 

standards or the contractors’ normal HSE procedures. Jacobs is responsible for reviewing and 

implementing the HSE requirements. Contractors are also responsible for ensuring that their lower 

tier contractors review and implement these HSE requirements. 

2.0 DEFINITIONS 

Accident/Incident An unplanned, undesirable event that disrupts work activity. 

Consultant – 

Jacobs 

Jacobs Engineering Group or the Jacobs operating group or subsidiary 

company named in this contract in which these Contractor HSE requirements 

are incorporated. 

OWNER Means authorized representatives/ nominees and / or its successors, or 

permitted assigns. 

Contractor Person, Firm or Corporation to whom the work will be awarded by the Owner. 

Safe Plan of 

Action (SPA) 

Site/Project 

Manager 

Task Safety 

Awareness 

(TSA) 

A task-specific planning document used to help ensure that every task 

receives proper HSE assessment and planning. Also referred to as a Job 

Safety Analysis (JSA) in some locations. 

The highest-ranking Jacobs/OWNER representative whose regular work 

location/office is at the project site. 

A review of the SPA among the crew and supervisor to discuss and resolve 

any HSE issues before work is continued, when there has been a break in 

the work schedule, change in work conditions, change in crew, etc. 

Work The total of the Contractor’s responsibilities as set forth in the contract 

Documents. 

3.0 DOCUMENTATION AND REPORTING REQUIREMENTS 

3.1. Before mobilizing to the project, the contractor and its lower-tier contractors shall forward to 

Jacobs/OWNER a copy of their company’s HSE Program. 

3.2. Contractors must submit the information required by Exhibit 1, Contractor HSE Data Form, 

before award of contract, unless specifically exempted from this provision by the OWNER. 

3.3. A project-specific HSE Emergency Response Action Plan or, in the case of hazardous waste 

operations, must be generated by each Contractor mobilizing on the project plan in 

accordance with Jacobs, OWNER, State, and government requirements. 

3.4. If the project is regulated as a hazardous waste or emergency response operation, the 

Contractor has the choice of adopting the site Heath and Safety Plan (HSP) or developing a 

similar plan that is, at a minimum, equally protective and compliant. Contractor site personnel 

shall read and acknowledge by signature that they will comply with the applicable HSP. 

3.5. Contractors are responsible for maintaining a First Aid Register (Exhibit 10) for all employee 

injuries and illness reported on the project. 

3.6. Contractors must immediately inform Jacobs/ OWNER of any Governmental or other HSE 

regulatory agencies’ inspections or other actions involving the contractor’s work. 

3.7. Contractor employees must promptly report all potentially work-related incidents, injuries, or 

illnesses to their Supervisor or their Site HSE Representative. 






3.8. Contractor must promptly report all potentially work-related incidents, injuries, or illnesses to 

Jacobs/ OWNER. 

3.9. Injuries, illnesses, or any incident involving a third party or a member of the general public 

must be promptly reported to Jacobs/ OWNER. 

3.10. Incidents involving potential exposures to hazardous materials and releases or spills of such 

materials must be promptly reported to Jacobs/ OWNER. 

3.11. Accident investigation reports for all accidents, injuries, and work-related illnesses shall be 

forwarded to Jacobs/ OWNER within twenty-four hours of the occurrence. 

3.12. Contractor employees are required to participate in documented, daily task-specific Safe 

Plans of Action (Exhibit 6) and regular Safety Observation Reports (Exhibit 7). 

3.13. Contractors will conduct weekly HSE meetings, and signed copies of the meeting reports 

shall be made available to Jacobs/ OWNER. 

3.14. Contractors shall complete the Monthly Contractors Accident Statistics Report (Exhibit 2) for 

each month in which they conduct work on the project. These reports are due to Jacobs/ 

OWNER by the first business day of the month for the proceeding month. 

4.0 HSE TRAINING/COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 

4.1. Contract employees must complete HSE training required by OWNER and Government HSE 

requirements. Such training may include, but is not limited to, a site-specific orientation and 

quiz provided by Jacobs/ OWNER Safety Training for Supervisory Personnel, and 

ergonomics training. Documentation of all HSE training shall be maintained at the project site 

by the Contractor and provided to Jacobs/ OWNER upon request. 

4.2. Contractors must certify that all operators of mobile equipment such as forklifts, cranes, boom 

lifts, buses, etc., have been trained and/or certified on the proper operation of the equipment. 

Copies of this training and certification shall be maintained on the project site by the 

Contractor and forwarded to Jacobs/ OWNER upon request. Mobile crane operators must be 

qualified on each specific crane (type & rating) that they are assigned to operate through a 

testing and qualification procedure recognized by Jacobs/ OWNER. 

4.3. Contractors must establish a prompt and effective method of providing HSE communications 

such as HSE alerts, advisories, bulletins, regulatory updates, etc., to all site employees. 

5.0 BASIC HSE REQUIREMENTS 

The following HSE rules list Jacobs/ OWNER fundamental requirements for construction activities. 

When there are multiple rules that may apply, the most stringent OWNER, State, or Government HSE 

regulations that govern the work shall be followed. 

5.1. Contractor shall appoint an on-site HSE representative, who will attend regular Jacobs/ 

OWNER HSE meetings and be responsible for implementation of the rules listed below, as 

well as other HSE rules determined, to be necessary for the safe execution of the project. 

Contractors employing __ or more workers must provide a full-time site HSE professional. 

Additional site HSE personnel are required for each additional ___ workers thereafter. 

Jacobs/ OWNER shall determine appropriate qualifications for Contractor HSE personnel, 

based on project demands. 

5.2. Hard hats shall be worn at all times where overhead hazards exist (e.g. construction, 

environmental operations, operations or maintenance environment), regardless of the workers 

activities. This includes welders when using welding hoods. 

5.3. Shirts with sleeves shall be worn at all times. Loose or frayed clothing, loose or hanging long 

hair, ties, rings, body jewelry, etc. shall not be worn around moving machinery or other areas 

where they may become tangled. 

5.4. Hearing protection shall be worn when exposures exceed 85 DBA. 

5.5. Hard-toe footwear shall be worn by all workers when in the construction environment or in 

areas where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling, rolling, or piercing objects or when 

employee’s feet are exposed to electrical hazards. 






5.6. Safety glasses with rigid side shields shall be worn at all times when in the construction 

environment and in any area where eye hazards exist. This includes under welding hoods 

and for workers with prescription eyewear. Safety goggles must be worn over non-safety 

prescription eyewear. 

5.7. Face shields must be worn in addition to safety glasses when grinding, chipping, jack 

hammering, and power sawing or when conducting other tasks that involve such face and/or 

eye hazards. 

5.8. Gloves, appropriate for the hazard present, shall be worn when hands are exposed to 

absorption of harmful substances, cuts, abrasions, punctures, biological hazards, chemical 

burns, thermal burns, or harmful temperature extremes. 

5.9. Contractor shall comply with the Jacobs 100% Fall Protection Policy. This policy states that 

“Anytime employees are working from an unprotected elevation of six feet or more, fall 

protection must be used.” Working as stated above means while traveling, stationary, or at 

anytime exposed to a fall from a surface not protected by approved handrails, guardrails or 

some other approved fall elimination device. Jacobs prohibits the use of positioning devices 

as the sole means of fall protection when working above six feet. 

5.10. The use of “passive” systems, such as safety nets, monitoring systems, or controlled access 

zones, as the sole means of fall protection when working above six feet, is prohibited. Jacobs 

prohibits the use of safety nets as an independent means of fall protection. 

5.11. Workers in mechanical lifts, including scissor lifts, boom trucks, suspended or supported 

personnel baskets, articulating lifts, and other similar devices must use fall protection and 

arresting equipment at all times. Such devices shall not be used as elevators to simply 

transport workers to different work locations. 

5.12. All portable ladders must be clearly marked with the ladder owner’s name. 

5.13. The safest means of worker access for overhead work (e.g., rolling scaffolds, mechanical lifts, 

platform ladders, etc.) shall be considered as alternatives to the use of portable ladders. If 

ladders are used, then the top of all straight and extension ladders shall be tied to a 

substantial anchor point before use; a second worker must hold the ladder until the tie-off is 

secure. And, if a worker’s feet are on or above the fifth rung of a stepladder, the top of the 

ladder must be tied to a substantial anchor or a second worker must hold the ladder 

throughout the task. 

5.14. When ascending or descending a portable ladder, three-point contact is considered 

acceptable fall protection for fall exposures of less than 20 feet. When potential fall exposure 

exceeds 20 feet, personnel on ladders must be protected with a personal fall arrest system. 

5.15. Decking sections shall be laid tightly and immediately secured upon placement to prevent 

accidental movement. During initial placement, decking sections shall be placed in such a 

manner to ensure full support by structural members and each piece shall be individually 

secured. Pre-installation or shake-out of multiple sections of decking using temporary 

methods of attachment, such as tack welding, is not allowed. The use of controlled decking 

zones is not allowed. 

5.16. Equipment and tools shall not be altered in any way to adapt it for a job for which the 

manufacturer does not intend it. The manufacturer of the equipment must approve any such 

adaptations or alterations to equipment in writing. Only trained and authorized persons shall 

operate machinery or equipment. 

5.17. All hand-held power tools must be equipped with constant pressure switches that will 

automatically shut off power when the pressure (worker’s hand) is removed. Hand-held 

power tools with on/off or lock-on switches are not allowed. 

5.18. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters shall be used to protect all temporary electrical wiring and 

cord sets. The use of assured grounding (quarterly equipment inspections) in lieu of GFCIs is 

not an option. 






5.19. Lock-out/tag-out procedures shall be followed to minimize the potential exposure of workers 

to hazardous energy. Hazardous pipelines or vessels will be isolated by using a double block 

and bleed system or by blanking. Every effort must be made to de-energize electrical 

equipment to be worked on and other electrical equipment in the area that may affect the 

work. If the equipment cannot be isolated or de-energized, written approval must be obtained 

from Jacobs/ OWNER before work proceeds. Only “Qualified Electricians” may work on 

energized or potentially energized circuits. Jacobs considers equipment rated at 480 volts 

and above as “high voltage.” 

5.20. Confined space entry work must follow a documented hazard assessment and safe work 

planning process, which must be submitted to Jacobs/ OWNER for review prior to entry. 

5.21. High-visibility reflective safety vests must be worn by all personnel, who work on or near 

active roads, or during nights. Vests are also required for other work that places personnel, 

such as flaggers, riggers, survey crews, etc., near to vehicular movement. 

5.22. Motor vehicles and mobile equipment shall never be left running without an operator at the 

controls. Proper use of seatbelts by all occupants is mandatory. Motor vehicle operators are 

prohibited from using a mobile phone or two-way radio. This applies to both hands-free and 

non-hands-free devices. If the use of such a device by the motor vehicle operator is 

necessary, it is only allowed when the motor vehicle is stationary and in a safe location off the 

roadway. If required by the Contractor, the use of two-way radios is allowed, provided that 

written approval from the OWNER is obtained and only while on a project–defined location or 

within a OWNER facility. 

5.23. Mobile crane lifts of over 50 tons, exceeding 85% of the crane’s capacity, involving more than 

one crane, lifting a non-rigid object, or lifts over active work areas or public property are 

considered “critical lifts” and require written approval from Jacobs/ OWNER. 

5.24. All outriggers on mobile cranes must be fully extended and fully deployed when the crane is 

used to lift or support a load. If, due to configuration or physical location, all outriggers cannot 

be fully deployed, calculations must be made from the “on-rubber” section of the load chart. 

On-rubber lifts and pick-and-carry operations require Jacobs/ OWNER Site Manager’s written 

approval. 

5.25. Anti two-block devices that automatically disengage crane hoist/boom functions when the 

hook or block approaches the jib or boom tip are required on all cranes. 

5.26. Jacobs strictly prohibits multiple lift rigging (Christmas tree lifts). 

5.27. Smoking is allowed only in designated smoking areas that have been approved by OWNER. 

6.0 CERTIFICATION, INSPECTIONS, AND REGULATORY AGENCY PERMITS 

6.1. Certain operations may require a OWNER and/or Jacobs permit. Such activities may include 

but are not limited to hot work, confined space/vessel entry, excavations, asbestos 

abatement, lead abatement, etc. The Contractor representative shall ask OWNER whether 

any parts of the Contractor’s activities require a OWNER and/or owner permit. 

6.2. Competent Person shall make a thorough annual inspection of all cranes and powered 

hoisting equipment. Cranes assembled on site shall receive an annual inspection prior to 

being put into service. Documentation of all crane inspections shall be provided to Jacobs 

and must be maintained on site by the Contractor. 

6.3. All scaffolding must be inspected and tagged by a Competent Person stating safe or unsafe 

prior to initial use, before each work shift, and after any event that could affect its structural 

integrity. Untagged scaffolds must not be used. 

7.0 HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS 

7.1. Contractors shall include planning for environmental compliance in the preparation of their 

HSP or HSE Action Plan. Issues to be considered include but are not limited to release 

reporting, air permits, water permits, asbestos/lead permits or notifications, hazardous waste 

generation and related disposal procedures, spill mitigation and clean up methods, etc. 

7.2. Contractor shall have a written Hazard Communication Program and comply with the 

requirements of that program. A copy of the program shall be forwarded to Jacobs/ OWNER 

prior to mobilization and a copy shall be in the possession of the Contractor on the site. 






7.3. Any potentially hazardous material or chemical brought onto the site shall be accompanied by 

a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). Copies of MSDSs shall be forwarded to Jacobs/ 

OWNER before the product is brought on to the site. Some sites, such as government 

regulated facilities, do not permit the use of chemicals that are not on a pre-approved list. 

7.4. Small quantities (less than 10 gallons) of hazardous liquids, such as gasoline, diesel fuels, 

and solvents, brought onto the site shall be stored in a properly labeled safety container with 

a flame arrestor and self-closing lid. 

7.5. The OWNER shall be notified before any chemical or material is used that could create foul 

smelling, noxious, or toxic vapors or gasses. 

7.6. All accidents involving exposure to potentially hazardous materials and hazardous material 

releases must be immediately reported to Jacobs/ OWNER. It is important to report all 

releases or exposures even though the incident may be considered minor or no adverse 

health effects or symptoms are apparent at the time. 

8.0 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 

Contractors, who plan to use respirators as a part of their work operations, are required to forward to 

Jacobs/ OWNER a copy of their written Respiratory Protection Program. 

9.0 HSE SURVEYS 

Jacobs/ OWNER and the Contractor HSE Department shall conduct periodic HSE surveys of the site. 

Any HSE discrepancy observed shall be reported to the appropriate Contractor representative for 

immediate correction. 

These HSE surveys do not relieve Contractor’s of their responsibility to self-inspect their work and 

equipment and to conduct their work in a safe and environmentally compliant manner. 

10.0 PLANNING AND OBSERVATION PROCEDURES 

In order to achieve Jacobs goal of Zero Incidents, the following shall be implemented by the 

Contractor. 

The SPA, the TSA, and the Safety Observation Report (SOR) process require each worker to receive 

on-the-job training from their direct Supervisor. Contractor employees shall also be trained and 

educated on their individual responsibilities contained in these tools by Jacobs/ OWNER after 

mobilization. 

10.1. Safe Plan of Action 

The Safe Plan of Action (SPA) is developed by the crew assigned to perform the work with 

guidance from their Supervisor. (See Exhibit 6.) The Supervisor identifies the work area and 

task to be performed and then leads the crew in developing a Safe Plan of Action. 

Creating the SPA requires the Supervisor to solicit crew participation in identifying hazards 

and hazard control measures such as PPE, training requirement, permits, procedures, etc. 

Members of the team are required to sign the SPA document to indicate their participation, 

their understanding of the plan, and their agreement to follow the plan. 

10.2. Task Safety Awareness 

The Task Safety Awareness (TSA) meeting is a daily HSE briefing associated with the task(s) 

that are scheduled for the crew during the work shift. 

These meetings generally take from two to ten minutes and address the HSE measures 

specific to the tasks. 

TSA meetings shall be conducted at least daily and whenever a task presents a change of 

hazards from the previous tasks. 

10.3. Safety Observation Reports 

The Safety Observation Report (SOR), Exhibit 7, is a proactive process designed to identify 

and document HSE-related acts and conditions in the work environment. All Contractor’s 

supervisors are required to participate in the Safety Observation Report process by 

generating written Safety Observation Reports and turning them in to Jacobs/ OWNER at 

least weekly. 




HSE REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTORS PAGE : 8 OF 24 


The Safety Observation Report allows any site worker to record observed proper or improper 

HSE practices and identifies the cause of any deficiencies so that corrective action can be 

taken. 

11.0 ACCIDENT/INCIDENT INVESTIGATION 

A formal accident investigation must be conducted when an accident occurs, including non-injury 

incidents, most first-aid type accidents, and environmental releases or spills. 

11.1. In the event of a workplace accident, injury, or illness, the most important immediate actions 

are to provide medical assistance to those who may need it and to ensure the safety of others 

that may be affected or acting as emergency responders. 

11.2. Securing the accident scene is essential to ensure an effective accident investigation. No 

materials or equipment shall be moved made until a review of the accident is completed, 

except when securing equipment or materials that could result in further injury. 

11.3. Obtain witnesses’ names, permanent addresses, and signed statements of their complete 

factual observations. (See Exhibit 9.) 

11.4. All accident investigations must be documented using the Accident Investigation Report 

(Exhibit 8). All required reports should be completed and copies provided within 24 hours to 

the Jacobs/ OWNER. 

12.0 DRUGS, ALCOHOL, AND CONTRABAND 

Jacobs strictly prohibits the use, sale, attempted sale, manufacture, possession, distribution, 

cultivation, transfer, or dispensing of any illicit substance. 

Contractors shall implement a Drug, Alcohol, and Contraband Policy, including post incident testing, 

which meets the requirements of the Jacobs policy. Key elements of the Jacobs policy, except where 

prohibited by law, are: 

• Pre-access/Pre-assignment testing current to within six months prior to initial assignment to work 

on the OWNER’s project. 

• Post-incident testing of any worker involved in a project-related workplace incident that results, or 

could have resulted, in 

• injury to any person requiring medical treatment beyond first aid, 

• any type of medical attention given by a third-party medical services provider (hospital, 

clinic, doctor, etc.), 

• a motor vehicle incident, or 

• property damage. 

Post-incident testing must be conducted as soon as possible after the incident occurs. 

• Reasonable suspicion testing upon reasonable suspicion by Contractor or Jacobs/ OWNER that a 

worker is under the influence of a prohibited substance. In such cases, worker(s) shall be 

immediately removed from the project and surrender their project credentials. Personnel so 

removed may only be allowed to return with a negative test result and written permission of the 

OWNER. 

• Periodic random or unannounced testing for workers randomly selected or chosen by job 

classification or worksite. The percentage of the workforce, or the number of workers, selected 

for testing shall be specified on a project specific basis and stated in the project’s Hazard 

Assessment Safety Action Plan. 

Possession or use of alcohol in a Contractor or OWNER provided vehicle is prohibited. 

Any worker whose drug or alcohol test is positive will be removed from the project and required to 

surrender their project credentials. 

Refusal to submit to drug or alcohol testing, or attempts to tamper with, adulterate, dilute, or otherwise 

tamper with a test sample will be treated the same as a positive test result. 

Contractor shall adopt collection, chain-of-custody, and other related procedures consistent with 

sound industry practice. 

The owner’s (OWNER’s) drug and alcohol testing requirements may be more stringent than the 

Contractor minimums. If so, the owner’s requirements shall be enforced. 






If Jacobs/ OWNER suspects that a worker is in possession of illegal drugs, alcohol, or contraband, 

Jacobs/ OWNER may request the individual to submit to a search of his or her person, personal 

effects, vehicles, lockers, and baggage. Jacobs/ OWNER may also conduct random searches of 

individuals entering or leaving the work site. Any suspected contraband will be confiscated and may 

be turned over to law enforcement, as appropriate. If an individual is asked to submit to a search and 

refuses, that individual will be considered insubordinate, will surrender their project credentials, will be 

escorted off the job, and will not be allowed to return. 

Jacobs/ OWNER shall have the right to review the Contractor’s Drug, Alcohol, and Contraband Policy 

and to audit the Contractor’s implementation of their program at the jobsite. 

Contractors shall comply with all applicable state, government and local alcohol and drug-related laws 

and regulations. 

13.0 MEDICAL AND EXPOSURE MONITORING 

Contractors involved with operations, such as those involving hazardous waste, asbestos or lead 

abatement, certain carcinogenic compounds, etc., shall describe their medical and exposure 

monitoring procedures and their proposed compliance methods in their HSE Action Plan or HSP. 

Employees involved in these operations shall receive training, prior to any fieldwork activity or 

exposure, the medical requirements of applicable regulations or standards, including, but not limited 

to, a baseline medical exam and periodic update exams, as required. 

Employee medical requirements and limitations shall be considered prior to the use of certain types of 

PPE, such as respirators. 

14.0 IMMINENT DANGER SITUATIONS 

Upon discovery of any situation that may, in the opinion of the OWNER, reasonably be expected to 

cause serious physical harm, illness, death, or significant environmental damage, Jacobs/ OWNER or 

HSE representative shall suspend the related work immediately. Work may resume only after the 

HSE concern(s) have been corrected, to the satisfaction of the OWNER. Examples of “imminent 

danger” situations may include, but are not limited to the following: 

• Falls from elevations 

• Excavations not properly sloped or shored 

• Electrocution hazards 

• Work activities posing injury hazards to the general public 

• Operation of vehicles, machinery or heavy equipment in an unsafe manner 

• Improper Lock Out/Tag Out procedures 

In addition to the immediate suspension of work, the procedure for correction of imminent danger 

situations follows the “HSE Adherence Policy” set forth below. 

15.0 HSE ADHERENCE POLICY 

Contractors are required to comply with the applicable HSE requirements and regulations. The 

procedures below outline a three-step, progressively administered system to correct compliance 

problems. However, if in the opinion of the OWNER, non-compliance issues are considered to be 

severe, Contractors’ contracts may be terminated at any time. 

15.1. Action Level One 

If a Contractor fails to comply with an applicable HSE standard, Jacobs will issue a written 

“Notice of HSE Non-Compliance” (Exhibit 3) to the Contractor’s site representative. OWNER 

will also forward a “Warning Letter for HSE Non-Compliance” (Exhibit 4) and a copy of the 

Notice of HSE Non-Compliance to the Contractor’s President or Operations Manager. Copies 

of these shall be forwarded to the Jacobs Site and Project Managers. 






15.2. Action Level Two 

If item(s) of HSE non-compliance are not corrected by Action Level One, or if the Contractor 

repeatedly fails to comply with the applicable HSE regulations, Jacobs/ OWNER will issue a 

“Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension” (Exhibit 5) to the Contractor. The Contractor’s 

work may not resume until, the proposed corrective actions by the Contractor which is 

acceptable to the OWNER. Actions that may be considered include, but are not limited to: 

• Removal of certain Contractor personnel from the project, 

• Alteration of the Contractor’s job procedures, or 

• Implementation of corrective action by the OWNER with back charges to the Contractor. 

The Contractor shall not resume work until Jacobs/ OWNER accepts the proposed corrective 

actions. Jacobs/ OWNER will document and keep on file the meeting results in the form of 

meeting minutes. 

15.3. Action Level Three 

16.0 EXHIBITS 

If Action Levels One and Two do not result in the Contractor’s HSE performance being 

brought into compliance, Contract termination may result. Jacobs/ OWNER may terminate 

the Contract after verifying with the Site/Project Manager that the HSE adherence procedure 

has been followed and after giving the Contractor applicable notice. Only written approval 

from the OWNER can reinstate a Contractor’s eligibility. 

Exhibit 1, Contractor HSE Data Form 

Exhibit 2, Monthly Contractor HSE Statistics Report 

Exhibit 3, Notice of HSE Non-Compliance 

Exhibit 4, Warning Letter for HSE Non-Compliance 

Exhibit 5, Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension 

Exhibit 6, Safe Plan of Action 

Exhibit 7, Safety Observation Report 

Exhibit 8, Accident/Incident Investigation Report 

Exhibit 9, Witness Statement 

Exhibit 10, First Aid Register 






Exhibit 1 — Contractor HSE Data Form 

Provide HSE Performance History For Last Three Full Years 

Number of employee hours worked 

Number of fatalities 

Number of cases involving days away from work (Lost Time Cases) 

Number of “other recordable cases 

Total of all cases above (fatalities, days away from work, transfers or restricted 

duty, and other recordable cases, i.e., the total of Columns G, H, I, and J) 

Incidence Rate (total recordable cases x 200,000/total work hours) 

Number of citations by government and other HSE regulatory agencies (provide 

details for each on a separate sheet) 

HSE Program 

Do you have a written hazard communication program? 

Do you have a written HSE program? 

When did you last update this HSE Policy statement? 

Do you have a written drug and alcohol abuse prevention program, which includes preemployment, 

reasonable suspicion, and post incident testing? 

Do you have a written respiratory protection program? 

Enter Year 20__ 20__ 20__ 

Do you have a new employee orientation program? If yes, does it contain instructions on: 

• Company HSE Policy 

• Company HSE Record 

• Company HSE Rules 

• Driving Safety 

• Electrical Safety 

• Fall Protection 

• Fire Protection 

• First Aid 

• Hazard Recognition 

• Hazard Reporting 

• Hearing Conservation 

• Housekeeping 

5.2.1 submission form a- hse requirment for contractor, 10/6/2007 10:27 

Yes No





• HSE Meeting Attendance 

• Injury Reporting 

• Ladders and Stairway Safety 

• Lock-out/Tag-out 

• Minimum Personnel Protective Equipment 

• Special Personnel Protective Equipment 

• Toxic Substances 

• Trenching and Excavation 

Do you have a training program for newly hired or promoted first line supervisors? If yes, 

does it contain instructions on: 

• Accident Investigation 

• Emergency Procedures 

• First Aid Procedures 

• Hazard Recognition 

• HSE Supervision 

• Incident Reporting 

• New Employee Orientation 

• Safe Work Practices 

• Toolbox HSE Meetings 

HSE meetings are conducted: 

• Weekly 

• Bi-weekly 

• Monthly 

• Less often, as needed 

• Do you have a method for reporting of unsafe acts and condition? 

Do you conduct field HSE inspections of work in progress? 

If yes, who conducts the inspections? _________________________________________ 

How often? ______________________________________________________________ 

Are accident reports circulated to your management? 

Is HSE a (documented) weighted factor in evaluating in the performance of: 

• Foreman 

• Supervisor 

• Management 

Does your firm hold “Toolbox” HSE Meetings? If yes, how often: 

• Weekly 

• Bi-weekly 


Yes No





• Monthly 

• Less often, as needed 

• Do you operate a Safety Incentive Scheme? 

HSE Staff 

How many full time HSE professionals do you have on staff? 

How many full time industrial hygienists do you have on staff? 

How many full time physicians do you have on staff? 

Who is the most senior staff HSE professional at your company? 

Name: Title: Phone: 

Who should we contact to discuss the details of the information contained in this document? 

Name: Title: Phone: 


Yes No 

Number





Exhibit 2— Monthly Contractor HSE Statistics Report 

FOR: __________________ (MONTH) PROJECT NAME:_________________ 

CONTRACTOR NAME: 

Workhours for the month: ________________________ Workhours Year-to-date: ______________ 

Number of injuries & illnesses that received treatment by a physician: ________________ 

Total number of Recordable injuries & illnesses: ________________________________ 

Number of Restricted duty cases: __________________ Number of Lost time (days away) cases: ______ 

Please list all injuries and illnesses, which have occurred to employees of your company on the above project 

this month. Include accident cause, injury/illness suffered and current disposition of injured/ill employee (i.e., 

returned to work, still off work, awaiting surgery, etc.) 

Person completing report: (print) ____________ Title: ________________ 

Date: _______________________ Signature : ________________ 

Please submit this report to Jacobs / OWNER on the above project by the fifth (5 th ) of each month, for the 

preceding month’s work activities. 






To: 

Site Representative for: 

Exhibit 3 — Notice of HSE Non-Compliance 

Your company has been found to be in non-compliance with one or more government, State, or OWNER’s 

requirement(s), as specified below. This HSE non-compliance must be corrected immediately for your 

company to meet the requirements of your contract. 

Item 

No. 

Description of Non-compliance Applicable HSE Requirement 

Issued By (Project Manager or Site Manager Issuing Notice): 

Name Printed: Title: 

Signature: Date: 

Received By (Contractor Representative Receiving Notice): 



cc: OWNER 

HSE Representative 






Project Name: 

Project Number: 

Exhibit 4 — Warning Letter for HSE Non-Compliance 

Your firm, , 

has been found to be in violation of your contract by non-compliance with applicable government, State, or 

OWNER HSE requirements. 

On (date), 

in accordance with the Contractor OWNER HSE Adherence Policy, your representative, 

, 

was given a Notice of HSE Non-Compliance (copy attached). This notice specifies areas where your 

company does not comply with government, State, or OWNER HSE requirements, and requests that these 

items be corrected immediately. 

If they are not corrected, more stringent measures will be taken in accordance with OWNER HSE Adherence 

Policy. 

Your prompt attention to this matter will be appreciated. 

Issued By (Project Manager or Site Manager Issuing Warning Letter): 



Received By (Contractor Representative Receiving Warning Letter): 



cc: OWNER 

HSE Manager 






Exhibit 5 — Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension 

Your company, while working on the 

project has been notified of HSE performance deficiencies in accordance with 

OWNERs’ Contractor HSE Adherence Policy. 

Despite these written notifications requesting that immediate corrective action be taken to improve your HSE 

performance, improvement has not occurred. 

Therefore, in accordance with Action Level Two of the Contractor HSE Adherence Policy, we are hereby 

notifying you that after securing your equipment, all job activities on the project named above are to cease. 

Activities on this project may be resumed only after your company meets requirements set forth in the 

Contractor HSE Adherence Policy. 

Issued By: 



cc: OWNER 

HSE Manager 






Exhibit 6 — Safe Plan of Action 

Project No. 

Job/Task Work Area Date 

Steps of Task Hazard/Reaction to Change Safe Plan Resources 

Team Members’ Signatures 

The signature of the supervisor confirms the completion of the hazard assessment and Safe Plan of Action by the crew. 

Supervisors Signature: Date 

Instructions: 1. Write name of job or task in space provided. 2. Conduct walk-through survey of work area. 3. Write the steps of the task in a safe sequence. 4. List all possible hazards involved in each step and 

reaction to change. 5. In the Safe Plan column, state actions that will be taken to prevent the hazards or injury from reaction to change. 6. In Resources column, list equipment, tools, etc. needed to do the job. 8. Ask 

each team member, who helped develop and will use this SPA, to sign in spaces provided. 9. Review the SPA at the end of the task for improvements. 

Work shall stop when conditions change, the job changes, or a deficiency in the plan is discovered, and the current SPA will be modified or a new SPA created. 






Review checklist while completing front page of SPA. Check all that apply. 

A new SPA is required if the job scope or work conditions change. 

Required Permits Hazards Safe Plan 

Confined Space Overhead Utilities Power de-energization required Insulation blankets required Wire watcher required 

Critical Lift Required clearance distance = _______Ft. Safe work zone marked 

Hot Work Crane or other Signalman assigned Tag lines in use Area around crane barricaded 

Lock Out/Tag Out Lifting Equipment Lifting equipment inspected Personnel protected from overhead load 

Soil Disturbance (Over 12”) Underground Utilities Reviewed as-builts Subsurface surveys Received dig permit 

Utility Clearance Required clearance distance = _______ Ft. Safe work zone Marked 

Required PPE Electrical Lock Out/Tag Out/Try Out Permit required? Confirm that equipment is de-energized 

Hard Hat, Class C Reviewed electrical safety procedures 

Hard Hat, Class E (Elect. Protect) Excavations Permits Inspected prior to entering Proper sloping/shoring 

Ear Plugs/Ear Muffs Barricades provided Access/egress provided Protection from accumulated water 

Eye Protection: Fire Hazard Hot Work Permit Fire Extinguishers Fire watch 

Safety Glasses Adjacent area protected Unnecessary flammable material removed 

Face Shield Vehicular Traffic or Traffic Barricades Cones Signs Flagmen Lane closure 

Chemical Goggles Heavy Equipment Communication with equipment operator 

Welding Hood Noise >85 dB Hearing protection is required: Ear plugs Ear Muffs Both 

Hand Protection: Hand & Power Tools: Inspect general cond. GFCI in use Identified PPE required for each tool 

Cut Resistant Gloves Reviewed safety requirements in operators manual(s) Guarding OK 

Welders Gloves Hand Hazards List sharp tools, material, equipment:__________________________________________ 

Nitrile Gloves PPE gloves, etc. Protected sharp edges as necessary 

Surgical Gloves Manual Lifting Reviewed proper lifting tech. Identified material requiring lifting equipment 

Rubber Gloves Hand protection required Back support belts 

Elect. Insulated Gloves Ladders Inspect general cond. before use Ladder inspected with in last quarter 

Arm Sleeves Ladder tied off or held Proper angle and placement Reviewed ladder safety 

Foot Protection: Scaffolds Inspect general condition before use Tags in place Properly secured 

Sturdy Work Boots Toe boards used Footings adequate Materials properly stored on scaffold 

Safety Toe Boots Slips, Trips Falls Inspect for trip hazards Hazards marked Tools & material properly stored 

Rubber Boots Extension cords properly secured Work zone free of debris 

Rubber Boot Covers Pinch Points List potential pinch points:__________________________________________________ 

Dielectric Footwear Working near operating equipment Hand/Body positioning 

Respiratory. Protection: 

Dust Mask 

Working w/ Chemicals List specific chemicals involved and list hazards and precaution on front side. 

Reviewed MSDS Exposure Monitoring required Have proper containers and labels. 

Identified proper PPE (respirators, clothing, gloves, etc.) 

Air Purifying Respirator Asbestos or Lead Paint Areas to be worked may contain asbestos or lead paint Asbestos controls incorporated 

Supplied Air Respirator Potential Lead based point controls in place Exposure monitoring conducted. 

SCBA Heat Stress Potential Heat stress monitoring (>85 o ) Liquids available Cool down periods 

Emergency Escape Respirator Sun Screen Reviewed Heat Stress symptoms 

Special Clothing: 

Cold Stress Potential Proper clothing (i.e.. gloves, coat, coveralls) Wind chill





Exhibit 7 — Safety Observation Report 

Date: Time: Supervisor of Observer: 

Observation: 

Was immediate corrective action taken? Yes No 

Describe Immediate Corrective Action: 

Describe Action to Prevent Recurrence: 

Describe Indirect Cause: 

Lack of Training Lack of Belief Lack of Resources 

Describe Suggested/Recommended Corrective Action For Indirect Cause: 

Observers 

Name Printed: Signature: 



Description and Verification of Corrective Action Taken To Address Indirect Cause: 

Supervisor/Manager 

Name Printed: Signature: Date Completed: 






Exhibit 8 — Accident/Incident Investigation Report 

Date of Accident/Incident: Time of Incident: Company: 

Date of Investigation: Project Number: Client: 

Location of Accident/Incident: 

Did injury result? Yes/No ____, If yes, provide Employee Name(s): 

S.S. No.: Skill: Yrs. in this Skill: Yrs. with Company: 

Describe Type of Injury: 

Was property damaged? Yes/No ___ _, Describe damage/owner: 

Is damaged property secured/maintained? Yes/No_ ___, Person Maintaining 

Names of Witnesses/Coworkers (With Social Security No.): 

Weather / Wind Conditions: 

List/Describe all personal protective equipment (PPE) in use by person exposed or injured: 

If Chemicals Involved: 

Name(s) of Chemical(s) Encountered: 

Form of Chemicals (Solid, Liquid, Gas, Vapor, Dust, Mist Fume): 

Describe Radiological Materials (if any): 

Volume or Quantity Released: 

Description of Accident/Incident: 

Contributing Factors: 






What corrective actions are being taken to prevent recurrence? Also list the person responsible for implementing 

and the target completion date for each item. 

Was an SPA/JSA developed for the task being performed? Yes/No_ ___, If yes, attach a copy. 

Was a permit issued? Yes/No , If yes, attach a copy of the permit in effect at time of the incident. 

Indirect cause: Lack of: Training____, Resources____, Belief____ (*explain) 

Basic cause: Failure to: Plan____, Direct____, Organize____, Control____(*explain) 

INVESTIGATION TEAM MEMBERS: 

Injured / Involved: 

Supervisor: 

Site/Office Manager: 

HSE Professional: 

Name Signature 




Name (Others) Title Signature 

Name (Others) Title Signature 

Client Representative(s) Contacted: 

Agency Representative(s) Contacted: 

* Attach additional sheets and supplemental data & information as necessary. 

** Distribution: Original must be filed on-site; 1 copy must be sent promptly to the Corporate Health and 

Safety Department. 






Please print or type. 

Exhibit 9 — Witness Statement 

Name: Title: 

Social Security Number: Date: Time: 

Temporary Address: Phone No. 

Permanent Address: Phone No. 

Location at Time of Accident: 

Describe, to the best of your knowledge, what happened just before, during, and just after the accident: 

Signature 






Exhibit 10 — First Aid Register 

Company: Project Name/Number: 

Jobsite Location: Month / Year: 

Site or Office Manager: Page: of 

Date Time Name 

Supervisor 

Or Foreman 


Type of Injury, Body Part, and Brief Description of Injury Class* 

* Class – Classification: FAV – First Aid Visit E-1 – Doctor’s Visit R – Recordable Other:

JACOBS 

SUBMISSION FORM – B 

TENDER DOCUMENT 18-3188 – HPCL 

Civil & Structural Work for Sub Station, SRR and Compressor Shed. 

STANDARD INSTRUCTIONS 

TO BIDDERS (PROPOSAL EXHIBITS) 

Rev.No. Issue Date Pages Rev Description Prepared 

By 

Checked 

By 

5.2.2 submission form b instruction to bidders (proposal exhibit) 10/10/07 1:34 PM 

Page 1 of 14 

Approved 

By 

0 19 January, 2002 12 Issued for use CLS CLS AGG 

1 17 June, 2003 15 Sheet 9 revised and 

Sheet 10 & 11 added. 

2 7 July, 2003 21 7 sheets of Safety 

Questionnaire added in 

Proposal Exhibit No. 11 

CLS SGR AGG 

RNK SGR AGG 

3 18 August, 2003 21 Sheet No. 6 revised RNK AGG AGG 

4 8 September, 

2005 

14 7 sheets of Safety 

Questionnaire deleted 

SSB SGR AGG

JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Civil & Structural work (SS, SRR & 


Project 

Date : 09.10.07 

1 TIME SCHEDULE 

Compressor shed) 

Standard Instruction to Bidders 

(Proposal Exhibits) 


2 PROPOSED SITE ORGANISATION 

3 EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE 

4 MANPOWER QUESTIONNAIRE 

5 DETAILS OF PRESENT COMMITMENTS 

6 DETAILS OF PAST PERFORMANCE 

7 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 

8 SITE VISIT CONFIRMATION 

9 VENDOR / SUPPLIER DATA 

10 MINIMUM INDICATIVE CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLANS 

18-3188 

Page 2 of 14 

Note :- 1. All Proposal Exhibits must be signed by the contractor without exception in token of 

acceptance and must bear his seal. Separate pages may be appended if necessary and 

should be documented/ listed in the enclosed Proposal Exhibits. 

5.2.2 submission form b instruction to bidders (proposal exhibit) 10/10/07 1:34 PM

JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 09.10.07 




PROPOSAL EXHIBITS NO. 1 

TIME SCHEDULE 

18-3188 

Page 3 of 14 

The entire work covered in this document shall be completed in all respects within a period of 

11 MONTHS starting from date of LOI. A mobilisation period of not exceeding 15 days and as 

part of the above contractual completion period will be allowed. 

The Contractor shall enclose his preliminary Schedule Bar Chart in support of this. 

I accept to adhere to the Time Schedule, as above. 

SEAL OF TENDERER SIGNATURE OF TENDERER 


JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 09.10.07 





PROPOSED SITE ORGANISATION 

18-3188 

Page 4 of 14 

The Contractor will indicate the Site Organisation he will provide for carrying out the said work. It is 

understood that the Contractor will deploy working and supervision personnel, depending upon the 

requirements from time to time for timely completion of work. These staff will function independently 

and will not be allocated any other assignment or responsibility other than what each of their 

designation indicates. 



JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 09.10.07 





EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE 

18-3188 

Page 5 of 14 

The Contractor shall indicate below the equipments, which he intends to deploy to site during the peak 

period. 

Sr. Description of Numbers for Present Intended Owner 

No. Equipments Topogr 

aphic 

Survey/ 

Civil 

Works 

Mech. Elect. Instr. Location date 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 



JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 09.10.07 





MANPOWER QUESTIONNAIRE 

The Contractor shall indicate the proposed manpower deployment: 

A Topographic 

Survey/ Civil / 

Structural 

18-3188 

Page 6 of 14 

Max. Nos. B Mechanical Max. Nos. 

i Bar Bender i Fabricators 

ii Carpenters ii Fitters (Piping) 

iii Masons iii Fitters (Structural) 

iv Operators iv Fitters (Mechanical) 

v Labours v Gas Cutters 

vi Fitters vi Grinders 

vii Gas cutters vii Welders 

viii Grinders viii Masons 

ix Welders ix Electricians 

x Electricians x Khalasi 

xi Riggers xi Riggers 

xii Helpers xii Helpers 

xiii Surveyor Helper 

C. Electrical Max. Nos. D. Instrument Max. Nos. 

i Electrician i Electrician 

ii Technician ii Technician 

iii Fitter iii Fitter 

iv Welder iv Welder 

v Riggers v Riggers 

vi Helpers vi Helpers 



JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Civil & Structural Work ( SS, SRR & Compressor shed) 18-3188 

LOBS Quality Up gradation Project Standard Instruction To Bidders 

Page 7 of 14 

Date : 10.09.07 


Sr. 

No. 

Name and Address of Client Type of work Value of 

Contract 


DETAILS OF PRESENT COMMITMENTS 

Date of 

Commencement of 

work 


Schedule 

completion 


% Completion Expected date 

of completion

JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Civil & Structural Work ( SS, SRR & Compressor shed) 18-3188 


Page 8 of 14 

Date : 30.01.07 


Sr. 

No. 

Name and Address of Client Type of work Value of 

Contract 


DETAILS OF PAST PERFORMANCE 

Date of 

Commencement of 

work 


Contractual 

Completion 


Actual 

Remarks

JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Civil & Structural Work (SS, SRR & 


Project 

Date : 10.09.07 





SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 

18-3188 

Page 9 of 14 

The Contractor shall follow all safety rules and shall strictly adhere to all kinds of safety precautions to 

safeguard against the mishap and damage to the men, material and machinery while carrying out work 

in the plant site. 

The Contractor shall follow and practice without any prejudice, all the guidelines given in the procedure 

of “FIELD HSE ACTIVITIES (18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007-A4)” enclosed along with this document. 

The Contractor shall not be allowed to use / bring “Asbestos” in any form even for temporary 

structures or any use of it within the project premises. 

The Contractor shall take responsibility to keep project site “Free of Asbestos” all through the project 

duration. 

The Contractor shall provide as a minimum the Safety precautions / PPE’s as indicated in Safety 

Requirement Matrix – Appendix – I for various trades of work indicated in same. 



JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Civil & Structural Work (SS, SRR & Compressor shed) 18-3188 


Page 10 of 14 

Date : 09.10.07 


SR 

NO 

1 EXCAVATION 

(MANUALLY) 

Activity Safety 

Shoes 

2 EXCAVATION (WITH 

M/CS) / BLASTING 

3 RCC WORK (ON / 

BELOW GROUND 

LVL) 

4 RCC WORK (RCC 

ABOVE GROUND 

LVL) 

Safety 

Helmet 

Safety 

Goggles 

Safety 

Harness 

Face 

Shield 

Ear 

Plugs 

Hand Barrica Shoring 

Gloves ding / Adequate 

side 

slope 

APPENDIX 1 


Lighting 

Requir 

ement 

Ladder Scaffol 

ding 

Safety 

Gloves 

Jackets 

Work 

Permit 

Power 

Cable 

Circuit 

brea,ke 

r 

Proper 

earthing 

Proper 

plug / 

sockets 

Joints 

connec 

tions 

well 

protect 

ed. 

Flash 

back 

arrestor 

for gas 

cylinders 

Good 

hose 

conditions 

Gas 

Cylinders 

upright 

and 

secured 

Fire 

extinguishers 

Test 

certificates/calibration 

certific 

ates of 

cranes/ 

tools 

Temp 

guy 

ropes 

provision 

Workingplatform 

Railing 

around 

Platform 

AdequateVentilation 

House 

Keeping 

Safe Caution 

Access Board 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Excavation M/C must 

be in good condition 

with driver having valid 

license. 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Workers should stand 

on safe platform for 

pouring concrete from 

height. 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

5 ROOF WORK ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

SHOP ** ** ** ** ** Material storage and 

6 PAINTING handling as per MSDS 

SITE ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

7 STRUCTURAL 

WORK (ERECTION 

AT SITE) 

8 RIGGING WORK 

(HEAVY LIFTS / 

ERECTION) 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Erection schemes to be 

approved before work. 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Method statement to be 

approved before work. 

SHOP ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Adequate cover to 

prevent 

9 CUTTING WORK molten metal / 

cutpieces 

SITE ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** from falling below 

** Indicates applicability. 

Remarks

JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery Site fabricated tanks 18-3188 


Page 11 of 14 

Date : 09.10.07 


SR. 

NO. 

Activity Safety 

Shoes 

Safety 

Helmet 

Safety 

Goggles 

Safety 

Harness 

Face 

Shield 

Ear 

Plugs 

Hand 

Gloves 

Barri- Shoring 

cading / Adequate 

side 

slope 

APPENDIX 1 


LightingRequirement 

Ladder Scaffolding 

Safety 

Gloves 

Jackets 

Work 

Permit 

Power 

Cable 

Circuit Proper 

breaker earthing 

Proper 

plug / 

sockets 

Joints 

connections 

well 

protected 

Flash 

back 

arrestor 

for gas 

cylinders 

Good 

hose 

conditions 

Gas 

Cylinders 

upright 

and 

secured 

Fire 

extinguishers 

Test 

certificates 

/ calibrationcertificates 

of 

cranes/ 

tools 

Temp 

guy 

ropes 

provision 

Workingplatform 

Railing 

around 

Platform 

AdequateVentilation 

House 

Keeping 

Safe Caution 

Access Board 

SHOP 

10 GRINDING WORK 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

SITE ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

SHOP ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Adequate cover to 

prevent 

11 WELDING WORK molten metal / 

cutpieces 

SITE ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** from falling below 

12 WORK IN 

CONFINED SPACE 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

13 SAND 

BLASTING/SHOT 

BLASTING/GUNITIN 

G 

14 ELECTRICAL 

WORKS 

15 ELECTRICAL 

HOISTS / WINCHES 

16 STORES,YARD 

LOADING/UNLOADI 

NG 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** Adequate protection for 

face and body. 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

17 RADIOGRAPHY ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

18 PRECOMMISSIONIN 

G/ COMMISSIONING 

** Indicates applicability. 

** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** 

Remarks

JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 10.09.07 





SITE VISIT CONFIRMATION 

18-3188 

Page 12 of 14 

This is to confirm that our Manager / Engineer Mr. has 

visited site on . . 2007 at 

He met Mr. of M/s........................................................, 

and has obtained all necessary information regarding Site location, Site conditions, Safety 

requirements, Tentative location of Site office / Fabrication yard etc. and the nature of work to be 

executed. 

Bidder can only make the site visit by coordinating with PMC as Refinery Entry is restricted. A fixed 

date can be mentioned upfront in the tender for site visit and bidder to advise name of person, who 

intends to visit the site, to PMC in advance. 



JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 10.09.07 





VENDOR / SUPPLIER DATA 

18-3188 

Page 13 of 14 

The contractor shall confirm below the vendors/ suppliers that he will to have for supplying basic 

materials of construction, which fall in the scope of contractor’s supply as per this order. The items 

shall include supply items as listed below etc. The locally procured materials like aggregates, bricks 

are however excluded from this. The contractor shall also supply necessary test certificates and 

carryout required special tests asked for by Owner/ PMC prior to supply of items. Also all facilities 

shall be provided to the Owner/ PMC’s to witness any or all of the tests. A quality plan to supply items 

shall be submitted to Owner/ PMC and approval obtained. 

Sr.No. Item Proposed Vendor List Pl. See note 



JACOBS 



Project 

Date : 10.09.07 





MINIMUM INDICATIVE CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLANS 

18-3188 

Page 14 of 14 

The Contractor shall, submit his detailed Minimum Indicative Construction quality plan, which shall as 

a minimum include: 

a) The extent of checks to be carried out by contractor at site and the records/ deliverables to be 

generated by him. 

b) Acceptance and agreement to submit QC Check Sheets and adhere to all Q.A procedures 

inclusive of timely submission and approval of the QC Check Sheets/ Other forms/Other 

requirements. 

c) Specific procedure and precautions to be adopted by the contractor to ensure: 

i. Requisite quality of work as per Drawings, Specification and Codes. 

d) Each sheet of the Contractor's Detailed Construction quality plans will be signed by him and 

bear his official seal and signature. 

e) Detailed quality plans shall be submitted by the Contractor on lines of enclosed sample 

Minimum Indicative Inspection/ Test plans for: 

Indicative QA Plans – See below as marked 

Topographical Survey 

Soil Investigation work 

Civil √ 

Structural √ 

Mechanical 

- Static 

- Rotary 

Site Fabricated Equipment 

Piping 

Welding √ 

Electrical √ 

Instrument 

Painting √ 

Cold / Hot insulation 

Refractory 

Ruberline 

f) Detailed Construction quality plans shall be submitted by the contractor before start of work. 

I accept the above. 



ATTACHMENTS 

REF. SITE CO-ORDINATION PROCEDURE NO. CONTRACT NO.: 

REF. PROJECT PROCEDURE NO.: PROJECT DETAILS: 

Sr.No. Activity / Description 

DISCIPLINE : DATE 

CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN Civil 

Records Req.. to be 

Submitted/ Maintained 

by Contractor 

Action/ Extent of 

check by Contractor 

Type and Extent of Check by 

Jacobs 

Type of Record/Basis 

1 Calibration of Test/ Measuring Instruments Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Lab Reports / Site Test 

2 - a) Materials Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record * 

b) Equipment Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record 

Lab Reports / Test Certificate/ Inspection 

Reports 

Lab Reports / Test Certificate/ Inspection 

Reports 

c) Consumable Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record * Lab Reports / Test Certificate 

3 Survey & Layout Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Joint Record 

4 Earth work Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random 

5 Concrete 

Field books, Records of profile, or Final 

levels, Field test records 

a) Cube CR. strength Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Test Report/ Registers 

b) Foundation & Pile cap/ Pre-concreting checks Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4607 

6 Piling 

a) Driven piles Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4601 

b) Bored Piles Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4601 

c) Pile Test Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4602 

7 Underground services/ Sanitary Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ 

8 Roads/ Drains/ Culverts/ Field tests Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

Civil-10/6/2007-10:58 AM Page 1 / 2 QAP Civil

ATTACHMENTS 

REF. SITE CO-ORDINATION PROCEDURE NO. CONTRACT NO.: 



9 Building 


CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN Civil 



by Contractor 




Jacobs 


a) Waterproofing Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4613 

b) Masonry Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random 

c) Wall Construction Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random 

Site Inspection Report/ 

CC4610 

Site Inspection Report/ 

CC-4610 

d) Plaster Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4611 

e) Door, Windows Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4611 

f) Flooring Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4611 

g) Carpentry Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4611 

h) Room finish Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4611 

i) Painting/ White wash/color wash Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

10 Safety 

Implement and Comply as 

per norms 

Detail Check 100% Close vigilance on Day today basis 

Records of Periodic checks of Tools, 

Tackles, Elec. Equpt. Lifting Machinery 

etc. 

11 As Built Drawing Mark up on Drawing Submit Review Record Drawing 

Issue No. 1 Date 2 Date Remarks : - Review Record by Jacobs is 100% Distribution:QA 

Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 

Form No. : Applicable Procedure No.:BM-26-140 

- Witness by Jacobs is 100% 

Project Manager 

- Check/ Witness at Random by Jacobs is Generally 5% to 10% 

* Approval of Sample prior to procurement for material in 

H.O. Const. 

contractors Scope of supply Site 

Civil-10/6/2007-10:58 AM Page 2 / 2 QAP Civil

7.0 ATTACHMENTS 

REF. SITE CO-ORDINATION PROCEDURE NO.: CONTRACT NO.: 




CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN ELECTRICAL 



by Contractor 




Jacobs 



2 a) Materials Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record * 

Lab Reports / Test Certificate/ CC- 

4121 


Lab Reports / Test Certificate/ 

Inspection Reports 


3 Check Equipment, Transit damage / Inspection Rpts Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Inspection reports 

4 Pre-Erection take over Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Joint Record 

5 Installation & Allignment 

a) Switch Gear 

b) Transformer 

Yes 

Yes 

Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4408 

Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4416 

c) Battery/ Battery Charger Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4413 

d) Cables Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4419 

e) Lighting Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4403 

f) Cable tray Support Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ 

g) Earthing Work Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

Electrical-10/6/2007-10:58 AM Page 1/2 QAP Electrical





6 Testing 

a) Switch Gear 

b) Transformer 


CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN ELECTRICAL 



by Contractor 

Yes 

Yes 




Jacobs 


Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/ 

Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/ 

c) Battery/ Battery Charger Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/ 

d) H.T Motor/ L.T.motor Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4417 

e) Lighting Circuits Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/CC-4403 

f) Earth Condutor Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4418 

g) Earthing Electrode Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4418 

7 Safety 

Impllement and Comply as 

per norms 

Detail Check 100% Close vigilence on Day today basis 

Records of Periodic checks of 

Tools, Tackles, Elec. Equpt. Lifting 

Machinery etc 


9 Statutory approval yes Detail Check 100% Review Record * Authenticated Reports 


Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 






H.O. Const. 


Electrical-10/6/2007-10:58 AM Page 2/2 QAP Electrical



REF. PROJECT PROCEDURE NO.: Project Details: 



CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN PIPING 



by Contractor 



Type and Extent of Check 

by Jacobs 


1 - a) Calibration of Test/ Measuring Instruments Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Lab Reports / Site Test 




Inspection Reports/CC4121 




d) Statutory Approval- wherever applicable Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Authenticated Reports 

3 Pre- Erection Take over of Civil / Structural work Yes Detail Check 100% 

4 Fabrication 

Check / Witness at Random/ 

Review Record 

Joint Record/ 

a) Material (as per piping class) Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Visual / Review Record 

b) Joint Prepration/ Fit-up Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

c) Welding Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

5 NDT (as applicable) Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Lab Reports / Test Certificate/CC4206 

6 Erection 

a) Alignment/ Levels Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4200/4205 

b) Pipe Supports, Gaskets, Valves, Traps, 

Filters, Control/ Safety Valves Etc Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4200 

Piping-10/6/2007-11:00 AM Page 1/2 QAP Piping



REF. PROJECT PROCEDURE NO.: Project Details: 


7 Testing 


CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN PIPING 



by Contractor 




by Jacobs 


a) Test Packs/ Testing Scheme Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Scheme / Plan 

b) PressureTesting Yes Detail Check 100% Witness 

c) Pickling / Passivation/ Chemical Cleaning Yes Detail Check 100% Witness 

8 Safety 


per norms 

Detail Check 100% 

Close vigilence on Day today 

basis 

Site Inspection Report/ CC-4203 

CC-4205 

Site Inspection reports/CC-4202 

Records of Periodic checks of Tools, 

Tackles, Elec. Equpt. Lifting Machinery 

etc 



Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 




- Check/ Witness at Random by Jacobs is Generally 5% to 10% H.O. Const. 



Piping-10/6/2007-11:00 AM Page 2/2 QAP Piping






CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN STRUCTURAL 



by Contractor 




Jacobs 










3 Fabrication Drawing Yes Detail Check 100% Review & Approve Joint Record 

4 Fabrication 

a) Joint Prepration/ Fit-up Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 

b) Final Welding Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4614 

5 NDT (as applicable) Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Lab Reports / Test Certificate 

6 Erection 

a) Locations Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4608 

b) Alignment/ Levels Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4608 

c) Grouting Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4608 

d) Final Welding Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report/ CC-4608 

7 Safety 

Impllement and Comply 

as per norms 

Detail Check 100% 

Close vigilence on Day today 

basis 



Machinery etc 



Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 




- Check/ Witness at Random by Jacobs is Generally 5% 

H.O. 

to 

Const. 

10% 

* Approval of Sample prior to procurement for 

material in contractors Scope of supply Site 

Structural-10/6/2007-11:00 AM Page 1/1 QAP Structural




CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN WELDING 





by Contractor 




by Jacobs 



2 - a) Base Materials Yes Submit Review Record * 

Lab Reports / Test Certificate/CC- 

4121 

b) Welding Equipment Yes Submit Review Record Lab Reports / Test Certificate 

c) Consumable (Electrodes/ Filler wire etc.) Yes Submit Review Record * Lab Reports / Batch Certificate 

3 Welding Procedure Specification Yes Submit Review & Approve 

4 Welding Procedure Qualification 

a) Welding of Test Piece 

b) NDT/ Destructive Tests 

5 Welder Performance Qualification 

a) Welder Test 

b) NDT/ Destructive Tests 

6 Procedures 

Yes Conduct 

Yes Conduct 

Witness 

Witness 

Welding Procedure Specification/ 

Sec-IX / CC-4118 

Site Test 

Procedure Qualification Record / 

Lab Report / Sec-IX/CC-4116 

Yes Conduct Witness Certificate/ Site Test 

Yes Conduct Review Lab Report / Sec-IX / CC-4117 

a) Radiography Yes Submit Review & Approve 

Approved Procedure / Sec-V/CC- 

4119 

b) Dye-penetrant Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Procedure / Sec-V 

c) Ultrasonic Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Procedure / Sec-V 

d) Magnetic particle Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Procedure / Sec-V 

e) Pre-Heat & Interpass Temperature Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Procedure 

f) Post Weld Heat Treatment Yes Submit Review & Approve Approved Procedure 

Welding-10/6/2007-11:01 AM Page 1/2 QAP Welding




CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN WELDING 



7 Checks (Non-Destructive checks) 



by Contractor 




by Jacobs 


a) Preheat & Interpass Temperature Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Graphs/Report 

b) Welding Root & Subsequent Passes Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Report / 

c) Post Weld Heat Treatment Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Graphs / 

d) Radiography Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Report / Film / CC-4206 

e) Dye-penetrant Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Report / CC-4206 

f) Ultrasonic Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Report / CC-4206 

g) Magnetic Particle Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Report / CC-4206 


Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 




- Check/ Witness at Random by Jacobs is Generally 5% to 10% H.O. Const. 



Welding-10/6/2007-11:01 AM Page 2/2 QAP Welding






CONSTRUCTION QUALITY PLAN PAINTING 



by Contractor 




Jacobs 






Inspection Reports/CC-4121 




3 Take over of equipment/ Tank/ Piping/ Str. Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Joint Record 

4 Surface Preparation/ Sandblasting Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4110 

5 Primer Application- DFT Check Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4110 

6 Final Painting-DFT Check Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report/CC-4110 

7 Painting Identification Band/ Code etc. Yes Detail Check 100% Witness Site Inspection Report 

8 Confirm complection of 

a) Pressure Testing of piping Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Site Inspection Report 

b) Mechanical Clearence of Storage/ Eqpt. Yes Detail Check 100% Review Record Site Inspection Report 

9 Safety 


per norms 

Detail Check 100% Close vigilence on Day today basis 



Machinery etc 

10 Testing (DFT) Yes Detail Check 100% Check / Witness at Random Site Inspection Report 


Compiled By 

Checked By 

Approved By 






H.O. Const. 


Painting-10/6/2007-10:59 AM Page 1/1 QAP Painting

JACOBS 

STANDARD SPECIFICATION 

FOR 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 

DOCUMENT NO. : Z SS 001 

PREVIOUS DOCUMENT NO. : BSS-26-06 REV. 2 


By 

0 

1 

25 January 2001 

2 nd August 2001 

4 

4 

Issue for Use 

Cover page revised 

Checked 

By 

5.3 Standard Specification for Quality Requirements ZSS001 10/1/2007 11:01 

CLS 

SGR 

AGG 

AGG 

Page 1 of 4 

Approved 

By 

TBP 

AGG

JACOBS 

HPCL Mumbai Refinery 18-3188 

LOBS Project Specification Number : Z SS 001 

Page 2 of 4 

Date : 30.01.07 

Standard Specification For Quality 

Requirements Rev-01 

1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 



4.0 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PLAN (CQP) 

5.0 QUALITY 

6.0 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) 

7.0 DOCUMENTATION 

5.3 Standard Specification for Quality Requirements ZSS001 10/1/2007 11:01

JACOBS 



Page 3 of 4 

Date : 30.01.07 

Standard Specification For 

Quality Requirements Rev-01 

1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this procedure is to define the Standard specification for Quality requirements. 

Quality requirements form an integral part of the contract and all contractors are required to 

comply. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The scope of Quality requirements is as follows : 

i) Preparation of a Quality plan by the Contractor, which is hereafter referred to as 

‘CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PLAN’ or CQP. 

ii) Performance of: 

a) Quality and 

b) Quality Control (QC) activities at site. 

iii) Documentation for the above. 


Quality : Quality activities are those activities which are carried out at site for 

ensuring that the quality of work within the limits of acceptability are 

produced at site. 

ED forms : Erection Data forms 

QC : Quality control 

4.0 CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY PLAN (CQP) 

CQP will be prepared by the Contractor and approved by Client/ Jacobs. This Quality plan 

shall as a minimum include : 

i) Specific allocation of responsibilities of Contractor’s staff for 

a) performing Quality and QC activities at site and 

b) documenting the same in JACOBS QC Checksheets/ ED Forms. 

ii) Shall establish the governing documents (Drawings, Specifications, Codes, etc.) and 

the deliverables (QC Checksheets/ ED Forms, Calibration Certificates, Test 

Certificates, etc.) for each activity. 

iii) Shall specify the following supplementary information : 

a) Agreed Time Schedule 

b) Organization Chart along with responsibilities. 

This Quality Plan is submitted by the Contractor before commencement of site activities. 


JACOBS 



Page 4 of 4 

Date : 30.01.07 

Standard Specification For Quality 

Requirements Rev-01 

5.0 QUALITY 

Quality activities are those activities which are carried out at site for ensuring that the quality of 

work within the limits of acceptability are produced at site. 

5.1 These consist of : 

i) Effective supervision of work by the Contractor at every stage; 

ii) System of effective inspection and checks at every stage to ensure initiation of 

appropriate corrective action in case of non-conformities by the Contractor at his own 

initiative and 

iii) Calibration of all testing and measuring instruments by external/ internal agencies as 

appropriate and as approved by Client/Jacobs and as instructed by them at site. 

6.0 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) 

Quality Control activities are individual activities whereby at every stage the Quality of work is 

assessed, wherever necessary corrective action is taken, and the findings, both before and 

after corrective action (where required) are taken, are recorded. 

7.0 DOCUMENTATION 

The QC activities include submission of Test Certificates, Calibration Certificate, etc. to Client/ 

JACOBS, who check the same for acceptability (authenticity of testing lab / house) and 

traceability of the same to National / International laboratory / standards etc. and record their 

acceptance. Copy of this approved Test Certificate is also maintained with the Contractor. 

7.1 The QC activities are recorded in JACOBS QC Checksheet/ ED Forms. Sample QC 

Checksheets/ ED Forms are enclosed in the Contract Enquiry / Order and are specific for the 

Contract for which the Enquiry/ Order Documents are issued. The JACOBS QC Checksheet / 

ED Forms are printed exactly as per format and filled by the Contractor while carrying out the 

QC Activity. Unless a QC Activity is carried out and its acceptability recorded, the Contractor’s 

Site Engineer generally refrains from calling the Consultant’s assigned Field Engineer to 

witness the checks, unless the former needs express clarifications / details or help. Only after 

he is satisfied regarding the acceptability, the Contractor’s Site Engineer calls in the 

JACOBS’s assigned Field Engineer /s who witness / check / random check / etc. the test / 

surveillance activities partly or fully as part of surveillance activities and record and sign their 

findings. 

7.2 The Contractor should note that he is totally responsible for Quality and QC activities and the 

Client / Jacobs surveillance check does not absolve him from any of his responsibilities. 

7.3 Project specific / discipline specific QC Checksheets/ ED Forms listed, are only for purposes 

of guidance, and the Contractor is responsible for filling up any additional checksheet /s that 

may be instructed to be filled up in the interest of or due to exigencies of work. The 

Contractor is also responsible for providing as a minimum a copy each to Client and Jacobs 

at a maximum specified interval of a fortnight. If due to exigencies of work Client or Jacobs 

ask for additional copies at more frequent intervals, the same shall be provided by the 

Contractor at no extra cost. 

7.4 Sample QC Checksheets/ ED Forms, as described in 7.3 above and sample Contractor’s 

Quality Plan as described in 4 above are enclosed separately in the Contract Enquiry / Order 

document as a Project Specific enclosure document. 

7.5 For guidelines on using QC Checksheets/ ED Forms Z SS 002 shall be referred. 


JACOBS 

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR 

USING QC CHECKSHEETS / ED FORMS 

DOCUMENT NO. : Z SS 002 

PREVIOUS DOCUMENT NO. : BSS-26-06 REV. 2 


By 

0 

1 

25 January 2001 

2 August 2004 

5 

5 

Issue for use 

Cover page revised 

Checked 

By 

5.4 Standard Specification for using QC Checksheets ZSS002 10/1/2007 11:04 

CLS 

SGR 

AGG 

AGG 

Page 1 of 5 

Approved 

By 

TBP 

AGG

JACOBS 


LOBS Project Specification Number: Z SS002 

Page 2 of 5 

Date : 30.01.07 

Standard Specifications For Using QC 

Check sheets/ ED Forms Revision No.: 1 

1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 FORMS 

3.2 PRINTING OF FORMS 

3.3 STIPULATED PERIOD 

3.4 COMPLETED FORMS 

3.5 “IN-PROGRESS” FORMS 

3.6 CERTIFIED FORMS 

3.7 SUBMISSION 

4.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 


4.2 USAGE 


5.0 CALIBRATION RECORDS 

6.0 OTHER NOTES 


5.4 Standard Specification for using QC Checksheets ZSS002 10/1/2007 11:04

JACOBS 


LOBS Project Specification Number : Z SS002 

Page 3 of 5 

Date : 30.01.07 


Checksheets / ED Forms Revision No.: 1 

1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this procedure is to define the specification for using QC Checksheets/ 

ED Forms. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The following are the guidelines for using the QC Checksheets/ ED Forms by the Contractor. 


3.1 FORMS 

Electronic Access is through the sub directory \STD\QS\ED Forms of the Quality system 

directory. The Forms that are to be used are as listed separately on a Project Specific and 

Discipline Specific basis and shall include any other forms that may be required at site to 

cover exigencies of work as decided by Client / Jacobs from time to time. 


Means printing of forms exactly as per specimen (refer 3.1), without alteration of any sort in a 

legible and properly presentable manner to the satisfaction of Client / Jacobs. 

3.3 STIPULATED PERIOD 

Means the stage at which the forms shall be submitted duly authorised. Unless instructed 

otherwise at site by Jacobs, the in-progress / completed forms shall be submitted every 15 

days, viz. on the 15th and 30th of every month. 

3.4 COMPLETED FORMS 

Means the forms which have been filled-up by the Contractor and duly certified for all parts/ 

sections or stages as a signal that the activity/ activities noted has/ have been completed in all 

respects. 

3.5 "IN-PROGRESS" FORMS 

Means form which has been partly filled-up by the Contractor and certified for only the part/ 

sections or stages that have been completed; the rest of the parts / stages / sections not being 

complete at that time. 

3.6 CERTIFIED FORMS 

Form which has been filled up by the Contractor and signed by the Client/ Jacobs as required 

in the place provided in the forms to certify that the stipulated activity/ activities has/ have been 

completed therein. 


i) For Completed Forms 

- No. of copies required - Original plus two or as instructed per Project Specific 

requirement. 

- To be submitted to Jacobs only, unless instructed otherwise. 


JACOBS 


LOBS Project Specification Number: Z SS002 

Page 4 of 5 

Date : 30.01.07 


Check sheets/ ED Forms Revision No.: 1 

ii) For In-progress Forms 

The submission will be as above, except that 2 copies will be submitted to Jacobs 

instead of Original plus one. 

4.0 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 


The Contractor shall be responsible for printing of forms, at no extra cost, and shall ensure 

that adequate stock of forms for use at Site are available at all times. 

4.2 USAGE 

The Contractor shall arrange to fill in the QC Checksheet/ ED Forms listed in Appendix 2 from 

time to time, as required at site by Client / Jacobs. 


4.3.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for timely submission of duly certified forms accompanied 

with a Covering Letter and Index. 

4.3.2 The forms, duly filled-in shall each bear a Number as per an unique numbering system 

adopted at site as instructed by the Jacobs. 

4.3.3 The forms duly filled-in, shall be presented in a proper folder / file. 

5.0 CALIBRATION RECORDS 

5.1 Contractor shall submit to Client/ Jacobs, valid Calibration Certificates / records of testing and 

measuring equipment used at site, which shall have traceability to national / international 

standards. He shall maintain copies of duly authenticated certificates in this record and 

provide copies as instructed to Client / Jacobs. 

5.2 The Contractor shall submit alongwith zerox copies of Calibration Certificates, the Originals for 

verification, without fail. The Originals will be returned after due verification. 

5.3 All testing and measuring equipment shall be uniquely identifiable with reference to Calibration 

Certificates / records. 

6.0 OTHER NOTES 

6.1 Copies of the QC Checksheet / ED Forms duly approved by the Client / Jacobs, shall be 

attached to every copy of the Running Account / Final / Pre-final Bill for the period covered in 

the bill. 

6.2 Certification of the form and attachment of the copy to the bill will be a pre-requisite for 

verifying the bill. 

6.3 The QC Checksheet / ED Forms should be presented for certification at the time of execution 

of the item of work listed in it and at the appropriate stage. 

6.4 The Contractor shall maintain systematically all the records with an Index filing system so that 

any certified QC Checksheet form can be verified / audited at any given time. 


JACOBS 


LOBS Project Specification Number : Z SS002 

Page 5 of 5 

Date : 30.01.07 


Checksheets / ED Forms Revision No.: 1 

6.5 The reporting in the QC Checksheet / ED Forms does not absolve the Contractor from any 

other report(s) or information required or indicated anywhere in this contract document, its 

special / general and site working conditions of contract, technical or other specifications 

irrespective of whether the reporting in these QC Checksheet / ED Forms duplicates this 

information or not. 


INDEX OF CHECK SHEET 

18-3188, HPCL, LOBS: Substation, SRR and Compressor House Civil works 

CC No. Rev. No. Title 

CC3000 0 Certificate of Completion Construction 

CC3001 0 Construction Completion Report 

Mechanical 

CC4116 Welding Procedure Qualification Record 

CC4117 Welder’s Performance Qualification Certificate 

CC4118 Welding Procedure Specification 

CC4119 Radiography Procedure Qualification Record 

CC4120 Insulation Inspection Report (Equipment) 

CC4121 Material Approval Record 

Piping 

CC4206 0 NDE Record 

CC4207 QC Check Sheet : Underground Piping Wrapping and Coating 

Electrical 

CC4403 0 Electrical Lighting Circuits Installation and Test 

CC4409 0 Electrical Earthing 

CC4414 QC Check Sheet : Socket Outlet and Resptacles 

CC4415 QC Check Sheet : General Electrical Installations 

CC4418 Electrical Test-Data Sheet : Earth Electrode Resistance 

Civil 

CC4600 0 QC Check Sheet Excavation and Backfill 

CC4603 0 QC Check Sheet : Foundations 

CC4604 0 QC Check Sheet : Drainage Installation 

CC4605 0 Test Certificate Underground Pipe 

CC4606 0 QC Check Sheet : Concrete Supply 

CC4607 0 QC Check Sheet : Pre-and Post Concrete Checks 

CC4608 0 QC Check Sheet : Steel Structures 

CC4609 0 QC Check Sheet : Cladding 

CC4610 0 Civil QC Check Sheet Buildings Masonry Inspection – Walls 

CC4611 0 QC Check Sheet : Building Finishes 

CC4612 0 QC Check Sheet : Roads and Landscaping 

CC4613 QC Check Sheet : Buildings Water Proofing and Damp Inspection 

CC4614 Structural Work Fabrication and Erection 

Form : WI500-02f2b Rev Page 1 of 2




Permits & others 

CC4700 Notice of Permit to Work System 

CC4701 Excavation Permit 

CC4702 Confined Space Entry Permit 

CC4703 Electrical Isolation Permit 

CC4704 Electrical Energisation Permit 

CC4705 Hot Work Permit 

CC4708 Request for Information 

CC4709 Site Concession Request 

CC4710 Risk Assessment Record 





CC3000 0 Certificate of Completion Construction 

CC3001 0 Construction Completion Report 

Mechanical 

CC4116 Welding Procedure Qualification Record 

CC4117 Welder’s Performance Qualification Certificate 

CC4118 Welding Procedure Specification 

CC4119 Radiography Procedure Qualification Record 

CC4120 Insulation Inspection Report (Equipment) 

CC4121 Material Approval Record 

Piping 

CC4206 0 NDE Record 

CC4207 QC Check Sheet : Underground Piping Wrapping and Coating 

Electrical 

CC4403 0 Electrical Lighting Circuits Installation and Test 

CC4409 0 Electrical Earthing 

CC4414 QC Check Sheet : Socket Outlet and Resptacles 

CC4415 QC Check Sheet : General Electrical Installations 

CC4418 Electrical Test-Data Sheet : Earth Electrode Resistance 

Civil 

CC4600 0 QC Check Sheet Excavation and Backfill 

CC4603 0 QC Check Sheet : Foundations 

CC4604 0 QC Check Sheet : Drainage Installation 

CC4605 0 Test Certificate Underground Pipe 

CC4606 0 QC Check Sheet : Concrete Supply 

CC4607 0 QC Check Sheet : Pre-and Post Concrete Checks 

CC4608 0 QC Check Sheet : Steel Structures 

CC4609 0 QC Check Sheet : Cladding 

CC4610 0 Civil QC Check Sheet Buildings Masonry Inspection – Walls 

CC4611 0 QC Check Sheet : Building Finishes 

CC4612 0 QC Check Sheet : Roads and Landscaping 

CC4613 QC Check Sheet : Buildings Water Proofing and Damp Inspection 

CC4614 Structural Work Fabrication and Erection 





Permits & others 

CC4700 Notice of Permit to Work System 

CC4701 Excavation Permit 

CC4702 Confined Space Entry Permit 

CC4703 Electrical Isolation Permit 

CC4704 Electrical Energisation Permit 

CC4705 Hot Work Permit 

CC4708 Request for Information 

CC4709 Site Concession Request 

CC4710 Risk Assessment Record 


Form No. CC3001 

CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION 

REPORT 

DISCIPLINE: ____________________________ 

CC 3001 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

REPORT NO: 

APPLICATION: Following the Final Test/Inspection on 200.. by the undersigned, the 

Plant or section of Plant detailed below or on the attached CC forms is completely 

installed except for minor details which do not affect Pre-commissioning activities. 

NATURE OF THE WORKS SUBCONTRACT NO 

FORM NO TITLE OF THE FORM 

Application is made hereby for the relevant Certificate of Completion of Construction 

SIGNATURE AND DATE POSITION AND COMPANY 

RESPONSE: The above Application is * NOT ACCEPTED for the reasons given below. 

* ACCEPTED subject to the following points being attended 

written confirmation that the work is completed: 

* A Certificate of Completion of Construction is appended hereto. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES is 

further work additional to that required above to be carried out without written instructions from the 

Engineer. 

* Delete as appropriate 

SIGNATURE AND DATE POSITION AND COMPANY 

(CLIENT) 

(INSPECTORATE) 

(JACOBS) 

(SUBCONTRACTOR)

WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD 

CC4116 10/6/2007 12:19 PM 

CC4116 

CONTRACT NO. 

SITE 

PLANT 

CERTIFICATE NO. 

Name of the Subcontractor: TENSILE TESTS (QW-150) 

Procedure Qualification Record No. _____________________________ Date: __________________Rev.No:_______ 

Welding Procedure Specification No. ____________________________ Date: __________________Rev.No: _______ 

Welding Process (es) _________________________________________ Type: __________________ 

Date of test: Run sequence and completed weld 

dimensions (sketch) 

Welding consumables 

Specimen 

No. 

Width 

mm 

Thickness 

mm 

Area 

mm 

Ultimate 

Total Load 

Weld preparation (dimensioned sketch) Test Certificates GUIDED BEND TESTS (QW-160) 

Filler Metals: (QW-404) 

Type & Fig.No. Results 

AWS ____________ SFA ____________ 

Dimensions of test piece F. No. ___________ A. No. __________ 

Electrical characteristics (QW 409) Size ____________________________ TOUGHNESS TESTS (QW-170) 

Amps Make and type: ____________________ 

Joints: Grove Design (QW - 402) Voltage Baking treatment: __________________ 

Polarity 

Specimen No. Notch 

Location 

Backing: Tungsten electrode size Gas (QW 408) FILLET WELD TEST (QW-180) 

Base Metals: (QW-403) Travel speed R.O.L. 

Spec. Type & Grade: _____________ to 

Spec. Type & Grade: _____________ 

P. No. _________ to P. No. __________ 

Wire feed speed 

Shielding Gas ____________________ 

Composition _____________________ 

Gas flow rate Flow rate ________________________ 

Shield 

Purge 

Pipe Dia _______ Technique (QW - 410) Preheat: 

Gas Backing __________ % 

Composition 

Preheat (QW 406) 

Thickness Pipe/Plate: ______________ Stringer/ Weave ___________________ Interpass temperature: ___________ 

Positions (QW-405) 

Position of Groove: ___________ 

Positions of Fillet: ___________ 

Welding Progression: ___________ 

Encl.: Test Certificates: ___________ 

Initial / Interface clearing: __________ Post Weld heat treatment (QW 407) 

Cleaning _________________________ 

Multiple/ Single Pass ______________ 

Single / Multi Arc _________________ 

Travel Speed ____________________ 

Temperature Range: ______________ 

Method Time: ____________________ 

Control 

Soak temperature 

Soak time 

Result: Satisfactory Yes / No 

Macro Result: ___________________ 

Testing carried out by: 

In accordance with: 

Results recorded on: 

Certificate No. : 

Notch 

Type 

Test 

Temp. 

U.T.S. Type of Fallure 

& Location 

Impact 

Values 

Average 

Penetration into parent metal? Yes/ 

No 

Inspection authority: 

Witnessed by: 

Manufacturer’s 

Welder’s Name: 

Representative 

Mark: 

Extent of approval Remarks (if any) 

Material: Thickness: Diam: 

We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test weld 

specimen were prepared, welded and tested in accordance with the requirements of 

Section IX of the ASME Code 

___________ ______________ ___________ 

Performer Jacobs Client

WELDER’S PERFORMANCE 

QUALIFICATION CERTIFICATE 

CC4117 

CONTRACT NO. : 

PLANT : 

LOCATION : 

SUBCONTRACTOR : 

CERTIFICATE NO. : 

Welder's Name Welder's Identification No. 

Approved Welding Procedure No. Date of test 

Test piece details Extent of approval 

Welding process Welding process(es) 

Parent material(s) Materials range 

Thickness Thickness range 

Joint type Joint type 

Pipe outside diameter Pipe outside diameter range 

Welding position(s) Welding Position(s) 

Test piece position (fixed/rotated) Consumable 

Remarks 

Welding consumable Weld preparation (dimensioned sketch) 

Filler material 

Make and type 

Composition 

Specification 

Size(s) 

Shielding gas / flux 

Make and type 

Composition / specification 

Test results 

State acceptable / non-acceptable (with reasons) or 'not required' 

Non-destructive tests 

Visual (QW-302.4) Radiography (QW 304 / 305) Ultrasonic 

Destructive tests 

Macro - examination 

Remarks 

Root bend Face bend Side bend Fillet Weld fracture 

The statements in this certificate are correct. The Test weld was prepared, welded and tested in accordance with the 

requirements of Section IX of ASME Code 

Manufacturer's / Subcontractor’s representative 

Inspecting authority witnessed by 

Extent of approval: Material: Thickness: Diam: 

CC4117 10/6/2007 12:19 PM

WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION 

Name of the Subcontractor: ______________________________ 

WPS No & Date : ______________Rev.No :______________ 

PQR No & Date : _____________Rev.No :______________ 

Welding Process(es) : ___________________________________ 

Type ( s) : ___________________________________ 

JONTS (QW – 402) 

Joint design :____________ 

Backing :____________ 

Backing Material :____________ 

Non-Metallic :____________ 

Other : _______________________ Joint Detail 

BASE METAL (QW – 403) 

P.No.:_____Gr. No.:_____To P.No.: ______Gr.No :______ 

Spec.Type & Grade _________ To _________________ 

Thickness Range Groove ___________Fillet___________ 

Pipe Dia.Range Groove_____________Fillet___________ 

Other 

FILLER METAL (QW – 404) 

Spec.No (SFA) _______________________________________ 

F.No _____________________________________________ 

AWS No. 

_____________________________________________________ 

F No. _______________________________________________________ 

A No. _______________________________________________________ 

Size of Filler Metal _________________________________________________ 

Electrode Flux (Class) ______________________________________________ 

Flux Trade Name _________________________________________________ 

Consumable Insert _________________________________________________ 

Other ____________________________________________________________ 

Position (QW – 405) 

Groove : ________________ 

Welding Progression __________ 

Fillet ____________________ 

Other ____________________ 

Preheat (QW – 406) 

Preheat Temp(Min) : ______ 

Interpass Temp(Max): ____ 

Preheat Maintain : _______ 

Other : ________________ 

PWHT (QW – 407) 

CC4118 10/6/2007 12:19 PM 

CC4118 

Temp. Range : ___________________ 

Holding Time : ____________________ 

Holding temp. : ____________________ 

Rate of Heating : ____________________ 

Rate of Cooling : ____________________ 

Other : ___________________________ 

CONTRACT NO : 

SITE : 

PLANT : 

CLIENT : 

GAS (QW – 408) 

Shielding Gas : ________________________________ 

Gas Flow rate :__________________________________ 

Purity : _________________________________ 

Backing :__________________________________ 

Gas Flow Rate :_________________________________ 

Purity :__________________________________ 

ELECTRODE CHARACTERISTICS (QW – 409) 

Current : ____________ Polarity : ______________________________________ 

Tungsten Electrode size & Type : ________________ 2 % Thoriated __________________ 

Amp ( Range) : _____________________ Volts (Range) : ______________________________ 

TECHNICQUE (QW – 410) 

String or Weaving Bead _________________________________________________________ 

Interpass Cleaning _________________________________________________________ 

Method Of Back Gouging _________________________________________________________ 

Oscillation _________________________________________________________ 

Multi /single Pass _________________________________________________________ 

Multi /single Electrode _________________________________________________________ 

Peening __________________________________________________________ 

Weld 

layers 

Root 

run 

2 nd Run 

Fill up 

Proces 

s 

Filler metal Current Voltage 

Range 

Class Dia(mm 

) 

Polarity Amp 

Range 

Capping 

Others: Socket welding shall be performed with at least two layers of weld, 

Subcontractor/Vendor Jacobs 

Travel 

Speed 

range 

Others

RADIOGRAPHY PROCEDURE 

QUALIFICATION RECORD 

CONTRACT NO. : PROJECT / LOCATION : 

SUBCONTRACTOR : AREA DETAILS : 

A. RADIATION SOURCE DATA 

CC4119 

TYPE OF RADIATION C 060 IR 192 X Ray 

PROC. QU. NO. : 

DATE : 

PAGE 1 OF 2 

RADIATION INTENSITY ____ ci ____ Kv EFFECTIVE FOCAL SPOT SIZE _____ mm 

B. EXPOSURE GEOMETRY 

WELD TYPE 

DIAMETER THICKNESS 

WALL VIEWING 

a) Double Wall Exposure, Single Wall Viewing 

b) Double Wall exposure, Double Wall Viewing 

c) Single Wall exposure, Single Wall Viewing 

C. RADIATION GEOMETRY AND DATA 

FOCAL FILM DISTANCE OBJECT FILM DISTANCE 

ANGLE OF RADIATION TO 

FILM AND OBJECT 

PENETRAMETER MATERIAL 

CC4119 10/6/2007 12:20 PM 

 

 

 

PENETRAMETER IDENTITY 

NUMBER / LETTER 

INTENSIFYING SCREENS AND FILTERS USED YES NO 

a) Front Thickness Material 

b) Back Thickness Material 

c) Filter Thickness Placement 

D. FILM DATA 

BRAND NAME 

FILM SPEED __________ ASA GRAIN SUPER FINE FINE 

FILM SIZE WIDTH LENGTH 

E. FILM EXPOSURE 

EXPOSURE TIME ci. min _______ ci. sec _______ mA _______ 

NO. OF EXPOSURES LOCATION MARKERS USED YES NO 

SPACING OF LOCATION MARKERS 

IDENTIFICATION METHOD USED 

F. FILM PROCESSING DATA 

DEVELOPING TEMP. DEVELOPING TIME 

STOP BATH USED YES NO IF YES FOR _____________ Seconds 

RINSE USED YES NO IF YES FOR _____________ Seconds 

FIXING TIME Minutes WASHING TIME Minutes 

FILM DENSITY SENSITIVITY

RADIOGRAPHY PROCEDURE 

QUALIFICATION RECORD 

CC4119 

FIGURE 1 Super Imposed (Double Wall Exposure, Double Wall Viewing) 

NOTES : 

PROC. QU. NO. : 

DATE : 

1) Orientation of Location Marker is Clockwise. 

2) Source placed at 90º to Weld. Three exposures 60º apart. 

PAGE 2 OF 2 

FIGURE 2 Double Wall / Contact (Film Side Penetrameter) (Double Wall Exposure, Single Wall Viewing) 

NOTES : 


2) This technique is for Pipe with diameters 3" and above. 

FIGURE 3 Elliptical (Double Wall Exposure, Double Wall Viewing) 

NOTES : 


2) This technique is for Pipe with diameters 2" and below. 

3) Penetrameter can be placed axially or logintudinally. 

4) Angle shall be minimum necessary to separate Weld Images. 

FIGURE 4 Panoramic (Single Wall Exposure, Single Wall Viewing) 

NOTES : 


2) Complete Circumference is radiographed with Single Exposure. 

3) At least three uniformally spaced Penetrameters shall be employed and one shall 

be overlapped. 

I / We certify that the statements in this Record are 

correct and the technique is in accordance with 

ASME sec. V / API - 1104. 

_________________________________ 

TECHNICIAN'S SIGNATURE & LEVEL 

This document has been reviewed by : 

______________________ 

JACOBS 

CC4119 10/6/2007 12:20 PM 

______________________ 

CLIENT

MATERIAL APPROVAL 

RECORD. 

CC4121 

REPORT NO. 

DATE 

CONTRACT NO. 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

UNIT/AREA REFERENCE OF DESCRIPTION DRAWING/(S) NO/(S) 

S. 

No. 

INFORMATION REQUIRED DETAILS REVIEW NOTES 

1. Material 1 Date of Submission 

Description 

2. Manufacturers 2 Date of Approval 

Name 

Address 

Tel. : No. 

3. Suppliers 3 Name of Certifying 

Agency & Address 

Name 

Address 

Tel. : No. 

4. Required in Works 4 Detail of Certificate / 

Sample 

From 

To 

5. Specifications 

IS Codes 

JH&G / other Specs. 

6. Submissions 

Test Certificates 

Samples 

Catalogues 

7. Routine Testing. 

Important Note : 

CC4121 10/6/2007 12:20 PM 

5 Whether Acceptable 

or not acceptable 

Approval of this material shall not absolve the Contractor of the responsibility of any defects that may arise during 

or after construction. Whether the material has been or has not been used in works. 

JACOBS 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

CLIENT APPROVAL 

SIGNATURE 

& DATE 

NAME


N D E RECORD 

SHEET OF CC4206 

Dye Penetrant: Ultrasonic: 

Hardness: Visual : 

Magnetic Particle: Radiography: 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

DATE: 

Use a Separate Form for each Test Class. Enter Test Class Letter in appropriate space below 

to show Test Class being Recorded. Refer to Contract Piping Specification for Test Class 

Requirements. 

Drawing Ref. Joint Nº. MATL Section * Welder’s Stamp Nº. 

Contractor Signature 

Remarks/Actions Operators Name and Authorisation Ref. 

Jacobs and Date Caps 

Client / Other 

* Enter DIA x SCH or THK

Q. C. CHECK SHEET 

CONTRACT NO. 

CC4207 10/6/2007 12:21 PM 

SITE 

PLANT 

(UNDER GOUND PIPING & WRAPPING COATING) SUBCONTRACTOR 

SHEET 1 OF 2 CC4207 CERTIFICATE NO. 

Unit reference or Description 

Drawing No. / Rev. 

Co–ordinates of line 

Sectional co-ordinates of line 

PART -1 Fabrication is correct/ checked ENTER AS 

Sectional NDT as applicable is cleared ' ' Acceptable 

Line Pressure gauge calibration verified ‘×‘ Not Acceptable 

Inspections Sectional Hydro test cleared ‘N/A' Not Applicable 

Installation Subcontractor 

Jacobs 

Approval 

Signature 

& Date 

PART -2 Surface cleaning checked 

Wrapping & Coating Primer application is correct 

Inspections First layer checked 


Jacobs 

2nd layer checked 

‘Holiday’ tester KV verified 

‘Holiday’ test is cleared 

Approval 

Signature 

& Date 

PART -3 Co-ordinate of pipe line checked 

Final Testing & Invert level of trench checked 

Excavation Inspections Sand bed checked 


Jacobs 

Pipe level / elevation checked 

Field weld fit up/ elevation checked 

Field weld NDT checked 

U/G valve installation checked 

A/G valve installation checked 

Final hydro test checked/ cleared 

Approval 

Signature 

& Date 

PART -4 Field joint surface cleaning checked 

Field Joint Field joint wrapping coating checked 

Wrapping, coating Field joint 'Holiday' test checked 

Back filling & final U/G valve chamber constructed 

completion Valve chamber cover installed 


Jacobs 

Back filling completed 

Approval 

Signature 

& Date 

Name 

Name 

Name 

Name

RECORD OF HOLIDAY TEST 

(FOR U/G PIPING) 

SHEET 2 OF 2 CC4207 

UNIT / AREA REFERENCE OR DESCRIPTION: 

DRAWING / (S) NO/ (S): 

1 Name of the Plant 

2 Line No. and Service 

3 Co-ordinates of lines under test 

4 Diameter / s of pipelines involved 

5 Date of Holiday Test 

6 Date when Holiday Test calibrated last 

7 Voltage at which Holiday Test is being conducted 

8 Description of defect observed during test, if any 

9 Results of Re-Holiday Test of repaired areas* 

10 Remarks 

JACOBS 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

CLIENT APPROVAL 

SIGNATURE 

& DATE 

CONTRACT NO. 

DATE 

CC4207 10/6/2007 12:21 PM 

SITE 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

REPORT NO. 

NAME 

* Write ‘√’ If Okay, OR 

‘N/A’ If Not Applicable

CHECKLIST 

CONTRACT No. : 

ELECTRICAL LIGHTING CIRCUITS PROJECT : 

INSTALATION AND TEST 


CC4403 

Cable termination to luminaires Cable gland and shroud luminaire 

Luminaire nameplate details Luminaire mechancial installation 

Luminaire mechanical damage 

Circuit number 

Luminaires in circuit 

Circuit fuse size/MCB rating 

Check list complete 

Lux level check 

INITAL DATE SUBCONTRACTOR 

INTIAL DATE JACOBS 

Insulation resistance value 

Battery / standby emergency luminaires 

allow luminaires to charge for 72 hours 

before Full discharge 

INITAL DATE SUBCONTRACTOR 

INTIAL DATE JACOBS 

Punch list issued 

Punch list cleared 

INITIALLED AS WITNESSED 

Date Jacobs C/O/I* 

REFERENCES: * C = Construction 

= ACCEPTABLE 

N/A = NOT APPLICABLE 

O = Commisioning 

CHECKED BY SUBCONTRACTOR DATE: 

REVIEWED BY JACOBS DATE: 

REVIEWED BY DATE: 


I = Inspection (QC)

CONTRACT No. : 

ELECTRICAL EARTHING PROJECT : 

ITEM IDENTIFICATION No. DESCRIPTION 

CC4409 


The following list of check items is a guide only. It is not to limit the scope of the certification in any way. 

Conduction size and type correct 

Connections acceptable 

Earth rod location correct 

Earth rod size correct 

Earth rod connection correct 

Earth conductor burial depth correct 

Location of equipement taps correct 

Complete Form 

Earth bars correct, connection tight 

Earth installation to equipment per drawing 

List of Applicable Engineering Drawings, Specifications etc,. 

N/A = NOT APPLICABLE = ACCEPTABLE 

CHECKED BY SUBCONTRACTOR DATE: 

REVIEWED BY JACOBS DATE: 

REVIEWED BY DATE: 

Form No. CC4409

ELECTRICAL 

QC CHECK OUT SCHEDULE 

(Socket Outlets and Receptacles) 

SYSTEM/CODE NO: REF. NO: 

CC4414 

PROCESS DATASHEET: DESIGN DATASHEET: 

EQUIPMENT: TAG NO: 

CARRIED OUT AT: DRAWING NO: 

CONTRACT NO: 

CLIENT: 

LOCATION: 


CHECK LIST ITEMS Jacobs C/O/I* Sub 

contractor 

1. Record Number of Sockets in Circuit ____________________ 

2. Record Circuit Fuse Size/MCB Rating __________________ 

3. Check Cable Terminal at Distribution Board 

4. Check Circuit Identification Label Complete 

5. Record Circuit Control Station/Junction Box ______________ 

6. Check Cable Gland and Shroud at Socket Outlet 

7. Check Socket Outlet Pin Polarity, inc. Earth 

8. Insulation Resistance Test, Phase to Phase, Phase to Earth (500 

V Megger min value 10 Megohm) 

9. Check Earth Continuity (max 0.01 ohm) __________________ 

10. Record Deviations from Design Drawings 

REFERENCES: 

THE ABOVE CHECK-OUT WAS COMPLETED TO OUR SATISFACTION: 

CC4414 10/6/2007 12:34 PM 

Client/ 

Others 

* C = Construction 

O = Commissioning 

I = Inspection (QC) 

For Subcontractor For Jacobs For Client/Others 

Signature Date Signature Date Signature Date 

Date

ELECTRICAL 

QC CHECK OUT SCHEDULE 

(General Electrical Installations) 

SYSTEM/CODE NO: REF. NO: 

CC4415 

PROCESS DATASHEET: DESIGN DATASHEET: 

EQUIPMENT: TAG NO: 

CARRIED OUT AT: DRAWING NO: 

CONTRACT NO: 

CLIENT: 

LOCATION: 


CHECK LIST ITEMS Jacobs C/O/I* Sub 

contractor 

1. Cable Tray Routes as per Drawing 

2. Cable Tray Supports Adequate And Secure 

3. Cable Tray Assembled and Secured Correctly 

4. Cable Tray Earthing as per Specification 

5. Cable Tray Earth Continuity Checks Satisfactory 

6. Earth Cables/Bonds Securely Terminated 

7. Cable Securely Banded/Saddled 

8. Cables Securely Banded/Shrouded 

9. Correct Cable Glands Fitted 

10. Junction Boxes and Covers Securely Fitted 

11. Flameproof Equipment Fitted as per Specification 

12. Lighting Fittings Correctly Erected and Secure 

13. Distribution Boards Installed and Connected as per Drawings 

14. Local Control Stations Installed and Connected as per Drawings 

15. All Equipment Clearly Labelled 

16. Cables and Terminations Clearly Identified 

17. Area and Equipment Clear of Debris/Surplus Material 

REFERENCES: 

THE ABOVE CHECK-OUT WAS COMPLETED TO OUR SATISFACTION: 

CC4415 10/6/2007 12:34 PM 

Client/ 

Others 

* C = Construction 

O = Commissioning 

I = Inspection (QC) 

For Subcontractor For Jacobs For Client/Others 

Signature Date Signature Date Signature Date 

Date

ELECTRICAL TEST 

DATA SHEET 

Earth Electrode Resistance 

CC4418 

CONTRACT NO: 

SHEET NO: 

LOCATION: 

CLIENT: 

Column A - Subcontractor to enter measured value of earth electrode resistance, mean of three readings. Test as 

described in the Indian Electricity Rule and other relevant Indian Standards. 

Column B - Subcontractor to enter maximum design value for system under test from one of the following (a) 

Electrical 1 ohm; (b) Lighting 5 ohms; (c) Statis 5 ohms; (d) Combined - lowest value of combination 

DESCRIPTION OF EARTH ELECTRODE A B INITIALS 

REFERENCE LOCATION FUNCTION ohms ohms DATE JACOBS SUB 

CONTRACTOR 

Prepared by COMMENTS: 

Checked by 

Approved by 

Date 

Issue 1 2 3 4 

CC4418 10/6/2007 12:35 PM 

CLIENT

Area Reference or Description: 

Civil Subcontractor 

Jacobs 



PART 1 

QC CHECK SHEET 

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

Initial and date box to designate “ Checked and OK” 

MATERIAL 

Verification of Materials 

Selected As-Dug Material 

Suitable for Re-Use as 

Imported Backfill of Correct 

Grading Moisture Content 

PART 2a 

EXCAVATION 

Signature 

Verification of 

Workmanship 

and Date 

Dewatering if Necessary 

Sheetpiling if Necessary 

Temporary Support to 

Excavation 

Barriers to Excavation 

Formation Level Bearing 

capacity Check 

CC4600 

Part 2 b 

BACKFILL 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

CIVIL SUBCONTRACTOR: 


Workmanship 

Backfill Compaction 

Backfill Layer Thickness


QC CHECK SHEET: FOUNDATIONS 

Centre-Line Co-ordinates 

Elevation 

Drawing 

Found 

Eastings Northings 

HD Bolt 

Locatn’s Size 

and Type OK 

No Rev Ref No Required Actual Required Actual Required Actual Yes/No 


Jacobs 


Signature 

and Date 

CC4603 

Found’n 

Size and 

type OK 

Yes/No 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

SUBCONTRACTOR: 

Ground 

Formation 

OK Remarks 

Initials Date

QC CHECK SHEET: 

Drainage Installation 

Sheet 1 of 1 CC4604 


CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


DRAIN RUNS MANHOLES 

Drain 

Location 

Description 

Type 

e.g. Surface Water, Foul , Chemical 

Diameter 

Material Check 

Invert at start 

From To mm m m 

* If applicable 

Comments : 

Invert at end 

SIGN & DATE SUBCONTRACTOR 

JACOBS 

CLIENT / OTHER 

Bedding and Surround Checked 

Thrust Blocks* checked 

Rodding Eye provision* 

Gulley Connection Provision * 

Manhole Reference 

Manhole Co-ordinate 

Checked 

Manhole Size Checked 

Invert Checked 

Cover Type checked

TEST CERTIFICATE 

UNDERGROUND PIPE 

Sheet ___ of ___ CC4605 


CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


Pipeline Test Details Joint Initals 

Number DIA Material Section Tested Air test or 

Water test 

Test 

Pressure 

& Test 

Duration 

Material 

Check’d 

Ass’ys 

Check’d 

Date Cont’r Jacobs 

CAUTION: This certificate applies ONLY to pipelines in stoneware, concrete, vitrified clayware, cast iron, 

etc. for civil and building works. IT DOES NOT APPLY to firemains, process and offsites 

pipework. 


JACOBS 

CLIENT


QC CHECK SHEET: CONCRETE SUPPLY 

Sheet ___ of ___ CC4606 

Structural 

Component 

Concreting Data 

Drawing Rev Found Ref No Delivered Source & Mix Pump Slump Other Test Extra 

No . Beam 

mix of Delivery Ref or Test Prelim Cubes Tests * 

Column or Grid correct Note No. 

Skip 

Tests * * 

Slab Ref Design 

F,B,C or 

S 

Strength 

Enter , N/A or actual details as appropriate 

* Enter N/A or identify refs. and attach details 


Jacobs 


Signature 

and Date 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


Air 

Temp 

Current 

Protect 

Method 

Remarks Initials Date


PRE- and POST CONCRETE CHECKS 


PRE-CONCRETE 

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT REF 

REV. 


CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


ELEVATION Enter or N/A as appropriate where marked * 

Check: Level * 

- Design 

- Actual 

FORM WORK 

Check: Position ,Line and Level * 

Through Bolts * 

Struts and Bracings * 

Pockets, Holes, etc. * 

Chamfers * 

Tightness * 

Surface Quality * 

Built In Items* 

Construction Joints * 

Water-Bars * 

Clean and Oiled * 

Rubbish Removed * 

Security of Falsework * 

REINFORCEMENT 

Check: Firm and Secure * 

Min Cover OK * 

Correct Diameters/Centres * 

Spacer Materials * 

BS Compliance * 

SIGN & DATE 

Completion of this 

Section gives 

authority to place 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

JACOBS 

CLIENT / Other 

DRAWING No


PRE- and POST CONCRETE CHECKS 


POST-CONCRETE 

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT REF 

REV. 


CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


ELEVATION Enter or N/A as appropriate where marked * 

Check: Surface Levels * 

- Design 

- Actual 

CAST CONCRETE 

(Checks following formwork strip) 

Check: 

Dimensional Check 

Surface Quality * 

Formed faces, Deviation from Line 

Pockets etc. * 

Built In Items Position/Level* 

Blowholes/Honeycombing 

REMEDIAL WORK ( if any ) 

REMEDIAL WORK completed 

SIGN & DATE 

Details: 

SUBCONTRACTOR 

JACOBS 


DRAWING No


STEEL STRUCTURES 

Sheet ___ of ___ CC4608 

Structure Reference or Description: 

Drawing No/Revision: 

PART 1 

ACCEPTANCE OF 

FOUNDATIONS 

OR SUPPORTS 

Civil Subcontractor Approval 

Struct. Contractor Signature 

Jacobs and Date 


Location and Orientation is Correct. See ED.316. 

‘Finish Level’ Elevation is Correct. 

H/D Bolts Locations and Projections are Correct. 

PART 2 All Detail Materials Supplied are Correct. 

Initials 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

STRUCTURAL 

CONTRACTOR: 

Remarks: 

INITIAL INSPECTION STRUCTURE IS CLEARED FOR FINAL ASSEMBLY. Supporting Data is Documented and Copies 

Struct. Contractor Approval 

Jacobs Signature 

Plumbed, Levelled and Aligned Correctly. 

HSFG Bolts Checked to Correct Torque. 

NDE of Welded Connections is Satisfactory. If Req’d 

STRUCTURE IS RELEASED FOR GROUTING. 

and Date 

are Attached Hereto for Items Ticked. 

PART 3 All Ladders are Fixed Enter N/A, ‘By Others’ or Comment as Necessary 

FINAL INSPECTION Flooring/Decking is in Place 

Subcontractor 

Jacobs 


Stairs and Landings are Correct 

Handrailing is Properly Completed 

Safety Gates are in Position 

Grouting has been Completed 

Painting/Galvanising is in Good Order 

H/D Bolts are Properly Tightened 

Fireproofing is Completed to Specification 

STRUCTURE IS COMPLETE 

Signature 

and Date



CLADDING 

Sheet ___ of ___ CC4609 

Structure Reference or Description: 


CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

CLADDING 

CONTRACTOR: 

Checked & OK Checked & OK 

PART 1 Profile/Thickness of External Sheets Coating system/Colour 


Materials 

Profile / Thickness of Internal Lining Sheets Coating system/Colour 

Thermal or Acoustic Insulation Layer 

type/Thickness 

Composite Panel Type/Thickness(If applicable) Coating system/Colour 

Roof Gulleys , Downpipes & Gutters 

Louvre Type ,Blade profile ,Single,Double,Triple Coating system/Colour 

Mastic Seals 

Cladding Contractor Approval Remarks: 


and Date 

PART 2 Checked & OK 


Workmanship 

Condition of As Fixed sheet (free from dents) 

Flashings 

Gutters and Downpipes 

Penetration Flashings 

Cladding Contractor Approval 


Fixings (density and type) 

and Date 

PART 3 DESCRIPTION :~ Rectified 

Yes/No 

Remedial Works 

Building Cladding Final acceptance, All remedials addressed. 

Cladding Contractor 

Signature 

Jacobs 


and Date 

Caps 

SubCon 

Initials 

Jacobs 

Initials 

Client 

Initials

NUMBER: 


C I V I L S 


BUILDINGS MASONRY INSPECTION – WALLS 

DESCRIPTION: 

BUILDING - VERIFY USE OF CORRECT MATERIALS 

1. Approved Panels and/or Material Samples 

2. Materials Certifications 

3. Masonry Units, Colour, Texture, Grade, Size, Defect Tolerances 

4. Masonry Mortar, Cement, Aggregate, Lime, Water 

5. Mortar Cube Tests, if required 

6. Anchors, Ties, Flashing - Type, Size, Shape and Material 

INSPECT MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 

1. Ambient Temperature Above Minimum 

2. Masonry Layout Fits Structural Framing 

3. Embedded Items 

4. Control Joint Type and Location 

5. Caulked Joints 

6. Openings Framed, Anchored, Filled with Mortar 

7. Weep Holes 

8. Anchors, Ties, Joint Reinforcing 

9. Flashing Installation 

10. Foundation Waterproofing or Damp Proofing 

ASCERTAIN WORKMANSHIP 

1. Bond Pattern, Visual Appearance 

2. Mortar Joints, Visual Appearance 

3. Brick Work Plumb and True, all in one plane 

4. Pointing 

5. Cleaning 


JACOBS 


CC4610 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


INITIAL/DATE 

CONTRACTOR JACOBS



BUILDING FINISHES 


Room/Area Reference or Description: 


PART 1 MATERIALS Checked 

& OK 


Materials 

Partitions Type , Material ,Thickness 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

Surface Finish Colour 

Insulation 

Wall Tiling * Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Surface Finish 

Covings 

Wall Coating* Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Plaster/Drywall Surface Finish 

etc Covings 

Wall Finish Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Vinyl / Paint Surface Finish 

etc 

Floor Tiling* Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 


Covings 

Floor Coating* Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Epoxy/ Vinyl Surface Finish 

/ carpet etc Covings 

Ceiling Tiles Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

(or finish) Surface Finish 

* If applicable Ceiling Finish Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Finishes 

Contractor 

Paint etc Surface Finish 

Doors Type , Material ,Thickness Colour 

Glazed Panel 

Seals / intumescent strips 

Door Furniture & Lock s 

Windows Type , Material ,Size Colour 

Seals 

Roof Finish Level / Falls correct 

Materials ,Thicknesses 

Insulation & Vapour Barrier 

Flashings 

FINISHES 

CONTRACTOR: 

OTHER / MISCELLANEOUS Checked 

& OK 

Name in 


Caps 


Signature

PART 2 


Workmanship 


WORKMANSHIP 

ITEM 

Sheet 2 of 2 Partitions Position and Line 

Head and Base Fixing 

Joints & Seals 


Wall Tiling * Adhesive type Thickness 

Line and Surface Level 

Cuts ,Joints & Grout 

Coving fixing 

Wall Coating* Support studs or adhesive 

Plaster/Drywall Line and Surface Level 

etc Thickness / Surface Finish 

Wall Finish Substrate Prepared 

Vinyl / Paint Thickness & No Coats 

etc Surface Finish 

Floor Tiling* Adhesive type Thickness 

Line and Surface Level 

Cuts ,Joints & Grout 

Coving fixing 

Floor Coating* Substrate Prepared 

Epoxy/ Vinyl Thickness & No Coats 

/ carpet etc Surface Finish 

Ceiling Tiles Fixing of Support System 

Level and line 

Ceiling Finish Substrate Prepared 

Thickness & No Coats 


Doors Fit and Uniformity of gaps 

Seals & intscnt strip fixing 

Hardware & Lock operation 

Coating finish 

Lock Suiting / Key Group 

Windows Operation & Fit & Gaps 

Seal fixing 

Hardware & Lock operation 

Coating finish 

Roof Finish Felt laps Uniform & sealed 

Flashing installation & laps 

Aggregate distribution 

Suface Finish 

Solar Reflective Coating 

Building Finishes Final acceptance, All remedials addressed. 

Checked 

& OK 

List of Remedials , If any 

Finishes Contractor 

Jacobs 


Signature 

and Date 

Name in 

Caps 

Remedials OK (initials) 

SubCon Jacobs Client



ROADS AND LANDSCAPING 

Sheet 1 of 2 CC 4612 

Room/Area Reference or Description: 


PART 1 MATERIALS Checked 

& OK 


Materials 

Road Subbase Stone Subbase Grading 

Road Base 

Couse 

Road wearing 

Course 

Thickness 

Level 

Base Course Material Check 

Thickness 

Level 

Asphalt* 

Concrete* 

Thickness 

Joints 

Kerbs Type 

Final Level 

Surface Treatment 

Drop kerb Location 

Line and Level 

Block Paving* Edge Block setting 

Sand Bedding thickness & level 

Cuts and Joints 

Final Level 

Topsoil* Quality 

Thickness 

Level 

Grassed Areas Stone picking 

* If applicable Seed specification and spreading 

Finishes 

Contractor 

Turf Specification and thickness 

Planted Areas Plant Types Specification and Location 

Street 

Furniture 

Staking 

Streetlights Type , Location 

Assoc’d ductwork size , position ,level 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 


OTHER / MISCELLANEOUS Checked 

& OK 

Crash Barriers, Lifting Barrier, Bollards Miscellaneous Furniture Bins, Seats etc 

Name in 


Capitals 

Client /Other 

Signature

PART 2 


Workmanship 


WORKMANSHIP 

ITEM 

Road Subbase Soft Spot 

Removal/Replacement 

Road Base 

Course 

Road wearing 

Course 

Compaction in Layers 

Compaction in Layers 

Placement Temperature* 

(bitumen) 


Aggregate distribution 

bitumen , brushed finish for 

concrete. 

Compaction 

Placement Temperature* 

Kerbs Final line / jointing 

Check for loose kerbs 

Chips or damage 

Block Paving* Final Level ,lips and ledges 

Check for loose kerbs 

Chips or damage 

Final silver sanding 

Topsoil Free from stones 

Raked 

Grassed Areas Final Seed Density 

Fertiliser Treatment 

Turf Condition ,joints ,level 

Watering Maintenance 

Planted Areas Correct Planting regime 

Street 

Furniture 

Fertiliser Treatment 

Watering Maintenance 

Weeding 

Streetlights base concrete 

Crash Barriers Alignment 

Bollards position / plumb 

Barrier Operation 

Roads and Landscaping Final acceptance, All remedials addressed. 

Check 

& OK 

List of Remedials , If any 

Finishes Contractor 

Signature 

Name in 

Jacobs 


and Date 

Capitals 

Remedials OK (initials) 

Subcontractor Jacobs Client

NUMBER: 

DESCRIPTION: 

CIVIL’S 


(Buildings Waterproofing and Damp Inspection) 

VERIFY USE OF CORRECT MATERIALS 

1. Bitumen Roofing Felt 

2. Tar or Asphalt Damp Proofing 

3. Mastic Asphalt 

4. Hot Application Asphalt 

5. Bituminous Adhesives 

6. Bituminous Roofing 

7. Polythene Sheet 

INSPECTION APPLICATION OF DAMP PROOFING/WATERPROOFING 

1. Surface Preparation for Cleanliness, Smoothness, Dryness 

2. Ambient Temperatures above a minimum of ºC 

3. Material Temperatures 

4. Prime Coat 

5. Coats, Laps and Thickness 

6. Waterproofing Details at Flashing or Wall Penetrations 

7. Waterproofing Membrane Type, Application, Reinforcing Strips 

8. Waterproofing Membrane Protection Against Backfill 

9. Waterproofing Reinforcing Plies where required 

ASCERTAIN WORKMANSHIP 

1. Damp Proof Coating Free of Breaks 

2. Waterproof Coating Free of Wrinkles and Buckles 

CC4613 

CC4613 10/6/2007 12:36 PM 

CONTRACT NO: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

INSTALLATION 


INITIAL/DATE 

SUBCONTRACTOR JACOBS 

CHECKED BY: _____________________________________ (SUBCONTRACTOR) DATE: _____________________ 

REVIEWED BY: _____________________________________ (JACOBS / CLIENT) DATE: ______________________

BACK UP SHEET : STRUCTURAL WORK 

FABRICATION AND ERECTION – STRUCTURAL STEEL 

CONTRACT NO. : CLIENT : PLANT : 

SITE : STRUCTURAL SUBCONTRACTOR : 

CC4614 10/6/2007 12:37 PM 

CC4614 

PAGE 1 OF 1 

STRUCTURE REFERENCE 

OR DESCRIPTION 

DRAWING NO. / REVISION 

Notes : ' √ ' - For Completed Activities ' N/A ' - Wherever Not Applicable ' * ' - Strike off whichever is not applicable 

FABRICATION ERECTION 

Sr. Nomenclature as Material Dimensional Shop Shop Cleaning Erection Temp. * Alignment Field Bolt Removal Completion Date & Initials 

No. per Drawing Drawn Clearance / Fit up Welding and Fit up Supports and Welding Tightening of Temp. * of Erection 

Layout 

Shop 

/ Bracing Leveling 

Supports 

Subc Jacobs 

Coat 

ontra 

ctor 

DATE : 

IMPORTANT NOTE : This Backup sheet is to be / not to be used at the discretion of the Site Manager as required according to Site Locations.

NOTICE OF PERMIT TO WORK 

SYSTEM 

CC4700 

GENERAL 

CONTRACT NO: 

NOTICE NO: 

DATE: 

THIS NOTICE IS TO ADVISE YOU THAT A PERMIT-TO-WORK SYSTEM FOR THIS 

SITE IS IN OPERATION. STRICT ADHERENCE TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 

PERMIT-TO-WORK SYSTEM IS ESSENTIAL TO THE MANAGEMENT OF SITE 

SAFETY. ANY INFRINGEMENT OF THE REGULATIONS RENDERS THE OFFENDER 

LIABLE TO INSTANT DISMISSAL FROM SITE. 

SPECIFIC 

THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS WILL BE ENERGISED AND NO WORK IS TO BE CARRIED OUT ON 

THEM WITHOUT A VALID CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE. EFECTIVE FROM: 

DATE TIME 

THE FOLLOWING AREAS WILL REQUIRE A VALID CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE BEFORE ENTRY 

INTO THE AREA/BEFORE WORK IS COMMENCED IN THE AREA. EFFECTIVE FROM: 

DATE TIME 

SIGNED: _____________________________________ (Site Manager/Senior Commissioning Engineer) 

DISTRIBUTION: 

CONSTRUCTION/COMMISSIONING 

CLIENT 

SUBCONTRACTOR: ___________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________ 

___________________________________________________ 

I ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS NOTICE: 

SIGNED:____________________ SUBCONTRACTOR: ______________ DATE: ________________ 

CC4700 10/6/2007 12:37 PM

EXCAVATION PERMIT 

An Excavation Permit is required for all excavations (including 

all forms of piling) 

CC4701 

CONTRACT NO: 

PERMIT NO: 

SITE: 

Permit Request should be submitted 7 days (minimum) before estimated start date, 

except in the case of emergencies. 

ALL WORK UNDER THIS PERMIT REQUIRES A VALID CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE 

REQUESTED BY DATE 

SUBCONTRACTOR AREA/LOCATION 

Description of Work: 

Equipment to be Used: 

Estimated Start Date: Estimated Finish Date: 

Record of Buried Services REMARKS 

Date: __________________________ 

Signature: ______________________ 

Electrical REMARKS 

Date: __________________________ 

Signature: ______________________ 

CHECK SCHEDULE 

Mechanical Isolation Required: Yes No 

Electrical Isolation Required: Yes No 

Safety REMARKS - ADDITIONAL PRECAUTIONS 

Date: __________________________ 

Signature: ______________________ 

Overhead Services REMARKS 

Date: __________________________ 

Signature: ______________________ 

Mechanical Isolation Required: Yes No 

Electrical Isolation Required: Yes No 

CC4701 10/6/2007 12:38 PM

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT 

To be revalidated by gas test as specified below CC4702 

CONTRACT NO: 

PERMIT NO: 

SITE: 






Estimated Start Date: Estimated Finish Date: 

Contaminants Identified As: 

CHECK SCHEDULE 

(State Actual Chemical and, where necessary, the LEL or TLV) 

Emptied/Flushed/Purged/Cleaned: Yes No N/A 

Remarks: 

Positive Isolation in Place: Yes No N/A 

Remarks: 

Naturally Ventilated: Yes No N/A 

Remarks: 

Continuous Gas Monitor at Work Face: Yes No N/A 

Remarks: 

FREQUENCY OF REVALIDATION 

A Gas Test is required before commencement of work each day and at the following intervals: 

___________________________________________ 

* ENTRY NOT PERMITTED BELOW 20% OR ABOVE 20.8% OXYGEN. 

Signed: ________________________________________________________________________ 

AUTHORISED PERSON 

CC4702 10/6/2007 12:38 PM

ELECTRICAL ISOLATION PERMIT 

To be revalidated before commencement of work each day 

CC4703 

CONTRACT NO: 

PERMIT NO: 

SITE: 





Equipment to be Isolated: 

PRECAUTIONS AND AUTHORISATION 

(State Plant Item Numbers, where possible) 

Isolation: (Identify isolations and state whether or not isolators have been padlocked off, Key No ........................, 

fuses drawn, etc.) 

Warning Notices and Access Control: (State where Caution/Danger Notices have been posted and, if appropriate, 

how work areas have been fenced off) 

Prove Apparatus Dead: (State what tests have been made, where and with what instruments) 

Earthing: (State where apparatus has been earthed and, for Testing, which earths may be removed) 

Other Precautions: (Specify if required for special circumstances) 

I declare that the above isolations have been made and made known to the competent person in charge of the work. I consider that 

the equipment specified is safe to work on/test. 

Signature 

Signature 

Signature 

ACCEPTANCE AND RECEIPT 

AUTHORISED PERSON TIME (Hrs) DATE 

I acknowledge receipt of this permit and understand the isolations described above. I will return this permit to the Authorised Person 

for revalidation and when the work/test is complete. 

Signature 

CLEARANCE OF WORK 

COMPETENT PERSON TIME (Hrs) DATE 

I declare that the work/test detailed has been completed/stopped and men/gear withdrawn. 

Signature 

CANCELLATION 


I declare this permit cancelled. The isolations specified have been removed/retained and all necessary tests carried out for return to 

service. 

Signature 


CC4703 10/6/2007 12:38 PM

ELECTRICAL ENERGISATION PERMIT 

Valid Day of Issue Only 

CC4704 

CONTRACT NO: 

PERMIT NO: 

SITE: 





Equipment to be Energised: 

PRECAUTIONS AND AUTHORISATION 

(State Plant Item Numbers, where possible) 

Isolation: (Identify isolations and state whether or not isolators have been padlocked off for other Apparatus, Key No 

........................, fuses drawn, rubber mats in place at MCC, etc.) 

Warning Notices and Access Control: (State where Caution/Danger Notices have been posted and, if appropriate, 

how work areas have been fenced off) 

Prove Apparatus Tested or Attach Certificate of Test of Electrical Installation: (State what tests have been made, 

where and with what instruments) 

Communications: (Authorised Personnel in control room and equipment area notified, radios to be used, etc.) 

Other Permits to be Withdrawn: (Identify by Permit No..) 

Other Precautions: (Specify if required for special circumstances) 

I declare that the above isolations have been made and made known to the competent person in charge of the work. I consider that 

the equipment specified is safe to ENERGISE. 

Signature 

ACCEPTANCE AND RECEIPT 


I acknowledge receipt of this permit and understand the isolations described above. Neither I, nor the man under my control, will 

work on/test any other electrically dangerous apparantus. I will return this permit to the Authorised Person when the work/test has 

been completed. 

Signature 

CLEARANCE OF WORK 


I declare that the work/test detailed has been completed/stopped and men/gear withdrawn. 

This Apparatus is to remain ENERGISED. Yes No 

Signature 

CANCELLATION 


I declare this permit cancelled. 

The equipment specified have been DE-ENERGISED AND ISOLATED. Yes No 

Signature 


CC4704 10/6/2007 12:39 PM

HOT WORK PERMIT 

Valid Day of Issue Only 

CC4705 

CONTRACT NO: 

PERMIT NO: 

SITE: 






GAS TEST TAKEN BY: 

FOR INFORMATION 

NAME DATE TIME 

Continuous Gas Monitoring to be carried out: Yes No 

Safety Personnel to be in attendance at all times Yes No 

Other: 

_______________________________________________________________________________ 

Fire Extinguisher to be at Hand. TYPE: 

Fire Blankets to be at Hand. 

Drains in Area to be Covered and Sanded. 

CONDITIONS OF USE (These must be observed) 

Area Under/Around Work to be Sheeted Out to Contain Sparks. 

Sheet Out Scaffold Platforms. 

Keep Work Wet/Keep Bit Cool. 

For Shot blasting a) Wear Protective Clothing 

110V Electrical Equipment Only 

b) Place Warning Signs 

c) Contain Shot 

d) Use Wet Head Only 

Oxy/Acetylene Cylinders to be Upright and Secure (Flashback Arresters 

must be Fitted and Bottle Keys Attached) 

Other Conditions to be Observed: 

Required Not Required 

Signed: ______________________________________________ Date: _________________ 

CC4705 10/6/2007 12:39 PM

SITE CONCESSION REQUEST 

Jacobs PO No/Sub Contract No: CONTRACT WORKS: 

DESCRIPTION OF CONCESSION AND PROPOSED ALTERNATIVE: 

CC4709 

CONTRACT No: 

SITE: 

PLANT: 

SCR No: 

DATE 


ORIGINATOR'S SIGNATURE: 

(Subcontractor's Site Manager) 

REQUEST VERIFIED: 

(Jacobs Site Manager) 

JUSTIFICATION FOR PROPOSED CONCESSION: FACTORS AFFECTED 

Commercial/Contractual 

Safety/Fitness 

Function 

Code Compliance 

CORRECTIVE ACTION PROPOSED TO PRECLUDE RECURRENCE: Performance 

Integrity/Reliability 

Interchangeability 

Interim Life 

COMMERCIAL/CONTRACTUAL COMMENTS/INSTRUCTIONS BY SUBCONTRACTOR’S ENGINEER: 

CONDITIONS/LIMITATIONS OF APPROVAL OR 

REASONS FOR REJECTION 

APPROVAL SIGNATURE DATE 

YES NO 

YES NO 

YES NO 

JACOBS SITE MANAGER 

JACOBS DESIGN DEPT. 

JACOBS PROJECTS 

MANAGER 

THIS SCR IS INVALID UNLESS/UNTIL ALL THREE APPROVALS ARE SIGNED 'YES' 

* PROCEED/ DO NOT PROCEED WITH CONCESSION WITHIN CONDITIONS STATED ABOVE 

(* Delete as appropriate) 

Signature: ....................................................................................................... Date: ........................ 

JACOBS SITE MANAGER 

CC4709 10/6/2007 12:40 PM

RISK ASSESSMENT RECORD 

CC4710 

CONTRACT NO: 

CC4710 10/6/2007 12:40 PM 

SITE: 

REPORT NO: 


Assessor: ________________________________________________________ Date: ________________________________ 

* Key to Result: 

ACTIVITY HAZARD DEGREE OF RISK ACTION ACTION BY RESULT * 

HIGH MED LOW 

T = Trivial Risk A = Adequately Controlled N = Not adequately Controlled U = Unable to Decide Fur = Further Information Required C = Covered by Existing Procedures

JACOBS 

STANDARD SPECIFICATION 

FOR 

FIELD HSE ACTIVITIES 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-HSC-02-0007-A4 


By 

A 09.10.06 56 Issued for Clients 

approval 

B 08.11.06 56 Updated incorporating 

Client’s comments. 

Issued for final approval 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 56 

Approved 

By 

PV VR SGR 

PV VR SGR

JACOBS 

18-3188-99-00-HSC-01-0007-A4 SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD HPCL, Mumbai Refinery 

Rev. B HSE ACTIVITIES LOBS Quality Up gradation 

Project 

Page 2 of 56 08.11.06 

SECTION DESCRIPTION 

NO. 

0.0 DEFINITION 

1.0 SAFETY PHILOSOPHY 

2.0 OBJECTIVES 

3.0 PROJECT SAFETY MANAGEMENT 

4.0 ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES 

5.0 SITE SAFETY ORGANISATION 

6.0 PROACTIVE SAFETY MONITORING 


7.0 COMMUNICATION AND COOPERATION 

8.0 SAFETY PROMOTIONAL ACTIVITIES 

9.0 WELFARE FACILITIES 

10.0 FIRST- AID AND HOSPITALS 

11.0 INCIDENT / ACCIDENT REPORTING 

12.0 SITE EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 

13.0 LOCAL LAWS, STATUTORY REGULATIONS 

14.0 LABOUR LAWS AND RULES 

15.0 CHILD WELFARE 

16.0 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR 

17.0 SITE SUPERVISION 

18.0 TRAINING AND COMPETENCE OF EMPLOYEES 

19.0 RISK ASSESSMENTS 

20.0 METHOD STATEMENTS 

21.0 SAFE PLAN OF ACTION (SPA) 

22.0 SAFETY OBSERVATION REPORT (SOR) 

23.0 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM 

24.0 SITE SAFETY COMMITTEE 

25.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) AND FACILITIES 

5.6 HSC - Standard specification for field HSE activities HPCL 10/06/2007 10:43 AM

JACOBS 

HPCL, Mumbai Refinery SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD 18-3188-99-00-HSC-01-0007-A4 


Project 

HSE ACTIVITIES Rev. B 

08.11.06 Page 3 of 56 

26.0 SANITATION AND HYGIENE MEASURES 

27.0 RADIOGRAPHY 

28.0 WARNING SIGNS, BARRICADES AND SIGNALS 

29.0 NOISE 

30.0 SUBSTANCES (CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH 

REGULATIONS) 

31.0 HOUSEKEEPING 

32.0 REMOVAL OF WASTE FROM CONSTRUCTION SITES 

33.0 FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL 

34.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 

35.0 SITE ACCESS 

36.0 SITE SECURITY PROCEDURES 

37.0 SAFETY INSPECTIONS 

38.0 AUDIT AND MONITORING 

39.0 SAFETY AWARDS AND SAFETY COMPETITIONS 

40.0 HSE ASSURANCE PLAN 

41.0 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT & VEHICLES 

42.0 VEHICULAR AND TRAFFIC SAFETY 

43.0 HAZARD WARNING 

44.0 EXCAVATIONS 

45.0 BLASTING AND DEMOLITION 

46.0 SCAFFOLDS 

47.0 CONSTRUCTION GOODS HOISTS 

48.0 LADDERS AND STAIRCASES 

49.0 WORK PLATFORMS 

50.0 ELECTRICITY 

51.0 WELDING SETS 

52.0 COMPRESSED GASES & COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS 

53.0 COMPRESSED AIR 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 4 of 56 08.11.06 

54.0 WELDING & CUTTING 

55.0 LIFTING OPERATIONS 

56.0 CRANE AND RIGGING 

57.0 MANUAL HANDLING 

58.0 ABRASIVE WHEELS 

59.0 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES 

60.0 CONTRACTORS TOOLS & EQUIPMENT’S 

61.0 SUSPENSION OF WORK 

62.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 

63.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 


A. SITE SAFETY ORGANISATION CHART 

B. CHECKLIST CUM SAFETY AUDIT REPORT 

C. INCIDENT REPORT – I &II 

D. HSE ASSURANCE PLAN 

E. HSE TRAINING ACTIVITIES 

F. MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT 

G. MONTHLY SAFETY STATISTICS 

H. INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT 

I. LEGAL OBLIGATION / REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 5 of 56 


0.1 “OWNER” : Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, Mumbai 

0.2 “CONSULTANT” : Jacobs Engineering India Private Limited. 

0.3 “CONTRACTOR” : Person, Firm or Corporation to whom the work will be awarded 

by the Owner. 

0.4 “ENGINEER’ : Authorized engineer of the Owner/Consultant in charge of the 

job. 

1.0 SAFETY PHILOSOPHY 

The Site Safety Plan and HSE Procedures set forth in this manual are the minimum acceptable 

standards for the project execution. The contractors are required to implement these standards and 

any additional requirements as per Local Laws and statutory requirements and best practices in 

industry whichever are higher. Owner and consultant may issue further changing requirements from 

time to time as the work progresses to fit changing site conditions, which will be binding on the 

contractor. 

The owner is fully committed for providing safe and healthy working conditions for all employees 

working on the project and our goal is zero accidents in our operation. Safety is an overriding value 

that the operation shall be conducted in such a manner that reasonably practicable measures are 

taken to protect people not only in our employment but also others who may be effected by our 

activities. 

We believe that accidents are caused and eliminating the causes of accident can prevent them. 

Safety is the responsibility of every employee but line management is ultimately responsible for the 

implementation of safety requirements. 

Everyone involved must be committed to achieving high standard of HSE Performance with proactive 

approach at all levels in the organization with excellent teamwork. 

All activities shall be in compliance with relevant local laws, statutory requirements, codes and 

practices pertaining to health & safety of employees 

Contractors or other third parties in the refinery shall abide by 

• The safety regulation of the refinery as mentioned in the fire & safety regulations (Latest revision) 

• All requirements under the Factory Act 1948 and the rules framed there under in the Maharastra 

Factory Rule 1963 including all the amendments thereto. 

• All requirements of Worker Compensation Act & ESIS Act including all amendments thereto. 

• Applicable Environment Regulation in force and also the systems and procedures in the refinery 

related to environment. 

All personnel should share a sense of empowerment on safety matters with an effective 

communication system to facilitate the flow of HSE information both up and down through the 

organization. 

2.0. OBJECTIVES 

2.1 General: 

Everyone working on the Project shall be committed to a policy of ensuring that the highest standards 

of Health, Safety and Welfare, which are reasonably practicable, are adopted. To this end, the 

following objectives have been set for the Project: 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 6 of 56 08.11.06 

• Successfully implement the Safety Policy. 

• Unsafe acts and conditions must be identified and corrected, with action aimed to prevent 

recurrences. 

• Achieve Safe and Healthy Workplace. 

• The Safety & Health of all employees must receive prime consideration throughout all phases of 

work. 

• Ensure compliance with all applicable laws, statutory requirements, codes of practices and 

standards set forth by Owner. 

• In essence ‘NO SAFETY NO WORK’. 

2.2 Targets 

The following Safety targets apply to the Project: 

• Lost Time Injuries - Zero 

• Reportable Injuries - Zero 

• Occupational Illness - Zero 

• Environmental Incidents - Zero 

2.3 Contractor should have a written statement of policy in respect of safety and health of workers, copy of 

the policy should be signed by an authorized signatory. 

• Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive SAFETY ASSURANCE PLAN in the form of standard 

documents for implementation and monitoring of HSE requirements. This shall be submitted to 

CONSULTANT / Owner for approval and implementation. 

• Contractor shall appoint safety personnel as given below for every work shift: 

• Contractor will not carry any work without having supervisor at site. If it is required to work 

simultaneously in more than one location under the same contract, one supervisor must be put in 

each of the locations. If a supervisor has to leave his site for any reason, he must stop his activities 

for that period of time. 

• For Hot Work permit the supervisor must have valid Training Certificate from Refinery Safety Dept. 

• Contractor must provide at least one full time safety supervisor when the contractor has engaged 

manpower in excess 50 in contract activities in the refinery. If the manpower is less than 50, the on 

site safety co-ordination responsibility shall be assumed by any one of the contractor’s other 

supervisory staff. In both the cases the contractor must specify in writing the name of such person 

to the engineer in charge and manager safety. 

• The contractors whose safety records are not satisfactory will be viewed seriously and necessary 

action (viz. cancellation of registrations/contracts) shall be taken against him. 

Safety Observer: At all times minimum one observer for workers not exceeding 100 in 

numbers. That means contractors are expected to deploy additional safety 

observers when number of workers crosses beyond 100 and thereon. 

Safety Supervisor: In addition to above, contractor shall depute one Safety Supervisor for every 

250 workers. 

Safety Officer: In addition to above, one safety officer for every 1000 workers. 

Safety Manager: Minimum of one Safety Manager at all times required to be at site. 

• Working hours per shift should not exceed 12 hours per day. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 7 of 56 

2.4 Qualifications of Safety officer should not be less than as prescribed in local regulations. 

2.5 Contractor shall arrange for initial Site orientation/ induction of all Workmen/ Supervising personnel on 

‘Safety practices’ before commencing work at site. This shall include brief about project site, safety 

policy, site safety rules and site facilities. 

2.6 Contractor shall conduct toolbox talks for all workers each week about ongoing work activities and 

precautions to be taken. 

Toolbox Talks 

• Contractors shall conduct toolbox talks for all employees and workers prior to start of the job every 

day/ shift. 

• Topics should include current issues and precautions to be taken for works in progress. 

Contractor shall maintain records of Toolbox Talks and shall forward the same to Consultant on regular 

basis. 

2.7 Contractor shall ensure participation of his site in-charge and safety officer in the safety meetings 

arranged at intervals decided by consultant / owner. 

2.8 Contractor shall submit Health & Safety report on monthly basis to Jacobs H&G in the formats given 

with this document. 

2.9 The safety conditions specified and recommended here are being issued for guidance of the 

contractor. It is the primary responsibility of the contractor to ensure that jobs are executed in 

absolutely safe manner. These, however, do not absolve the contractor from any obligations or 

liabilities he might incur or transfer such obligations or liabilities to his subcontractors or agent or to the 

Owner/ Consultant. 

2.10 These rules do not exempt the contractor from statutory duties on health and safety but are intended 

to assist in attending a high standard of compliance with those duties in order to provide a safe and 

healthy working environment. 

2.11 The contractor should obtain a “Work Permit” from Engineer-in-charge before starting any work in 

factory premises. These permits are issued to prevent contractors working in unauthorized area, and 

will be valid for specific area and for limited period. 

2.12 The contractor shall not store construction material, consumable, tools and tackles etc. at any place 

other than area allocated by the Engineer-in-charge. 

2.13 The contractor shall be responsible and shall indemnify the owner, against all injuries to persons both 

his own workmen and others. 

2.14 The contractor should take all precautions for safeguarding existing structures, equipment and / or 

parts of the owner’s property during construction, erection and commissioning. The contractor shall 

repair / reinstate all such damages. 

3.0 PROJECT SAFETY MANAGEMENT 

3.1 Strategies: 

The following are some of the important strategies, which must be in place to accomplish the HSE 

Plan. 

3.1.1 Construction: 

- The contractors should prepare Method statements and Risk Analysis in advance, for the 

respective activity. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 8 of 56 08.11.06 

- Monitor compliance with HSE Plan. 

- Conduct Safety Audits. 

3.1.2 Resource Plan 

3.1.3 People 

- Adequate Resource Planning for quantifying the safety materials / equipments relative to the 

quantum of work. 

- Plan the execution of the fieldwork to avoid conflict between activities. 

- Ensure the Safety Compatibility of adjacent tasks. 

- Reduce congestion at worksite areas. 

- Use appropriate lay down areas. 

The contractor shall ensure training of all staff and workers, employ competent staff and workers and 

ensure the physical fitness of all. 

4.0 ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES 

Safety is an integral part of normal activities performed by contractor personnel. Members of 

contractor’s team are accountable for complete fulfillment of responsibilities in his area of work. 

Project team shall support this HSE Plan and hold their members of team accountable for the proper 

execution of HSE activities. 

4.1 Contractor Employees 

It is the DUTY of every contractor’s employee to: 

− Take reasonable care for the health and safety of himself and other persons who may be affected 

by his acts or omissions at work. 

− Co-operate with his management or others to enable compliance with statutory requirements. 

− Report to their immediate supervisor hazardous situations and defects found in premises, plant 

and equipment. 

− Avoid improvisation, which might entail risk. 

− Consider and suggest means of eliminating hazards. 

− Co-operate in maintaining a safe and healthy working environment. 

− Attend safety-training classes as and when organized. 

− Attend safety meetings if invited. 

− Participate in safety campaigns when organized. 

− Never intentionally or recklessly interfere with, or misuse, anything provided in the interests of 

health, safety or welfare. 

− Draw to the attention of management / supervision improvements to health and safety which 

appear to be necessary or advisable. 

− Report accident/ near misses to his/her supervisor immediately. 

− Demonstrate leadership of, and commitment to HSE, setting a personal example at all times. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 9 of 56 

4.2 Contractor’s Construction Manager 

Contractor’s Construction Manager shall provide his workers with a safe and healthy working 

environment. He shall be responsible to promote safety and health consciousness among all his 

workers at all times. He is responsible to ensure that the HSE Plan duly approved by consultant / 

owner is implemented in its entirety and constantly monitored. 

He shall: 

Familiarize himself and comply with all government, consultant and owner’s HSE procedures and 

practices. 

Provide adequate safe construction equipment, tools suitable for the work and personal protective 

equipment required for the workmen. 

Ensure the construction work is being executed in the safest manner based on approved Method 

Statement. 

Inspect and maintain the entire work area in safe and healthy condition. Instruct his supervisors to 

take immediate corrective actions if he detects discrepancies. 

4.3 Contractor’s Safety Engineer / Safety Officers 

He shall: 

Assist contractor’s Construction Manager and coordinate with consultant’s / Owner’s Safety Officer in 

implementing HSE procedure within their respective work groups. 

Familiarize them with all Government; consultant and owner’s safety and health regulations, including 

reporting and work permit procedures. 

Inspect the construction area frequently to examine appropriate corrective actions and prepare reports 

to their Construction Manager. 

Review SPA prepared by line supervisors. 

Co-ordinate with supervisors and foremen, participate in safety meetings and lead daily safety walks of 

the site. 

Participate in toolbox talks, assist in accident investigation and conduct safety-training classes for the 

workmen and suggest safety promotional activities. 

4.4 Contractor’s Supervisory Personnel 

It is the responsibility of the contractor’s supervisors / foremen to ensure that their workers strictly 

adhere to safety procedures in their specific works and work areas. They shall correct any unsafe acts 

and/or conditions promptly when these are recognized during the work. 

5.0 SITE SAFETY ORGANISATION 

See Attachment - A “Site Safety Organization Chart” 

6.0 PRO-ACTIVE SAFETY MONITORING 

A Pro-active Safety Monitoring Programme shall be used on the project. 

The following are some of the elements of such programme 

- Safety Observation Reports 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 10 of 56 08.11.06 

- Safety Inspection / Safety Audits (Attachment – B) 

- Safe Plan of Action 

- Method Statements 

Suitable formats will be provided for the purpose. 

7.0 COMMUNICATION AND CO-OPERATION 

Owner / consultant recognize the importance of ensuring that the HSE message is cascaded 

throughout all levels of workforce. 

To facilitate communication the following elements will be used during the construction phase. 

- All contractors will attend weekly safety meeting with consultant’s Site management. At these 

meetings previous week Safety performance would be analyzed and the activities planned for 

the forthcoming week would be reviewed. 

- Contractors Safety personnel will attend project safety committee meeting; typically these shall 

be held every week or as decided by Site Manager. The purpose of this meeting is to discuss 

the alternative safety strategies to be introduced on the project. 

8.0 SAFETY PROMOTIONAL ACTIVITIES 

In order to develop safety consciousness amongst the employees, the contractor site management 

shall organize suitable Safety campaigns, Safety competitions and Safety rewards. 

9.0 WELFARE FACILITIES 

The owner may provide certain facilities. However the contractors shall provide required number of 

toilet for male and female, Crèche for worker children, washing facilities and rest shelters in suitable 

locations as per statutory regulations. Drinking water to be arranged by contractor. And if necessary 

there should be deployment of portable toilets. There shall be no sheds within the plant area, other 

area shelters after F&S clearance. 

10.0 FIRST – AID AND HOSPITALS 

The owner at project site may provide a first-aid center for the treatment of minor injuries and illness. 

However all major injuries and sickness cases shall be referred to the Hospitals and contractor shall 

make his own arrangement for such treatment as required. 

The contractor must have arrangement for rendering necessary first-aid in case of accidental injuries. 

Work site must be provided first-aid-box containing items as specified in the Building & other 

Construction Workers’ (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service Rules, 1998) and keep 

the same in a conspicuous place where it is easily accessible. 

The contractor shall make arrangements for the emergency care and treatment of all contractor’s 

employees at the nearest (or reasonably nearby) hospital. 

11.0 INCIDENT / ACCIDENT REPORTING 

• Report to HPCL supervisor on the job, any injury sustained by any of his employees or any near miss 

or any hazardous / dangerous incident at his worksite within the refinery premises. Hiding any accident 

or near miss would be viewed as serious misconduct. 

• Arrange to provide First-Aid immediately to injured employee. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 11 of 56 

• Keep and maintain proper records of all such incidents in respect of his personal / work site. 

• Submit to engineer in chare a first information report within 4 hrs of incident. 

• Arrange to immediately investigate the incident and furnish within 24 hrs a written investigation report 

to refinery safety dept. 

Any accident that appears to be serious or which entails a person reporting to hospital or leaving site 

for treatment shall be reported immediately to consultant / owner’s representative in the format 

attached (Attachment C). 

Contractor shall ensure that any accident that occurs is fully investigated to find root cause and 

preventive measures are adopted to prevent its reoccurrence. Consultant shall have a right to conduct 

independent inquiry of the accident. 

12.0 SITE EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 

A detailed site emergency procedure shall be worked out and communicated to all employees at site. 

Necessary arrangements shall be made to deal with such emergency situations. An emergency 

response team will be formed to tackle such situations. 

13.0 LOCAL LAWS, STATUTORY REGULATIONS 

The contractor shall comply with all local laws and statutory rules particularly the provisions under 

Contract Labour (Abolition and Regulation) Act, Building and other Construction Workers (Regulation 

of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 1996 and Building and other construction workers 

(Regulation and Conditions of Service) Rules 1998. A list of important laws applicable to the 

contractor is enclosed. See Attachment I. 

14.0 LABOUR LAWS AND RULES / WELFARE 

The contractor shall maintain relevant records and fulfill all conditions and requirements in accordance 

with following: 

The contractor shall not pay less than what is provided under law to any persons. 

- Contractors will ensure that a qualified (minimum MBBS) medical practitioner registered with 

state medical council, medically examined his workers including supervisors who would be 

deployed on the job. Only medically sound persons as certified by the medical practitioner 

would be allowed on the job. 

- Workmen deployed on high risk job like working in confined space, working at height, working 

under water etc must also be certified as medically fit for such jobs. 

- The medical certificate older than a year will not be accepted. 

- Health assurance certificated submitted by the contractor would be periodically checked at 

random by the refinery Doctor. 

15.0 CHILD WELFARE 

The contractor at his own cost provides ‘Crèche’ facility at site in case more than fifty female workers 

are employed. Such facility shall be in accordance with Bldg. & Other Construction Workers’ 

(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Services) Act, 1996. 

No person below the age of 18 (eighteen) years or more than 58 years will be employed for work in the 

refinery. 

16.0 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR 

• Health, Safety and Environment policy 

• A detailed Health, Safety and Environment plan. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 12 of 56 08.11.06 

• Names of the Safety personnel. 

• Employers liability insurance certificate. 

• Method statements and Risk Analysis for each work / activity. 

• Test Certificates for lifting gear, lifting equipment and appliances. 

• Information relating to hazardous materials used and their MSDS. 

• Daily labour returns 

• Copies of all Statutory Registers maintained by the contractor when asked for. 

• Copies of the contractors Safety officer’s reports of their findings on site inspection. 

17.0 SITE SUPERVISION 

• The contractor must ensure that an employee of suitable seniority and authority with responsibility 

for health and safety is always present on site during the course of the work, to supervise and 

direct the work and to receive and implement instructions from the consultant’s senior 

representative. 

• All supervisory staff shall be made aware of their responsibilities for safety. 

• Contractor skilled workmen like riggers, scaffolds, welders, fitters, crane operators, their 

specialized equipment operator like welding machine, power generators etc must have sufficient 

past experience and skill on the relevant jobs. The electrician to be deployed must have valid 

wireman License. 

• All supervisory staff and workmen shall be capable of following instructions and shall be made 

aware of their responsibilities. 

18.0 TRAINING AND COMPETENCE OF EMPLOYEES 

• Training in Fire & Safety is mandatory for all contractors’ supervisors. 

• This program will be conducted by Fire & Safety Dept. at the Fire Station training Hall and the 

schedule shall be notified well in advance. 

• On completion of the program a certificate of attendance will be issued to each participant, which 

will be required for the supervision of the Hot Work. 

• The passing certificate issued to the supervisor will remain valid for one year. 

• Contractor must ensure that his employees are adequately trained and experienced to carry out 

their work safely. Training should continue throughout the project and should include regular 

toolbox discussions. 

• Contractor must also ensure that specific hazards likely to be experienced on the site are notified 

to their workforce together with any precautions to be taken and local rules to be observed. 

• Where particularly severe or unusual hazards arise, consultant reserves the right at no additional 

cost to request contractor’s employees to attend safety training and instruction sessions, whether 

carried out on site or externally. 

• Each contractor shall participate in the training program to help develop content, introduce training 

sessions, conduct training sessions, lead site tours that are part of the safety training, and other 

responsibilities that may be appropriate from time to time. The contractor shall prepare the training 

calendar for HSE activities and submit to consultants on monthly basis. (Refer Attachment E). 

WORKER’S TRAINING 

- It is obligatory that contractor supervisor who is trained by safety dept. should conduct spot 

training for his workers. 

- Additional contract workmen will have to undergo training on “ Safety Refinery” on the spot. 

- A record of the workers who attended the training must be maintained and the same must be 

submitted to the consultant and a copy is to be submitted to the client. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 13 of 56 

18.1 Initial site orientation / induction 

The number of orientation presented each week shall be organized to the extent possible to 

accommodate the contractor’s need to bring labour on site. The following topics shall be included in 

the course, which may be changed during the course of the project to meet changing site 

requirements. 

• Introduction to the site and project, with a brief overview of the project that is being constructed. 

• Owner and consultant’s HSE policy and safety philosophy. 

• Personal Protective Equipment (hard hats, safety glasses, steel-toed boots, etc.) 

• Housekeeping 

• Working in and around excavations 

• Working at height (ladders, scaffolds, free edges and openings, etc.) 

• The Safe Plan of Action (SPA) 

• First aid facilities, Accident reporting system 

• Emergency procedure 

• Smoking restriction, prohibition of alcohol and drugs. 

• The contractor shall conduct a site visit for his new employees in groups of less than 25 to 

familiarize the new employees with essential services, their work place, and general site layout. 

• Gate pass shall be issued only after completing the site orientation / induction and local statutory 

regulation formalities. 

• It is the responsibility of the contractor to familiarize all new personnel to the project on the actual 

location of assembly points, fire alarm points, first aid center and other important locations. 

• Contractors are responsible for arranging site safety induction for their workmen and they shall 

inform consultant’s Safety representative at least one day in advance. 

Besides initial orientation and induction at site, training on following topics should be given: 

• Scaffolding, Ladders, Safety nets etc., Fall Protection. 

• Cranes, Hoists and Lifting Equipment 

• Electrical safety 

• Gas Cutting and Welding 

• Hazardous material handling 

18.2 Specific hazard training 

Specialized training on following topics shall be given to the employees likely to get involved: 

• Hot work 

• Material handling 

• Pressure testing 

• Heavy equipment lifting & rigging 

• Work permit system 

• Lockout & tag out procedures 

• Entry into confined spaces 

• Fire prevention and control 

• Emergency Response Team (ERT) etc. 

These courses should provide the time needed to properly address the topic. Completion of specific 

hazard training is mandatory before working on such tasks. A list of all trained persons shall be 

maintained at site. 

19.0 RISK ASSESSMENTS 

Contractors would be required to produce risk assessments for all works under their control. The risk 

assessment form shall be submitted to the consultant’s representative before the job commences. 

Which would be duly approved by the project manager and the clients representative. It should include 

following information: 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 14 of 56 08.11.06 

• Identification of all significant risk activities involved in the work. 

• Details of measures taken to control the risks identified. 

• Justification for adequacy of control measures taken. 

• All risk assessments must be communicated to the workforce who will be involved in undertaking 

the work. 

20.0 METHOD STATEMENTS 

Contractors shall submit method statements for each work to Consultant well before commencement 

of the work. The method statement shall detail: 

• The job to be undertaken 

• The individual activities required completing the job. 

• The individual trades/disciplines involved in each activity. 

• Plant, equipment, tools to be used in each activity. 

• Any hazardous substances/chemicals to be used along with their MSDS. 

• A detailed description of how the work will be done including control measures and procedures 

to complete each activity and the overall job safely. 

Compliance with the standards detailed on the work method statement and relevancy to current 

operations shall be monitored on a daily basis and during safety management meetings. 

21.0 SAFE PLAN OF ACTION 

21.1 The SPA is the primary tool used at site to identify and plan to mitigate safety hazards. This form shall 

be completed by the employees and their supervisor of each crew before starting a new activity and 

kept at the work place for ready reference. 

21.2 The SPA has sections for the employees to: 

• State the task to be performed 

• Location of the task to be performed 

• Safety hazards anticipated 

• Steps to be taken to prevent the risks identified 

• Equipment, tools, or materials needed for protection against the hazard and to perform the work 

safely. 

• The name(s) of the Supervisor(s) for each activity. 

• The name of the person in overall charge of the job. 

• Duration of the job. 

21.3 It is the responsibility of the supervisor to ensure that all equipment, tools, or materials needed to 

implement the preventions identified by the SPA are obtained and all the steps identified to prevent the 

safety hazards are implemented before starting the work task. 

22.0 SAFETY OBSERVATION REPORT (SOR) 

22.1 The SOR is used as a tool for supervisors to record unsafe acts and the steps taken (immediately and 

as follow-up) to correct the unsafe acts and recommendation to prevent its recurrence. 

22.2 The SOR’s will be submitted to consultant and the data recorded by the SOR’s shall be summarized 

periodically to identify frequently occurring unsafe act / conditions. 

23.0 PERMIT TO WORK SYSTEM 

23.1 A permit to work system is a safety strategy designed to protect personnel and plant and which 

consists of an organized and predefined safety procedure. It forms a clear record of all foreseeable 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 15 of 56 

hazards, which have been considered in advance of the construction operations. Any activity which is 

undertaken with in the working area needs a permit to be taken by the concerned person. 

23.2 The identities of the permit “Issuing Authority” and “Permit Acceptor” will be dependent on nature of 

the activity. 

23.3 The following is the list of some of the activities, which would require permit, and list may change 

depending upon work situation. 

• Scaffolds 

• Excavations 

• Lifting Operations 

• Hot Work/Naked Flame 

• Electrical Works 

• Confined Spaces 

• Radiography 

• High Pressure test 

• Commissioning of equipment 

23.4 Written requests for permits must be submitted to consultant’s representative at least twenty four 

hours in advance. 

24.0 SITE SAFETY COMMITTEE 

In order to ensure better communication and coordination for realising safety targets, the project shall 

establish an independent Safety committee comprising of Owner Representative, consultant’s 

Construction Manager, consultant’s Safety Manager, consultant’s Discipline Heads, Contractors Site 

Manager, Safety officers. 

24.1 Safety Meetings 

• Safety Committee will form the agenda at all Site meetings 

• At least once a month a consultant’s Construction Manager shall convene meeting of all 

contractors. Attendees at the meeting shall be contractor’s Safety Officers, Site Managers (or 

their nominee). The frequency of meetings may change depending upon the need. 

25.0 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) AND FACILITIES 

The contractor must provide all his employees / workers, required PPE’s, which are duly inspected 

and approved by the Engineer and should be worn by the personnel. “NO PPE ZONE” would be 

identified separately. 

Basic PPE requirement for all the jobs. 

- Hard hat (Safety Helmet) 

- Safety shoes / Gum boots (civil works) 

- Hand Gloves 

- Safety Goggles 

25.1 The contractor shall: 

− Maintain all personal protective equipment in good working condition. 

− Periodically check and replace all defective / broken personal protective equipment. 

25.2 As a minimum every worker needs to wear safety shoes, safety goggles, safety helmets and hand 

gloves at all the times, while on project site. However special equipment may be required for certain 

operations depending upon the risks associated with the works, like: 

• Face mask, dark eyeglasses and face protection 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 16 of 56 08.11.06 

• Ear plugs and/or ear muffs 

• Hand gloves 

• Equipment and clothing for body protection 

• Safety harnesses with double lanyards. 

• Respiratory (breathing) protection. Will be issued by HPCL. 

25.3 The followings, but not limited to these, are considered to be personal protective facilities: 

• Barricades 

• Guardrail, Handrails and Covers 

• Stairs and Ladders 

• Safety Nets 

• Work Platforms 

• Shoring 

• Cages, gondola and crane suspended working platforms 

• Insulating Screens and Barriers 

25.4 HEAD PROTECTION 

All personnel shall be issued safety helmets, which shall be used at all times by personnel while on the 

site. Helmets shall have stickers to identify the contracting company they belong. 

25.5 HAND PROTECTION 

Workers employed on bar bending, mixing asphalt materials, Cement, Lime mortar and Concrete shall 

be provided with protective gloves approved by the Consultant. 

In addition to above, gloves shall be used by personnel involved in works with possibility of the risk from 

abrasion, cutting, tearing, chemical, or other burn, infection. 

25.6 Foot Protection 

All personnel shall wear suitable safety footwear with metal toe at all times while on the project site. 

25.7 Ear Protection 

Ear protection shall be worn by personnel involved in works in areas of high noise levels, or when 

working with equipment that generate high noise levels. 

Ear protection can be of an external ‘cup-type’ defender which fits over the outside of the ear, or ‘plugtype’, 

usually made of compressible foam, which fits inside the ear. 

Whenever practicable, equipment generating high noise should be located at the maximum possible 

distance from any work being performed. Sound reducing boxes also should be fitted to the 

equipment wherever practicable. 

25.8 Eye Protection 

25.8.1 Use of safety goggles at the work place is must, to protect eyes from following: 

- Flying particles, 

- Dust ingress, 

- Chemical splash, 

- Radiation glare, 

- Hot sparks or metal spatter, 

- Harmful vapors. 

25.8.2 The correct selection of eye protection shall depend on the assessment of the risk, or combination of 

risks based on the site situation. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 17 of 56 

25.9 Respiratory Protection 

Respiratory equipment whether stands bottled-type, or self-contained breathing apparatus shall only 

be worn by trained and qualified personnel. 

26.9.1 Persons with beards shall not be permitted to operate with respiratory equipment. 

26.9.2 Self-contained breathing apparatus shall generally be used in emergency situations, while 

scheduled works shall utilize the static bottled-type. 

Those engaged in mixing or stocking Cement bags or any materials, which are injurious to eyes, and 

lungs shall be provided with protective goggles and masks. 

25.10 Fall Protection 

Full body harness with double lanyards fitted with shock obsorbers shall be worn by all personnel 

working at height greater than 2.0 M above the ground level. Waist belts would not be permitted, all 

would be required to use “Full body” type safety harness with snap-hooks. 

- The PPE’s shall be of a standard quality and BIS approved. 

26.0 SANITATION AND HYGIENE MEASURES 

In order to provide adequate sanitary conditions for all personnel at site, following provisions as a part 

of the temporary facilities to be provided by the contractor. 

• Provision for an adequate supply of potable water 

• Provision for toilets and hand wash basins 

• Garbage disposal and periodic collection 

• Proper drainage and sewer disposal 

• Other special hygienic operations viz. Fumigation, pest controls etc. 

• Worker's Rest Space: 

- Sunshade and/or site canteen 

- Smoking hut 

27.0 RADIOGRAPHY 

Only qualified and trained personnel with required license issued by BARC should be assigned to 

install, adjust and operate radiography equipment. 

When working in areas with a potential exposure directly or indirectly to any workers/persons, the 

relevant statutory required protection shall be made. 

Affected areas shall be posted and restricted with standard radiation warning sign, placards, 

barricades, and blinkers…. 

All applicable rules pertaining Radiography shall be complied with regard source movement, 

Radiography license etc. 

All personnel working on radiography must wear dosimeter / film badges as required by the BARC 

norms. 

28.0 WARNING SIGNS, BARRICADES AND SIGNALS 

All floor openings, cutouts, open edges and excavations shall be properly barricaded, covered with 

load bearing planking and shall have proper guardrails and toe boards on all sides, and warning 

notices posted. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 18 of 56 08.11.06 

29.0 NOISE 

Site supervision shall make sure that signs, barricades and signals are used, erected and maintained 

as required to ensure the safety and health of site personnel. 

Noise must be kept to a minimum at all times and must not exceed acceptable and/or locally specified 

rules and conditions relating to noise imposed by the Contract. Due regard must always be given to 

noise levels, permissible duration for noisy work operations and other restrictions. Any work activity 

which is likely to expose any employee on site to a noise level of 85 db(A) or above, assessments 

should be carried out. In such circumstances, the contractor must keep stocks of ear defenders or 

other suitable hearing protection and issue to the workmen who are exposed to the higher levels of 

noise. 

The legal requirements for the protection of worker’s hearing are contained in the Building & Other 

Construction Workers’ (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Services) Central Rules 1998. 

General guide is, if one has to raise his voice to be heard, place is too noisy. 

Grinders, Cutters, Jack Hammer (pneumatic drills), Engine driven plant and the like, all give off levels 

of noise that is harmful. 

Earplugs and earmuffs are the commonest form of hearing protection to be used. 

If there is a concern that personnel cannot hear warnings, shouts or gas monitor alarms, then a 

method statement/ safety system of work should be provided for those operations. 

30.0 SUBSTANCES (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations) 

30.1 The Statutory Regulations are to be complied with at all times. Hazardous substances include any 

flammable liquid or any substance likely to give rise to toxic, corrosive, irritant or harmful risk. 

30.2 Substances hazardous to health must be identified prior to taking them onto Site and, if they cannot be 

substituted or eliminated, assessments stating how the substances will be controlled and what 

precautions will be introduced must be carried out and recorded in writing by a competent person. This 

assessment must be communicated to and comprehended by the workforces who are likely to come 

in contact with the substance(s). A copy of all assessments should be handed to the consultant’s 

Construction Manager. 

30.3 Hazardous substances brought to site shall be kept to a minimum and must be stored in secure, 

appropriate containers with the contents clearly labeled. The containers must be stored in a secure 

area, preferably quarantined for the main stores areas, with suitable warning notices and signage 

posted. 

30.4 Hazardous materials must not be allowed to discharge into natural watercourses or drainage systems. 

30.5 All hazardous material waste must be kept separate from normal waste and be disposed of in a 

specialist disposal facility. 

31.0 HOUSEKEEPING 

Contractor must ensure highest standard of housekeeping in his areas of work on a day-to-day basis. 

All unsatisfactory housekeeping will earn negative rating, which will attract penal action like 

cancellation of registration / contract. 

Very high standard of housekeeping shall be maintained at all times by the contractor. 

• Keep the site neat and tidy. Keep adequate number of skips / waste bins. 

• Keep the access clear of all obstructions. 

• Remove the nails or bend them down from the wooden scrap and remove them from job site. 

• Store the material in an orderly manner. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 19 of 56 

The contractor shall on daily basis keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of 

waste materials or rubbish caused by activities. 

At the completion of days work contractor shall remove these materials to avoid Slip/ Trip hazards and 

provide safe areas for movement of all workers and supervisors. 

Contractor should establish regular maintenance program of sweeping and hosing to minimize 

accumulation of dirt and dust in such areas. 

If the contractor fails to clean up as provided in this document, the owner may do so and cost 

thereof shall be charged to the contractor. 

On completion of the job the contractor shall remove all his construction material, tools etc. and 

demolish all temporary constructions and leave the job site thoroughly cleaned up and ready for use. 

When required contractors have to suspend other operations and do housekeeping. 

32.0 REMOVAL OF WASTE FROM CONSTRUCTION SITES 

32.1 Waste generated at site shall be controlled and disposed off in accordance with environmental control 

regulations and municipality rules; consultant shall be informed of procedure followed by the contractor 

before disposal 

32.2 Controlled waste is any kind of household industrial or commercial waste. This includes for example:- 

• Scrap metal 

• Building, construction, demolition and excavation waste, including waste from any repair or 

renovation. 

• Clinical waste. 

• Anything, which is unwanted because it is surplus, broken, worn out, contaminated or spoiled in 

some other way. 

• Where there is any doubt of the composition of excavation spoils, it must be analyzed before it is 

removed off-site. 

32.3 Waste Disposal 

All receptacles shall be constructed of metal or other suitable types of containers of non-flammable 

materials. 

Cardboard, wooden boxes or crates and similar types of containers shall not be used for the collection 

of combustible waste. 

The removal of waste shall only be taken in accordance with the rules prescribed by local Public 

Health Department. 

Separate waste skips should generally be provided for: 

• Scrap metal 

• General construction waste 

And fully enclosed skips for 

• Food waste (to deter vermin) 

• Waste and rags saturated with oil, grease and the like 

Skips containing combustible waste should be strategically placed to ensure fire does not spread in 

the case of combustion within a skip. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 20 of 56 08.11.06 

33.0 FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL 

The contractors shall plan and chalk out the measures for the elimination of possible conditions, which 

may lead to fire. 

The contractors shall provide adequate number of well-maintained “DCP type 10kg capacity 

extinguishers “ bearing IS marks. It should upright operate and should be cartridge type. Fire 

extinguishers of the same shall be made available at each work area. 

FIRE HOSE: The Fire hose should be 63mm / 38mm diameter and minimum 15 Mtr long, seamless 

canvas / synthetic fiber woven jacketed, rubberized fabric reinforced rubber line hose bearing IS: 636- 

1988 Type A. The fire hose should have Gun mettle instantaneous type 2 .5” Male and 2.5’ Female 

coupling bearing IS: 903 mark. The couplings should be riveted and doubly wounded with heavy-duty 

copper wire to the hose at both ends. 

NOZZLE: The nozzle to be use with fire hose should be of “Branch Pipe, Universal” type as IS: 2871 – 

1983. It should be provided with 2.5” Female instantaneous couplings as per IS: 903 (As nozzle with 

Ma le coupling will necessitate use of double Female coupling) 

The contractor shall ensure that workmen are trained in the use of fire extinguishers, understands the 

basics of fire fighting and train the workmen to become familiar with such Fire Fighting Procedures. A 

competent person shall periodically inspect all fire extinguishers. Fire extinguishers should be located 

in designated areas and clearly identified. 

The contractor shall take every precaution and use all reasonable means to prevent an outbreak of fire 

and shall tender immediate assistance in case of fire. Any outbreak of fire in or near the workplace 

shall immediately be reported to the engineer in-charge of Owner / Consultants. 

Fire drills should be held at intervals to ensure personnel are familiar with the location, of Assembly 

Point and response expected of them in case of emergency. 

Smoking on site is not permitted, but may be allowed in restricted areas as may be authorized by the 

engineer. No smoking boards shall be displayed at prominent location including stores/ storage 

places. 

Care of flammable materials, oily rags, waste etc. must not be left lying around or allowed to 

accumulate. Covered metal skips should be used for disposal of flammable waste. 

If welding / cutting operations are to be carried out, non-flammable screens and blankets shall be used 

to confine sparks hot metal or slag. A fire extinguisher should also be readily available. 

Chemicals and other such goods should be stored in stable racks properly labeled. Mutually reactive 

chemicals should be kept away from each other. Storage place should have proper ventilation. 

34.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 

The following will be considered to establish emergency procedures. 

- Make a list of available emergency services and confirm their communication channels. 

- Ensure that supervisors clearly understand their responsibility and role in the site emergency 

procedures. 

- Designate first aid and provide medical supplies and other material and equipment that may 

be required for emergency use. 

- Set up emergency response teams. 

- Determine emergency evacuation routes for work areas and construction site. 

- Make sure that all personnel clearly understand emergency warning siren signals or other 

warning signals used by Owner or other authorities. 

- Designate a supervisor to conduct a head count and give instructions to evacuees as 

necessary. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 21 of 56 

- Post-emergency information for each work area on the site. 

- Conduct emergency procedure drill periodically. 

35.0 SITE ACCESS 

35.1 Access to the site must be at all times via recognized roadways and footpaths. Personnel must not 

access to construction areas through unauthorized areas. Anyone found disregarding this rule would 

be subject to disciplinary action. 

35.2 All personnel will be issued with a photo pass, who will be required to enter the site. Passes must be 

carried at all times. At the completion of the project, all passes must be returned to the consultant’s 

Construction Manager. 

36.0 SITE SECURITY PROCEDURES 

Following minimum controls on movement on men and material should be followed. 

36.1 Site Entry Control 

Site Entry Permit (Personnel) System 

Site Entry Permit (Vehicle) / Equipment 

Contractors shall abide by Owner Security system. 

36.2 Prohibited Items and Activities 

Contractor shall closely monitor to ensure that the employees adhere to the following code of conduct: 

• Alcoholic beverages will not be consumed, brought onto, or manufactured on the site. Individuals 

under the influence of alcohol or drugs will not be permitted entry to the site. 

• Non-prescription drugs, intoxicants or substances will not be used, brought onto or manufactured 

on the site. 

• Firearms, explosives, knives or other types of weapons will not be allowed on the site. 

• Gambling or any other form of betting game is prohibited. 

• Discrimination or intimidation on the basis of race, sex or national origin is prohibited. 

• Aggressive or abnormal behavior is prohibited. 

• Violation and / or failure to comply with the above requirements will require a written report 

detailing facts and corrective actions taken. 

37.0 SAFETY INSPECTIONS 

The Jacobs’ Safety Manager/Officer will visit the Sites and carry out Site safety inspections. 

Contractors Safety Personnel shall conduct Safety inspection / Safety Audits and report to contractor’s 

Site In-charge for taking corrective action. A copy of their reports shall be forwarded to the consultant’s 

Construction manager and provide a report of their findings and any necessary corrective action to be 

undertaken. 

38.0 AUDIT AND MONITORING 

Consultant may plan to conduct the following two types of audits from time to time during a project life. 

• Formal Audit 

• Regular and Ad-hoc Inspection 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 22 of 56 08.11.06 

38.1 Formal Audit 

Formal audit would be a comprehensive assessment of compliance with project program, procedures 

and local codes and regulations. 

Consultant’s home office management and/ or HSE specialist / advisor at key points will carry out this 

audit during project life cycle by means of pre-determined formats. 

The results of formal audit will be reported in a written assessment form and feedback is given to all 

relevant parties including consultant’s top management. Site management and supervisors should 

take corrective actions immediately and submit their compliance report. 

38.2 Regular and ad-hoc inspection 

Regular and ad-hoc inspection is an audit providing regular or special means of checking compliance 

with project HSE requirements at key stages of project life. 

Regular and ad-hoc inspections will be carried out by site management and/ or site Safety Officer / 

Manager. 

39.0 SAFETY AWARDS AND SAFETY COMPETITIONS 

39.1 Awards and Recognitions 

Construction site Safety awards programs may be instituted with focus on remarkable achievements 

and contributions towards safety. 

39.2 Safety Competitions 

The site management and the contractors may plan for various safety competitions to motivate 

employees to take active part in safety program. 

40.0 HSE ASSURANCE PLAN 

The contractor shall submit HSE Assurance Plan in the form of matrix indicating the extent of checking 

of various activities enlisted in the plan. The plan shall be approved by consultant and it shall be used 

as main tool for HSE surveillance. 

A typical plan prepared for the project is attached for guidance Refer Attachment - D. 

41.0 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND VEHICLES 

41.1 Pre-Construction Examination and Inspection 

The contractors shall provide a list of equipment and vehicles needed to safely perform the work. 

Cranes, hoists, slings, lifting tackles and other lifting equipment shall be selected as per load carrying 

capacities. 

The contractor must include in his Safety Assurance program, a procedure relating to construction 

equipment and vehicle inspection, operation and maintenance plan. It must be consistent with the 

manufacturer's recommendations and consultant’s requirements as contained in the program. 

All hoisting and lifting equipment shall be thoroughly examined by a competent person as per 

applicable local laws and regulations. A report on the result of examination shall be submitted (in 

prescribed form) before equipment is brought into site. 

41.2 Scheduled Inspections and Maintenance 

Contractor's construction equipment and vehicles are to be periodically inspected and maintained 

according to pre-determined schedule. Complete record of all inspection and maintenance shall be 

maintained and submit to consultant when called for. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 24 of 56 08.11.06 

a) First Aid kit 

b) Fire extinguishers 

c) Parking brake and brake light 

42.2 Motor Vehicle Accident Investigations 

All motor vehicles and equipment accidents shall be reported; investigated and remedial measure 

shall be taken to prevent recurrence. 

43.0 HAZARD WARNING 

Hazard warnings come in different forms, which include signs, tags, permits, barriers etc. The primary 

factor with any hazard warning is that all personnel; visitors’ etc. shall be educated as to the types of 

warnings and their definition. 

Tags 

Various tags may be utilized during the construction and commissioning phases, e.g. 

Electrical - to designate that electrical equipment has been taken out of service, or men are working 

on the equipment. 

Danger - designating a possible hazard such as “valve open”, “do not use”, and “spade inserted”. 

Defective - designating unsafe materials and/or equipment, e.g. “out of order, “failed safety check”. 

Warning Tapes / Flags 

Hazard warning tapes should be utilized to attract the eye to avoidance of hazards or local services. 

Tapes, whilst warning of potential hazards, should not be employed as safety barriers and are 

considered as a guidance indicator. 

44.0 EXCAVATIONS 

The planning of excavation works should consider: 

i) Nature of the soil, including the proximity of any make-up ground 

ii) Weather and moisture conditions 

iii) Method, size and duration of the excavation job 

iv) Proximity of other structures, services 

v) Dewatering systems 

• Before starting excavation permit should be taken from consultant. 

• Electrical clearance is required for excavation permit just in case of any under-ground cable 

passing below the are to be excavated. 

• All excavations more than 0.60 mtr shall be barricaded. The barricade should be made of 

steel pipes of minimum dia 40 mm NB. It should withstand a lateral load of 100 kg. These 

barriers should have minimum two horizontal members (Waist rail & Knee rail) located at 

1010mm and 550 mm from the ground and vertical members located at spacing not more 

than 1000 mm. 

• Excavations less than 600 mm shall be cordoned off and suitable notices/ warning tapes 

posted. 

• The most appropriate method of stabilising the sides of an excavation can be achieved by 

properly designed shoring, which is to be approved by consultant. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 30 of 56 08.11.06 

• All compressed gas cylinders shall be used, stored and transported in an upright position. 

• Compressed gas storage facilities shall be positioned at a sufficient distance from work area, 

offices and roads in such a manner as not to cause a hazard to employees, facilities and/or other 

contractors. 

• Cylinders should be stored in suitably designed racks, which must have chains so that any number 

of cylinders can be securely and safely stored. 

• Signs indicating the contents with separate storage for “full” or “empty” shall be displayed. 

Warning signs must be posted - “DANGER - HIGHLY FLAMMABLE - NO SMOKING OR NAKED 

FLAME”. Fire extinguisher shall be located within accessible distance. 

• Oxygen cylinder shall be separated from other combustible gas, oil or grease. 

• The storage of gas cylinders shall be according to statutory regulations pertaining to the use of 

industrial gases and gas cylinder rules. 

52.2 Combustible Liquids 

• Flammable and combustible liquids must be stored in a metal storage cabinet with a prominent 

notice - “FLAMMABLE - NO NAKED FLAME”. 

• The area should be well ventilated and free from flammable material 

• Suitable fire extinguishers must be located adjacent to the cabinet. 

• Code of practice for storage of compressed gases and combustible liquids shall be followed. 

• Full cylinders must always be stored in an area away from empty ones, and all cylinders secured 

in an upright position. 

• All cylinders, valves and equipment shall free from oil and grease, secured in an upright position 

and when not in use have the valves shut with cap on. 

• Under no circumstances oxygen cylinders be stored with liquefied petroleum gas cylinders, or 

within three meters of an LPG storage area. 

• Cylinders must be stored in an area, which is under cover to protect them from extreme wealth, 

well ventilated, and away from flammable materials, solvents or excessive heat. 

• Storage in such a position to be easily moved in the event of a fire. 

• Cylinders should not be subjected to rough treatment, if moved by mechanical means then a 

cradle or strip must be used lifting, by the neck or valves is not permitted. 

Acetylene Cylinders 

Storage precautions are the same as for oxygen cylinders with additional points to observe. 

• Acetylene should be kept away from copper and alloys containing more than 70% copper. 

• Must be stored and used in well-ventilated areas due to a narcotic effect if inhaled. 

Check the code of practice for storage of gas cylinders. 

53.0 COMPRESSED AIR 

Air receivers / compressors shall be: 

• In good condition and properly maintained. 

• Individually identified and marked with their safe working pressure. 

• Be accompanied by a valid test certificate. 

• Fitted with a properly set pressure relief valve. 

• Examined and the pressure relief valve tested by an independent examiner at yearly intervals. 

• A register containing relevant details about the air receivers, compressors shall be maintained at 

site such as identification numbers, dates of inspections, pressure ratings etc. 

• All compressed air fittings shall be wired and/or restrained to prevent them from whipping should 

the coupling separate. 

• Only hose clamps designed for compressed air service shall be used. Worm drive (jubilee) clips 

are not acceptable. 

COMPRESSED AIR MUST NEVER BE USED FOR CLEANING CLOTHES 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 31 of 56 

54.0 WELDING AND CUTTING (CHECK IF A PERMIT IS REQUIRED) 

Safety procedures for welding and cutting have been elaborated below, 

Gas cylinders used in cutting and welding shall: (follow all safety procedures mentioned for oxygen / 

acetylene gas cylinders). 

• When handling cylinders, ensure hands, clothes, gloves, etc. are free from oil, dirt, grit and grease. 

Under no circumstances oil shall be allowed to contaminate a cylinder containing oxygen. 

• All gas and oxygen regulators shall be fitted with flashback arresters, being non-return valves 

designed to prevent an explosive mix developing in either cylinder, they are must before use. 

• Prior to use, all equipment shall be thoroughly checked to ensure tight connections, condition of 

hoses and gauge. 

• The welders shall wear good quality insulated welding gloves and use proper welding shields for 

eye protection and welding holders shall be of insulated type with finger guard. 

• The helper engaged with the welder should also have proper eye protection. Holding a piece of 

broken colored glass is not permitted. 

• When not in use, power supply to the holder and electrode must be turned off. 

• Work area beneath or adjacent to fabrication of welding works shall be made free from 

combustible materials, and cordoned-off to prevent personnel being injured by weld spatter or 

• Molten metal. Placing of cylinders directly beneath the work area shall not be permitted. Hoses to 

be protected from damages. 

• Flashback arrestors and hose check valves should be fitted to both oxygen and fuel gas regulators 

and manifolds. Acetylene manifolds must be fitted with an effective flashback arrestor. 

Good ventilation must always be provided during gas welding works. 

55.0 LIFTING OPERATIONS 

Lifting machine, chains, ropes and lifting tackles used by the contractor on site must conform to the 

following, 

• All parts must be of good construction, sound material, and adequate strength and free from 

defects. 

• Must be properly maintained, thoroughly examined and load tested by the contractor’s competent 

person regularly. 

• No lifting machine and no chain, rope or lifting tackle should, except for the purpose of test, be 

loaded beyond safe working load and this safe working load must be plainly marked on the gear 

concerned. 

• No lifting shall take place during high wind velocities, heavy rains, inadequate lighting. 

• All lifting / rigging plans must have proper written approval from consultant. 

The contractor shall offer his tools and tackles for inspection and approval of owner’s Engineer/ 

Supervisor before start of work. Contractor shall produce valid Test- Certificates from Govt. approved 

certifying authorities for all of his lifting gear and hoists (Slings, chains, hooks, chain-pulley blocks, 

winches, hoists, cranes, etc.) as well as Electrical, Pneumatic and Hydraulic equipment and 

appliances. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 32 of 56 08.11.06 

These certificates shall be retained at the site with the contractor’s Supervisor/ Site-in-charge for 

subsequent spot checks also. 

56.0 CRANE & RIGGING 

The contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified and experienced person to act as supervisor for 

rigging and lifting works. His responsibilities shall include preparation of the ‘rigging plan’, and the safe 

rigging and lifting of the load at work site. 

All works involving the use of a crane shall be properly planned in advance and a ‘rigging study’ 

carried out to ensure that, 

The crane is capable of lifting the load, given the known working radius, boom length, weight 

of the load, etc. 

- The condition of the ground at the crane location is satisfactory to support the crane and the 

load; 

- The rotation of the cab, and therefore the boom is not restricted 

- Suitable ‘matting’ or plates are available to protect underground services and paving 

- All slings, shackles, hook, etc., of the correct rating are available and in good condition (i.e. 

without lapping, knots or artificial extensions). 

Crane hooks shall be fitted with properly functioning safety clips to prevent the displacement of the 

sling from the hook during the lift. 

For wheeled cranes outriggers shall be used for each lift, regardless of the size, shape and load 

always be fully extended. 

Shackles shall be complete with the original pin and under no circumstances shall a substitute bolt be 

fitted. 

A ‘trial’ lift shall be carried out, raising the load a short distance above its pick-up point, to check the 

stability of the crane, and the efficiency of the brakes. 

Only one person, usually the Supervising Rigger, shall give instructions to the crane operator. 

At no time whilst the crane’s machinery is running, shall the operator leave the cabin. 

At no time whilst a load is suspended shall the crane’s engine(s) be intentionally turned off. 

At no time whilst a load is suspended, shall personnel perform any works directly beneath. 

Particular consideration to the presence of low-level structures such as pipe badges shall be given 

where crane is to move about the site. 

Consideration shall be given to prevailing weather conditions, and where a greater than normal risk 

exists, the lift shall be postponed until more favorable condition develop. 

The training, skill and experience of the crane operator and crew is important element of a properly 

organised lifting operation. For day-to-day routine crane operations, careful selection of the most 

suitable type of crane, plus the establishment of a safe system and method of work would be 

essential. 

The statutory provisions, which apply to lifting operations during construction operations, are contained 

in Building & Other Construction Workers’ (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 

1996 and Rules, 1998. 

Every contract agreement for a Contract Lifting Operation should state the following: 

• That all work will be carried out in accordance with safe practices, and that the contractor will 

appoint one person to have overall control of the Lifting Operation 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 33 of 56 

The following item should be checked before allowing the crane to work: 

• Certificate of Testing and Examination issued by a competent person as per statutory rules. 

• Record of the periodic inspections on the crane, signed by a competent person of contracting 

agency. 

• That the lifting equipment to be used are suitable for the job and that the test certificates for such 

items are available. 

• The crane hook is provided with safety catch. 

Loads should only be moved when the signaler can see the load and communicate with the driver. 

• Copies of the sling chart and safe working load tables shall be used. 

• The counter weight of the crane and boom movement area shall be cordoned off. 

• No one should ride on load being slung. 

• Tag lines should be used to control load swinging. 

• Load shall not be lifted if there are knots / kinks in the slings. 

Lifting Gear 

The severe usage to which lifting gear is often subjected, may result in failure, it is important that 

attention be paid to the correct use and maintenance of such lifting gear. This can best be achieved 

by: 

• Good design and workmanship 

• Careful testing and inspection after manufacture or repair and regular maintenance. 

• Detailed planning, correct and careful use of the gear and storage under cover 

When ‘U’ clamps are used on wire rope slings the rounded portion of ‘U’ clamp shall be on the free 

end of the wire rope. Minimum 3 no’s of ‘U’ clamps shall be used for splicing and more clamps 

required depending upon the diameter. 

The Safe Working Load (SWL) markings on an item of lifting equipment shall be inspected before it is 

used. These numbers are normally stamped on to the master eye or ferrule of slings and the body of 

eyebolts, shackles, etc. Alternatively, metal tabs, which bear this information, may be fitted to slings. 

On web slings the information may be on a label stitched into the sling, normally at the eye, and they 

may be additionally color coded to identify SWL. 

57.0 MANUAL HANDLING 

Building & Other Construction Workers’ (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 

1996 requires employers to make a suitable and sufficient assessment of the risks to the health and 

safety of their employees while at work. Where this general assessment indicates the possibility of 

risks to employees from the manual handling of loads the requirements of the present regulations 

should be observed, as follows: 

• Avoid hazardous manual handling operations so far as is reasonably practicable 

• Assess any hazardous manual handling operations that cannot be avoided, and reduce the risk of 

injury so far as is reasonably practicable 

Where, load-handling operations are essential, consideration should be given to the use of mechanical 

handling, for example by the use of lifting appliances or fork lifts. The contractors should consider the 

use 

of such mechanical aids at the planning stage of their activities. Capability of employees to follow the 

advice in case of material handling should be considered in making assessments. 

58.0 ABRASIVE WHEELS 

Before any abrasive wheel/disc/cutter/side grinder is mounted on a grinding machine. The person 

mounting the wheel shall be fully trained and competent to do the job. 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 34 of 56 08.11.06 

Selecting the right abrasive wheel for a particular application is critical. Check for expiry date. 

Only reinforced resin-bonded or resin-bonded abrasive wheels must be used with portable grinding 

machines. As the most serious injuries involving abrasive wheels occur when wheels burst and flying 

fragments strike people in the vicinity. 

Grinding machines are marked with the maximum working speeds of their spindles, whilst abrasive 

wheels are marked with the maximum speed at which they may be operated. They should be 

compatible. 

Eye protection shall be worn during all grinding operations. Protection for those not involved in the 

operations shall also be protected by the erection of screens, or barriers to keep personnel out of the 

danger zone. 

59.0 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES 

A confined space is any enclosed or partially enclosed area where there is a possibility that the 

atmosphere or conditions may become injurious to health and safety of persons entering. The danger 

may be as a direct result of a process being undertaken by persons within the confined space or: 

· Oxygen enrichment 

· Oxygen deficiency 

· Flammable atmosphere 

· Accumulation of flammable or toxic fumes 

All entry into confined spaces shall be controlled by means of a "permit to work". Persons authorising 

entry into confined spaces must have the necessary competence to issue any permits, and to check 

for contamination and/or dangerous atmospheres. 

Entry Requirements: 

Safety precautions, restrictions of the operations and personal protection will be identified on the 

permit to work. Check if retrieval/harnesses are required. A standby man is required outside the 

confined space. Air/ Gas detectors/ monitors will normally be required. 

60.0 CONTRACTORS TOOLS & EQUIPMENTS 

The following four basic principles shall be applied to and govern the safe use of hand and power tools 

and principles are: 

- Choose the right tool for the job; 

- Use only tools in good conditions; 

- Use the tools correctly. 

High speed rotating equipment, such as grinders, shall be fitted with protective guards. 

Spark arresters shall be fitted to all equipment exhausts where a risk of combustible gases in the 

atmosphere exists. 

• Electrical trip switches must work effectively and must not be removed or bypassed. 

• Contractors shall provide suitable storage with suitable racks and bins for storing tools and 

equipment. 

• The contractor shall nominate or employ the services of a competent qualified electrician to 

inspect and tag electrical power hand tools transformers, distributing boards, extension cables etc 

on an at least quarterly basis. The tag shall display name, signature of the individual inspecting the 

tool, date of inspection. 

• The contractor shall keep, on site, a register of all electrical power hand tools in use giving all 

relevant details about the tool and its inspection. 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 35 of 56 

• No electrical powered hand tool shall be used other than it is tagged with a current “INSPECTION” 

tag. 

• All electrical leads must be connected to the power source through standard industrial 

waterproofed plugs and sockets, which shall be in good condition. 

• While working at higher elevation, adequate precaution to be taken to ensure that they do not fall 

down. 

• Metal body of all tools shall be properly earthed. 

• For work near flammable material or flammable atmosphere, special tools made of non-ferrous 

metals for the purpose shall be used to avoid sparking. 

61.0 SUSPENSION OF WORK 

If the contractor is found by the engineer not complying and or persisting in non-compliance with safety 

requirements or with statutory obligations, the engineer may suspend his work at any time by notice, in 

writing, and the work shall not be resumed unless and until the engineer shall cancel in writing his 

suspension order. The Engineers decision in this matter shall be final. No claims arising from such 

suspension shall be made by contractor. 

62.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 

The contractor shall take full care to implement provisions of HSE requirements. In case if the 

contractor is persisting with non-compliance consultant / Owner would take action against the 

contractor after giving a reasonable time to improve. Liquidated Damages in such case would be up to 

10% of Contract value. 

63.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 

63.1 Normal Timings For Work 

• The normal duty timings for contractor employees shall be between 08:00 Am and 04:30 Pm 

• Contractor employees would not be allowed to work on Sundays and Refinery Holidays. 

• Any deviation from above shall be with permission from Engineer-in –charge / HPCL 

representative. 

63.2 Penalties For Non-Compliance Of Safety Systems And Procedures. 

• To ensure the compliance of Safety procedures by the contractor work force deployed penalty will 

be levied if any non-compliance / deviations to permit conditions / safety rules is found. The job will 

be stopped, Gate pass / work permit from the contractor supervisor will be taken. 

• After ensuring compliance to requirement, job engineer / location in-charge will return the permit to 

the contractor and advice him to start the job. The job engineer will ensure that the amount is 

recovered from the contractor. Contractor pays the amount to the Refinery cashier on the same 

day or next day, obtains cash receipt and hands over to the job engineer in charge. Code will be : 

48000001.582040 

Penalties for non-compliance of safety system and procedures. 

• Non-usage of safety Helmets / Safety shoes / goggles: Rs.100/- 

• Non-usage of safety belts : Rs.200/- 

• Non-provision of basic safety requirements such as ELCB, 

Usage of more than 24V power/uncertified tools : Rs.300/- 

• Non-provision of fire-fighting systems : Rs.200/- 

• Non-barricading of area while rigging, digging etc : Rs.100/- 

• Working without valid work permit : Rs.300/- 

• Unauthorized road closure / blockage : Rs.200/- 


JACOBS 



Project 

Page 36 of 56 08.11.06 

63.3 Non- Police Vérification. 

• Contractor who engages laborers for his jobs in the refinery must submit police Verification of 

antecedents of labors engaged by him. 

63.4 Guidelines For Determining The Medical Fitness For Contractor Employees. 

• Medical examination will be conducted by the doctor having qualification included in schedule to 

Indian Medical Degree Act of 1916 or n the schedules to the Indian Medical Act 1956 and 

Registered with Maharastra Medical Council. 

Norms and standards for medical fitness. 

1. Good mental and bodily health and a fit constitution 

2. Free from physical defect or abnormality, congenital, or acquired, likely to interfere with the 

efficient performance of duties. 

3. No evidence of mal-development- physical or mental. 

4. Joints and loco motor functions are within normal limits. 

5. Height And Weight: Standard for height and weight, so long as relaxation does not impede the 

performance of the job. 

6. Chest: Acceptable chest measurement at full expiration will be 79cms (relaxable by 5cms) and 

minimum expansion of 4cms. This is not applicable for female candidates. 

7. The candidates eyes will be tested and the result of the tests recorded. The candidate’s eyes will 

be subject to a general examination directed to detect any disease or abnormality. The candidate 

will be rejected if he / she suffers from morbid condition of eyes, eyelids of contiguous structures 

of such a nature as would render him / her unfit for service at the time of appointment or in a 

future date. 

8. Color blindness, not permissible: Color blindness for the following jobs like employment in 

manufacturing, maintenance, Technical services, Chemist, draughtsman, crane operator, drivers 

of all category, Nurse, nursing assistance, fireman, security, doctor, materials management etc. 

and the jobs where perception of color is considered essential. 

9. Ear / nose / throat: The candidate should be free from signs or systems of ear / nose/ throat 

diseases. 

10. Blood Pressure (BP): The normal limit of blood pressure will be assessed as normotension

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 37 of 56 

15. Signs of mental retardation will render candidate unfit for employment. 

16. Defects: Congenital or acquired defects, if any / noticed, will be recorded on the medical 

examination forms, with a clear opinion as to whether it is likely to interfere with the effacement 

performance of the duties for which the candidate is under consideration for employment. 


A. Site Safety Organization Chart Page No. 34 

B. Checklist Cum Safety Audit Report Page No. 35 to 38 

C. Incident Report – I & II Page No. 39 to 40 

D. HSE Assurance Plan Page No. 41 to 44 

E. HSE Training Activities Page No. 45 

F. Monthly Health, Safety And Environment (HSE) Report Page No. 46 

G. Monthly Safety Statistics Page No. 47 

H. Incident Investigation Report Page No. 48 to 50 

I. Legal obligations/Requirements for Construction Page No. 51 to 52 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 38 of 56 

OWNER 

JH&G 

CONTRACTORS 

OWNER 

PROJECT 

MANAGER 

ATTACHMENT – A 

SITE SAFETY ORGANISATION CHART 

OWNER 

CONSTRUCTION 

MANAGER 

CONSTRUCTION 

SITE 

SAFETY CONTROL 

SAFETY 

SECTION SAFETY 

PERSONNEL 

COMMITTEE 

CONSTRUCTION 

SUPERVISION 

SECTION 

CONSTRUCTION 

MANAGER 

CONSTRUCTION 

SUPERVISION 

SECTION 

CONSTRUCTION 

WORKFORCE 

SAFETY CONTROL 

SECTION SAFETY 

PERSONNEL

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 43 of 56 

Project: 

JACOBS 

ATTACHMENT C 

INCIDENT REPORT-- I 

Name of Contractor: Name of Work: 

INCIDENT REPORT--I 

A. Date of Incident: .................................................................................................. 

B. Time of Incident: .................................................................................................. 

C. Plant/ Building/ .................................................................................................. 

Area of Incident: .................................................................................................. 

Type of Injury: Recordable Lost Time Fatal 

D. Persons injured (Nos.): ......... ......... ........ 

E. First Aid given to (Nos.): ......... ......... ........ 

F. Shifted to Hospital (Nos.): ......... ......... ........ 

G. Hospital Name/ Location: .................................................................................................. 

.................................................................................................. 

H. Details of Items/ Eqpt. Damaged: .......................................................................................... 

........................................................................................... 

I. Reasons of accident: .......................................................................................................... 

................................................................................................................................................................... 

...................................................................................................................... ...... 

................................................................................................................................................ 

J. Name, Age and Address of the injured person. 

Safety Officer Site Manager 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 44 of 56 

Project: 

JACOBS 

ATTACHMENT C 

INCIDENT REPORT-- II 


INCIDENT REPORT-- II 

All dangerous occurrences, incidents and damage to equipment and / or property to be recorded below, 

Details of Incident: 

Damages to the property / equipment: 

Reasons : 

Were Personnel involved? - ............................................................................. 

Personal injury report completed? - ............................................................................. 

Date & Time of incident - ............................................................................. 

Exact location - ............................................................................. 

To whom reported - ............................................................................. 

Reported by - ............................................................................. 

Names & Addresses of witnesses: 1. ............................................................................. 

Statement of Supervisors 

............................................................................. 

2. ............................................................................. 

............................................................................. 


Date: 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 5 terms, conditions & procedures\5.6 hsc - standard specification for field hse activities hpcl .doc 

10/06/2007 10:43 AM

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 45 of 56 

ATTACHMENT D 

HSE ASSURANCE PLAN 

Frequency Extent of Checking 

Sr. Activity Operating Checking Contractors Consultant Owner Remarks 

No Area 

Engineer 

1 HSE Policy Communicate to 

all working at 

Project site. 

2 Safety committee Through 

meetings at 

predefined 

interval. 

3 Training (Induction and 

Periodic) 

4 Reporting 

Once in the 

beginning. 

5.6 HSC - Standard specification for field HSE activities HPCL 10/6/2007 10:43 AM 

Safety 

Supervisor 

Safety 

Officer 

As applicable Review 

imple- 

mentation 

system 

To be formed consisting Owner, consultant, Contractor and Representatives of 

workers. 

Contractor to 

submit. 

For everyone As per Training Matrix Entry passes 

to be issued 

only after 

induction. 

4.1 Safety Statistics Monthly Monthly NA NA Monthly Monthly 

4.2 Weekly First Aid and Illness 

Reports 

4.3 Labour Report with 

Workhours 

Weekly Weekly DC Weekly Once a 

Week 

RAN 

Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily RAN 

4.4 Accident Reports NB As applicable 

4.5 Investigation Report NB As applicable

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 46 of 56 

ATTACHMENT D 




No Area 

Engineer 

5 Statutory requirements 

(Registration, Records of 

Payment, Licenses) 

6 Facilities 

Regular Once in 3 

months 

Safety 

Supervisor 


Safety 

Officer 

NA NA Monthly Once in 

Quarter 

i First Aid Regular RAN N.A Daily RAN Once in a 

Month 

ii Emergency care services 

(Doctor, Ambulance) 

iii Medical examination (Pre & 

Periodic) 

Advance 

arrangement. 

Regular 

RAN N.A Daily Periodic N.B. Once in a 

Month 

Periodic N.A N.A Periodic N.B. Once in a 

Month 

iv Temporary accommodation In the beginning. RAN N.A RAN RAN RAN 

v Drinking Water tank Filling everyday, 

cleaning once a 

week. 

vi Urinals & Latrines Daily sweeping 

arrangement. 

Through 

Records 

RAN N.A RAN N.B 

RAN N.A RAN RAN RAN If applicable 

vii Septic tank / Disposal system In the beginning. NB N.A RAN RAN RAN If applicable

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 47 of 56 

ATTACHMENT D 




No Area 

Engineer 

viii Mosquito control Once a week, 

disinfecting 

arrangement 

ix Crèches for Children below 6 

yrs. 

Required if 50 or 

more females 

employed at site 

x Canteen Required if more 

than 250 workers 

are employed. 

Through 

records 


Safety 

Supervisor 

Safety 

Officer 

N.A RAN RAN RAN If applicable 

RAN N.A Daily Monthly RAN 

RAN N.A Daily Monthly RAN If applicable 

xi Waste disposal Daily RAN N.A Daily Monthly RAN 

7 Fire fighting system NB Once in a 

month 

N.A RAN RAN RAN 

8 Traffic rules Daily Daily N.A DC RAN RAN 

9 Use of PPE Daily Daily By all, regular basis. 

10 Work permit system NB DC DC RAN RAN As applicable 

11 Safety publicity Continuous Periodic N.A N.A DC RAN 

12 Excavation NB NB DC DC RAN RAN NB 

13 Cutouts / openings NB NB DC DC RAN RAN NB

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 48 of 56 

ATTACHMENT D 




No Area 

Engineer 

Safety 

Supervisor 


Safety 

Officer 

14 Barricading NB Daily DC DC RAN RAN 

15 Scaffolds NB Regularly DC DC DTC RAN 

16 Ladders NB Regularly RAN RAN RAN RAN 

17 Welding / Cutting M/C. NB Once in 3 

months 

18 Elect. Hand tools & 

Distribution Boards. 

19 Mechanical Equipment NB Once in 6 

months 

DC DC DC RAN NB 

NB --”-- DC DC RAN RAN NB 

DC DC DTC RAN NB 

20 Load tests For Heavy lifts. DC N.A DTC DTC Formal 

procedure 

Required for 

heavy Lifts 

Note: 1. Contractors would be required to maintain records of inspection. 

2. Contractor will comply with any additional checks asked by consultant during execution of work from time to time. 

3. Consultant / Owner will have right to increase extent of checks. 

Legends: - DC : Detail checking (100%), 

DTC : Check in detail for critical items, 

RAN : Random verification, 

NB : Need based (involving co-ordination with Owner). 

NA : Not applicable

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 49 of 56 

ATTACHMENT E 

HSE – TRAINING ACTIVITIES 

Sr. Activity Training Hours Month-wise Remarks 

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

1 Induction 

2 Toolbox Talks 

3 Fire Fighting 

4 First Aid 

5 Emergency 

Response 

6 Risk Analysis 

7 Safe Plan of Action 

N.B. : Contractors to conduct for Labour as well as Supervisor / Engineer. 


Daily 

Daily 

Four times over 

Project period 

Two times 

Every Quarter 

For every new 

activity 

For all activities

JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 50 of 56 

ATTACHMENT F 

MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT. 

(To be submitted by each Contractor) 

Date of Starting Work: For the month of: 

Project : 


Sr. 

No. 

Item This Month Cumulative 

1 Total Strength (Staff + Workmen) 

2 Number of HSE meetings organized at 

site 

3 Whether workmen compensation policy 

taken 

4 Whether workmen compensation policy is 

valid 

5 Whether workmen registered under ESI 

Act 

6 Number of Fatal Accidents 

7 Number of Lost Time Accidents (other 

than Fatal) 

8 Other accidents (Non Lost Time) 

9 Total No. of Accidents 

10 Total work-hours worked 

11 Accidents without Injury (Dangerous 

occurrences) 

12 Compensation cases raised with 

Insurance 

13 Compensation cases resolved and paid to 

workmen 

Remarks : 

Please mark : ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ in Item No. 3, 4 & 5. 



JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 51 of 56 

JACOBS 

ATTACHMENT G 

MONTHLY SAFETY STATISTICS 

Project: Period: 


Number of Personnel on Site: Total Hours Worked: 

Number of Fatalities 

Number of Recordable Incidents 

Number of Lost Time Incidents 

Number of First aid Cases 

SUMMARY 

CLASSIFICATION OF CAUSE I * R * LT* F * 

1. Falls of Persons - 

2. Falls of Materials - 

3. Trench Collapses - 

4. Transport including Mobile Cranes - 

5. Handling Materials - 

6. Stepping on or striking objects - 

7. Hand Tools (other than power driven) - 

8. Mechanical Equipment including 

power tools - 

9. Electricity - 

10. Toxic or harmful substances - 

11. Fire or Burns - 

12. Other causes (specify as appropriate) - 

‘ * ‘ 

I : Safety Incident R = Recordable 

LT : Lost time F = Fatal 

Total 


Date : 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 52 of 56 

GENERAL DATA: 

1. 

Date of incident: 

2. Time of incident: 

3. Place of incident (area & location) 

4. Classification of incident (Fatal, LT, 

RI, potentially major) 

5. Type of incident? (Fall from height, 

electric shock etc.) 

6. Was anyone injured? 

7. If so, please give following details (if 

several people injured, attach a 

separate sheet for each) 

a) Name: 

b) Company: 

c) Gate pass no.: 

d) Date of entry at site: 

e) Age: 

f) Sex: 

8. Was any property damaged? 

9. If, yes please give details 

10. Were there any witnesses? 

a) Name: 

b) Activity at the time of the incident: 

11. Who is the responsible area 

supervisor? 

ATTACHMENT H 

INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 53 of 56 

RESPONSE AT THE POINT OF INCIDENT 

12. Who saw the incident first? 

13. Who else was present? (name) 

14. What was the response at the point of 

the incident? 

15. Was the area secured? 

16. Was the nurse called? 

a) Who called the nurse? 

b) When was the nurse called? 

c) When did the nurse arrive at the 

point of the incident? 

17. Did the nurse proceed directly to the 


18. Did the nurse bring the first aid kit? 

19. Was treatment administered at the 


a) By whom? 

20. Was the person giving treatment first 

aid qualified? 

21. Was the person taken to the first aid 

center? 

22. How was the injured person 

transported to the first aid center? 

23. Was a path cleared to evacuate the 

injured person? 

24. Was the ambulance used? 

a) Who called the ambulance? 

b) When was the ambulance called? 

c ) When did the ambulance arrive? 

d) Were the ambulance and driver 

ready when called? 

e) Were clear directions given to 

direct the ambulance to the point 

called? 

f) Was a path cleared for the 

ambulance? 

g) Did the ambulance proceed directly 

to the injured person? 

ATTACHMENT H 

INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT Contd... 


JACOBS 



Project 


08.11.06 Page 54 of 56 

ATTACHMENT H 

INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT Contd... 

FIRST AID CENTRE TREATMENT 

25. Was treatment given in the first aid 

center? 

26. What treatment was given? 

27. Was the nurse able to treat the injured 

person? 

28. Was the first aid center properly 

equipped? 

OFFSITE TREATMENT 

29. Was treatment given offsite? 

30. Where was treatment given offsite? 

31. How was the injured person 

transported to the offsite location? 

32. Was the ambulance used? 

a) Who called the ambulance? 

b) When was the ambulance called? 

c) When did the ambulance arrive? 

d) Were the ambulance and driver 

ready when called? 

e) Were clear directions given to 

direct the ambulance to the point 

called? 

f) Was a path cleared for the 

ambulance? 

g) Did the ambulance proceed directly 

to the point of offsite treatment? 

33. When did the injured person leave for 

the offsite treatment location? 

34. When did the injured person arrive at 

the offsite treatment location? 

35. What treatment was given? 


JACOBS 

SPECIFICATIONS FOR 

EARTHWORK 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0013-A4 

Rev No. Issue Date Pages Rev Description Prepared 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Earthwork.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 7 

Approved 

A 11/12/2006 7 Issued for client’s Approval RSJ DK MBR 

0 11/08/07 7 Issued for FEED RSJ DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 

Project Name: Lube Oil Stocks Upgradation Project. Document No: 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0013-A4 

Project No : 18-3188 Sheet 2 of 7 

Owner’s Name : Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited Revision : 0 

1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 

3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 

3.1 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL 


3.1.1 Soft / Loose Soil 

3.1.2 Hard / Dense Soil 

3.1.3 Soft / Disintegrated Rock 

3.1.4 Hard Rock ( General Blasting Permitted) 

3.1.5 Hard Rock (Old Controlled Blasting Permitted) 

3.1.6 Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited) 

3.2 MATERIAL FOR BACKFILLING 

3.3 SETTING OUT 

3.4 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION 

3.5 BLASTING IN HARD ROCK 

3.6 SHORING AND STRUTTING 

3.6.1 General 

3.7 BACKFILLING IN PLINTHS AND AROUND FOUNDATIONS 

3.7.1 General 

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EARTH 

3.8.1 General 

3.9 SANDFILLING IN PLINTHS AND FOUNDATIONS 

3.9.1 General 

3.10 HARD CORE / RUBBLE SOLING 

3.10.1 General 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Earthwork.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for Earthwork. 

This Specification establishes the classification of soils, constructional and performance 

requirements for earthwork in excavation and filling. In case of conflict between the clauses of 

this specification and those in the Indian Standards, this specification shall govern. 


3.1 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL 

The various types of soil shall be classified as follows: 

3.1.1 Soft / Loose Soil 

This shall be all those soils, which yield to the ordinary application of, pick and shovel, rake or any 

other ordinary digging implement. Soils such as gravel, sand, silt, loam, clay, peat, vegetable or 

organic soil, turf etc. are included in this classification. 

3.1.2 Hard / Dense Soil 

This shall include soils, which require the close application of pick, jumper or scarifier to loosen 

them. Stiff clays, gravels and cobble stones are included in such soils. 

3.1.3 Soft / Disintegrated Rock 

This classification shall include laterite and hard conglomerate. Rocks or boulders than can be 

quarried or split with a crowbar shall also be included. 

3.1.4 Hard Rock (General Blasting Permitted) 

This classification shall include Rocks and Boulders that require blasting for excavation. 

3.1.5 Hard Rock (Old Controlled Blasting Permitted) 

Hard rocks that require blasting, but for the excavation of which general blasting is prohibited for 

any reason, shall be included in this category. The method of controlled blasting shall be subject 

to the approval of Owner / Consultant. 

3.1.6 Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited) 

This shall include hard rocks that require blasting for excavation (i.e. as in category included at 

3.1.5) but where blasting is prohibited due to any reason and hence excavation has to be carried 

out by chiseling, wedging or any other approved method. 

3.2 MATERIAL FOR BACKFILLING 

Material used in the backfilling of excavation in foundations, trenches and elsewhere shall consist 

of any one of the following materials in each location. 

a) Soil 

b) Stone / gravel 

c) Sand 

d) Lean Concrete 

e) Selected earth from heaps or brought from borrows areas 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 6 technical specifications\specifications for earthwork.doc

JACOBS 




The material shall be free of roots, hard lumps, rubbish or any foreign organic material. 

All material shall be used only after the approval of Owner / Consultant. 

3.3 SETTING OUT 

The contractor shall be responsible for the accurate and proper setting out of the work with 

regard to lines and levels of reference, and with regard to the correctness of dimensions, 

alignments and levels of the work. The contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all necessary 

instruments, labour, material and equipment for this purpose. Should any error be discovered, at 

any time, during the progress of work or thereafter, in the dimensions, alignment or level of part 

or all of work, the contractor shall at his own expense rectify the errors to the satisfaction of the 

Owner / Consultant. Any checking of line or level by the Owner / Consultant shall in no way 

relieve the contractor of his responsibilities. 

The contractor shall prior to start of work layout one or more permanent bench marks at a central 

location from which all levels for the earthwork shall be set. All labour and materials for setting 

levels shall be at contractor's cost. Permanent benchmarks shall be made up of masonry pillars 

with a neatly plastered top and leveled as per the directions of Owner / Consultant. The 

benchmarks shall be well connected with a triangular grid system or other bench marks and the 

entire arrangement approved by the Owner / Consultant. 

3.4 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION 

Excavation shall be carried out to the lines and levels shown on drawing and the excavated 

material shall be removed to soil heaps on site or transported for use in filing on the site or 

otherwise stacked for reuse as directed. 

The sides of the excavation may, depending upon the site conditions pertaining at that time, be 

cut vertical, sloping or shored and strutted to hold the face of the earth as approved and directed 

by Owner / Consultant. 

The contractor shall remove all vegetation etc. obtained during excavation. 

Excavated material shall not be deposited closer than 1.5 M from the top edge of the excavation. 

Foundation pits / trenches shall be excavated to a depth 150 mm short of the full depth. The final 

150mm shall be excavated just prior to concreting. Alternately and at the discretion of the Owner 

/ Consultant the full depth may be excavated and the bed covered with a 75 mm thick layer of 

lean concrete of 1:5:10 nominal mix. (Or of such thickness and mix as are specified on drawings) 

after compacting the sub base. 

If the bottom of the excavation, has in the opinion of the Owner / Consultant, deteriorated due to 

exposure to water or atmosphere, the contractor shall remove the deteriorated material to such 

depth and width as directed by the Owner / Consultant and shall replace the same with lean 

concrete of 1:5:10 mix. The costs of all such excavation and concreting shall be borne by 

contractor. 

In case contractor excavates to a depth greater than the depth required, the contractor shall at his 

own expense fill upto required level with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix or as directed by the Owner / 

Consultant. 

The contractor shall at his own cost provide suitable drainage arrangement to prevent surface 

water from any source, from entering the excavation. 

The contractor shall at his own cost make all arrangements necessary for dewatering the 

accumulated water, from any source, in the excavated pits, trenches etc. 


JACOBS 




In case of excavation to be carried out adjacent and below the foundation level of adjoining 

structures, precautionary measures as directed by Owner / Consultant, such as pinning, shoring 

and strutting shall be carried out, prior to commencing excavations. 

In case the bottom of excavation at the required level is in the opinion of the Owner / Consultant 

unsuitable due to being soft or loose soil, the excavation shall be continued to a firm and suitable 

ground and the difference in levels made up with lean concrete of grade 1:5:10. 

In case where during excavation the sides collapse due to a reason not attributable to the 

contractor, the Owner / Consultant shall at his discretion admit payment for any additional 

resultant excavation. 

Any obstacles such as buried pipes, cables etc. met with during excavation shall be reported to 

the Owner / Consultant who shall give directions regarding protection / removal of the same. 

The contractor at his own expense shall take all measures necessary to prevent accidents on 

account of open excavations such as fencing, lighting and other suitable preventive measures. 

Concreting in foundations shall not commence prior to the excavations being approved by the 

Owner / Consultant. 

For excavation in rock the specification of earthwork shall apply. Special care shall be taken to 

prevent excavations beyond the width / depth required when excavating in rock. Any additional 

depth excavated shall be compensated by filling with lean concrete 1:5:10 at no additional cost to 

the owner. 

3.5 BLASTING IN HARD ROCK 

Where hard rock requiring blasting is encountered the contractor shall inform the owner / 

consultant and seek his approval. The contractor shall obtain a license from the District 

Authorities for obtaining, storing the explosives and for carrying out blasting operations as per 

Explosives Rules 1940 and as amended till date. The contractor shall buy all explosives, fuses, 

and detonators from licensed dealers only. Prior to the use of such explosives, the contractor 

shall be liable for their secure custody and accounting. The Owner / Consultant shall be provided 

access to check the contractors stock and accounts. The contractor shall be solely responsible 

for any accident or mishap to workmen, life or property due to blasting operations. 

Blasting shall not be done within 200m of an existing (previously constructed or under 

construction) structure without the specific approval of the Owner / Consultant for such close 

proximity operation. 

All blasting shall be carried out by trained personnel under the supervision of a responsible 

authorised agent of the contractor, who is conversant with all the rules for blasting. Blasting shall 

be carried out during specified hours only. 

Proper precautions shall be taken to ensure safety during such operations such as providing red 

flags prominently displayed around the area to be blasted and securing the withdrawal of all 

personnel, apart from these lighting the fuse, to a safe distance of not less than 200 meters from 

the blast. 

Blasting shall be carried out using gunpowder. Gelatine or dynamite or any other high explosive 

shall only be used in special cases and with the approval of Owner / Consultant. 

3.6 SHORING AND STRUTTING 

3.6.1 General 

Shoring and strutting of the sides to hold the vertical / inclined faces of the pits and trenches shall 

only be done when so approved and directed by Owner / Consultant. 


JACOBS 




The shoring shall be of close or open timbering type based on the site conditions and subject to 

the approval of the Owner / Consultant. 

The strutting shall not be spaced more than 1.5 m apart and the shoring planks shall be held tight 

by means of wedges. 

The arrangements of shoring and strutting shall be got approved from the Owner / Consultant 

prior to start of work. The arrangement shall be sound and safe and any approval obtained from 

Owner / Consultant shall not reduce the responsibility of the contractor in any manner. 

The shoring and strutting shall be kept in position until all the work involving the excavation is 

completed and approved by the Owner / Consultant. 

3.7 BACKFILLING IN PLINTHS AND AROUND FOUNDATIONS 

3.7.1 General 

Backfilling around completed foundations, pits, structures, trenches and in plinth shall be carried 

out to the levels and lines shown on the drawings, including any trimming of the surface where 

required. 

The backfilling shall be carried out with selected and approved excavated material or in case the 

excavated earth does not yield sufficient quantity of suitable material, suitable earth from other 

sources shall be imported upon the instruction of the Owner / Consultant. 

The filling shall be done in layers of 150 mm (maximum) thickness. Each layer shall be watered, 

rolled and rammed using manual methods or mechanical compactors to obtain 90% laboratory 

maximum dry density . 

Backfilling around liquid retaining structures shall be undertaken only after satisfactory completion 

and approval of hydrotest. Backfilling around pipes shall be done only after the Owner / 

Consultant has approved the results of testing against leakage. 

Backfilling work around structures shall be taken up only after obtaining permission of Owner / 

Consultant. 

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS EARTH 

3.8.1 General 

Surplus earth and soil from excavation shall be removed from the construction area to the area 

out side the refinery premises in BMC approved land as directed by the Owner / Consultant. 

3.9 SANDFILLING IN PLINTHS AND FOUNDATIONS 

3.9.1 General 

The sand used for filling shall be clean, hard and free from organic, deleterious matter and dust 

and shall be approved by Owner / Consultant. 

Filling shall be carried out in layers of maximum thickness 150 mm and shall be compacted either 

mechanically or by saturation to obtain 90% laboratory maximum dry density to the specified 

level. Compaction by flooding may be permitted at the discretion of the Owner / Consultant 

provided the required compaction is achieved. 

Filling in and around any work shall commence only after obtaining the permission of Owner / 

Consultant. 


JACOBS 




3.10 HARD CORE / RUBBLE SOLING 


Hard core shall be of broken stones, which are sound, hard and free from dust, flakes and other 

impurities. 

Hard core shall be laid by placing broken stones of required height vertically. Interspaces shall be 

hand packed with smaller sized stones followed by blinding with approved quality murrum / sand. 

Consolidation shall be done with a rammer / roller in conjunction with watering. The hard core 

shall be dressed to the specified grade, level and thickness. 


JACOBS 

Project Name: Lube Oil Stocks Upgradation Project. Document No: 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 



admixtures, if used, shall be measured by weight and liquid or paste admixtures shall be 

measured by volume or weight. Water may be measured by weight or by volume in calibrated 

tanks. All measuring devices shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition and their 

calibration checked periodically. Batching plant, conforming to IS:4925, shall preferably be used. 

The grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked at frequent intervals to ensure that 

the grading meets the requirements of the mix design. The grading of aggregates shall be 

obtained by blending aggregates of different sizes in the right proportions. 

The quantity of water to be added shall be adjusted on account of variations in the moisture 

content in both fine and coarse aggregates as given in IS:2386 Pt.III. Similarly the weights of 

aggregates shall also be adjusted due to variation in moisture contents. Ice shall be added 

during hot weather concreting. 

No substitution of materials or change in the established mix proportions (excepting those made 

to account for the variation in moisture content) shall be permitted without additional tests to 

prove to the satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant the adequacy of concrete strength and quality. 

3.3.5 Cement Content 

Minimum cement content shall be as per IS:456. Cement content more than 350 Kg/m 3 shall be 

allowed only with prior approval of Owner / Consultant. 

3.4 MIXING 

Concrete shall be mixed in an approved type of mechanical concrete mixer till such time that 

there is an uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is homogenous and uniform in 

colour and consistency. In case of segregation after unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall 

be re-mixed. Hand mixing shall not be accepted. 

3.4.1 Equipment 

The mixers shall comply with IS : 1791 and shall be maintained in satisfactory operating 

condition. All care shall be taken to keep the mixer drum free of hardened concrete. The blades 

shall be replaced when they are worn down by more than 10% of their depth. Should any mixers 

performance be unsatisfactory on account of waste of material, leakage of mortar or inadequate 

mixing in specified time, the mixer shall be removed from operation until it is repaired to the 

satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant. 

3.4.2 Mixing Time 

The minimum Mixing time shall be as indicated below. 

Mixer Capacity Minimum Mixing Time 

2 m 3 & less 1.5 min. 

3 m 3 2.5 min. 

5 m 3 3 min. 

Mixing time shall be computed from the time when all solid materials have been poured into the 

revolving drum with the further provision that the entire mixing water shall be added prior to the 

elapse of one-fourth the mixing time. Excessive mixing shall not be permitted. 

\\nmumfil01\project\WIP\18-3188\Civil\Tender document for SRR and Sub-station building\New Folder\Specifications for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete.doc

JACOBS 


PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 


A 

\\nmumfil01\project\WIP\18-3188\Civil\Tender document for SRR and Sub-station building\New Folder\Specifications for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 18 

Approved 

11/12/2006 18 Issued for client’s Approval RSJ DK MBR 


1 09/10/07 18 Issued for Tender SJV DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 



3.1 MATERIALS 

3.2 TYPES AND GRADES 

3.3 PROPORTIONING 

3.4 MIXING 

3.5 REINFORCEMENT : CUTTING, BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING 

3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING 

3.7 COMPACTION 

3.8 EMBEDDED ITEMS IN CONCRETE 

3.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 

3.10 CURING 

3.11 PROTECTION OF IMMATURE CONCRETE 

3.12 CUBE TESTING FOR STRENGTH OF CONCRETE 

3.13 TESTING OF STRUCTURES 

3.14 FINISHING TO CONCRETE 

3.15 MINOR REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 

3.16 GROUTING 

3.17 FORMWORK 

3.18 STAGING / SCAFFOLDING 

3.19 PRECAST CONCRETE 

4.0 RELATED DOCUMENTATION 



JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 

The purpose of this document is to state the requirements of material, workmanship and 

construction procedure to be followed during the execution of plain and reinforced cement 

concrete works. 

This specification establishes the requirements of materials, mixing, placing, curing etc. of all 

types of concrete, cast-in-situ as well as precast, used in various structures, at any locations such 

as foundations, floors, roofs, tanks, etc., both above ground and underground. Any special 

requirements as shown or noted on the drawings shall govern over the provisions of this 

specification. 

2.1 The construction of plain and reinforced concrete works shall also be in accordance with IS:456 

and the other codes mentioned therein. In case of conflict between the clauses of this 

specification and those in the IS:456, this specification shall govern. 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.1.1 Aggregate 

a. General 

Coarse and fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to IS:383. Aggregates shall consist of sand, 

gravel, stones, either crushed or uncrushed, or a suitable combination of them. Aggregates shall 

be obtained from a source known to produce aggregates satisfactory for concrete. The source of 

the aggregate shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant. The aggregates shall be chemically 

inert, strong, hard, dense, durable, clean and free of adherent coatings, vegetable matter, 

injurious amounts of alkalis and other deleterious substances. Elongated and flaky pieces shall 

not be used. 

When directed by the Owner / Consultant, the aggregates shall be washed by the contractor 

before use in the works. Washing of aggregates shall be done away from the project site. 

b. Deleterious Materials 

The aggregates shall not contain harmful materials that affect the strength or durability of 

concrete or cause corrosion of the reinforcement. Materials that could have such adverse effects 

are iron, pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale or similar laminated material, clay, soft fragments, 

sulphates, chlorides, sea shells, organic impurity etc. Further aggregates that react with the 

alkalis of cement shall not be used. Materials that pass 75 micron IS sieve shall also be classified 

as deleterious. 

The total of all deleterious materials present in coarse aggregate, crushed or uncrushed, and in 

uncrushed fine aggregate shall not exceed five percent by weight, whereas for crushed fine 

aggregates it shall not exceed two percent by weight. The quantities of deleterious materials in 

the aggregates shall be determined in accordance with IS:2386 (Part II) - Methods of test for 

aggregates for concrete. The maximum quantities shall not exceed the limits defined in Table 1 of 

IS:383. 


JACOBS 




c. Fine Aggregates 

Fine aggregate is the aggregate which passes 4.75 mm IS sieve, but of which only a maximum of 

10% passes through 150 micron I.S. sieve. The fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements 

of grading Zones I, II and III given in table 4 of IS 383. Fine aggregates conforming to grading 

Zone IV shall not normally be used, unless tests have been made by the contractor to determine 

the suitability of the aggregate with the proposed mix proportions and are duly approved by the 

Owner / Consultant. The grading of fine aggregates shall be determined in accordance with IS- 

2386 (Pt.1). 

Fine aggregates shall consist of natural sand obtained due to the natural disintegration of rock 

and which is deposited by rivers, streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand or crushed 

gravel sand. the use of sea sand shall not be allowed. The source of sand shall also be free from 

the tidal effects of backwaters of sea. 

The volume of sand used in nominal mixes shall be adjusted to cater for the effects of bulking 

when measurement is by loose volume. 

The percentage bulking shall be determined by laboratory tests as and when directed by the 


d. Coarse Aggregate 

Coarse aggregate is aggregate, most of which is retained on 4.75 mm I.S. sieve. It shall have a 

specific gravity (saturated surface dry basis) of not less than 2.6 coarse aggregates shall consist 

of crushed or uncrushed stone or gravel conforming to above mentioned clauses. They may be 

supplied as single sized or as graded aggregates conforming to table 1 of IS:383. The use of "Allin-Aggregates" 

may be permitted by the Owner / Consultant provided they meet the requirements 

of IS:383. Rounded aggregates such as gravel, shall be preferred over angular varieties. 

e. Sampling and Testing 

The Owner / Consultant may require the contractor to carry out tests at the contractors expense, 

in accordance with IS-2386 - Methods of test for aggregates of concrete. Sampling shall be 

carried out as per IS-2430. 

f. Storage of Aggregates 

The contractor shall at all times maintain sufficient quantities of fine and coarse aggregates so as 

to permit placement at the required rate. The aggregate shall be stored on hard, firm ground 

having sufficient slope to provide adequate drainage to water. All necessary care shall be taken to 

prevent the intrusion of foreign matter. Aggregate shall be stored at site in such a manner so as 

to obtain segregation based on type, grade and source. 

Any aggregate becoming wet at site due to rain or other means, or delivered wet shall not be 

used for at least twenty four hours to obtain adequate drainage. Alternately, the water content of 

the mix shall be suitably adjusted and the same approved by the Owner / Consultant. 

3.1.2 Cement 

a. General 

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269-1989 for grade 33 cement, 

IS:8112-1989 for grade 43 cement, IS 12269 for grade 53 cement, hydrophobic cement 

conforming to IS:8043, Portland Slag cement conforming to IS:455 or Sulphate Resistant cement 

conforming to IS:12330, as specified, or as directed by the Owner / Consultant. Portland 

Pozzolana cement, when permitted by Owner / consultant shall conform to IS:1489. High Alumina 


JACOBS 




admixtures, if used, shall be measured by weight and liquid or paste admixtures shall be 

measured by volume or weight. Water may be measured by weight or by volume in calibrated 

tanks. All measuring devices shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition and their 

calibration checked periodically. Batching plant, conforming to IS:4925, shall preferably be used. 

The grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked at frequent intervals to ensure that 

the grading meets the requirements of the mix design. The grading of aggregates shall be 

obtained by blending aggregates of different sizes in the right proportions. 

The quantity of water to be added shall be adjusted on account of variations in the moisture 

content in both fine and coarse aggregates as given in IS:2386 Pt.III. Similarly the weights of 

aggregates shall also be adjusted due to variation in moisture contents. Ice shall be added 

during hot weather concreting. 

No substitution of materials or change in the established mix proportions (excepting those made 

to account for the variation in moisture content) shall be permitted without additional tests to 

prove to the satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant the adequacy of concrete strength and quality. 

3.3.5 Cement Content 

Minimum cement content shall be as per IS:456. Cement content more than 350 Kg/m 3 shall be 

allowed only with prior approval of Owner / Consultant. 

3.4 MIXING 

Concrete shall be mixed in an approved type of mechanical concrete mixer till such time that 

there is an uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is homogenous and uniform in 

colour and consistency. In case of segregation after unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall 

be re-mixed. Hand mixing shall not be accepted. 

3.4.1 Equipment 

The mixers shall comply with IS : 1791 and shall be maintained in satisfactory operating 

condition. All care shall be taken to keep the mixer drum free of hardened concrete. The blades 

shall be replaced when they are worn down by more than 10% of their depth. Should any mixers 

performance be unsatisfactory on account of waste of material, leakage of mortar or inadequate 

mixing in specified time, the mixer shall be removed from operation until it is repaired to the 

satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant. 

3.4.2 Mixing Time 

The minimum Mixing time shall be as indicated below. 

Mixer Capacity Minimum Mixing Time 

2 m 3 & less 1.5 min. 

3 m 3 2.5 min. 

5 m 3 3 min. 

Mixing time shall be computed from the time when all solid materials have been poured into the 

revolving drum with the further provision that the entire mixing water shall be added prior to the 

elapse of one-fourth the mixing time. Excessive mixing shall not be permitted. 


JACOBS 




Nominal Mix Concrete shall be prepared without preliminary test by adopting the proportions of 

materials as specified in the table below. Only graded coarse aggregates shall be used. 

All the requirements of IS:456 for nominal mix concrete shall also apply. 

Concrete Grade Maximum qty of 

water per 50 Kg of 

cement (litres) 

(M7.5) 

(M10) 

(M15) 

(M20) 

45 

34 

32 

30 

Maximum qty of dry 

aggregates by weight 

(the sum of weights of 

fine and coarse 

aggregate) (Kilogram) 

per 50 Kg of cement 

Ratio of fine to coarse 

aggregate (by weight) 

\\nmumfil01\project\WIP\18-3188\Civil\Tender document for SRR and Sub-station building\New Folder\Specifications for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete.doc 

625 

480 

330 

250 

See Note 

Note: 

The ratio of fine to coarse aggregate shall generally be 1:2, but subject to a lower limit of 1:2.5 and an 

upper limit of 1:1.5. As the grading of the fine aggregates become finer and the maximum size of the 

coarse aggregate becomes larger, the ratio should be adjusted from the upper limit to the lower limit. 

Design Mix Concrete shall be designed to achieve requisite workability and characteristic strength 

not less than the specified strength according to procedure given in Indian Standard 

Recommended Guidelines for concrete mix design IS : 10262. 

Preliminary mix design shall be established well ahead of start of work. The Owner / Consultant 

shall sanction the use of the concrete mix based on verification of the strength of concrete as also 

the workability for the particular placement condition. Such a sanction shall in no way absolve the 

contractor of his responsibility of providing concrete of the prescribed strength. If subsequent 

routine cube tests during execution show strengths lower than permitted, the Owner / Consultant 

shall order fresh trial mixes to be made by the contractor. Such changes in mix design shall not 

constitute grounds / basis for any alteration in LSTK price. 

3.3.2 Water Cement Ratio 

After the design mix has been approved by the Owner / Consultant, the prescribed water - 

cement ratio shall be maintained. The contractor shall at frequent intervals determine the water 

content of the aggregates and thus adjust the amount of mixing water so as to maintain the 

specified water - cement ratio. 

Water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.5 for structural concrete. 

3.3.3 Workability 

The design mix concrete proportions shall be determined such that adequate workability is 

available for the placing condition and the compaction means available. Plasticisers shall be 

used as required, but not exceeding limits specified in IS:456. 

3.3.4 Batching 

For the purpose of proportioning the various constituents of concrete, the quantity of both cement, 

coarse and fine aggregates shall be determined by weight. The cement should preferably be 

weighed at site and not in bags. In case the weight of cement is determined on the basis of 

weight of cement in a bag, with the bag forming the unit of measurement, a sufficient number of 

bags should be weighed periodically to assess the net weight of cement per bag. Solid

JACOBS 




cement, conforming to IS:6452 shall be used only if specified and in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

Grade 53 cement shall be used with caution with due consideration to higher heat of hydration 

and cracks on concrete surface. If used proper curing to be done. 

Grade 53 cement shall not be used in concrete for water retaining structures. 

b. Storage at Site 

The cement shall be stored in a dry, weather-tight building which is well ventilated. It shall be 

stacked in such a manner so as to prevent deterioration due to moisture, or warehouse 

deterioration as also permit access for routine inspection. Stacks shall be segregated on the 

basis of type and brand. stacks shall not be more than twelve bags high. 

All approved and accepted cement shall be stored in batches with date of receipt prominently 

displayed. the cement shall be used in the same sequence as of receipt. For any individual 

structure only one brand per type of cement shall be used. The contractor shall maintain a daily 

register logging the type, date of receipt source as also the daily consumption and balance. This 

register shall be available to the Owner / consultant for verification. 

The capacity of the contractors cement go down shall be commensurate with the requirements of 

the construction schedule. Storage and stacking of construction materials and components at site 

shall conform to IS:4082. 

c. Testing 

The Owner / Consultant may at his discretion require each consignment of cement (supplied by 

Client or by contractor) to be tested for any or all of the tests required by the relevant IS codes. 

The costs of all such tests shall be borne by the contractor. However, cement required for testing 

can be considered in preparation of reconciliation statement in case supply is by Client. 

d. Rejection 

The Owner / Consultant may reject any cement, not withstanding the manufacturers certificate, 

on account of test results, or deteriorated cement on account of ingress of moisture or foreign 

matter, or cement reclaimed from leaking containers or by cleaning bags. Such defective and 

rejected cement shall be promptly removed from the site by the contractor, at his own expense. 

3.1.3 Reinforcement 

3.1.4 Water 

All reinforcement shall conform to one of the following: 

1. IS:1786 Epoxy coated high Strength deformed bars Fe-415 for concrete 

reinforcement 

2. IS:432 Part 1 Mild steel round bars. 

3. IS:1566 Hard drawn steel wire fabric. 

Bending of steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with IS:2502. Reinforcement steel shall be 

free from scales, dust, rust, paint, oil, grout or any other coating that affect bond with concrete. 

Welded mesh fabric shall be made of hard drawn steel wire, the wires being electrically cross 

welded at every intersection such that a homogenous wire mat is obtained. 

Water used for cement concrete, curing, grout, mortar, plaster and for washing of coarse 

aggregate shall be clear and free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, 

sugar, vegetable matter and any other harmful substance in such amount that may reduce the 


JACOBS 




3.5 REINFORCEMENT : CUTTING, BENDING, PLACING AND FIXING 

Cold twisted deformed bars shall be bent cold. Plain bars of size 25 mm and above may be bent 

hot if approved by the Owner / Consultant. Bars bent hot shall not be heated beyond cherry red 

colour (850°C) and shall be allowed to cool slowly without quenching after being bent. Bars that 

develop cracks or splits due to the process of bending shall be rejected. Bars bent incorrectly 

shall not be allowed to be re-bent and shall be rejected. When bars are temporarily bent at 

construction joints, care shall be taken to provide the minimum stipulated radius for the bend. 

Further, when the bar is bent back into position, care shall be taken that no concrete is damaged. 

Prior to placing reinforcement it shall if necessary be cleaned of all loose rust, scales, oil, grease, 

paint etc. the reinforcement shall be placed in position as shown in drawings. Bars crossing each 

other shall be securely tied at such points with two strands of 16 SWG black soft annealed 

binding wire. Crossing bars shall not be tack welded. 

Specified covers for beams and slabs shall be provided by means of precast covers blocks 

having the same cement and sand ratio as the concrete mix of size 40 mm x 40 mm and having a 

thickness equal to the specified cover and shall be securely placed between the bar and the form. 

In case of successive layers of bars, the distance between two such layers shall be maintained by 

the provision of M.S.Spacer bar at such intervals that the bars do not sag, but in no case further 

than 1 to 1.2 M centres. 

In case of deep rafts and pile caps suitable chairs shall be provided to maintain distances and 

levels. 

As far as possible only full lengths of bars shall be used but in case this is not feasible the bars 

shall be lapped at points where the bending moment is minimum as also shear force is not 

maximum. The laps shall have sufficient length to transfer the full stress. The overlapping bars 

shall be tied with two strands of 16 SWG black soft annealed binding wire. Laps shall be 

staggered along the span / height of the member. 

Welding of reinforcement shall be carried out only after obtaining the approval of the Owner / 

Consultant. In such cases the welding shall conform to the provisions of IS:2751 and IS: 9417. 

Tests to prove that the welds transmit the full strength of a bar shall be conducted. Not more 

than 50% of bars to be lapped at any cross section. 

Tolerances for placement of reinforcement are as follows: 

1. Cover + 3mm; - 0 mm 

2. Position in elements having 

a) Effective depth of 200 mm & less + 10 mm 

b) Effective depth greater than 200 mm + 15 mm 

3.6 TRANSPORTATION AND PLACING 

3.6.1 Approval for Pouring 

Prior to pouring concrete, the programme for placing, with a detailed stepwise scheme of 

transporting and placing the concrete, mentioning equipment being deployed, location, procedure 

and methods shall be submitted to the Owner / Consultant for approval, at least 48 hours prior to 

concreting. 

3.6.2 Transportation 

Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the pouring location as rapidly as practicable 

taking all care to avoid segregation and loss of constituents, and maintenance of the required 

workability, before initial setting time of cement. Buckets, hoists, containers or conveyors which 

are mortar leak-proof shall be employed for this purpose. Truck mounted transit mixers shall be 

used where the distance between batching plant and placement location is large. All equipment 


JACOBS 




shall be maintained in a good and clean condition by thoroughly clearing them after each period 

of placement. During hot or cold weather, care shall be taken to avoid evaporation loss of water 

or loss of heat by suitable means. 

3.6.3 Placing 

a.) Chutes 

Open troughs and chutes shall be equipped with baffles and be of short lengths to prevent 

segregation. The slope of the chute shall not be less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal, nor more than 

1 vertical to 2 horizontal. Chutes shall be designed such that the concrete at the lower end 

passes through a funnel shaped pipe or drop chute thus causing a certain degree of re-mixing. 

Alternately they should discharge into a hopper from which concrete is further conveyed in wheel 

barrows. In case drop chutes are used the maximum lateral flow of the discharged concrete shall 

be limited to one meter. When drop chutes are swung from the vertical, the bottom two segments 

must be vertical in order to prevent segregation. No water shall be added at any point of the chute 

system to facilitate movement of concrete. Concrete shall not be permitted to fall freely for a 

height of more than 1.5 m nor to strike the forms at an angle. all chutes, troughs and pipes shall 

be flushed with water at the end of each run to keep them clean and free from coatings of 

hardened concrete. Water used for flushing shall be discharged well away from the structure. 

The use of long troughs, chutes and pipes shall be permitted only with the specific written 

approval of Owner / Consultant. In case the conveying arrangement produces unsatisfactory 

results, the Owner / Consultant may withdraw the permission for their use. 

b.) Pouring 

Prior to placing concrete in foundation, all the soil surfaces upon which or against which the 

concrete is to be placed, shall be thoroughly compacted. The excavation shall be free from all 

water and debris. Soft or yielding soils shall be removed and replaced with appropriate selected 

soils or lean concrete compacted to the desired density. When concrete comes in direct contact 

with absorptive soil, the surface of the soil shall be thoroughly moistened prior to placing 

concrete. 

No concrete shall be placed prior to the inspection and approval by Owner / Consultant of the 

formwork, scaffolding, placement of reinforcement and embedded items etc. any water collected 

over formwork or bedding surfaces shall be removed. 

Concrete shall be discharged by means of vertical drop only. The drop height shall not exceed 

1.5 m in any stage of delivery until the concrete comes to reset in the forms. 

To avoid re-handling of concrete, it should be deposited as near as possible to its final position. 

Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers of thickness not exceeding 300 mm. Individual units 

of deposit such as bucket loads shall be spotted at regular intervals over the layer to aid in the 

spreading of a layer of uniform thickness and consistency. In case any tendency to segregation is 

noticed, it shall be corrected by shovelling aggregate into mortar and not mortar over aggregate. 

All care shall be taken to prevent the formation of stone pockets or mortar accumulations in 

corners of formwork. In case they are formed they shall be removed and refilled ensuring 

bondage with the earlier concrete. 

Concrete shall be deposited in such manner so as to cause no disturbance to reinforcement or 

formwork. All temporary bracings for the formwork within the area to be concreted shall be 

removed once the level of concrete within the form ensures stability of the form. Under no 

circumstances should the temporary bracing be left within the concrete. 

Once concreting has begun it shall be carried out in a single continuous operation until the 

completion of all the work for that particular section or between construction joints has been 

completed. The location of construction joints, other than those shown on drawing shall be 

previously approved by the Owner / Consultant. 


JACOBS 




When concrete is to be placed in roof slabs, the entire slab and beams (or portion between 

expansion joints for large roofs) shall be covered in one single operation without joints or breaks. 

Concreting in extreme temperatures, above 40°C or below 5°C shall be carried out as per 

procedure given in IS : 7861. 

Pumps shall be employed where required. 

c. Concreting Under Water 

Prior to start of work, the contractor shall submit to the Owner / Consultant for his approval, the 

proposed method, equipment, materials and proportions of mix. 

The concrete mix shall have a ratio of fine to coarse aggregate varying between 1:1.5 of 1:2 and 

the additional cement content over that required for dry placement shall be a minimum of 10 

percent. The concrete shall have a slump of not less than 100mm and not more than 180mm. 

Concrete shall be deposited continuously until it reaches the required height. Concrete shall 

deposited either by tremie, drop bottom bucket or by grouting as indicated in clauses 14.2.4 (a), 

(b) and (d) of IS : 456. 


3.7.1 Vibrators 

No concrete work shall commence prior to ensuring that adequate number of vibrators are 

available. Each layer of concrete shall be compacted with immersion type mechanical vibrating 

equipment with an operational frequency between 8000 to 12000 cpm. 

The use of form vibrators shall be permitted at the sole discretion of Owner / Consultant. The use 

of surface vibrators such as beam type or screed board type may be permitted by Owner / 

Consultant for slabs & sections of thickness less than 200 mm. Vibrators shall in no case be 

used for the transport of concrete within forms. 

3.7.2 Method of Compaction 

Each layer of concrete shall be compacted using the mechanical vibrators in conjunction with 

hand spading and tamping. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted at intervals of around 

600 mm, the spacing adjusted to provide overlap with the area vibrated through insertions. The 

exact spacing shall depend upon the mix proportions and performance of equipment. The 

duration of vibration shall be limited to the time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation 

without causing segregation. Minimum vibration time shall be 20 seconds per 0.1m 2 of exposed 

surface. The concrete shall be worked around reinforcement, embedded items and into corners 

of formwork. 

The vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed as also the layer below while it is still plastic so 

as to avoid a cold joint between layers and ensure homogeneity and a good bond. Care shall also 

be taken while the layer is advancing horizontally to ensure bond and homogeneity between 

successive batches by means of vibrators. The vibrators shall not come in contact with either the 

formwork or the reinforcing steel. 

3.8 EMBEDDED ITEMS IN CONCRETE 

The contractor shall fabricate and / or fix all the M.S. inserts, anchor bolts, anchor plates, pipe 

sleeves, pipe spouts, electrical conduits, junction boxes, pockets, holes for grouting etc. as per 

relevant drawings at locations and elevations as shown on drawings. In case laying if electrical 

conduits etc. is within the scope of a separate agency, the contractor shall fully co-ordinate with 


JACOBS 




such agencies extending the facilities required. Pockets to be provided as per drawing for 

foundation. 

3.9 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 

3.9.1 General 

Construction joints shall be minimum in number and provided only at locations shown on 

approved drawings. Any additional construction joint required due to constraints of equipment, 

time etc. shall be provided only after obtaining the approval of Owner / Consultant. The joints 

where provided, should be at right angles to the direction of main reinforcement. Provisions of Cl. 

13.4 of IS:456 shall be followed. 

The preferred location for joints in columns shall be at an elevation of 100 to 150 mm below the 

soffit of the deepest beam framing there. Joints shall be avoided for slabs and beams. If found 

unavoidable the joint shall be vertical and at a location approved by Owner / Consultant. 

Vertical joints shall be obtained through the use of a stop board having slots for the longitudinal 

reinforcement. A trapezoidal or triangular fillet shall be nailed to the board to form a key. Any 

concrete which has flowed through the stop board shall be cleaned immediately after the initial 

set. 

Construction of grade slabs and paving shall be in chess board pattern, i.e. alternate panels 

(size approx. 7.5 m X 7.5 m) in each direction should be cast and cured and then remaining 

panels are to be cast after curing of the previously cast panels. 

When concreting is taken up at surface which has not fully hardened, the wet surface shall be 

scrubbed with wire brushes to remove all laitance, care being taken to avoid disturbance of 

aggregates. The surface shall then be thoroughly wetted, with all free water on the forms being 

completely removed. The surface shall now be coated with neat cement slurry and a layer of 

concrete of 150 mm thickness shall then be placed and well rammed against the old concrete, 

care being taken to fill corners and other areas having small clearances. This shall be followed by 

concrete placement and compaction in the regular fashion. 

When concreting is taken up against a surface which has hardened, the surface shall be 

roughened using wire brushes and compressed air so as to expose the coarse aggregate. The 

surface shall then be swept clean, wetted, and the excess water removed from the form. Vertical 

joints shall receive a coat of neat cement slurry whereas horizontal joints shall be covered with a 

10mm to 15 mm cement sand mortar having the same proportions as the cement and sand in the 

concrete mix. Concreting in the normal fashion shall immediately follow. 

Reinforcing rods shall be extended a minimum of 50 diameters beyond the construction joint. In 

the case of columns the portion of columns between the stopping off level and the top of slab 

shall be concreted with the beam. A minimum period of two hours must elapse after depositing 

concrete in columns before placing of concrete in beams, girders or slabs thereon. Beams, 

girders, brackets, column capitals and branches shall be considered as part of the floor system 

and shall be monolithically placed. 

3.9.2 Expansion Joint 

Pre-moulded bituminous filler board (Shalitex of STP or approved equivalent make) is to be 

provided in construction joints which are also expansion joints. Top of joint shall be sealed with 

an approved flexible joint sealing compound. 

3.10 CURING 

All concrete shall be cured by covering with a layer of sacking, canvass, hessian or other similar 

material which will hold moisture for long periods. The covering should not stain or disfigure the 


JACOBS 




concrete. The covering layer shall be kept continuously wet, starting 8 hours after placement (4 

hours in hot weather) for a minimum period of 7 days. For concrete using low heat cement, 

supersulphated or high alumina cements, the period shall be modified as per manufacturers 

specifications. 

For the curing of flat surfaces, the curing for the first 24 hours shall be with a covering as 

mentioned above followed by ponding for the balance period. A minimum water depth of 25mm 

shall be maintained continuously. 

In special cases curing compounds of approved make may be used in place of moist curing if so 

permitted by Owner / Consultant. The compounds shall be applied to the surface of the concrete 

soon after the concrete has set. 

3.11 PROTECTION OF IMMATURE CONCRETE 

Approved means shall be adopted to prevent immature concrete from damage due to debris, 

backfilling, vibrations, floatation, loading abrasion, deleterious matter or any other influence that 

may impair the strength and durability of concrete. Concrete placed below ground level shall be 

protected from falling earth. The concrete shall be prevented from coming in contact with the 

earth or ground water for the first three days after placement. The ground water level shall be 

lowered to an approved level by suitable means to prevent floatation or flooding. 

3.12 CUBE TESTING FOR STRENGTH OF CONCRETE 

Samples shall be drawn as per IS 1199 and cubes made as per IS 516. The drawing of samples 

should be spread over the entire period of concreting as also over the various mixing units. The 

minimum frequency of sampling shall be as follows, but at least one sample shall be drawn per 

shift. 

Volume of concrete in the work (m 3 ) Minimum number of samples 

1 - 5 1 

6 - 15 2 

16 - 30 3 

31 - 50 4 

50 and over 4 plus 

one per additional unit of 50 m 3 

A minimum of six cubes shall be prepared from each sample, three for testing after 28 days and 

three for testing after 7 days. Additional cubes should be taken if so advised by the Owner / 

Consultant for carrying out compressive strength check on concrete cured by accelerated 

methods as laid down in IS 9013. 

The specimens shall be tested as per IS 516. The 28 days compressive strength specified in IS 

456 Table 2 shall be the criteria for acceptance or rejection of concrete. In case the concrete is 

rejected the contractor shall be required to dismantle all such defective portion of work along with 

the other work structurally connected with the same. The Owner / Consultant shall solely decide 

the quantity of work or the part of structure to be dismantled. 

The test strength of the sample shall be the average of the strength of three specimens. With the 

individual strengths of specimens not varying by more than + 15 percent of the average. 

Standard deviation shall be calculated as per IS 456. 

3.13 TESTING OF STRUCTURES 

Should the 28 days cube strengths results be such that the concrete does not conform to the 

limits set by the acceptance criteria, or should the Owner / Consultant have other doubts about 


JACOBS 




the adequacy of the strength of the structure due to poor workmanship, honeycombing, 

inadequate cover, premature removal of forms, improper curing, etc., the Owner / consultant may 

ask the contractor to perform either in-situ testing of concrete or a load test on the structure. Insitu 

tests may comprise all or one of the following. Rebound hammer test, ultrasonic test, removal 

of cores or any other test specified by Owner / Consultant. The necessity for the tests and their 

number be at the sole discretion of Owner / Consultant. 

3.14 FINISHING TO CONCRETE 

The face of concrete intended to be rendered shall be left with a rough finish so as to form a key. 

The top surface of slab which is not intended to be covered with other materials, shall be levelled 

and floated to a smooth finish to the levels and falls shown on the drawing. The floating shall not 

be done in such a manner which would bring excess fines to the surface. Any other surface not in 

contact with the shutters shall also be smoothed with a wooden float. 

Surfaces which are not to be plastered nor receive any other treatment may be provided one coat 

of cement wash if so directed by Owner / Consultant. 

3.15 MINOR REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 

After the striking of the formwork, all concrete work shall be inspected for defects. The Owner / 

Consultant shall at his discretion permit repair of such defective work or reject it. No extra 

payment shall be permitted for the rectification, dismantling and reconstruction of structures or 

part thereof. 

Rectification of burrs and uneven faces shall be achieved by rubbing them smooth with a 

carborundum stone. This and other repair work shall be performed as soon as possible after the 

striking of forms so that the concrete has not hardened completely. Areas of segregation, stone 

pockets and other damaged areas shall be chipped and all loose material removed with 

compressed air or by washing, taking care to remove all water from the concrete. For larger 

repairs concrete shall be chipped out to a depth of 100-150mm. Loose mortar shall be scrubbed 

out using wire brushes. Based on the assessment of Owner / Consultant additional reinforcement 

shall be spliced onto existing reinforcement. 

Bonding of old concrete with the repair material shall be achieved by wetting the chipped out 

surface and either sprinkling dry cement on the wet surface or by brushing in a coat of rich 

cement grout (1 cement = 1 sand) followed by the patch mortar for surface repairs, or patch 

concrete for larger repairs. Epoxy bondage of such repairs may also be permitted by Owner / 

Consultant. In such cases the epoxy shall be applied strictly in accordance with the 

manufacturers instructions. 

The cement mortar / concrete shall have the same proportions as those of the parent concrete. 

The source of cement should be the same as that used in the parent concrete. The appropriate 

shade of concrete / mortar shall be obtained by blending with white Portland cement. The water 

cement ratio shall be as low as practicable and the cavity shall be filled and well compacted. 

The repaired area shall be cured by covering with a wet saturated material, for a period of 24 

hours. The subsequent curing of the repair by sprinkling water shall continue for at least 10 days. 

3.16 GROUTING 

Grouting should be as per document no. 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0032-A4 


JACOBS 




3.17 FORMWORK 


Formwork shall be of plywood or steel with smooth inner surfaces giving a finish quality such that 

plastering to finished concrete is not required except as in 3.14 above. Rough timber formwork 

shall not be used. 

3.17.2 Formwork Requirements 

The Owner / Client may require the contractor to prepare designs and drawings for formwork and 

submit them for approval. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to design and provide the 

formwork such that it is rigidly constructed, of approved material, is true to shape and dimensions 

shown on drawings, has a smooth and even surface and is capable of carrying without excessive 

deflections, the loads on account of the dead-weight of concrete, working loads of men and 

equipment, weight of curing water, wind load and the side pressure due to the green concrete. 

For horizontal forms, the operating load over and above the dead weight of all material and 

equipment shall be 200 kg / m 2 minimum. The forms should be provided with adequate vertical 

and diagonal bracing. Formwork shall withstand the effects of vibrations without distortions. 

Tolerances for formwork shall be as follows. 

Dimensions of components Max. Deviation 

1) Cross section of columns and beams - 6mm 

+12mm 

2) Footing dimensions in plan -12mm 

+50mm 

3) Thickness of footing +0.05 times 

specified thickness 

4) Eccentricity of footing 0.02 times the width of footing in the 

direction of the deviation subject to 

maximum 50 mm. 

Joints in formwork shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of cement slurry. Faulty joints 

shall be caulked with good clay and jute or other approved means. 

The preferred system of holding the forms together shall be by way of clamps. Where nails are 

used, they should be left partly projecting to aid in their easy withdrawal. In the case of tie rods 

and bolts the cavities caused in concrete shall be made good. 

Shuttering shall be provided for the top surfaces of sloping concrete and anchored to prevent 

flotation when the slope exceeds 30°. Formwork shall be cambered as described below unless 

otherwise specified. 

Forms for beams and slabs having a span of 6 m and more shall be provided with a camber of 1 

in 500. Cantilevers shall have a camber of 1 in 100 of the projected length. 

3.17.3 Inspection of Forms 

Prior to placing reinforcement bars the contractor shall get his formwork approved by the Owner / 

Consultant. The Owner / Consultant shall inspect the forms to ensure that they are properly 

placed, sufficiently rigid, water-tight, clean and free of foreign matter and properly treated. In case 

the forms are found not satisfactory either before or during the pour, all concreting shall cease 

until the defects are corrected to the satisfaction of Owner / Consultant. In the case of walls and 

columns, temporary openings shall be provided at the base to facilitate cleaning and inspections. 


JACOBS 




3.17.4 Treatment of Forms 

Single coat of approved mould releasing agents of SIKA or approved equivalent make shall be 

applied to the faces of shuttering after it is cleaned properly. Concrete to be poured only after the 

coat has dried. 

3.17.5 Reuse of Forms 

Prior to reuse of forms they shall be scraped, cleaned, repaired and retreated. The Owner / 

Consultant may debar reuse of forms after inspection in case they are found unserviceable. 

3.17.6 Removal / Stripping Time of Forms / Staging 

No forms shall be removed or staging struck without the approval of the Owner / Consultant. All 

formwork shall be removed without shock or vibration and without damaging the new concrete. 

The side forms should have been so fixed that while removing them the supporting forms and 

posts are not disturbed. Under no circumstances should the supporting forms be struck until the 

concrete reaches a strength of at least twice the stress in the concrete at the time of striking. 

While determining the time of removal of forms, the character and location of structure and 

adjoining construction / work processes, the weather and the mix and type of cement should be 

considered. 

For normal structures in ordinary Portland cement the time of removal of forms shall be as 

specified in IS 456. For cantilever construction the formwork shall remain till counter acting or 

bearing down structures have been erected and have attained sufficient strength (Minimum 14 

days). 

For other types of cements the stripping time shall be modified as per manufacturers literature / 

owners directions. The number of props left under shall be sufficient to cater for the dead weight 

of concrete as also further construction / curing loads. Formwork at re-entrant angles shall be 

removed as soon as practicable to avoid shrinkage cracks due to restraint provided. 

3.18 STAGING / SCAFFOLDING 

All staging / scaffolding shall be designed by contractor and submitted to the Owner / Consultant 

for review. Double scaffolding having two set of vertical supports shall be provided. In case two 

sets of vertical supports are not feasible due to site constraints, the horizontal member of the 

scaffolding shall be provided support by making a hole in the adjoining masonry wall in the 

header course only. Only one header shall be removed per member to be supported and Owner / 

Consultants shall be consulted to ensure that such openings do not occur at critical locations 

endangering masonry in any way. Such holes shall be filled up immediately on removal of the 

scaffolding / staging. 

The scaffolding / staging should have sufficient underpinning and be provided with adjustable 

bases to cater for uneven ground. Diagonal braces should be provided at regular intervals 

between adjacent rows of uprights from top to bottom. Similarly a system of horizontal bracings 

shall be provided to resist rocking. 

The scaffolding / staging shall be regularly checked for plumbness. All nuts and bolts 

shall be fully tightened and in case of steel tube staging clamps and coupling shall be 

fully tight. 


JACOBS 




3.19 PRECAST CONCRETE 


Precast concrete shall comply generally with specification for reinforced concrete works. In 

addition to that, the following requirements shall be met with : 

The casting yard or platform shall have firm foundation and the surface levelled and nicely 

finished. 

Suitable serial number and date of casting shall be impressed on each unit. 

No precast unit shall be erected before 21 days from the date of casting. 

The units shall be stored, transported and placed in such a manner that they are not 

overstressed. 

Coarse aggregates shall not be larger than 20 mm size and graded downwards to 6mm. 

The reinforcement and lifting hooks as shown on the drawings shall be provided for each panel. 

The reinforcing steel shall conform strictly to relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The use of 

welded wire fabric in place of reinforcement, shall be allowed with prior approval of the Owner / 

Consultant. 

The mix of concrete for the panels shall comply with the requirements indicated on the drawings 

and in no case shall be less than M35. 

3.19.2 Construction 

3.19.3 Curing 

All precast panels shall be cast in steel or plywood formwork in order to provide a smooth finish. 

Forms shall be treated with mould releasing of SIKA or approved equivalent make to prevent 

adhesion to concrete. All inserts shall be properly laid, checked and shall be approved by Owner / 

Consultant before any concreting work is started. Concrete shall be mechanically mixed. 

Concrete shall be placed in one operation per each panel. Under no circumstances, shall the 

work be interrupted before completion of an entire panel. Concrete shall be properly vibrated 

preferably by form type vibrator. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to see that all 

inserts remain in position while concreting is being done. The panels shall be of uniform thickness 

as shown in the drawings. The panels, which do not conform to the size and shape as shown in 

the drawing shall be rejected. No panel shall be removed from the mould until sufficiently matured 

to ensure that no damage is done. 

All panels shall be cured for 7 days in a water tank. Thereafter, they shall be stored in a shed and 

allowed to dry out for a minimum period of 28 days. 

3.19.4 Erection 

All panels shall be erected using the lifting hooks provided for purpose of erection. During 

erection, care shall be exercised to see that no damage is done to the panel. After the panels are 

placed in position, all joints shall be grouted by 1:1 cement grout to form a flush surface. In case 

the design requires continuity of reinforcement, this shall be achieved by lapping of bars, grouting 

of reinforcement in aperture, sleeving threading of reinforcement or by welding. Other types of 

connections such as joints with structural steel inserts or resin adhesives may also be used. 

The top surface of precast concrete units shall be marked suitably to aid correct erection. Unless 

otherwise specified, the exposed surfaces of precast members shall be finished smooth with 

1 cement : 3 sand mortar. However, surfaces used as walkways shall be given a non-skid finish. 


JACOBS 





18-3188-99-00-C.02-0025-A4 Specifications for Concrete paving 

18-3188-99-00-S.02-0016-A4 Specifications for Reinforced Cement Concrete in liquid 

retaining structures 

18-3188-99-00-S.02-0032-A4 Specifications for Structural Steelwork 


Nil 


JACOBS 


READY MIX CONCRETE 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0015-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Ready mix concrete.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 7 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 SCOPE 

2.0 READY-MIXED CONCRETE 

3.0 MATERIALS 

4.0 CONCRETE TYPE AND GRADE 

5.0 MEASURMENT AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS 

6.0 PLANT AND MACHINERY 

7.0 BASIS OF SUPPLY 

8.0 TEMPRATURE 

9.0 SAMPLING AND TESTING 


10.0 MANUFACTURER’S RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Ready mix concrete.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 SCOPE 

This specification establishes the materials, mixing, placing, curing etc. of ready – mixed concrete 

used in various structures, at any locations such as foundations, floors, roofs, tanks, etc., both 

above ground and underground. Any special requirements as shown or noted on the drawings 

shall govern over the provisions of this specification. This specification shall be applicable for 

concrete grade above M-20 

2.0 READY- MIXED CONCRETE 

Ready - mixed concrete refers to the concrete manufactured and delivered to the site in a plastic 

condition and requiring no further treatment before being placed in the position in which it is to set 

and harden. 

The specification given herein covers the requirements only for the manufacture and 

transportation of ready-mixed concrete. For placing, compaction, curing, protection of concrete 

after delivery, construction joint, expansion joint, form work etc. the same specification as for 

Plain and reinforced cement concrete (18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014) shall apply. 

The ready-mixed concrete shall conform generally to IS:4926. Where IS code does not provide 

for any clause, International code (ASTM C-94) shall be referred to. In addition to these 

requirements, the ready-mixed concrete shall generally comply with the requirements of IS:456. 

Unless specified otherwise, the min. quantity of cement and the details regarding proportioning 

and works control shall be in accordance with IS:456. 

2.1 TYPES 

Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered to the point designated by the Owner / 

Consultant by means of one of the following combinations of operations: 

i) Centrally-Mixed Concrete 

ii) Truck-Mixed Concrete 

iii) Shrink-Mixed Concrete 

The Mixers and Agitators shall be operated within the limits of capacity and speed of rotation 

designated by the manufacturer of the equipment. 

2.2 Centrally-Mixed Concrete: 

The concrete produced by completely mixing cement, aggregates, admixtures, if any and water at 

a stationary central mixing plant and transported to the point of delivery either in a truck agitator, 

or a truck mixer operating at agitating speed, or in non agitating equipment approved by the 

Owner / Consultant and meeting the requirements as per clause 9.3.4. 

The concrete shall conform to the following: 

The mixing time shall be counted from the time all the solid materials are in the drum. 

The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of the cement 

and aggregate, and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one fourth of the specified 

mixing time. 

When a truck mixer or truck agitator is used for transporting concrete that has been completely 

mixed in a stationary mixer, any turning during transportation shall be at the speed designated by 

the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. 


JACOBS 




2.3 Truck-Mixed Concrete: 

The concrete produced by placing cement, aggregates and admixtures, if any, other than those to 

be added with mixing water, in a truck mixer at the batching plant and then adding water (along 

with admixtures, if any, to be added with mixing water). The mixing is carried out entirely in the 

truck –mixer either during the journey or on arrival at the site of delivery. No water shall be added 

to the aggregate and cement until the mixing of cement commences. 

When a truck mixer or agitator is approved for mixing or delivery of concrete, no water from the 

truck water system or elsewhere shall be added after the initial introduction of mixing water for the 

batch except when on arrival at site, the slump of the concrete is less than that specified. Such 

additional water to bring the slump within required limits shall be injected into the mixer under 

such pressure and direction of flow that the requirements for uniformity are met with. The drum or 

blades shall be turned an additional 30 revolutions or more if necessary, at mixing speed, until the 

uniformity of the concrete is within these limits. Water shall not be added to the batch at any later 

time. 

Unless otherwise agreed to by the Owner / Consultant, when a truck mixer or agitator is used for 

transporting concrete, the concrete shall be delivered to the site of work and discharge shall be 

completed within 11/2 hrs (when prevailing temperature is above 20 0 C) and within 2hrs (when 

prevailing temperature is at or below 20 0 C ) of adding the mixing water to the dry mix of cement 

and aggregate or of adding the cement to the aggregate , whichever is earlier. 

2.4 Shrink-Mixed Concrete: 

The concrete produced by first mixing partially in a truck mixer and then mixing completely in a 

truck mixer. 

The concrete shall conform to the following: 

The time of partial mixing shall be minimum required to intermingle the ingredients. After transfer 

to a truck mixer the amount of mixing at the designated mixing speed will be that necessary to 

meet the requirements for uniformity of concrete. Additional turning of the mixer, if any, shall be at 

designated agitating speed. 

3.0 MATERIALS 

3.1 Cement (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

3.2 Aggregates (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

3.3 Reinforcement (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

3.4 Water (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

3.5 Admixtures (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

4.0 CONCRETE TYPE AND GRADES 

Ready mix Concrete grade above M-20 (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

4.1 Water cement ratio (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 

5.0 MEASUREMENT AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS 

Measurement and storage of materials shall be done in accordance with the requirements of 

IS:456 


JACOBS 




6.0 PLANT AND MACHINERY 

6.1 Batching Plant: 

Bins with adequate separate compartments shall be provided in the batching plant for fine and for 

each required size of coarse aggregate. Each bin compartment shall be designed and operated 

so as to discharge efficiently and freely, with minimum segregation, into the weighing hopper. 

Precision control shall be established for discharging the desired quantity of ingredients as well as 

mixing water for making the concrete.. 

6.2 Mixers and Agitators : 

Mixers may be stationery mixers or truck mixers. Agitators may be truck mixers or truck agitators. 

The capacity of the drum of container in terms of the volume of mixed concrete and the mixing 

speeds of the drum or paddles shall be displayed on the mixers / agitators. When the concrete is 

Truck mixed or Shrink mixed, the volume of mixed concrete shall not exceed 63% of the total 

volume of the drum or container. When the concrete is central mixed, the volume of concrete in 

the truck mixer or agitator shall not exceed 80% of the total volume of the drum or container. 

All stationery and truck mixers shall be capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete 

within the specified time or the number of revolutions into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass 

and of discharging the concrete so that the uniformity requirements are met with. 

The agitator shall be capable of maintaining the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and 

uniform mass and of discharging the concrete meeting the uniformity requirements. 

Mixers and agitators shall be examined or weighed routinely to detect changes in condition due to 

accumulation of hardened concrete or mortar and examined to detect wear of blades and 

corrective action as required shall be taken. 

6.3 Pumps: 

Concrete Pumps shall be provided by the manufacturer so that the concrete can be pumped in a 

horizontal or vertical direction as required by the Owner / Consultant. 

6.4 Non agitating Equipment: 

If approved by the Owner / Consultant, Central-Mixed concrete may be transported in suitable 

non agitating equipment subject to the following limitations: 

i) Bodies of non agitating equipment shall be smooth, watertight, metal containers equipped 

with gates that will permit control of the discharge of the concrete. Covers shall be 

provided for protection against the weather when required by the Owner / Consultant. 

ii) The concrete shall be delivered to site of the work in a thoroughly mixed and uniform 

mass and discharged meeting the uniformity requirements. 

7.0 BASIS OF SUPPLY 

The Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be manufactured and supplied on either of the following basis 

as approved by the Owner / Consultant: 

i) Specified strength based on 28-day compressive strength of 15-cm cubes tested in 

accordance with IS:456.(Under special circumstances and with the prior approval of 

Owner / Consultant, 28-day or 7-day flexural strength of concrete may be considered 

instead of the compressive strength as specified above) 

ii) Specified mix proportion 


JACOBS 




7.1 Concrete manufactured and supplied on the basis of specified strength 

In this case, the responsibility for the design of mix shall be that of the manufacturer and the 

concrete shall be manufactured conforming to the specifications furnished by the Owner / 

Consultant regarding type of cement, type and size of aggregates, admixtures to be used, 

acceptable strength of supplied concrete, required slump or compacting factor, testing 

requirements etc. 

Tolerances- 

The applicable tolerances shall be as follows: 

i) Consistency or Workability: - The slump shall not differ from the specified value by +/- 

10 mm for a specified slump of 75 mm or less and +/- 25 mm when the specified slump 

is greater than 75 mm. Ref. may be made to clause 7.2.1 of IS:4926. 

ii) Aggregates :- Ref. may be made to clause 7.2.2 of IS:4926 

7.2 Concrete manufactured and supplied on the basis of mix proportion 

In this case, the responsibility for the design of mix shall be that of the Owner / Consultant and 

the concrete shall be manufactured conforming to the specifications furnished by the Owner / 

Consultant regarding type of cement, type and size of aggregates, admixtures to be used, 

proportions of the mix including max. water cement ratio, min. mixing time after addition of water 

etc. 

Tolerances- 

The applicable tolerances shall be as follows: 

i) Cement Content : The cement content ,as shown by the samples taken, shall not be less 

than 95% of that specified. 

ii) Ratio of coarse to fine aggregates : The ratio of coarse to fine aggregates, as indicated 

by the samples taken, shall neither exceed nor fall below the ratio specified by more 

than 10 %. 

iii) Water / Cement Ratio : +/- 5% of the specified value. 

iv) Consistency or Workability: The slump shall not differ from the specified value by +/- 10 

mm for a specified slump of 75 mm or less and +/- 25 mm when the specified slump is 

greater than 75 mm. Ref. may be made to clause 8.2.4 of IS:4926. 

8.0 TEMPERATURE 

The temperature of the concrete at the time and place of delivery shall be not less than 5 0 C. No 

concrete shall be delivered, when the site temperature is less than 2.5 0 C and the thermometer 

reading is falling, unless otherwise instructed by Owner / Consultant. 

The temperature of the concrete shall not exceed 5 0 C above the prevailing shade temperature, 

when the shade temperature is over 20 0 C. The temperature of concrete mass on delivery shall 

not exceed 40 0 C. 

9.0 SAMPLING AND TESTING 

Adequate facilities shall be provided by the manufacturer so that the Owner / Consultant can 

inspect the materials used, the process of manufacture and the methods of delivery of concrete. 

Manufacturer shall provide adequate facilities so that the Owner / Consultant shall take samples 

of the materials used. 


JACOBS 




9.1 Sampling and Testing – Unless otherwise specified, the sampling and testing of concrete shall be 

done in accordance with the relevant requirements of IS:456, IS:1199 and IS:516. 

9.2 Consistency or Workability --Unless otherwise specified, the tests for consistency or workability 

shall be carried out in accordance with requirements of IS:1199. 

9.3 Strength Test -- The compressive and flexural strength tests shall be carried out in accordance 

with requirements of IS:516. The acceptance criteria for concrete whether supplied on the basis 

specified strength or on the basis of mix proportion, shall conform to the requirements of Table 5 

and other requirements of IS:456. 

9.4 Concrete Uniformity Requirements – For tests and requirements regarding concrete uniformity, 

refer to Appendix-A of IS:4926. 

10.0 MANUFACTURER’S RECORDS AND CERTIFICATES 

The manufacturer shall keep batch records of the quantities by mass of all the solid materials, of 

the total amount of water used in mixing and of the results of all tests. The manufacturer shall 

furnish certificates, at agreed intervals, giving this information to the Owner / Consultant. 

The manufacturer shall furnish to the Owner / Consultant with each batch of concrete before 

unloading at site, a delivery ticket which gives relevant certified information concerning the said 

concrete including name of the ready-mixed plant, date, truck number, Owner / Consultant’s 

identification, job description, designation of the concrete, amount of concrete in m 3 , information 

required for calculating the total mixing water added and any other information as required by the 


11.0 COMPACTION (Refer doc No. 18-3188-00-S.02-0014) 


JACOBS 


MASONRY AND PLASTERING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-A.02-0017-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Masonry and Plastering.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 9 

Approved 


A 11/08/07 9 Issued for FEED RSJ DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 

Project Name: Lube Oil Stocks Upgradation Project. Document No: 18-3188-99-00-A.02-0017-A4 



1.0 PUPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.1.1 Cement 

3.1.2 Bricks 


3.1.4 Sand (Fine aggregates) and Water 

3.2 PROPORTIONING OF CEMENT MORTAR 

3.2.1 General 

3.2.2 Mixing 

3.2.3 Consistency 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION OF BRICKWORK 

3.3.1 General 

3.3.2 Brick walls with cavity 

3.3.3 Brick walls with Insulation 

3.3.4 115 thk Brick walls 

3.4 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY 

3.4.1 General 

3.4.2 Fitting 

3.4.3 Size of stones 

3.4.4 Through stone 

3.4.5 Break of joints 

3.4.6 Quoins 

4.0 PLASTERING 

4.1 PREPARATORY WORK 


4.2 SAND-FACED PLASTER (ORDINARY OR WATER PROOF) 

4.2.1 Plaster - First coat 

4.2.2 Plaster – Second coat 

4.3 SMOOTH PLASTER WITH NEERU 

4.3.1 Plaster - First coat 

4.3.2 Plaster – Second coat 

4.4 SMOOTH CEMENT PLASTER ( ORDINARY OR WATERPROOF) 

4.5 POINTING 

4.5.1 Surface preparation 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Masonry and Plastering.doc

JACOBS 





4.6 CURING 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 6 technical specifications\specifications for masonry and plastering.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for Masonry and Plastering 

works. 

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK 

The work covered shall consist of providing and installing the above works as shown in the 

drawings and in accordance with the specifications and shall generally conform to IS-2212 and 

IS-1905. 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.1.1 Cement 

3.1.2 Bricks 

Cement shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s standard packages; mortar shall be 

prepared in batches as required and shall be used before initial set takes place, but, in no case 

later than 30 minutes. 

Storage heaps, stacks or bins shall be so located as to avoid being disturbed or shall be 

barricaded to protect these materials from damage by construction operations. 

Cement and aggregates shall be stored in such a manner as to prevent deterioration or intrusion 

of foreign matter. The use of caked or hardened cement will not be permitted. Bagged cement, 

stored for more than six months, shall be tested before use. Storage methods shall be approved 

by the Owner / Consultants. 

Bricks shall be of standard size, table molded, made of clay and of first class locally available 

quality approved by the Owner / Consultants. The sizes of bricks shall be as available locally. 

The bricks shall generally conform to IS-1077 or local standards, if any. 

All exposed exterior bricks shall be similar in texture colour, range and appearance. Faces of 

exposed bricks shall be free from chips, pits, blemishes, broken edges and corners. Bricks shall 

give a ringing sound when struck with a mallet. No brick after 24 hours immersion in water shall 

absorb more than 20% of its own weight of water. The bricks shall be of best quality locally 

available. 

Brick sample as approved shall be thoroughly burnt, but not over-burnt and with uniform colour. 

Rejected bricks shall be removed from site of work immediately without asking for any 

compensation. 


Reinforcement shall be placed as shown on the drawings, and conform to the specifications as 

detailed under the relevant chapter. 

3.1.4 Sand (Fine Aggregates) & Water 

Refer 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 


JACOBS 




3.2 PROPORTIONING OF CEMENT MORTAR 

3.2.1 General 

3.2.2 Mixing 

Cement and sand shall be mixed in the required proportion by volume for all exterior and interior 

brick masonry walls. The sand shall be measured in boxes of suitable size. The cement, shall, 

however not be actually measured, but a bag of cement of 50 kg shall be taken as 0.0347 cu.m. 

The mortar shall be as specified in the drawing. 

The measured quantity of sand shall be leveled and cement bags emptied on top. The cement 

and sand shall be thoroughly mixed with each other in a dry state by being turned over, 

backwards and forwards several times until the mixture is of a uniform colour. The mixture shall 

be made into the form of a frustum of a hollow cone, and water poured into the hollow and the 

mix dropped into water from the sides gradually turned and mixed until mortar of the required 

consistency is formed. The mixing shall be done on wooden / steel / concrete platforms, raised 

above grade. 


A minimum quantity of water shall be added to ensure that the mixed mortar can be used without 

risk of joints remaining unfilled. In other words, the mortar shall be firm enough not to run out, and 

yet be capable of easy spreading. 

Mortar shall be mixed on in such quantities, which can be readily used and shall be used as soon 

as possible, after mixing, and before it has begun to set, and in any case, within 30 minutes after 

water is added to the dry mixture. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION OF BRICK WORK 

3.3.1 General 

Every brick shall be thoroughly soaked in water before using, till bubble cease. No half or broken 

bricks and blocks shall be used except as closures. The closures shall be horizontal and the wall 

raised plumb. Joints shall not be more than 10 mm thick. Each unit shall be adjusted to its final 

position in the wall while the mortar is still soft and plastic. Any unit which is disturbed after mortar 

has stiffed shall be removed and re-laid with fresh mortar. The bond pattern shall be as approved 

and kept plumb throughout. Chases, all gap and raked out joints shall be kept free from mortar or 

other debris. Spaces around metal doorframes and other built-up items shall be solidly filled with 

mortar. Anchors, wall plugs, accessories, flashing and other items required to be built-in with 

masonry shall be provided in the walls as the work progresses. 

The unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Toothing may be resorted to 

only if specifically approved. Before the new work is started, all loose mortar shall be removed 

and the exposed joint thoroughly cleaned before the laying of new work. 

All brickwork shall be maintained wet for at least 7 days. 

All joints shall be raked out while the mortar is still green to a depth of 12 mm to assure a good 

key for plaster. 

Double scaffolding shall be provided for construction and piercing of walls for scaffolding shall not 

be permitted. The contractor shall be responsible for any damage or injury resulting from poor 

scaffolding. 

Brickwork shall be raised uniformly, and no part, at any time, shall be raised more than 900 mm 

above adjoining work. 


JACOBS 




Brickwork shall be carried out as per relevant IS-2212. The bond shall be English or such other 

bond as may be specified and shall be carried out throughout the work. 

At all angles forming junction of any two walls, the brick shall at each alternate layers be carried 

out in a manner to thoroughly unite the work. At every 3rd layer cement water shall be applied for 

proper bonding alongwith cement mortar. 

3.3.2 Brick Walls With Cavity 

Two separate tiers or walls shall be built as shown on the drawings. 115mm thick walls shall be 

built-in stretcher bonds. The cavity air gap shall be 20 mm for walls with insulation and 30 mm for 

walls without insulation. 

3.3.3 Brick Walls With Insulation 

Two separate tiers or walls shall be built. 230 thick wall shall be in English Bond and 115 thick 

wall shall be in stretcher bond. 20mm thick approved insulation board shall be built-in. One tier 

shall be carried up not more than 5 courses than the other tier. The insulation board shall be 

given one coat of bitumen paint on all sides or dipped in bitumen and allowed to dry before 

installation into the brickwork. The joints of insulation board shall be mortared in cement mortar 

1:3 and any space between the insulation board and brickwork shall be grouted in cement mortar 

1:3. Suitable metal tiers or bonding units shall be used and approved. 

3.3.4 115mm Thick Brick Walls 

These walls shall generally be used as partition walls. The brick used for these walls shall be 

selected and shall have reasonably uniform size. No broken bricks shall be used. These walls 

shall normally be constructed in cement mortar 1:4 and shall have 2 nos. of 6mm dia., M.S. rods 

running through the length of the wall at every 4th layer and shall be provided with RCC standard 

of 230mm x 115mm at every 3 metres and at corners unless otherwise specified. The RCC 

standards so provided shall have 4 nos. of 6mm dia. vertical rods with 6mm dia. rings at 150mm 

c / c spacing. The binders in the brickwork shall run through such standards. The partition walls 

when constructed with RCC shall be constructed in two stages i.e. in the first stage, the brick 

work with binders shall be constructed leaving the gaps equal to and at locations of the RCC 

standards and the RCC standards shall be concreted in the second stage. 

The further height can be constructed only after the first portion is set. The gap between the two 

portions shall be minimum 24 hours. 

The soaking of bricks prior to construction, thickness of cement mortar joints, racking of joints 

and curing shall be as specified elsewhere in this chapter. Brickwork shall be raised uniformly, 

and no part, at any time, shall be raised more than 900mm above adjoining work. 

3.4 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY 

3.4.1 General 

The stone to be used shall be obtained from the quarries approved by Engineer-in-charge. It shall 

be hard durable and tough and each stone must be laid in the work on its natural quarry bed. 

Dumb-bell shaped bond stones or headers shall not be allowed on the work. The mortar shall be 

of proportion specified and the masonry work shall be kept wet while in progress till the mortar is 

properly set. All masonry built with cement shall be kept especially well watered. Should the 

mortar become dry white or powdery for want of proper curing, the work shall be pulled down and 

re-built by the Contractor without any extra cost. The masonry work as far as possible shall be 

carried up at one uniform level throughout, but where breaks are unavoidable the joint will be 

made in good long steps so as to prevent cracks arising between the new and old work and 

whenever walls are meeting, care shall be taken to bond into the main walls. 


JACOBS 




3.4.2 Fitting 

The face stones shall be laid absolutely without pinning on the face. Every stone shall be carefully 

fitted so as to form neat close joints and if necessary, the edges shall be dressed with a chisel so 

as to ensure close joints work. Joints not to exceed 10mm in thickness. 

3.4.3 Size of Stones 

The stones shall be roughly dressed and uniformly colored and of pretty equal size on the face. It 

shall be carefully laid and solidly bedded in mortar, and shall tail aback and bond well into the 

backing and shall not be greater height than either breadth of face or length of tail into the work. 

3.4.4 Through Stone 

One header or through stone shall be inserted in at least every square metre of the face and shall 

run right through the wall it is not more than 0.6 M thick. If it is more than 0.6 M thick a line of 

headers shall be laid from face to back, which shall overlap each other at least 150mm. 

3.4.5 Break of Joints 

3.4.6 Quoins 

The stones shall be arranged to break joints as much as possible and long vertical lines shall be 

carefully avoided in the face work. 

The quoins, which shall be of same height as the course in which they occur, shall be formed of 

stones at least 450mm long laid stretcher and header alternately. They should be laid square on 

their beds, which should be fair, dressed to a depth of at least 100mm. 

4.0 PLASTERING 

4.1 PREPARATORY WORK 

Surfaces to be plastered shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, moss, oil, loose mortar. Joints 

shall be raked to a depth of 12.5mm min. care shall be taken not to damage masonry edges while 

raking. All surfaces of concrete, old plaster and stone shall be roughened sufficiently for bond. 

Soft or crumbling brickwork and other surfaces shall be dismantled and re-made if required. All 

surfaces to be plastered shall be thoroughly wetted for 24 hours before commencing plaster and 

shall be kept damp during the progress of work. Wetting should be uniform and shall be ensured 

by damping evenly any dry patches before applying plaster. All preparatory work will be inspected 

by the Owner / Consultants and plastering shall not be commenced, until all the preparatory 

works are approved by the Owner / Consultants. 

4.2 SAND-FACED PLASTER (ORDINARY OR WATER PROOF) 

4.2.1 Plaster - First Coat 

The first coat shall consist of mixes as stated. The first coat shall be 12mm thick. Guide strips 

150mm wide and of suitable length will be first put up on the surface for the first coat. These 

guide strips shall be brought to absolutely plumb vertically and to the same plane horizontally 

although. These guide strips shall be put up sufficiently earlier, so that at the time of the 

commencement of plaster, these guide strips shall be brought to a level plane. The plastered 

surface then shall be firmly pressed onto a uniform plumb and plane and then sufficiently 

scratched to receive the second coat. The proportions of mortar for the first coat will be either of 

the following, as specified. 

- Cement Mortar - 1 cement : 4 sand by volume 


JACOBS 




4.2.2 Plaster - Second Coat 

The first coat shall be kept wet for 48 hours and then the second coat shall commence. Sand 

used for the second coat shall be sieved. Sand passing through "3mm sieve shall be taken for 

the second coat. The sand shall be of uniform size so that when shifted through a sieve of 50 

meshes per 25mm, not more than 10% shall pass through. 

The second coat shall be 8mm thick roughly. Excess water should not be added to this mortar. 

The second coat shall be struck uniformly over the first scratched coat and firmly pressed and 

leveled using a batten. The surface shall then be firmly traveled and sponge floated to remove 

excess moisture and to bring the sand to the surface. The surface thus prepared shall be 

uniformly roughened for texture by running a fine wire brush lightly over the surface, if necessary. 

The proportions of mortar for the second coat will be either of the following, as specified : 


The surface of plaster shall be kept moist for at least 7 days and shall be protected from sunrays. 

4.3 SMOOTH PLASTER WITH NEERU 

4.3.1 Plaster - First Coat 

All internal surfaces including ceilings shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted 24 hours in 

advance. Uniform section of surfaces shall be maintained. Before commencement, the surfaces 

shall be made uniformly damp, but not very wet. All corners shall be finished with 15mm radius 

and brought to true lines and levels. Guide strips of the thickness of the first coat ( 12mm for 20 

thk plaster, 10mm for 15 thk plaster, 8mm for 12 thk plaster) shall have been put on (as in the 

case of exterior plaster) in advance, so that these guide strips 150mm wide by 1 meter shall be 

plumb, leveled to one plane. Guide strips should have been sufficiently hardened at the 

commencement of plaster. All preparatory works shall be carried out in advance for the 

inspection and approval by the Owner / Consultants. 

4.3.2 Plaster - Second Coat 

The second coat shall be applied to the prepared surfaces uniformly. 

This coat shall consist of mixes as stated below. The first coat shall be (12mm for 20 thk plaster, 

10mm for 15 thk plaster, 8mm for 12 thk plaster) thick roughly except for ceilings which shall be 

6mm. This coat shall be firmly stuck, leveled and planed and shall be well trowelled. After 

bringing this coat to the uniform plane, it shall be scratched. The second coat shall be (8mm for 

20 thk plaster, 5mm for 15 thk plaster, 4mm for 12 thk plaster). Finishing coat shall consist of lime 

paste plaster. The second coat shall be applied immediately after the first coat has obtained the 

initial set (4 hours). 

The second coat shall be well trowelled into the first coat. Trowel marks shall be removed and 

the surface made plain, even and level. The surface shall then be cured for 7 days. 

The curing shall commence after an initial period for which the surface is allowed to shed its 

excess moisture. 

The proportion of mixes for 1st coat shall be as follows : 


4.4 SMOOTH CEMENT PLASTER (ORDINARY OR WATERPROOF) 

The preparatory work will be similar to that described above. This shall consist of 2 coats as 

described under 4.3 above except for the following: 


JACOBS 




i) The thickness of first coat of plaster on concrete surface (other than water retaining or 

underground storage areas) would be around 12mm for 20 thk plaster, 10mm for 15 thk 

plaster, 8mm for 12 thk plaster. 

ii) Second coat will consist of thick cement slurry consisting of 1:4 proportion of cement 

applied to a thickness upto maximum and trowelled smooth (8mm for 20 thk plaster, 

5mm for 15 thk plaster, 4mm for 12 thk plaster). 

iii) For water retaining structures, or underground storages, such as basement, lift pits, etc., 

for external sand face / smooth plaster of Buildings waterproofing plaster may be used as 

called out. Approved waterproofing agents may be mixed into the above mixes in 

proportion and manner recommended by the Manufacturer’s. The total thickness of such 

plaster shall not be less than specified in the drawings. 

4.5 POINTING 

4.5.1 Surface Preparation 

All joints to be pointed shall be raked out to a depth of at least 12mm. The ranking shall be done 

carefully and on no account shall any chipping of the masonry be permitted. In new work, the 

ranking out shall be done when the mortar in the joints is still green and fresh. 

Before pointing is commenced, the whole raked surface shall be properly cleaned with wire 

brushes, washed with water and kept well wetted. 


Unless otherwise indicated, the mix for pointing shall be one part of cement to three parts of 

sieved sand, properly worked with sufficient water to produce a smooth paste. This mix shall be 

pushed into the joints, and superfluous mortar properly removed with a trowel. Pointing lines shall 

be regular and uniform in breadth, and shall be finished flush, raised or sunk as specified. 

When specially ordered, pointing shall be done as masonry progresses, otherwise, pointing shall 

be done at the completion of the whole work. Pointed surfaces shall be kept wet for 7 days. 

4.6 CURING 

All plasterwork shall be kept damp continuously for a minimum period of 7 days after the 

application of the final coat. To prevent excessive evaporation on the sunny or windward sides of 

buildings in hot dry weather, matting or gunny bags should be hung over the outside of the plaster 

and kept moist. Should the plaster crack through neglect of watering or for any other fault of 

contractor, the plaster shall be removed, and redone at his cost. 


JACOBS 


CONSTRUCTION OF DRAINAGE AND SEWERS 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0018-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Construction of Drainage & Sewers.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 8 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 GENERAL 

3.2 CONSTRUCTION 


3.2.1 Laying of Drains 

3.2.2 Setting out Drainage 

3.2.3 Excavation 

3.2.4 Back-fill, consolidation & removal of surplus earth 

3.2.5 Laying & Jointing of RCC pipes for Drains 

3.3 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS, ETC. 


3.3.2 Brickwork 

3.3.3 Plaster 

3.4 STONEWARE PIPES 

3.4.1 Materials 

3.4.2 Laying 

3.4.3 Jointing 

3.4.4 Testing 

3.5 CAST IRON PIPE DRAINS 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Construction of Drainage & Sewers.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for Construction of 

Drainage and sewers. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The work covered under this specification consists of providing labour, materials, tools, plant 

equipment necessary for the proper execution and installation of drains and sewers in strict 

accordance with this specification, and applicable drawings. The work is sub-divided under the 

following main heads. 

a) Sanitary Drains 

b) Process Waste Drains 


3.1 GENERAL 

The general arrangement of drainage and the related work shall be as detailed in the relevant 

drawings. If actual field conditions or any other reasons necessitate any modifications to the 

arrangements detailed in the drawings, the contractor shall prepare detailed report and sketches 

showing such proposed modifications for the approval of the Owner / Consultant, prior to the 

commencement of work. 

The contractor shall carefully examine all the related drawings, sketches, specifications, 

schedules and shall be responsible for proper installation of these works in best workmanlike 

manner. The contractor shall be responsible for the provisions of all the materials and fittings 

which shall form the part of the installation work, and these shall be approved by the Owner / 

Consultant prior to the commencement of the work. 

The contractor shall submit any technical literature and other information regarding the materials 

whenever called for. The contractor shall investigate all the actual site conditions and other 

details affecting the planning and execution of the works, and shall arrange the timely 

procurement of all the materials and plant and workmanship to meet such conditions as required 

for the completion of the work as scheduled. 

Distribution of any existing work shall be undertaken by the contractor only on the written 

permission by the Owner / Consultants. Damages to the existing construction and installation 

other than those to be dismantled and caused as a result of the contractor doing dismantling 

work, or as a result of his opening trenches for drainage works, shall be made good by him by 

employing skilled trademen for such repairs. The contractor shall take all the precautions to 

avoid any damages to the existing construction and / or installations. The cost of such 

precautions shall be borne by the contractor. 

3.2 CONSTRUCTION 

3.2.1 Laying of Drains 

Drains and / or sewers shall be laid to the alignment and grades as shown on the drawings, 

subject to any modifications done from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. 

No deviations from the lines, depths of cuttings, gradient of drains or sewers shall be permitted 

except on the specific permission from the Owner / Consultant. 

Before commencement of work, accurate surveys and levels of the grade shall be recorded jointly 

by the representatives of the either party, and shall be signed by both. The excavation and filling 

as required on this grade for the purpose of laying drainage shall be measured on the basis of 

such records. The levels and surveys shall be related on the bench marks and reference points 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 6 technical specifications\specifications for construction of drainage & sewers.doc

JACOBS 




decided by the Owner / Consultant. Any instruments and technical assistance by way of 

manpower, required for such surveys and levels shall be made available whenever required. The 

materials required for preparation of benchmarks, pegs, pillars shall be furnished by the 

Contractor without any additional charge. 

3.2.2 Setting out Drainage 

Setting out of drainage shall conform to approved drainage and shall be set out with the aid 

suitable bearing rods and site rails at intervals not more than 15 metres. Necessary materials for 

bearing rods and site rails and the instruments required for setting out and fixing such 

demarcations and reference points shall be provided by the contractor when checking is 

undertaken. 

All site rails and posts shall be of well-seasoned timber and such sizes as would be required for 

proper stability. The wooden members used for such purposes shall be planed and no warped or 

defective material is used. The posts shall be kept sufficiently away from the edge of trenches 

and shall be properly embedded in concrete. Site rails shall be fixed to these posts by any 

approved means so that the same does not get disturbed. The centerlines shall be accurately 

marked on the site rails either by saw cut or paint marks. 

At any time, at least 4 site rails shall be kept at correct level, and alignment along the centerline of 

drainage lines. Any additional site rails wherever required shall be provided as and when 

directed. The proper maintenance of the site rails shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 

The checking of levels and other marks on the site rails shall be done at least once a day. 

The number of site rails and posts, their tiers material, mode of securing site rails to posts, tiers, 

sizes of timber to be used for site rails and bearing rods shall be approved by the Owner / 

Consultant prior to use. 

3.2.3 Excavation 

The excavation for drainage lines shall be open-cut unless otherwise necessary. The excavated 

soil shall be stacked at locations approved by the Owner / Consultants, and shall be removed 

beyond specified lead and brought back for back-fill whenever necessary. Necessary traffic 

diversions, barriers on the trenches, danger signals, watch and ward shall be provided by the 

contractor at his own cost. 

Dimensions of excavations shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant in advance and at no 

time the trench be excavated more than 20 meters or the distance between 2 successive 

manholes, whichever is less. The least distance to which the trench is excavated to full depth 

shall be five meters at a time. The maximum width of trenches shall be as follows and these 

shall form the basis for the measurements of excavation. 

a) Trenches not exceeding 2 meters in depth shall have widths of 600mm + the external 

diameter of the pipe. 

b) Trenches exceeding 2 meters in depth, but not exceeding 5 meters in depth, width shall 

be taken as 700 mm + the external diameter of the pipe. 

c) Maximum width of excavation in road shall be decided at field by contractor in 

consultation with Owner / Consultant. 

d) For manholes, junctions with junction chambers, stormwater overflows the minimum 

dimensions of excavation would be that contained in a prism with vertical sides and a 

horizontal section equal to the smallest rectangle enclosing such structures with their 

foundations and 300 mm of clean working space all around. 

The contractor shall have the right to modify the dimensions of excavation whenever 

required. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to clean the site off the shrubs, 

grass, soil tree roots, stumps and other burdens. The excavated soil shall be sprinkled 


JACOBS 




with water to avoid dust nuisance. The contractor shall utilise half the width of the roads 

if the drainage work is by the side and / or within the road so that no obstruction is 

created to usual traffic. 

Wherever necessary, the excavation shall be done deeper than required and the depth 

so made shall be filled with concrete or any other approved material to required level. 

Such cases, however, shall be dealt with only when permitted by the Owner / Consultant 

in writing. 

The sides of excavation shall be supported effectively by means such as timbering, piling, 

sheeting, which shall be closely joined in all loose or sandy strata and below sub-soil 

water level. 

Any such temporary supports shall be removed when work is completed unless otherwise 

specifically called out. In soft or waterlogged areas, timbering shall be done with tongue 

and grove joint and shall be close driven to such depths below bed levels as ordered by 

the Owner / Consultants, and shall be done by Contractor. The timbering shall be done 

out of adequate section of wooden members, and shall be fully braced and strutted to 

avoid any falls, side slips, subsidence and all cavities shall be solidly filled-in. The 

contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of all timbering, bracing, sheeting, 

piling, strutting, and for all damages to the property and surroundings due to improper 

quality, strengths, placement, stability of the existing foundations shall be done by the 

Contractor, wherever necessary. The responsibility due to improper shoring shall rest 

with the contractor. 

At all times, during the progress of works, the contractor shall keep the trenches and 

excavated pits free of water which shall be drained in the most harmless manner. The 

contractor shall provide all the materials, plant, labour, fuel and other necessities for 

dewatering of trenches in the manner best suited to the particular condition. Any 

damages to surrounding structures and / or foundations due to improper dewatering shall 

be to the Contractor's account. 

In addition to the necessities of proper excavation described above, all necessary 

precautions for the safety of persons and structures shall be taken by the contractor. 

3.2.4 Back-fill, consolidation & removal of surplus earth 

After the drainage lines are constructed and tested, as per requirements, the trenches shall be 

backfilled in such a manner that it would avoid damages to the line laid. The back filling shall be 

done in layers of 150mm thick selected earth / sand / murrum shall be properly watered and 

consolidated. 

The strutting and timbering shall be removed gradually to avoid side collapses. 

The surplus earth shall be disposed off at locations shown by the Owner / Consultants or outside 

the refinery premises by the contractor at his own cost. 

In case of surfacing materials other than finishes removed during the course of construction are 

reduced and found insufficient at the time of reinstallment, the contractor shall provide such 

materials at his own cost to achieve the conditions which were there prior to taking the work in 

that area. 

Any damages done to the existing footpath, roads, berms, shall be reinstated to the original 

condition by the contractor at his cost. 

3.2.5 Laying & Jointing of RCC pipes for Drains 

Materials shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Materials shall be approved by Owner / 

Consultants prior to placement of the same. 


JACOBS 




Pipes shall be laid on concrete bed or cradles, if necessary. Pipes shall be lowered gradually in 

trenches without causing damage to trenches and bed concrete / cradles. Extra earth at joints 

shall be scooped out to accommodate the collar. Pipes shall be laid to required levels and 

alignments throughout the length. In case pipes are laid on cradles, the underside of pipes shall 

be grouted with cement slurry and clean fine sand to avoid gaps and foreign materials prior to 

placement of pipes. Cradles shall be cured sufficiently prior to lowering of pipes and any 

damages caused to the same while lowering pipes shall be made good by the contractor. 

Joints shall be made by using Standard Collars, which shall have rough surface inside to have 

proper grip. The jointing material shall be cement mortar in proportion 1:2. Prior to sealing of 

joints, the joints shall be caulked with tarred hemp. The joints shall be finished with cement paste 

laid at 45 deg angle to the length, and shall be finished all round the periphery of the pipe. The 

interior of the pipes shall be cleaned off prior to testing of the drainage lines. 

The joints shall be sufficiently cured and the drains shall be tested under a head of at least 2.00 

metres of water above the crown of pipes. A strong approved colour shall be added to the water 

for testing. The defective pipes shall be replaced by good ones. All defective joints shall be 

made good by cutting and redoing. The joints where leakage persists, shall be encased in P.C.C. 

1:2:4 at the cost of the contractor whenever permitted. The size of such encasement shall be 

decided by the Owner / Consultants. The test for leakage shall be conducted at least for an hour 

after application of water head. The jointing and operations for stopping leakages as described 

shall be done at the cost of the contractor. 

3.3 MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS, ETC. 

The manholes and chambers shall be constructed at locations and as detailed on drawings. 

Additional manholes and / or junctions chambers shall be constructed whenever required and as 

instructed by Owner / Consultant. 


Construction of manholes shall be as described below unless otherwise stated elsewhere. 

a) Floor shall be in PCC 1:2:4 concrete. 

b) Side walls shall be in brick or concrete block or concrete. 

c) Bedding shall be done in concrete screed and shall be finished smooth in cement 

rendering the shape and curvature shall be best suited to the inlet and outlet pipes, and 

no sharp bends shall be given. 

d) Relieving arches in the brickwork shall be around pipes. 

e) All M.S. rungs, ladders, as required shall be provided. The rungs shall be firmly 

anchored in walls. 

f) Foundations and sidewalls shall be in RCC whenever required. The RCC work under 

such circumstances shall be governed by relevant specifications. 

g) The manhole cover shall conform to the relevant standards and shall be embedded in 

PCC coping. 

h) Inside and outside surface of the manhole / chamber shall be plastered in C.M. 1:4 

rendered smooth, outside surface shall also be plastered similarly whenever called for. 

(Inside shall be with water proofing compound). 

3.3.2 Brickwork 


JACOBS 




3.3.3 Plaster 

Bricks shall be of good quality and of homogeneous texture, free from flaws, cracks, stone, 

nodules of lime and such undesirable defects. The bricks shall be of uniform size and shall not 

be overburnt. 

The bricks shall be well-soaked in water prior to use. Joints shall not be more than 10mm thick, 

not more than 10 courses shall be raised in a day which shall be raised uniformly. Cement 

mortar of 1:6 shall be used unless otherwise stated. All the joints shall be raked to 12 mm depths 

prior to receiving of plaster. All the inserts shall be firmly grouted prior to plaster. 

Sand and cement shall be clean and of the best quality. The same should be free from clay and 

any other inorganic or organic impurities. Mixing shall be done to required proportions on hard 

platforms. Materials shall be first dry mixed and water added later to achieve required condition. 

Use of mortar, which has started setting, shall not be permitted. Such mortar shall be removed 

from site. Surfaces to be plastered shall be soaked in water 24 hours in advance. First coat of 

plaster shall be applied to have even surface and the coat of cement rendering (of 2mm thick) 

shall be applied over the first coat in row. The second coat shall be pressed finished smooth with 

trowel. External plaster shall be done in the same manner. Plaster shall be cured for at least 

seven days. 

Concrete shall be in proportion specified. The aggregate shall be clean and graded. 

The cast iron covers shall be of duty specified and shall conform to relevant standards. They 

shall be of best quality foundry grey iron metal, close grained, tough without flaws, blister and all 

other casting defects. They shall have smooth surface, and shall be placed in PCC coping to 

level and shall be even. All the frames and inserts such as rungs shall receive two coats of anticorrosive 

bitumastic paint, one prior to placement and the other after fixing the same in position. 

The manholes shall be made watertight by proper plastering inside and outside. The manholes 

shall be tested alongwith the main drainage lines. During testing the external surface shall be 

checked for visible leakages. The leakages so found shall be corrected. The expense of test 

and repair job shall be borne by the contractor. On completion of the testing for leakages outside, 

the trenches by the side of the manholes shall be filled in and the excavated pit of the manhole 

shall be flooded with water for testing the leakage from outside to inside. The particular testing 

shall be done whenever called for and the leakage so observed shall be repaired. 

3.4 STONEWARE PIPES 


3.4.2 Laying 

The materials shall conform to IS-3006. They shall be of best quality stoneware, salt glazed, 

thoroughly burnt through the whole length and thickness, free from air-holes, fire blisters, cracks 

and other blemishes. They shall be of close and even texture. The manufacturer of the same 

shall be approved by the Owner / Consultants prior to the procurement of these pipes. The pipe 

shall be stacked at approved locations and protected against all damage. All the pipes shall be 

close fitted and shall be tested before lowering them into trenches. Barrels, spigots and sockets 

shall be cleaned, scraped and brushed. 

The pipes shall be carefully and gradually lowered into the trenches and shall be laid to correct 

line level, and to the gradient as shown on the drawings. 

The laying shall generally conform to IS-1742. Care shall be taken to prevent any foreign matter 

getting inside the pipes while lowering. 

The pipe lines between the successive manholes shall be without any undulation horizontally and 

vertically. These pipes shall be laid, sockets facing up the gradient beginning at the lower end up 


JACOBS 




and all sockets laid to levels in the holes or scoops out for the purposes. Each pipe shall be 

brought upto placement one at a time. 

3.4.3 Jointing 

This shall be done generally as stated in IS-1742. This shall be taken up only after the final 

alignment is made and gradients and inverts are checked by the Owner / Consultants. A gasket 

of tarred hemp yarn shall be placed around the joint in the annular space between spigot and 

socket and the same shall be inserted by suitable tools and packed up properly. Additional 

strands of yarn shall be used if necessary. Such yarn shall be soaked in water prior to 

placement. Complete caulking operations with cement mortar in proportion 1:1 of cement to 

sand or as specified, shall be made in suitable quantities with wooden caulking tool to fill up the 

annular space completely and fully. On completion of sealing of the joints the same shall be 

struck off at 45 deg to the longitudinal axis of drain using same mortar and finishing the same by 

neat cement rendering. Depths of socket yarn, mortar shall be approximately as stated below 

under Table I. Whenever necessary, the pipes shall have PCC concrete bedding and / or 

concrete encasement. 

Table - I 

Sr.No. Diameter of pipe Depth of Socket Depth of Yarn Depth of Mortar 

1. 100 mm 50 22 28 

2. 150 mm 56 28 28 

3. 250 mm 65 28 37 

4. 300 mm 75 32 43 

Each joint shall be adequately cured by placing wet cloth or canvas wrapped around the joint and 

kept wet continuously for 3 days. 

3.4.4 Testing 

After the joints are cured for at least three days, the pipeline shall be tested for leakage to water 

head of 2 metres. The testing shall be deemed to be satisfactory if the water level does not fall 

by more than 12 mm in a length of approximately 90 metres of drain pipes within a period of one 

hour. Upon application of test head, all the joints shall be inspected for leakages, which shall be 

repaired, and the line retested in the similar manner. 

After satisfactory tests of such line, the back-filling shall proceed in the similar manner described 

previously. For the back-filling prior permission shall be obtained from the Owner / Consultant. 

3.5 CAST IRON PIPE DRAINS 

Materials and laying of pipes and fittings shall conform to IS-1536, 1537, 1538. 

The pipes shall be embedded in concrete whenever necessary. 

The pipes shall be jointed either by cement mortar joints or by lead caulking as specified. 

Other operations such as excavation, laying, testing and backfilling shall be as described in the 

preceding various paragraphs. 


JACOBS 


ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-A.02 –0019-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Antitermite Treatment .doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 4 

Approved 


0 11/08/07 

4 Issued for FEED RSJ DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 

3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 

3.1 GENERAL 

3.2 CHEMICALS 

3.3 COMMENCEMENT OF TREATMENT 


3.4 TERMITE PROOF BARRIER AT DPC LEVEL 

3.5 TREATMENT OF TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING 

3.6 TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF WALLS AND FLOOR 

3.7 TREATMENT OF SOIL ALONG EXTERNAL PERIMETER 

3.8 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES, WASTES AND CONDUITS 

3.9 SPRAYING EQUIPMENT 

3.10 PRECAUTIONS DURING MONSOON 

3.11 GUARANTEE 

3.12 SUITABILITY 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Antitermite Treatment .doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for Anti-termite treatment 

work. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The work covered consists of furnishing and installing anti-termite treatment 


3.1 GENERAL 

The formation of the chemically treated soil barrier shall be accomplished in stages as the 

building construction work progresses and due care shall be exercised to ensure that each stage 

of treatment is well integrated with that previously applied so that no unprotected avenues of entry 

are left open to the termites. 

3.2 CHEMICALS 

The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall be any one or a combination of the following. The 

chemicals shall conform to IS 6313 ( Part II ) 2001, IS 8944, IS 632 and as per manufacturer's 


Chemicals normally used are Chlorpyrifos 20 EC and Lindane 20 EC 

3.3 COMMENCEMENT OF TREATMENT 

The treatment shall commence after the construction has reached the plinth level and before the 

rubble packing or sand bed over the filled earth in the plinth area is laid. 

3.4 TERMITE PROOF BARRIER AT DPC LEVEL 

Where a Damp Proof Course is provided the Contractor shall soak chemical emulsion as 

specified above in the surface of the DPC when the concrete is yet green at the rate of 5 liters per 

sq.meter of DPC surface ensuring that the emulsion soaks into the concrete. 

Where no DPC is provided, the mortar used for 2 consecutive courses of masonry just below the 

plinth filling shall be made with emulsion as specified above instead of water. 

These 2 operations are intended to create a termite proof barrier in the plinth wall, preventing 

subterranean termites from infiltrating through voids in the masonry into the superstructure. 

3.5 TREATMENT OF TOP SURFACE OF PLINTH FILLING 

After the earth filling is completed in the plinth area and before the dry rubble packing or subgrade 

is laid, the entire surface of the filled earth shall be treated with the chemical emulsion at 5 

liters per sq.meter. Light rodding may be carried out in the soil surface to facilitate absorption of 

the emulsion. 

The above application is intended to prevent entry of termites through the floor structure. 

3.6 TREATMENT AT JUNCTION OF WALLS AND FLOOR 

Rodding shall be carried out along the junction of the walls and earth filling at 150 mm. intervals 

down to or slightly lower than the D.P.C. or the chemical barrier described in 3.5 above. Emulsion 

shall be spreaded along the wall junction at one liter per linear meter so that it mixes with the 

broken up soil and seeps to the D.P.C. level or chemical barrier, thus establishing continuity of 

the anti-termite layer. The disturbed earth shall be tamped back in place after the treatment. 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 6 technical specifications\specifications for antitermite treatment .doc

JACOBS 




3.7 TREATMENT OF SOIL ALONG EXTERNAL PERIMETER 

Finally the earth around the external perimeter of the building upto a depth of 50 mm shall be 

treated at the rate of 5 liters per running meter of the plinth wall. To facilitate this treatment, solid 

M.S. rods should be driven into the soil as close as possible to the plinth wall at intervals of 

150mm and the rods moved backwards and forwards in a direction parallel to the wall to break up 

earth so that the chemical emulsion mixes intimately with the soil. 

3.8 TREATMENT OF SOIL SURROUNDING PIPES, WASTES AND CONDUITS 

When pipes, wastes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundation, the soil 

surrounding the point of entry must be loosened around each such pipe, waste or conduits for a 

distance of 150mm. and upto a depth of 75mm. before treatment is commenced, when they enter 

the soil external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated unless they stand clear of the 

walls of the building by about 75mm. for a distance of every 300mm. 

3.9 SPRAYING EQUIPMENT 

A pressure pump shall be used to carry out spraying operations to facilitate proper penetration of 

chemical into the earth. 

3.10 PRECAUTIONS DURING MONSOON 

No spraying shall be carried out when it rains. Treatment should be repeated in plinth areas if it 

rains immediately after a spraying operation and before the emulsion has soaked into the soil. 

3.11 GUARANTEE 

The treatment shall carry a guarantee for a minimum period of ten years. 

3.12 SUITABILITY 

The work shall be carried out to suit other relevant civil works. 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Antitermite Treatment .doc

JACOBS 


WATER PROOFING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-A.02 –0020-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Water proofing.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 3 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 AGENCY FOR WATERPROOFING 

3.2 GUARANTEE 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Water proofing.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for Waterproofing. 

The work covered consists of furnishing and installing water proofing in accordance with this 

specification, applicable drawings, and IS-1609. The selected water proofing shall be provided as 

per the manufacturer's specification. 


3.1 AGENCY FOR WATERPROOFING 

This work shall be performed by an approved firm that has made speciality of this kind of waterproofing 

for at least 5 years and that can show at least three similar installations that have proved 

successful. 

3.2 GUARANTEE 

The agency for waterproofing shall furnish a guarantee which shall be agreed upon in the 

contract to ensure the successful performance of the contract and it shall agree that there is 

nothing in the above specifications which will prevent such successful performance. The 

guarantee shall be for a period of 10 years. Any work required to be carried out as a result of any 

defects in workmanship during the period of the guarantee shall be carried out by the Contractor / 

The Agency at his cost. 

\\nmumfil01\construction\18 3188 hpcl lobs\enquiry for civil works\section 6 technical specifications\specifications for water proofing.doc

JACOBS 


SITE GRADING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-C.02 –0021-A4 


By 

Checked 

By 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Site Grading.doc 

Page 1 of 4 

Approved 

By 


0 11/08/07 4 Issued for FEED RSJ DK MBR

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 



3.1 SETTING OUT & LEVELLING 

3.2 CLEARING AND STRIPPING 

3.3 EARTHWORK IN FILLING 

3.4 MICROGRADING 



1.0 PURPOSE 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Site Grading.doc

JACOBS 





construction procedure to be followed during the execution of site grading works. 


The work covered shall consist of providing for and executing the site grading works as shown 

in the relevant drawings and in accordance with the specifications. 


3.1 SETTING OUT & LEVELLING 

3.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for accurate and proper setting out of the work with regard to 

lines and levels of reference, and with regard to the correctness of dimensions, alignments and 

levels of the work in conformity with the drawings. The Contractor shall at his own cost, provide 

all necessary instruments, labour material and equipment for this purpose should any error be 

discovered, at any time, during the progress of work or thereafter, in the dimensions, alignment or 

level of part or all of work, the Contractor shall at his own expense rectify the errors to the 

satisfaction of the Owner/Consultant. Any checking of line or level by the Owner/Consultant shall 

in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities. 

3.1.2 The Contractor shall, prior to start of work, construct one or more permanent bench marks at a 

central location from which all levels for the earth work shall be set. Permanent bench marks 

shall be accurately referenced to the Owner’s plant datum. All labour and materials for setting 

levels shall be at Contractor’s cost. Permanent bench marks shall be made of masonry pillars 

with a neatly plastered top and levelled as per the directions of Owner/Consultant. The bench 

marks shall be well connected with a triangular grid system or other bench marks and the entire 

arrangement approved by the Owner/Consultant. 

3.2 CLEARING AND STRIPPING 

The area where earth work is to be carried out shall be cleared and stripped completely of all 

bushes, roots, trees, shrubs and other vegetation, organic matter and other objectionable 

materials. All these should be completely uprooted and not merely scraped at the surface. Trees 

upto 50 cms girth shall be removed from the site and those above 50 cm girth shall be handed 

over to the Owner. 

Excess materials including trees, roots etc. shall be removed to the disposal areas as directed by 

the Owner/Consultant outside the refinery premises. 

3.3 EARTHWORK IN FILLING 

3.3.1 Description and Testing of Fill Material 

a) The fill material shall be granular, well graded compactable and possess good drainage 

characteristics. It shall be free of vegetation, organic matter and other impurities. Acceptable 

classes (as per IS:1498) are GW, GP, GM, SW or a mix of these. Following limits of grain size 

distribution are recommended : 

1. Maximum size : 100 mm 

2. Retained on 20mm sieve : >30% 

3. Passing No. 100 sieve : >45% 

4. Passing No. 200 sieve : >10% 

b) The Contractor shall, at his own cost, conduct tests, to ensure the suitability of the proposed fill 

material. He shall submit the test results to the Owner/Consultant and obtain approval of the 

same before commencing the site grading operations, and, if required shall make arrangements 

for the Owner/Consultant to witness sample preparation and conducting of the tests. 


JACOBS 




c) The Contractor shall also carry out on the proposed fill material compaction tests to determine the 

optimum moisture content and maximum dry density as per IS2720-Part 7:1980 and water 

content test as per IS 2720- Part 2:1973 to determine the natural moisture content. 

d) The Contractor shall repeat the tests described in 3.3.1.b and 3.3.1.c above, as often as directed 

by the Owner/Consultant but at least once for every 5000 m 3 of fill. He shall establish an 

adequately equipped field laboratory for this purpose. Test results shall be carefully recorded and 

tagged such that when field control of moisture during the filling and compaction operation is 

carried out, based on them, easy and accurate identification of the test result corresponding to 

each stretch of fill is possible. 

3.3.2 Filling and Compaction 

a) The fill shall be constructed in layers, each layer being compacted to the required density before 

the next layer is laid. The compacted thickness shall be 300 mm for each layer. 

b) Compaction shall be carried out using steel wheeled or rubber tyred rollers as appropriate. The 

Contractor shall determine the number of passes of the roller required to achieve the required 

density by first conducting trials over a test stretch. Vibrating roller shall be used if it allows faster 

compaction. 

The number of passes shall be reviewed and adjusted in consultation with the Consultant/Owner, 

as required during the course of the work. 

c) All lumps and clods in the fill material shall be broken before rolling. The top surface of each 

layer shall be roughened before placing the subsequent layer to ensure proper keying in between 

layers. 

d) Prior to rolling, the moisture content of the material shall be brought to within ± 2% of the 

optimum moisture content as obtained from the tests in 3.3.1.c by addition or removal of water, 

accompanied by thorough mixing to ensure a uniform moisture content. Each layer shall be 

compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density as obtained from the Standard Proctor 

Test. 

e) Each layer shall be tested by the Sand replacement method to ensure that the specified density 

has been achieved. At least one such test shall be carried out for every 2500 sq. m of 

graded area of every layer. 

If the testing indicates that any part of the fill does not meet the requirements, that part shall be 

reworked by the Contractor at his own cost till the specified density is achieved. 

f) The Contractor shall submit daily laboratory and observations report. This shall provide details of 

location of sample, time of collection, time it was placed in oven, the moisture content and density 

test results. 

3.4 MICROGRADING 

Micrograding shall be carried out by Contractor over graded areas to bring the finished grade 

level to level indicated, including provision of required slopes and finishes. Rolling to be done 

along with watering using road roller to achieve proper compaction and level. 


Nil 


Nil 


JACOBS 


MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATION WORK 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-S.02 –0022-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Miscellaneous Fabrication Work.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 5 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.2 LADDERS & RUNGS 

3.3 ANCHOR BOLTS 

3.4 SLEEVES 


3.5 ACCESS OPENINGS IN ROOF & AIR - TIGHT HATCH COVERS 

3.6 METAL FLASHINGS 

3.7 STEEL STAIRS & CAT - WALKS 

3.8 EDGE- PROTECTION ANGLES 

3.9 M.S.INSERTS 

3.10 HAND RAILS 

3.11 ANCHOR FASTNERS 

3.12 HOT - DIP GALVANISING 

3.13 CAST - IRON GRATING 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Miscellaneous Fabrication Work.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for miscellaneous 

fabrication work. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The work covered consists of providing & installing all miscellaneous metal work in strict 

accordance with the specifications and the applicable drawings. The following work shall normally 

be covered under the specifications. 

a) Ladders & Rungs 

b) Anchor Bolts 

c) Sleeves 

d) Access Openings in Roof & Air-Tight Hatch Covers 

e) Metal Flashings 

f) Steel Stairs & Cat Walks 

g) Edge Protection Angles 

h) M.S. Inserts 

j) Hand Rails 

k) Anchor Fasteners 


Work included under the Specifications shall be fabricated and installed by the contractor at the 

proper time, and as rapidly as progress of the adjacent & connecting work will permit. Work to be 

installed by the contractor shall be delivered when required. The contractor shall consult with the 

various Agencies installing adjoining work, regarding the methods to be employed in connecting 

the several materials. Holes and connections for the work of other trades shall be provided as 

necessary. All work shall be erected and secured plumb and true to line, and finished smooth and 

free from noticeable irregularities of file marks. 

The contractor shall verify all measurements in the field, for the fabricated work to fit the actual 

conditions at site. Before starting work, all adjoining work shall be examined. Application of 

corrective measures to the adjoining work, may be necessary to make the work comply with the 


3.1 MATERIALS 

The materials for fabrication work covered in the specifications shall be supplied by the 

contractor. The M.S. materials shall conform to IS 2062, unless otherwise specified. 

3.2 LADDERS & RUNGS 

Steel ladders with cage and rungs shall be provided and installed wherever indicated and as 

detailed in the drawings. Necessary accessories, such as base plates, anchor bolts shall also be 

provided. 

3.3 ANCHOR BOLTS 

Anchor bolts shall be made out of steel or iron rod, with pipe sleeves, bent ends or anchor plates 

as shown and specified in drawings. Bolts shall be provided with hexagonal head, nuts & 

washers. Bolts shall be provided with M.S. sleeves, wherever necessary for adjustment during 

erection. The material shall conform to IS 2062. 


JACOBS 




3.4 SLEEVES 

Sleeves shall be fabricated out of M.S. sheets or YST 25 medium pipes or P.V.C. If load bearing, 

they shall be fastened by anchor straps in concrete, and shall be placed at proper elevation as 

shown in the drawings. The work shall include providing and fixing sleeves and sealing with 

cement grout in manner approved by the owner / consultants. 

3.5 ACCESS OPENINGS IN ROOF & AIR - TIGHT HATCH COVERS 

These shall be provided in underground ducts & roofs as indicated in the drawings. Access 

opening covers shall be of steel and painted as required. Air - tight hatches shall be gasketed 

suitably. 

3.6 METAL FLASHINGS 

Metal flashings shall be installed at locations shown in the drawings to provide water-tight 

protection. Exposed edges of all flashings shall be folded back 12 mm to provide stiffness. Cap 

flashings shall be secured in metal reglects with the groove filled with caulking compound as 

shown in the drawings. The materials of flashings will be either G.I., aluminium or copper as 

specified. 

3.7 STEEL STAIRS & CAT - WALKS 

Steel stairs including cat - walks, wherever shown on the drawings shall be complete with 

stringers, treads, risers, cat - walk framing, struts, hangers, bracing, chequered plates, toe plates, 

railings and all fastenings and fittings. All work shall be shop fitted and assembled as far as 

possible before erection. All work shall be erected square, plumb straight and true. Joints and 

intersections shall be accurately fitted and securely braced or anchored. 

3.8 EDGE- PROTECTION ANGLES 

These shall consist of M.S. angle 50 x 50 x 6mm size with hold-fasts @ 600 mm / c.c. unless 

otherwise stated. Hold-fasts shall normally be 10mm M.S. rods approximately 150mm long, bent 

into "Z" shape and welded within the flanges of the angles. 

Wherever the edge protection angles are used on trenches a suitable guide plate (approx. of 

20mm x 6mm size) shall be tack - welded to the angle as required. 

At corners the angles should be cut at 45° and welded flush. 

3.9 M.S.INSERTS 

M.S. plate or pipe inserts in concrete or masonry shall be fixed at correct locations and elevations 

shown in the relevant drawings. The fabrication of the inserts shall be done in the best applicable 

methods to avoid distortion. Hold-fasts shall normally be fully welded unless otherwise specified. 

Any parts such as bolts, which are integral part of the insert, shall be carefully handled during 

fabrication to avoid damages to threads and shall be accurately positioned prior to and during 

welding. The inserts shall be painted with one coat of red oxide primer on exposed surfaces after 

placement. Any modifications after placement in concrete particularly with gas-cutting shall be 

avoided. The inserts shall be measured on "weight" basis unless otherwise specified. 

3.10 HAND RAILS 

This shall consist of M.S. pipes and two runners at top and mid height of the post. Wherever 

necessary, the plates shall be provided. The construction shall be welded type unless otherwise 

specified. The vertical posts shall be 40 NB B class pipe and shall be placed at 1.5M max 

spacing unless otherwise specified. The height shall be 925 mm or 1050 mm. The mid rail 32 NB 

B class pipe shall be welded as shown on the drawing and specified elsewhere. 


JACOBS 




Fabrication, in general, shall be as shown on the drawings and specified elsewhere. Toe plate of 

100 x 6 M.S. flat shall be provided whenever called out. Additional posts at wherever railing is 

interrupted shall be provided at no extra cost. The rate shall include fixing to either concrete or 

steel structure or as specified. 

The painting of shop shall be done after usual surface preparation. 

3.11 ANCHOR FASTNERS 

These shall be of the best locally available make, and shall be approved by the Consultants 

before using the same. The anchor fasteners shall be utilized for holding up minor / medium 

structural works and equipments in concrete or masonry as required. The fasteners used shall be 

such that it can be installed easily in pre-drilled holes of standard sizes and shall expand after 

striking and bolting. It shall be galvanized to resist corrosion. 

3.12 HOT - DIP GALVANISING 

Hot - dip galvanizing shall be done for mild steel grating or any other steel work if asked for. The 

galvanizing shall conform to IS - 2629. (Minimum weight of zinc shall be 450 gm / sq. meter). All 

openings and cut-outs shall be made before hot-dipping. 

3.13 CAST - IRON GRATING 

The grating shall be manufactured from grey cast - iron conforming to grade 15 of IS - 210. The 

cast - iron grating shall conform to IS - 5961 and as specified on the drawing. 


JACOBS 


STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS 

AND VENTILATORS 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-A.02 –0023-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Steel doors, Windows and ventilators.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 9 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 GENERAL 

3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS 


3.3 OPENABLE STEEL WINDOWS WITH FLY SCREENS 


3.3.2 Glazing 

3.3.3 Fixtures and Hardware 

3.3.4 Installation / Erection 

3.3.5 Painting 

3.4 STEEL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS 

3.4.1 General 

3.4.2 Materials and Fabrication 

3.4.3 Types of Shutters 

3.4.4 Additional Fixtures and provisions 

3.4.5 Galvanising 


3.4.7 Rolling Grills 


3.5 HOLLOW METAL PRESSED STEEL DOORS 

3.5.1 General 


3.5.3 Fabrication 

3.6 STEEL FIREPROOF DOORS 

3.7 FIXTURES AND HARDWARE 

3.8 INSTALLATION 

3.9 PAINTING 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Steel doors, Windows and ventilators.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 

The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for steel doors, windows 

and ventilators. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The work covered by this specification consists of supplying and installing steel doors (hinged or 

sliding), steel windows, ventilators and fanlights. Hollow metal pressed steel (HMPS) doors, 

fireproof doors all in accordance with this specification and the applicable drawings. 


3.1 GENERAL 

The basic design of steel doors, windows, ventilators and fanlights shall conform generally to 

IS: 1038 & IS: 1361 and also dimensionally to the details shown on the drawings and the 

materials and methods specified herein. Unless otherwise specified coupling sections shall be of 

mild steel. Glazing clips shall be provided wherever pan sizes exceed 600 x 300 mm. 

Steel windows for industrial buildings shall conform to IS-1361 unless specified otherwise. 

Frames shall show no wrap or inferior workmanship. All openable windows shall be designed to 

open outside unless otherwise specified. Windows shall be designed for glazing on the outside of 

the frames. The hinges for side hung shutters shall be of projecting non-friction types and for top 

hung plain types unless otherwise specified. Weather bars shall be fitted to fabricated coupling 

section wherever required. 

Steel windows with fixed louvers shall be with 16 gauge pressed steel guides for receiving glass 

louvers 6mm thick, spaced at 50mm center to center. In case of M.S. pressed steel louvers they 

shall be fabricated out of 16 gauge sheets bent to "Z" shape and shall be tack welded to frames. 

The necessary stiffening members shall be provided and in such cases the length of the louver 

shall not excess 450mm. 

3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS 

The contractor if so directed shall submit three sets of shop drawings covering items of work of 

this specification. The drawing shall show all dimensions details of construction and installation 

relating to adjoining and related works where same requires cutting or close fitting and shall show 

all the reinforcement, gauges of metal, nomenclature of the various standard sections used, 

welding anchorages or holdfasts, positions of all fittings and fixtures. Various units shall be 

properly marked and their correct position shall be indicated. The marks and directions so 

indicated shall be painted on the fabricated members to facilitate erection at site. The work of 

fabrication shall be taken up only after the shop drawings are approved by the owner / consultant. 

3.3 OPENABLE STEEL WINDOWS WITH FLY SCREENS 


The windows shall have standard galvanised fly screen of 28 swg. In 16 gauge sheet metal frame 

fixed to inside of the frame by M.S. flat and screws to allow the screen being easily removed. The 

operation of the shutter shall be at the sill to permit the operation of the shutter. No peg stays 

shall be provided. Locking handle shall be provided to hold the shutter in closed position. 

Galvanising if required by the Owner / Consultant shall be hot dipped type and shall not be less 

than 0.50 kg / sq. of the area. 

3.3.2 Glazing 

The glass used for the purpose of glazing shall be 4mm thick clear sheet unless otherwise 

specified. The glass shall be fixed to the frames by means of glazing clips, and approved putty. 


JACOBS 




The number of glazing clips shall be 4 minimum per panel. The glazing may be fixed also by 

means of pressed steel or aluminum extruded beading screwed with countersunk screws to the 

frames. The glazing shall conform to IS-2835. 

3.3.3 Fixtures and Hardware 

The windows and doors shall have following minimum hardware unless otherwise specified. The 

windows and doors shall have projecting type of hinges unless otherwise specified. Mild steel 

holdfasts made out of M.S. strips or rods shall be provided. The minimum number of holdfasts for 

the frames shall be six. However, as many holdfasts as required for fixing the frames firmly shall 

be provided. The handle and peg stays (One No. per shutter of windows) shall be provided. The 

doors shall have 3/2 no. of tower bolts depending upon double shuttered or single shuttered 

doors. Minimum fixtures such as aldrops and handles or latch and lock type handles shall be 

provided. The fixtures so specified shall be M.S. plated unless otherwise specified. All the 

hardware shall be of approved make. 

3.3.4 Installation / Erection 

Frames shall be installed and fixed in masonry / concrete structures as shown on the drawings to 

plumb and true line that operation is easy and smooth. Parts such as hinges shall be cleaned off 

the construction waste and shall be greased prior to final painting. 


The windows shall be painted with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer unless otherwise 

specified. The frames and shutters shall be painted with two coats of approved enamel paint 

when so specified. 

3.4 STEEL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS 

3.4.1 General 

The rolling shutters or grills shall be fabricated according to drawings and shall conform to IS- 

6248. 

3.4.2 Materials and Fabrication 

The materials for various integral parts of the rolling shutters shall be as follows 

Curtain shall consist of interlocking corrugated laths or slats fabricated out of cold rolled steel 

strips conforming to IS-513. The thickness fabricated out of steel sheets for the laths shall not be 

less than 1.0 mm for shutters upto 3.0M width and shall not be less than 1.25mm for shutters 

having width more than 3.00 meters. 

The bridge depth of the laths shall be 12mm minimum, so as to be strong enough to resist normal 

manual or wind pressure. Laths shall be made of a continuous single piece without any welded 

joint. The water shedding surface shall be kept on the side exposed to atmosphere. When 

interlocked, the rolling centers of the laths shall be 75mm centers minimum, unless otherwise 

specified. Each alternate lath section shall be fitted with malleable cast iron or mild steel clips 

securely riveted at either end thus preventing their lateral movement, and wearing of their edges 

against the guide channels. 

A fabricated bottom lock plate of riveted construction shall be made out of mild steel of not less 

than 3.15mm thickness reinforced with mild steel angle of not less than 35 x 35 x 5 mm size at 

the bottom. It shall be interlocked with the bottom lath of the curtain, so as to have a firm contact 

against floor while the shutter is in closed position. The lock plate shall be fitted with sliding bolts 

(or flats) at either end to engage with suitable slits in the guide channels in a closed position. 

These bolts shall have a locking arrangement suitable for padlocks from inside and outside. The 

lock plate shall also have pulling handles at both ends and both sides. 


JACOBS 




The guide channels shall be of Mild Steel deep channels, rolled, pressed or built up construction. 

The thickness of the construction shall not be less than 3.15mm and the depth shall be adequate 

for easy movements of the curtain and also keep the ends within under wind pressure of 160 Kg / 

sq.m The gap should also be such as to prevent rattling of laths under wind pressure. The 

minimum depth of the channel shall be 60mm for widths upto 3.50 meters and 75 mm for widths 

beyond 3.50 meters. The guide channels shall have a minimum 3 nos. of M.S. holdfasts or fixing 

plates, the maximum spacing of the same shall however not exceed 750 mm. Provision of M.S. 

stoppers at the maximum height shall be made on the guide channels. 

The Bracket Plates shall be fabricated out of mild steel sheets of minimum 3.15mm thickness. 

However, the thickness shall be increased to 6mm for gear operated shutters. The shape of the 

bracket plate shall be to suit the shape of the hood and shall be partially hexagonal in general. 

The edge shutting the wall shall be bent suitably at 90° to facilitate fixing of the plate to the wall. 

In case of rolling shutters which are wider than 2.50 meters the bracket plates shall have 

M.S.angle of 50 x 50 x 6mm or 65 x 65 x 6mm welded to it for supporting the same on the wall. 

Since the bracket plate carries the full load of the rolling shutter, the fixing shall be done by bolts 

embedded in the lintel with proper anchorage. 

The roller shall consist of suspension shaft of heavy M.S.pipe conforming to IS-1161 and shall be 

of adequate diameter to have minimum deflection. It shall be fabricated cage type housing the 

suspension shaft, which shall be supported at intervals. The suspension shaft shall have helical 

wire spring and M.S. or cast iron pulleys for counter balancing the weight of the curtain. The shaft 

shall have self aligning double row ball bearing 2 nos. minimum for shutters upto 2.50 meters 

width and more in case of window shutters. The spring shall be made from high tensile spring 

steel conforming to grade 2 of IS-4454. The spring tension shall be made adjustable by providing 

suitable adjustment holes on the rims of the pulleys. 

Hood covers shall be made of mild steel sheets not less than 1mm thick, and shall be of shape 

indicated on drawings. These shall generally be hexagonal in part and follow the shape of the 

bracket plates. This shall be properly stiffened with M.S. angles or flats at top and bottom edges 

and in transverse directions in case of wider shutters and shall be supported at proper intervals to 

prevent sagging. 

3.4.3 Types of Shutters 

The rolling shutters are classified depending on their size and operation and shall be provided 

with other auxiliary parts as follows. 

a) Self Coiling or Push and Pull Type of Shutters 

These shall be manually operated and shall be provided upto 12 sq. area. The 

suspension shaft shall have ball bearings as specified above. Fabricators shall provide a 

pulling hook for each of the rolling shutters. The pulling hook shall consist of 12mm rod 

having a hook at one end and a loop at the other. The length shall be adequate to push 

the bottom lock plate to the topmost position with ease. 

b) Gear Operated Mechanical Type of Rolling Shutters 

These shall be provided beyond 12 sq. area and upto 25 sq. In this case, the rolling 

shutters shall have bevel gear arrangement at the suspension shaft and a gearbox at the 

operational height with a crankshaft connecting both. A gear handle shall also be 

provided along with such arrangements and the gearbox shall be such that it can be 

operated from both sides i.e. inside and outside. The same mechanical arrangements 

shall be provided except for the gearbox and crankshaft for shutters above 25 sq. area 

and below 35 sq. The crank shaft and gear box shall be replaced by suitable chain wheel 

and hand chain mounted directly on the worm shaft. 


JACOBS 




c) Electrically Operated Type Rolling Shutters 

These shall be used beyond 35 Sq.M and upto 50 Sq.M. These shall consist of an 

electric suitably sized and shall drive the worm shaft by chain or "V" Belt drive through 

reduction gear box. Provision of an alternative arrangement of chain gear operating 

mechanism shall also be made to cater for periods of electric failure. The upward or 

downward speed of shutter shall not exceed 10 cm / sec. Controls for the electric motor 

shall be provided for reverse operation or stop position as required and shall have limit 

switches to cut-off operation beyond and limits. 

The gear worms used in the assembly of rolling shutters shall be of high grade cast iron 

or mild steel or phospher bronze and shall be machine cut. 

Wherever necessary, the provision of the gear mechanism for operating rolling structures 

may be provided or omitted depending upon the frequency of operation and other 

considerations. 

3.4.4 Additional Fixtures and provisions 

Additional fixtures such as safety devices consisting of additional reinforcement for the bottom 

lock plate, anchoring rods, central hasp and staple arrangement may be provided whenever 

called out. 

Intermediate mullions or posts of fixed removable or sliding type may be provided for 

sectionalising the rolling shutters of multiple door installation for wide openings. 

Wicket doors may be provided wherever called out. Size shall be as shown on the drawings. 

These shall be erected in such a way as not to foul with the main rolling shutter while opening or 

closing. These shall be fitted with good lever lock operated by key lockable from inside and 

outside both. 

Safety lever lock may be provided on either end of two bottom lock plate in addition to padlock 

arrangement to secure the slide blots in closed position for extra security. 

In situation where a certain amount of ventilation is required such as transformer and switch gear 

rooms the rolling shutter may have a portion fitted with rolling grill. The height of such grill, 

however shall be limited to 500mm maximum. 

3.4.5 Galvanising 

The rolling shutters shall be of galvanised type whenever so called out. The various parts under 

"Materials & Fabrication" above shall be hot dipped galvanised, except for hood which can be 

made out of G.I. sheets readily available in the market. The galvanising shall be effected by using 

97.50% pure zinc and the zinc coating shall not be less than 230 grammes per sq.meter. The 

coating shall be free from flaking or peeling. The galvanising shall be done in accordance with IS- 

2629 and 6159. 


All the component parts of the rolling shutter described above except the spring and the inside of 

the guide channels shall be painted with red oxide zinc chromate primer unless otherwise 

specified. The rolling shutter shall be painted after erection with three coats of enamel paint of 

approved make and shade, unless otherwise mentioned. 

3.4.7 Rolling Grills 

These are similar in design, construction and operation to rolling shutters and consequently all 

provisions mentioned herein above shall be equally applicable to the rolling grills except in 

respect of curtains. The curtains shall be replaced by hinged typed of grills made out of cold 


JACOBS 




rolled steel sheet links of 1.0mm thickness assembled on tubes or rods. Grills may also be 

manufactured out of 8mm dia. M.S. Rods bent to shape of links. This shall however be as per the 

approved design. 


The rolling shutter shall be erected by the manufacturer or his authorised representative for the 

contractor in sound and neat manner so as to afford trouble free and easy operation and neat 

appearance. Wherever necessary, the contractor shall cut chases and grooves on the sides of 

openings wherever necessary for erection purpose and shall finish the same after the complete 

installation. 

3.5 HOLLOW METAL PRESSED STEEL DOORS 

3.5.1 General 

Wherever required the standard hollow metal pressed steel doors (HMPS) shall be provided. The 

shutters shall be of pressed steel, plain flush type, and shall be furnished by the approved door 

manufacturer with doors mortized machined and prepared for hardware attachment. 


Steel for all hollow pressed steel and sliding doors and frames shall be cold rolled best quality 

steel sheets of gauges as specified herein and conforming to IS-1730. Steel for doors shall be 

stretcher pressed with glazing beads wherever indicated. Erection fittings shall be of steel 

designed to provide for normal expansion and contraction erection, fastenings-holdfasts, screws, 

nuts and anchor clips shall be of steel. 

Sections shall be formed true to details as shown on the manufacturer's drawings with clean, 

straight, sharply defined profiles and free from defects impairing strength and durability. 

3.5.3 Fabrication 

a) Door 

All HMPS doors shall be hollow metal steel of the thickness and type shown on the 

drawings. Dimensions shall allow + 3MM tolerance. Doors shall be fabricated from 16 

S.W.G.M.S. black sheets, stiffened with vertical channel or z members spaced at not 

more than 300mm on centers. The doors shall be filled with "TF" quality thermocole 

insulation, tightly packed, to eliminate metallic sounds. The doors shall be free from 

metallic ring. Door surface shall be flat and level to within + 1mm to 600mm. Glazing 

beads shall be of 18 ga. steel formed or drawn and shall be designed and fitted for 

receiving 6.00 mm thick sheet glass. 

Doors shall be out and framed for fixed louvers and vision panels as designated and 

shown on the drawings. The louvers shall be built in at the manufacturer's plant. The 

doors shall be mortised for hinges and locks and reinforced with 16 ga.steel. Similar 

reinforcement shall be provided for a surface applied hardware for door closers and door 

stops wherever required. In double shutter doors, the first closing leaf shall be fitted with 

concealed tower bolts at top and bottom. The second closing leaf shall be fitted with 

mortise lock or padlock as indicated in hardware group. Double shutter door shall have 

astragals where shown and as detailed on the drawings. 

b) Door Frames 

Frames for hollow metal doors shall be pressed out of 14 S.W.G. M.S. black sheets to 

the sizes and design shown on the drawings. Frame corners shall be flat and square. All 

joints shall be continuously reinforced at back fitted and continuously welded along 

abutting edges. Surfaces along joints shall be machined and buffed to attain a smooth 


JACOBS 




matching surface even and flush with adjacent surfaces. The edges of the finish wall 

surface shall be bent back as detailed on even line. 

Hinge jamb shall be mortised for hinges, lock jamb for lock strikes with dust cover plate. 

Frames shall be reinforced with reinforcing M.S. plate for attachment of hardware (Locks 

and Door Closers) and equipment with all requisite wall anchors. All door frames shall 

extend to that floor slab and bottom tie bar shall be provided and joined by means of 

screws to the corner of outer frame. The heads of frames having width of more than 

1200mm shall be suitably reinforced to prevent sagging, when installed. 

3.6 STEEL FIREPROOF DOORS 

These can be hinged or sliding type. The sliding doors shall have automatic closing devices such 

as fuse links and counter weights whenever called out. These shall generally conform to IS-1641 

for fire safety of buildings including construction and installation of Fire-proof doors. 

The doors shall be either all steel type or pressed steel type with approved packing. These shall 

be manufactured by approved agencies and the installation of the same shall be governed by the 

relevant statutory regulations if necessary. 

3.7 FIXTURES AND HARDWARE 

Hollow metal pressed steel doors shall have M.S. hinges as required and the frame shall be 

provided with minimum numbers M.S. holdfasts as required. The minimum hardware for single or 

double shuttered doors shall be as specified below. 

Minimum Hardware and Fixtures 

Sr.No. Type Single Shuttered Door Double Shuttered Door 

1) M.S.Hinges 3 nos. 6 nos. 

2) Tower Bolts 2 nos. (One top & One at 3 nos.(2 nos. closing shutter 

mid height or bottom) and one no. on the other) 

3) Handles 2 nos. (One of each side) 4 nos. (2 nos. on each shutter 

on each side). 

4) Aldrop 1 No. (or mortize latch & 1 No. 

lock) 

5) Stoppers 1 No. 2 Nos. (one on each side). 

Handles provided on shutters shall be replaced with spring handles if required. Wherever mortise 

latch and lock is specified, door handles and aldrops need not be provided. All the hardware 

(except hinges) and fixtures shall be oxidised brass type unless otherwise specified. Any 

additional fixtures other than above shall be indicated on the drawings. 

Fireproof doors shall have all the minimum fixtures indicated by the manufacturer. The auxiliaries 

and hardware shall be as called out and shall conform to any statutory regulations if necessary. 

Sliding doors shall have all the auxiliaries such as rail, sliding gears, brackets, stoppers, sunk 

door handles, guide bars, all as shown in the drawing. 

Additional facilities such as view windows (glazed with 4mm thick glass and beading) or louver 

grills shall be provided whenever so specified. 


Frames shall be installed and fixed in the masonry / concrete structures as shown on the 

drawings, to plumb and true line, so that the operation is smooth and easy. Parts such as hinges, 

pulleys should be cleaned of the construction waste and be greased. 


JACOBS 




3.9 PAINTING 

The frames and shutters shall be painted with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer unless 

otherwise specified. The parts coming in contact with masonry need not be painted, however 

inaccessible parts not coming in contact with masonry shall be painted in two coats of red zinc 

chro-mate primer. Doors shall be finished with 3 coats of approved enamel paint wherever called 

out. 

Fire doors shall be provided with red oxide zinc chromate primer and shall be finished in three 

coats of enamel or any approved fire resisting paint whenever so specified. 


JACOBS 


CONCRETE PAVING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0025-A4 


A 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Concrete Paving.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 8 

Approved 

11/12/2006 8 Issued for client’s Approval RSJ DK MBR 


By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 



3.1 MATERIALS 

3.2 GRADES AND PROPORTIONING 

3.3 EQUIPMENTS CONSTRUCTION 

3.4 APPLICATION 

3.5 FORMS 

3.6 REINFORCEMENT 

3.7 MIXING 

3.8 PLACING 

3.9 COMPACTION AND FINISHING 

3.10 CURING 

3.11 JOINTS 

3.12 OPENING TO TRAFFIC 




\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Concrete Paving.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 


construction procedure to be followed during the execution of concrete paving works. 


This specification covers the material, laying and finishing of concrete paving. 


3.1 MATERIALS 

Concrete should conform to requirements specified in plain and reinforced concrete 

specification No. 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 

3.2 GRADES AND PROPORTIONING 

3.2.1 All concrete shall be controlled concrete conforming to IS:456. As a minimum, for 

levelling/blinding and filling purpose ordinary concrete of 1:2:4 mix proportion shall be used. 

3.2.2 Sand used for filling in concrete pavement shall be well graded clean without impurities and 

from a source approved by Owner/Consultant. 

3.2.3 WBM filling in concrete pavement shall consist of coarse aggregates of hard, crushed stone 

metal from quarries approved by Owner/Consultant Binding material for WBM shall consist of 

clean dry murrum, free from deleterious matter. 

3.3 EQUIPMENT 

All equipment like weighing devices, measuring boxes, mixers, sub-grade templates, hand 

tempers, vibrating screens, internal vibrators, longitudinal floats, bridges, belts, bush brooms, 

straight edges, edging tools etc. shall be on the worksite in first class working condition and 

shall have been inspected by Owner/Consultant before paving operations are permitted to start. 

Throughout the construction period the contractor shall maintain adequate equipment to ensure 

the proper execution of the work. 

3.4 APPLICATION 

3.4.1 Preparation of subgrade 

Before starting work, the subgrade will be thoroughly compacted by rolling/hanging/wetting to 

required lines and levels and ensuring that it complies with the following requirements:- 

a) That no soft sports are present in the sub-grade or sub-base 

b) That the uniformly compacted sub-grade or sub-base extends atleast 300 mm on either 

side of the width to be concreted 

c) That the sub-grade is properly drained. 

d) That the minimum modulus of sub-grade reaction obtained with the plate bearing test 

shall be 5.54 kg/cm 3 

e) The sub-grade shall be in moist condition at time of concrete placement. 


JACOBS 




3.4.2 Over the prepared sub-base, a base course of WBM/sand/crushed rock/rubble soil etc. as 

detailed in drawings shall be provided. This shall be well compacted by rolling along with 

sprinkling water. After laying of base course of WBM quarry dust/murrum shall be applied over 

the surface with dry rolling as given in standard specification for 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0031-A4. 

3.5 PLACING FORMWORK 

3.5.1 All side forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden sections are specially permitted. The 

steel forms shall be MS channel sections and their depth shall be equal to thickness of the 

paving. The sections shall have a length of at least 3.0 m except on curves, where shorter 

sections may be used. These forms should be provided with ample bracing and supports to 

prevent the springing of the forms under the concrete pressure or thrust of machinery operating 

nearby. 

3.5.2 The forms should be in a sufficient number and they should not be removed until concrete is 

hardened sufficiently. 

3.5.3 In case wooden forms are permitted, these shall have minimum base width of 100 mm for 200 

mm thk. slabs and 150 mm for more than 200 mm thickness. 

3.6 TYING REINFORCEMENT 

3.6.1 All reinforcement work shall confirm to IS:456 and plain and reinforced cement concrete 

specification( 18-3188-99-00-S-02-0014-A4) . Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt scale or 

other foreign material and rust. The number, size, form and position of all the reinforcement 

shall unless otherwise directed or authorised by Owner/Consultant be strictly as per drawings. 

The placing of reinforcement shall be such that when properly placed into the work, extreme 

longitudinal bars will be located not less than 50 mm nor more than 100 mm from the edges of 

the slab except for dummy joints, the length of reinforcement will keep clear of transverse joints 

by not less than 50 mm nor more than 100 mm as measured from the centre of the joint to the 

ends of longitudinal bars. 

3.6.2 While overlapping the bars in either direction the overlap shall be at least equal to spacing 

between bars in the respective direction. 

3.6.3 To prevent displacement before or during concreting, bars shall be secured to one another with 

16 SWG black soft annealed binding wire. Wooden planks provided for labour to move shall be 

supported independent of reinforcement and the cage shall never be permitted to sag or get 

displaced during concreting. Concrete spacer blocks shall be used to ensure correct cover of 

concrete over bars as shown in drawings. 

3.6.4 Dowels if used as load-transferring device shall be checked for exact position before 

concreting. Dowels shall be parallel to the surface and perpendicular to the joint and shall not 

place any restraint on the movement of the joint. 

3.7 MIXING & BATCHING 

3.7.1 Mixing shall be carried out as given in specification for Plain and reinforced concrete 

18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4. 

3.7.2 Correction for bulking – In volume batching suitable allowance shall be made for the bulking of 

fine aggregates due to presence of water. For this purpose the bulking shall be determined as 

directed by Owner/consultant. 

3.8 PLACING 

3.8.1 The place where concrete is to be poured should be clean and free from all loose dirt, wooden 

pieces, dust, standing water etc. 


JACOBS 




3.8.2 Walking on reinforcement layers is not permissible. Walkways of wooden planks or similar 

material can be placed with removable supports and should be independent of the 

reinforcement. The reinforcement position should not be disturbed nor should it sag during 

carriage and placement of concrete. 

3.8.3 Placing and vibration should not take totally more than 20 minutes from time of mixing. Method 

of placing should be got approved by Owner/Consultant. Segregation during carriage and 

placement should be avoided. If during carriage concrete segregates, it should be remixed 

before placement. 

3.8.4 Concrete should not be dropped from a height of over 1.5 m. 

3.8.5 To ensure bond and water tightness between old concrete surface and fresh concrete to be 

placed, the surface should be cleaned and roughened by ‘initial green cut’ by wire brushing or 

chipping. The initial green may be done by wire brush after 6 hours of placing concrete in order 

to facilitate the work. Chipping can be done only after 48 hours. A layer of cement slurry with 

1:1 (1 cement : 1 Sand) should be poured to obtain a uniform coating on old concrete. 

Immediately thereafter, the fresh concrete should be poured. 

3.8.6 Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be deposited on the 

sub-grade in a single operation to the required depth and width of the paving. Spreading shall 

be as uniform as possible to avoid rehandling of concrete. Where, however, a certain amount 

of redistribution is necessary it shall be done with shovels and not with rakes. Concrete shall 

be vibrated with internal vibrators. Concrete shall be placed continuously until completion of the 

part of the work between construction joints or as directed by Owner/Consultant . 

3.8.7 Placing in extreme weather 

All precautions shall be taken for concreting in extreme weather in accordance with the relevant 

clauses of IS:456. Due protection shall be provided to prevent cement being blown away while 

proportioning and mixing during windy weather. No concreting shall be carried out in 

continuous heavy rains. Necessary arrangements to cover the freshly poured concrete shall be 

provided, to protect it from the direct rays of the sun and from drying winds. 

3.8.8 All concreting placements should be co-ordinated with placement of conduits; inserts, 

embedded parts etc. executed either by same agency of separately. 

3.8.9 Concrete in standing water shall be executed strictly as per IS:456. 

3.8.10 The concrete shall be laid in panels not exceeding 7.5 m x 7.5 m or as directed by 


3.9 COMPACTION AND FINISHING 

3.9.1 Compaction 

The surface of the paving shall be compacted either by means of power driven finish machine 

or a vibrating hand screed. For areas where width of the slab is very small as the corner of 

street junction etc. hand consolidation and finishing shall be done as follows: 

a) Concrete as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly and screeded to the crown and 

cross-section shown on the plans and to such level above the base that when compacted 

and finished, the paving shall conform to the grade and cross section indicated by the 

plans. The entire surface shall then be tamped until a close knit dense surface is 

obtained. 


JACOBS 




3.9.2 Floating 

b) The tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a swing motion in 

combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with lateral shifts, the aim of this 

operation being compaction and screeding to the approximate level required. 

Subsequent tamping should advance 75mm at a 

time in the direction in which the work is proceeding and in final stages the tamping 

should be closer about 12mm at a time until a level and dense surface is obtained. 

c) If so directed by Owner/consultant, hand operated vibrating tamper consisting of normal 

type of hand tamper attached to a pneumatic or electric vibrating unit shall be used for 

compaction. 

d) Segregated particles of coarse aggregate which collect in front of the tamper shall be 

thrown outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand with a mass: of concrete already 

on the base. 

e) Compaction by tamping shall be carried on till the mortar in the mix just works upto the 

surface. The surface shall be examined after compaction correction, if needed, shall be 

made by adding or removing concrete followed by further compaction and finishing. 

As soon as practicable, after concrete has been struck off and compacted, it shall be further 

smoothened and compacted by means of a longitudinal float 1200 mm long and 75 mm 

wide operated from a foot bridge. 

3.9.3 Straight Edging 

3.9.4 Belting 

3.9.5 Brooming 

3.9.6 Edging 

3.10 CURING 

After floating is completed and excess water removed but while concrete is still plastic the slab 

surface shall be tested for trueness with a straight edge and rectified, if necessary. 

Just before the concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with a two ply canvas 

belt not less than 200 mm wide and atleast 1.0 m longer than the width of the slab Hand belts 

shall have suitable handles to permit controlled uniform manipulation. The belt shall be 

operated with short strokes transverse to the carriage way centerline and a rapid advance 

parallel to the centre line. 

After belting and as soon as surplus water has risen to the surface the paving shall be given a 

broom finish to produce corrugations of uniform appearance of not more than 1/16 inch in 

depth. 

Before the concrete has its initial set the edges shall be carefully finished with an edger of the 

radius required and paving edge shall be left smooth and true to line. 

3.10.1 Initial curing 

Immediately, after the completion of the finishing operations, the surface of paving shall be 

entirely covered with wetted burlap, cotton or jute mats. 

3.10.2 Final Curing 


JACOBS 




3.11 JOINTS 

Upon the removal of mats, the slab shall be thoroughly wetted and covered by the following 

method: 

Curing with wet earth – A system of transverse and longitudinal dykes of clay about 50 mm high 

shall be laid over the slab. These dykes shall be blanketed with sandy soils free from stones to 

prevent drying up. The rest of the slab shall be covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to 

produce a blanket of earth not less than 37mm depth after wetting. This earth shall be kept 

thoroughly wet till the concrete has attained the required strength but not less than 14 days. 

3.11.1 Sealing of Joint 

a) After the curing, the temporary seal or other intruded materials of all expansion and 

contraction joints shall be removed completely and the slots filled with approved joint 

sealing compound conforming to IS: 1834 TYPE B 

b) The edges of the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed with a thin bituminous 

paint, which shall be allowed to dry before the sealing compound is applied. 

c) The primer shall be applied with a brush. The composition of primer shall be as follows: 

Name of Material Percent by Weight 

1. 200-Penetration Bitumen 66% blended blended. 

2. Light creosote oil 14% Hot Clod 

3. Solvent Naphtha 20% 

The bitumen shall be melted and fluxed with oil. When cold, solvent Naphtha shall be added. 

BITUMINOUS emulsion shall not be used as primers. Care shall be taken to ensure that the 

sealing compound is not heated above 200°C and temperature does not exceed 180°C for 

long periods. 

3.11.2 Sealing compound shall be poured into the joint opening in such a manner that the material will 

not be spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete. When required to prevent pick up under 

traffic, the exposed surface of the sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime. 

3.12 OPENING OF TRAFFIC 

3.12.1 Traffic shall not be allowed for a period of 28 days after laying of concrete. 

3.12.2 Before opening the roads to traffic all joints shall be filled and trimmed or topped out as 

required. 


18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4: Specifications for Plain and reinforced cement concrete 


Nil 


JACOBS 


METAL SHEET ROOFING & CLADDING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0026-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Metal Sheet Roofing & Cladding.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 6 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 



3.1 MATERIAL 

3.2 HANDLING & STORAGE AT SITE 

3.3 INSTALLATION & FIXING 




\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Metal Sheet Roofing & Cladding.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 


construction procedure to be followed during the execution of metal sheet roofing and cladding 

works. 


The work described herein shall cover providing and installing metal sheet roofing and cladding 

including translucent sheets and all accessories such as flashings, cappings, gutters, trims, 

supporting straps, brackets, foam fillers, sealants and the work shall be carried out in strict 

accordance with this specification and applicable drawings. Supplier shall prepare shop 

drawings for roofing, cladding, gutters etc and shall take the approval of Consultants prior to 

manufacturing and supply. Based on roof slope, supplier shall propose the type of profiled sheet 

to be used and the proposal shall be justified through proper calculations. 


3.1 MATERIAL 

3.1.1 General 

Material for sheets and accessories shall strictly conform to BIS/BS/ASTM/AS specifications as 

mentioned. Supplier shall furnish test certificates for verification of the same and shall make 

arrangements for inspection and marking of the materials at his works. Erection shall not be 

started before approval of materials including all accessories. 

Length shall be such that number of joints are minimum. Wherever specified, to avoid 

longitudinal overlaps for larger span, sheets shall be of single length and shall be site formed. 

3.1.2 Steel Sheets 

Profiled steel substrate shall be cold roll formed conforming to IS 513. Base metal thickness 

without any coating shall be minimum 0.55 mm with minimum yield stress 550 Mpa / 275 Mpa 

(ASTM A446, Grade E) as required by consultants / Owner. On top of base steel any one of the 

following coatings should be used :- 

Plain Galvalume 

Plain galvalume sheets shall conform to AZ 150 of AS 1397 or ASTM 792 with hot-dip metallic 

coating of 55% Al and 45% Zn alloy having total coating mass of min. 150 gms/m 2 inclusive of 

both sides. 

Galvanised with colour coating 

Galvanised sheets shall conform to IS:277 / ASTM A 525 M / AS 1397 with hot dip zinc coating 

of minimum 275 gms/m 2 coating mass (total of both sides) with an additional organic coating. 

Exterior organic coating shall be of SMP (silicon modified polyester) or of fluoropolymer PVDF 

(polyvinyldine fluoride paint containing at least 70% high build Kynar 500 resins in the dry paint 

film) having 20 microns nominal dry film thickness over 5 microns corrosion inhibitive epoxy 

primer. Inner side organic coating shall be 5 microns polyester back coat over 5 microns 

corrosion inhibitive epoxy primer. Colour should be as per Owner / Consultants choice. Coating 

shall be guaranteed for atleast 20 years. 


JACOBS 




3.1.3 Aluminium Sheets 

Aluminium sheets shall conform to IS:1254 and shall be of either circular corrugated or industrial 

troughed profiled type. Thickness shall be as per design but not less than 0.91 mm for roof and 

0.71 mm for side cladding. Surface of sheeting shall have uniform reflective finish either plain 

mill or stucco embossed as per Owner / Consultants. Surface shall be free of blemishes and 

have uniform gloss and brightness. If required, bare aluminium sheets shall be pre-painted 

by giving suitable chemical treatment and coatings as specified. 

3.1.4 Insulated Cladding Panels 

Insulated roof / wall cladding panels shall comprise of profiled precoated galvanised steel exterior 

and interior sheets with rigid polyurethane foam (PUF) or expanded polystyrene (EPS) or resin 

bonded mineral wool / glass wool / fibre glass roll as insulation. External sheets shall be made 

out of 0.6 mm (TCT) of SMP/PVDF coated galvanised steel (275 gm/m 2 hot dip zinc coating 

mass total of both side) having yield strength of 550 mpa/275 mpa as required by Consultants or 

Owner. Minimum dry film thickness of exterior face coating shall be 20 microns over 5 

microns corrosion inhibitive epoxy primer. External sheet shall have 5 microns polyester 

back coat over 5 microns corrosion inhibitive epoxy primer at back side. Internal sheets shall be 

same as external sheets. Density of rigid polyurethane foam shall be 35 Kg/m 3 and thermal 

conductivity (K) shall be 0.018 Kcal /mh 0 C. Minimum thickness shall be 30 mm or as specified. 

PUF shall conform to IS:12436. Density of expanded polystyrene shall be 18 Kg/m 3 and K value 

shall be 0.028 KCal/mh 0 C. Minimum thickness shall be 50 mm or as specified. EPS shall 

conform to IS:4671. Polyurethane/EPS outer and inner sheets shall form a composite sandwich 

product having high compressive strength and wide spanning properties. If resin bonded mineral 

wool or glass wool or fibre glass roll is used as insulating material then first internal sheet shall be 

fixed to the structure. Then “Z” shaped G.I. sub-girts shall be fixed at purlin locations. Girt size 

will depend upon the thickness of resin bonded mineral wool / glass wool / fibre glass roll. 

External sheeting shall be fixed on the sub girts. Resin bonded mineral wool / glass wool / fibre 

glass roll insulation shall conform to IS:8183 and thickness shall be minimum 50 mm having 

a density of 48 kg/m 3 for resin bonded mineral wool of K value 0.036 kcal / mh 0 C, a density of 

24 kg/m 3 for resin bonded glass wool of K value 0.031 Kcal /mh 0 C and a density of 24 kg/m 3 for 

resin bonded fibre glass roll of K value 0.025 KCal/mh 0 C. These type of insulations shall be 

fixed in the cavity between the two sheets. 

3.1.5 Translucent Sheets 

Translucent sheets shall be fibre glass reinforced polyester panels or polycarbonate panels of 

G.E.Plastic or approved equivalent make as specified by Owner / Consultants with a minimum 

thickness of 2 mm and formed to match the profile of the metal sheeting panels. Translucent 

sheet shall have a light transmission factor of 55% to 80% and solar energy transmission of 25%. 

3.1.6 Accessories 

Materials and coatings for ridge capping, barge capping, apron flashing, cover flashing, monitors, 

expansion joints and gutters shall be manufactured out of same material as roofing / cladding 

sheets material and shall be shaped to match sheet profile. 

3.1.7 Fasteners 

Steel sheets shall be fixed with hexagonal head self drilling screws with EPDM seals. Fasteners 

shall have a protective polymer coating covering the entire fastener surface, the head as well as 

the shank, over a 8 micron zinc electroplating. Polymer coated screws should be as per AS 

3566, Class 3. 

For self drilling / self tapping screws, high rpm (2000-2500 rpm) drivers with high amperage (4- 

7 amps) shall be used to achieve the proper torque to secure fastening. Drill bits shall be 

cleared out after the completion of drilling of sheets. 


JACOBS 




Aluminium sheets shall preferably be fixed with aluminium fasteners. Untreated steel fasteners 

shall never be used for fixing aluminium sheets in order to avoid galvanic reaction between 

aluminium and M.S. Hot dip galvanised or cadmium plated steel fasteners may be used but in 

aggressive conditions G.I or cadmium plated steel accessories shall preferably be painted with 

aluminium paint. Stainless steel hardware can be used except in strong saline atmosphere. 

Aluminium curved / flat washers along with bituminous felt, neoprene or rubber washers shall 

also be used along with the fasteners and silicone sealant for filling joints. 

3.1.8 Roof Extractors 

Roof extractors shall be fixed in position as shown on drawings. The work shall include making 

required opening in the sheeting, fixing the extractors as per the manufacturer’s instructions with 

necessary fasteners. Lead fillers, felts or any other specified flashing shall be tucked into the 

sheeting. The lead flashings used shall be weighing not less than 30 kg/sq. meter. No 

allowance in the rates for fixing of extractors on the roofs shall be made for wastage, cutting, 

extra bolts, nuts and washers, flashings, flat sheets etc. 

3.1.9 Wall Louvers 

Louvers shall be of units having minimum size of 1.0 m x 1.0 m with adjustable or nonadjustable 

blades. Paints and colour should match side walls or as specified by Owner / 

Consultants. Louvers shall include structural support members, necessary jamb trim, sealant 

and fasteners. 

Louver frames shall be fabricated from 1.2 mm thk. G.I.Sheets and louver blades shall be 

fabricated from minimum 0.91 mm thick G.I.Sheets. In adjustable louvers, blades shall be 

pivoted on 12 mm dia. rods. Louvers shall be equipped with an exterior mounted bird screen of 

aluminium mesh which can be easily removed for cleaning. The louvers design should be such 

that water should not penetrate. 

3.1.10 Ridge Ventilator 

Ridge Ventilator shall be of gravity type and shall be designed to accommodate the roof slope. 

Ventilators with or without dampers shall be fabricated from 0.6 mm thk. galvalume / G.I. 

precoated sheets or from 0.91mm thick. aluminium sheets with bird screen and end closures. 

The ventilator damper shall be designed to operate in any position from full open to close. 

Operation should be through remote lever operated pull cables which should be extended to 

building side walls so as to operate it from working level. Ventilator base shall be sealed at end 

connection. Edge of the skirt shall be sealed by a preformed rubber foam closure strip 

matching the roof panel configuration to close junction between ventilator base and roof panels. 

Dimensions and the location of ventilators shall be as shown on drawings. 

3.2 HANDLING & STORAGE AT SITE 

The materials specified herein above shall be handled and stored in the manner so as not to 

damage the same. The material damaged in transit, storage and erection or otherwise shall not 

be used and paid for. Such damages shall be borne by the Contractor. Sheets shall be 

stacked on the firm and levelled ground on wooden battens according to the approved stacking 

methods and /or as per instructions of the manufacturer. Sheeting or panels shall preferably be 

stored with a slight inclination in longitudinal direction to allow water that may get into the stack 

to drip off. Sheets shall be stored under cover particularly when they are to be stacked for a 

longer period. 

3.3 INSTALLATION & FIXING 

The work shall be completed to the satisfaction of Owner/Consultant as per the approved detail 

drawings and as per the instructions of the manufacturer wherever necessary and shall be 


JACOBS 




approved by the Consultants / Owner. 

Sheets shall be lifted onto roof supports with ribs up. First sheet shall be fixed in position with the 

female rib facing the starting edge. Female rib of the second sheet shall be lapped with the male 

rib of the first sheet and shall be fixed with side lap fasteners before fastening the second sheet to 

supports. Same procedure shall be followed for subsequent sheets. For side cladding same 

procedure shall be followed. Minimum end lap shall be 150 mm for roof and 100 mm for side 

cladding. Side lap shall be minimum 75 mm. For roof pitches below 7 0 end laps shall be sealed 

with approved silicone sealants. 

Roof sheeting shall be fixed by crest fixing only. Side cladding shall be fixed preferably by crest 

fixing but can be fixed by valley fixing also. In valley fixing fastener locations should be as close 

as possible to the ribs. Side lap fasteners to be fixed at an interval of 350-450 mm to hold the 

side laps of sheets firmly in place and to maintain a weather-proof joint. Holes must always be 

drilled and not punched. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid over tightening of fasteners which 

will lead to deformation of sealing washers, sheet damage and sometimes damage of the 

fastener threads. Fixing of flashings in masonry / concrete wall shall be done by making groove 

of appropriate height and depth and embedding the same with mastic / cement mortar (1:2) and 

water proofing compound. 

Specific workmanship shall be employed while carrying out work at laps and expansion joints to 

ensure zero leakage. 

All the sheets and accessories which are found to be cracked / bend after fixing shall be replaced 

by new ones. The cracked sheet so removed shall be salvaged by the Contractor by cutting into 

smaller but sound lengths whenever ordered. 

4.0 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 Specifications for Plain and reinforced cement concrete 

18-3188-99-00-A.02-0017-A4 Specifications for Masonry and Plastering 

18-3188-99-00-A.02-0020-A4 Specifications for Waterproofing 


Nil 


JACOBS 


CHAIN LINK FENCING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-C.02-0028-A4 


\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Chain Link Fencing .doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 5 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 


Project No: 18-3188 Sheet 2 of 5 

Owner’s Name: Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited Revision: 0 

1.0 PURPOSE 




3.1 Chain link fencing with R.C.C. Precast post 

3.2 Chain link fencing with M.S. Angle post 

3.3 Chain link fencing 

3.4 Barbed wire 

3.5 Erection 



\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Chain Link Fencing .doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 


construction procedure to be followed during the execution of chain link fencing works. 


This specification covers the requirements of chain link fence for security purposes. The 

height of the fence shall be approximately 2.15 m to the top of the chain link fencing and 

approximately 2.5m total vertical height (to top of cranked portion of precast post/angle post 

with barbed wire). 


3.1 

3.1.1 Earthwork 

CHAIN LINK FENCING WITH R.C.C. POSTS:- 

Refer specification for Earthwork Spec. No. :18-3188-99-00-C.02-0013-A4. 

3.1.2 Cement Concrete For Foundation & Sill 

Refer specification for plain & reinforced cement concrete spec. no. 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014- 

A4 

3.1.3 Cement Concrete In Precast Posts / Struts (Straining posts, intermediate posts and struts) 

Cement concrete shall be of M-30 grade with 20 mm and down size crushed stone aggregates 

conforming to IS:383. 

The work shall be carried out as per latest edition of IS:456 in all respects. 

Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be 

smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Owner/Consultant. 

The concrete shall be cured for a minimum period of 14 days. 



A4. 

3.2 CHAIN LINK FENCING WITH M.S. ANGLE POST 

3.2.1 M.S. Angle Posts & Struts 

Structural steel work shall conform to latest edition of IS:2062 or equivalent. Structural steel 

work shall be fabricated and erected as shown in drawings. Fabrication and erection shall 

conform to IS:800. All materials used for fabrication shall be new, free of defects. The 

materials, tools & plants required for fabrication shall be provided by Contractor. 

Painting shall not commence till it is inspected by Owner/Consultant. All loose scales, dirt, rust, 

etc. shall be removed. The surface should be applied with red oxide primer coat conforming to 

IS:2074. After drying, it shall be coated with two coats of synthetic enamel paint as per 

manufacturer’s directions. 


JACOBS 


Project No: 18-3188 Sheet 4 of 5 

Owner’s Name: Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited Revision: 0 

3.2.2 Stone masonry foundation 

Stone masonry shall be minimum 350 mm thick with sunk/raised/flush pointing as specified in 

drawing above ground on both side. Refer specification for masonry & plastering spec. no. 18- 

3188-99-00-A.02-0017-A4. Expansion joints at minimum 30 m c/c to be provided in stone 

masonry. 

3.2.3 Cement concrete for foundation and coping. Refer specification for plain & reinforced concrete 

spec. no. 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0014-A4 



A4. 

3.2.5 PVC/M.S. Pipe sleeve as Weep holes:- PVC/M.S. pipe sleeve of minimum 75 mm dia. @ 1.5 

m c/c to be provided in stone masonry; gap between pipe & stone masonry should be properly 

sealed with cement mortar. 

3.3 CHAIN LINK FENCING 


Chain Link Fencing 

The material requirement shall conform to IS:2721 latest edition. The chain link fencing shall 

be woven from 3.55 mm dia. wire with mesh size of 50 mm. The mesh wire shall not vary from 

the specified dia. by more than ±0.05 mm 

Galvanised Wires 

All chain link steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanised wire and dia. of the wire shall be 3.55 

mm, over the galvanised coating. 

3.3.2 The line wire shall be 4 mm dia. mild steel. 

The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the M.S. Angle post / concrete intermediate posts 

shall be 2.5 mm diameter mild steel. 

The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 1.6mm diameter mild 

steel. 

Hair pin 3.55 mm dia. staples embedded in sill for fastening down the bottom of galvanised 

chain link fencing to the concrete sill coping. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure 

anchorage. 

Clamps for eyebolts shall be of uniform size and shall consist of 50 x 6 mm flat clamp bent to 

shape. 

Eye Bolt 

The eyebolt shall consist of head at one end sufficiently threaded and other end fitted with a nut 

and washer. 

Stretcher bar shall consist of mild steel flats 25 x 5 mm. 

3.4 BARBED WIRE 


JACOBS 




Barbed wire shall conform to IS:278. The coating on the wire shall be smooth and relatively 

free of lumps, globes or points, wire with excessive roughness, blisters, salammoniac spots 

shall be rejected. Barbed wire shall be made from two strands of galvanised, twisted 2.5 mm 

(12 gauge) steel wire with 4 points of barbs. Each barb shall have two turns, tightening around 

one or both line wires making altogether four complete turns. The barb shall be so finished 

that four points are set and looked at right angles to each other. 

Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in drawing. 

The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13 mm and not more than 18 mm. 

3.5 ERECTION 

Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in direction or 

acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 24 m on straight lengths of fence for 

concrete posts & 15m c/c maximum for M.S. Angle post. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at 

regular intervals not exceeding 3 m. 

Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of the line 

of fence. 

Fixing chain link fencing 

There shall be three evenly spaced rows of line wire, the top wire shall be doubled, making four 

line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground. 

Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed through 

staple hole and secured to the line wire by three complete turns. 

The bottom of the fencing in case of concrete post shall be treated as follows: 

Continuous concrete sill 230 mm wide x 300 mm high for full length between post shall be cast 

with the top 100 mm above G.L. and staple of 3.55 mm dia. shaped as per drawing is 

embedded in concrete sill at 0.75m c/c. 

Fixing barbed wires for Anticlimbing device 

Three lines of barbed wire shall be provided as shown in drawing. The wires shall be attached 

by eyebolts to the cranked tops of the straining posts. On concrete intermediate posts/M.S. 

Angle post they shall be secured to cranked tops with stirrup wires. The barbed wire shall be 

fitted with one dropper at the centre of each bay, secured to the wires so that they cannot be 

bunched together. 


5.0 

18-3188-99-00-C.02-0013-A4 Specifications for Earthwork 


18-3188-99-00-S.02-0032-A4 Specifications for Structural steel works 

18-3188-99-00-A.02-0017-A4 Specifications for Masonry & Plastering 

18-3188-99-00-V-02-0005 –A4 Specifications for Painting 

ATTACHMENTS 

Nil 


Rev 

No. 

JACOBS 


FLOOR FINISHES AND WALL TILING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-A.02-0030-A4 

Issue Date Pages Rev Description Prepared 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Floor finishes & Wall tiling.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 9 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 



3.1 GENERAL 

3.2 FLOOR FINISHES 

3.3 GRANOLITHIC FLOOR FINISH 

3.4 FLOOR HARDNER FINISH 

3.5 TERRAZO OR MOSAIC TILES 

3.6 GLAZED TILES 

3.7 RUBBLE OR BRICK SOLING 

3.8 GRAVEL PAVING 



CONTENTS 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Floor finishes & Wall tiling.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 


construction procedure to be followed during the execution of floor finishes and wall tiling works. 


The work covered by this specification shall consist of installing flooring and providing all 

materials, labour and equipment necessary to complete the work in strict accordance with 

drawings, finish schedule as hereinafter specified. Except for the brick soling and then lean 

concrete base, the concrete flooring shall be formed in alternate panels as shown in the 

drawings. 


3.1 GENERAL 

3.1.1 Brick Soling /Rubble packing (for Ground Floors only) 

After the sub-grade has been approved by the Owner / Consultant, the Contractor shall place two 

layers of bricks inherring bond pattern or rubble packing to required thickness. 

3.1.2 Levelling Concrete 

The bedding concrete shall be laid in thickness as specified on top of the prepared brick or rubble 

soling. The cement, sand and aggregate shall conform to the specifications for these materials 

as detailed in relevant specifications. 

3.1.3 Base Concrete 

The cement, sand and aggregate shall conform to specifications for these materials as detailed 

under relevant specifications and shall be vibrated by a pan type vibrator to attain maximum 

compaction. All construction joints shall have the dowel bars if required. Expansion joints shall 

be left wherever called out. 

3.2 FLOOR FINISHES 

3.2.1 Tiled Floors 

a) No tile shall be set on surface where the other work is specified or detailed to be embedded 

in the tile work until such work has been installed and approved by Owner / Consultant. 

b) Samples 

The Contractor shall submit samples of different types of coloured tiles before the start of 

work to determine their suitability, colour, finish and surface characteristics for a particular 

job. The samples will be approved by the Owner / Consultant prior to the starting of work. 

c) All floor tiling shall be laid from the centre lines outward and adjustment made at the wall. 

Floor finish shall be sloped to the drains as shown on the drawings. 

In case the dimensions of the room do not fit a multiple of the tiled dimensions, after the 

border is allowed for, a fractional tile may be used to fill the space. When this extra space 

is less than 25mm, it may be filled with a mortar of equal parts of cement and sand 

coloured and finished to match the tile. 


JACOBS 




d) All rooms or spaces in which tile floors are being laid shall be closed to human movement 

or other work and kept closed until the floors are completed and tiles are firmly set and 

cured as approved by the Owner / Consultant. 

e) Finished floor levels shall be of true plane surfaces with a tolerances of + 2mm in 3 metres 

unless otherwise indicated. 

3.3 GRANOLITHIC FLOOR FINISH 

3.3.1 General 

Base Slab 

The surface of the structural base slab shall be finished left rough and stock off at a level not less 

than 1 inch below the required finished grade. The P.C.C. floor finish shall generally conform to 

IS-5491. 


a) Portland Cement 

Portland cement shall be the best local available and shall conform to IS-269. 

b) Aggregates 

Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, sand or crushed stone screenings, free from 

dust, clay, loam or vegetable matter and shall be graded from coarse to fine to meet the 

following requirements. 

Per Cent 

Passing 3/8" in sieve 

100 

Passing No.4 sieve 95 to 100 




Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard gravel or crushed stone free from dust, clay, 

loam or vegetable matter, and from coatings which will tend to weaken the bond. It shall 

contain no soft, flat or elongated fragments and shall be graded to meet the following 

requirements : 

Per Cent 

Passing 2" in sieve 

100 

Passing 1/8" in sieve 95 to 100 



All aggregates shall be selected with care and shall be of an approved character. Samples 

of proposed material shall be submitted to the Owner / Consultant for approval prior to use. 

3.3.3 Mixture 

The nominal mixture shall be 1 part of portland cement, 1 part of the fine aggregate and 2 parts 

of coarse aggregate by volume. This nominal mix may be slightly varied, depending upon the 

local condition as directed. If the aggregate is very coarse, the gravel or stone may be reduced, 

but in no case shall the volume of the coarse material be less than 1½ times the volume of the 

fine. 


JACOBS 




The mixture shall be determined and once established shall not be changed except upon written 

order from the Owner / Consultant. 

Not more than 4 gal. of mixing water, including the moisture in the aggregate, shall be used for 

each 50 kg sack of portland cement in the mixture when floating is done by machine. 

The mixing of the concrete shall continue for atleast 1 to 2 minutes after all ingredients are in the 

mixer. 


The concrete shall be of the driest consistency and shall be possible to work it with a sawing 

motion of the strike-off board on straight-edge. Changes in consistency shall be obtained by the 

adjusting of proportions of fine and coarse aggregate within the limits specified. In no case shall 

the specified amount of mixing water be exceeded. 

3.3.5 Placing and Compacting 

Water and laitance which rise to the surface of the base slab shall be removed before applying 

the wearing course. After concrete in the base slab has settled sufficiently so that water does not 

rise to the surface, but within 2 hours of placing the base slab, the wearing course shall be 

applied and brought to the established grade with straight-edge. After striking off the wearing 

course to the established grade, it shall be compacted by rolling or tamping and then floated with 

a wood float or power floating machine. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect 

high and low spots, which shall be eliminated. 

Following additional points shall also be observed: 

a) Before placing the topping, a slush coat of cement and water mixed to the consistency of 

thick paint shall be thoroughly broomed into the wet surface of base slab. 

b) The topping shall be placed immediately before the slush coat dries. Excess water and 

grout puddles shall be swept away. 

c) Concrete shall be spread over the surface and not heaped to prevent segregation. 

d) Concrete should be laid in panels of 2.5 m x 2.5 m by means of formwork over concrete 

floor. Glass strip 40 x 4 mm thick or aluminium strips of 40 x 2 mm thk. to be laid around 

each panel edges. 

e) The finish to be done in differed construction. 

3.3.6 Finishing by Trowelling 

Floating shall be followed by steel trowelling after the concrete has hardened sufficiently to 

prevent excess fine material from working to the surface. Floating shall be finished normally 

within about 3 to 3½ hours of laying the topping. The finish shall be brought to a smooth surface 

free from defects and blemishes. No dry cement nor mixture of dry cement and sand shall be 

sprinkled directly on the surface of the wearing coarse to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix. 

After the concrete has further hardened, additional trowelling may be required. This shall be done 

as may be directed. Surfaces to be ground shall be swept with soft brooms after rolling to 

remove any water and surplus cement paste which may be brought to the surface. The wearing 

course shall then be floated and lightly trowelled, but no attempt shall be made to remove all 

trowel marks. The edges of the panels of topping shall be rounded off at proper time, by edging 

tool, before the concrete finally sets. 

3.3.7 Curing and Protection 

All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the elements and from all defacement due to 

building operations. The Contractor shall provide and use tarpaulins when necessary to cover 

completely or enclose all freely finished concrete. 


JACOBS 




As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, to prevent damage, it shall be covered with 

atleast 1 inch of wet sand or other satisfactory covering, and shall be kept continuously wet by 

sprinkling with water for atleast 3 days when using high early strength portland cement. In lieu of 

other curing methods, the concrete may be covered with a colourless curing compound or with 

asphalt impregnated, waterproofed paper. All seams of such paper shall be overlapped and 

sealed with tape. 

3.4 FLOOR HARDNER FINISH 

3.4.1 Material 

Floor hardner shall be metallic aggregate of approved product. The metallic aggregate shall be 

specially processed size graded iron particles. Hardner shall be applied to those surfaces 

indicated on the drawings and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's 

specifications with prior approval of the Owner / Consultant. 

3.4.2 Installation 

The topping shall be of two layers construction as indicated in the finish schedule. Sprinkling of 

finish surface with neat cement will not be permitted. The topping will be laid in panels of 2.5m x 

2.5m or as directed and preferably be cast in alternate fashion. The base slab shall be levelled 

below the finishing level as per drawing. The topping shall be laid in two layers as under: 

a) Deferred Construction 

A screeded bed of approximately 40 mm thick in the proportion of one part of cement, one 

part of clean sharp sand and two parts of 6mm-20mm clean granite stone aggregates or 

gravel. 

A second course of metallic mixture approximately 20mm / 16mm thick, consisting of one 

part of metallic aggregate, five of cement by weight and two parts crushed stone aggregate 

or gravel of size 6mm and down, shall be laid monolith with the bottom course. A minimum 

of 1.2 kg / sq.m. of hardening material shall be provided. 

b) Integral Construction 

A course of metallic mixture approximately 20mm / 16mm, consisting of one part of metallic 

aggregate, five of cement by weight and two parts crushed stone aggregate or gravel of 

size 6mm and down, shall be laid monolith with the base slab. A minimum of 1.2 kg / sq.m 

of hardening material shall be provided. 

The floor topping shall be cured for a minimum period of 14 days by impounding 25 mm 

layer of water by bunding method. 

3.5 TERRAZO OR MOSAIC TILES 


The tiles shall conform to IS-1237 and shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant. The tiles 

shall be uniform in colour and size, true and square, machine cut with sharp edges and free from 

twist, cracks or other defects. The contractor shall produce the certificates from the manufacturer 

of the tiles stating that the tiles conform to relevant local specifications. The terrazo tiles shall be 

250 x 250 x 20 mm thick for flooring and 250 x 125 x 20 mm thick for skirting and machine 

polished in factory. Maximum size of marble chips shall be No.2 (12 mm base course and 8 mm 

wearing) and the tile shall be white cement based. Mosaic chequered tiles shall be same as that 

of floor tiles but pre-chequered in factories 


JACOBS 





3.5.3 Curing 

The floor base to which the tiles are to be fixed shall be roughened and cleaned free of dust, and 

shall be thoroughly wetted. A layer of cement mortar (1:3) as specified shall be evenly spread 

over the base slab and sprinkled with fine sand. Before laying, the tiles shall be soaked in water 

for atleast 20 minute and then allowed to dry for about 10 minutes. It is necessary to have tiles 

damp, but not wet when they are laid. The tiles shall be truly and evenly set in a thin paste of 

neat cement applied on sides and bottom. As the tiles are placed to the mortar, they shall be 

tamped down with the handle of hammer or trowel until their elevation is exactly in line with that of 

the other tiles. The joints in this flooring shall be nearly indistinguishable. Excess cement that 

oozes that through the joints to the surface shall immediately be wiped clean. The joints shall, 

after 24 hours, be filled with matching cement paste and allowed to set. 

The work shall be kept wet and protected for 7 days before starting the polishing. No one shall 

be allowed to walk on the floor during the first 24 hours after it is laid. The traffic shall be only 

allowed after the curing is complete. 

3.5.4 Polishing 

When ready for polishing, the joints shall first be rubbed with a carborundum stone so that slight 

projections or edges rising above the surface are levelled. The whole surface shall then be 

polished by machine, first with a softer variety of carborundum stone and finally washed with a 

weak solution of soft soap in warm water. Wall skirting shall be ground by hand. 

3.6 GLAZED CERAMIC TILES 


The glazed ceramic tiles shall be white or coloured, Johnson's / Bell ceramics first quality or 

approved equal. The floor matt finish tiles (non-skid) shall be 6 mm / 7.2 mm / 10.0 mm thick 

and wall tiles (light colour) 6 mm to 7 mm thick and shall be of specified sizes. Top surface of the 

tiles shall be perfectly smooth, even and true in all dimensions, free from cracks and crazing. 

Wall tiles shall be fixed alongwith angle corner and cove pieces and other specials wherever 

required to obtain flush surfaces. 


3.6.3 Curing 

The surface on which the tiles are to be fixed shall be rough, clean, free of dust and thoroughly 

wetted. The tiles shall be soaked in water for a minimum period of 6 hours before fixing. A layer 

of cement mortar (1:3) and of thickness not less than 18 mm and just enough for about 3 to 4 

tiles shall be evenly spread according to the slope required. The wall tiles shall then be laid in 

neat thin cement paste and pressed into position. 

All joints shall be uniform and as thin as possible and not exceeding 1.5 mm. They shall run in 

straight lines or in staggered pattern in floors or in walls as required. Wall tiles shall be of 

indicated height in the finish schedule. Joints between tile and plumbing or other built-in fixture 

shall be made with an approved caulking compound as required. 

All exposed joints shall be pointed with white or coloured cement as the case may be. If cutting 

or drilling of tiles is required after the tiles are laid, it shall be done neatly and accurately so that 

inter-sections and returns are perfectly formed. 

The work shall be kept wet and protected with saw dust for 10 days and thoroughly washed and 

cleaned afterwards. 


JACOBS 




3.7 RUBBLE OR BRICK SOLING 

3.7.1 Scope of Work 

The work covered by the Specification shall consist of preparing subgrade for floors and providing 

all material labour and equipment necessary to complete the work in strict accordance with the 

drawings and specifications. 

3.7.2 General 

3.7.3 Material 

Source and the materials under the specifications shall be approved by Owner / Consultant. 

Blue basalt / Granite or bricks wherever called out. 

3.7.4 Preparation of Subgrade 

After the subgrade has been shaped to line, grade and cross section, it shall be well rammed 

either by manual labour or by pneumatic rammer. Any soft places, vegetation or other debris 

shall be removed and filled with sand and properly rammed until hard compact surface is 

obtained. This operation shall include any reshaping and wetting required alongwith the ramming 

of the sub-grade, to obtain proper compaction of atleast 90% of maximum at optimum moisture 

as directed. All boulders or ledge stone encountered in the excavation shall be removed or broke 

off to a depth of not less than 150 mm below subgrade. The resulting area and all other low 

sections holes or depressions shall be brought to the required grade. 

3.7.5 Rubble Packing 

After preparation of subgrade and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall lay 

uniform size of rubbles or stone average 150 mm / 230 mm high (maximum tolerance 25 mm 

size or as specified) with broad size as base. The stones shall be of blue or yellow basalt or 

approved quality hard stone. All interstices shall be filled with stone chips or crushed stone dust. 

This shall then be properly tamped and flooded with water overnight to make sure that all fine 

particles are washed down in between the interstices. Any soft place or holes found shall be filled 

up with sand and all the surfaces properly rammed until the desired grade and proper 

consolidation is obtained. No concreting shall be done on this surface until it is approved by 


If hard laterite stone is used in place of blue or yellow basalt or granite, height of rubble shall be 

1'0" (maximum tolerance 1" in size). 

3.7.6 Brick Soling 

Bricks used for soling should be fully burnt or little overburnt and should not absorb more than 4% 

of their weight of water after one hour immersion and should not show any signs of efflorescence 

on drying. Bricks should be laid as directed with fine close joints. A cushion of 20 mm average 

sand filling should be laid prior to packing of bricks. When laid in two layers, joints should be 

broken with a layer of sand in between. 

After packing of bricks, sand shall be spread over the surface to an average thickness of 25 mm 

to fill up the joints. The top layer may be allowed to remain as a protective layer till further work is 

taken up. It is essential to wet the brick soling prior to placement of any concrete flooring on the 

top of it. 


JACOBS 




3.8 GRAVEL PAVING 

3.8.1 Sub grade Preparation 

Top surface of sub grade shall be cleared off any unwanted scrap materials, vegetation, dry 

grass, large size boulders. Thereafter sufficient quantity of water shall be sprinkled on the top 

surface, and the same shall be compacted and levelled by hand rollers. 

3.8.2 Gravel Laying 

Gravel shall be clean and round in shapes and standard quality and shall be obtained from river 

beds. Samples shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant. Gravel size shall be minimum 

20 mm and maximum 50 mm .Gravel shall be laid to a thickness of 75 mm over the prepared sub 

grade. 

This work shall be carried out around open equipment foundations, and areas of electrical 

substations as indicated in the paving drawings. 




Nil 


JACOBS 


STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-00-S.02-0032-A4 


\\\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Structural Steelwork.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 17 

Approved 



By

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 



3.1 GENERAL 

3.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL 

3.3 FABRICATION DRAWINGS 

3.4 FABRICATION 

3.5 FABRICATION PROCEDURE 

3.6 SHOP ERECTION 

3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES 

3.8 SHOP PAINTING 

3.9 PACKING AND TRANSPORTATION 

3.10 FIELD ERECTION 

3.11 SAFETY & SECURITY DURING ERECTION 

3.12 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

3.13 GROUTING 

3.14 PAINTING AFTER ERECTION 



CONTENTS 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Structural Steelwork.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 PURPOSE 


construction procedure to be followed during the execution of structural steelworks. 


This specification covers the requirements for material, storage, fabrication, assembly, 

testing/examination, transportation and erection of all types of bolted and welded structural steel 

work for general construction work. Fabrication of structure shall also include fabricating 

a. Built up section / plate girders, made out of rolled section or by plates. 

b. Compound section made out of rolled sections. 

Drawings will be made by Contractor himself. 


3.1 GENERAL 

a. The requirements set forth in IS 800 for general construction in steel and IS 9595 & IS 801 for 

use of cold formed light guage steel members; IS 806 for use of steel tubes in general building 

construction for the design, fabrication and erection of structural steel for buildings shall be 

followed for structural steel work, unless otherwise specified. 

b. In cases of conflict between this specification and the above Indian Standards, this specification 

shall govern. 

3.2 MATERIALS 

3.2.1 Structural Steel 

The Structural steel shall conform to IS:2062 (Weldable quality) unless specified otherwise. 

Carbon steel pipes shall conform to IS:1161 of Grade YST-240 or higher. 

3.2.2 Electrodes for metal arc welding 

Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel shall conform to IS:814. 

Bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steel shall conform to IS:7280. The 

combination of wire and flux shall comply with IS:3613. 

Filler rods and wires for gas welding shall conform to IS:1278. Filler rods and bare electrodes for 

gas shielded arc welding of structural steel shall conform to IS:6419. 

3.2.3 Bolts and Nuts 

Bolts and nuts (including lock nuts) shall conform to IS:1363, IS:1364, IS:1367, IS:3640, IS:3460, 

IS:3757, IS:6623 and IS:6639 as applicable. Washers shall conform to IS:5369, IS:5370, 

IS:5372, IS:5374, IS:6610 and IS:6649 as applicable. 

3.2.4 Receipt and storing of materials 

All sections shall be checked on receipt to ensure that they are free from surface defects such as 

pitting, twists, cracks and laminations. They shall be arranged by grade and quality and by lot. 

Every section shall be marked for identification and the manufacturers certificate for every lot 

giving details of chemical analysis and mechanical characteristics shall be kept in record. 


JACOBS 




Welding wires and electrodes shall be segregated by quality and lots and stored inside a dry, 

enclosed room as per recommendations of IS:9595. All care shall be taken to keep the 

electrodes in perfectly dry condition to ensure weld metal soundness and satisfactory operations. 

Manufacturers certificates for electrodes shall also be logged into the records. 

Bolts, nuts and washers shall be sorted out by grade, type and diameter and the manufacturers 

quality / test certificates shall be maintained for record purpose. 

3.2.5 Material Testing 

The contractor is required to provide manufacturers quality certificate for every item of material 

supplied by him. In case such certificates are not available, the contractor shall at his own cost 

carry out all such tests as are required by Owners / consultant at an approved Test House and 

submit the test results for approval. The approval of such material shall however be entirely at 

the discretion of the Owner / Consultant. 

The Contractor shall ensure that all materials brought to site are duly approved. Rejected 

materials shall not be used and shall be removed from site. Any material doubtful in quality for 

which specific tests are to be carried out as per the instruction of Owner / Consultant, shall be 

separately stacked and properly identified and shall not be used. 

3.2.6 Storage and preparation 

The storage yard for fabricated steel parts shall be prepared in advance and got approved by the 

Owner / Consultant before the steel structures start arriving from the shop. 

All materials shall be set at least 150 mm clear from ground on wooden or steel blocks for 

protection against direct contact with the ground and to permit drainage of water. 

Steps shall be taken to prevent warping of items during handling at all stages. 

3.2.7 Deviations 

Use of materials other than those specified above shall be allowed, with prior approval, only 

where Contractor can prove technical advantage to the Owner. 

3.3 FABRICATION DRAWINGS 

Fabrication and erection shall be carried out based on drawings thoroughly checked, stamped 

“Approved for Fabrication” and signed by the contractors own responsible engineer. Unchecked 

and unstamped drawings shall not be used for purpose of proceeding with the work 

The contractor shall directly issue to site / shop the fabrication and erection drawing in the correct 

order, simultaneously submitting three copies to Owner / Consultant for their review. The Owner / 

Consultant shall at his sole discretion review part or whole of all, some or none of the drawings. 

Review of drawings by Owner / Consultant shall in no way relieve the contractor of his 

responsibility for correctness in the execution of the work, and the contractor shall be required to 

modify / rectify the structure at any stage of the work in case owner / consultant bring to his 

attention any mistake / omission in the fabrication drawing and the fabrication based on this 

drawing or that the work does not conform to good engineering practice. All such modifications / 

rectifications shall be made at no extra cost to the owner. 

Fabrication drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall convey the information clearly and 

adequately. Following information shall be furnished on such drawings : 

– Reference to design drawing number (along with revision number) based on which fabrication 

drawing has been prepared. 


JACOBS 




– Structural layout, elevations and sections (with distinct erection marking of all members). 

– Framing plans, member sizes, orientation and elevations. 

– Layout and detailing of rain water pipes and gutters showing all necessary levels, connections 

and provisions wherever required. 

– Detailing of shop / field joints, connections, splices for required strength and erection. 

– Location, type, size and dimensions of welds and bolts. 

– Shapes and sizes of edge preparation for welding. 

– Details of shop and field joints / welds. 

– Bill of materials / D.O.D Lists. 

– Quality of structural steel, plates etc., welding electrodes, bolts, nuts and washers to be used. 

– Erection assemblies identifying all transportable parts and sub-assemblies with special 

erection instructions, if required. 

– Method of erection and special precautions to be taken during erection as required. 

The Contractor shall additionally ensure accuracy of the following and shall be solely responsible 

for the same : 

– Provisions for erection and erection clearances. 

– Marking of members 

– Cut length of members 

– Matching of joints and holes. 

– Provisions kept in the members for other interconnected members. 

– Bill of materials / D.O.D Lists. 

Connections, splices and other details where not shown on the design drawings shall be suitably 

designed and shown on the fabrication drawings based on good engineering practice developing 

full member strength. Design calculations for such connections/splices shall be submitted to the 

Owner / Consultant, if called for. 

Any substitution or change in section shall be allowed only when prior written approval of the 

Owner / Consultant has been obtained. Fabrication drawings shall be updated incorporating all 

such substitutions/changes by the Contractor at no extra cost. 

In case during execution of the work, the Owner / Consultant on review of drawings considers any 

modifications/substitutions necessary to meet the design parameters/good engineering practice, 

these shall be brought to the notice of the Contractor who shall incorporate the same in the 

drawings and works without any extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor will be totally 

responsible for the correctness of the detailed fabrication drawings and execution of the work. 

Contractor shall incorporate all the revisions made in the design drawings during the course of 

execution of work in his fabrication drawings and resubmit the drawings at no extra cost. All 

fabrication shall be carried out only as per the final AFC drawings. 

The Contractor shall supply two prints each of the final / as built drawings alongwith their 

transparencies to Owner / Consultant for reference and record. 


JACOBS 




The contractor is required to update the fabrication drawings to include revisions made in design 

drawings during the course of work at no extra cost. The Contractor shall also supply two prints 

of as built drawings, along with their transparencies at no extra cost. 

3.4 FABRICATION 

3.4.1 General 

All fabrication shall be done as per specifications, IS:800, IS:9595 and other relevant IS codes on 

the basis of stamped and signed “Good for Construction” fabrication drawings. 

The contractor shall prior to starting any fabrication ensure that the fabrication yard is levelled and 

firm enough to take weight of structures and equipment. 

Any defective fabrication or material pointed out at any stage shall be replaced by the contractor 

free of cost. 

3.5 FABRICATION PROCEDURE 

3.5.1 Straightening 

All materials shall be straight and free from twists. If straightening or flattening is necessary, it 

shall be done by a process approved by the Owner / Consultant, and in a manner that will not 

damage the material properties. Sharp kinks or bends shall be a cause for rejection. The 

specified camber wherever necessary shall be provided. 

Bending of rolled steel section and plates shall be done by Cold Process to shapes, as shown in 

drawings. 

3.5.2 Clearance 

3.5.3 Cutting 

The erection clearance for members having end cleats or plates shall not be more than 2 mm at 

each end, whereas for other types of end connections it shall not be more than 3 mm at each 

end. If for any reason a greater end clearance is required, suitable seating, approved by Owner / 

Consultant shall be provided. 

Prior to cutting, all members shall be properly marked showing the requisite cut length / width, 

connection provisions e.g., location and dimensions of holes, welds, cleats, etc. Marking for 

cutting shall be done judiciously so as to avoid wastages or unnecessary joints as far as 

practicable. Marking shall be done by placing the members on horizontal supports/pads in order 

to ensure accuracy. Marking accuracy shall be limited to + 1 mm. 

Cutting may be affected by shearing, cropping or sawing. Gas cutting by mechanically controlled 

torch shall be permitted for mild steel. Hand flame cutting may be permitted subject to the 

approval of the Owner / Consultant. 

Except where the material is subsequently joined by welding, no loads shall be transmitted into 

metal through a gas cut surface. 

Shearing, cropping and gas cutting shall be clean, square, free from any distortion & burrs and 

should the Owner / Consultant find it necessary, the edges shall be ground afterwards, to make 

the same straight and uniform at no extra cost to the Owner. 

Cutting tolerances shall be as follows :- 

a. For member connected at both ends : ± 1 mm 

b. Elsewhere : ± 3 mm 


JACOBS 




3.5.4 Holing 

Holes for compound or built up section passing through more than one thickness shall preferably 

be drilled after the members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted together. In case the 

thickness of metal for each component is less than 16 mm, the holes may be punched prior to 

assembly provided the holes are punched 3 mm smaller in diameter than the required size and 

reamed after assembly to the required diameter. Dynamically loaded structures shall not be 

holed by punching. In case the material is not more than 12 mm thick and the connection is not a 

splice, the hole may be punched full size except in holes for close tolerance bolts or barrel bolts. 

Holes may be drilled in one operation through two or more parts and the burrs removed from 

each part after drilling. Holes not drilled through all the thicknesses in one operation shall be 

drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. 

Holes for close tolerance bolts and barrel bolts shall be drilled through all the thicknesses in one 

operation and subsequently reamed to size after firmly holding the parts together with the aid of 

tacking bolts or clamps. 

Finished holes for black bolts of high strength and high strength friction grip bolts shall not have a 

diameter more than 2 mm the diameter of the bolt passing through them or as specified in 

fabrication drawings. 

Holes for bolts shall not be formed by gas cutting. 

To facilitate the grouting, holes shall be provided in column base / seating plates exceeding 

300 mm width for the escape of entrapped air. 

To avoid accumulation of water inside column base or boxed type construction suitable 

reverse U-type holes shall be provided at junction of base plate and column section in vertical 

gusset plates to drain collected water out. 

3.5.5 Bending 

Bending of plates, flats and sections shall be carried out on bending rolls or in presses. 

Cold process bending may be accepted when bending radius is equal to or more than 

- 25 times member thickness for plates and flats. 

- 25h or 25b for rolled steel beams and channels according to the bending plane. 

- 45b for angle 

where, h = section height 

b = flange width 

When bending radius is less than that as indicated above, bending shall be done on hot metal by 

heating the member up to 850 0 C (Light red radiance). Bending shall be discontinued when 

temperature drops below 500 0 C. 

Accuracy of bending operations shall be checked by means of templates and the clearance 

between member and template shall not be more than + 1 mm. 

Bent member shall not have cracks or deep indentations from bending equipment. 

3.5.6 Assembly 

The component parts shall be aligned and assembled in such a fashion that they are not twisted 

or damaged in any way and have the prescribed camber. The clamps, jigs and other fixtures 

shall be placed so as to cause no imbalance which would result in twisting / incorrect positioning 

of members. Due attention shall be paid to welding shrinkage and distortion. 


JACOBS 




3.5.7 Bolting 

All turned and fitted bolts shall be parallel throughout the barrel within the tolerance of 0.125 mm, 

unless otherwise specified and faces of heads and nuts bearing on steel work shall be machined. 

All such bolts shall be provided with washers not less than 3 mm thick, so that when the nut is 

tightened, it shall not bear the unthreaded body of the bolt and the threaded portion of the bolt 

should not be within the thickness of the parts bolted together. The threaded portion of each bolt 

shall project through the nut by at least one thread. Square tapered washers shall be provided for 

all heads and nuts bearing on bevelled surface. Flat washers shall be circular in shape. The 

bolts, nuts and washers, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped in linseed oil. 

The bolts shall be of Class I make or equal conforming to the above specifications. 

All nuts and bolts shall be tightened in a staggered pattern and where more than four bolts in any 

joints they shall be tightened from centre to outwards. Every bolted connection shall have atleast 

2 bolts. 

3.5.8 Bracings 

Guys wires and temporary bracing shall be used wherever necessary to withstand the loads due 

to erection. Such members shall be left in place as long as may be required for safety. 

3.5.9 Welding 

a. General 

Welding of steel shall be in accordance with IS:816, IS:819, IS:1024, IS:1261, IS:1323 and 

IS:9595 as applicable. Welds shall be made only by Qualified Welding Operators who have been 

previously qualified by tests by the Owner / Consultant. Evidence of welder’s qualification tests 

shall be produced if required by the Owner / Consultant. Owner / Consultant may reject any 

welder found not suitable during actual work. 

Welding wire and electrodes shall be sorted separately by quantities and lots inside a dry and 

enclosed room, and as per instruction given by the Owner / Consultant. Electrodes shall be low 

hydrogen type. 

Both the structural members and the welding operation / process shall be adequately protected 

from rain, strong winds or snow during welding. The Contractor shall provide necessary 

supervision to ensure that all welding is carried out in conformity with the specification and 

relevant IS codes. The contractor shall make all necessary infrastructure available such as 

requisite number of welding sets, cutting and grinding equipment, test equipment and all 

consumables as required. 

b. Preparation of members for welding 

Edge preparation of fusion faces for welding shall be carried out as per details given in IS:9595 or 

as shown on drawings. All tolerances for such work shall be as per IS:9595. The bevelling of 

such faces shall be checked by the Owner / Consultant. 

Surfaces to be welded shall be cleared to ensure that they are free from loose scales, slag, rust, 

grease, paint and other foreign matter, and shall be maintained. 

Preheating of members shall be necessary when the base metal temperature (based on ambient 

temperature) is less than the temperature required for that welding procedure. The preheating 

shall be done in such a manner that the part on which weld metal is to be deposited is above the 

specified temperature for a distance of 75 mm on either side of the weld line. The temperature 

shall be measured on the face opposite to the face being heated. In case access is limited to 


JACOBS 




only the face being heated, the source of heat shall be removed and sufficient time allowed to 

elapse for heat equalisation prior to measurement. (1 minute per 25 mm of plate thickness). 

Column splices and butt joints of compression members shall be accurately ground and close 

butted over the entire section to ensure full contact for load transmission. The tolerance for such 

work shall be maximum 0.2 mm. In the case of column bases and caps the ends of the section 

along with connected gussets, stiffeners, angles, channels etc. shall be ground so as to ensure a 

minimum contact area of 90%. The fitting of angles and channels should be sufficiently accurate 

to limit the reduction in thickness on account of grinding to 2 mm. The ends of bearing stiffeners 

shall be ground so as to fit tightly at both top and bottom. Slab bases and cap plates shall be 

accurately ground over bearing surfaces to ensure minimum 90% contact area with columns. 

c. Welding Processes 

Any one or more of the following welding processes may be used. 

i. Manual Metal Arc Welding Process. 

ii. Submerged Arc Welding Process. 

iii. Gas Metal Arc Welding Process. 

iv. Flux cored Arc Welding Process. 

The Contractor shall submit the welding procedure and the consumables proposed to be used to 

the Owner / Consultant for approval. Combination of processes or electrodes may be permitted 

only with the specific approval of the Owner / Consultant. 

d. Approval & Testing of Welders 

The Contractor shall satisfy the Owner / Consultant that the welders are suitable for the work 

upon which they will be employed. For this purpose the welders shall have satisfied the relevant 

requirements of ISS:7318. If the welders will be working to approved welding procedures, they 

shall have satisfied the relevant requirements of IS:7310. 

Adequate means of identification shall be provided to enable each weld to be traced to the welder 

by whom it was made. The Contractor shall intimate the Owner / Consultant sufficiently in 

advance, the commencement of tests, to enable him to be present to witness the same. 

e. Approval and Testing of Welding Procedures 

The Contractor shall carry out procedure tests in accordance with IS:7307 to demonstrate by 

means of a specimen weld of adequate length on steel representative of that to be used, that he 

can make welds with the welding procedure to be used for the work to the complete satisfaction 

of the Owner / Consultant. The test weld shall include weld details from the actual construction 

and it shall be welded in a manner simulating the most unfavourable instances of fit-up, electrode 

condition etc., which are anticipated to occur on the particular fabrication. Where material 

analysis are available, the welding procedure shall be carried out on material with the highest 

carbon equivalent value. 

After welding, but before the relevant tests given in IS:7307 are carried out, the test weld shall be 

held as long as possible at room temperature, but in any case not less than 72 hours and shall 

then be examined for cracking. The examination procedure shall be sufficiently rigorous to be 

capable of revealing significant defects in both parent metal and weld metal. 

After establishing the welding method, the Contractor shall finally submit to the Owner / 

Consultant for his approval of the welding procedure specification in standard format given in 

IS:9595 before starting the fabrication. 


JACOBS 




f. Sequence of Welding 

i. The direction of welding shall be from points relatively fixed with respect to each other 

towards points having more flexibility. 

ii. Welding shall be carried out continuously to completion with the required number of runs. 

iii. For compound section splices, each component part shall be spliced prior to welding with 

other component parts. 

iv. Welds shall progress in a sequence that will balance the applied heat so as to reduce 

distortion. 

v. Joints having more shrinkage shall be welded prior to joints having less shrinkage. 

vi. The sequence causing minimum distortion or shrinkage shall be chosen. 

g. Welding Technique 

The fusion faces shall be properly aligned and the gap set to the distance specified. The root 

pass of butt joint shall be done such that full penetration is achieved as also complete fusion of 

root edges. 

On completing each run the weld and the parent metal shall be cleared by wire brushing and light 

chipping to remove all slag and splatters. Visible defects if any such as cracks, cavities etc. shall 

be removed to sound metal prior to depositing subsequent run of weld. 

All full penetration butt welds shall be completed by gouging / chipping the back of the joint and 

depositing a seal run of weld metal. Alternatively a backing strip shall be provided. 

All care shall be taken to prevent any kind of movement, shock or vibration of components during 

welding to prevent weld cracks. 

h. Inspection and Testing of Welds 

The method of inspection shall be according to IS:822 and extent of inspection and testing shall 

be in accordance with the relevant applicable standard or, in the absence of such a standard, as 

specified by the Owner / Consultant. Welds shall not be painted or otherwise obscured until they 

have been inspected, approved and accepted. 

The Owner / Consultant or his representative shall have access to the Contractor’s work at all 

reasonable times and the Contractor shall provide him with all facilities necessary for inspection 

during all stages of fabrication and erection with, but not limited to, the following objectives. 

i. To check the conformity with the relevant standards and suitability of various welding 

equipments and their performance. 

ii. To witness / approve the welding procedure qualification. 

iii. To witness / approve the welders performance qualification. 

iv. To check whether shop/field welding being executed is in conformity with the relevant 

specifications and codes of practice. 

Inspection and testing of all fabricated structures shall be carried out by the Contractor by any, or, 

a combination of all the following methods as directed by the Owner / Consultant and no separate 

payment shall be made, unless otherwise mentioned, for inspection and testing of 

welds/fabricated structures : 


JACOBS 




The various types of tests shall be : 

i. Visual Inspection 

100% welds shall be visually inspected to ascertain absence of the following defects. 

- Surface cracks in weld or parent metal, or undercut, burning, overheating of parent metal. 

- Blow holes, exposed porosity in the weld or unfused welds. 

- Defects in the profile such as excessive convexity or concavity, unequal leg lengths 

incompletely filled grooves, excessive penetration beeds, root grooves etc. 

- Distortion due to welding and misalignment. 

ii. Mechanical Tests 

Tensile load tests, bend tests, impact tests etc. shall be carried out as per the standard. 

iii. Radiographic Testing 

Radiographic examination shall be carried out only in special cases for random joints as 

directed by the Owner / Consultant. The Contractor shall not be paid any extra for such 

examination. The Contractor shall make necessary arrangement at his own expense for 

providing the radiographic equipment, films and all other necessary materials required for 

carrying out the examination. The tests shall be carried in the presence of the Owner / 

Consultant by employing approved testing procedure in accordance with IS:822. The 

Contractor shall fulfil all the statutory safety requirements while handling X-ray and Gammaray 

equipment and provide the Owner / Consultant all the necessary facilities at site such as 

dark room, film viewer etc., to enable him to examine the radiographs. When full strength 

butt weld / full penetration bevelled weld shall be tested minimum 10% joints / length of weld 

can be considered for testing. 

Iv Magnetic Particle / Dye Penetrator / Ultrasonic Tests 

The examination shall be done at random as directed by the Owner / Consultant. Whenever 

such tests are directed, the tests shall be carried out on joints chosen by him. The tests shall 

be carried out by employing approved testing procedure in accordance with IS:822. 

i. Repair of Welds 

No repair of defective welds shall be carried out without proper permission of the Owner / 

Consultant and his approval for the corrective procedure. 

Welds not complying with the acceptance requirements (as specified by IS codes & the Owner / 

Consultant), as revealed during inspection & testing of welds or erection or in-situ condition, shall 

be corrected either by removing & replacing or as follows : 

a. Excessive convexity – Reduced to size by removal of excess weld metal. 

b. Shrinkage cracks, cracks in - Defective portions removed down to sound metal and 

parent plates and craters and rewelded. 

c. Under cutting - Additional weld metal deposited. 

d. Improperly fitted / - Welding cut & edges suitably prepared and parts 

misaligned parts rewelded. 

e. Members distorted by the heat - Member straightened by mechanical means or by 

of welding careful application of limited amount of heat. 

(temperature of such area not to exceed 650 degree 

Centigrade dull red heat). 


JACOBS 




In removing defective parts of a weld, gouging, chipping, oxygen cutting or grinding shall not 

extend into the parent metal to any substantial amount beyond the depth of weld penetration, 

unless cracks or other defects exist in the parent metal. The weld or parent metal shall not be 

undercut in chipping, grinding, gouging or oxygen cutting. 

Any fabricated structure or its component which, in the opinion of Owner / Consultant, is defective 

and/or beyond any corrective action shall be removed forthwith from the site as instructed by the 

Owner / Consultant without any extra claim. The Owner reserves the right to recover any 

compensation due to any loss arising out of such rejections. 

3.5.10 Splicing 

Splicing of built up / compound / latticed sections shall be done in such a fashion that each 

component of the section is joined in a staggered manner. 

Where no butt weld is used for splicing, the meeting ends of two pieces of joist/channel/built up 

section shall be ground flush for bearing on each other and suitable flange and web splice plates 

shall be designed and provided for the full strength of the flange / web of the section and welds 

designed accordingly. 

Where full strength butt weld is used for splicing (after proper edge preparation of the web and 

flange plates) of members fabricated out of joist/channel/angles/built up section, additional flange 

and web plates shall be provided, over and above the full strength butt welds, to have 40% 

strength of the flange and web. 

Where a cover plate is used over a joist/channel section the splicing of the cover plate and 

channel/joist sections shall be staggered by minimum 500 mm. Extra splice plate shall be used 

for the cover plate. 

Prior approval shall be obtained by the Contractor for locations of splices where not shown on 

design drawings. Only a single splice at approved locations shall be allowed for members up to a 

length of 6 to 7 m. Maximum two numbers of splices shall be allowed for members exceeding 

this length. 

In case full strength butt weld is used to connect opposing ends at a joint, additional flange and 

web splice plates shall be provided capable of carrying 20% strength of the flange and web. 

3.6 SHOP ERECTION 

The steel work shall be temporarily erected in the shop to determine the accuracy of the fit. The 

extent of erection shall be either complete or as directed by Owner / Consultant. 

3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES 

Materials and workmanship at all times shall be subject to inspection by the Owner / Consultant. 

All inspection as far as possible shall be made at the place of fabrication and the contractor shall 

co-operate with the Owner / Consultant’s Inspector and permit access for inspection to all places 

where work is being done. The contractor shall supply free to the Owner / Consultant all 

necessary gauges and templates necessary for inspection. However, such inspection shall not 

relieve the contractor of his responsibility to furnish satisfactory work. 

Materials of workmanship, not conforming to provisions of the specifications, may be rejected at 

any time when defects are found during the progress of work. 

The contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner / Consultant of all fabricated items prior to 

commencement of their erection. However, any such approval shall not absolve the Contractor 

from his responsibility of correctness and workmanship of the entire work. 


JACOBS 




3.8 SHOP PAINTING 

Refer FEG Painting / coating specification. however, primer application to steel members which 

are to be fireproofed by vermiculite based material, shall be as per the vendor’s specifications. 

3.9 PACKING AND TRANSPORTATION 

Loading and transportation shall be done in accordance with transport rules prevailing at that 

location. Items shall be packed to protect them from damage / distortion. Small parts shall be 

securely wired to their main members. 

Loose items such as Bolts, nuts and washers shall be packed in crates. 

3.10 FIELD ERECTION 

Plant & Equipment 

The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment used shall be to the complete satisfaction 

of the Owner / Consultant. 

Storing & Handling 

All steel work shall be so stored and handled at site so that the members are not subjected to 

excessive stresses and any damage. 

Setting Out 

Prior to setting out of the steel work, the Contractor shall get himself satisfied about the 

correctness of levels, alignment, location of existing concrete pedestals/columns/brackets and 

holding down bolts/pockets provided therein. Any minor modification in the same including 

chipping, cutting and making good, adjusting the anchor bolts etc., if necessary, shall be carried 

out by the Contractor at his own expense. The positioning and levelling of all steel work including 

plumbing of columns and placing of every part of the structure with accuracy shall be in 

accordance with the drawings and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant. 

Tolerances 

Tolerances for erection of steel work shall be in accordance with Table further & IS:7215 

whichever is more stringent. 


JACOBS 




ERECTION TOLERANCES 

Tolerances allowed in the Erection of Structural Steel Buildings frames shall be as follows : 

Component Description Variation allowed 

Main Columns and Roof 

Posts 

a) 

b) 

Shifting of column axes at 

foundation level with respect 

to true axes. 

- in Longitudinal direction 

- in Lateral direction 

Out of plumbness of column 

axis from true vertical as 

measured at the top. 

- For a column up to 

and 

including 30 m ht. 

- For a column greater than 

30 m height 

c) Deviation in straightness in 

longitudinal and transverse 

planes of column at any 

point along the height. 

d) 

e) 

f) 

For an individual column 

deviation of any bearing or 

resisting level from levels 

shown on the drawings. 

Difference in the erected 

positions of adjacent pairs of 

columns across the width of 

the building prior to placing 

of truss / beams with respect 

to true distance. 

For adjacent pairs of 

columns either across the 

width of building or 

longitudinally, level difference 

allowed between 

bearing or seating level 

supposed to be at the same 

level. 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Structural Steelwork.doc 

+ 5 mm 

+ 5 mm 

+ 25 mm or + H/1000 

( whichever is less ) 

+ 35 mm or + H/1200 


+ 10 mm or + H/1000 


+ 5 mm 

+ 5 mm 

+ 5 mm

JACOBS 




Component Description Variation allowed 

Trusses 

Crane, Gantry, Girders and 

Rails 

3.11 SAFETY & SECURITY DURING ERECTION 

a) 

b) 

c) 

d) 

e) 

Deviation at centre of span 

of upper chord member from 

vertical plane running 

through centre of bottom 

chord. 

Lateral displacement of top 

chord at centre of span from 

vertical place running 

through centre of supports. 

Lateral shift in location of 

purlin from its true vertical 

position. 

Lateral shift in location of 

purlin from true position. 

Deviation in difference of 

bearing levels of truss from 

the true difference. 

Shift in the centre line of crane rail 

with respect to centre line of web of 

gantry girder 

Shift of alignment of crane rail w.r.t. 

true axis of crane rail 

Deviation in crane track gauge with 

respect to true gauge 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Structural Steelwork.doc 

1/250 of the height of truss 

in mm at centre of span or + 

15 mm whichever is less. 

1/1500 of span of truss in 

mm or + 10 mm (whichever 

is less). 

+ 10 mm 

+ 5 mm 

+ 1/1200 of span of truss in 

mm or + 20 mm (whichever 

is less) 

+ (half web thickness 

plus 2 mm) 

+ 5 mm 

i) For gauge upto 15 m 

+ 5 mm 

ii) For gauge more than 15 m + 10 mm 

Deviation in the crane rail level at 

any point from true level 

Difference in levels between crane 

track rails (across the bay) at 

+ 10 mm 

i) Supports 15 mm 

ii) Midspan 20 mm 

Relative shift of crane rail surface 

(at a joining in plan and elevation) 

2 mm 

The CONTRACTOR shall comply with IS:7205 for necessary safety and adhere to safe erection 

practices and guard against any hazardous as well as unsafe working conditions during all stages 

of erection. 

During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and when 

necessary, temporarily braced/guyed to provide for all loads to be carried by the structure during

JACOBS 




erection till the completion, including those due to the wind, erection equipment and its operation 

etc., at no extra cost to the Owner. For the purpose of guying, the Contractor shall not use other 

structure in the vicinity without prior written permission of the Owner / Consultant. 

No permanent bolting or welding shall be done until proper alignment has been achieved. 

Proper access, platform and safety arrangement shall be provided for working and inspection, (at 

no extra cost to the Owner) whenever required. 

3.12 FIELD CONNECTIONS 

Field Bolting 

Field bolting shall be carried out with the same care as required for shop bolting. 

Field Welding 

All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop 

assembly and welding. Holes for all erection bolt – where removed after final erection shall be 

plugged by welding. Alternatively, erection bolts may be left and secured. 

3.13 GROUTING 

Prior to positioning of structural columns/girders/trusses over the concrete 

pedestals/columns/brackets, all laitance and loose material shall be removed by wire brushing 

and chipping. The bearing concrete surfaces shall be sufficiently levelled, hacked with flat chisels 

to make them rough, cleaned (using compressed air) and made thoroughly wet. All pockets for 

anchor bolts shall also be similarly cleaned and any excess water removed. Thereafter, the 

structural member shall be erected, aligned and plumbed maintaining the base plates/shoe plates 

at the levels shown in the drawings, with necessary shims/pack plates/wedges. 

After final alignment and plumbing of the structure, the forms shall be constructed alround and 

joints made tight to prevent leakage. Grouting (under the base plates/shoe plates including 

grouting of sleeves & pockets) shall be done with non-shrink grout having compressive strength 

(28 days) not less than 40 N/mm 2 . Non shrink grout shall be of free flow premix type and of 

approved quality and make. It shall be mixed with water in proportion as specified by the 

manufacturer. Ordinary 1:2 cement/sand mortar grout shall be used only for small, isolated 

structures e.g., operating platforms not supporting any equipment, pipe supports, cross overs, 

stairs & ladders. The thickness of grout shall be as shown on the drawings but not less than 25 

mm nor more than 40 mm in any case. 

The grout mixture shall be poured continuously (without any interruption till completion) by 

grouting pumps from one side of the base plate and spread uniformly with flexible steel strips and 

rammed with rods, till the space is filled solidly and the grout mixture carried to the other side of 

the base plate. 

The grout mixture shall be allowed to harden for a period as decided by the Owner / Consultant. 

At the end of this period, the shims/wedges/pack plates may be removed and anchor bolts 

tightened uniformly. The alignment of the structure shall now be rechecked and if found correct, 

the voids left by the removal of shims/wedges/pack plates (if removed) must be filled up with a 

similar mixture of grout. In case after checking, serious misalignment is indicated, the grout shall 

be removed completely and fresh grouting done after making appropriate correction of alignment. 

3.14 PAINTING AFTER ERECTION 

Painting shall be as per attached specification. 


JACOBS 





18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 - Painting specification 


Nil 


REV 

NO. 

ISSUE 

DATE 

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LTD. 

LUBE OIL BASE STOCKS (LOBS) QUALITY UPGRADATION PROJECT 

TITLE: PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS 

DOCUMENT NO : 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 

PAGES REV DESCRIPTION PREPARED 

BY 

CHECKED 

BY 

Page 1 of 15 

APPROVED 

A 11.11.06 15 ISSUED FOR CLIENT’S APPROVAL SBS HSC HSC 

0 01.12.06 15 ISSUED FOR USE SBS HSC HSC 


BY

JACOBS 

HPCL-MUMBAI PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS Page 2 of 15 

18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

ANNEXURE - I PAINTING SPECIFICATION 

ANNEXURE - II PAINTING SYSTEM FOR UNIT EQUIPMENT & PIPELINES 

ANNEXURE - II HPCL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PAINTS TO BE USED IN PAINTING OF UNITS 

ANNEXURE - IV COLOUR CODE FOR PAINTING 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Painting.doc

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

1.0 PAINTING SYSTEM & PAINT SPECIFICATIONS: 

PAINTING SPECIFICATION 

The painting system for equipment and piping in units shall be as follows: 

- Painting System : It shall be as per Annexure - II (3 Pages) 

- Specifications of the paints: It shall be as per Annexure - III (5 Pages). 

- Colour Code for painting - Annexure IV (1 page) 

2.0 GUARANTEE : 

\\nmumfil01\Construction\18 3188 HPCL LOBS\Enquiry for Civil works\Section 6 Technical Specifications\Specifications for Painting.doc 

ANNEXURE - I 

The paint manufacturer shall specify the following guarantee period of the system. 

" Four years for all surfaces " 

The paint manufacturer/ authorized painting contractor shall furnish a performance bank guarantee to this 

effect. All mechanical damage to painting (after completion of painting) will be excluded from this 

guarantee. Client shall have the sole discretion to invoke the bank guarantee in full or part in case of 

paint failure. 

After completion of the job a report shall be generated every three months by Client about the paint 

condition and the manufacturer shall make good all areas with paint failures within 30 days of reporting of 

defects. 

In case the agency is an approved manufacturer, it should give the guarantee for the paint supplied as 

well as for defects in the paint application. Any defect in the guarantee period (as per Client report) 

should be rectified free of cost immediately. 

If the painting company is not able to take the job directly for some reason, it can authorize any reputed 

painting contractor to paint on its behalf. In this case as the agency is not an approved manufacturer but 

is a painting contractor authorized by the paint manufacturer to paint on its behalf, it shall give a joint 

performance guarantee with the approved paint manufacturer and any defect in the paint application 

during the guarantee period (as per Client report) will be rectified by the agency free of cost immediately. 

It shall be the responsibility of the paint company to supervise the painting work and make sure that good 

quality painting work is carried out. However, if the authorized painting contractor fails to make good the 

defects reported by Client within stipulated time frame, it will become the responsibility of the paint 

manufacture to repair all defects reported by Client. Non-rejection by the paint manufacturing company 

does not in any way constitute acceptance of any defective work. 

3.0 APPROVAL OF PAINTS : 

Vendor shall indicate his offered paint system in line with applicable paint system along with vendor’s 

product catalogue & painting instructions. Vendor shall submit the paint (each and every tin of all types of 

paint) along with the test certificates for Client approval at least 15 days prior to its proposed date of 

application in field. The test certificate from the manufacturer shall clearly state type of paint, base of 

paint , Batch No., Date of manufacture, Color, finish, shelf life, Temperature resistance, mixing ratio, 

spreading rate, Density, Viscosity, Volume solids, Recommended DFT & Corresponding WFT, Touch 

dry time, Hard dry time/ Overcoat interval, % of metallic Zinc by weight in dry film for Inorganic Zn silicate 

and Zn rich epoxy primers, % of epoxy resin by weight in mixed resin coal tar blend for coal tar epoxies 

and other details specified by Client. Paints with test certificates without these details shall be rejected. 

Client reserves the right to check the paint quality independently at any laboratory. The complete lot of 

paint shall be accepted or rejected on this basis.

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

4.0 SURFACE PREPARATION: 

Shot blasting/girt blasting is the most preferred method of surface preparation. Power tool cleaning and 

Hand tool-cleaning operation could be allowed in area where shot blasting is impractical due to 

approach problem or height. 

Three types of surface preparations have been specified by Client. 

a) Shot Blasting: 

It shall be as per Sa 2 1/2 (Near White Metal) of Swedish Standard SIS-05-5900 1967 / ISO 8501-1- 

1988. Contractor shall use Client approved equipment, shots for blasting, and moisture & oil free air. It 

shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide suitable protection for the nearby equipment and 

insulation while carrying out shot blasting to avoid damage to them. 

b) Mechanical or Power Tool Cleaning: 

It shall be as per ST 3 of Swedish standard SIS -05-5900 1967/ ISO- 8501-1-1988. Depending upon the 

locality, the contractor may be advised to use Client approved non sparking type brass mechanical 

striking tools , brass chipping hammers, grinding wheels or rotating brass wire brushes. 

c) Manual or Hand tool cleaning: 

It shall be as per ST 2 of Swedish Standard SIS -05-5900 1967/ ISO -8501-1-1988. Depending upon the 

locality, the contractor may be advised to use Client approved only non sparking type (brass)- Hand descaling 

/ hammering tools, hand scrapers and wire brushes. 

It may be noted that in case of power tool cleaning or shot blasting, manual cleaning may be allowed 

solely at HPCL discretion for the pockets/ areas where shot blasting or power tool cleaning is not 

possible. 

5.0 WASHING WITH FRESH WATER: 

All bare lines/ vessels/ equipment shall be fully cleaned by fresh water before cleaning / shot blasting to 

remove all possibilities of salt deposits. The subject surface shall be also cleaned before application of 

next coat if area is subject to salt water sprays. Suitable arrangement for covering shall also be made 

to avoid salt water sprays for complete duration of cleaning and painting till final coat cures 

completely). 

6.0 PAINTING AFTER CLEANING: 

The primer coat shall be applied within 4 hours of cleaning. However, if rust spots appear even during 

this interval, the same shall be re-cleaned and re offered for inspection before applying the paint. 

7.0 OVERCOAT DURATION: 

The contractor shall strictly adhere to the minimum and maximum overcoat intervals for any painting 

system as per paint manufacturer’s recommendations. In case the contractor is not able to apply the 

subsequent coats within the specified time frame, he will have to clean the surface to bare metal again as 

per original specifications and reapply the total paint. 

8.0 COLOR CODE: 

The contractor shall follow Client Color code. The contractor shall provide the finish coat such that it 

meets the color code of the refinery. Contractor shall verify the RAL shade with the engineer in charge 

before application. In rare circumstances, if the manufacturer cannot supply the requisite color of the 

finish coat, the vendor shall apply approved color bands (epoxy or enamel) at Client approved locations 

free of cost. 

9.0 SINGLE SOURCE OF SUPPLY FOR PAINTS: 

All the coats of a painting system shall be from the same manufacturer . No waiver regarding this aspect 

shall be considered. 


JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

10.0 DOCUMENTATION: 

The contractor shall maintain the following documentation: 

a) Quality Plan - It is advisable to divide the location in various zones and maintain zone-wise details. 

b) Daily Progress Report with clear details of job done in the form of daily logbook. (both approved and 

rejected jobs). 

c) Results of approval of surface preparation, water washing, and measurement of paint DFT 

d) Colors and batch nos. of paint material used. 

It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to obtain written approvals of the inspector at each stage of 

painting before proceeding for the next stage of painting. 

11.0 RESTRICTIONS: 

Surfaces shall not be coated in rain., wind or in environment where injurious airborne elements exists, 

when the steel surface temp is less than –15 0 C above dew point, when the relative humidity is greater than 

85%,or when temp is below 4.4 0 C & when temp is above 50 0 C. 

12.0 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE PROFILE & PAINT DFT: 

The contractor shall bring his own gadgets/ devices for checking the surface preparation and DFT (at each 

stage from bare metal to every coat). These equipment shall be duly approved/ calibrated by Client. Client 

shall check the DFT and any shortfall in DFT (max +/- 5%) shall be rectified. The contractor shall check 

and record the DFT readings. Client will cross check these readings at any number of spots randomly. The 

contractor shall provide proper scaffolding for checking of painting at stage. 

13.0 QUALITY OF PAINTING: 

Good quality shall be maintained at every stage of painting. The painting shall have an aesthetic 

appearance in addition to quality. Any defect noticed during the various stages of inspection shall be 

rectified to the entire satisfaction of Client inspectors before proceeding further. Final inspection shall 

include DFT measurement, Adhesion, Holiday detection check and workmanship. Irrespective of the 

inspection, repair and approval at the intermediate stages of work, contractor shall be responsible for 

making good any defects found during final inspection or agreed guarantee period. 

14.0 STENCILING OF EQUIPMENT / LINE NUMBER: 

The scope of work of the contractor shall include stenciling of equipment number, line number, product 

name and flow direction by contrasting black or white colors at the existing locations. The style and size of 

letters of the stenciling shall be approved by Client. 

15.0 QUALITY OF MANPOWER: 

The contractor shall use only skilled manpower who have at least three years of experience The painting 

contractor shall use only qualified painters and supervisors who shall be conversant with paint material 

characteristics, surface preparation grades, Paint application techniques, measurement of DFT. 

Precautions to be observed during painting/surface preparation and safety precautions in painting. All the 

painters shall have to undergo a painter qualification test. 

16.0 FIRE -PROOFED STRUCTURES: 

All fireproofed structures shall be cleaned and coated with two Coats of Client approved weatherproof 

cement paints from reputed manufacturers. 

17.0 PAINTING FOR R.C.C SUPER STRUCTURE. 

All R.C.C shall be painted with two coat of anti-fungal, anti-flaking and water proof paint approved by client 

/ consultant 

18.0 PRECAUTIONS: 

All nameplates, manufacturer's identification tags, machined surfaces, instrument glass, finished flange 

faces, control valve stems and similar items shall be masked to prohibit coating deposition. If these 

surfaces are coated, the component shall be cleaned and restored to original condition. 


JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

19.0 DETAILS OF EXPERIENCE: 

The contractor shall supply documentary evidence of similar jobs (similar system of painting) carried out in 

the past with location of site, type of painting and value of work executed. 

20.0 PAINTING FOR PLATFORM AND LADDER 

Ladder and platform has to be galvanized and painted for colour coding as per required system for 

galvanized structure. Gratings shall be galvanized but No further painting is required. 

21.0 SYSTEM OF PAINTING: 

It is recommended that for any particular location / unit/ area the contractor shall quote as following: 

a) System "a"-BARE VESSELS/ EXCHANGERS 

b) System" b"- STRUCTURES : 

This has been divided into two parts. 

Part 1 - Structures & platforms till 15mts height or till the topmost O/H Condenser level whichever is 

higher. 

Part 2 - All structures higher than sections covered under first part. 

c) System "c" - BARE PIPING (including piping in O/H Pipe-racks etc.) 

d) System "d" - ROTARY EQUIPMENT, VALVES, PSV, INSTRUMENT Etc.- 

e) System "e" - WALKWAYS, MONKEY LADDERS, and CHECKERED PLATES ETC. PRONE TO 

FOOT TRAFFIC: 

Two optional systems are provided. Any one of the options can be chosen by the vendor/contractor. 

Further, under each option two categories have been defined. 

Part 1 - Walkways, platforms etc. till 15mts height or till the topmost O/H Condenser lever whichever is 

higher. 

Part 2 - All platforms, walkways etc higher than sections covered under first part. 

f) System "f" - CLADDED EQUIPMENT & PIPING (on top of cladding) 

g) System "g" - HOT SURFACES (100-300 deg C) 

h) System "h" - EQUIPMENT YET TO BE INSUALTED 

i) System "i" - STRUCTRE AND EQUIPMENT YET TO BE FIREPROOFED 

j) System "j" - FIRE PROOFED STRUCTURE (CEMENT PAINT): 

To be quoted as LUMPSUM for manual tool cleaning and painting. 

k) System "k" - GALVANIZED STRUCTURAL SURFACES 

It should be noted that system g, h or i may or may not be required to be carried out. Hence it is 

required to be quoted as unit rate (Rs./ sq. mts.). For similar reasons unit rates for sand blasting also 

have to be quoted. 

22.0 CLAUSE FOR EXCLUSION OR EXTRA PAINTING: 

For every system of painting for which rates have been quoted as lump sum, the vendor should specify 

rate of per square meter of painting. This shall be used to either carry out extra painting in that unit or 

to deduct a proportionate amount from the lump sum amount for the areas, which could not be painted 

due to unforeseen circumstances. It shall be solely HPCL's prerogative to invoke this clause. Under 

no circumstances shall this rate be used to make claims for payments for areas which the 

vendor has inadvertently missed while quoting or for making part payments for the areas in 

which the vendor has failed to carry out painting. 


JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

23.0 RATE FOR SHOT BLASTING: 

The vendor shall quote unit rate for shot blasting on per square meter basis. This shall be used solely 

at HPCL discretion for areas where painting permission cannot be given after shot blasting due to 

unforeseen circumstances. 

24.0 TIMING SCHEDULE OF PAINTING SYSTEM 

Timing schedule of painting system have to be followed as per Paint manufacturer’s specification. Final 

coat shall be before Rainy season, giving due consideration to shelf life and lead-time required for 

primer and intermediate coat. 

23.0 PREFERRED PAINT MANUFACTURE 

- BERGER PAINTS 

- ASIAN PAINTS 

- SIGMA COATINGS 

- SHALIMAR PAINTS 

- CLEAN COATS PVT. LTD. 

- CHUGOKU JENSON & NICHOLSON LTD 

- GOODLASS NEROLAC PAINTS LTD. 

- KIRLOSKAR BROTHERS 

- GRAND POLYCOATS COMPANY PVT. LTD. 

* For very high performance coatings. 


JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

PAINTING SYSTEM FOR UNIT EQUIPMENT & PIPELINES 


Annexure-II 

I) SYSTEM - "a " : BARE VESSELS/ EXCHANGERS / (Maximum Surface Temp = 100 deg C): - To be 

quoted as Lumpsum for each vessel/Exch. 

OPTION -1 : WITH SHOT BLASTING: 

Specification No of 

Coats 

Surface Preparation : Shot/Grit Blast to Sa 2 1/2 

Primer - Inorganic Zinc Silicate 

Stripe Coat - Epoxy HB MIO 

Tie Coat - HB MIO Epoxy 

Stripe Coat - HB Epoxy / HB MIO Epoxy 

Inter - High Build 2 pack epoxy 

Or, HB MIO Epoxy 

Stripe Coat : Acrylic Aliphatic PU 

Finish - Acrylic Modified 2 pack Polyurethane 

(Recoatable) 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 

(DFT in microns) 

ONE Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 




TOTAL : DFT = 325 microns 

(OPTION-2): WITH POWER TOOL CLEANING: (Recommending if shot blasting becomes practically 

impossible because of approach or height.) 

Specification 

Surface Preparation : Power tool cleaning ST 3 

Stripe Coat- Self priming Epoxy 

Primer - Self Priming Epoxy Aluminum 

Stripe Coat- MIO 2 Pack Epoxy 

No of 

Coats 

- 

ONE 

Application 

Method 

Airless spray 

Thickness 


1 X 125 = 125 

Mid coat - MIO 2 Pack Epoxy ONE Airless spray 1 X 100 = 100 





(Recoatable) 


TOTAL : DFT = 375 microns 

II) SYSTEM -" b" : STRUCTURES : (To be Quoted as Lumpsum) 

PART I : Structures & Platforms upto the height of topmost overhead condenser or upto a height of 

15 metres whichever is higher. 


Coats 

Surface Preparation : Shot Blast to Sa 2 1/2 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


Primer - Zn Rich Epoxy 

Stripe Coat- Epoxy HB MIO 

ONE Brush / Spray 1 X 50 = 50 

Mid coat - MIO 2 Pack Epoxy 

Stripe Coat- HB Epoxy 

ONE Brush 1 X 100 = 100 



Stripe Coat - Acrylic Aliphatic PU 

ONE Brush 1 X 100 = 100 

Finish - Acrylic Modified 2 pack PU (Recoatable) ONE Brush 1 X 50 = 50

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 


TOTAL DFT = 300 microns 

PART II : All structures and platform above the height mentioned in "PART I" earlier (ie above 15 

mts. height or topmost condenser height whichever is more) – Lumpsum 

Specification 


Stripe Coat - Self priming epoxy 







(Recoatable) 

No of 

Coats 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


--- ----- 

------ 


----- ------- 

-------- 




Total DFT= 375 microns 

III) System "c" : BARE PIPING (including lines in o/h pipe rack) (Maximum surface temp= 100 deg C) : 

To be quoted as Lumpsum 

Specification 


Stripe Coat - Self Priming Epoxy 







(Recoatable) 

No of 

Coats 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


----- 

------ ------- 


------ --------- ------------ 




Total DFT= 375 microns 

IV) System "d": PSV, MOTORS, PUMPS, COMPRESSORS, INSTRUMENTS , Valves etc. : Maximum 

surface Temperature : 100 deg C - LUMP SUM 


Coats 

Surface Preparation : Manual Cleaning to ST 2 

Stripe Coat- Self Priming Epoxy 







(Recoatable) 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


---- ---- 

----- 

ONE Brush 1 X 125 = 125 

------- ------ 

-------- 

ONE Brush 1 X 100 = 100 

ONE Brush 1 X 100 = 100 

ONE Brush 1 X 50 = 50 


V) System " e" :Carbon Steel Checkered Plate/ Walkway/ Rungs of Monkey Ladder etc areas which are 

prone to foot traffic and consequent abrasion. 

OPTION 1 (Uptill 15 mts height or till the level of topmost o/h condenser whichever is higher) - 

Lumpsum

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 


Coats 

Surface Preparation - Shot Blast to Sa 2 1/2 


Application 

Method 

Thickness 

(DFT in 

microns) 


Stripe Coat- Epoxy HB MIO 



Stripe Coat - HB Epoxy 



Or Epoxy HB MIO 

Stripe coat- Coal Tar Epoxy 


Finish - Coal Tar Epoxy (Recoatable) ONE Airless spray 1 X 150 = 150 

Total DFT = 400 microns 

OPTION 1 (Above 15 mts height or above the level of topmost o/h condenser whichever is higher) – 

Lumpsum 


Coats 


Application 

Method 

Thickness 


Stripe Coat- Self Priming Epoxy 

---- ---- 

----- 




------ ------- 

--------- 




Or Epoxy HB MIO 

Stripe coat- Coal Tar Epoxy 


Finish - Coal Tar Epoxy (Recoatable) ONE Airless spray 1 X 150 = 150 


OPTION II (Uptill 15 mts height or till the level of topmost o/h condenser whichever is higher) - 

Lumpsum 


Coats 


Application 

Method 

Thickness 



Stripe Coat - Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant 

One Airless spray 1X 50 = 50 

Intermediate- Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant 

Stripe Coat - Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant. 

One Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 

Mid Coat- Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant One Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 

Finish - Epoxy HB abrasion Res. (Recoatable) ONE Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 

Total DFT= 275 Microns 

OPTION II (Above 15 mts height or above the level of topmost o/h condenser whichever is higher)- 

Lumpsum 


Coats 


Stripe Coat- Self priming epoxy 

Primer - Self priming epoxy 

Stripe Coat - Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant 

Intermediate- Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant 

---------- 

ONE 

ONE 

------ 

Application 

Method 

------------- 

Airless spray 

Airless spray 

-------- 

Thickness 


---------- 

1X 125 = 125 

1 X 75 = 75 

-----------

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

Mid Coat- Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant ONE Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 

Finish - Epoxy HB abrasion Resistant ONE Airless spray 1 X 75 = 75 

Total DFT= 350 Microns 

VI) System "f" Cladded Equipment and Piping (To be applied on top of GI/Alum clad sheets) – 

LUMPSUM 

Specification No of Application 

Coats Method 

Surface Preparation : Manual by wire brush and degreasing if oil spill is there. 


Thickness 


Primer - Wash Etch Primer ONE Brush 1 X 10 = 10 

Finish - HR Alum Paint ONE Brush 1 X 20 = 20 


VII) System "g" :ALL OTHER BARE EQUIPMENT & SURFACES For WHICH Surface Temperature is 

between : 0 to 300 Deg C - UNIT RATE 


Coats 


Application 

Method 

Thickness 


Primer - Heat Resistant Al-Silicone Paint ONE Brush 1 X 20 = 20 

Finish - Heat Resistant Al-Silicone Paint ONE Brush 1 X 20 = 20 


Note: No temperature curing is allowed for the Heat Resistant paint of this system. 

VIII) System " h"Structure and Equipment which are to yet to be insulated and whose surface temp is 

less than 100 deg C (UNIT RATE) 

Specification 

Surface Preparation : Shot Blasting to Sa 2 ½ 

No of 

Coats 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


Primer - Zn Rich Epoxy ONE Airless spray 1 X 50 = 50 

Finish - MIO 2 pack epoxy TWO Airless spray 2 X 100 = 200 


IX) System "i" : Structure and Equipment which are to yet to be fire-proofed : (UNIT RATE) 

Specification 

Surface Preparation : Shot blasting to Sa 2 ½ 

No of 

Coats 

Application 

Method 

Thickness 


Primer - Zn Rich Epoxy ONE Airless spray 1 X 50 = 50 

Finish - Epoxy tie Coat ONE Airless spray 1 X 25 = 25 


X) System "j" : FIRE PROOFED Structure and Equipment : ( LUMPSUM ) 

Specification 

Surface Preparation : Manual Cleaning 

No of 

Coats 

Application 

Method 

Primer - Weather Resitant Cement Paint ONE Brush/ Spray 

Finish - Weather Resistant Cement Paint ONE Brush /Spray 

Thickness 

(DFT in microns)

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

XI) System "K" : Galvanized Structural surfaces 

NOTE: 

Specification No of Application 

Coats Method 

Surface Preparation : Manual by wire brush and degreasing if oil spill is there. 


Thickness 


Primer - Wash Etch Primer ONE Brush 1 X 5 = 5 

Mid Coat - High Build Polyamide cured Epoxy (2- Pack 

System) 

ONE Brush 1 X 125 =125 

Finish - Aliphatic Acrylic modified (Iso-Cyanate) ONE Brush 1 X 50 = 50 

cured 2-Pack Polyurethane (Re-coatable) 


1. After application, every coat of paint should be of average minimum DFT as indicated in the above 

mentioned respective painting systems. 

2. Stripe Coat: Stripe coat should be applied using half to one inch brush to only weld joints, nut bolts etc. 

and confined areas before application of full coat. This is to provide additional protection to these areas, 

as these are usually the starting points of corrosion.

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

Sl. 

No. 

Specifications for Paints to be used in Painting of Units 


Annexure-III 

Type of Paint Required Specifications Manufacturer 

Specifications 

1 Inorganic Brand Name 

Zn DFT (Microns) / coat = 75 

Silicate Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 400 

Min % of metallic Zn in dry film by weight = 80 +/- 5 % 

Purity of Zinc - 98% (min), Zinc Particle Size: 10 microns 

Volume solids = 62 % (minimum) 

Based on Inorganic or Ethyl silicate media 

2 Zn Brand Name 

Rich DFT (Microns)/ Coat = 50 

Epoxy Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0 - 120 

Min % of metallic Zn in dry film by weight = 85+/- 5 % 

Purity of Zinc - 98% (min); Zinc Particle Size: 5 microns 

Volume solids = 60 % (minimum) 

Polyamide cured 2 pack epoxy 

3 Self Brand Name 

Priming DFT (Microns)/ Coat = 125 

Epoxy Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 

Volume solids = 85% (minimum) 

It shall be surface tolerant 

It should be 2 pack epoxy pigmented with Al 

4 Epoxy Brand Name 

Tie DFT (Microns)/ coat = 25 

Coat Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 deg C 

Volume solids (minimum) = 

It should be high Solvent, Quick drying & low build epoxy 

5 MIO Brand Name 

2 Pack DFT (Microns) / coat = 100 

Epoxy Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 

Min % of Micaceous Iron Oxide by weight in dry film = 50 

Volume soilds (minimum)= 80% 

6. Two Pack Brand Name 

Epoxy DFT (Microns) / Coat = 100 

(High Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 

Build) / Volume solids (minimum) = 60 +/- 3 % 

It Shall be Polyamide cured 2 pack epoxy. 

7. Two Pack Brand Name 

Epoxy DFT (Microns) / Coat = 100 

Abrasion Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-125 

Sl. 

No. 

Resistant Volume solids (minimum) = 70% 

Type of Paint Required Specifications Manufacturer 

Specifications 

8. Aliphatic Brand Name

JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

Acrylic DFT (Microns) /Coat = 50 

Modified Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-125 

(Isocynate) Volume soilds (minimum) = 55% 

Cured It should be a two pack PU. 

Two Pack 

Polyurethane 

Finish 

It Should be Re-Coatable after Completion of 

guarantee period subject to sound condition of total 

system. 

9. Heat Brand Name 

Resistant DFT (Microns) / Coat = 20 

Al. Paint Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-250 deg C 

(Acrylic/ Volume solids = 38 % 

Silicone Temperature Curing Required = None 

Based) 

10. High Build Brand Name 

Amine DFT (Microns) / Coat = 80 

Cured Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 

Epoxy Volume solids (minimum) = 76 % 

It should be a two pack high solids polyamine cured epoxy 

11. Cement Weather Proof Cement Paint 

Paint Reputed Manufacturers as per HPCL approval 

12 Epoxy Brand Name 

Coal Tar DFT (Microns) / Coat = 150 

Continuous Service Temp (Deg C) = 0-120 

It should be two pack Epoxy with 

1 st Pack consisting Epoxy Resin & Suitable Pigments 

& 2 nd Pack consisting Polyamide curing agent 

% of Epoxy Resin by weight in mixed resin coal tar Blend 

shall be between 35- 45% 

Volume solids ( minimum) = 75 +/- 5% 

13 Wash etch Brand Name 

Primer To be used as primer for painting of Al sheets/ GI sheets 

of insulation cladding.(2 component based on Poly Vinyl 

Butyral) 

DFT(microns) / Coat = 10; 

Color = Yellow 

Volume Solids (minimum)= 10% 

14 HR Aluminum Brand Name 

Paint DFT(microns) / coat = 20 

(Alkyd Based) Specifications: As per IS 2339/ HR Aluminum Paint 


JACOBS 


18-3188 Rev. 0 

DOC.NO. 18-3188-99-00-V.02-0005-A4 Date: 01.12.2006 

COLOUR CODE FOR PAINTING 


ANNEXURE-IV 

Sl. 

No. 

SERVICE COLOUR BAND 

1. PROCESS LINES: 

1a. All Lines below 120 deg C Grey - 

1b. All lines above 120 deg C Aluminum - 

2. UTILITY LINES: - 

2a. All Lines except cooling & Fire Water Lines < 120C Grey - 

2b. All Lines except cooling & Fire Water Lines > 120C Aluminum - 

2c Cooling water Lines Opaline Green 

3. CHEMICALS 

3a Acid, Alkali, and all other corrosive contents i.e. corrosive to 

the person except toxic lines 

Grey Yellow 

3b. Toxic Lines Grey Tangerine 

4. FIRE WATER LINES & FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT Red Gloss - 

5a. Fired Heaters, Heat Exchangers, Storage Tanks, Vessels 

(Except Chemicals) 

5b. Fired Heaters, Heat Exchangers, Storage Tanks, Vessels 

(Chemicals) 

< 120 C - Grey 

> 120 C - Aluminum 

< 120 C - Grey 

> 120 C - Aluminum 

Yellow/ 

Tangerine 

6. INSULATED LINE/ EQUIPMENT Aluminum. - 

7. CHLORINE STORAGE White 

8. MOVING EQUIPMENT 

8a. Pumps, Comp, Turbines, stirrers, Blowers, Rotary air locks 

etc. 

Mushroom gloss 

8b. Motors & their field mounted switch gear Tangerine Gloss 

9. AIRLINE & OUTSIDE INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS Black

JACOBS 


FALES CEILING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049-A4 


\\nmumfil01\project\WIP\18-3188\Civil\Tender document for SRR and Sub-station building\New 

Folder\false_ceiling.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 7 

Approved 

0 9/10/2007 7 Issued for construction SJV DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 

Project Name-Lube oil Stocks upgradation 

Project No-18-3188 

Owner’s Name-Hindustan Petroleum Limited 

1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 





Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 2 OF 7 


Folder\false_ceiling.doc

JACOBS 




1.0 SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM 

1.1 SCOPE 

Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 3 OF 7 

This specification covers supply, installation, levelling, finishing, aligning, 

testing, protecting and maintenance till handing over of the entire suspended 

ceiling system consisting of ceiling panels of approved quality and make, and 

supporting system with necessary suspension arrangement as per specification/ 

approval of Owner/Consultant. 

Unless specified otherwise, the false ceiling shall be ‘T’ grid type. The 

longitudinal supports shall be spaced at max. 610mm intervals and cross supports 

at max. 610mm or 1220mm centres unless specified otherwise. 

1.2 SUPPORTING SYSTEM 

The grid system shall be made either with galvanised steel or aluminium Tee 

sections as per specification. If timber supports are specified, suitable wall line 

supports shall be provided. The suspension arrangement can be with GI wires of 

adequate gauge as per specification or with rigid flats/ angles taken to required 

level from the soffit. 

The grids shall be 610mm x 610mm or 610mm x 1220mm unless specified 

otherwise. 

The maximum distance between suspenders in longitudinal direction and cross 

direction shall not be more than 1220mm. Closer intervals shall be provided 

depending on the soffit conditions. The suspender shall be provided with a 

turnbuckle for easy and faster levelling of the grid. 

The wall rest shall be fixed perfectly level since the level of the entire grid 

depends on the level of wall rest. 

In areas where change in humidity and temperature are appreciable and frequent, a 

lock pin shall be provided on the top of the panels to ensure structural integrity of 

the grid and the panel. 

Wherever lighting points occur, extra suspenders shall be provided to take the 

load of the outfits. 



JACOBS 




Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 4 OF 7 

If painting is specified, the panels shall be painted in dry condition on both sides 

and the ends in particular before inserting them in the grid. 

A clearance of 2mm shall be given between the board and the grid on all four 

sides for taking care of the thermal expansion and easy insertion. 

The false ceiling panels shall be installed over supporting grid work as per 

manufactures recommendations and specifications. The work includes providing 

necessary accessories, hardware, finishing etc. complete. Finished false ceiling 

shall be perfectly levelled and aligned at desired height. 

1.3 MINERAL FIBRE BOARD FALSE CEILING 

Mineral fibre board false ceiling shall consists of hot dip galvanised steel sections 

grid work made of `T’ shaped main and cross runners. Grid shall be suspended by 

means of 4mm-dia MS wire, 6-mm thick MS cleat of 25mm x 25-mm section, 

anchor fasteners and level adjustors. Exposed surfaces of the grid work shall be 

prefinished in baked polyester paint and shall be chemically cleaned. Necessary 

cutouts for A.C. diffusers, lighting fixtures shall be provided by means of 

additional main/cross Tee members. 

Prefinished / coated mineral fibre board ceiling tiles should be minimum 15 mm 

thick having following properties : 

a) NRC value of min. 0.50 

b) Light reflectance value of min 80% 

c) K value of 0.052 to 0.057 W/m deg.C 

d) Fire performance conforming to Class I as per BS: 476 

e) Humidity resistance at RH 90. 

1.4 GYPSUM BOARD FALSE CEILING 

Gypsum board false ceiling work shall consist of GI grid system made of GI 

intermediate channels suspended from ceiling. Cross runners shall be fixed to the 

intermediate channels in perpendicular direction. 

Gypsum board files shall be 12mm thick. The gypsum board used for the tiles 

shall conform to IS:2095 and shall have following properties : 

a) Thermal conductivity : 0.16 W/mk 

b) Thermal resistance : 0.08 sq.m. K/W 



JACOBS 




Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 5 OF 7 

c) Fire propagation 

i. Index of performance : Not exceeding 12 and a sub index not exceeding 

6 (when each Side is tested separately to BS 476: Part-6). 

ii. Surface spread of flame : Class I(both sides) as per test to BS 476: Part 7) 

The gypsum board shall be screen fixed to the under side of false ceiling grid 

system with 12.5 mm dia dry wall screw @ 230 mm c/c by drilling machine. 

Joints in the board shall be finished flush with fillers, give a seamless finish and 

primer as per manufacturer’s recommendation to give a seamless finish and shall 

be finished with two or more coats of plastic emulsion paint of approved make 

and shade. 

1.5 PARTICLE BOARD FALSE CEILING 

Particle board false ceiling work shall consist of aluminium grid system made of 

main runners, cross runners and perimeter sections of extented anodized (25 

micron) aluminium tee sections. 

Particle board ceiling tiles shall be decorative as per approved design. It should 

be 12 mm thick and made of teakwood particle board conforming to IS:3087. (3 

layer flat pressed particle board bonded with BWP type phenol formaldehyde 

synthetic resign and as per IS:848 categorized as Class-I for surface of very low 

flame spread as per IS:1642 treated with antifungus chemicals). 

The tiles shall be painted at the bottom surface with two or more coats of 

approved colour plastic emulsion paint of approved make after sanding off the 

surface with 120 grit sand paper and applying a coat of approved particle board 

primer. 

1.6 ALUMINIUM LINEAL FALSE CEILING 

Aluminium lineal false ceiling shall consists of : 

Panel Carriers 

These shall be roll formed out of 0.6 mm thick galvanised steel/0.95mm 

thick aluminium alloy 5052, 32mm wide and 39 mm deep with cut-outs to 

hold panels in a module of 90mm/100mm: all complete as per 

manufacturers standard details and specifications. When two or more 

carriers are to be joined, they shall be joined together by means of carrier 

splices which will clip on to holes in the sides of the carriers and hold 



JACOBS 




Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 6 OF 7 

them firmly in place while maintaining the required module. The carriers 

shall be suspended from roof by 4mm dia galvanised steel wire rod 

hangers with height adjustment springs of stainless steel. Hangers shall be 

fixed to roof by “J”hooks and nylon inserts. Edge profiles shall be 

“L”shaped roll-formed out of 0.6mm aluminium alloy IS:31000 with 

powder coating. 

Panels : 

Panels shall be 84mm wide x 16mm deep roll formed out of 0.5mm 

aluminium alloy AA3105/5050. The aluminium panels shall be 

chromatised and stove enamelled (coil coated) on both sides in approved 

shade. Panels shall be factory cut in length upto 5 meters to suit site 

dimensions. As per air conditioning requirements, for return air (wherever 

required) perforated panels shall be used, which shall have 2mm dia holes 

at 5mm centre to centre staggered in uniform pattern and symmetrically 

located in the middle of the panel face. 

The ceiling shall be erected in continuous sequence as per approved 

manufacturer’s recommendations, specifications etc. The false ceiling 

shall have perfect levels, linearity, etc. as required. Necessary cut outs for 

Electrical AC and other fixtures shall be provided as per drawing and in 

co-ordination with relevant construction activities. 

1.7 ALUMINIUM PLANKS / TILES FALSE CEILING 

The false ceiling system shall consists of: 

A) Panel Carriers 

These shall be rows of 0.5mm thick galvanised steel clip-in profiles of size 

40mm x 20mm. These shall be suspended from roof structure by means of 

GI suspension angles, ceiling brackets and hold on clamps @ maximum 

1200mm c/c along the clip-in profile all complete as per approved 

manufacture’s specifications. 

B) Aluminium Tiles/Planks 

Aluminium ceiling tiles shall be 600mm x 600mm/ planks shall be 254 

mm, 300 mm or 305 mm and length upto 1800 mm manufactured out of 

0.7mm thick aluminium alloy AA3105, chromatised and stove enamelled 



JACOBS 




Document No-18-3188-99-02-A-02-0049 

Rev No : 0 

PAGE 7 OF 7 

(coil coated) with square edges produced on advanced equipments. 

Exposed side of the tile/plank shall have 20 micron (minimum) coil coated 

polyester finish and 5 micron back coat on rear surface over alklyd primer 

in approved shade. The short sides of each plank/two sides of each tile 

shall be raised and pipped and stopped to ensure positive engagement into 

the spring clip-in profiles and shall allow for demounting of individual 

plank/tile. 



JACOBS 


FALES FLOORING 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050-A4 



Folder\false_floorring.doc 

By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 5 

Approved 

0 9/10/2007 5 Issued for construction SJV DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 

Project Name: Lube Oil Stocks Upgradation 


Owner’s Name- Hindustan Petroleum Limited 

1.0 FALSE FLOORING 

1.1 SCOPE 

Document No. :18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050 

Rev No. : 0 

PAGE 2 OF 5 

This specification covers supply, installation, levelling, finishing, aligning, testing, protecting and 

maintenance till handing over of the entire system consisting of removable, free accessible false 

flooring. The system consists of an assembly of modular, load bearing floor panels mounted on 

supporting steel grid structure to provide an under floor of desired height for accommodation of 

flexible electrical cables for computers and other control room equipment and also to act as a 

plenum for air conditioning system. 

The load bearing capacity of the floor panels and supporting system shall be as per specification 

and the whole system shall be approved by the Owner / Consultant before effecting the supply. 

1.2 SUPPORTING SYSTEM 

The under structure system shall generally be a grid framing of 610mm x 610 mm or of suitable 

size as approved by Owner/Consultant. The height of the flooring shall be as specified by the 

Owner/Consultant with provisions for running cables, ducts etc. as per site requirement. 

The supporting system shall consist of a pedestal assembly of required height, a system (with or 

without stringers) for holding the panels in position and other accessories like Jack heads, panel 

lifters etc. for easy removal of panels. 

Pedestal assembly shall consist of 

a) MS galvanised pedestal base plate of size 100 mm x 100 mm and 3 mm thick having 4 stiffeners 

90 deg. apart pointing towards the 4 corners of base plate. The pedestals should be fixed on the 

floor with anchor fasteners. 

b) Galvanised MS seamless pipe stud of 19 mm ID and 3 mm thick. 

c) Pedestal head assembly made of pressure die cast aluminium alloy disc of 2.5mm thickness 

having channel shaped projections in all 4 directions and 4 pin heads on top to receive panels or 

100mm x 100mm x 4 mm thick GI plate having 8 nos. 6 mm dia threaded holes for fastening of 

stringer and locating of tiles. A fully threaded bright rod of 16 mm O.D. shall be fitted to 

underside of top head and inserted into base pipe stud. The assembly shall provide a range of 

height adjustment from 25mm to 75mm with the help of check nut. 

d) Stringer system is made of galvanised machine cut, cold rolled MS channels of size 30mm x 

20mm x 1.6 mm thick or any other size approved by Owner/consultant with suitable fixing 

arrangement. 

e) The grid formed by the pedestal and stringer assembly shall receive the floor panel. 

1.3 FLOOR PANELS 


Folder\false_floorring.doc

JACOBS 




Document No. :18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050 

Rev No. : 0 

PAGE 3 OF 5 

The floor panels shall be of approximately 610mm x 610mm size or of suitable size to match 

the under structure system, as approved by Owner/Consultant. Unless specified otherwise, the 

panels shall consist of 25mm thick MDF boards (manufactured from agro based lignocellulosic 

fibres conforming to IS 12406-1988 exterior grade bonded with synthetic resin conforming to IS 

848 and categorised as Class I for surfaces of very low flame spread as per IS-1642) panels 

shall be fixed with screws into MS bottom tray of 1.2 mm thickness die formed to shape which 

shall rest on the jack head. 

Or 

The panel shall have steel constructions with a cementitious core inside. Top sheet should be 

cold rolled full hard steel and should resist deflection uniformly. The panel structure shall be 

such that the edges shall have a I beam shape, continuous in form and approximately 15mm 

from the edge of the panel. The panel shall rest on the jack head. 

Any other floor panel system may be provided with the prior approval of Owner / Consultant. 

1.4 SURFACE FINISH 

Unless specified otherwise, the top surface of the panel shall be provided with 2mm thick anti 

static type PVC tiles/high pressure laminates of approved colour and texture,cut to size and 

bonded by synthetic resin adhesive of approved quality. The size and shape of tiles shall 

conform to IS 3461 / IS 3462 unless specified otherwise. 

For all steel panels steel sheets should have conductive epoxy paint finish to resist abrasion and 

to dissipate static electricity. 

The edges of the tiles shall be provided with 2mm thick PVC beading on all the four sides to 

protect the surface covering from chipping as well as for better aesthetics. 


The concrete sub floor shall be sealed with two coats of polyurethane paint to prevent moisture 

from coming in contact with cables and to minimize any dust problem. Any damage to the subfloor 

during installation of the false flooring system shall be made good by the contractor without 

any extra cost to the Owner. 

The pedestal stud locations shall ensure the grid work as per flooring pattern. The length of the 

pedestal studs shall be such that clear cavity between false flooring and base flooring is of 

desired depth. To obtain proper level of the finished floor panels adjustment to be done by 

means of the adjustment nuts. 

Stringer channels shall then be fitted onto the top heads in position to form the supporting grid 

work for the floor panels, checking the level once again by adjusting the nut position if necessary. 

Now the check nut shall be finally tightened to secure the final level. Floor panels as specified 

shall be placed over the stringer channels and top head disc in such a manner that the holes in 

MS tray fit into the pin heads on discs. 



JACOBS 




Document No. :18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050 

Rev No. : 0 

PAGE 4 OF 5 

Each floor panel shall be marked with positional numbering on the underneath. The finished 

floor panels shall be perfectly levelled, aligned without any gaps in between the panels. 

Each individual panel shall be removable for the purpose of maintenance of the cavity. 

Necessary cut-outs shall be made in the panels for fixing air distribution grills, accessories like 

floor mounted sockets, telephone and data jackets, wire exits, service boxes etc. 

Necessary ramps slopes, steps, etc. shall be also provided for as per drawing. 

All the necessary accessories shall be supplied by the false flooring supplier. 

Around control panel/rack, the residual space left out shall be filled up with cut panels of uniform 

size as required to fully close the gap between the adjacent full panel and the control panel base 

channel. In this case the part floor panel shall extend upto the full width of the base channel and 

the cut size shall be determined accordingly. An additional row of jack pedestals shall be 

provided along the cut out on which the edge of the floor panel shall rest and over which the base 

channel of control panel shall be placed. It shall not directly rest on the jack head pedestal or 

grid channels 

The finished false flooring shall be able to serve for a distributed load of minimum 1250 

kg/Sq.M. 

All steel surfaces are to be protected by two coats of polyurethane paints over a compatible 

primer. Any damage to the paint during installation shall be made good by the contractor at his 

own cost. 

Finished false floor surface, when specified by the Engineer, shall be protected with craft paper, 

taped and sealed at edges to prevent tearing. 

All installation work for false flooring system shall be supervised by the manufacturer’s 

authorised representative. 

1.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 

The false flooring system shall be checked specially for the following acceptance criteria: 

1.7 PAYMENT 

i) Level 

ii) Alignment of joints 

iii) Thickness of joints 

iv) Surface finish 

v) Colour and texture 

vi) Details of edge connection 

vii) Performance 

viii) Criteria specified for strength 



JACOBS 




Document No. :18-3188-99-02-A-02-0050 

Rev No. : 0 

PAGE 5 OF 5 

Payment shall be made for complete items as measured in plan areas including necessary 

underbid sealing with two coats of polyurethane paint, preparation of the surfaces, cutting, 

chasing, grouting etc. The rate shall include all cutting wastage of support grid systems and floor 

panels including supply, assembling, installation, etc. with all tools, tackles complete. 

1.8 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 

The finished surface shall be measured for area in sq. meter. Any opening less than 0.36 sq. 

meter per tile shall not be taken into account and no deduction will be made for it. 



document in sh57.tmp 

JACOBS 


PLUMBING , SANITARY WORKS AND DRAINAGE 

DOCUMENT NO. : 18-3188-99-02-C.02-0051-A4 


By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 10 

Approved 

0 09-10-07 10 Issued for construction SJV DK MBR 

By

JACOBS 

Project Name- Lube Oil Stocks Upgradation Document No-18-3188-99-02-C-02-0051 

Page : 2 OF 10 

Owner’s Name –Hindustan Petroleum Limited Rev-0 

1.0 PURPOSE 

2.0 SCOPE 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.1.1 Sanitary fixtures 

3.1.2 Pipes 

3.1.3 Plain Cement Concrete 

3.1.4 Brick Work 

3.1.5 Cement Plaster 

3.1.6 Reinforced Cement Concrete 

3.2 SANITARY FIXTURES 



3.2.1 European Water Closet (Ordinary or Syphomic Type) 

3.2.2 Indian Water Closet 

3.2.3 Wash Basin 

3.2.4 Urinals 

3.2.5 Shower Rose 

3.2.6 Mirror 

3.2.7 Soap Dispenser 

3.2.8 Stop Cocks & Bib Taps 

3.3 SANITARY FITTINGS 

3.3.1 P.V.C Connectors 

3.3.2 Towel Rails 

3.3.3 Peet Valve 

3.3.4 Marble Partitions / Kota Stone Partitions 

3.3.5 Nahani Traps or Deep Seal Traps 

3.3.6 Half-Round Channels for surface Drains 

3.3.7 Automatic Ball Float Valves 

3.3.8 Measurements 

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES 

3.4.1 Manholes 

3.4.2 Inspection Chambers 

3.4.3 Valve Chambers 

3.4.4 Gully Trap Chambers 

3.4.5 Cast Iron Covers 

3.4.6 G.I. Pipe Work 

3.4.7 Cast Iron Pipe Work 

3.4.8 Stoneware Pipework 

3.5 MEASUREMENTS & RATES

JACOBS 


Owner ’s Name –Hindustan Petroleum Limited Page : 3 of 10 

Revision: 0 

1.0 PURPOSE 


The purpose of this standard is to define specifications to be followed for plumbing, sanitary works 

and Drainage. 

2.0 SCOPE 

The work covered by this specification includes supply of approved quality sanitary ware, 

accessories, their installation and commissioning the scheme as directed. 


3.1 MATERIALS 

3.1.1 Sanitary fixtures 

3.1.2 Pipes 

All sanitary ware shall be glazed earthware of fireclay as specified in the material schedule & shall 

be of best quality manufactured by approved manufacturer, and shall be finally approved by the 

Owner / Consultants prior to installation. The approved samples shall be kept at site till the final 

installation of the sanitary ware. 

The materials shall be free from any wrap, cracks, blemishes, blisters, uneven glazing, shall be 

smooth and free from crazing & deformations. 

Galvanised iron pipes and specials shall be of class "C" heavy type, first quality and shall conform 

to IS 1239. All pipes and fittings shall be approved by the Owner / Consultants prior to installation. 

Cast Iron soil waste pipes & specials shall be of approved quality and shall conform to IS 1729. 

These pipes shall be used for soil waste, vents and anti-sliphonage. 

Asbestos cement pipes and specials shall be approved make and shall conform to IS1626. These 

pipes shall be used wherever they are exposed and non-vertically. 

3.1.3 Plain Cement Concrete (Refer documents No-18-3188-99-00-S-02-0014 ) 

3.1.4 Brick Work 

The bricks shall be clean and best available in the area. The bricks shall neither be overburnt nor 

underburnt. The size of brick shall be 75 x 115 x 225 with tolerances of 1.5mm in depth, 3mm in 

width & 6mm in length. The bricks when immersed in water for 24 hours shall not absorb more 

than 20% of its weight of water. 

The cement mortar shall consist of one bag of cement mixed with 6 parts of clean coarse sieved 

sand, as specified. Wherever required, scaffolding shall be provided. The joints on the surfaces to 

be plastered shall be raked for a depth of 12mm prior to application of plaster. The brickwork shall 

not be raised more than 900 cm. in a day. Brickwork shall be cured for at least 7 days. 

3.1.5 Cement Plaster

JACOBS 





The cement mortar shall be prepared from one bag of cement to four parts of clean washed sand 

and shall be applied uniformly over brick surface. The average thickness of plaster on brickwork 

shall be limited to 20mm. The concrete surface shall have 12mm average thick plaster. The 

surfaces of concrete shall be roughened prior to application of plaster. The plaster so applied shall 

be rendered smooth by a neat coat of thick cement slurry, which shall be trowelled smooth. The 

plaster shall be cured for at least seven days. 

3.1.6 Reinforced Cement Concrete (Refer documents No-18-3188-99-00-S-02-0014 ) 

3.2 SANITARY FIXTURES 

3.2.1 European Water Closet (Ordinary or Syphomic Type) 

The European Water Closet shall consist of : 

a) Approved washdown closet in white glazed or coloured earthenware with integral "P" or 

"S" trap as specified. 

b) Rubber joints for inlet connection. 

c) Black or any other colour of solid plastic seat and cover with chromium-plated hinges and 

rubber buffers as specified. 

d) Low level flushing cistern of 15 litres capacity Fordham or equivalent make, porcelain 

enamelled with all fittings and accessories with 32mm flush chromium plated flush bend. 

e) Porcelain enamelled supporting brackets for cistern. 

f) 15mm p.v.c. connector and 15mm C.P brass stop cock easy clean type. 

g) Standard toilet paper roll holder of approved type shall be provided, and this shall be 

surface mounted type fixed with C.P. counter sunk brass screws. 

h) All the necessary work required for satisfactory working. 

3.2.2 Indian Water Closet 

The Indian Water Closet shall consist of : 

a) Best Indian make Water Closet pan of 630 (i.e. 25") size with "P" or "S" trap in white 

glazed earthenware. 

b) 32mm C.I. flush pipe of appropriate length with necessary brass and wiped soldered 

joints bend to proper shape & fixed in position in chasses and the chasses shall then be 

fixed smooth to match. 

c) The brickbat lime or cement concrete required to be filled around the entire space of the 

W.C. pan properly rammed and consolidated without damaging the pan. 

d) C.I. soil waste pipe bend with cleaning cap extending upto Gulley Trap Chamber beyond 

the "P" trap.

JACOBS 



Revision: 0 


e) The work shall include all the primary works such as cutting, excavating pits in ground 

floor for fixing closet pan and similar other work necessary for satisfactory working of the 

closet. 

3.2.3 Wash Basin 

This shall be the best available type of wash basin of approved Manufacturer and shall consist of 

the following approved accessories : 

a) Wash basins of size as specified in the material schedule and shall be in vitreous 

Chinaware with or without antisplash rim with tap holes, overflow split. 

b) Supporting Cast Iron Brackets with premier & 20r more finishing coats. 

c) 12mm chromium plated tap with appropriate marks for cold or hot water. 

d) 32 mm chromium plated brass waste coupling with rubber plug and chain. 

e) 12mm p.v.c. connector with wiped joints & 15mm chromium plated brass stop cock. 

f) All the accessories wherever necessary shall be painted in 2 coats or more with approved 

enamel paint. 

g) The wash basin shall have glazed chinaware pedestal whenever so specified in the 

material schedule. 

h) All the necessary work that will be necessary for its satisfactory working.

JACOBS 




3.2.4 Urinals 


These shall be of the approved make and shall consist of the following : 

a) Vitreous Chinaware urinal stall of 11p type as specified in the material schedule. 

b) 32mm Chromium plated brass waste coupling. 

c) Suitable supporting arrangement. 

d) All other necessary work for satisfactory working. 

3.2.5 Shower Rose 

3.2.6 Mirror 

This shall be of Chromium plated brass and approximately 125mm in diameter with C.P. brass 

arm of appropriate length and wall flange etc., wherever necessary. 

The mirrors shall be of size specified in the material schedule with or without bevelled edges. The 

mirrors glass shall be free from all defects & shall give clean undisturbed image at any distance & 

angle. This shall normally be of "Hindustan Pilkington" or approved equal. The mirror shall be 

mounted on Asbestos sheets or 6mm plywood with brass counter sunk screws with washers and 

detachable G.P.caps. 

3.2.7 Soap Dispenser 

This shall be either clear glass or chinaware type or as specified in the material schedule and shall 

be of approved type. This shall include all the necessary accessories such as fixing bracket with 

easy rotatory moment of the dispenser. Chromium plated brass screwed-in-type of cap with a 

central orifice. 

3.2.8 Stop Cocks & Bib Taps 

These shall be chromium plated brass heavy quality of "EGO" type or equivalent, and shall be 

easy type with capston head. The size shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities. 

3.3 SANITARY FITTINGS 

3.3.1 P.V.C Connectors 

These shall be of specified size, of appropriate length with brass unions and wiped solder joint, 

shall be bent to correct shape without any distortions, and work shall include all the operations, 

such as fixing, as necessary for satisfactory working of the same. 

3.3.2 Towel Rails 

The towel rails shall be of chromium plate brass tube with a pair of C.P. brackets. Material shall be 

of approved type and the size shall be as indicated in the Bill of Quantities or drawing. The towel 

rails shall be fixed to wall by Rawl plugs and C.P. brass counter sunk screws.

JACOBS 



Revision: 0 

3.3.3 Peet Valve 


The peet valves shall be of gunmetal heavy type of approved quality and shall have hand wheels. 

The work shall include testing & making good leakages. 

3.3.4 Marble Partitions / Kota Stone Partitions 

These shall be of the sizes specified in the relevant drawings or Bill of Quantities and shall be 

machinecut and polished with rounded edges. This shall be fixed in the brickwork with appropriate 

groove made good to match after fixing. 

3.3.5 Nahani Traps or Deep Seal Traps 

These traps shall be of Cast Iron Type of outlets of required sizes. The work shall include fixing 

the trap in P.C.C. 1:2:4, and shall be provided with Chromium plated brass hinged type heavy 

grating on the top. The deep seal traps shall have generally 50mm water seal. 

3.3.6 Half-Round Channels for surface Drains 

These shall be of best Indian make glazed chinaware and of specified size. They shall be bedded 

on 75mm thick concrete or cement mortars in the floor and shall be laid to slope. The joints shall 

be finished in white or coloured cement to match. 

3.3.7 Automatic Ball Float Valves 

These shall be best Indian make and available for high pressure quality. The connecting rod from 

valve to copper float shall be brass and shall withstand high pressure encountered on it. The float 

shall be of high pressure encountered on it. The float shall be of copper unless otherwise 

specified. This shall be soldered and brazed to render it leakproof. The material shall be approved 

by the Owner / Consultants prior to installation. 

3.3.8 Measurements 

All the above items shall be measured, paid on number basis. Rates of these items shall include 

providing and fixing with all necessary materials and labour cost as per specifications. 

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES 

All miscellaneous fixtures such as robe hooks, soap trays, shelves, tumbler and tooth brush holder 

shall be as specified and work shall cover supply & fixing of the same with approved methods. 

3.4.1 Manholes 

These shall be constructed as per the specifications detailed under "Construction of Drainage & 

Sewers". 

3.4.2 Inspection Chambers 

The Inspection Chambers shall generally be of approximately 900mm x 600mm inside clear size 

and shall consist of the following : 

a) Necessary Excavation, refilling for the construction of the chamber.

JACOBS 





b) Bed concrete PCC 1:2:4, 150mm thick with 150mm offsets on all sides beyond the 

Brickwall. 

c) Brick Masonry 230 thick all round upto maximum depth of 1.20 metres in cement mortar 

1:6. 

d) 20mm thick plaster in cement mortar 1:4 on inside (with water proofing compound) and 

outside and other exposed surfaces of the chamber, plaster shall be rendered smooth by 

cement floating of 2mm thick, finish smooth by trowell. 

e) Cast Iron heavy duty Manhole cover and frame suitable to the size of the chamber. The 

cover shall be painted in 2 coats of bitumastic anti-corrosive paint. 

f) Concrete screed benching to suit the pipe size and the benching shall be finished smooth. 

h) All necessary work required for satisfactory working of the same. 

i) PCC 1:2:4 coping, 100mm thick on the top of the chamber to house the C.I. cover frame. 

(Dimensions to suit the brickwork). 

3.4.3 Valve Chambers 

Valve Chambers shall be of the inside clear size as required and the construction shall be similar 

to that for Inspection Chambers except for benching for the drainpipes. AMS locking arrangement 

shall be provided in addition to the Cast Iron Cover. 

3.4.4 Gully Trap Chambers 

The Gully Trap Chambers shall consist of brick masonry chambers suitable for the specified size 

of the Gully Traps. The traps shall be glazed stoneware of approved make. 

Construction of Gully Trap Chambers shall consist of the following : 

a) Excavation and refilling after construction of chamber. 

b) 1:2:4 PCC bed concrete required for embedding the Trap. 

c) 230mm thick Brick Masonry in C.M. 1:6. 

d) 20mm thick W.P plaster from inside and smooth from outside in C.M. 1:6 trowell smooth 

by cement floating on all surfaces. 

e) PCC 1:2:4 coping 100mm thick for having cast iron cover frame. (Dimensions shall suit 

the brickwork). 

f) Cast iron frame and cover size fixed in coping & painted in 3 coats of anti-corrosive 

bitumastic paint. 

g) All the work necessary for satisfactory working of the same.

JACOBS 



Revision: 0 

3.4.5 Cast Iron Covers 


The Cast Iron cover for manholes, Inspection Chambers, Valve Chambers, Gully Traps, Pits shall 

be of the size & duty as specified in the Material Schedule. The Cast Iron cover shall conform to 

IS 1726. The rate shall include painting with three coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint. 

3.4.6 G.I. Pipe Work 

The galvanised pipework shall include cutting to required lengths, threading, jointing, fixing, 

testing, and commissioning the water lines. Any leakages found during testing, or after 

commissioning the lines shall be removed. The pipes when fixed to walls shall be fixed with 

wooden packing and G.I. clamps and screws. They shall be kept at least 12mm away from the 

walls. The piping as done shall be tested for water pressure of 10Kg / Sqm, maintained for 12 

hours. The measurement of the pipings shall be done along the longitudinal axis of the pipeline. 

The rate of the pipeline shall include the following items : 

- providing pipe & specials other materials as required. 

- cutting to required lengths, threading, jointing, fixing, testing & commissioning the line as 

required. 

- including all Tees, Bends, Couplings, Unions and all other accessories. 

- providing wooden battens, clamps, screws, etc. 

3.4.7 Cast Iron Pipe Work 

The soil waste, vent and anti-siphonage pipes & specials shall be of approved quality & make and 

as specified above. When underground pipes shall be kept on firm soil & trenches it shall be 

backfilled carefully to avoid damages to pipes, when exposed vertically, they shall be fixed by 

means of wooden packing and M.S. clamps. The rate of measurement shall include the following: 

a) Measurement shall be based on the actual longitudinal length. 

b) Provision of specials and all other materials required for installation. 

c) Cutting to required lengths, jointing with spun yarn and lead caulking, testing & removal of 

leakages. 

d) Any auxiliary works such as making openings, holes in walls, floors and making good the 

same to match. 

e) The pipe when exposed shall be fixed to walls by 50mm thick wooden packing, M.S. 

clamps and screws. 

Note: In case of underground pipes, excavation and back filling shall be measured separately. 

3.4.8 Stoneware Pipework 

This shall conform to specifications described under "Construction of Drainage Sewers". 

3.5 MEASUREMENTS & RATES

JACOBS 


Page : 10 OF 10 



In addition to the normal Scope of Work (i.e. supply of materials and labour including auxiliary 

works), and the various items of works specified in the preceding paragraph, the rates shall 

include the following : 

a) Excavation shall be measured in cubic meters, wherever it is so specifically mentioned 

and not included in items of work described under the preceding paragraphs. 

b) Rate of plain cement concrete shall include providing all the materials, mixing, laying, 

compacting, necessary formwork, curing and finishing. 

c) Rates of RCC above shall include provision of all materials, mixing, laying, compacting, 

necessary formwork, curing and reinforcement as specified above. 

d) Brickwork shall be measured in cubic meters wherever so specified in schedule of 

materials and if not included in the items of work mentioned in the preceding paragraph. 

Rate shall include raking of joints for plaster also. 

e) Plaster shall be measured in square meters wherever so specified in the schedule of 

materials and if not included in the lieu of work, mentioned in preceding paragraphs. The 

rates shall include curing, scaffolding. 

f) The installation of sanitary units such as European or Indian type W.C. wash basins 

mentioned under the sanitary fixtures shall be measured on individual Number Basis, and 

shall include all the various items of work mentioned under the relevant paragraph. 

g) Manhole & Inspection Chambers, Gully Trap Chambers shall be measured on Individual 

Number Basis for various depths, and Rates shall include all the various operations 

described above. 

h) Rates are included for giving satisfactory testing for the function of the system. 

i) Back-filling or making surfaces good after testing is over shall be covered in rate. 

j) Connection with the existing drain, including cutting hole in manhole, jointing and making it 

good after joint is done, shall also be covered in rates.

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED 

MUMBAI REFINERY 


SRR/OPFR & LOBS SUBSTATION ELECTRICAL FACILITIES 

TITLE: JOB SPECIFICATION - ELECTRICAL 

DOCUMENT NO: 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 

Rev No. Issue Date Pages Rev Description Prepared By 

Checked By 

Sheet 1 of 10 

Approved By 

0 11-9-2007 9 Issued for comments APM VJJ VDV 

1 9-10-2007 9 Issued for Tender RRB VJJ VDV

Jacobs 

HPCL, MUMBAI JOB SPECIFICATION – ELECTRICAL 

18-3188 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 Page 2 of 10 

1.0 SCOPE 

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 

3.0 SITE CONDITIONS 

4.0 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT 


6.0 DRAWINGS 

7.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY 

8.0 MISCELLNNEOUS REQUIREMENT 

9.0 EXTRA ITEMS 

10.0 DAYWORK RATES 


11.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE MATERIAL TO BE SUPPLIED BY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

CONTRACT. 

12.0 MAKE OF COMPONENTS 

ANNEXURE-I SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS - SRR/OPFR Building 

ANNEXURE-II SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS - LOBS S/S Building 

ANNEXURE-III LIST OF ATTACHED STANDARD DRAWINGS

Jacobs 

JOB SPECIFICATION - ELECTRICAL HPCL, MUMBAI 

18 - 3188 18-3188-99-01-E 02-0103-A4 Page 3 of 10 

1.0 SCOPE: 

This specification covers supply at site, installation, site fabrication, testing and commissioning of 

electrical items in Satilite Rack Room / Operator Field Room (SRR/OPFR) building and LOBS 

substation building as per Annexure-I and II attached and the scope requirements given in this 

document. 

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION: 

1 Client - M/s. Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd 

2 Plant - LOBS Plant 

3 Location - Mahul, Mumbai 

3.0 SITE CONDITIONS: 

Maximum Air Temperature : 40 o C and 87 % relative humidity 

Minimum Air Temperature : 12 o C and 47% relative humidity 

Design temperature for Electrical 

Equipment 

: 45 o C 

General Climate : Humid, Corrosive tropical 

atmosphere, laden chemical 

fumes 

4.00 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT: 

M/s. HPCL is putting up a lube Oil Base Stocks (LOBS) upgradation plant in their existing refinery 

complex at Mahul, Mumbai. As part of this project, new buildings namely SRR/OPFR building and 

LOBS substation building are to be constructed to locate various equipments/facilities connected 

with this project. This document covers only the electrical requirements connected with 

SRR/OPFR building and LOBS substation building. Other requirements are covered elsewhere in 

the tender document. 

5.0 SCOPE OF WORK: 

The supply and installation of materials, related consumables, testing, commissioning of 

equipment/System as listed in Annexure I and II “Schedule of Quantities". Contractor’s scope of 

supply shall include materials required to complete the entire work mentioned in this specification, 

even if they are not specifically brought out in the "Schedule of Quantities”. 

The supply and laying of incoming power supply cables to SRR/OPFR building for lighting and 

power will be done by others. The interface point for scope for electrical cabling/works for 

SRR/OPFR building will be the termination point of the incoming power supply cable on power 

panels and lighting panels. Termination of incoming power cables on power panels and lighting 

panels and the downstream electrical equipments/works of SRR/OPFR will be generally under this 

contract scope, except for supply & installation of HVAC equipment and UPS and associated UPS 

batteries.

Jacobs 


18-3188 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 Page 4 of 10 

The scope of work under electrical for LOBS Substation building is mainly limited to lightning 

protection of S/S building and providing earthing, lighting & cable tray support system inserts 

required to be embedded inside concrete slabs/beams/coloumns.and also installation of inserts 

required in floor slabs for installation of various electrical switchgears and panels. 

Broadly the electrical work associated with SRR/OPFR building and LOBS substation 

building shall include the following major works/Materials. 

5.01 Procurement, Shop testing / Inspection, Supply/Delivery at site, Site testing, Installation and 

commissioning of the following major equipment/Materials/Systems. 

a. Power panel for SRR/OPFR building for 3-phase welding receptacles/load and power panel 

for 6/16A power receptacles for SRR/OPFR building. 

b. Lighting panel (LP), Emergency lighting panel (ELP), and Critical DC lighting panel for 

SRR/OPFR building. 

c. Power cable, Copper, PVC insulated, armoured for cabling between Power panel and 

welding receptacle and from lighting panel for building periphery lighting. 

d. Lighting fittings including lamps, Conduits, switches and wires, Switched Socket outlets 

(Industrial & commercial/decorative), Welding socket outlets with switch for indoor lighting 

and Power installation in SRR/OPFR building. 

e. Lightning protection finials, down conductor and associated earth pits for SRR/OPFR and 

LOBS Substation buildings. 

f. Earthing conductors buried in ground/embedded in concrete, cleated along walls/slabs, 

equipment earthing bus, earth pits etc. for SRR/OPFR building. 

g. Earthing conductors required to be embedded in concrete during building construction for 

LOBS substation building. 

h. Earthing of building metallic structures, reinforcement in SRR/OPFR building and LOBS 

substation buildings. 

i. Structural steel required for carrying out the work mentioned in this specification. 

j. Coordination with other contractors/Owner/PMC for interface activities. 

Contractor shall obtain approval for design of brackets/frames etc, for mounting various electrical 

equipment from Jacobs Engg / HPCL / site engineer - in charge before proceeding with the 

fabrication work. Installation of all these equipment / panels, Lighting Fixtures etc. shall be 

inclusive of all required hardware, anchor fasteners / studs, base plates etc. without any extra 

cost. 

5.02 Installation of light fittings and 6/16A switch socket outlets (for SRR/OPFR Building): 

Scope shall include supply of all mounting hardware, conduits / conduit junction boxes, circuit 

junction boxes, flexible copper wires / cables and other accessories, so as to have complete 

installation of light fittings. Fixing of lamps and control gearbox. Structural steel, supply of 

aluminium clamp / GI is in scope of contractor. Clamping shall be done at every 1-meter interval.

Jacobs 


18 - 3188 18-3188-99-01-E 02-0103-A4 Page 5 of 10 

Contractor shall carry procurement and installation as per Standard specification 3188-ESS 

026: Electrical installation Clause no 14. The wiring shall be done using concealed PVC conduit 

below false ceiling and surface PVC conduit above false ceiling. In areas where false ceiling is not 

applicable, wiring shall be done using surface PVC conduiting or concealed PVC conduits as 

indicated in relevant drawings to be furnished later . Copper conductor, armoured cables shall be 

used for building periphery lighting and shall be automatically controlled by timer. 

5.03 Lighting fixture circuit distribution in SRR/OPFR building: 

In SRR/OPFR building three (3) types/sets of lighting shall be provided namely (1) Normal 

Lighting (2) Emergency Lighting (3) Critical DC Lighting. Normal lighting and Emergency lighting 

fixture shall be on 240V AC system, while critical DC Lights shall be on 110V DC fed from LOBS 

substation building. Three separate lighting panels shall be provided (1) One for normal AC 

lighting, (2) One for emergency AC lighting and (3) One for Critical DC lighting. The fixture 

connected to normal AC supply, Emergency AC supply and DC critical lighting supply will be 

grouped separately and wired to respective lighting panels. The power supply cables for normal 

AC lighting, emergency AC lighting and DC critical lighting up to the SRR/OPFR building will be 

supplied and installed by others. Local routing of these cables within SRR/OPFR building and 

termination on to the lighting panels will be in contractor scope. Approximately 15 to 20% of total 

AC lighting will be an AC emergency supply. The following areas of SRR/OPFR building will 

require AC emergency lighting (Minimum one fixture) 

a) SRR for DCS cabinet room 

b) Engineering Station room 

c) Passages 

d) UPS room 

e) Battery room 

f) Shift Manager room 

g) Discussion room 

h) Dining hall 

i) Gents Change room 

j) Ladies Change room 

k) Air lock/Anti blast room 

The following areas will require 110 V DC critical lighting using incandescent lamp suitable for 

110V DC 

a) SRR for DCS cabinet room 

b) Engineering station room 

c) Passages 

d) UPS room 

e) Battery room 

5.04 All equipment and materials to be supplied by the contractor shall be new, of good quality and 

make as mentioned in cl.12 of this enquiry specification. Contractor shall transport it to the site at 

no extra cost. For material lifting, shifting etc. crane / forklift if required, shall be in contractor’s 

scope.

Jacobs 


18-3188 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 Page 6 of 10 

5.05 All minor civil work like sealing of cable tray cut outs/ opening after laying the cable, any breakage 

of walls or masonry made during installation, etc. shall be made good by him after completion of 

his specified work. Above work shall be a part of installation work and shall not be paid for 

separately. Cement, sand, brick, steel required for all such civil work shall be supplied by 

contractor. 

5.06 Structural steel supplied by contractor for installing lighting panels, exhaust fans etc. shall be 

provided with suitable paint as per the painting specifications furnished elsewhere. Paint shade 

shall be light gray or as per specification. The surface shall be hard wire brushed, before painting. 

After gas cutting / welding of structural steel sharp edges shall be smoothened by grinding before 

applying primer. 

5.07 Excavation and Back filling: 

Excavation for laying underground cable / Earthing strip, Earthing pits etc shall be carried out as 

per required depth as specified in relevant Indian standard or as per drawing furnished to 

Contractor. After laying of cable / earthing strip, same trench shall be back filled by the contractor. 

Debris left out shall be removed from the site by the contractor without any additional cost to the 

client. 

5.08 The contractor shall carry out the procurement and installation of various applicable items as per 

the standard specifications 3188-ESS 026: Electrical Installation (as applicable to the 

items/materials/systems included in contractor scope). The various general requirement indicated 

in standard specification 3188-ESS026 will also be applicable to this contract. 

6.0 DRAWINGS 

The entire installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings attached along 

with this enquiry and other drawings to be issued to the contractor during project execution stage. 

These drawings may undergo revisions during detail engineering stage. Contractor shall take care 

of these changes as directed by engineer in charge. In case of any other drawings to be prepared 

by the installation contractor, the same shall be approved by consultant / client. 

7.00 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY: 

The schedule of quantities furnished herewith as Annexure –1 are approximate and may vary 

during detail engineering stage. It is to be noted that, the quantities required to complete the entire 

installation is the responsibility of the Installation Contractor. Contractor shall keep rates "Firm" till 

the execution of entire contract. It shall be noted that contractor will be paid against supply & 

installation of only those items / quantities which are supplied, installed & commissioned by him at 

site. The estimated contract value shall be subject to variation of + / - 15 % irrespective of 

variation in individual items. 

8.00 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS: 

8.01 The contractor shall possess a valid contractor's license for the state of Maharashtra and shall 

ensure its validity during the duration of the entire contract. The contractor shall furnish authentic 

copies of certificates to the owner / for himself / his workmen before commencement of work.

Jacobs 


18 - 3188 18-3188-99-01-E 02-0103-A4 Page 7 of 10 

8.02 Joint Measurement Report (JMR) / Test Reports / Reconciliation Statement: 

Contractor shall submit the JMR / Test reports / Reconciliation statement in clean and typed 

formats (preferably computer prints) only. The necessary formats of JMR and Reconciliation 

statement shall be discussed and got approved from the site engineer / Supervisor by the 

contractor. Hand written JMR and reconciliation statements will not be certified by the site 

engineer / Supervisor. 

9.00 EXTRA ITEMS: 

Extra items of work pertaining to the electrical installation may have to be carried out by the 

contractor wherever required. The contractor shall submit invoices to the owner covering unit 

rates or lump-sum price for such extra items. Such invoices shall be complete with supporting 

documentation and satisfactory evidence as required including rate analysis. 

10.00 DAYWORK RATES: 

The contractor may have to furnish service of his supervisory or labour personnel to the owner for 

carrying out minor works, which are not within the scope of contract. The owner will request for 

these services such that the installation program of the contractor is not affected. The categories 

of personnel shall be as specified in the attached `schedule of quantities'. 

11.00 SPECIFICATIONS OF MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR: 

11.1 INDUSTRIAL LIGHTING FITTINGS: 

All luminaries shall be supplied along with lamps, however lamps shall be supplied loose. 

The lamp shall be colour rendered to give warm colour impression. The lamp shall have a long life 

and shall be energy efficient. Fluorescent lamps shall have high lumens output (36W lamps shall 

have Lumens output of min. 3200 lumens) 

11.2 WELDING SOCKET OUTLETS WITH SWITCH (INDUSTRIAL TYPE) 

63A, 415 V, TPN+E interlocked type metal clad socket outlet with 4 pole ELMCB shall be mounted 

in FRP / LM6 epoxy painted enclosure of the suitable thickness. The requirements shall be: - 

11.3 GI PIPES : 

a) Hinged cover with fixing screws and complete with neoprene gaskets. 

b) 2-nos. external and 2 nos. internal earth terminals. 

c) Undrilled gland plates to be provided on top and bottom of the enclosure. 

d) Nos. stud type terminals suitable for termination of 2 # 4C x 16 mm 2 YWY cables (1 No. 

Incomer and 1 No. Outgoing). 

GI pipes used for installation of various lighting fixtures, underground cabling, taking lighting cable 

etc. shall be of heavy duty, class B type having dia 40 NB and 65 NB.

Jacobs 


18-3188 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 Page 8 of 10 

11.4 JUNCTION BOXES (JB) : 

Junction box shall be round, large, 110 mm. dia. minimum, cast Aluminum LM6 construction with 

external fixing lugs. These shall be dust & damp proof. Joint surfaces shall be machined and 

neoprene gaskets shall be provided. Terminal blocks shall be 6 way Elmex or equivalent strip type 

terminals suitable for terminating 2 Nos. 2.5 mm 2 Cu conductor with sufficient clearances. 

Terminals shall be suitable for 15A rating. Junction box shall have 4 entries of 19 mm dia. each. 

Earth terminals; 2 nos. external & 1 no. internal, complete with plain / spring washers, nuts etc. 

shall be provided. The junction boxes shall be epoxy painted and they shall be provided with flat 

covers of min. 3mm thickness. Unused cable entry of the junction box shall be blocked by using 

cast AL stopping plug. 

11.5 EARTHING MATERIAL: 

Contractor shall supply all earthing materials as shown in the Earthing Layout drawings and 

miscellaneous details drawings (refer Annexure- III) attached along with this specification. The GI 

strips to be supplied by the installation contractor shall be of hot dip galvanized with minimum of 

85-micron thickness. 

All the connection below and above ground shall be welded type (except at equipment and earth 

bus end, where it shall be bolted) with overlap of minimum twice the width of strip shall be 

maintained between the two earth strips. All welding joints shall be painted with epoxy paint 

covered with hessian tape, before burying it underground. 

11.6 CABLE GLANDS: 

All cable glands (industrial and flame proof type) shall be double compression type made from 

nickel plate brass. All glands shall be complete with shrouds and shall be suitable for termination 

of Aluminium / Copper conductor, PVC insulated armoured cables with seals on outer and inner 

sheaths, cone grip type, armour clamp washer and check-nut. 

11.7 CABLE LUGS: 

Cable lugs shall be heavy-duty tinned copper, crimping type suitable for LV cables as mentioned 

in attached schedule of quantity. Cable lugs for sizes above 70 Sq mm and above shall be 

supplied with extra barrel length. Corrosion resistant inhibiting compound shall be used before 

crimping the lugs. 

11.8 ENCLOSURE FOR LIGHTING SWITCHES AND SOCKET OUTLET: 

Enclosure shall be made of 2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel, epoxy painted and shall be dust & 

vermin proof, protection class IP - 54. Enclosure shall have external fixing lugs with 2 nos. 

external & 1 nos. internal earthing terminals. 

Sufficient clearance shall be maintained for termination / working purpose. Contractor shall obtain 

approval of sample for make, colour & testing.

Jacobs 


18 - 3188 18-3188-99-01-E 02-0103-A4 Page 9 of 10 

11.9 CONVENIENT SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS (Commercial type): 

Convenient switched socket outlets shall be sheet steel enclosed weatherproof type, 240 V, 

6+16A, single phase (P+N+E) with SPN MCB and plug. The enclosure should be fabricated from 

2.0 mm thick sheet steel with epoxy paint. The enclosure should be provided with 2 nos. of cable 

entries at the bottom and two external & one internal earthing facility. The socket should be 

provided with cover along with chain. The socket outlets shall be suitable for both Panel mounting, 

wall mounting and recessed wall mounting applications. 

11.10 Power Panel & Lighting panels- (Normal And Emergency AC lighting and for Critical DC 

lighting): 

Panel Enclosure shall be made of 2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel, epoxy painted and shall be dust 

& vermin proof, protection class IP–4X. Enclosure shall have external fixing lugs with 2 nos. 

external & 1 nos. internal earthing terminals. 

Sufficient clearance shall be maintained for termination / working purpose. Contractor shall obtain 

approval of sample for make, colour & testing. 

The single line diagram of the lighting Distribution boards shall be as per attached standard 

drawing 18-3188-99-00-E.01-0113-A4.

Jacobs 


18-3188 18-3188-99-00-E 02-0103-A4 Page 10 of 10 

12.00 MAKE OF COMPONENTS: 

Contractor to supply all the items/ material of the make mentioned below only. Deviation on 

makes of components (if any) shall clearly be mentioned in the offer. Deviation on makes of 

component / material will not be accepted after award of contract. 

Industrial / Commercial 

lighting Fittings 

: Crompton Greaves / Bajaj / Philips / Wipro 

/ Stahl 

Junction Box.(Non FLP) : Approved standard make 

Metal Clad Switch Fuse Unit : Siemens / L&T 

Industrial Switched socket : Legrand / Havels 

Commercial switched socket : Legrand / Indokopp / Hazels 

Commercial switches. : Legrand / MK / Crabtree 

Flexible wires : Finolex / Nicco / RPG 

Welding socket outlets 

: CGL/ BCH / Best & Crompton 

GI Conduits : BEC / Precision 

Cables : RPG /Fort Gloster / Nicco 

G.I. earthing strips : Approved standard make 

GI. Pipe Electrodes : Approved standard make 

Cable Glands : Reputed Approved make 

Terminals : Connectwell/ Elmex / Phoenix / Wago 

Lighting Panels/Power Panels : Legrand / Havels 

Exhaust Fans : GEC / Almonard / Crompton Greaves / 

ABB

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR 

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 

DOCUMENT NO: 3188- ESS-26 


By 

Checked 

By 

Page 1 of 33 

Approved 

0 05.03.2007 33 Issued for FEED PPP SR SR 

By

Jacobs 

Date: 5 th March, 2007 DOCUMENT NO: 3188-ESS-26 

Page 2 of 33 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR 

Revision No.: 0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 


1.0 GENERAL 3 

2.0 DESIGN 3 

3.0 EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS 5 

4.0 CIVIL WORK 7 

5.0 OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION 8 

6.0 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS 8 

7.0 INSTALLATION OF EHV, HV & MV SWITCHGEAR & MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES9 

8.0 INSTALLATION OF BUSDUCT 10 

9.0 INSTALLATION OF BATTERIES 10 

10.0 INSTALLATION OF NEUTRAL EARTHING RESISTOR 10 

11.0 INSTALLATION OF POWER & LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD 10 

12.0 MOTORS 11 

13.0 CABLE INSTALLATION 11 

14.0 LIGHTING INSTALLATION 15 

15.0 EARTHING & LIGHTNING PROTECTION 20 

16.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 21 

17.0 STEEL WORK 22 

18.0 INSPECTION, TESTS & COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQPT. 22 

AND INSTALLATION 

19.0 INSTRUMENT & TOOLS 26 

20.0 LABOUR, SUPERVISION, COORDINATION & PROGRESS, LICENCE, 27 

STATUTORY APPROVAL 

21.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALITY CONTROL 27 

22.0 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION 28 

23.0 ATTACHMENTS / APPENDICES : 28 

23.1 APPENDIX I - LIST OF CODES, STANDARDS & STATUTORY 28 

REGULATIONS 

23.2 APPENDIX II 30

Jacobs 

DOCUMENT NO: 3188-ESS-26 Date: 5 th March, 2007 

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR Page 3 of 33 

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Revision No.: 0 

1.0 GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE 

This specification covers the technical requirements for equipment, materials and 

installation methods, testing and commissioning of electrical system which will generally 

include the following: 

i) E.H.V & H.V. Outdoor Switchyards 

ii) Power & distribution Transformers 

iii) E.H.V., H.V. & M.V. Switchgear 

iv) Motor Control Centres 

v) Power distribution Boards/Power Control Centres 

vi) Lighting Installation, including Lighting Distribution Boards, Lighting Fittings & 

Socket Outlets. 

vii) Wiring for Power, Control, Lighting & Instrumentation 

viii) Earthing & bonding of Electrical Equipment, Anti-static Earthing & Lightning 

Protection 

ix) Emergency Power Generating Equipment 

x) Batteries & Associated Equipment. 

xi) Communication Systems 

xii) Fire Alarm System 

1.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND STATUTORY REGULATIONS 

Appendix I to this Specification lists the codes, standards and statutory regulations to be 

used. This list is not exhaustive and in general, all equipment materials as well as 

design and construction shall be in accordance with the latest issues of Indian and/or 

Relevant Standards currently in force. 

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the other contract Documents that will 

include General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract. 

2.0 DESIGN 

2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 

Equipment of a major or specific nature, such as Transformers, Switchgear, Motor 

Control Centres, Motors, Starting & Control Gear, Generators, Batteries, Rectifiers, 

communication Equipment, Fire & Plant Alarm System etc. shall be provided by the 

Contractor. Equipments supplied by the Contractor shall conform to the 

Purchaser's/Owner's 'Particular Specifications' for such equipment. These specifications 

may also be detailed in the Contract Documents. Materials not specifically described 

shall be of the best quality, complying with applicable codes, standards or current 

engineering practice. Selection of equipment and materials shall also be based on the 

technical details, performance figures and recommendations given by the manufacturer 

and site condition.

Jacobs 




2.2 ALTERNATIVE EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS OR METHODS 

Where the Contractor wishes to use alternative equipment, materials or methods to 

those specified, the approval of the Purchaser/PMC shall be sought at the time of 

tendering, and shall not be assumed unless specifically confirmed by the 

Purchaser/PMC, in writing. 

2.3 INSTALLATION DOCUMENTS 

The Contractor shall carry out, all electrical installation design including the following: 

i) Single Line Diagram for Power and Lighting distribution, Earthing System, 

Communication System. 

ii) Schematic & Control wiring Diagrams for Circuit Breakers, Motor Control and 

other Electrical Controls, including Fire Alarm and Plant Alarm Systems. 

iii) Location of items of electrical equipment, including Switchgears, Transformers, 

Generating Set(s), Control Batteries, Motor Control Centres, Power & Lighting 

Distribution Boards, Motors, Control Stations, Lighting Fittings, Socket Outlets, 

Switches, Instruments, Instrument/Control panels, Communication Fire & Plant 

Alarm Systems, etc. 

iv) Main routes for distribution of power, control, lighting and instrumentation 

cabling, earthing system, with size and construction details, of associated 

trenches, ducts, overhead cable trays, floor / wall cut-outs etc. 

v) Cable Schedule, giving type and sizes of cables, respective termination points, 

approximate route length, etc. for all power, control and instrument cables and 

for main lighting cables. 

vi) Sub-circuiting of distribution boards for power, lighting, socket outlet supplies, 

process instrumentation and control. 

vii) Layouts of earthing system showing earth electrodes, main earth loops or 

earthing system, details of construction and earth connections to equipment, for 

both equipment and static earthing systems. 

viii) Layout and constructional details for lightning protection system, showing 

protected zones. 

ix) The classification and extent of hazardous areas. 

x) Typical installation details for Power, Lighting and earthing. 

xi) Material take-off Schedule (Bill of Materials). 

xii) Basis of Design & Design Calculations. 

The contractor shall carry out design in accordance with Purchaser's Design Standards 

Listed in Appendix 1. Installation design other than described above shall be in 

accordance with this specification and/or as detailed in the Project Documents. Work 

not expressly described shall be in accordance with applicable Codes or Standards 

detailed in Appendix 1. 

2.4 APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS 

2.4.1 All design calculations & drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted to the 

Engineer / Purchaser / PMC for comments / approval, before they are finalised. The 

number of copies to be furnished by the Contractor shall be as indicated in the Contract 

Documents.

Jacobs 




2.4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals of drawings from Statutory 

Authorities or Electrical Power Supply Authority as required, when such drawings are in 

his scope of work and required to be prepared by him. 

3.0 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 

3.1 GENERAL 

3.1.1 All equipment and materials supplied by the Contractor shall be suitable in all respects for 

the type of environment in which these are to be used. Nature of special conditions of 

environment, and the extent of areas affected are specified elsewhere. 

3.1.2 All equipment shall be of robust construction. The enclosures of equipment installed 

indoors shall be dust & damp proof. Equipments installed outdoors shall have weather 

proof enclosures. 

However, dust & damp proof equipment with a weather protecting canopy may be 

accepted in special cases, subject to the approval of the Purchaser / Consultant's 

Engineer. 

3.1.3 For equipment installed outdoors, particular attention should be paid to the following: 

i) Fixing holes shall not be provided through the enclosure or casing of any 

component. External mounting lugs with fixing holes shall be provided. 

ii) Removable covers and cable entries at the top of the equipment shall be avoided as 

far as possible. Where this is not practicable, suitable means (which 

shall be to the approval of the Purchaser / Consultant's Engineer) shall be adopted 

to prevent the ingress of water through the covers or cable entries. 

iii) Gaskets shall be secured to the main parts of the enclosure, in such a way, that 

they need not be detached during normal installation & maintenance. Gasket 

material shall be non-deteriorating and shall not deform or set with age. Where 

hinged doors are provided, the door fastners shall be designed to ensure uniform 

pressure at all points on the gasket. When the door is closed. 

3.1.4 Equipment used in hazardous areas shall be certified by a competent authority as suitable 

for use in such areas. The enclosures and other requirements shall be in accordance with 

the standards & codes listed in Appendix 1. 

3.1.5 All equipment & materials supplied by the contractor shall be to the approval of the 

Purchaser / Consultant's Engineer regarding its quality, conformity with specifications and 

standards and suitability for site conditions. 

3.1.6 The Contractor shall furnish required number of copies of test certificates from 

manufacturers or statutory authorities for major equipment as well as equipment suitable 

for hazardous areas, supplied by him. 

3.2 CABLE AND CONDUIT ENTRIES 

Tapped entries shall be provided on equipments, for conduits and cables 

If tapped entries cannot be provided on the enclosure, conduit or cable glands terminated 

at the enclosure shall be effectively bonded to the same by means of an earthing or 

bonding washer (e.g. serrated star washer or equal). 

3.3 EARTHING TERMINALS / EARTH BUS 

All metal work of the enclosures and non-current carrying metallic parts of the equipment 

shall be effectively bonded to one another and connected to two external earth terminals 

provided on the enclosure. In equipments, such as Motor Control Centres or Switchboards 

on earth bus running along the entire length of the board should be provided in 

place of earth terminals, to which the bonding of internal components shall be carried out,

Jacobs 




the earth bus in turn shall be connected to the main earthing system by 2 separate and 

distinct connections. 

3.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR 

The equipment and materials being supplied by the Contractor will be detailed in the 

Project Documents. All other equipment and materials required for the complete electrical 

installation shall be supplied by the Contractor. 

3.5 CABLES 

3.5.1 The types of cables used in the installations shall generally be as given below. If any other 

special types of cables are required to be used, details of the types will be given 

elsewhere. 

3.5.1a Paper insulated, lead or lead alloy sheathed armoured or unarmoured, jute served or PVC 

sheathed cables of 32, 22 or 11 KV grades, with aluminium conductors. 

3.5.1b XLPE insulated screened or unscreened armoured or unarmoured, PVC sheathed cables 

of 3.3 KV, 6.6 KV, 11KV, 22KV, 33KV grade with aluminium conductor. 

3.5.1c PVC insulated with PVC / rubber inner sheath armoured unarmoured and with overall 

PVC sheath with aluminium or copper conductors. 

3.5.1d PVC insulated screened or unscreened, armoured or unarmoured PVC outer sheathed 

cables of 3.3KV, 6.6KV grade with aluminium conductor. 

3.5.1e Muticore flexible cables, with stranded copper conductors, rubber / PVC insulated, with or 

without pliable armour and with an overall PVC / Rubber Sheath. 

3.5.1f Single core PVC insulated cables with copper / aluminium conductors. 

3.5.1g Mineral insulated aluminium conductor cables. Type designation: ALPYRO. 

3.5.1h Telephone & communication Cables - Twisted pairs, armoured or unarmoured shielded 

cables or coaxial cables. 

3.5.1I Special cables - Details of which will be given in specific cases. 

3.5.2 Minimum Sizes of Conductors. 

No cable having copper conductors of less than 1.5 mm² or aluminium conductors of less 

than 35 mm² shall be used, except special types of cable specifically detailed elsewhere. 

3.5.3. CABLE TERMINATIONS AND CABLE JOINTS 

3.5.3.1 HV XLPE and PVC armoured cables, shall be terminated or jointed by means of cold 

setting epoxy based cast resin jointing system or heat shrinkable or cold setting kit. the 

ingredients used shall be of best quality, which will give the joint, excellent mechanical 

and electrical properties, resistance to aging & tropical climatic conditions. Plastic moulds 

shall be used for casting the joints. 

3.5.3.2 Heavy duty PVC cables, up to 1.1 KV grade (armoured & unarmoured) shall be 

terminated by means of a compression type cable gland. In hazardous areas or for 

outdoor installation, cable glands with two seals, one on outer sheath and one on the 

inner sheath, shall be used. In safe and indoor areas, cable glands, with only one seal on 

outer sheath may be used. In case of glands for armoured cables, armour earthing cone 

or washers shall be incorporated in the gland. 

3.5.3.3 Universal type cable glands as per cable manufacturer's design shall be used for Mineral 

insulated Cables. 

3.5.3.4 Glands used in Division 1 hazardous areas shall be of approved flameproof type.

Jacobs 




3.6 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT ACCESSORIES 

Heavy gauge, screwed, rigid steel / PVC conduits shall comply with IS 9537. Steel 

conduit may be black enamelled or galvanised as specified elsewhere. PVC conduit 

may be black or grey as specified elsewhere. 

All conduit fittings and accessories shall be of cast iron / malleable iron / PVC, provided 

with screwed entries, and of robust construction. Only large round junction boxes (min. 

dia. 80mm) shall be used in the installation. Large round and adaptable rectangular 

junction boxes, shall have external fixing lugs. Two external and internal terminals 

complete with hardware shall be provided on the steel junction boxes. Terminal blocks 

of adequate rating & number shall be provided in the junction boxes for looping. 

Inspection type fittings such as bends, elbows and tees shall not be used, unless 

specifically called for or approved by the Engineer. 

All conduits and accessories shall be black enamelled or galvanised or PVC as 

specified elsewhere. 

3.7 STRUCTURAL STEEL 

All structural steel such as channels, angles, flats, plates, etc. used in the installation 

shall be new and of best quality, conforming to relevant Indian Standards. 

3.8 CARE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 

3.8.1 Storage and Care Prior to Erection 

The contractor shall be entirely responsible for the safe storage and care of equipment 

and materials he supplies for the contract. 

Equipment and materials supplied by the Contractor will be held in the Contractor’s 

stores. 

During the storage period the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to submit reports 

upon the condition of such equipment or materials, to carry out maintenance on 

equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or to attend to such points as 

giving motors a part turn to alter the position of bearings and insulation resistance tests 

on motor winding. 

The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and maintenance of all electrical 

equipment, whether supplied and/or erected by him, after installation is completed and 

until the Certificate of Acceptance of Electrical Installation is signed by the Purchaser. 

The Contractor shall ensure that the proper enclosure of equipment is maintained at all 

times and that access doors or covers are opened only when necessary to work upon 

the equipment. All unused cable or conduit entries shall be effectively sealed. 

4.0 CIVIL WORK 

4.1 GENERAL 

All major Civil work such as foundation for electrical equipment, sub-stations or switch 

room buildings shall be carried out by the Contractor. Minor civil works such as 

grouting of equipment foundation bolts, breaking and remaking of floor walls, etc. shall 

also be carried out by the Contractor. 

Excavation & backfilling of trenches for directly buried cables, earth electrodes, 

installation of street lighting poles (including concrete foundation for poles) shall be in 

Contractor's scope of work. Provisions of Hume pipes for road crossings shall also be 

in the scope of Contractor's work.

Jacobs 




5.0 OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION 

5.1 GENERAL 

The installation work for outdoor switchyards shall generally consist of installation of 

outdoor equipment, such as air-break switches, lightning arresters, circuit breakers, 

current & potential transformers and overhead bus work. Installation of transformers is 

covered by Section 6. 

5.2 STEEL WORK 

All steel work shall be painted in an approved manner as described in Section 13 and 

hardware used may be hot dip galvanised. 

5.3 INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING 

5.3.1 Requirements of Indian Electricity Rules shall be strictly observed. 

5.3.2 Various types of equipment shall be installed in accordance with drawings and / or 

manufacturers instructions and good engineering practice. Particular attention shall be 

paid to lubrication of moving parts & bearings, alignment tightness of all connections 

(mechanical and electrical ) and wiring. 

5.3.3 Overhead bus work shall be of copper or aluminium or A.C.S.R. conductors. Suitable 

terminal clamps or connectors shall be provided, except where these are provided on 

the equipment. Where dissimilar material are joined. The materials of connectors shall 

be suitable for preventing bimetallic corrosion. The connectors shall be vibration-proof 

and their design shall allow thermal expansion of conductors. Alternatively, expansion 

joints shall be used. 

5.3.4 Complete installation shall be tested for its intended satisfactory operation. 

6.0 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS 

6.1 GENERAL 

This section shall apply to the installation of Power and Distribution Transformers. Small 

transformers for special purposes, such as instrument supplies, low voltage supply, etc. 

are excluded. 

6.2 INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING. 

6.2.1 The transformer shall be installed in accordance with IS 10028 - 'CODE OF PRACTICE 

FOR INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE OF TRANSFORMERS'. 

6.2.2 The transformers shall be moved to its location and shall be correctly positioned on its 

base. 

All parts of the transformers, which are supplied loose, such as conservator, radiator 

banks, buchholz relays, dial thermometers, bushings, etc. shall be fitted onto the 

transformer. 

Transformer oil supplied in drums shall be filled into the transformer after duly testing / 

filtering, up to the correct level required. 

6.2.3 In case of large transformers, the tanks may be nitrogen filled. In such cases, the 

correct procedure as per manufacturer's instructions should be followed for oil filling. 

6.2.4 Wiring of devices such as buchholz relay, dial thermometers, etc. shall be carried out up 

to the marshalling box. 

6.2.5 The transformer shall be dried out by one of the methods specified in IS 10028. Drying 

out with centrifugal or vacuum type filters will, however, be preferred. The Contractor 

shall carry out the process of drying out without interruption and shall maintain a sheet

Jacobs 




indicating time, oil temperature and insulation resistance. 

6.2.6 After complete drying out of the transformer, oil samples shall be collected by the 

Contractor and shall be tested for dielectric strength as specified in IS 335 . 

6.2.7 All devices such as buchholz relays, dial type thermometer and their alarm and trip 

contacts shall be checked for satisfactory operations. 

6.2.8 All tests specified in Appendix 'C' of IS 10028 shall be carried out by the Contractor (as 

applicable to the particular installation in consultation with the Engineer). 

7.0 INSTALLATION OF EHV, HV & MV SWITCHGEAR & MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES 

7.1 GENERAL 

This section covers Switchgear & Motor Control Centres of indoor as well as outdoor 

type. The term switchgear used throughout shall include Motor Control Centres also. 

7.2 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 

The Contractor shall carry out a preliminary inspection of the equipment to ensure that 

the switchgear to be installed is in a satisfactory condition. 


The Contractor shall place the switchgear correctly on the bases or foundation prepared 

for the same. If the switchgear consists of a switchboard with number of panels bolted 

together, he will place all sections of the switchboard correctly, align them and bolt the 

sections together to form one continuous switchboard. The switchgear shall then be 

secured to the foundation by means of nuts and bolts or foundation bolts grouted in the 

base. The Contractor shall also make inter-section bus / wiring connections. 

The Contractor shall clean all parts of the switchgear, including HV bushings (with 

carbon tetrachloride), plug & socket contacts, auxiliary switches, etc. Conducting 

petroleum jelly shall be applied to all electrical contact surfaces. 

The Contractor shall lubricate all moving parts of the Circuit Breaker mechanism with 

recommended lubricants, and ensure satisfactory mechanical operation. Alignment of 

draw out type circuit breakers or switches shall be checked, for horizontal and/or 

vertical movements and its correctness shall be ensured. Operation of all mechanical 

interlocks shall also be checked. 

In case of oil circuit breakers, the Contractor shall fill, clean and test transformer oil in 

the circuit breakers, collect oil samples and test the same as per IS 335. 

The Contractor shall generally check all internal wiring of the switchgear for its accuracy 

as per Vendor's wiring diagram. Satisfactory operation of all controls and protection 

circuits, relays, meters & electrical interlocks shall also be checked. Relay settings and 

adjustments, if any, shall also be carried out by the Contractor. 

The Contractor shall test the insulation resistance of main power circuits, bus bars, P.T. 

primary windings, etc. of HV & EHV switchgear with a high voltage megger (minimum 

2,500 volts). The insulation resistance of MV switchgear and motor control centres as 

well as control and auxiliary wiring of HV & EHV switchgear may be tested with a 

500 megger. 

The Contractor may also have to carry out high voltage tests on the switchgear, if 

indicated elsewhere.. 

The Contractor shall also carry out Primary and Secondary injection test and check the 

calibration of relays and meters wherever required.

Jacobs 




8.0 INSTALLATION OF BUSDUCT 

The bus duct as per relevant drawings will be supplied in parts and all the parts shall be 

assembled and the bus bar connections shall be made at site. The insulators in bus ducts 

shall be inspected for any possible damage during transit and the defective ones shall be 

replaced. The insulators shall be cleaned. Contact surface of bus bars, bus bar bolts and 

nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned. Petroleum jelly shall then be applied and bolted 

connection made. The bus duct enclosure shall be checked for earth continuity and then 

earthed at two places. The bus duct shall be properly supported between switchgear and 

transformer. The opening in the wall where the bus duct enters the switchgear room shall 

be completely sealed to avoid rain water entry. Expansion joints, flexible connections etc. 

shall be properly connected. The bus duct levelling shall be checked with spirit level and 

pendulum weight. 

9.0 INSTALLATION OF BATTERIES 

Battery shall be erected on stands and insulators supplied by the manufacturer of the 

batteries. Electrolyte shall be filled as per manufacturer’s instructions. Inter row 

connections shall be made with the leads supplied by the manufacturer. Charging and 

discharging shall be carried out as per manufacturers instructions. Lamp bank load for 

discharge test shall be provided by the contractor and battery capacity shall be rechecked. 

10.0 INSTALLATION OF NEUTRAL EARTHING RESISTOR 

The neutral earthing resistor shall be inspected for any damage to the resistor grid and other 

components. The resistor shall be levelled and installed. All covers etc. shall be checked for 

tightness to ensure that the enclosure of the resistor is dust, vermin and weatherproof. 

Earthing conductors shall be taken from the outer end terminal of the resistor for connection 

to earth electrodes and to the main grid. 

11.0 INSTALLATION OF POWER & LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD 

11.1 GENERAL 

This section shall apply generally to Power & Lighting Distribution Boards, which may 

comprise switch-fuse units, isolators, fused distribution boards, distribution boards with 

miniature circuit breakers, circuit switchboxes etc. 

11.2 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION 

The contractor shall carry out a preliminary inspection of the equipment before installation 

to ensure that the equipment is in a satisfactory condition. 

11.3 INSTALLATION & COMMISSIONING 

The installation of factory built distribution boards shall be carried out generally in the same 

manner as for M.V. Switchboards of Motor Control Centres. 

In case of wall / structure mounted distribution boards, the Contractor shall fabricate and 

install the structural steel framework suitable for mounting the various distribution boards. 

The Contractor may have to prepare drawing showing the proposed general arrangement, 

of the structural frame which shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The fabrication and 

installation of the framework shall be recommended only after the approval of drawing. 

Various items for the distribution board shall be mounted in accordance with the approved 

drawings. 

After completion of the installation of distribution boards, internal / interconnecting wiring 

shall be checked for correctness. Insulation resistance of wiring and equipment shall be 

tested with a 500 Volts megger. Operations of all equipments shall be checked for correct

Jacobs 




functioning. 

12.0 MOTORS 

12.1 GENERAL 

Motor shall be installed along with the driven equipment. 

12.2 COMMISSIONING OF MOTORS 

The Contractor shall check all the motors installed, carry out the tests required and 

commission the motors. The work will include the following: 

a) Check rotor for free movement. 

b) Check end play in bearings. 

c) Check for mechanical defects, if any, by visual inspection. 

d) Inspect bearings to ensure they are greased. 

e) For D.C. or slip ring induction motors, check commutators, slip rings, brushes, 

brush holders and springs, brush lifting gear, etc. for satisfactory condition. 

f) Check direction of rotation for correctness and reconnect the leads, if 

necessary. 

g) Check conduit entries on terminal boxes, block unused entries. 

h) Carry out insulation test with an appropriate megger. 

13.0 CABLE INSTALLATION 

13.1 GENERAL 

This section covers installation, termination and connection of various types of single-core 

or multicore cables (Ref. Sec.3.5). 

13.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES 

13.2.1 Cable routes and mode of installation shall generally be as shown in the relevant 

construction drawings. When these are not indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall 

determine the same and get them approved from the Engineer before commencing the 

work. 

For multiple runs of cables, separation between individual cables shall be provided, when 

so indicated, to meet the following conditions. 

i) Spacing between loaded cables (power) to suit the rating factors applied in the cable 

installation design. 

ii) Separation between cables for high voltage service and medium or low voltage service. 

iii) Separation between certain types of cables for instrument service and other cables. 

iv) Separation between duplicate feeders run along the same route, to prevent damage to 

one feeder when the other feeder becomes faulty. 

13.2.2 Identification tags indicating cable designation, shall be affixed to each cable at ends and at 

an interval not exceeding 15 meters or at the location where cables change direction or 

elevation. Cable tags shall be made of stainless steel or any other non-corroding material 

suitable for site and installation conditions. Cable designation shall be embossed in the 

tags.

Jacobs 




13.2.3 Mode of Installation 

Modes of installation of cables shall generally be as given below: 

i) Directly buried in the ground. 

ii) Installed in built-up trenches in ground, floors, etc. 

iii) On cable trays run overhead along pipe/cable racks, or supported on structures, 

masonry etc. 

iv) Cables run along structural steelwork or masonry, supported by suitable saddles, cleats, 

hangers, etc. 

13.2.4 Directly Buried Cables 

Trenches shall be excavated along the routes indicated in the relevant drawings and / or 

approved by the Engineer. They shall be straight and excavated uniformly to a depth shown 

on the relevant drawings or approved by the Engineer. 

After excavation, the floor of the trenches shall be firmed and a bedding of sifted soil or 

clean sand with a well distributed grain size shall be prepared. The bedding shall be well 

compacted to density of 1,750 kg / cubic meter. The thickness of the compacted bedding 

shall not be less than 75mm. 

Proper equipment, such as stands for supporting cable drums and rollers for drawing 

cables shall be used for laying cables in trenches. Cables shall be laid without kinks and 

utmost care shall be taken in handling them. 

After laying the cables, they shall be covered with sifted soil or clean sand well compacted, 

up to 150 mm above the top of cables. The cables shall be covered by interlocking cable 

tiles extending at least 50 mm beyond the cables on both sides. Alternative methods, such 

as use of bricks for cable protection or coloured concrete screen, as specified elsewhere. 

After placing of cable tiles, the trenches shall be backfilled completely with riddled soil. 

Large stones shall not be backfilled. The backfill shall be well rammed and compacted. 

At road crossings or at specified locations, cables shall be laid in hume pipes or 

prefabricated cable ducts, or any other type of pipes specified elsewhere. After drawing the 

cables, the ends of pipes or ducts shall be sealed adequately with wooden plugs or any 

other approved means, to prevent ingress of soil or dirt into the pipes and ducts. 

When directly buried cables enter the buildings, the openings made in walls shall also be 

adequately sealed to prevent ingress of soil or sub--soil water into the building. Bituminous 

or suitable type of PVC compound shall be used for this purpose. 

Approved type of cable markers shall be fixed along the cable routes at a distance not 

exceeding 15 meters along straight routes, and also where cable loops or cable joints are 

located. The position of cable markers and cable identification tags shall coincide. 

When cables are laid in multiple tiers, space between individual tier shall be filled and 

compacted with sifted soil or sand. Spacing between tiers shall be as specified elsewhere. 

Protective cable tiles above the topmost tier only. 

13.2.5 Cables in Built-up Trenches 

Cables run in trenches shall unless otherwise specified, be installed in sand, in layers. 

Separators of non-combustible materials shall be provided, where necessary to ensure 

adequate segregation between cables. 

Each layer of cables shall be laid on a compacted and consolidated bed of clean sand 

having well distributed grain sizes (silver sand). Each layer of cables shall be covered by a 

well compacted clean sand up to 75 mm above the top of cables. Next layer of cables will 

be laid on this sand bed. On completion of laying of cables, the whole trench shall be

Jacobs 




completely sand filled and well compacted. The trenches shall then be covered by any one 

of the following methods as specified elsewhere. 

Built-up trenches for cables may be provided in outdoor plant areas, buildings, switch 

rooms, 

a) Fitted with RCC covers (preferably coloured red) and sealed. 

b) Screened over with red coloured lean concrete to finished payment level. 

c) Fitted with removable steel chequered plate, covers, generally in sub-stations, 

switch-rooms, control rooms and similar indoor locations. 

d) Fitted with specially designed covers at road crossings or similar locations 

subjected to heavy traffic. 

Cables emerging from trenches for final runs to items of equipment shall be protected by 

steel pipes up to a height of 200 mm above the finished floor/pavement level. Pipes shall 

be fixed onto the trench wall and where they pass through the trench cover, shall be 

sealed with bitumastic compound. 

All openings in trenches for ducts, cable entry into buildings, etc. shall be sealed 

adequately with bitumastic compound or lean concrete. 

The trenches in non-hazardous indoor areas, such as control rooms, switch rooms, etc., 

need not be sand filled. Cables may be supported in trenches by means of hangers, cleats, 

cable trays, etc. 

13.2.6 Cables on Walls, Structures or Cable Trays 

Cables shall be run on walls, structure or laid on cable trays, as required. Only approved 

type of cable supports or fixings such as cleats, saddles, hangers or straps shall be used. 

13.2.6.a Cables Fixed to the Walls or Steelwork 

Cables shall be secured by means of saddle bars and saddles. Minimum clear spacing 

between walls or steelwork and cables shall be 6mm ( ¼"). The type of saddles used shall 

be as shown in the relevant drawings or subject to the approval of the Engineer. 

13.2.6.b Cables Supported on Cable Trays 

Cables shall be secured to the cable trays by means of single fixing type of saddles or 

adjustable cable saddles, made of approved material, when run on horizontal or vertical 

cable trays. 

13.2.6.c Spacing of Cable Supports 

Maximum horizontal & vertical spacing of cable supports shall not exceed 750 mm (30") & 

500 mm (20") respectively. When cables are run on cable trays, they shall be securely 

supported on each rung of the cable tray. 

13.2.7 Cable Trays 

Cable trays shall be one of the following types or as specified elsewhere: 

i) Site fabricated ladder type cable trays from M.S. Channels, angles, flats as per 

cable tray details depending on the weight of cables required to be supported on 

cable trays and maximum cable tray supporting distance. The construction of 

these cable trays shall be all welded type. 

ii) Shop fabricated, heavy pattern, perforated, steel cable trays, galvanised or 

painted as specified elsewhere. The cable trays shall be in standard length 

sections and shop fabricated bends or tees shall be used. Individual sections 

shall be securely bolted together.

Jacobs 




iii) Shop fabricated PVC / FRP cable trays. 

Cable trays supports and tray design shall be based on the loading of cable trays. 

Generally, the design, shall be such that cable trays supports spacing will be 2 meters or 

more. 

13.2.8 Single Core Cables 

Single core Cables comprising one 3 phase circuit shall be run throughout in trefoil 

formation. Cables spacers made of hardwood blocks or any other suitable non-magnetic 

material shall be used for supporting the cables. Type and material of clamps shall be to 

the approval of the Engineer. 

Single core cables shall not be run directly buried in ground unless they are installed in a 

protected area, not accessible to unauthorised persons and suitable mechanical protection 

is provided. When more than one cable is in parallel per phase, care should be taken to 

ensure that all such cables have equal lengths. When single core cables are run in trefoil 

formation, for long distances, cables shall be transposed at regular intervals. 

13.3 TERMINATION & CONNECTION OF CABLES 

13.3.1 High Voltage PVC / XLPE Armoured Cables 

H.V. XLPE / PVC armoured cables shall be terminated or jointed by means of cold setting 

epoxy based cast resin jointing system or heat shrinkable or push on type cold setting kit. 

In case of cable terminations at equipment, dust sealing glands may be used where cables 

enter the enclosure, even though the termination is made with cast resin. Particular care 

shall be taken to ensure proper bond between the cable armour and earthing system. The 

earthing clamp and the earth conductor shall be of adequate size to ensure sufficient earth 

return current in the event of a fault. for HV cables, a stress cone shall be made for proper 

distribution of dielectric stress. 

13.3.2 Heavy Duty LT PVC / XLPE Cables 

Heavy duty LT PVC / XLPE Cables, armoured or unarmoured shall be terminated with 

compression type cable glands. 

When armoured cables are used, the armour shall be prepared in a manner suitable for the 

type of cable glands. Armour shall be securely clamped & bonded to the body of the gland. 

Armour shall be properly cleaned and petroleum conducting jelly applied to the armour as 

well as clamping surfaces. When specifically called for and in hazardous areas, cable 

glands shall be further sealed with cold setting PVC compound. 

When cable glands are fixed onto a sheet metal enclosure, with a slip hole, a bonding / 

earthing washer and a heavy check - out shall be used to ensure effective bonding of the 

cable gland with the enclosure. 

In corrosive areas, glands shall be coated with corrosion inhibiting varnish lacquer after 

installation and covered with PVC hoods, if specifically called for. 

13.3.3 Mineral Insulated Metal Sheathed Cables 

These cables shall be terminated with the appropriate glands and in a manner 

recommended by the manufacturers. 

13.3.4 Prevention of Strain at Terminations 

Special attention shall be given to ensure that the cable is adequately supported so that 

there is no strain on the termination or connection of conductors 

Particularly when cables are terminated at equipments, which are subject to vibrations, 

strain relief clamps shall be provided where the support for the cable is derived from the

Jacobs 




equipment so as to prevent relative displacement of the support with respect to the 

termination. 

In case of small sized PVC cables or mineral insulated cables a loop may be formed 

adjacent to the termination. This will also allow for slight movement of the equipment. 

13.3.5 Connection of Cable Cores / Conductors 

13.3.5.a All cable cores or conductors shall be connected to the equipment terminals be means of 

approved type of connectors. Conductors of small sizes may be directly connected to 

equipment terminals, without using special connectors. The sizes of directly connected 

conductors will depend on the type of terminals provided. Connections of larger cables or 

cables connected to motors shall be made, generally with crimping type cable lugs, unless 

best quality, approved type, mechanical connectors are used. Solid conductor of small size 

cable shall be connected by forming loop and Ross Cutney. 

13.3.5.b Conductors shall be thoroughly cleaned and smeared with conducting petroleum jelly 

before they are connected directly or with mechanical connectors, particularly when bimetallic 

connections, such as aluminium and copper or brass are made. Materials used for 

mechanical connectors shall also be of suitable type when bi-metallic connections are 

involved. 

Mechanical connectors or equipment terminals shall be of pressure clamp type (not 

pinching type), when aluminium conductors are to be connected. However, if stranded 

aluminium conductors have to be made to pinching type terminals, the conductors shall be 

soldered solid before connection. 

13.3.5.c Core identification ferrules or coloured PVC adhesive tapes shall be provided for all 

multicore cables at the point of connection. Generally, red, yellow & blue coloured tapes 

may be used for identification of cores in power circuits. Ferrules or numbered tapes shall 

be used for identification of control cable cores. 

13.3.5.d Jointing & Soldering of Aluminium Conductors 

Most of the cables used will be with aluminium conductors, and the contractor shall 

exercise care for joining and soldering aluminium cables. The contractor shall ensure that 

this work will be carried out by competent persons having a thorough knowledge and 

experience of aluminium soldering work in electrical trade and preferably, having a 

certificate from cable manufacturers. 

The Contractor shall use special soldering materials & accessories such as fluxes, special 

wiping cloth, cleaning tongs, special laddies & solder pot with thermometer, which are 

essential for joining. The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with approved 

codes of practice for aluminium conductor soldering. 

All materials used shall be of approved type. Petroleum conducting jelly or equivalent 

corrosion inhibiting compound shall be copiously used after finishing the above work, to 

prevent corrosion and its after effects 

14.0 LIGHTING INSTALLATION 

14.1 GENERAL 

The lighting fixtures in the plant shall be fed from lighting panel. All outdoor lighting shall 

be group controlled from control stations or through synchronous timer or photocell. 

Lighting wiring between panel and lighting fixtures shall be done with PVC insulated 

3 core (phase, neutral and earth) copper conductor armoured cable for hazardous areas. 

Wiring in the building shall be done by means of 3 – core copper conductor, PVC insulated, 

armoured cables, or PVC insulated copper conductor wires in conduit / Metsec 

channel as specified elsewhere. All joints of conductors in Switchboards / JBs, fittings 

shall be made only by means of approved mechanical connectors (nylon / PVC

Jacobs 




14.1.1 

connectors), Bare twist joints shall be permitted any where in the wiring system. 

The electrical contractor shall determine, with approval of Engineer-in-charge or his 

authorised representative, the exact locations of each fixture in order to avoid interference 

with piping or other mechanical equipment and also with a view to obtain as much uniform 

illumination as practicable and to avoid objectionable shadow. Conduits shall be laid out 

by the contractor to suit field conditions as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. 

14.1.2 On walkway, platforms and other outdoor area, lighting fixtures shall be located nearer to 

landing of stairs or ladders, gauges, flow meters, panel boards and other equipment to 

provide proper illumination. 

14.1.3 The minimum height of any lighting fixture shall be preferably not less than 2.5 meters 

above the floor level. 

14.1.4 All outdoor cable terminations to junction boxes, panels etc. shall be preferably through 

bottom or side entry. Top entries for cables shall be avoided to avoid water entry. All 

cable glands for outdoor terminations shall be double compression type and the gland 

shall be covered with PVC or rubber boot shroud. All unused cable entries shall be 

plugged with suitable blanking plugs. 

14.1.5 Mounting height of equipment shall be as under :- 

Top of Witch Box : 1200 mm from FFL (Finished floor level) 

Top of Lighting / Power Panel : 1800 mm from FFL 

5/15 Amp. Receptacle : 300 mm from FFL unless otherwise specified 

(1200 mm for process areas). 

Lighting fixture : As indicated in layout drawing. 

Exhaust fan : In the cut out provided / As indicated in Layout 

14.1.6 

Drawing. 

Fixtures shall be firmly supported from the structures. Support clamps etc. may be bolted 

or welded to the existing steel work or metal inserts. In case of concrete structures, where 

metal inserts are not available, fixtures shall be suspended from Concrete surfaces with 

the help of anchor fasteners. In such cases special care shall be taken to see that 

anchoring is firm. In places where ceiling fans are provided, lighting fixtures shall be 

suspended below the level of fan to avoid shadow of fan falling on ground. 

14.1.7 Circuit cables shall be cleared in a group to structure by using galvanised strip clamps or 

run in cable trays wherever trays are available. Spacers and cleats shall be of required 

size to accommodate the cables. All hardware shall be galvanised or zinc passivated. 

Underground lighting cables (in paved areas) shall be taken in suitable G.I. sleeves buried 

at a minimum depth of 300 mm from FFL. GI pipe sleeves shall be extended to 300 mm 

above FFL. Exact termination / layout of G.I. pipes ( for protection of cables ) shall be 

decided at site as per site convenience.) 

14.1.8 Wiring for all socket outlet shall be done with 3 cores of equal sizes of wire for phase, 

neutral and earth. The terminals of switch sockets shall be suitable to receive the size of 

wire specified elsewhere. 

14.1.9 All lighting fixtures shall be provided with terminal block with required terminals suitable for 

connection of 2.5 sq. mm conductor size or higher as specified elsewhere. 

14.1.10 The cable shall be straightened after unwinding it from the drum. All cables be clamped / 

laid in straight run without any sag and kink. 

14.1.11 For location where fan points are shown, fan hooks with junction box shall be provided 

during concreting. Where fan hooks and J.Bs. are provided separately JB shall be located 

within a distance of 300 mm from hook for mounting of ceiling rose.

Jacobs 




14.1.12 Industrial type plug sockets with appropriate rating of MCB or rating as per job 

specification shall be provided at a height of 500 mm from FFL for window AC units. 

Socket outlets plugs in Sub-station, DG shed, workshop maintenance shop etc. shall be of 

industrial metal clad type. 

14.1.13 Wiring for exhaust fans shall be terminated in receptacles as specified elsewhere and 

the connection from receptacle to the exhaust fan shall be by means of a flexible cord 

equivalent in size to the main run of wires. Switch for exhaust fan shall be located in 

a separate switch board along with other switches. 

14.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

14.2.1 Surface Conduit Installation 

When conduits for exposed or concealed wiring are installed on surface, the complete 

routing shall be marked on the surfaces. The installation shall be carried out only after 

approval of the routing by the Engineer. Conduit installation shall be carried out accurately 

and neatly, with conduit runs truly vertical or horizontal. Conduits shall be threaded to close 

tolerances and burr removed from the ends after threading. All screwed connections shall 

ensure that at least five threads are engaged and electrical continuity maintained. 

Conduits shall be supported with saddles at a spacing of 1200mm max. for conduits up to 

1" size and 180mm maximum for larger sizes. Saddles shall also be provided at both ends 

of fittings, equipment, devices, junction boxes, bends or offsets, within 200mm max. 

Minimum clearance between conduit and surface shall be 6mm. Saddles shall be of cast / 

malleable iron, cast aluminium or any other approved material, and galvanised painted or 

cadmium plated. 

14.2.2 Embedded Conduit Installation 

Conduit installation may be embedded in RCC structures or brick work. 

The installation in RCC structures shall be carried out after the form work and 

reinforcement work is complete, but before concreting . Concreting, which will be done only 

after completion of the conduit installation and its approval by the Engineer. Conduits laid 

in concrete all have minimum 50mm cover up to the finished surface and shall preferably 

be laid behind the reinforcement. Conduits shall be securely led to prevent their movement 

during concreting. 

Installation in brickwork will require chases to be made in brickwork, sufficiently deep to 

provide adequate cover for the conduits. Conduits shall be securely fixed to the brickwork 

and chases made good. 

In this type of conduit installation, a galvanised fish wire shall be drawn in conduits. 

All embedded accessories such as junction boxes, switchboxes, etc. shall be mounted 

such that they will flush with the finished surfaces including plaster. All joints in the 

installation shall be tight and covers properly gasketted and fixed to prevent ingress of 

concrete slurry, water or dust. 

14.3 Conduit Wiring 

Conduit wiring shall generally be carried out with single core PVC insulated cables / wires. 

If any other type of cables is to be used, the same will be indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

The Conduit installation shall be complete in all respects before the cables are drawn in 

conduits. All conduit runs shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, moisture, etc. by blowing 

compressed air or by any other suitable means. An approved lubricating compound (such 

as soap stone powder, lux flakes or talc) shall be applied to the insulated cables before 

they are drawn in conduits. The cables shall be neatly bunched together to prevent kinks or 

twisting.

Jacobs 




14.4 POINT WIRING 

Each point wiring shall comprise the following: 

Supply and installation of ¾" /1" / 1¼" heavy duty M.S. / PVC conduits with MS / PVC 

accessories such as 90° bends, inspection Tees etc. as required - supply and pulling of 2 

nos. 3/22 PVC insulated stranded copper single core wires of 440V grade and one number 

14 SWG copper wire outside conduit for earthing. It shall also include supply and 

installation of multi-way large round junction boxes with Dome / Flat covers and four way, 

15A terminal block. For suspending of fluorescent lighting fitting, dome cover junction box 

shall be used. 

Supply, Fabrication and Fixing of hardware such as clamp, Saddles Bolts, Nuts, 

Framework, etc. as required. 14 gauge bare copper earthing wire shall be run within 

conduits for earthing of fittings, junction boxes, switch / single phase socket outlet 

enclosures. 

Earthing shall be done at single point. 

Wiring from LDB to lighting fittings exhaust fans single phase outlets, shall be carried out 

with 3/22, YY cables through ¾" /1" / 1¼" heavy duty M.S / PVC conduits. 

Junction boxes shall be fixed on brackets, fabricated from 25 x 3 mm MS flat. Such 

brackets shall be fixed to the ceiling / wall by means of anchor bolts / nylon raw plugs and 

screws. Each equipment such as lighting fittings, switches, junction boxes, socket outlets, 

exhaust fans etc. shall be earthed internally by the third core of the 3 x 2.5 mm² YWY cable 

used. 

14.5 MEASUREMENT OF POINT WIRING 

Wiring from D.B's / switchboard to the first lighting fitting through the circuit switch shall be 

considered as one point. Wiring from the first fitting to the next fitting in the same circuit 

shall be considered as half point. Wiring to the exhaust fan shall be considered as one 

point. For measurement of switch socket point wiring, wiring from D.B. / switchboard upto 

first socket outlet through ckt. switch shall be considered as one point. Subsequent wiring 

to next socket outlet shall be considered as half point, supply and installation of light fitting, 

fans, exhaust fans, socket outlets shall be covered under separate item rate. 

If a separate circuit is tapped from the same lighting circuit, it shall be treated as half point. 

If a socket is located very near to a Distribution Board, it will be considered as half point. 

Otherwise this shall be considered as an independent point. 

Quoted rate of point wiring is applicable for any length of conduit emanating from LDB to 

first fitting and for subsequent points also. 

14.6 HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION 

14.6.1 Wiring in hazardous area shall be done by using minimum 2.5 mm 2 copper conductor 

armoured cable. Circuit wiring feeding hazardous areas shall be controlled by two pole 

switches / MCBs ( for phase as well as neutral isolation). 

14.6.2 Correct type of lighting equipment (fixtures and JBs) with regard to enclosure protection 

as specified elsewhere, shall be installed for the areas classified as Zone 1, Zone 2 etc. 

14.6.3 The terminations in the junction boxes and the lighting fittings shall be done avoiding 

possibility of loose connections due to vibrations. After the terminations are made the 

cover of the junction boxes and the lighting fittings shall be closed properly with all bolts 

and hardware in correct position, retaining its explosion and weather protections. In 

fixtures having double cable entries, both the entries shall be used for looping in and 

looping out connection, thus minimising the use of a separate junction box. Wherever 

separate control gear boxes (C.G. box) are provided looping in and looping out

Jacobs 




connections shall be through CG box, thus avoiding the use of an additional junction box. 

All unused cable entries shall be sealed with suitable plugs. 

14.6.4 Cable glands for terminating cable on flameproof equipment shall be of double 

compression FLP type. Any material / equipment specified to be supplied by contractor for 

installation in hazardous areas, shall be tested by CMRI and duly approved by C.C.E 

Nagpur. 

14.7 BUILDING LIGHTING 

14.7.1 The type of wiring system shall comprise surface / concealed conduit system or cable 

wiring as specified elsewhere. 

14.7.2 Mounting details of fixtures shall be indicated on the drawings. 

14.7.3 Wiring in areas above false ceiling shall be done in Surface Conduit (25 mm dia GI 

conduit) suitably clamped to the true ceiling. Vertical drops from true ceiling for panels, 

switches, receptacles etc. shall be taken in 25 mm dia PVC conduit concealed in walls up 

to switch boards / panels. Lighting fixtures shall be supported from true ceiling. Exact 

location of fixtures shall be finalised in co-ordination with air-conditioning duct diffuser 

layout, panels layout and false ceiling grid layout. To facilitate easy maintenance ‘Looping 

back system’ of wiring shall be followed throughout. Accordingly supply tappings and other 

interconnections including those for earthing are made only at fixture connector blocks or 

at switch boards. Required number of junction boxes shall be used at intervals for wire 

pulling and inspection. 

14.8 STREET LIGHTING 

14.8.1 Street lighting poles to be located on road side shall be installed at a minimum distance of 

300 mm from the edge of the walkway of the road. Size of wires from marshalling box up 

to fixture shall be 1.5 mm 2 / 2.5 mm 2 , copper conductor PVC insulated. 

14.8.2 Each pole shall be earthed at two points by connecting to the plant earth grid as shown on 

Installation standards. 

14.8.3 Street lighting fixture shall be mounted on steel tubular poles as per standard drawings. 

The foundation for the street lighting poles will be made by electrical contractor. Street 

lighting poles shall be supplied with a base plate. 

14.9 MAST LIGHTING 

14.9.1 The lattice structure masts shall be installed on concrete foundations with the base plate 

bolted on to the anchor bolts. The lattice structure shall be painted with a coat of primer 

and two coats of aluminium paint, the second coat to be given just before handing over to 

the owner. The masts shall be numbered as per drawings. The masts shall be connected 

to the plant earth grid at two points. 

14.9.2 The main feeder up to the distribution board of lighting mast shall be through PVC 

insulated armoured cable of size as specified elsewhere. Wiring from Distribution Board to 

each flood – light fixture shall be by means of a 3-core 2.5 sq mm, copper conductor PVC 

insulated armoured cable. All the cables shall be neatly clamped to the structure at 

intervals not exceeding 25 cms.

Jacobs 




15.0 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

15.1 GENERAL 

This Section covers installation of earthing system for electrical equipment, static earthing 

and for lightning protection. Installation of earthing system for electrical equipment and 

static earthing shall be carried out in accordance with IS 3043 - 'CODE OF PRACTICE 

FOR EARTHING' and IS 7689 - GUIDE FOR CONTROL OF UNDESIRABLE STATIC 

ELECTRICITY respectively. Earthing system for lightning protection shall be in 

accordance with IS 2309 - 'CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE PROTECTION OF 

BUILDINGS AND ALLIED STRUCTURES AGAINST LIGHTNING'. 

Generally, a common earthing system shall be provided for equipment earthing and static 

earthing. The earthing system for lightning protection shall be separate and may be 

interconnected with the former, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. 

15.2 EARTH ELECTRODES 

Earth electrodes shall generally consist of copper or G.I. plates buried in ground or copper 

coated steel rods or cast-iron pipes driven in ground. The type of electrodes shall be as 

specified elsewhere. The method of installation of earth electrode shall be in accordance 

with the drawings or in accordance with IS 3043, when the drawings are not furnished. 

15.3 MAIN EARTH CONDUCTORS 

Main earth conductors shall be copper or G.I flats or stranded copper / aluminium 

conductors with or without PVC sheath as specified elsewhere. They shall be connected, 

at one end, to the earth electrode and to the earth bus or test - link at the other end. All 

connections below ground shall be made by bolting or riveting and brazing or welding. 

Sizes of main earth conductors shall be as specified elsewhere. All connections to the test 

- link or earth bus shall be securely bolted. Contact surfaces shall be tinned and suitably 

protected with Petroleum Conducting Jelly to prevent corrosion. All connections below 

ground shall be protected as per IS 3043. 

15.4 EARTH SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT BONDING 

Main Earth Loops or Earthing Ring Mains shall originate from the earth bus or test links. 

Equipments shall be connected to the main earth loops by means of earth conductors. 

All electrical equipment viz. transformers, switchgear, motor control centres, motors, 

control stations, switches lighting fittings and other electrical apparatus shall be connected 

to the main earth loop by means of two separate and distinct, external earth conductors. 

The material, type and size of the earth conductors will be as shown in the drawings or as 

specified elsewhere. 

Two earth terminals will, generally, be provided on most of the electrical equipment. 

However, if these are not provided, the Contractor shall provide the same, by drilling and 

tapping the equipment suitably and supply necessary hardware. 

The entire conduit installation, cable sheaths and cable armour shall also be bonded to 

earth at both ends. It must be ensured that the conduit installations maintain electrical 

continuity throughout its entire length. Conduits shall be effectively bonded together at 

each joint, such as couplings, junction boxes, draw boxes or any other accessories and 

equipments. Where conduits and screwed cable glands are terminated at equipment 

enclosures with slip-holes, earthing / bonding washer (e.g. star - washer) shall be used to 

maintain electrical continuity. 

All earth connections with solid or stranded conductors shall be made by means of 

soldered / crimping cable lugs. Connections with copper or G.I. flats shall be directly 

bolted type. All hardware used shall be galvanised steel, brass or passivated to prevent

Jacobs 




corrosion. Spring washer or lock washers shall be used to make all connections secure 

and vibration 

Earth connections from transformer neutrals and lightning arresters shall be taken as 

directly as possible to the earth buses or test links. Main earth conductors from earth bus 

or test - link to the Earth Electrode shall be coated with bitumastic. 

15.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 

Lightning protection system shall generally comprise lightning finals (air terminals), roof 

conductors, down conductors, test links and earth electrodes. The number, types, 

materials and sizes shall be in accordance with the drawings or as specified elsewhere. 

Air terminals shall be mounted on top of buildings or structures as shown in the drawings. 

All air terminals shall be inter-connected with roof conductors, chimneys, vent, pipes, hand 

rails or any other metallic projection above the roofs shall also be bonded to the roof 

conductors. Down conductors from air terminals or from roof conductors shall be routed as 

directly as possible to the test links on earth buses, with minimum bends. 

All provisions regarding connections of conductors for equipment earthing system shall 

also apply to lightning protection system. In corrosive atmospheres, lightning finials or air 

terminals shall be covered by plumbing metal for corrosion protection. 

16.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 

16.1 GENERAL 

Electrical installation in hazardous areas as defined in I.S. 5571 shall be carried out with 

utmost care and special precautions shall be taken to ensure operational safety. 

All personnel, especially supervisory staff, working on such installations shall be fully 

conversant with the applicable National Standards and Codes of Practice and shall have 

previous experience of such work. 

16.2 EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS 

Electrical equipment and materials used in the installation shall conform to the relevant 

Standards and shall be certified (by a competent authority) suitable for use in Division 1 or 

Division 2 hazardous areas, as the case may be. 

No modifications shall be made in any certified equipment or material used in the 

installation which will impair its effectiveness and invalidate the certificate. 

All certified equipments shall be inspected before their use for any damaged or 

deteriorated condition which will render the equipment unsafe. Such equipments shall not 

be used in the installation. 

When any equipment is dismantled for the purpose of installation, care shall be taken to 

prevent damage to vulnerable parts such as screw threads, conduit threads, machined 

surfaces, etc. If the equipment is to remain dismantled for a prolonged period, machined 

surfaces, screw threads, etc. shall be protected against corrosion by means of grease, oil, 

petroleum jelly or any suitable corrosion inhibiter. These shall, however, be cleaned 

thoroughly before re-assembly. 

All hardware used for mounting shall be hot dip galvanised or plated to prevent corrosion. 

All bolted connections shall be made secure and vibration proof by means of locknuts, 

lock washers, etc. 

16.3 WIRING 

All wiring in Division 1 hazardous areas shall be carried out with armoured cables or with 

PVC insulated wires laid in solid drawn seamless conduits. In Division 2 areas, ERW

Jacobs 




conduit may be used. 

Termination of cables shall be made with certified or approved cable glands or cable end 

boxes. Cable glands and boxes shall be effectively sealed. All conductors connections 

shall be made with soldered / crimping cable lugs, or approved mechanical connectors. It 

must be ensured that all connections shall be made secure and vibration-proof, by means 

of locknuts, lock-washers, etc. Prevention of strain at terminations is of utmost 

importance. 

16.4 EARTHING 

All provisions of Section 12 for earthing apply with much greater force regarding effective 

bonding of electrical equipment, cable armour, conduit installation, process equipments 

and process piping (requiring static earthing) to the earthing system. 

Special attention shall be paid to the following: 

a) Adequate support for earth conductors throughout for protection against breakage. 

b) Secure and vibration proof earth connections, protected suitably against corrosion. 

c) Continuity of conduit installation or process piping when static earthing is required, by 

means of conduit bonds. 

16.5 MISCELLANEOUS 

All opening between hazardous and non-hazardous areas for cable and conduits shall be 

properly sealed by approved means. In case of conduit wiring, conduit stopper boxes shall 

be used in conduit runs at the junction of hazardous and non-hazardous areas or at 

terminations of conduit runs at any equipment such as motors, starters, push buttons, etc. 

Stopper boxes at the junction of hazardous and non-hazardous areas, shall be located at 

the boundary between the 2 areas. 

17.0 STEEL WORK 

17.1 All steel work carried out by the Contractor for equipment and cable supports such as 

cable trays, brackets, hangers, saddles, etc. shall be of the best workmanship. Only 

certified welders shall be employed for welding. All bolted connections shall be made 

secure and vibration proof by means of spring washers or lock washers or lock nuts. 

Fixing or grouting of steel-work in floor, ceilings or walls shall be carried out with 

approved foundation bolts or fasteners. 

17.2 Finished steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire-brushing or sand blasting etc. 

All scales and rust shall be removed. The steelwork shall be then painted with 2 coats of 

approved primer such as red oxide or red lead and shall be finished with 2 further coats 

of approved paint. 

17.3 When atmospheric conditions are highly corrosive, chemical works type paints may be 

specified. In such cases, special primers and paints shall be used for adequate 

protection from corrosion. 

18.0 INSPECTION, TESTS & COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

AND INSTALLATION 

18.1 GENERAL 

This Section covers the requirements of inspection & tests to be carried out on 

equipment and installation as well as commissioning of electrical installation. Inspection 

and tests shall be carried out jointly by the Contractor in presence of Engineer and / or 

Owner.

Jacobs 




18.2 INSPECTION 

Inspection shall be carried out to ensure that the complete installation is carried out in 

accordance with drawings and complies with the requirements laid down by Indian 

Electricity Rules, Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Building by Insurance 

Association of India (Fire Section), Indian Standard Specifications & Codes of Practice, 

Electrical Inspector, Explosive inspector and any other statutory regulations and 

competent authorities. The complete installation shall be subject to the approval of any 

or all of the competent authorities and the Owner / Engineer. 

18.3 DETAILS OF TESTS 

The tests specified below shall be carried out on the electrical equipment and 

installation before commissioning the same. The tests shall be performed by or under 

the direct supervision of a competent person, qualified to carry out the tests. All tests 

shall be carried out in the presence of the Authorised Representative of the Owner 

and/or the Engineer, unless this stipulation is waived in writing. 

The installation shall not be accepted by the Owner unless it has been approved by the 

competent authorities, and the authorised representative of the Owner and/or the 

Engineer. 

All test results shall be recorded on prescribed 'ELECTRICAL TEST REPORTS' duly 

signed by the person conducting the test and by the authorised representative of the 

Owner and/or the Engineer, if tests are witnessed. 

In case the installation is found to be not in conformity with the requirements or the test 

results indicate defective materials or workmanship, the same will have to be rectified to 

the complete satisfaction of the Owner / Engineer and tested again. 

18.3.1 POWER & DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 

a) Check HV & LV cable terminations, ground connections, fittings and accessories, 

oil level and oil leaks at various joints. Check breather, thermometers & buchholz 

relay for proper functioning and operation. Check junction boxes, marshalling 

box, etc. for correct wiring. 

b) Oil Test 

c) Dielectric test as per Clause 7.11 of IS 10028. The oil shall withstand at least 40 

KV with a gap of 4mm. 

d) Insulation Resistance Test 

e) This may be carried out on new transformer without drying out the transformer, 

provided the transformer has not been idle or stored for a long period. 

Otherwise, this test shall be carried out during drying out of transformers. 

Insulation resistance test shall be carried out between primary & secondary to 

ground as well as between primary and secondary. Windings not under test shall 

be grounded during the test. 

f) A megger rated 1000 volts or higher shall be used for the test. 

g) Check operation of automatic tap changer and its control panels (local and 

remote), for correct functioning, if provided. 

h) Check operation of forced cooling system complete with its control panel for 

correct functioning, if provided. 

i) Polarity & Phasing Out Test

Jacobs 




j) Check external connection of the transformer in accordance with diagram of 

connections and phase sequence (anti - clockwise). 

k) Polarity & Connections of Instrument Transformers 

l) Check for correctness of CT & PT connections provided with transformer. Check 

electrical continuity of secondary circuits with ELV tester. 

m) Adjust spacing of arcing horns / rod gaps, if provided. 

18.3.2 EHV, HV & MV SWITCHGEAR 

a) Check proper mechanical operation of circuit breakers including alignment of 

trolleys in case of draw - out type circuits breakers, smooth operation of all 

mechanical parts, lubrication, mechanical interlocks etc. 

b) Check contact alignment and wipe, proper sequence of closing and opening of 

main and arcing contacts. 

c) Oil test for transformers, in case of oil circuit breakers. 

d) Check electrical relays, instruments & controls for correct wiring 

e) Insulation test on busbars - phase to phase and phase to ground. This test will be 

carried out with circuit breakers in service position, but contacts remaining open. 

f) Insulation test on relays & control wiring including current and potential 

transformers and wiring of CT & PT secondaries. 

g) Insulation test on circuit breakers in withdrawn position - phase to phase and 

phase to ground with contacts closed. 

h) Adjust correct settings of relays and/or direct acting trips - as specified 

elsewhere. 

i) Operation Test 

Energise only control circuits and carry out closing and tripping operations (where AC 

supply derived from main supply is used for operation, the switch-gear bus may be 

energised). Check operations of electrical interlocks. Check tripping of circuit breakers 

by manual operations of protective relay contacts. Check operations of mechanical 

closing and tripping devices. Check lockout conditions for closing of circuit breakers by 

simulating the required conditions. Check control, indications, sequence interlocks and 

alarms. 

a) Polarity and connections of instrument transformers - Check for correctness of 

CT & PT connections provided. Check electrical continuity of secondary with ELV 

tester. 

b) Adjust spacing of arcing horns / rod gaps, if provided. 

c) Check operation of instruments, meters, relays and tripping of circuit breakers by 

primary / secondary injections as specified elsewhere. 

d) Check continuity of power circuits and earth continuity of all non current metallic 

parts with a low voltage (6 volts or less) continuity tester. 

e) Carry out HV test on power and control circuits, if specifically called for. 

18.3.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES, SWITCHGEARS, POWER CONTROL CENTRES 

(POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS ), UPS, V / F PANEL, ETC. 

a) Check equipment, internal wiring, smooth mechanical operation, interlocks, etc.

Jacobs 




b) Check continuity of power circuits and earth continuity of all non-current carrying 

metallic parts with a low voltage continuity tester. 

c) Insulation test for power & control circuits between phases, between phases and 

neutral and between phase / neutral and ground. 

d) Check operation by energising control circuits (without energising power circuits) 

for correct functioning. Simulate external controls and interlocks for the same. 

Note chatter or humming of Contactor and rectify, if necessary. 

e) Check fuse ratings and adjust relay settings (overload, single phasing preventers 

etc.) in accordance with load ratings. 

f) Carry out HV test on power & control circuits, if specifically called for in Contract 

Documents. 

g) Polarity and connections of instrument transformers - check for correctness of CT 

& PT connections provided. Check electrical continuity of secondary circuits with 

ELV tester. 

18.3.4 MOTORS & ROTATING EQUIPMENT 

a) Check equipment for free movement of rotor, and play, lubrication, and for any 

other mechanical defects. 

b) Check commutators, slip rings, brushes, brush-holders etc. for satisfactory 

conditions. 

c) Insulation test of motors - between winding and ground. Use 500 volts megger 

for M.V. motors and 1000 volts megger for HV motors. 

d) Check electrical continuity with ELV tester. 

e) No load running of motor noting down no load current and voltages in all three 

phases. 

18.3.5 CABLES 

a) Insulation Test - between each phase and neutral and between each phase / 

neutral and ground (Ref. APPENDIX - II). 

b) D.C. High Voltage Test on HV cables in accordance with the relevant Indian 

Standards and Code of Practice. This test shall be carried out on cables installed 

in final positions, and all joints and terminations have been made. The cables, 

however, may not be connected to the equipment, so that the equipment may not 

be subjected to the test voltage (Ref. Appendix-II) 

c) In case of lighting wiring, insulation test shall be carried out on lighting feeders 

with branch circuits open. Branch circuits shall be tested separately with lamp 

holders, plug receptacles and lighting fittings in position, but without lamps. In 

case of lighting circuits with lamp ballasts and glow starters insulation resistance 

may be measured between phase and ground only. 

d) In case of directly buried cables, insulation resistance of cables shall be 

measured before and after the back-filling. 

e) Test all receptacles for correct phase sequence. 

18.3.6 EARTHING SYSTEM 

a) Measure earth resistance of each electrode separately. If a number of earth 

electrodes are interconnected with one another, combined earth resistance shall 

also be measured. The earth resistance of each electrode and/or a group of 

electrodes shall not exceed the values specified elsewhere.

Jacobs 




b) Carry out line earth loop impedance test. The loop comprises the line conductor 

from the point of fault, back to the supply transformer, the path through 

transformer winding, the earthed neutral point of the transformer and path from 

that point to the point of fault through the earthing system. 

c) Continuity test for earth continuity conductors with ELV tester. 

18.3.7 RELAY & CONTROL PANELS, ALARMS PANELS & MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 

a) Carry out insulation test on all power and control circuits. 

b) Check all equipment for satisfactory operation and correct wiring. 

18.3.8 BATTERY 

a) Visual inspection of all components. 

b) Capacity test as per I.S. 

18.3.9 BATTERY CHARGER 

a) Connection checking 

b) Measurement of voltage regulation 

c) Insulation test 

d) Functional check of auxiliary devices 

e) Alternating current measurement at no load and rated load 

19.0 INSTRUMENT AND TOOLS 

19.1 GENERAL 

This section covers the instruments, tools & plant which will normally be required to 

carry out the electrical installation including testing & commissioning and which shall be 

made available as and when required by the contractor. Meters used for tests shall be 

of proven accuracy and to the satisfaction of the engineer. 

19.2 TOOLS & PLANT 

Hand Tools 

Screw drivers, pliers, cutters, spanners, hacksaw, hammers, rawl punches, etc. 

Power driven Tools & Equipment 

Drilling, grinding, cutting machines, hammers, arc welding set, oxy-acetylene welding 

and cutting set and welding accessories. 

19.3 INSTRUMENTS 

a) Instruments to be always available at Site. 

i) Insulation resistance tester (Megger) rated 500 volts 

ii) Multi-meter of a reputed make 

iii) Clip-on ammeter / voltmeter (tong tester) 

iv) Phase sequence indicator 

v) Extra low voltage continuity tester (6 volts or less)

Jacobs 




b) Instruments to be made available as and when required. 

i) Insulation resistance tester, (Megger) rated 500V / 1000V / 2500V, 5000V. 

ii) Earth resistance tester with all accessories 

iii) Transformer oil testing set 

iv) High Voltage testing set 

v) Relay testing equipment 

vi) Centrifugal or vacuum type oil filtering unit. 

20.0 LABOUR, SUPERVISION, COORDINATION & PROGRESS, LICENCE, 

STATUTORY APPROVAL 

20.1 SUPERVISORY LICENCE 

The contractor shall possess a valid contractor's licence for the state in which site is 

located and shall ensure its validity during the duration of the contract. The contractor 

shall furnish authenticated copies of certificates to the purchaser for himself and his 

workmen before commencement of work. 

20.2 LABOUR 

The Contractor shall employ adequate skilled and unskilled labour to complete all work 

according to programme of work. Skilled workers shall possess the minimum 

qualifications stipulated by statutory or competent authorities. 

20.3 SUPERVISION 

The Contractor shall employ adequate number of supervisors to control the labour force 

and to carry out the work as per schedule. Supervisory staff shall also possess the 

minimum qualifications stipulated by statutory and competent authorities. 

20.4 CO-ORDINATION 

The Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of other agencies, so that the work 

can proceed smoothly and without hindrance to all concerned. 

20.5 PROGRESS 

The Contractor shall submit periodic Progress Reports to the engineer. The period of 

report shall be determined by the Engineer. The Progress Report shall indicate planned 

progress as per programme and physical progress. the format in which the reports are 

to be submitted shall be decided by the Engineer. 

20.6 STATUTORY APPROVAL 

The Contractor shall be totally responsible for obtaining statutory approval from the 

electrical inspector or any other statutory authority for the entire installation carried out 

by him unless otherwise specified and agreed. Necessary test reports shall be 

submitted by him to electrical inspector. This will be an integral part of the contract and 

shall not be paid for separately. 

21.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE - QUALITY CONTROL 

21.1 Quality Assurance (Q.A.) shall follow the requirements of the Purchaser's Q.A. 

documentation applicable to the equipment and/or systems being installed.

Jacobs 




21.2 Q.A. involvement will commence at the instigation of the project and follow through to 

final acceptance of each and every system and item of equipment, thus ensuring total 

conformity to the Purchaser's requirements. 

21.3 The Contractor shall provide the necessary 'Test Sheets' for recording the results of his 

electrical acceptance tests. 

The full set of forms shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior to the 

implementation of the acceptance testing programme. 

21.4 The tests which the Contractor must perform, as a minimum requirement, shall be those 

described in clause 15.0 of this specification in the order indicated and shall be made in 

accordance with the equipment and / or systems Standards and Regulations quoted by 

the Engineer in the Contract Documents and any tests required by the particular 

equipment / system manufacturer. 

21.5 Test values acceptable to the Engineer shall be those laid down in the indicated 

standards and specifications by the Engineer, together with any values quoted in the 

Contract Documents. Any discrepancy in the acceptable test values discovered by the 

Contractor shall be resolved by the Engineer, whose interpretation shall be final. No 

equipment shall be set to work unless tests on its associated circuits have been found 

satisfactory. 

22.0 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION 

On completion of the work the Engineer, together with a representative of the Purchaser 

and the Contractor, will carry out an Inspection of the Installation. The Engineer will 

issue a completed copy of the Purchaser's Acceptance of Electrical Installation to the 

contractor as confirmation that the work has been accepted, subject to any matters 

noted on the form being attended to. 

23.0 ATTACHMENTS / APPENDICES: 

23.1 APPENDIX I -LIST OF CODES, STANDARDS & STATUTORY 

REGULATIONS 

23.2 APPENDIX II

Jacobs 




23.1 APPENDIX I - LIST OF CODES, STANDARDS & STATUTORY 

REGULATIONS (Refer Section 1.2) 

IS 732 : Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installations. 

IS 1646 : Code of Practice for Fire Safety of Buildings (General) 

Electrical Installation. 

IS 3043 : Code of Practice for Earthing. 

IS 2309 : Code of Practice for the Protection of Buildings & Allied 

Structures against Lightning. 

IS 7689 : Guide for control of undesirable static electricity. 

IS 10028 Part 1 to 3 : Code of Practice for Selection, Installation & Maintenance 

of Transformers. 

IS 900 : Code of Practice for Installation & Maintenance of 

Induction Motors. 

IS 1255 : Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance of 

Power cables upto and including 33 KV rating. 

IS 10118 Parts 1 to 4 : Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and 

Maintenance of Switch gear and Control gear. 

IS 5571 : Guide for Selection of Electrical Equipment for Hazardous 

Areas. 

IS 5572 : Classification of Hazardous Areas(other than mines) 

having flammable gases and vapours for Electrical 

Installation. 

IS 5216 Parts 1 & 2 : Guide for Safety Procedure & Practice in Electrical work. 

IS 5479 : Solders for Jointing Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys. 

IS 335 : New Insulating oils 

IS 9537 Parts 1 to 4 : Conduits for electrical Installation 

- Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings - 

The Institution of Electrical Engineers. 

- Indian Electricity Rules 

- Fire Insurance Regulations 

- Factory Act & Regulations 

- National Building Code ( ISI Publication) 

- National Electrical Code ( ISI Publication) 

- Tariff Advisory Committee regulation

Jacobs 




23.2 APPENDIX II 

1.0 TESTING AND ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS OF CABLE INSTALLATIONS 

1.1 INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST ON NEWLY INSTALLED CABLES BEFORE 

JOINTING 

All new cables should be tested for insulation resistance before jointing. After satisfactory 

results are obtained cable jointing and termination work should commence. It should be 

noted here that insulation resistance test gives only approximate insulation resistance and 

the test is meant to reveal gross insulation fault(s). A fairly low insulation resistance 

reading compared to the values obtained at factory testing should not be a cause of worry 

since the insulation resistance varies greatly with parameters such as length and 

temperature. This is particularly more pronounced in the case of PVC cables. The voltage 

rating of the insulation resistance tester for cables of different voltage grades should be 

chosen from the following table: 

Voltage Grade of Cable Voltage Rating of IR Tester 

1.1 kV 500 V 

3.3 kV 1000 V 

6.6 kV 1000 V 

11 kV 1000 V 

22 kV 2.5 kV ( see Note) 

33 kV 2.5 kV ( see Note) 

NOTE - For long feeders, motorized insulation resistance tester should be used. 

1.1.1 More accurate insulation resistance values can be measured only by a portable resistance 

measuring bridge. 

1.2 TEST RESULT OF COMPLETED CABLE – INSTALLATION 

The test of completed installation may be carried out and entered into record book for 

comparison purposes during service life of cable installation and during fault location. 

1.2.1 Insulation Resistance 

Insulation resistance is measured by a suitable bridge. In non-screened cables, the 

insulation resistance of each core is measured against all the other cores and armour / 

metal sheath connected to earth. With screened construction the insulation of each core is 

measured against all the other cores and the metal screen connected to earth. 

1.2.2 Conductor Resistance (dc) 

1.2.2a The resistance of conductor is measured by a suitable bridge. For this purpose conductors 

at other end are looped together with connecting bond of at least same effective electrical 

cross - section as conductor. The contact resistance is kept to a minimum by proper 

clamped or bolted connections. With properly installed and jointed cables, values thus 

measured and corrected to 20°C, are in general agreement with values given in test 

certificates.

Jacobs 




1.2.2b The measured loop resistance is converted to ohms per km per conductor as : 

Where 

R 

Rt = ------ 

2 L 

R = measured loop resistance in ohms at temperature, t°C; 

Rt = measured resistance per conductor at t°C in ohms; and 

L = length of cable (not the loop) in km. 

The ambient temperature at the time of measurement to be recorded and the 

conductor resistance to be corrected to 20°C by the following formula: 

Rt 

R20 = ----------------- 

(1+a) (t-20) 

ohm/km at 20°C. 

Where 

R20 = conductor resistance at 20°C in ohm / km, 

t = ambient temperature during measurement (in 

°C) 

and 

a = temperature coefficient of resistance 

(3.93 x 10.3 ohms / °C for aluminium). 

1.2.3 Capacitance 

1.2.3.1 For unscreened cables, capacitance is measured for one conductor against others and 

metal sheath / armour connected to earth. In case of screened cable it is measured 

between conductor and screen. Capacitance bridge is used for this purpose. The 

measurement may be carried in case of cables above 11 KV; alternatively values given 

in test certificate are considered sufficient. 

1.2.4 High Voltage Test 

1.2.4a Cables after jointing and terminating are subjected to dc high voltage test. The 

recommended values of test voltages are given in Table 6. The leakage current shall 

also be measured and recorded for future reference.

Jacobs 




TABLE 6 DC TEST VOLTAGES AFTER INSTALLATION ( BEFORE 

COMMISSIONING) 

RATED 

VOLTAGE 

TEST VOLTAGE BETWEEN DURATION 

OF CABLE 

U./ U Any Conductor and 

Metallic Sheath / 

Screen / Armour 

Conductor to Conductor 

(For Unscreened 

Cables) 

KV KV KV Minutes 

( 1 ) ( 2 ) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) 

0.65/1.1 3 3 5 

1.9 / 3.3 5 9 5 

3.3 / 3.3 9 9 5 

3.8 / 6.6 10.5 18 5 

6.6 / 6.6 18 18 5 

6.35 / 11 18 30 5 

11/11 30 30 5 

12.7 / 22 37.5 - 5 

19 / 33 60 - 5 

1.2.4b Generally dc test should be preferred as test equipment required is compact, easily 

portable and power requirements are low. 

1.2.4c The cable cores must be discharged on completion of dc high voltage test and cable 

should be kept earthed until it is put into service. 

1.2.4d DC test voltage for old cables is 1.5 times voltage or less depending on the age of 

cables, repair work or nature of jointing work carried out, etc. In any case, the test 

voltage should not be less than the rated voltage. Test voltage in these cases should be 

determined by the Engineer - in - charge of the work. 

1.2.4e It may be noted that frequent high voltage tests on cable installations should not be 

carried out. This test should be carried only when essential. During the high voltage 

test, all other electrical equipment related to the cable installation, such as switches, 

instrument transformers, bus bars, etc., must be earthed and adequate clearance 

should be maintained from the other equipment and framework to prevent flashovers. 

1.2.4f In each test, the metallic sheath / screen / armour should be connected, to earth. 

2.0 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN 

2.1 On completion of laying, terminating and jointing of the cables, a plan should be 

prepared, which should contain the following details of the installation:

Jacobs 




a) Types of cables, cross - section area, rated voltage. Details of construction, 

cable number and drum number; 

b) Year and month of laying; 

c) Actual length between joint - to - joint or ends; 

d) Location of cables and joints in relation to certain fixed reference points, for 

example, buildings, hydrant, boundary stones, etc; 

e) Name of the jointer who carried the jointing work; 

f) Date of making joint; and 

g) Results of original electrical measurements and testing on cable installation 

2.2 All subsequent changes in the cable plan should also be entered.

QTY 

PAGE 1 OF 3 



REMARKS 



1 Lighting Fittings with Lamp: - 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following light fittings 

along with the luminaire 




1.2 Lighting Fittings suitable for Zone-1 Nos. 14 


Similar To Stahl Cat No EXLUX 6000 

1.3 Industrial Corrosion proof Tube Light Lighting Fittings with Powder Nos. 14 

reflector type Suitable for 1 x 40 W Fluorescent lamp 

Similar To CGL Cat No IPFC14HSB 



Similar To CGL Cat No CRFG24HSB 



Similar To CGL Cat No CRFA14HSB 




1.7 DC lighting fixture with incandescent lamp suitable for 110V DC 

a) Recessed Mounting Nos. 7 

b) Surface mounting, Flame proof type Nos. 1 

1.8 Street Lighting fixture suitable for bracket mounting for building 

periphery lighting suitable for 1x 40W Fluorscent Lamp Nos. 8 

2 Power Panel (PP) 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following power 

panels 

2.1 100A TPN SFU incoming and 2 Nos. 63A TPN SFU Nos. 1 

+ 2 Nos 32A TPN SFU outgoings. 

2.2 32A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 4P 100 mA ELCB and Nos. 1 

3 x 4 nos 16A SPN MCB outgoings 

3 Lighting Panel (LP) 

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of following Lighting 

panels 

3.1 Normal Lighting Panel Nos. 1 

63 A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 100mA ELCB + 3 x 8 nos 10A SPN 

MCB outgoings inclusive of two circuits controlled through timer 

3.2 Emergency Lighting Panel 

32 A 4P MCB incoming, 3 x 32A 100mA ELCB Nos. 1 

+ 3 x 3nos 10A SPN MCB outgoings. 

3.3 DC Critical Lighting Panel 

32 A DP incoming and 6 Nos. 10A DP outgoings. Nos. 1 

4 Cables 

4.1 Supply, laying, testing and commissioning 650/1100V, PVC insulated, 

copper conductor armoured cables of the following sizes- 

ANNEXURE-I 



4.1.1 4C X 2.5 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 180 

4.1.2 4C X 10 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 20 

4.1.3 4C X 16 mm 2 , YWY Mtrs. 20 

PRICE

ANNEXURE-I 



QTY 

PAGE 2 OF 3 



REMARKS 


5 Cable Termination 

Supply, installation, connections & termination of following cables using 

industrial (Double compression) , nickel plated brass glands with PVC 

hoods and heavy duty tinned copper lugs (crimping type ) as 

given below 

650/1100V, PVC insulated, copper / aluminium conductor armoured 

cables of the following sizes- 

5.1.1 4C X 2.5 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 20 

5.1.2 4C X 10 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 2 

5.1.3 4C X 16 mm 2 , YWY Nos. 2 




6 Switches And Switch Socket Outlets 

6.1 Industrial Metal clad 415 V, 63 A, TPN & E (3P+N+E),interlocked switch Nos. 1 

welding socket outlet. 

6.2 Industrial type recessed mounting 240V, 20 A, SPN MCB switch Nos. 1 

socket outlet having scraping earth facility. 

6.3 6/16A, 240 V Commercial type switch socket outlet switch box Nos. 35 

suitable for recess mounting. 

6.4 Commercial decorative switch boxes comprising 6/16 A, 240 V single 

phase toggle switches suitable for recess mounting. 




7 Supply of Point Wiring 

Supply of point wiring using concealed/surface mounted PVC conduits 

for Lighting and receptacles 

7.1 Full Point for normal lighting nos 16 

7.2 Full Point for AC emergency lighting nos 5 

7.3 Full Point for DC emergency lighting nos 3 

7.4 Full Point for 6/16A socket outlet nos 5 

7.5 Full Point for 20A socket outlet nos 1 

7.6 Half Point for normal lighting nos 120 

7.7 Half Point for AC emergency lighting nos 30 

7.8 Half Point for DC emergency lighting nos 6 

7.9 Half Point for 6/16A socket outlet nos 30 

7.10 Half Point for 20A socket outlet nos 1 

8 Stuctural Steel 

Supply, fabrication & erection of items fabricated from structural kgs 30 

steel, for various items like supports for panels, 

distribution- board & other minor structures including epoxy 

painting for fabricated work. Paint shall be two coats of red 

epoxy oxide and two coats of final epoxy paint. 

9 Lightining Protection 

Supply of lightning protection finials & down conductors 

with the necessary hardware including GI pipe supports, clamps etc. 


9.2 32 X 6 mm GI conductor for lightning down conductors and Mtrs. 350 

roof conductors 

PRICE

ANNEXURE-I 



QTY 

PAGE 3 OF 3 



REMARKS 



Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of GI Pipe Earthing pit with pipe electrode with 

type earth electrode of following size having with 2 nos. G.I. necessary accessories and hardwire 

main earth conductor test link , in Brick chamber as per IS as per Drg . 18-3188-99-00-E.01-0053-A3 






RCC covers. 

10.1 100 mm dia, 3.0 Mtr long G.I. Perforated Pipe Electrode. Nos. 10 

11 Earth Strips 

Supply & installation of GI earthing strip along the cable trenches / trays 

or fixing to walls or structures or buried individually in paved 

/ unpaved areas including minor civil work like chipping of paved 

surface, finishing after laying grounding loop etc, brazing at joints, 

providing anticorrosive paint for brazed portion, clamping & 

necessary hardware for connection , excavation & refilling etc. 

including provision for risers at places as per approved drgs. & 

directions of the site in charge. 

11.1 75 X 10 mm GI strip Mtrs. 150 For Main Earth Loop 




11.5 25 X 6 mm GI strip Mtrs. 100 For Inside The Building 

12 Earth Bus 

Supply & installation of GI earth bus complete with hardware the 

following sizes. 

12.1 300 x 75 x 8 mm Thk. Nos. 3 

13 Exhaust Fans 

13.1 Industrial heavy duty type 240 V, 1400 rpm, 300 mm sweep 

exhaust fan following with frame Nos. 6 

13.2 Explosion proof heavy duty type 240 V, 1400 rpm, 300 mm sweep 

exhaust fan with frame Nos. 1 

14 Excavation And Backfilling 

Excavation, backfilling and compaction for earth strip buried M 3 

directly in the ground. 






16 Unit Rates per day for supply of services of contractor's skilled, 

unskilled personnel based on eight hours a day. 

16.1 Engineer Rs. 

16.2 Supervisor Rs. 

16.3 Foreman Rs. 

16.4 Electrician Rs. 

16.5 Wireman Rs. 

16.6 Fitter Rs. 

16.7 Helper Rs. 

27 

PRICE


SUPPLY 

INSTALLATION 

REMARKS 



1 Lightning Protection 

Supply of lightning protection finials & 

down conductors with the necessary hardware 

including GI pipe supports, clamps etc. 


1.2 32 X 6 mm GI conductor for lightning down conductors Mtrs. 550 


QTY 

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of GI Pipe Earthing pit with pipe electrode with necessary 

type earth electrode of following size having with 2 nos. G.I. accessories and hardwire as per Drg . 

main earth conductor test link , in Brick chamber as per IS 18-3188-99-00-E.01-0053-A3 






RCC covers. 

2.1 100 mm dia, 3.0 Mtr long G.I. Perforated Pipe Electrode. Nos 6 

RCC covers. 


ANNEXURE-II 

SCHEDULE OF QUANTITY FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS ( LOBS SUBSTATION BUILDING) 






PRICE 

PAGE 1 OF 1

Annexure – III 

Document No. Title 

LIST OF STANDARD DRAWINGS – 

ELECTRICAL - SRR/OPFR & SS BLDG 

LOBS UPGRADATION 

HPCL – MUMBAI 

18-3188-99-00-E.01-0052-A3 Miscellaneous Details - Power 

18-3188-99-00-E.01-0053-A3 Miscellaneous Details - Earthing 

18-3188-99-00-E.01-0054-A3 Miscellaneous Details - Lighting 

Page 1 of 1 

18-3188-99-00-E.01-0113-A4 Single Line Diagram Lighting Distribution Board – Sh 1 to 6 of 7

L I G H T I N G 

M I S C E L L A N E O U S D E T A I L S

tender document index - Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?